Journalist 3 & 2

DOCUMENT RESUME

ED 101 124 CE 002 870

TITLE Journalist 3 & 2; Naval Training Command Rate Training Manual. INSTITUTION Naval Training Publications Detachment, Washington, D.C. REPORT NO NAVTRA 10294-C PUB DATE 73 NOTE 522p. AVAILABLE FROM Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20406 (Stock No. 0502-051-4710)

EDRS PRICE MF-$0.92 HC-$26.02 PLUS POSTAGE DESCRIPTORS *Journalism; *Manl:als;,*Military Personnel; *Military Training; Photography; Radio;' Television; Writing Skills

ABSTRACT The training manual is designed to assist naval personnel in preparing for advancement to the rates ofJournalist Third and Second Class, An outline of the job and responsibilities of a Navy journalist is followed by ade--ription of the mission and organization of Navy Public Affairs. AL introduction to'the media available to the Navy journalist aLd ye*hering anddisseminating Navy news complete the introductory-portionof the manual. The remainder of the document deals with the following specifictopics: basic newswriting; writing different types of stories (feature, speech, sports, accident, advance, followip, and rewrite);writing for magazines; copy editing; libel, right of privacy, and copyright;_ newspaper and wire service operations; anintroduction to photography; the camera; basic photojournalism;internal public affairs publication; writing headlines and cutlines; electronic media; printing, layout, and makeup; the electronic media; preparing radio material; preparing television material; American Forcesradio and television; community relations; home town news; thepublic affairs office; and a sketch of U. S. Naval history. A glossary, bibliography, Navy abbreviations, and Navy rating insignia by groups, are appended. (NH) U E. DEPARTMENT OFNIALTI EDUCATION & WELFARE NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEENREPRO DUCED EXACTLY AS RECEIVEDFROM THE PERSON OR ORGANIZATIONORIGIN ATING IT POINTS OF VIEW OROPINIONS STATED JO NOT NECESSARILYREPRE SENT OFFICIAL NATIONAL INSTITUtE OF EDUCATION POSITION OR POLICY

.1 Zsa ,...

4 id1° p A."4--Whiln *Mt

J U L!. BEST COPYAARABLE

A PREFACE

This training manual is designed to assist naval personnel in preparingfor advancement to the rates of Journalist Third Class and Journalist Second Class.

The manual was prepared by the Naval Training Publications Detachment,Washington, D.C., for the Chief of Naval Training. Technical Assistance was provided by variousdivisions within the Office of the Chief of Information, Department of the Navy, Washington, D.C.;the Defense Information School, Fort Benjamin Harrison, Indianapolis, Indiana; the Fleet HomeTown News Center, Great Lakes, Illinois; The Naval Photographic Center, Washington, D.C; TheAmerican Forces Radio and Television Service, Washington, D.C.; and many public affairs personnel servingashore and afloat.

Original edition 1953

Revised 1960

Revised 1969

Revised 1973 Stock Ordering No 0502-051-4710 Published by

NAVAL TRAINING COMMAND

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C.: 1973

3 THE UNITED STATES NAVY

GUARDIAN OF OUR COUNTRY The United States Navy is responsible for maintaining control of the sea and is a ready force on watch at home and overseas, capable of strong action to preserve the peace or of instant offensive action to win in war. It is upon the maintenance of this control that our country's glorious future depends; the United States Navy exists to make it so.

WE SERVE WITH HONOR Tradition. valor, and victory are the Navy's heritage from the past. To these may be added dedication, discipline, and vigilance as the watchwords of the present and the future, At home or on distant stations we serve with pride, confident inthe respect of our country, cur shipmates, and our families.

Our responsibilities sober us; our adversities strengthen us.

Service to God and Country is our special privilege. We serve with honor.

THE FUTURE OF THE NAVY The Navy will always employ new weapons, new techniques, and greater power to protect and defend the United States on the sea, under the sea, and in the air. Now and in the future, control of the sea gives the United States her greatest advantage for the maintenance of peace and for victory in war. Mobility, surprise, dispersal, and offensive power are the keynotes of the new Navy.The roots of the Navy lie in a strong belief in the future, in continued dedication to our tasks, and in reflection on our heritage from the past. Never have our opportunities and our responsibilities been greater.

ii CONTENTS

CHAPTER Page

1. The Navy Journalist 1

2. Mission and Organization of Navy Public Affairs 13

3, The Media 30

4. Gathering and Disseminating Navy News 39

5. Basic Newswriting 53

6. Feature, Speech, Sports, and Accident Stories 76

7. Advance Stories, Followups, and Rewrites 97

8. Writing for Magazines 106

9, Copy Editing 117

10. Libel, Right of Privacy, and Copyright 142

11. Newspaper and Wire Service Operations 150

12. Introduction to Photography 157

13, The Camera 190 14. Basic Photojournalism ..210 15, Internal Public Affairs Publications 235

16. Writing Headlines and Cutlines qi 260

17. Printing, Layout, and Makeup 275

18. The Electronic Media 311

19. Preparing Radio Material 321

20. Preparing Television Material 333 349 21. The American Forces Radio andTelevision Service 353 22. Community Relations 367 23. Home Town News 384 24. The Public Affairs Office 412 25. A sketch of U.S. Naval History(1775-1973)

APPENDIX 441 Glossary 486 II Bibliography 489 III Navy Aircraft and ShipAbbreviations 494 IV Navy Rating Insignia by Groups

512 INDEX

Iv CHAPTER t

THE NAVY JOURNALIST

Creative, prudent, versatile, personablethese Navy only if the people know and understand are just a few of the colors needed to paint a the importance of the Navy and support it. verbal picture of today's Navy Journalist. The Navy, like the other services, depends on Today, more than ever before, the Navy is the American people for the four key tools of its striving to ensure each and every Navyman and trademeti, money, materials, and authority to his family a better way ;of life. In achieving this carry out its mission. better way of life, the role of the Navy Journal- As a Navy Journalist, your main function will ist is .one of building high Navy morale by keep- be to make the facts rbout your Navy available ing the internal and external public informed of to the Navy's three main publicsthe people' at the developments, accomplishments, and poli- your ship or station, Navy people in general, and cies of the Navy. the American people as a whole. To the young man or woman choosing a Responsibility for informing the Navy's pub- career pattern for one tour or thirty years, the lics belongs to your commanding officer. Your Journalist rating offers endless avenues for an responsibility is to assist his public affairs officer imaginative, yet mature, thinker. in accomplishing the Navy's and the command's Many of the duties and responsibilities of the public affairs goals. Journalist rating rank among America's favorite A JO's job includes: hobbies and pastimes, such as photography, writing, and broadcasting. The Navy Journalist Writing Navy news releases and feature arti- learns and practices a distinguished profession cles from personal interviews, examination of and becomes .an official representative of the messages, or the witnessing of events. Navy in public affairs matters. The first men to work full time in the field of Taking and processing news photographs and Navy journalismas enlistedspecialists were writing ratlines. Naval Reserve personnel selected during the early years of World War 11. They were desig- Preparing material for commercial radio and nated Specialist X (Naval Correspondents). In television ,ise. 1948, under a major overhaul affecting almost every enlisted rating, the Journalist (JO) rating Serving on thestaff of American Forces was established. Radio/Television Stations as an interviewer or announcer, (if requisites for voice quality, public YOUR MAJOR RESPONSIBILITIES speaking, presence, and sense of timing are met). AND FUNCTION Preparing histories of ships and stations and In our democratic society, government de- personnel biographies. pends on the consent of the governed. This important American principle means that, in the Rewriting and localizing news releasesre- long run, the government does only what the ceived from Washington and other sources people want, it to do. Therefore, we can have a throughout the Naval Establishment.

1 7 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Coordinating special events. trusted executive of the public affairs officer. You will find yourself performing many of the Editing material and preparing copy, art, and functions of a public affairs officer, particularly layouts for the printing of Navy publications, in a command where other responsibilities of such as ship and station newspapers, command collateral-duty public affairs officer allow the information brochures, welcome aboard bro- officer only minimum time for public affairs chures,cruise books, and information pam- work. Therefore you must know the theory and phlets. practice of public affairs policy. This manual will not make you a writer or public affairs Assisting in the preparation of speeches and specialist, but it can help.It contains many other presentations on naval topics. rules, and if you learn them and follow them, you will be well on your way.Remember, there Preparing material on individual Navymen is a difference in being able to pass a test on the for release to the Navy's Home Town News Pro- rules and in being able to follow them automat- gram. ically. This manual is based on qualifications con- Preparing official correspondence, directives, tained in Change #1 of June 1972, to the Man- and performing other administrative functions in ual of Qualifications for Advancement, NAV- a public affairs office. PERS 18068-C. Changes occurring after that date are not reflected in this text. As you can see, to perform the above duties The remainder of this chapter gives informa- well, the Navy Journalist must master verbal, tion on requirements and procedures for ad- oral, and visual communication techniques. vancement in rating, and references that will The Navy JO must be a constant reader, al- help you both in working for advancement and ways abreast with current events in and outof in performing your duties as a Journalist. This the Navy. He must know enough about the Navy chapter also includes information on how to to interpret and translate it intelligently to the make the best use of Rate Training Manuals. civilian public. (A basic knowledge of naval his- Study this chapter carefully before beginning tory is a requirement for advancement to J03.) your study of the remainder of this training In the performance of their duties, JO's are manual. expected to smooth-type their own material. Subsequent chapters cover the professional Therefore, you must be a qualified typist, meet- knowledge and technical skills required of the ing the established standards for speed and accu- Navy Journalist. racy. However, this manual contains notraining Photographs, diagrams, and illustrations of material on typing. various kinds have been placed throughout this Finally, a JO must have the ability to learn, text to assist you in learning, recognizing, and and, your main learning objective should be retaining the material presented. learning to write. You must be better than aver- If in the course of studying this manual, you age in your use ofEnglish. You must learn to should encounter unfamiliar words or terms write quickly, plainly, and accurately. Youraim (which are not immediately explained), refer to is to turn out news copy that can be used by a Appendix I, which gives a glossary of Navy Pub- newspaper or radio/TV stationwith a minimal lic Affairs, newspaper, radio/TV, printing, and need for editing or rewriting. photographic terminology. The major areas in which you will be expected to develop knowledge ;d skills include: newswriting and editing, layout and makeup of navy publications and aknowledge of how they MILITARY REQUIREMENTS are printed, radio andtelevision, photography, and administration. In studying for advancement in the Journalist As aJournalistprogressesinexperience, rating, as in any other rating, your first consider- maturity, and service seniority, he becomes the ation is your responsibilities as a military man, 2 Chapter 1THE NAVY JOURNALIST Military requirements are different in charac- so forth, good appearance is more necessary ter for a petty officer than you have experienced than in some other jobs in the Navy. Always give for previous advancement. Their' emphasis has attention to grooming and be sure every item of changed from knowing how to do certain things your uniform is as it should be. as an individualsuchaspaintingor knot tyingto directing and supervising operations performed by others. You still are required to VOICE learn some new individual operations for your military requirements, but you are now entering Voice and manner of speaking are important. the field of MILITARY LEADERSHIP. Your re- You should avoid an overly loud voice, but like- sponsibility for others increases as you ascend wise, you should avoid speaking too low or in- the rating ladder. distinctly. Localisms of vocabulary or accent Successful leadership at all levels is based on may be merely pleasant marks of individuality, personal example and moral responsibility. As or they may be hindrances because they make you prepare for advancement to J03 and later the speaker hard to understand. If you have con- J02, your responsibilities in the naval leadership spicuous speech habits of this sort, you should program will increase just as the application of attempt to correct them. Attention to pronunci- leadership to the duties of your rating. ation of words is always worth while. Your most important military duties are those performed during general quarters aboard ship. You may be assigned as a phone talker, which MILITARY BEARING means that you will have an important responsi- bilityin maintaining communications within .All petty officers have an obligation to con- your ship during battle. More often, however, duct themselves with dignity and in such manner yt,u will be assigned as a surface or air plotter in as to reflect credit on the naval service. Dignity the ship's combat information center, keeping exists only where the individual has a proper an up-to-date picture of how battle conditions sense of his own worth and of the worthiness of are progressing. his cause. The person who possesses true dignity will also respect the dignity of others. Military bearing is dignity within military relationships. PERSONAL TRAITS It exists when the individual is proud of his military organization and of his part in it. He re- Besides knowledge of the subject matter and spects his seniors and is guided by the example the capacity to perform his tasks well, the Jour- of those he admires most among them. He also nalistneeds certainpersonalcharacteristics. respects his juniors and tries to provide an ex- Some are general characteristics that help ensure ample they will be proud to follow. Whether he is success in any rating, but others are specially squaring his hat, rendering a salute, carrying on necessary in the public affairs field. Most of the work of his office, or going on liberty, his these are traits that can be developed and im- manner says that he is proud of the Navy and is proved. Their importance will become more evi- doing his best to make 'the Navy proud of him. dent as you progress through this manual.

COURTESY APPEARANCE The qualifications for advancement don't list Good personal appearance is especially impor-courtesy as a requirement, but they imply it. tant to the Journalist. Most of your work willbeMost situations require a certain minimum of relatively clean, so it is possible to work hardmanners, and unless we display that minimum it d still look neat. Sincethe Journalist's dutieswe are in trouble. Courtesy goes far beyond pace him in a position to meetvisitors, escortthat. It is in fact totally different in character, 4.ewsmen, interview VIPs, act as tourguide, andbecause courtesy comes from within and is a

3 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 voluntary expression of respect for others' rights San Diego, California. Journalists are also used and feelings. Throughout this manual, it is em- extensively atthe Fleet Home Town News phasized how your job as a Journalist involves Center in Great Lakes, Illinois, and in the Office you with others. More than any other citing in of Information in Washington, D.C. the Navy, you will be associated with people, The American Forces Radio/TV Service mostly people in the civilian domain. Courtesy makes wide use of the JO's talents in such places on your part will smooth the way not only for as Guam, Alaska, Iceland, and Cuba. you but for your command, your seniors, and Carriers and cruisers carry Journalists as part the people who work for you of the ship's company. E4, E5, and E6 personnel may be assigned full-time duties as editors or staff members of the ship's newspaper or other PERSONALITY internal publications such as familygrams and cruise books. They also serve as members of the A pleasing personality is a must in the journal- ship's closed-circuit radio or television team. ist field. You must be able to get along with Of course, there are other billets for the JO in your shipmates, because their cooperation is the Navy, but those mentioned are the major necessary before you can carry out your duties. ones to which he may be assigned. A Journalist Always strive to establish a good name for the should never have to be concerned about becom- Journalist. When you have the confidence of ing "stale" due to lack of duty assignments at your shipmates, your job will be 100 percent which he may work. Thae are numerous possi- easier. bilities and an equally varied listing of billet One personal trait that is necessary for Navy types. Journalists, and of all petty officers, is their con- sciousness that they are, first of all, fighting men who have made a solemn promise to put the NECs interest of their country above personal interests. When you finish studying this chapter you In addition to the basic Journalist rating may want to review your obligationsunder the which this manila' dec.:Jibes and helps qualify Code of Conduct for members of the Armed you for, the Manual of Navy EnlistedClassifica- Forces. The Code is discussed in some detail in tions, NAVPERS 15105, provides for three Basic Military Requirements, NAVTRA secondary specialties within this field. These 10054-D. specialties are known as Navy Enlisted Classifi- cation Codes (NECs), which reflectspecial knowledge and skills that identify personnel and TYPES OF BILLETS requirements when the rating structure is insufficient by itself for personnel management pur- Journalists serve in a wide variety of billets poses. The three in your field are JO-3221 both ashore and afloat. (Radio-TV Specialist), PH-8148 (Documentary/ Large staffs ashore, such as the Commanders News Still Photographer) and PH-8146 (Motion in Chief of the Atlantic and Pacific Fleets and Picture Script Writer). the fleet type commanders, have billets for JO3s JOs may qualify for the 3221 NEC in two and JO2s. ways: by successfully completing the broad- Seagoing staffs like Commander FIRST and caster course at the Defense Information School SEVENTH Fleets, who use cruisers as flagships, or by completing one year at a designated have JOs assigned at the E4/E5 level. American Forces Radio or Television Station. Major overseas naval activitiesinSpain, The 8148 NEC is gained by completing the Navy Hawaii, Japan, Puerto Rico, and the Philip- sponsored photo-journalism course at Syracuse pines, to mention but a fewhave public af- University. A Journalist is eligible for the NEC fairs staffs with JOs assigned. Or, you might be 8146 after graduating from the one-year course attached to a stateside base such as the Naval Air in motion picture script writing at tie University Station, Pensacola, Florida, or the Naval Station, of Southern California.

410 Chapter 1THE NAVY JOURNALIST

ADVANCEMENT more tietailed view of the requirements for advancement of active duty personnel; figure 1-2 Some of the rewards of advancement in rate gives this information for inactive duty person- are easy to see. You get more pay. Your job nel. assignments become more interesting and more Remember thatthe qualificationsforad- challenging. You are regarded with greater re- vancement can change. Check with your division spect by officers and enlisted personnel. You officer or training officer to be sure that you enjoy the satisfaction of getting ahead in your know the most recent qualifications. chosen Navy career. Advancement in rate is not automatic. Even But the advantages of advancing in rate are though you have met all the requirements, in- not yours alone. The Navy also profits. Highly cluding passing the written examinations, you trained personnel are essential to the functioning may not be able to "sew on the crow" or "add a of the Navy. By each advancement in rate, you- stripe." The number of men in each rate and increase your value to the Navy in two ways. rating is controlled on a Navy-wide basis. There- First, you become more valuable as a specialist fore, the number of men that may be advanced in your own rating. And second, you become is limited by the number of vacancies that exist. more valuable as a person who can train others When the number of men passing the examina- and thus make far-reaching contributions to the tion exceeds the number of vacancies, some entire Navy. system must be used to determine which men may be advanced and which may not. The system used is the "final multiple" and is a com- HOW TO QUALIFY FOR bination of three types of advancement systems. ADVANCEMENT. Merit rating system What must you do to qualify for advancement Personnel testing system in rate? The requirements may change from time Longevity, or seniority, system to time, but usually you must: Have the required amount of time in your The Navy's system provides credit for perfor- present pay grade. mance, knowledge, and seniority, and, while it Complete the required military and occupa- cannot guarantee that any one person will be tional training courses specified in theBibliog- advanced, it does guarantee that all men within a raphy for Advancement Study,NAVTRA particular rating will have equal advancement 10052. opportunity. Demonstrate ycur ability to perform all the The following factors are considered in com- PRACTICAL requirements and PERFOR- puting the final multiple: MANCE tests as prescribed in the Manualof Qualifications forAdvancement, NAVPERS POINTS FACTOR WEIGHT 18068. Be recommended by your commanding of- 80 (MAX)Examination Score 40% ficer after the petty officers and officers super- 50 (MAX)Performance (Average of vising your work have indicated that they con- marks received 25% sider you capapble of performing the duties of 20 (MAX)Total Active Service the next higher rate. (1 per yr) 10% Demonstrate your KNOWLEDGE by passing 20 (MAX)Time in Present Grade written examinations on the occupational and (2 per yr) 10% military qualification standards for advancement 15 (MAX)Medals and Awards 7.5% in rate as prescribed in NAVPERS 15 (MAX)PNA (Maximumper exam cycle) 7.5% Some of these general requirements may be modified in certain ways. Figure1-1 gives a 200 (MAX POSSIBLE) 100% AVAILABLE BESTCOPY JOURNALIST 3 & 2

# E3 #f E4 t E5 tE6 tE7 4E8 REQUIREMENTS*El to E2E2 to Eto E4 to £5 to E6 to E7 to E8 to E9 4 mo:11. 36 MOB. service- as ES. Or 8 years 8 mos.6 mos.12 mos.24 mos. total 36 mos.24 mos. SERVICE comple- as F-3.as E-4.as E-5. tion of as E-2. enlistedas E-7.as E-8, service.8 of 1110 of 13 Recruit years years Training;.:::::.:.::. total total Recruit.:.:::::::::::ii.::.Class A .'''''''"'''::::::::::::. sari service Training. ;;;;;;;;;;;:forPR3 '''::::::::4.4.0.4.4...4.4. must bemust be (C.O. 1;;;;;;;;;:iiiillDT3, ...... :...... Class Benlisted.enlisted. may ad-ii:iiiiiiiii!iii;PT3, ..44.....' Ifor AGC :::::::::.::. 0 0 .* MUC SCHOOL vance up;;;;;i:i;i:i;i:iiAME 3, ...... to 10% iliiiii:iiiii;::;HM 3, MNC.t t %.:Iiii:iiiiiPN 3, - .4.66". of gradu- .. a .. 6 . 4044I *::::.FTB 3, ...... :::.:.::' ating ...... class.) *i:1:: :::::id: MT 3, . ..".....:... PRACTICAL Locally NavPers 1414/1, must be FACTORS prepared Record of Practical Factors, check- completed for E-3 and all PO advancements. offs. ,.....7.'.....7.W.V.'.'.7.W.W. o.6 ...... 'Specified ratings must complete " PERFORMANCE ...... :.:applicable performance tests be- TEST fore taking examinations. 4.t:i.a.a.,:,:i'aaz % ENLISTED As usedby CO Counts toward performancefactorcredit in ad- PERFORMANCE when approving vancement multiple. EVALUATION advancement. Locally See Navy-wide examinations required Navy-wide, EXAMINATIONS**prepared ' for all PO advancements. selection board. tests. below. Required for E-3 and all POadvancements Correspondence RATE TANUAL RAINING .. unless waived because of schoolcomple- courses and (INCLU if identical recommended MD-.... tion, but need not be repeated ING MILITARY course has already beencompleted. See reading. See REQUIREMENTS) . NavTra 10052 (current edition). NavTra 10052 (current edition). : Commanding Naval Examining Center AUTHORIZATION Officer officer's recommendation. * All advancements require commanding E-7, E-8, and E-9. 4 1 year obligated service requiredfor E-5, and E-6; 2 years for # Military leadership exam requiredfor E-4 and E-5. ** For E-2 to E-3, NAVEXAMCEN exams orlocally prepared tests may be used. if Waived for qualified EODpersonnel.

Figure 1-1.Active duty advancement requirements. DES COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 1THE NAVY JOURNALIST

REQUIREMENTS* (1 to (2 to (3 to (4 to (5 to (6 to r8 (9 E1 E3 E4 (5 E6 El `

36 mos.36 mos.24 mos. TOTAL TIME with with with 4 mos. mos. mos.12 mos.24 mos.total total total IN GRADE 8 yrs II yrs 13 yrs serviceserviceservice

TOTAL TRAINING DUTY IN GRADE t 14 days14 days14 days14 days28 days42 days42 days28 days

......

PERFORMANCE .:.: ..: :::. Specified ratings must complete applicable ::: TESTS performance tests before taking examination.

.,. .:.

DRILL Satisfactory participation asa member of a drill unit PARTICIPATION in accordance won BUPERSIIIST 5400.42 series.

PRACTICALFACTORS (INCLUDING MILITARY Record c; Practical Factors, NavPers 1414/1, must becompleted for all advancements. REQUIREM PITS I

RATE TRAINING MANUAL (INCLUDING Completion of applicable course orcourses must be entered MILITARY REQUIRE in service record. MOTS)

Standard Exam required for all PO advancements. Standard Exam, EXAMINATION Standard Exam Also pass Selection Board. Military Leatiership Exam for 14 and (5.

ComOfficermanding AUTHORIZATION Naval Exanilning Center

*Recommendation by commanding officer required for all advancements. f Active duty periods may be substituted for training duty.

Figure 1.2.Inactive duty advancement requirements. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

All of the above information (except the ex- PNA points will be awarded as follows: A amination "core and the PNA points) is sub- maximum of three points can be accrued each mitted to the Naval Examining Center with your examination cycle.Afterfiveexamination examination answer sheet. After grading, the ex- cycles, candidates will be eligible for the maxi- amination scores for those passing, are added to mum number of points (15). Subsequent to the other factors to arrive at the final multiple. complete implementation, each candidate's PNA A precedence list, which is based on final mul- factor will be computed based on the points re- tiples, is then prepared for each pay grade within ceived in the five most recent examinations com- eachrating. Advancement authorizations are peted in, out of the last six examinations. This then issued, beginning at the top of the list, for will allow candidates to miss one examination the number of men needed, to fill the existing and still be eligible for the maximum award. vacancies.

HOW TO PREPARE FOR PNA Factor ADVANCEMENT PNA points are comprised of two subfactors, What must you do to prepare for advance- Navy-wide examination score and performance ment in rate? You must study the qualifications mark standing. Individually, both subfactors are for advancement, work on the practical factors, weighted in relation to a member's standing study the required Rate Training Manuals, and among all those who participated in his specific study other material that is required for ad- examination rate for a given cycle. In the case of vancement in your rate. To prepare for advance- the performance mark standing subfactor, indi- ment, you will need to be familiar with (1) the vidual performance mark averages submitted to Quals Manual,(2) the Record of Practical Fac- the Naval Examining Center are used as the basis tors,(3)theBibliography for Advancement fordetermini'igthemember's performance Study,and (4) applicable rate training manuals. standing in relation to his contemporaries. For The following sections describe and give you those who pass examinations but are not ad- suggestions on how to use these publications vanced, additional points will be credited to when preparing for advancement. their final multiple for succeeding examinations in accordance with the schedule established for each subfactor as follows: TheQuals Manual

EXAMINATION SCORE POINTS TheManual of Qualifications for Advance- ment,NAVPERS 18068C (with changes), gives 70 through 80 1.5 the minimum occupational and military qualifi- 60 through 69 1.0 cation standards for advancement to each rate Passing through 59 .5 within each rating. This manual is usually called the"Quals Manual," and the qualifications themselves are often called "quals." The qualifi- PERFORMANCE MARK AVERAGE POINTS cation standards are of two general types: (1) military qualification standards and (2) occupa- Top 25 Percent 1.5 tional qualification standards. Upper 25 to 50 Percent 1.0 Lower 50 to 25 Percent .5 MILITARY STANDARDS are requirements Bottom 25 Percent .0 that apply to all ratings rather than to any one particular rating. Military requirements for ad- NOTE: Maximum of 3 multiple points per cycle. vancement to third class and second class petty Maximum of 15 multiple points after 5 officer rates deal with military conduct, naval exam cycles. organization, military justice, security, watch

8 14 Chapter 1THE NAVY JOURNALIST standing, and other subjects which are required The Quals Manual is kept current by means of of petty officers in all ratings. changes. The occupational. qualifications for your rating which are coveredin this training manual were current at the time the manual was OCCUPATIONAL STANDARDS are require- printed. By the time you are studying this man- ments that are directly related to the work of ual, however, the quals for your rating may have each rating. been changed. Never trust any set of quals until Both the military requirements and the occu- you have checked it against anUP-TO-DATE pational qualification standards are divided into copy in the Quals Manual. subject matter groups; then, within each subject matter group, they are divided into PRACTI- CAL FACTORS and KNOWLEDGE FACTORS. Record of Practical Factors Practical factors are things you must be able to DO. Knowledge factors are things you must Before you can take the servicewide examina- KNOW in order to perform the duties of your tion for advancement in rate, there must be an rating. entry in your service record to show that you In most subject matter areas, you will find have qualified in the practical factors of both both practical factor and knowledge factor qual- the military qualifications and the occupational ifications. In some subject matter areas, you qualifications. The RECORD OF PRACTICAL may find only one or theother. It is important FACTORS, NAVTRA 1414/1, is used to keep a to remember that there are some knowledge record of your practical factor qualifications. aspects to all practical factors, and some practi- This form is available for each rating. The form cal aspects to most knowledge factors. There- lists all practical factors, both military and occu- fore, even if the Qua ls Manual indicates that pational. As you demonstrate your ability to there are no knowledge factors for a given sub- perform each practicalfactor,appropriate ject matter area, you may still expect to find entries are made in the DATE and INITIALS examination questions dealing with the know- columns. ledge aspects of the practical factors listed in Changes are made periodically to the Bibliog- that subject matter area. raphy for Advancement Study and revised forms You arerequiredtopass a Navy-wide of NAVTRA 1414/1 are provided when neces- military/leadership examination for E-4 and E-5, sary. Extra space isallowed on the Record of as appropriate, before you take theoccupational Practical Factors for entering additional practi- examinations. The military/leadership examina- cal factors as they are published in changes to tions are administered on a schedule determined the Quals Manual. The Record of Practical Fac- by your commanding officer. Candidates are re- tors also provides space for recordingdemon- quired to pass the applicable military/leadership ,;trated proficiency in skills which are within the examination only once. Each of these examina- general scope of the rating but which are not tions consists of 100 questions based on infor- identifiedas minimum qualifications for ad- mation, contained in Military Requirements for vancement. PettyOfficers 3 and 2, NAVTRA 10056 Until completed, the NAVTRA 1414/1 is (current edition) and in other publications listed usually held by your division officer; after com- inthe Bibliography for Advancement Study, pletion, it is forwarded to the personnel office NAVTRA 10052 (current edition). for insertion in your service record. If you are The Navy-wide occupational examinations for transferred before qualifying in all practical fac- pay grades E-4 and E-5 will contain150 ques- tors, the incomplete form should beforwarded tions related to occupational areas of your rat- with your service record to your nextduty sta- ing. tion. You col save yourself a lot of troubleby If you are working for advancement to second making sure that this form is actually inserted in class, remember that you may be examined on your service recordbefore you are transferred: If third class qualifications as well as on second the form is not in your service record, you may class qualifications. be required to start all over again andrequalify 9

al 15' JOURNALIST 3 & 2 in the practical factors which have already been applicable to the rating. In the case of the JO checked off. rating, the appropriate school is the Information Specialist Course at the Defense Information School, Fort Benjamin Harrison, Indiana. The NAVTRA 10052 scope, prerequisites, and other details of this school may be found in U.S.'Navy Public A//airs Bibliography for Advancement Study,NAV- Regulations (SECNAV INST. 5720.XX). Descrip- TRA 10052 (current edition) is a very important tions of several other school programs avail- publication for anyone preparing for advance- able to Journalists also are contained in this ment in rate. This bibliography lists required and reference. recommended Rate Training Manuals and other Do not overlook the section of NAVTRA reference material to be used by personnel work- 10052 which liststhe required and recom- ing for advancement in rate. NAVTRA 10052 is mended references relating to the military quali- revised and issued once each year by the Chief fication standards for advancement. Personnel of of Naval Training. Each revised edition is identi- ALL ratings must complete the mandatory mili- fied by a letter following the NAVTRA number. tary requirements training course for the appro- When using this publication, be SURE that you priate rate level before they can be eligible to have the most recent edition. advance in rate. If extensive changes in qualifications occur in The references in NAVTRA 10052 which are any rating between the annual revisions of NAV- recommended but not mandatory should also be TRA 10052, a supplementary list of study mate- studied carefully. ALL references listed in NAV- rial may be issued in the form of a BUPERS TRA 10052 may be used as source material for Notice. When you are preparing for advance- the written examinations, at the appropriate rate ment, check to sec whether changes have been levels. made in the qualifications for your rating. If changes have been made, see if a WJi'ERS Notice has been issued to supplement NAVTRA 10052 for your rating. Training Manuals The required and recommended references are listed by rate level in NAVTRA 10052. If you There are two general types of training man- are working for advancement to third class, uals. Rate Training Manuals (such as this one) study the material that is listed for third class. If are prepared for most enlisted ratings. A Rate you are working for advancement to second Training Manual gives information that is di- class, study the material that is listed for second rectly related to the occupational qualifications class; but remember that you are also responsi- of one rating. Subject matter or basic training ble for the references listed at the third class manuals give information that applies to more level. than one rating. In using NAVTRA 10052, you will notice Training manuals are revised from time to that some Rate Training Manuals are marked time to keep them up to date technically. The with an asterisk (*). Any manual marked in this revision of a training manual is identified by a way is MANDATORYthat is, it must be com- letter following the NAVTRA number. You can pleted at the indicated rate level before you can tell whether any particular copy of a training be eligible to take the servicewide examination manual is the latest edition by checking the for advancement in rate. Each mandatory course NAVTRA number and the letter following this may be completed by (1) passing the appropri- number in the most recent edition of List of ate Nonredjent Career Course that is based on Training Manuals and Correspondence (Non- the man latorytraining manual; (2) passing resident Career) Courses,NAVTRA 10061 is locally prepared tests based on the information actually a catalog that lists all current training given inthe training manual; or (3) in some manuals and correspondence courses; you will cases, successfully completing an appropriate find this catalog useful in planning your study Navy Class "A" course or other military school program.) 10 16 Cha ter 1THE NAVY JOURAL

Rate Training Manuals are designed to help cover at one time will vary. If youknow the you prepare for advancement. Thefollowing subject well, or if the material is easy, you can suggestions may help you to make the best use of cover quite a lot at one time. Difficult or un- this manual and other Navy training publications familiar material will require more study time. when you are preparing for advancement. 6. In studying any one unitchapter, section, or subsectionwrite down the questions 1. Study the military qualifications and the that occur to you. Many people find it helpful occupational qualifications for your rating be- to make a written outline of the unit as they fore you study the manual,. and refer to the study, or at least to write down the most impor- quals frequently as you study. Remember, you tant ideas. are studying the training manual primarilyin 7. As you study, relate the information in order to meet these quals. the training manual to the knowledge you al- 2. Set up a regular study plan. It will prob- ready have. When you read about a process, a ably be easier for you to stick to a schedule if skill, or a situation, try to see how this informa- you can plan to study at the same timeeach tion ties in with your own past experience. day. If possible, schedule your studying for a 8. When you have finished studying a unit, time of day when you will not have too many take time out to see what you have learned. interruptions or distractions. Look back over your notes and questions. 3. Before you begin to study any part of the Maybe some of your questions have been an- training manual intensively, become familiar swered, but perhaps you still have some that ate with the entire book. Read the preface and the not answered. Without looking at the training table of contents. Check through the index. manual, write down the main ideas that you Look at the appendixes. Thumb through the have gotten from studying this unit. Don't just book without any particular plan, looking at the quote the book. If you can't give these ideas in illustrations and reading bits here and there as your own words, the chances are that youhave you see things that interest you. not really mastered the information. 4. Look at the training manual in mop de- 9. Use Nonresident Career Courses when- tail, to see how it is organized. Look at the table ever you can. The Career Courses are based on of contents again. Then, chapter by ch ,pter, Rate Training Manuals or on other appropriate read the introduction, the headings, and the. sub- texts. As mentioned before, completion of a headings. This will give you a prettyclear mandatory Rate Training Manual can be accom- picture of the scope and content of the bo3k. As plished by passing a Nonresident Career Course you look through the book in this w.y, ask based on the Rate Training Manual. You will yourself some questions: probably find it helpful to take other correspondence courses, as well as those based on manda- What do I need to learn about this? tory training courses. Taking a correspondence course helps you to master theinformation What do I already know about this"? given in the training manual and also helps you see how much you have learned. How is this information related t ) informa- 10. Think of your future as you study Rate tion given in other chapters? Training Manuals. You are working for advancement to third class or second class right now, How is this information related to the quali- but someday you will be working toward higher fications for advancement in rate? rates. Anything extra that you can learn now will help you both now and later. 5. When you have a general k ita of what is in the training manual and how it is organized, fill in the details by intensive srady. In each OTHER PUBLICATIONS study period, try to cover a con iplete unitit may be a chapter, a section of :3chapter, or a Besides training manuals, NAVTRA 10052 subsection. The amount of materiril that you can lists official publications on which you may be JOURNALIST 3 & 2 examined. You should not only study the sec- rating. The technical informati -n on camera op- tions required, but should become as familiar as erations required for a JO is contained in chap- possible with all publications you use. ters 12 and 13 of this manual. However, you One of the most useful things you can learn might report to a command having a particular about a subject is how to find out more about it. type of camera with which you are unfamiliar. No single publication can give you all the infor- You must the fore, resort to the manufacturer's mationryou need to perform the duties of your technical manual. rating. You should learn where to look for accu- As you progress through :.he petty officer rate, authoritative, up-to-date information on all ranks, your duties and responsibilities become subjects related to the military requirements for more and more those of the supervisor and in- advancement and the occupational qualifications structor. In order to render the proper type of of your rating. supervision and instruction, you must read Numerous publications you will use are refer- everything you can relative to this subject. Publi- enced in the various chapters throughout this cations such as Basic Military Requirements, training manual.In moat cases,the exact NAVTRA 10054 and Military Requirements for chapter, section, or article of the particular pub- Petty Officers 3 & 2, NAVTRA 10056 are your lication is cited. The detailed information you basic study guides. need for advancement and for everyday work is contained in them. Some are subject to change or revision from time to time; some at regular intervals, others as the need arises. When using TRAINING FILMS any publication that is subject to change or revision, be sure that you have the latest edition. Training films available to naval personnel are When using any publication that is kept current a valuable source of supplementary information by means of changes, be sure you have a copy in on many technical subjects. whichallofficial changes have been made. Films that may be of interest are listed in the Studying canceled or obsolete information will United States Navy Film Catalog, NAVAIR not help you to do your work or to advance in 10-1-777, with supplements carrying the same rating; it is likely to be a waste of time, and may NAVAIR number. even be seriously misleading. When selecting a film, note its date of issue Chapter 24 of this manual gives a list of refer- listed in the Film Catalog. As you know, pro- ence publications frequently used in your work. cedures sometimes change rapidly. If a film is Some are listed as "required to have available," obsolete only in part, it may still have sections some are listed as "should be readily available," that are useful, but it is important to note pro- and other are merely "suggested as good, handy cedures that have changed. If there is any doubt, reference material." verify current procedures by looking them up in In addition, you should become familiar with U.S. Navy Public Affairs Regulations or other all the technical publications dealing with your appropriate sources.

1812 CHAPTER 2

MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS

Abraham Lincoln once said: "Public support the authority to carry out its mission. (Figure is essentialwith it nothing can fail; without it, 2-1.) nothing can succeed." How strong or how effective our Navy will be Our Navy owes its origin to public opinion. It depends on its degree of importance in the was founded in the days ofthe American Revo- minds of the citizens. To base their opinions, the lution when the leaders and the people of the American people must know the importance of new republic saw that seapower wasneeded to seapower and the capability of their naval win independence. Once the war was won, how- forces. ever, few seemed to think a navy wasimportant. The new nation disarmed then just as the THE DEVELOPMENT OF United States has done after almost every war NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS since. The Army was cut to the bone and the Navy disbanded entirely. But scarcely 10 years Although today's concepts of public affairs in later, Algerian pirates captured our merchant the Navy are comparatively new, their practice ships on the high seas and demanded ransom for dates back to the Revolution. The history of their return. Then the Algerians called for an Navy Public Affairs follows closely the evolution annual payment to guarantee our ships safe pas- of the public affairs function within our govern- sage. This proved that a maritimenation like ment. In the creation of the Navy itself can be ours could not conduct its affairswithout the seen the marshaling of political supportby the protection of a navy. Voicing the slogan "Mil- spreading of contracts for goods and services lions for defense, but not one cent for tribute," over as large an area and among as manyindi- Americans demanded a fleet. We have had one viduals and companies as possible. This manner ever since. of obtaining needed support popularized the After each war, however, the peace loving Navy in many states and communities, and in- American citizen has demanded of his Govern- sured legislation continuing this support on a ment that the country disarm. This was true permanent basis. after World War I, and so our country wasfar A more marked influence on public and con- from prepared when the Japanese struckin gressional opinion, however, was the pressures of 1941. It was also true to a lesser extent after international events facing an emerging nation. World War II. But, trouble in Korea, Vietnam, The actions of the Barbary corsairs and of the and numerous other areas within recent times French privateers, which later erupted into the have called for a continuous increase in naval Quasi-Naval War with France, combined to give pc,"er. This country is prepared todefend itself those who supported an effective naval force today only because the majority of the Ameri- leverage enough to enact the hotly debated Navy can people recognizethe importance of military Act of May 27, 1794, establishing the United readiness. States Navy. The American citizens provide the toolsof The function of public affairs was initially the Navy's trademen, money, materials,and borne by the Navy's political leadership. In the 13 19 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

JOURNALIST 3 & 2

df ;

1 185.221 Figure 2.1.;-The Navy depends on the American people for men, money, materials, and authority, to carry out its mission. 'go Chapter 2 MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS

Civil War, however, the first steps were taken by sort of clearing house for news about the Navy. the Navy itself to provide the public with infor- He wrote Sunday articles which he sold to a mation about its actions. group of 18 newspapers and claimed, at least, to have so established the first news syndicate in America. One of his methods of operating this syndi- CIVIL WAR cate landed him in trouble in November 1864. While the Powder Boat Expedition against Fort News of the Navy throughout the Civil War Fisher was being prepared, Osbon obtained the was dependent upon battle reports. Secretary of details of the operation from Admiral Porter and the Navy Gideon Welles, himslef a former news- wrote an advance for his newspaper subscribers paper editor, would hand over the communiques with the understanding that it was not for use to reporters in Washington. Not all of the re- until after the expedition had been completed. ports were necessarily handed over. Military However, on hearing a rumor that the attack had security made certain disclosures inappropriate. taken place, a Philadelphia editor printed the When the Union Navy's monitors failedto story prematurely, giving the enemy an abun- capture Fort Sumter and Charleston harbor in dance of information prior to the attack. The September 1863, information regarding defi- editor reportedly was arrested and the paper ciencies in the ironclads was stricken by Welles closed. from the reports. Following the successful attack more than a On several occasions Welles was distressed to month later, Osbon was put under arrest and find the Army garnering a major share of the clapped into the old Capitol prison in Washing- limelightinactions which hinged on naval ton until nearly the end of the war. forces. He instructed Admiral Porter to make certain his battle reports were in ahead of those of the military commanders. Porter did at his next opportunity 'and the Navy, spurred by Information Versus Security interservice rivalry, scooped the Army on news of the Battle of Vicksburg. One problem reporters encountered when It was common practice for correspondents to they embarked in Navy ships was that of censor- travel with Union armies and, to lesser extent, ship. They found that flag officers of the Navy with those of the Confederacy. News directly could censor their copy or, for that matter, oust from reporters with the ships was rare. The diffi- them without a story. culty of communicating with their papers was The problems of informing people through a the greatest reason for there being more news public press without imparting useful and some- from the front than from blockade and river times essential information to an enemy are squadrons. many. In a civil war, these problems become A notable exception to this pattern was a more complex. New York reporter, B.S. Osbon, who accom- Perhaps the most damning comments on in- panied the abortive relief expedition to Fort telligence available in the press came from the Sumter. Osbon might, with some justification, log of the most successful of the Confederacy's be called the Navy's first public affairs officer. commerce raiders, the CSS Alabama. Captain He had a combination job as Signal Clerk and Semmes, upon capture of the merchantman SS Secretary with Admiral Farragut on the flagship Manchester bound from New York to Liverpool, Hartford. In that position he was an eyewitness studied a batch of newspapers found on board to the battle with the forts and the capture of and wrote, "I learned from them where all the New Orleans. He wrote and distributed the story enemy's gun boats were, and what they were to the New York papers. doing...Perhaps this was the only war in which By the summer of 1864 Osbon had published the newspapers ever explained, beforehand, all a handbook on the Civil War histories of ships of the movements of arn'fies and fleets to the the Union Navy. Osbon established himself as a enemy." 21. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

FOR AN INFORMED PUBLIC THE NAVY'S ORACLE

One of the painfully learned lessons of the In 1890, a professor of naval history and tac- Civil War was the portent of an aroused but ill- tics at the Naval War College published a book informed public opinion and its resultant effect entitled, The Influence of Sea Power Upon His- upon sound naval strategy. Just as the Navy had tory, 1660-1783. The acclaim accorded Captain repeatedly found that it could not build, equip, Alfred Thayer Mahan's theories of command of and man a fleet in times of emergency but had the sea propelled him to immediate fame. to built, maintain and train one over the years, it Mahan had no connection with an informa- became just as clear that it could not expect tion function of the Navy. Yet his books and public understanding of its mission and strategy articles, coming at a favorable moment in naval without taking action to cultivate and foster affairs, helped to form the basis of an enlight- that understanding. ened naval policy in the United States. For nearly a generation following the Civil War the Navy languished and regressed with little public interest or concern. There was no SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR impetus for fostering a naval information program. When Theodore Rooseveltwas appointed Assistant Secretary of the Navy in 1897, he brought to the Navy Department not onlya thorough understanding of theuse of naval forces in international affairs, but also a remarkable feel for the public press and knowledge in EXhIBITS TO INFORM THE PUBLIC how to use it. The role of the press in the Spanish-American Another field of public relations activity was War is unique in the annals o: reporting. The opened for the Navy by a presidential decree in cooperation afforded correspondents by military 1874. President Grant, noting the upcoming ex- and naval commander was nearly limitless. There hibition in Philadelphia celebrating the 100th were reporters with Admiral Dewey, dozens em- anniversaryof UnitedStates independence, barked in ships on blockade stations off Cuba, issued an executive order directing participation and a fleet of them in dispatch boats darting of the executive departments of the federal about the ships, then racing off to Key West to government. file their stories. In Philadelphia, a Navy contingent repre- The Navy Department's policy was to deal sented the Secretary of the Navy. candidly with the newspapermen whowere the On the exhibition trail, federal participation, representatives of the general public. including that of the military services, continued While the press caused only a few problems to through to the turn of the century and beyond. the maneuvering of ships, its presence caused Perhaps the Navy's most elaborate exhibit was more than a few in security. Press reports on made as a part of the World Columbian Exposi- fleet movements and possible intentionswere re- tion held in Chicago in 1893. A ship model of layed the same day to Madrid. The progress lathing was built on a brick foundation set on made in telegraphy had vastly complicated the piles driven into Lake Michigan. It was open for problem of military security causing censorship touring and featured realistic interiors and ex- units to be established at Key West, at Washing- teriors, actual arms and equipment, and had ton, and at seven cable offices in New York. fully dressed mannequins at various stations Naval commanders furnished whatever infor- throughout the "ship." mation they could and placed no impediment in Aside from this activity there was little effort the way of this supply, beyond that which mili- to interpret the Navy to the American public at tary necessity demanded. large in the years described as "The last years of Such were the beginnings of public affairs in the old Navy." the United States Navy. The Spanish-American 1622 Chapter 2 MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS

War had reinforced other trends developing in people must either build and maintain an ade- the society. As the United States stepped onto quate Navy or else make up their minds defi- the international stage as a budding new power, nitely to occupy a secondary position in inter- her citizens were demanding more responsibility national affairs, not merely in political, but in from their government. A part of the govern- commercial matters." ment's responsibility lay in keeping its citizens Roosevelt began immediately to build the advised of its actions. At the turn of the cen- Navya drive whitt did not slacken until 1905. tury, the need for public relations was becoming Navy reaction to press comment became evi- more apparent to the majority of our naval dent in this same period. In July 1904, the Chief leaders. Clerk of the Navy engaged a New York clipping service for "...notices referring to matters connected with the Navy, special articles, editorials, etc...." Here was some positive feedback. THE INFLUENCE OF THEODORE ROOSEVELT Personnel Needs The war with Spain signalled the entry of the United States into the arena of world politics. With the increase in fleet tonnage, the require- As the century turned this country acquired ment for greater numbers of personnel in the overseas holdingsThe Philippines, Guam, Navy placed additional emphasis upon recruit- American Samoa, and Hawaii. ing. Sometime in this period, the Navy found it For the Navy, the new responsibilities that helpful to develop a publicity organization as an thesepossessions demanded were enormous. aid to recruitment. Technology and new construction had advanced the Navy to a point where its sea forces were For the Navy's part, recruiting went on at an comparable to those of European powers, with accelerated pace, not always without problems. the exception of Britain. Large appropriations One recruiting team in the midwest repeatedly were made in each of the years 1898-1900. found adverse and non-factual stories and com- Partly through the popularity for the Navy ments about the Navy appearing in the local which had carried over from the wan, and partly press just prior to its scheduled visits. These through the continued stress in international af- occurrences caused special mention in the Secre- fairs, impetus on improving the Navy continued tary's annual report to the President, "...The until 1901 when Congress refused to authorize Bureau (Bureau of Navigation, predecessor to the current Bureau of Naval Personnel) believes any new ships at all. that more thorough and more widely diffused Navy policy following the war, as it had many knowledge of the conditions of life in, and op- times in the past, reverted to the pre-war status portunities afforded by, the naval service is the and little thought was given to new responsi- best remedy against unjust and harmful criti- bilities demanded of the Navy. President cism." McKinley was reelected in 1900 and there win The type of criticism to which the Navy ob- every indication that the Navy could look for- jected can be seen in the Sauda, Colorado, Mail ward to a continued policy of drift. in noting the arrival of a Navy recruiting party, In September 1901, an assassin's bullet took 44 ...If your son is an incorrigible and you think the life of the President and sent striding onto he will either go to the gallows or to the peniten- the international scene a man infused with the tiary, send him to the Navy." importance of naval strategy to national security andfullyconversant with naval problems, Theodore Roosevelt. In his first message to Congress, President Considerations of Image Roosevelt revealed the philosophy which was both to define and direct naval policy through- Sensitivity to the image of the Navy and its out hisadministration, "...The American men was not confined to recruiters. In 1905, an 17 23 JOURNALIST 3 & employee of the Navy Department was dis- On October 6, 1906, the Navy League section missed fci refusal to carry out a contract to let a in Philadelphia created one such occasion which part of his house to a sailor because, i` ...his was "Navy Day." Later in its history the League wife feared her social position would be affected would hold an annual celebration on October if a man in sailor's clothes were seen going into 27, the birthday of Theodore Roosevelt. or coming out of her house." A similar but previous happenstance sup- posedly gave rise to the Navy's first newspaper Recommendations For a Bureau of Information in Newport, Rhode Island. In 1901, a Yeoman from the base reportedly saw the sign in a down- In December 1905, the President of the Gen- town store window "Dogs and Sailors Keep eralBoard, Admiral George Dewey, recom- Out." He was repulsed when he tried to enter mended to the Secretary that the Navy and the forcibly and returned to the base to vent his Army consider seeking legislation which would frustration by publishing an underground news- prohibit the publishing, in time of war or when paper decrying the outrage. war was imminent, " ... anyinformation of a military nature which is not furnished for publication by the War or Navy Departments." Press Tours Following a conference with War Department officials, Secretary of the Navy Charles Bona- In the informal organization of the period, parte replied that the time was inopportune for information was imparted in a number of ways. such legislation. He directed the Board to draft a One such instance was a tour of the Navy Yard bill for submission at a later date. at Puget Sound for seventy-five members of the The General Board returned the proposed Utah Press Club in June 1902. The tour was legislation to the Secretary in April. Contained sponsored jointly by the Press Club of Seattle therein was a provision for presidential designa- and the Commandant of the Yard. tion of officers for special duties in the preparation and release of military information, including the creation of what might be called a The Navy League Bureau of Information. The proposal evidently was shelved to await a more favorable time. In December 1902, a potentially formidable and certainly less inhibited agency for publicity was founded outside the confines of govern- Exhibitions and Naval Reviews ment, the Navy League of the United States. The League was formed by men who believed, For European Naval powers, the 1890's were "...the American people would have to be marked by international naval visits and naval educated to appreciate the connection between reviews in great races for prestige and popular sea power and America's new international re- support. The United States Navy abstained from sponsibilities. Thus educated, they would exert such visits and reviews until 1902 when Presi- pressure upon Congress to provide with gene- dent Roosevelt's invitation brought Germany's rosity and promptness for a suitable peacetime newest battleships into New York for display. Navy." The following year, four American cruisers ap- To bring its message to the public's attention, peared in successionat Marseilles, Kiel and the League planned to use several devices. It Portsmouth, England. In 1904, Roosevelt sent foresaw speakers touring throughout the coun- six battleships and eight cruisers to tour ports try; issuance of press releases and information throughout the Mediterranean. pamphlets to selected editors, Congressmen and The Jamestown Exposition, according to opinion leaders; wide distribution of League - Collier's Weekly,"surpassed anything the West- produced magazines, and local sections meeting ern Hemisphere had ever accomplished in that regularly to discuss naval matters and celebrate line." Squadron's of ships representing 13 na- commemorative occasions. tions joined the entireAtlantic Fleet in 18 Chapter 2MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS

Hampton Roads on public display. General visit- In1911aBritish magazine published a ing aboard the ships to afford the public the lengthy and detailed article on the construction opportunity to examine the vessels, parades, and operation of United States submarines. The intership boat races and other sporting events Navy launched an immediate investigation after all were included in the plan to familiarize the which Secretary of the Navy George von public with and to popularize the Navy. Lengerke Meyers issued an order virtually stif- ling the free flow of any information to the mass media. The Great White Fleet General Order No.139 of December 16, 1911, began, "No person belonging to the Navy, As the ships of the fleet rode at anchor in or employed under the Navy Department, shall Hampton Roads, a rumor cropped up that the convey or disclose by oral or written communi- Jamestown display was nothing compared to cations, publications, or any other means, ex- what was comingan around the world cruise of cept as may be required by his official duties, the battle fleet. any information whatever concerning the naval The news of the cruise was announced by Sec- or military establishment or forces, or concern- retary of the Navy Victor Metcalf in an inter- ing any person, thing, plan or measure pertaining view in San Francisco in July. Meanwhile the thereto...without the express approval of the Navy made preparations forthe cruise and Navy Department..." Roosevelt selected the journalists who would ac- The test for the order was not long in coming. company the ships and tell the story the Presi- The following month, an explosion in a Navy dent wanted told. Yard brought immediate inquiry from the press. On December 16,1907, to tunes of brass The Yard Commandant, acting under General bands and news by wire services clicking word of Order 139 refused to give out information. The their departure, the 16 battleships which com- newspapers through its representative in Con- prised the Great White Fleet weighed anchor and gress, complained of the repressive measure and proceeded slowly in column past the Presidential the order was amplified, "It was not the Depart- yacht and out to sea. ment's intention to forbid giving information of Extravagant publicity preceded the fleet's de- no military value to persons or newspaper: it is parture.It continued to accompany its every left to the judgment of commandants and com- move as itsailed around the Horn into the manding officers to decide what properly may Pacific, called at coastal ports and then pro- be withheld." ceeded on to the Far East, thence to the Medi- On March 6, 1913, the day after Secretary of terranean, and finally returned home. Navy Josephus Daniels took office, he sent a The effect upon world opinion left in the memorandum to the Bureaus and Offices of the wake of the ships was significant. United States Navy Department requiring that all articles in- and foreign press which had criticized the cruise tended for the press be submitted to him. at its inception heralded its success upon its ter- Daniels began to hold twice-daily press con- mination. ferences in his office for Washington newsmen. One of the immediate effects was in the boost In addition, items of interest to newsmen during to recruitment attributed by the Secretary of the period 1914-1917 were posted in the Navy the Navy to the publicity surrounding the voy- Department. Normally, these notices were of a age. The overall popularization of the Navy was routine information nature. more important.

THE FIRST PAO

WORLD WAR I In early 1917, the Secretary of the Navy turned over to Lieutenant Charles Belknap, Jr., World War I found the Navy's public informa- of the Office of the Chief of Naval Operations, tion program under severe restrictions. the work of reviewing Navy Department advises JOURNALIST 3 & 2 and making public those which did not fall message to Congress reflected this philosophy in under the ban of military secrecy. The Secretary a call for a reduction in defense expenditures. continued his daily conferences with the press. In September 1921 a lack of funding brought Lieutenant Belknap was also given the task of about a change in the name Navy News Bureau aiding the press in obtaining quick action on to the Navy Press Room, and a Naval Reserve questions that arose. In deed, if not in name, the Lieutenant Commander became the Information Navy had appointed its first public affairs of- Officer and staff. ficer.

INFORMATION UNDER INTELLIGENCE THE NAVY NEWS BUREAU By February 1922, a decision upon previous On April17, 1917, eleven days after the recommendations had been reached and the in- United States had declared war, the Secretary of formation function in the Navy was placed un- the Navy asked John Wilbur Jenkins to take over der Naval Intelligence. In March 1922, Secretary the duties of Civilian Director of Information in Edwin Denby directed the Bureaus and Offices of Washington. Jenkins and his assistant worked for the Navy Department to detail an officer and neces- and established the Navy News Bureau. The Bu- sary clerical assistance to assist the Office of reau was staffed by several newspapermen called Naval Intelligence Information Section. In May, to active duty. Jenkias kept the new organiza- a similar letter was sent to Fleet Commanders, tion small, believing that a large staff would District Commandants, and to Commanders of serve only to inhibit the speedy relay and release overseas stations directing them to appoint an of news: officer to collect information and photographs The work of the Navy News Bureau during from ships and stations under their respective the war concentrated on news of the convoys commands and forward them weekly to the Of- and anti-submarine operationsthe major naval fice of Naval Intelligence. For the first time, the activity. The Bureau also prepared and dis- information network had been spread through- tributed transcripts of the Secretary's daily press out the military chain of command of the Navy. conferences. The most important items were The precepts of the Information Section's op- announced by Secretary Daniels. Feature mate- erations with the press were to provide complete rials were released in advance of publication and factual answers to press queries. There was time to allow the newspapers ample opportunity little activity in the initiation of press releases to set them in type. but those that were provided were distributed to The end of World War I left the Navy News all on a strictly equal basis. Bureau with a big job yet to be donethe news In the winter of 1923-24, Denby found a new of returning our forces from overseas. The orga- method for acquainting members of the press nization had proved equal to the task of wartime with naval operationsembarkation with the demands. fleet during maneuvers. It was a program inde- Although Secretary Daniels had instituted a pendent of funding restrictions. A press party of formai organization for the dissemination of 85 editors and publishers embarked in fleet units news, the control he exercised over that opera- during annual maneuvers in the Caribbean. The tion was not above criticism. Nonetheless, the event was worthwhile for the Navy. The pro- information bureau created by Daniels was to gram continued until 1966 when the problem of continue on unbroken to the present day, security forced a limitation on guests to include largely through the efforts of subsequent civilian only wire service representatives who were also and naval leaders who saw, in the functions, a officers in the Naval Reserve. During this same basic responsibility to the general public. period, the program was enlarged to include President Harding entered the White House in prominent civilian guests as well as press repre- March 1921, with public commitments to under- sentatives. take steps toward international agreements in In March 1924, Curtis D. Wilbur succeeded limitations of armaments. In April his special Denby as Secretary of the Navy. In a letter to all 20 26 Chapter 2--MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVYPUBLIC AFFAIRS ships and stations Secretary Wilbur emphasized patible with military security." Secretary Knox, the importance of officers appointed to informa- a former Chicago newspaperpublisher, formally tion duties being rel;eved by other officers when removed the public affairs function in the Navy detached to insure continuity of the information from within the Office of Naval Intelligence and input to the Information Section. Assistance was placed its directon under his own control in promised to outlying commands in the Secre- April 1941. tary's letter urging increased efforts in press rela- On May 1, 1941, the Office of Public Rela- tions, The first of the assistance came in the tions began operations. Acting as its head until )rm of a seven-lesson study course on news the May arrival of Admiral Arthur r. Hepburn handl;ng issued by the Bureau of Navigation. was Commander Thurber.On that day the Of- By the late thirties, the importance of the fice of Public Relations numbered fifty-five with small Navy Information Section became ap- thirty-eight men on the way. pareot. It was redesignated the Public Relations The Office of Public Relations was established Branch of the Naval Intelligence and field offices to meet conditions of that period,particularly: welt, later established in all naval districts. an organized, accreditedand sometimes uni- formed press corps of war correspondents; a censorship program; total national mobilization in OFFICE OF PUBLIC RELATIONS support of the war effort and a general popu- ESTABLISHED larity of the Armed Forces. The major news medium was the written press, backed by radio Early1940 found the United States in a and news reels. limited state of national emergency and increas- During the two decades that followed World ing its military forces under the presidencyof War II, the practice of public relations became Franklin D. Roosevelt, a former Assistant Secre- established in government, as in industry, to per- tary of the Navy. This increase inmilitary form the vital function of communication be- strength was paralleled Z,a mobilization of pub- tween the large organizations with complex lic relations. problems and the various audiences that are im- Commander H.B. Thurber became Officer in nortant to the organizations. Althoughthe name Charge of the thirteen-man Public Relations of the office and itsinternal organization have Branch of the Division of Naval Intelligence in changed several times since 1941, its mission re- July 1940. His first order under the newly ap- mains basically the sametelling Americans, and pointed Secretary of the Navy, Frank Knox, was other free peoples, what they have a right to to build up the office for an emergency.Records know, as well as what may interest them about of Naval Reserves slated for war-time dutyin seapower and the men and women,ships, air- public relations were reviewed and tentative craft, and facilities which make up the United selections were made of individuals who might States Navy. The importance of the public af- head the individual sections of an expandedof- fairs mission has been recognized and its execu- the fice.By February1941,fiveofficers had tion has become a specialized function in assumed the duties as heads of the Script,Plans, Navy. Public affairs personnel at every level in- Pictorial, Radio, and Civilian Liaison and Naval form both the general public, and the Navy's District Sections. internalpublic which includes military and In March 1941, the office of the Chief of civilian naval personnel and their dependents. Naval Operations issued a directive throughout the naval service outlining the properfunction of public relations, declaring it afunction of command and emphasizing, ". .it is not :he PUBLIC AFFAIRS TERMINOLOGY function of the Navy officers to endeavor to police or otherwise monitor publications, radio Throughout the history of Navy Public Af- stations, or other media of information. It isthe fairs, much confusion has existed over the use of function of Navy officers to keep the public in- terms pertaining to this field, especially over the formed of the activities of the Navy, as corn- title applied to officers handling the job. Many 21 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 variations have been used, including public infor- lations is the military and civilian personnel of mation officer, technical information officer, the Navy and their dependents. service information officer, public relations officer, command liaison officer, and many others. To ensure uniformity of terminology, the fol- PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICER lowing terms have been adopted. A public affairs officer (PAO) is an officer or Navy civilian,fulltimeorcollateral duty, PUBLIC AFFAIRS specialist or non-specialist, assigned duties in Navy public information and community rela- Public affairs is the general term for theover- tions. He may also have additional duty in inall field. It includes all contacts with the public ternal relations and international public affairs. and the effect of these contacts on the Navy, The officer specialist referred to here holds a evaluation of public opinion and consideration special duty onlydesignator (165X). of itin formulating and administering Navy policies, dissemination of information to the public, and actions taken to promote under- MISSION standing and good will between the Navy and the general public. Public affairs are divided into In a democracy, the public has a right to be two main groups: informed on the major issues of national defense policy, including a clear presentation of both I.Public Information.The preparation and sides of the argument in complex questions, so dissemination of information and other material that there may be a consensus of confidence in to the press, radio, television, and other media the final decision. Mistakes and ineffective oper- of mass communication. ations must also be honestly admitted. 2.Community Relations.Activities under- To fulfill the vital roles assigned it in the de- taken for or in cooperation with the people of fense of the United States and of the free world, (and organizations in) communities which have the Navy must have modern equipment, trained an interest in the command. personnel, andlogistic support adequate to attain and maintain a high state of readiness.. This can be done only if there is full support INTERNATIONAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS from both the American public and Congress. The public affairs mission of the Navy, there- International public affairs are public affairs fore, is to inform the public concerning: conducted for and with foreign nationals by commands overseas and when ships and stations The Navy as an instrument of national pol- in the United States entertain foreign visitors. icy and security. Public information and community relations programs planned and implemented with foreign The operations of the Navy, as much as is nationals in mind and called "international pub- compatible with military security. lic information" and "international community relations. The responsibilities and activities of naval personnel as U.S. Citizens.

INTERNAL RELATIONS

Internal relations are not part of public af- AUTHORITY TO CARRY OUT THE fairs, but in practice, internal relations activities MISSION parallel those in public information and community relations, and they have commensurate The President, as commander-in-chief of all importance. The public addressed in internal re- the Armed Forces delegates authority tocarry 22 Chapter 2MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS aveys-,out the Public Affairs mission. The chain of William Thompson, was selected in May 1971 command for Navy Public Affairs follows. and became the Chief of Information inJuly of that year.

SECRETARY OF DEFENSE PUBLIC AFFAIRS ORGANIZATION The Secretary of Defense has the authority to A complete discussion of the Department of coordinate and direct the activities of the De- Defense Public Affairs organization, responsi- partments of the Army, Navy, and Air Force bilities, and functions, is contained in U.S. Navy including their public affairs. The Assistant Sec- Public AffairsRegulations (SECNAV INST. retary of Defense (Public Affairs) is designated 5720.XX). This information will not be repeated as the principal staff assistant to theSecretary of here for two reasons. First, as a Journalist, Defense for public information and community you should becomefamiliar with PA Regs and relations. use it continually as areference. The manual sets forth the basiclaws and regulations that govern Navy Public Affairsefforts and pre- SECRETARY OF THE NAVY scribes or recommends methods for their implementation. Familiarize yourself with its organi- The Secretary of the Navy retains direct con- zation and contents. Second, the organization trol and supervision of relationships between the and contents of this manual are subject to Navy and the Secretary of Defense, other princi- change. You need to know the currentregula- pal Government officials, the Congress, and the tions pertaining to your particular problem, so public. As deputy and principal assistant to SEC- I look them upin the manual for verification. NAV, the Under Secretary of the Navy acts Every Journalist, however, should know the with the full authority of the Secretary in the organization within the Office of Information general management of the Department of the and the major PA activities outside the Navy Navy. He is responsible for supervision of the Department. Most large public affairs offices Navy's Office of Information. throughout the Navy are patterned after the organization described below. CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS

The Chief of Naval Operations has the author- OFFICE OF INFORMATION ity to implement public affairs policies established by the Secretary of the Navy and to en- Within the Office of Information are the sure that they are effectively carried outby all Chief of Information, commonly abbreviated activities under his respective commands. CHINFO, the Deputy Chief of Information, three Assistant Chiefs of Information, and nine major divisionsPublic Information, Production CHIEF OF INFORMATION Services, Field Services, Program Coordination, Community Relations, Program Planning, Naval The Chief of Information heads theoperation Reserve and Training, Internal Relations, and of the Office of Information andprovides direc- Administrative Services. tion to the Navy public affairs programworld- There are also four special assistants: wide. He is the direct representativeof the Secretary of the Navy and of the Chief ofNaval (1) Special Assistant for (SECNAV) Public Operations inallpublic affairs and internal Affairs, information matters. As such, he has theauthor- (2) Special Assistantfor (CNO) Public ity to implement and coordinate publicaffairs Affairs, and internal informationactivities. The first (3) Special Assistant for Manpower Manage- Public Affairs Specialist Admiral, RearAdmiral ment, and 23

. 29 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

(4) Special Assistant to CNO for Organiza- eral. To accomplish this liaison, the Community tion and Liaison. (See figure 2-2.) Relations Division has a basic responsibility to ensure that policies and programs of the Depart- The Deputy Chief of Information is the prin- ment of the Navy and the Department of De- cipal assistant to the Chief of Information. He fense are effectively accomplished on the local, coordinates the activities of the Assistant Chiefs national, and international level. More Specific of Information. functions of Community Relations are covered The three Assistant Chiefs of Information are: in chapter 22. (1) The Assistant Chief for Plans and Pro- grams who is responsible for Program Coordina- Naval Reserve tion, Community Relations, Program Planning, and Training Division and Naval Reserve and Training Divisions. (2) The Assistant Chief for Operations who is Administration of Naval Reserve Public Af- responsible for the Public Information Division, fairs Companies is a major task of the Naval Production Services Division, and Field Services Reserve and Training Division. Naval Reserve Division. Public Affairs Companies have been established (3) The Assistant Chief for Internal Rela- in a number of large U.S. cities to provide a tions,whichisanadditional duty of the reserve of skilled manpower available to fill Officer-in-Charge, Navy Internal Relations Activ- Navy public affairs billets in time of national ity, who is responsible for all matters pertaining emergency. In their reserve function they effec- to the Navy's Internal Relations Program. tively assist the Chief of Information and the Naval District Public Affairs Officer in achieving The Assistant Chiefs of Information coordi- his public affairs goals. nate the activities of their respective divisions As the program sponsor, the Division provides and report directly to the Deputy Chief of Infor- technical advice and assistance in the adminis- mation. tration of the program and in the execution of training essential to meet mobilization requirements. Naval Reserve officers and enlisted men Program Coordination and on inactive duty with experience in either Navy Program Planning Divisions or civilian mass communications or public relations may join Reserve Public Affairs Com- Program Coordination and Program Planning panies are separate but related Divisions. In effect, the Program Coordination Division is the short range plans office with a mission to develop public Public Infotination Division affairs plans for programs and projects which have -already assumed a degree of concreteness. The Public Information Division is the pri- The Program Planning Division is responsible for mary source of Navy Information and provides the development of future goals and missions of unclassified replies to all public and news media the Office of Information and the Navy public inquiries. The Division maintains close liaison affairs program. with the news media, particularly the Pentagon Press Corps, with various offices of the CNO, and other agencies of the Navy Department to Community Relations Division insure the ability to perform its primary mission. The Division consists of four branches: Activities of the Community Relations Divi- sion deal with the relationship between military (1) News Desk Branch, which has the most and civilian communities. The activities com- direct pipeline to news media, and responds prise all official and private contacts between daily to the many requests for information re- the Navy, its personnel, and the public in gen- ceived from them. 24 30 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 2MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS

CHINFO ORGANIZATION

SPECIAL AS313110 SPECIA:, ASSISTANT FOR PUBLIC AFFAIRS FOR PU&UC AFFAIRS 01.06 01.05 CHIEF OF INFORMATION CHINFO/OP-007 L SPECIAL ASSISTANT DEPUTY CHINFO EXECUTIVE AWISTANT MANPOWER 01.01 TO CHINFL MANAGEMENT 01.04 01-0T AIDE 01-0B SPECIAL ASSISTANT TO CNO (OK& LIAISON) ADMIN. SERVICES 01.08 01-011

01C, NAVY INTERNAL RELATIONS SPECIAL ASSISTANT ASSISTANT CHIEF ASSISTANT CHIEF AFRTHAVY DEPT,ADOU. ACTIVITY. ADDU ASS T. CHINFO OF INFORMATION OF INFORMATION SPECIAL ASSISTANT TO (OPERATIONS) (PLANS B PROGRAMS) INTERNAL RELATIONS CRINFO RADIO /TV OP-0071 01-02 01-03 OP-00/11

PUBLIC ASSISTANT OIC NAVY INTERNAL SPECIAL ASSISTANT PROGRAM INFORMATION RILATIONS ACTIVITY, ADDU. DEP. OPERATIONS COORDINATION 01-21 SST. CHINFO INTERNAL RELATIONS NANASEMENT 01-00/111 01-31 OP-007111

PRODUCTION SERVICES PROGRAMS AND REQUIREMENTS 01-22 COMMUNITY RELATIONS DIVISION 01-32 --1 OP-00710 FIELD SERVICES 01-23 PROGRAM INFORMATION SERVICES

1 PLANNING DIVISION 01-3 OP-00720 NPAO EAST COAST ---1 NPAO MIDWEST NPAO WEST COAST [NAVAL RESERVE PRINTING AND PROGRAMS AND TRAINING DISTRIBUTION DIVISION FLEET NOME TOWN 01-3 NEWS CENTER --1 OP-00730 HISH SCHOOL NEWS SERVICE

01C, ...r.PROGRAMIIVEZLUATION NAVY/MARINE CORPS EXHIBIT CENTER OP-00740

106,3 Figure 2-2.Chief of Information Organization, JOURNALIST 3 & 2

(2) Media Services Branch, which has a prime tions, and is under the direct supervision of the responsibility to respond to requests for assis- Chief of Information. The officer in charge has tance from magazine and book media. This been assigned additional duty as an Assistant office also handles media travel and all news Chief of Information for matters pertaining to interviews with Navy personnel in OPNAV, the the Navy's Internal Relations Programs. Bureaus, and the Systems Commands. Internal Relations and Informationisde- (3) Research and Public Inquiries Branch, signed to provide information to military and which answers inquiries from the general public. civilian members of the Navy community about This office maintains files on past, present, and what is happening in the Navy, such as, new planned activities of the Navy to respond to policies and programs or newsworthy achieve- letter requests from a variety of people ranging ments by individual Navy persons or their com- from members of Congress inquiring about pub- mands. In brief, it is information that will con- licaffairs programs and policies to school tribute to a better understanding of Why the children doing a research project on the battle Navy exists, What is happening in the Navy; and between the Monitor and Merrimac. Where the Navy is going in the future. (4) Speech Research Branch, which reviews and writes speeches made by high ranking civilian and military personnel of the Navy Depart- Administrative Services ment. The Branch responds to requests for information, speech outlines, and previously The Administrative ServicesDivisionis used speeches made by high ranking Navy offi- headed by the Administrative Officer who acts cials. as an advisor to the offices of the Chief of Infor- mation on all administrative matters. The Divi- Production Services Division sion is also responsible for the preparation and maintenance of budgets for CHINFO and certain Production Services Division is responsible for field activities. The office approves expenditures the production of all externally directed, filmed, involving funding of temporary additional duty taped, and still photo and print releases made by and miscellaneous items in support of the day- the Office of Information. to-day operations of the various officesin CHINFO. Another function of the Division is to act as Field Services Division liaison between civilian employees of the Office of Information and the Navy Department Field Services Division is responsible for nain- Civilian Personnel Office. taining liaison with CHINFO Branch Offices, There are other CHINFO divisions and re- NavalDistricts,and other Navy Commands sponsibilities. Only the major divisions and re- worldwide, to keep them informed of current sponsibilities have been discussed above. policy, provide direction to them, and provide an input as to how these activities can contribute to projects originated in CHINFO or PUBLIC AFFAIRS IN THE FIELD other Navy Department offices.Material received from the field is also channeled through For purposes of public affairs activity outside the Field Services officer. the Office of Information, it can be said that the Navy, at the level of the Chief of Naval Opera- tions,is divided into four major components Navy Internal Relations Activity (see fig. 2-3): (1) the Operating Forces; (2) the Naval Material Command which is subdivided The Navy Internal Relation Activity replaced intosixsystems commandsAir, Ordnance, the Internal Relations Division of CHINFO in Electronics, Ships, Supply, and Engineering; (3) 1972. The Activity has its own officer in charge, the Bureau of Naval Personnel and assigned is a field activity of the Chief of Naval Opera- shore (field) activities; and (4) the Bureau of 26 32 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 2-- MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS

Chief of Chief of NAVAL OPERATIONS NAVAL MATERIAL Vice Chief of NAVAL OPERATIONS NAVAL MATERIAL COMMAND (Includes Fled Activities) Chief of Chief Bureau of MEDICINE a p1;;TORDNANCE NAVAL AIR NAVAL PERSONNEL SURGERY SYSTEMS COMMAND SYSTEMS COMMAND (NavOrd) (NovAlr)

Bureau of Bureau of NAVAL ELECTRONICS MEDICINE a NAVAL SHIP NAVAL PERSONNEL SYSTEMS COMMAND SYSTEMS COMMAND SURGERY (No/Ships) (NovElocs)

NAVAL FACILITIES FIELD NAVAL SUPPLY FIELD SYSTEMS COMMAND SYSTEMS COMMAND ACTIVITIES ACTIVITIES (NovSup) (MAW

OPERATING FORCES OF THE NAVY

\ ATLANTIC FLEET PACIFIC FLEET Including Including FLEETMARINE FORCE FLEET MARINE FORCE

NAVAL FORCES (Europe)

OTHE COMMANDS ASSIGNED

FIELD ACTIVITIES MILITARYSEALIFT (Not Otherwise Assigned) COMMAND

18.7 Figure 24.For purposes of public affairs activity outside CHINFO, the Navy is divided Into four major components,

27 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Medicine and Surgery and assigned shore (field) to public affairs. A good, clean copy of the daily activities. press, plus a snappy looking weekly mimeo- Itis the operating forces that make the graphed newspaper will go a long way towards biggest news. The operating forces include the boostitis morale aboard ship. several fleets, seagoing forces (forces consisting Although the Fleet itself generates most of of hundreds of ships and thousands of aircraft), thebig news,the shoreactivities maintain sea frontier forces, naval district forces, Fleet closest contact with the public. For this reason, Marine forces and other assigned Marine Corps a large portion of the Navy's public affairs ef- forces, the Military Sea lift Command and as- forts are concentrated ashore. Each naval district signed shore (field) activities, and commands commandant is responsible to the Chief of Naval such as naval operating bases, naval air stations, Operations for public affairs coordination in the fleet training schools, etc. area of his command. And each commandant PAOs and JOs serving at fleet headquarters has on his staff an officer whose title is assistant and aboard ships have an important, fascinating for public affairs (commonly referred to as the and often difficult job. The forces afloat provide district public affairs officer). an unending source of some of the finest feature A district public affairs officer is a special and photographic material in the world. assistant on the commandant's staff. He is not an When spot news breaks, it may be front page independent officer acting for CHINFO in the material around the world. The JO afloat mu* given geographic area. The relationship between recognize news when he seesit,prepare it the commandant and his assistant for public af- quickly and accurately and get his material fairs closely resembles that between the Secre- (stories, pictures, tapes, etc.) ready for release. tary of the Navy and the Chief of Information. The Commanders in Chief of the Atlantic and A district public affairs office is organized in Pacific Fleets have large public affairs depart- about the same order as the Office of Informa- ments on their staffs which direct the public af- tion. The Media Relations section has press, pic- fairs programs of the forces afloat. Most num- torial, radio/TV, and magazine/book responsi- bered fleets are also staffed with a public affairs bilities. A community relations section handles officer. These fleet PAOs have assistants, and speakers, special events, liaison with organiza- their offices carry a number of journalists and tions, special demonstration groups, exhibits, photographers. The same is true for major force, and nominates participants for the guest cruise type, overseas area, NATO, and joint commands. programs. One echelon below the fleet level are the pub- These jobs are all there to be done, even if lic affairs organizations of the various force or there are more titles available than there are type commands. Under a force public affairs people to hold them. PAOs and JOs in district officer, these groups perform essentially the offices almost always wear two or more hats. same duties as the fleet offices, although on a This is even more evident in a base or station smaller scale. public affairs office. Only the larger stations Most type commands publish a newspaper or have more than one PAO assigned. On small newsletter for distribution throughout the force. stations the job is, in most cases, collateral duty. Preparation of a force publication presents a In either situation, there are never enough JOs problem for the JO. His readers are scattered to go around. To make the job even more de- from one end of an ocean to another. Distribu- manding, the PAO is often responsible for put- tion by mail usually lessens the importance of ting out the station paper. his publication date and kills the spot news value of most of his stories. It is the job of the bureaus and systems com- Below the type commands, the public affairs mands to coordinate and provide the personnel organization extends to the individual ships that and logistic support to keep the operating forces make up the Fleet. Here "organization" usually in business. You could refer to this system as a consists of a collateral duty PAO and one man "user-producer" relationship within the Navy, who often is not a rated JO. Other duties usually drawing a distinction between consumption and prevent the ship's PAO from devoting full time production. The bureaus and systems commands

28 34 Chapter 2MISSION AND ORGANIZATION OF NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRS with their supporting fieldactivities are the Public Affairs personnel merely make the facts producers. The Operating Forces constitute the available to the public. The public makes its own users. decisions, and the Navy carries out their wishes Most major staffs within the "producer" or- as expressed through their elected Government. ganizations have officers or high ranking civilians Journalists, in particular, must do their jobs with assigned to handle public affairs in one form or the knowledge chat an intelligent public, prop- another. These men are not PAOs in that they erly informed, will make the sound decisions usually don't deal directly with news media or that will help the Navy do its job. thegeneralpublic.However, their work is closely allied to that of public 'affairs officers. They act as liaison officers between their organi- ALL HANDS JOB zation and the Office of Information. It is their job to dig up material that CHINFO needs to Public Affairs Regulations stress the fact that keep the public informed about the activities of public affairs is a function on the command the Navy. A large percentage of their informa- level. Therefore, public affairs is the responsi- tion output is of a technical nature. In many bility of your commanding officer. As a JO, you cases, it is strictly internal. are the principal assistant to the public affairs officer who is responsible directly to the officer in command for all phases of public affairs PUBLIC AFFAIRS PERSONNEL matters. However, the task of conducting the public affairs program does not stop at the JO Journalists and public affairs officers, ad- level. The responsibility is shared by everyone in minister most of the Navy's PA programs. How- the Navyfrom seaman to admiral. ever, there are other personnel who assist with the mission such as Photographer'sMates, Just consider the impressions created by Navy civilian personnel (both clerical and informa- men and women ashore, at home, or in foreign tion specialists), and officers in a collateral ports. Think of the influence they have on the duty status. general public, their friends and families when The photographer has always been associated on leave or liberty. The Connection between all somewhat with Navy public affairs. However, in naval personnel and public affairs is obviously recent years, Navy photographers are becoming clear. increasingly involved in news photography. An advanced 9-month photo-journalists course is Ore ships and men are continually in contact conducted annually at a civilian institution for with r.e people of foreign countriesasfriendly selected Photographers as well as Journalists. visitors, sometimes bringing relief to stricken All graduates from this sophisticated course areas, always as representatives of theUnited are put into a specialized categoryand as- States. In many cases the men and women of signed exclusively topublicaffairsphoto the countries base their impressions of the journalist billets. United States on the conduct of our navymen. Public affairs, in this field particularly, is an all A very important point to remember is that it hands job. Public Affairs people are the primary is not the job of public affairs personnel tc over- contact between the navy and thecivilian sell the public on costly military hardware or to community and it is imperative that they be cor- attempt to show that the Navy is never wrong. rect in both uniform and conduct. CHAPTER 3

THE MEDIA

As a Navy Journalist your prime task will be pamphlets, hobby magazines, and unofficial keeping the public informed of the Navy and its directories and guides. activities. It is a monumental task. However, you won't be expefted to use the outdated methods RADIO AND TELEVISION of the old town crier. Today's solution to this problem is the mass media. Radio and television are among the Nation's prime news outlets. They are collectively called MEDIAPlural form of the word medium; the "electronic media" because of the method a term used in public affairs toidentify all of transmission, which provides them with the ways and means of communicating news, fastest means of getting the news to the people. information, and entertainment to a rela- It is perhaps the electronic media that have tively large audience. the greatest influence upon the public. A classic example of the influence carried by broadcasting To get the maximum use of and cooperation is the Orson Wells adaptation of the novel "War with the media, you must become familiar with of the Worlds." The broadcast, delivered in theircapabilities and limitations. You must October of 1938, was presented in semi-news know how they operate, what type of material style and told of a Martian invasion of New they want from you, and when and how they Jersey. Although announcements were made with the want it. You must acquaint yourself periodicallyduringthebroadcastthatthe men and women whostaff them and try to program was completely fictional, manypeople understand their problems. One or more of these assumed it was authentic. Hundreds of people media reach practicallyevery home in the fled into the country for "safety," others prayed United States daily. They affect the thinking of in thestreetsas the "moment ofdoom" every person in some way. approached, and some seized weapons and This chapter will introduce you to the major preparedforafight-to-the-endagainstthe news media available tothe Navy. "invaders." A similar script was broadcast in 1944 in Chile with similar results. Five years later, a station in Ecuador broadcast another TYPES OF MEDIA version of the story. This time, panic-stricken mobs burned the radio station to the ground. Media include, but are not limited to, radio Many social scientists today are concerned and television netw orks and broadcasting sta- about the long range effects of broadcasting, tions,newsfilm agencies,daily and weekly because they feel these will ultimately have the newspapers of general orspecialized circulation, greatest impact upon society and values. Great press associations, generaland specialty maga- interest, for example, has been expressed in the zines, books, internal military periodicals, the influence of radio and television on children. Fleet Home Town News Center, and such Some studies have suggested a causal relation- miscellaneous media as photo services, news ship between violence on television and juvenile syndicates, house organs, fraternal and religious delinquency. On the other hand, studies have 30 36 Chapter 3THE MEDIA shown that children who view television are 2. Approachthestationwith something generally better informed about current events concrete and of high quality. in today's world. In other areas, concern has 3. Know the station's style of broadcasting. been expressed about the effect of radio and Listen to and familiarize yourself with it, and televisionadvertisingonsocialvaluesand find out how the station wishescopy to be whetherthisisleadingus toward a more written before you submit it. materialisticsociety.Inpoliticalcampaigns, 4. Treat all stations on a fair and equal basis. radio and television definitely have profound Do not favor one station, even if the others do influence upon candidate selection and voting. not favor you. Radio and television are more timely than 5. Respond to any station request for infor- other media. They often broadcast news within mation, advice, or assistancecheerfully and minutes of an event, or even directly from the completely. scene while an eventis happening. Although radio and TV desire material written especially for themselves in"readable" language, your NEWSFILMS efforts in meeting their desires will be more than compensated if you succeed in getting "air Navynewsfilms of nationalinterestare time." A single spot may reach millions of releasedonly by the Chief of Information listeners or viewers. through the Department of Defense to members The electronic media also have their disadvan- of the television news film pool. This pool is tages. If you are reading a newspaper and are made up of the three national television net- interrupted, you can always put the paper down works (ABC, NBC, CBS), United Press Inter- and come bad( to it later. Not so with radio and national Telenews, and Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer TV. The message must be heard and understood Telenews. when it is delivered; otherwise it is lost, at least Navy newsfilms of a purely local interestare until the next broadcast. released by Naval activities directly to local In the United States, the broadcaster com- outlets. mands a large, interested audience, primarily Television is the major outlet for Navy film civilians. Overseas, the American Forces Radio/ and is especially important to District Public Televisionstationsoffer an ideal means to Affairs Offices. When Navy events ofnews inform and entertainthe American military interest are scheduled, local TV stations should community. To use this powerful means of be notified as far in advanceas possible. In some communication toitsfullest advantage, you instances, they will desire normal newsaccess to must establish and maintain good relations with the activity in order to film their owncoverage. local broadcasting stations. Chapters 18, 19, 20 In other instances, they may prefer photography and 21will acquaint you with some of the provided by the Navy. fundamentals of preparing material for radio and Televisionstationsuse 16mm black and television. white,orcolor film and work on a tight The basis for good station relations is a sound schedule. Normally, film exposed in the after- understanding of the motives of the commercial noon will appear on the evening news broadcast. broadcaster. He is in business to make a profit. When Navy film is preferred, it is necessary to If this goal is not realized, he won't stay in supply the station with a complete and detailed business. The making of profit depends on the fact sheet. They prefer to edit the film and write ability to attract a mass audience. The station the copy themselves. must serve the public interest, but it must also interest the public. Here are some suggestions for developing NEWSPAPERS good station relations: In spite of the radio/TV boom, met ofyour 1. Analyze the station's audience and channel media associations as a Journalist will be with your material appropriately. newspapers. wi JOURNALIST 3 & 2 Reading a daily newspaper has become habit (AP) and UnitedPressInternational(UPI). for the average American. If you want to hear Reuters is the principal British and European someone complain, just deprive him of his daily wire seriice and is the largest wire service in the newspaper. The great New York newspaper world, supplying over 6,000 papers. These wire strike in 1958 did just that, to cite an example. services transmit and supply over 75 percent of It deprived some five million newspaper readers the national and international news carried by of their favorite newspapers for several weeks. Americannewspapers,radio,and television Few peoplerealized how much newspapers stations. Additionally, they supply their regional influenced their lives until the strike occurred. bureaus with news material through various Department stores, car dealers, supermarkets, outlets that are intended to suit the specific and other regular newspaper advertisers reported local needs of the user. For example, the radio sales drops ranging from 10-50 percent. Atten- wire sends news already written in broadcasting dance fell off at theaters, sports events, and format for direct reading over radio and tele- night clubs. Job seekers remained jobless with- vision. Other wires may provide only specific out the help of classified ads. Housewives found financial, international, or sports news to their it much harder to shop without newspaper leads subscribers. on specials and bargains. Subway commuters Both U.S. wire services rely heavily upon who failedtobring reading matter found speedy transmission of their news and features themselves vacantly staring out of windows or throughleased telegraph wires linking their reading their match covers to keep occupied. teletype and wirephoto equipment. They also The events on your station or ship are utilize mail, telephone, and radio to supply their importanthence newsto the local public. The users with pictures, timeless features, andspecial advertising of the local merchants is intended to events coverage. reach a readership that also includes the mili- Although some of the larger papers may take tary. Obviously, newspapers will not ignore the several "wires" from AP and UPI, the two are Navy.And,theNavy cannotignorethe organized differently. APoldest and largestis newspaperscollectively called the press. a cooperative, nonprofit news sharing service The metropolitan dailies generally have their owned and operated by its own members under own newsgatheringfacilitiesbutreceivea democraticmanagement. UPIwhich joined portion of their local news from "feeders," such together the smaller United Press and Inter- as Navy public affairs people. Therefore, it is national News Services in May, 1958is con- most important that Navy public affairs people trolled by Scripps-Howard newspaper interests. be able to communicate rapidly with their local They sell news to their subscribers. newspapers. Your command could adopt these important Both AP and UPI depend upon their member guides in its relations with the local press. subscribersfor the input of news to their "wires." This opens the door to any military Find and develop good stories. source to supply them with legitimate news stories.Widespread and rapid news dissemi- Write them interestingly. nation can be depended upon from both of these services, and competition is very keen. Deliver them quickly to the newspapers Thus itis important that both be serviced by that will reach the people you want to reach. your releasesatas near the same time as possible. Getting a Navy story on the wires assures PRESS ASSOCIATIONS immediateandwidespreadcoverageon a regional, national, or even international scale. The biggest news sources for a newspaper are But you have to beextremelycarefulin the press associations, commonly called the wire preparing copy for release to the wire services. services. In the United States there are two Once the story gets on the wires, it cannot be major press associationsthe Associated Press recalled. An error will be repeated in hundreds 32 38 Chapter 3THE MEDIA possiblythousandsof outletsalloverthe appeal to the reader's imagination by presenting country. these facts with colorful writing. The American Forces Radio and Television Navy PAOs and JOs do not normally write Service, Washington also provides wire services and submit finishedarticlesto commercial to overseas anLi at-sea military activities. magazines as part of their regular public affairs duties. Magazine writing for commercial markets is a highly developed craft that requiresmany hours of painstaking research and meticulous MAGAZINES writing. This does not mean, however, that magazine A well-written article on almost any subject writing won't play an important part inyour can be placed in some magazine. Magazines form career as a Journalist. Quite the contrary. There a large market for free-lance or internal staff will be many occasions when you may be called material.Thethousandsofmagazinesin upon to write or edit magazine articles and existence in this country range from types such feature stories. as TIME or LIFE with circulations in the For example, Navy publications suchas All millions, to small and highly specialized trade Hands and Naval Aviation Newsuse stories publications with purposely restricted circu- developed by Navy JOs. Whetheryou submit lation. articles to these publications from the fieldor Technical, professional, and specialized publi- write articles tbr them as a staff member,you cations seek material of particular interest to will find that a thorough knowledge of magazine their readers. General-interest magazines forma writing is important. market for material dealing with new develop- You might be called upon to develop ideasor mentsinnaval equipment and. articleson outlinesforcommercialmagazinesand individuals.Navy-oriented magazines are submit them, via official channels, to CHINFO. interested in almost any well-written material If the subject of the material is considered dealing with seapower, past, present, and future. worthwhile, CHINFO will endeavor to interesta The Navy cooperates fully with editors and magazine editor or a professional writer in them. publishers of magazines as well as books, by Also keep in mind that the Navy encourages providing their writers with information and you andallothernavy men towritefor assistanceonunclassifiedphasesof naval publication during off-duty time. Anything you activity. write after normal working hours may be sold if Magazines have many advantages as infor- you can find a market for it. This includes mation media. For one thing, they often reacha articles, short stories, radio and TV scripts, larger audience than newspapers. While single books, and similar material. A few restrictions newspapers have a comparatively limited circu- apply to spare-time writing, however. They are lation within one specific area, magazinesare outlined in public affairs directives. In general, distributed nationally and overseas. One maga- you can write about practically any subject as zine article may be read by millions of Ameri- long as it does not conflict with normal military cans, then translated into several languages for obligations, or compromise security. foreign editions. Magazines also have the advantage of greater permanence. While a newspaper is often discarded after a qucik reading, magazines INTERNAL PUBLICATIONS are retained longer, read by the entire family, and passed along to others. Internal publications, a group of media whose Another advantage of the magazine medium is readership are Navy or Navy convected, include: that the stories are written in depth. Whilea Navy story in the newspaper or on radioor TV Ship and Station Newspapers, presents bare facts,a magazine article gives details, color, and pertinent background infor- Bureau, Systems commands, and Office mation. Magazines also interpret thenews and Magazines, L. 33 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Military Oriented Publicatic by commercial publishers. Mostof these publi- cationsaremonthly magazines using news Stars and Stripes, features and lengthy articles. Advertising spaceis sold, and the publications generally carry a American Forces Press Service, disclaimer with a straightforward statementof their editorial policy. Readership isspecialized Navy Internal Releases. and within the military, and they aregenerally authoritative Lnd considered responsible by their Department of Defense Pamphlets. readership. Consider placing feature releases, or writing material specifically for theireditors. SHIP AND STATION NEWSPAPERS are Examples of this type of publication are Navy published by individual activities for their own Times, Journal of the Armed Forces,Armed personnel. These papers are generally localin Forces Management, Seapower, and Our Navy. slant and have the same primarymission: To It is recommended that you study thepubli- serve as a positivefactor in promoting the cations and then writefortheir editorial efficiency, welfare, and morale ofpersonnel. requirements. The local ship or station newspaperstaff STARS AND STRIPES constitutes a special should receive every news story releasedby the case that serves the overseasmilitary com- public affairs office on a routine basis.Addi- munity. Stars and Stripes is a daily tabloid-sized tionally, other service publications atnearby newspaper published in Pacificand European stationseven those of a different service editions for the military, their dependents and should get copies if they desire. While you're Department of Defense civilians in overseas taking care of the internal "family" with your areas. An authorizedpublication of the U.S. releases, don't neglect the women's sectionsin Armed Forces,Stars and Stripespublishes publications. It is only good policy to favor "stateside" news, features, and cartoon strips for them with an occasional release of somepossible authorized subscribers who would otherwise be interest to the distaff side. Besides, they are a isolated front a current daily English language legitimate "market." news source. Stars andStripes localizes regional BUREAU, SYSTEMS COMMANDS, AND andarea newsevents,which makesita OFFICE MAGAZINES such as the Supply Corps legitimate market for your news releases while Newsletter, BuMed Journal or All Hands Maga- your unit is deployed in itspublishing area. PRESS zineareNavy-widemonthliesinmagazine The weekly AMERICAN FORCES format, published for a specific purpose by and SERVICE clipsheet is published by the Ameri- for the particular branches of the Navywhich can Forces Press Service(AFPS), a unified they represent. They are usually, but notalways, activity of the Office of Information for the slantedtowardaspecialistortechnician. Armed Forces, Office of the Assistant Secretary Covered are such fields as personnel manage- of Defense (Manpower and Reserve Affairs). ment, training, accident prevention andsafety, A freesource of material,the clipsheet industrial management, aviation, medicine, ship- consists of news, features, photographs, illus- building, and ordnance, to name afew. For the trations,editorials, and sports, in a format JO,Direction is publishedmonthlyby suitable for the printing methods of the indi- CHINFO's Internal Relations Activityas a vidual ship or station newspapers. American supplemental guide for commanding officers and Forces Press Service gathers its news jointly by public affairs staffs. Direction features PA case surveillance of the service newspapers and other histories, "how-to" articles, helpful hints, and sources, and fromstories sent in by public other items of interest to personnel concerned affairs offices. American Forces PressService with public affairs. prefers to get its news by release, since itis MILITARY ORIENTED PUBLICATIONS generally more timely. Requests for thisclip- include magazines, journals, newspapers and sheet service should be directed toAmerican advisory newsletters that are publishedfor, and Forces Press Service, 504 PomponioBuilding, offered for sale to, a specific military readership 1117 N. 19th St., Arlington, Va. 22209. 4034 Cha ter 3THE MEDIA NAVY INTERNAL RELEASES are prepared important part of the Navy's public affairs by the Navy Internal Relations Activity to bring program, news of events within the Navy throughout the world. They, like AFPS material, are a source for ship and station newspaper features and MISCELLANEOUS MEDIA editorials. NAVNEWS isdistributedtoall activities that publish a newspaper or support a A variety of services, syndicates, pamphlets, civilianenterprise newspaper. NAVOICE, the flyers, special interest publications, and area broadcast complement to NAVNEWS, is dis- guides make up the miscellaneous media list. tributed to ships and station radio and TV Among them are: stations for use as news items or spot announcements. Request for NAVNEWS and NAVOICE shouldbe addressed to the Navy Internal PhotoServices(stills)aresuppliedto Relations Activity (0P-0071) Navy Department, newspapers and publishers, in part, by the rapid Washington, D.C. 20350. A weekly NAVOP transmission wirephoto networks operated by message (WEEKLY NEWSGRAM), also origi- AP and UPI in conjunction with their news wires nated by the Internal Relations Activity pro- bttweern major users. Specific requests fo- a vides a summary of the top items in Navy news. photograph may originate from such commercial The purpose of this message is to provide timely agencies as Black Star, Bettman Archive, or information of Navywide interest so that the Ewing Galloway (all of N.Y. City). These and entire Navy community can keep abreast of similar agencies in other locations are occa- important developments. Commands are encour- sionally interested in obtaining copies of certain aged to disseminate the information as widelyas published news and timeless feature photo- possible through the Plan of the Day, command graphs. If the photograph has been released, newspapers, radio and TV outlets,bulletin there is no bar to furnishing them with copies boards, andallother available channels of for their files. They serve as repositories for communication to active and retired personnel, photographs of particular historic significance, and their dependents. us wally having great general interest or technical excellence. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE PAMPHLETS. In addition to the Press File, AFPS prepares bi-weekly periodicals such as "The Department News syndicates are nationally organized of Defense Digest" and "For Commanders" to channelsfordistributingtimelessfeatures, provide current material on national and foreign comics, crossword puzzles, the labors of colum- policy related to the military services. nists, and filler materials. These syndicatessuch as United Features, North American Newspaper Alliance (NANA), Newspaper Enterprise Asso- HOME TOWN NEWS CENTER ciation (NEA), and Science Service generally distribute their material daily by mall, accom- The Fleet Home Town News Center offers a panied by photographs or preformed matrices. special type of outlet that plays a particularly They areusefulchannels for features and important part in the Navy's public affairs timeless Navy stories, program. Most Navy news stories derive their news value from the fact that people are more interested in other people Van in impersonal House organs serve the employees of a facts. The home town news program offers a business or concern offering a service or product unique opportunity to get news about navymen to the public. They do for the company roughly !, newspapers and on radio and TV from the what the ship or station newspapers do for the Fleet. The central clearing house for home town military. They are an especially good market for news material in the Navy is the Fleet Home features on former employees now serving on Town News Center at Great Lakes, III. 60088. active duty or stories about Armed Forces use of Chapter 23 of this manual is devoted to this company-produced equipment. 35 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Religious groups frequently publish news Information in the directories includes name of of their military members and associates in publication and editor, address, deadlines, fre- magazines or newsletters. These markets are quency of publication, circulation, typematerial .nterested in shipboard religious activity with a wanted and other media particulars. However, local or unique angle or the heroic exploits of your study of the media should notstop at this Navy Chaplains in combat meas. The Office of point. Include in your study a thorough reading theChief of Navy Chaplainspublishesa of several back issues of the publications you quarterly Navy Chaplain's Bulletin whichis intend to write for. interested in items of this nature. For most media, you will find that the best merall format is that of the straight news style The various Hobby Magazines would like to release described in chapter 5. A general news know of the Chief's stamp collection or your story should aim for the greatest tramber of CO's ancient gun display. readers with the hopes of including the smaller interest groups in the actual distribution of the In certain locations such as the large naval release. complexes of San Diego and Norfolk, the But this is not to say that the "shotgun" Unofficial Directories and Guides published by approachisto be preferted to the "rifle" civilian firms provide an outlet for a tight little method of news dissemination. Instead, consider piece of writing about your installation, and a your public and the media that will reach them. place for some of your best color pictures. It's obvious that what might be news to the society pages of the San Diego Union would hardly be of interest to the news editor (or even WHERE TO MARKET to the society pages) of the Washington Post. Nor would Time or Newsweek be a market for Since the listing of media in this chapter is your general "hometowners." incomplete, and the requirements and desires of media change, you should review your media regularly for currency and distributionlist ESTABLISHING GOOD MEDIA RELATIONS accuracy. In compiling your media list, there are five publications which will prove to be very useful. The Navy is a definite source of news. Some of this news will be good, some bad. Good or They are: bad,rulesforrelationswith news media generally require that all Navy news be treated 1. Directory of Newspapers and Periodicals (current year), N.W. Ayer & Son, Inc., New objectively. Media willpublish or broadcast, and the York, N.Y. 2. Editor & Publisher International Year- public will learn about, newsworthy events and book(current year), Editor & Publisher Co., other information concerning the Navy whether or not the Navy cooperates.Furthermore, media Inc., New York, N.Y. will decide the interests and newsworthiness of 3. BroadcastingYearbook(currentyear), Broadcasting Publications, Inc., 1735 De Sales Navy newsnot the naval commander or the public affairs officer. St., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036. Four key words should govern your relations 4.Writer's Market(current year), Writer's with representatives of the mass media. They Digest, Cincinnati, Ohio. ACCURACY and 5. Gebbie House Magazine Directory, Gebbie are: SECURITY, HONESTY, Press, 151 W. 48 St., New York, N.Y. PROMPTNESS. These directories list media in several cate- SECURITYTest every story for security. gories such as types of material used, locations Don't try to slip something by. In addition to or groups served, type media, etc. They arequite getting yourself neck-deep in trouble, you may complete and are updated on a regular basis. be endangering the welfare of your country. Chapter 3THE MEDIA

You might adopt this slogan: "If in doubt, news or to travel to an area in order tocover check it out." news events when this travel is in the interest of the Defense Establishmentor Navy Department. HONESTYYour good name is your most However, this travel must not place the Navy in valuable asset. Justify the media's belief and a position of competing with established com- trust in the Navy by always playing thenews mercial transportation facilities along thesame game honestly. Never fake up a story orserve a route. selfish interest. Do an honest, straightforward, Transportation furnished is not consideredto job of reporting the news. Credityour source. be in competition with commercial facilities Never plagiarize or usa copyrighted material when the travel is necessary to obtainnews without permission. material related to the ships or aircraft in which the media representative is embarked,or to ACCURACYEvery storyyou turn out must personnel or cargo on board,or when corre- be 100 percent acairate. Makeone blunder and spondents are invited to reporton a matter the media 1,11 lose confidence inyou. Be sure to considered of special interest of the Navy. check and doublecheck 91.1 ,statements,names, While aboard, newsmen travelingon Navy addresses, dates, and numbers. Be carefulnot to ships may transmit their stories by Navy radioor misleadyourreadersbylettingpersonal ship-to-shore telephone. Specific regulations and opinions enter your copy. Your job is to tell the procedures for handling ofpress traffic are facts. found in the current edition ofNavy Com- mercial Communications Instructions(DNC 26), PROMPTNESSA good Journalist aims for which can be found inevery ship or station speed without sacrificing accuracy. News media communications office. want their material quickly because competition Detailed guidelines governing the invitation is keen and the public demands freshnews. As and embarkation of media representativesare long as you can supply this material theway covered in public affairs regulations. they want it, you can expect cooperation. Never let them get the idea that your officewas set up as an obstacle to keep details of the Navy's EXCLUSIVE STORIES activities from the public. Call them first if at all possible. Exclusivestoriesareingreatdemand, especially aroundarea where competition is strong. It is the policy of Navy publicaffairs not MEDIA VISITS to release regularnews stories on an exclusive basis. A Navy release of general interestusually Media representatives visiting your shipor goes toalloutlets on your mediacase list station are considered guests of the officer in simultaneously. However, thereare some excep- command, even when they are coveringan tions. assignment. As guests, they are due the utmost If you have an idea fora magazine feature lourtesy and respect. As working men, they rate story, it must be writtenor slanted toward a your full cooperation and assistance. particular market. Most magazinesdemand ex- If you are assigned to escorta guest on a tour clusivearticles.EvenbeforeaJournalist of the ship or station, planyour route ahead of attempts a magazine article, hemust have a time. Include as many points of interestas ',Articular publication in mind.He has studied possible within security limits. Be relaxed and several magazines for content, lengthof articles, natural in your actions. Let the guest knowyou writing style, and taboos suchas subjects that a know your job, but don't try to "snow" him. If particular magazine avoids. Thestory would he is an experienced newsman, he isn't easily naturally be submitted to thisone outlet only, snowed. Another exception is whena commercial Media representatives may be permitted to writer develops an idea foran exclusive on his tre 'el aboard Navy ships and aircraft to gather own initiative, When a newsmancomes to the 37 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 1111111M

F.' 0 with an idea for a story, he should be given If the informationis not readily available, full cooperation. His idea should be keptin explain this and promise to call back in 5, 10, or confidence and should not be relayed to other 15 minutes, depending on how long itwill take media or made the basis of a Navy release. to get the answer. Never brush a newsmanoff If another reporter hits on the same idea,he with a vague promise such as "I'll see what I can should be told that the first man is already find out." Be courteousremember you are working on that angle. Don't tell him who the representing the Navy. Onc. you are off the other writeris,unlesshisidentityis made phone, start digging up the information. Check obvious by circumstances. If the second man the files, consult reference material, or contact wants; to continue on the same ilea anyway,he officers who may answer the question with should be given the same cooperation as thefirst authority. If you run over the time limit, return man. But in a case like this,always tell the first the call and explain the delay. Rememberthat reporter what happened. heisprobablyworkingagainstarapidly The same process should be repeated if a third approaching deadline. reporter becomes involved.However, if more than the cegliests are received for the same information everybody should be informed that INFORMATION KITS theinformation cannot be provided on an exclusive basis and that the informationwill be Informationkitsor "handouts" are one given out as a general Navy news release. means of providingvisiting news media representatives with valuable backgroundinformation on your ship or station.You can incorporate intooneneat package ahistory of your QUERIES FROM MEDIA organization, pertinentfacts about its population, brochures, biographies of seniorofficers, A query is a request from a representative of a photographs and other interesting information which they intend news medium for a specificbit of information. to supplement the subject of It generally takes the form of a telephonecall. to write. Information kits can serve many other useful The factthatitisrequested by telephone purposes in addition tomedia service. They are indicates that the information is wanted now observers oh not tomorrow or next week. given to visiting dignitaries or guest As a rule, you should refer all queries to the fleet exercises and operations.They are used in PAO if they are other than simple, routine conjunction with open house,commissioning questions. He has the authority to release ceremonies, and other special occasions.Aboard information and is more likelyto know the ship they are forwarded withadvance news which are representative calling. releases to local editors in ports if your boss is not available, however, you scheduled to be visited. American officialsin publicity shouldanswerthe queryifitssubjectis foreign countries also need kits for releasable or within the Limits of security. In purposes when ships visitthem. most offices, a set of groundrules has been Because materialininformation kits can established to cover situations of this type. The become outdated, it should be reviewed regu- first one is to always write downthe exact larly. Ship or station histories should bebrought question and the name and organizationof the up to date at least everysix months. Biographies caller. Many commands use the "Query Record" should be replaced or revised whenofficers are form described and illustrated in chapter24. transferred or promoted. CHAPTER 4

GATHERING AND DISSEMINATINGNAVY NEWS

"That's news to me." 2. Special contacts (both official and unoffi- What's news? Where is it found and whatcan cial) maintained by the public affairs officer and you, as a JO, do to pass it on once you find it? his staff. The answers to these questions are just what this 3. The future file. chapter is all about. A fundamental definition of newsa key part of newswriting is basic to the writer's under- MESSAGES, DIRECTIVES, AND standing of the craft. Some think ofnews as a OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE combination of the compass points: North, East, West, and South. Although this is not strictly the beginning of the term, the idea does Information concerning practically every sig- em- nificant event which occurs in the Navy is passed phasize the broad dimension the fieldcovers. News is everywhere. on to those concerned via messages, directives, or official correspondence. This includes news of coming events; current fleet exercises andopera- tions;collisionsatsea;search,rescue, and NEWS is new information about anything. salvage operations; plane crashes; acts of hero- News is material previously unknown. Gen- ism; weather warnings and unusual weather erally, news is considered information that conditions; changes of command; personnel has not been previously published. promotions; new performance records; participation of Navy teams in athletics; upcoming charity drives, and countless other occurrences. You already know, from the previous chapter, Messages are transmitted between commands that the primary commodity of themass media by rapid means such as radio, teletype, and is news. This commodity is mass produced by world events and is flashing light. When a message arrives aboard retailed in printed and ship or at a shore activity,a number of copies is spoken form to millions of customers. As a JO, made and distributed to various departments. you are a middle man for this commodity. But The public affairs officer normally gets copies of you handle only the portion known as NAVY all message traffic that might be of interest in NEWS. If you are new at handling news,you carrying out his duties. must concentrate on familiarizing yourself with Information contained in a message is usually it and learning how to merchandise it. brief and tersely written. Seldom will the information be detailed enough to writea comprehensive story. The basic factsare there, however, and it provides a good starting point for develop- There arethree primary sources of Navy ing a story. news: Directives provide another source of Navy news for release to civilian news media. Much of 1. Messages,directives, and officialcorre- the information they contain, however, is in- spondence. tended for internal consumption. Information 39 dt JOURNALIST 3 & 2 them. If allowances,uniform probably have personal contact with concerningpayand efficient and capable changes, advancements and promotions,service- you show them you are an benefits, training and person, they will be good sourcesof news also. men's and dependents' becomes a lot educational programs, new regulations,morale, You will find that your job similar subjects easier when Commander Hudson,the medical leadership, charity drives, and medical are put out indirective form. When analyzed officer, calls to tell YOU about a new play up local device they are testing at theclinic, or when and written in news story form to YOU that the interest or some other news peg,this informa- Personnelman Proctor informs newspapers Navy's oldest enlisted man hasreported aboard: tion makes good copy for command at Special Services lets and other publications aimed atthe internal or, when Coach Queen YOU know that one of hisbaseball players has public. to play for Official correspondence betweencommands signed a big league bonus contract worthwhile stories. An the Orioles; or when LieutenantColeman an often provides tips for former Miss Aviation Machinist's MateFirst Class, for ex- nounces he is engaged to marry a Naval Air Systems America. ample, submits an idea to the might have Command via the .chain of commandconcerning Eventually, all of these stories The filtered down to the PAO, but the factthat you an improvedmethod for servicing aircraft. gives you a head start idea is tested, adopted, andthe man is com- were informed firsthand mended for his initiative andingenuity. The on getting the story outwhile it's still news. entire transaction takes place on paperin the form of official correspondence. it'copies of the letters are routed to the PAO forinformation, THE FUTURE FILE you will have anopportunity for developing a external release, Most public affairs officesmaintain a current good story for internal and scheduled or provided the facts are unclassified. listing of all events that have been be con- planned in the future. Materialcollected in the Security is an important factor to the heading sidered inall information available innaval FUTURE FILE usually falls under correspon- of CREATED NEWS. Thepublic affairs office messages,directives,andofficial the stories, dence. If the material is classified, youmust not develops the ideas, plans and writes and released them to achievemaximum dissemi- use it. nation. An open house, forexample, is scheduled months in advance. To ensureits success, the SPECIAL CONTACTS PAO embarks on a plannedpublicity program. Prominent public figures areinvited as guest Every public affairs officedepends on tips set up. from outside sources to developstories. Regard- speakers.Displays and exhibits are it is impossible to Parades, reviews, and drill teamdemonstrations less of the size of a command, air show, ranging from a simple, know everything that isgoing on. By creating a are planned. An ow-level fly-over to unique maneuversof the list of special contacts,both officials and per- them with your famed Blue Angels may be scheduled.A steady sonal friends, and acquainting these subjects and job, you will assure yourself asteady flow of flow of releases dealing with many others is sent to newsmedia with an eye news items.Although a stranger m9y bereluc- office and suggest a to attracting attentionand visitors. tant to telephone your house is a story, a friend or anacquaintance will feel free On the same scale as the open planned, detailed programinvolving the con- to call. struction of a new ship, especially a newtype of Officially,you should atleast know the title of every senior officerin ship. A public affairs programis generated for name, rank, and christening, launching, your command.You should also have agood the keel laying, building, they do and where they fitting out, commissioning, seatrials, assignment idea of the type of work commanders, and finally the can be reachedwhen you need information.If to fleet and force you remain in yourjob long enough, you will shakedown cruise. 40 46 Chapter 4GATHERING ANDDISSEMINATING NAVY NEWS

Not all material developed by the PAO takes iseasier to discard excess material than to place on such a largescale. A visit by an retrace his steps after the story is cold. Develop- important dignitary, a speech by the commanding your powers of observationcan come only ing officer, the return of a ship from extended through experience. It is somethingyou cannot operations, special anni versa ri es ,observances of learn from a book. The key to becominga good nationalholidaysinconjunctionwiththe observer, however, is to seemore than is on the civilian community, athletic and entertainment surface. events whichwillbenefitcharities,areall created news items carried in the future file. The PAO gives them advance build-ups, spot news coverage, and occasionally, followup coverage. The future file is usually a collection of file TELEPHONE CONVERSATIONS folders, each one containing advance information about a particular upcoming event. Itcan The telephone will play an important role in also be as simple as a calendar pad with space your daily work as a JO. It will save you a lot of enough in its blocks to write "key" wordsor time, a lot of leg work, and often will enable slugs which serve as reminders. A huge wall-sized you to teach persons who are ordinarily too grid under glassine works well also. Still, another busy to see you in person. variation of the future file is the "date-box." Telephone conversations mayrange from Under this arrangement, each of 31 file folders full-scale interviews to brief queries to verifyor contain advance material for each day of the amplify information. But regardless of theex- month. tent to which you use this method ofnews Whatever the arrangement, all public affairs gathering, here are a few points you should keep in mind. offices should maintain some good ticklersys- tem of upcoming events to assure a complete coverage of all news items. 1. Know what information you want before you dial. Keep pencil and paper handy. Do not call someone and then ask him to wait whileyou METHODS OF GATHERING NEWS look for writing materials. 2. Speak politely in distinct, well-modulated The four most commonly employed methods tones. in news gathering used by Navy Journalistsare 3. Be cheerful and business-like. observation, telephone conversations, research, 4. Make sure that you get your facts straight. and interviews. Ask the other person to repeat figuresor spell out names. 5. Avoid three-way conversations between yourself, the person on the telephone, and OBSERVATION somebody else in your office. 6. Re-check your information by reading it Observation consists of actually seeing an back to the person who has given it toyou. event take place, and then reporting what you 7. If there is a possibility of classification, have seen in the form of a news story. The don't use the telephone. difference between a good story and a poorone often lies in the skill of the observer. The skilled observer uses his eyes, his ears, his mind, and his Although a telephone is a very useful instru- notebook. He makes sure he gets the concrete ment, remember that it is not the only, and not facts, specific figures, and accurate information. necessarily the best, method of gatheringnews. He looks for the colorful, the dramatic,or the It should supplement, but not replace all other unusual in any situation. methods. Whenever it is proper and convenient, The skilled observer always tries to getmore use it, but don't be afraid to use a little leg information than he actually needs. He knows it work. 4741 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

RESEARCH sonality, or exploits of an individual or group. The difference, in most cases, islargely in the the Researchis nothing more than digging out emphasis. In the interview-based news story, information from files and referenceworks. It is stress is on the news. In theinterview story used to verify or amplify factsin news stories proper, it is on thefeature. and give depth to feature stories andmagazine Interviews are as varied as thepeople who articles. Very few Navy publicaffairs offices grant them, the Journalistswho conduct them, have adequate reference libraries. Todo any and the news which suggeststhem. Rarely are extensive research, learn to use thefacilities of interviews so mechanical thatthey can be the nearest Navy or public library.Here you can reduced to standard formulas orcategories. find the necessary books, encyclopedias,alma- Several types, however, deservesepcial attention nacs, magazines, atlases,directories, indexes, and because they are most frequent. similiar references. The Curator, NavyHistorical Division, Washington, D.C. is a good sourceof additional information about the Navy.

INTERVIEWS THE NEWS INTERVIEW About 90 percent of everything in a news The news interview is based on"hard news", story is based on some form of interviewing some event ordevelopment of current and either in person or by telephone; occasionally by immediateinterest.Suppose you are a JO correspondence. assigned to COMNAVAIRLANT Staffand a new A Journalist in search of information must super-carrier has been launched forthe Navy. learn from whom to get information and how to Later, it is learned the carrierwill be assigned to recordfacts.He must learn techniques for the Atlantic Fleet and you areassigned to write handling different kinds of peoplehow to draw the story. The original newsannouncement some out, how to keepothers on the topic, and released by the shipyard or appropriatenaval how to evaluate the motives or honesty of authorities would most likely containonly the others. In short, he should learn how to get broad, straight factscost, size, andconstruction along with people and how to treat them with details. tact and understanding while still accomplishing A story of this scope is ofmajor interest to his purpose. the local community of itshome port. Media want more than is offered inthe initial report. such as INTERVIEWING TECHNIQUES By interviewing competent news sources, key officers on COMNAVAIRLANT'sstaff, and A distinction must be madebetween news asking well-defined, carefullythought-out ques- interviews and tions, you can localize, illuminate,expand, and stories that are merely based on When will she be so-called interviewstories. Very seldom isa add depth to the original story. Journalist present at the scene of anaccident as commissioned? How will the ship'scomplement it takes placesay at a collisionbetween two affect the local population? Howwill the ship's automobiles. His story must be basedentirely on presence affect thelocal economy? What will interviewseither in person or bytelephone her mission be? When is she expected tojoin the will she be with the police, with eyewitnesses,the victims fleet? To which carrier division themselves, and, depending uponthe gravity of assigned? Will there be a flagofficer embarked? the accident, with the garagemechanics, hospital Hastherebeen aprospective commanding attendants, relatives of the victimsand others. In officer selected? How will itstrengthen our is concerned national defense effort? such news stories, the Journalist the best with a news event which requiresinterviewing in In any interview try to speak to authority available. Don't settle forthe supply order to ascertain the facts. from The interview story, on theother hand, is clerk, if it is something that should come essentially a feature built around theviews, per- the CO or XO. 41S42 Chapter 4GATHERINGAND DISSEMINATING NAVYNEWS

THE TELEPHONE INTERVIEW submitted by correspondents inMoscow as a means of making public its viewson issues of The telephone interview,a modified version world interest. of the news interview, hasa number of obvious advantages and at thesame time several limitations that challengea resourceful Journalist. It takes ingenuity and clear thinkingto locate a THE SYMPOSIUM INTERVIEW news source when a big story breaks; it takesthe power of persuasion to elicit information froma From time to time there reluctant person whocan easily hang up the are news developments of current interest that requirea Journal- receiver; and it takesa sympathetic telephone ist or a team of Journalists to seek voice when talking toa family where tragedy has information struck. not from one or two sources but froma dozen or perhaps a hundred or more. For example, which of the two Presidential candidatesin the THE CASUAL INTERVIEW television debate madea better impression on the public? How do the residents ofa city feel about their baseball team's winning An accidental encounter betweena Journalist the pen- nant? For some storiesas ina pre-election and a news source on the streetor at a social pollall of the techniques of gathering can often result ina tip that arouses a scientific opinion sampling may be required. In otherinstances, the curiosity of the writer and endslip, with reactions and comments some digging, in a major news story. may result in a lively feature story. Dependingon the subject, the sympoiium (or group) interviewmay bring out opinions of importance, THE PERSONALITY INTERVIEW entertainment, or merely the views of the "manon the street" on some subject of general interest. In the personality interviewan effort is made to let the reader see theappearance, mannerisms, background, andeven the character of the subject. Magazines like the NewYorker have THE NEWS CONFERENCE developed this type of interview, throughlong and thorough articles called "profiles",into a In recent years there has developeda rela- high art not easily attained by daily newspapers tively new but increasingly popularphenomenon under the pressure of deadlines.But with pre- of journalismthenews conference. By present- liminary research on his subject'sbackground, ing it "live"on television, President Kennedy intelligent planning of questions, andskillful raised it to one of the mostpotent forces in the interviewing, a good Journalist can let a man's public expression of opinion betweenthe people words and manners bring him vividlyto life in and their Government. Forclose to 50 years, in an effective newspaper feature story. a different format, it has beenan important source of news. The person interviewedat a news conference may be the President ofthe THE PREPARED QUESTION INTERVIEW United States, the Chief of NavalOperations, a senior government official, themanager of a big When direct man-to-man questioningcannot league team, a pretty starlet plugginga new be arranged, Journalists occasionallyresort to picture, or any otherperson who hasor thinks preparing a set of written questionsfor sub- he hasa news story of interest mission to an important to the public. As news source with a in every interview story, preliminaryground- request for a reply. More often thannot, the work pays off;a knowledge of the source's questions go unheeded. But whenthey do get a background is indispensable. Duringthe inter- reply, it generally results ina major news story. view, an alertness tostory possibilities often The Kremlin has frequently usedquestions leads to unexpected results. 49 43 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 have on the More details on news conferences aregiven mine beforehand any views he may clippings later in this chapter under "Methodsof Releas- expected topic of your interview from or from referenceworks like Who's Who. Igno- ing News." Man's biography and In every interview assignment,the JO's objec- rance of an important ferret out as much work may seem insulting to himand may cost tive is always the sameto But, never try to impress news, details,significance, and color about a you his cooperation. personality or event as he possibly can.The the source with your knowledge onhis subject. success of his storydepends on the quantity and he gleans and his 3. Plan your questions. Thisdoes not mean quality of the information formally or present sense of news valuesand writing ability. that you should read them them in an artificial manner.For the most part, conduct your conversation in anatural, informal questions in mind HOW TO GET INTERVIEWS fashion, always bearing your and trying to guide the conversationalong lines inter- thatwillgive you a story with substance. The following 10 hints on handling an pad in view assignment will be helpful: Planned questions, jotted down on a front of you, are particulgrlyvaluable when time, 1. Know what you want.Whether you are interviewing on the telephone. At the same interviewing someone for a hard newsstory or be receptive to a new angle that maybe better are on an assignmentfor a feature, remember than the one you had originallyplanned. have to write the that you are the one who will Some inter- story. This means that you have tobear in mind 4. Be careful about note taking. the essence of the story you areafter or the viewers write down everything;others write angle you are out to develop. If you arecovering hardly a word. Some subjectsbecome uncom- the things you will want to find fdrtable in the presence of a penciltranscribing a fire, what are of having out? They will includewhether anyone was their every word and at the prospect the cause of the their names appear "in thepapers." Others hurt, the extent of the damage, down to fire, how it was discovered, whichfire stations prefer to have their words written responded, how long it took to put outthe blaze avoiderrors.In general, you willprobably if you write and many other facts. remember most of the conversation the story while it is stillfresh in your mind. The same kind of analysis must beapplied to Details such as names,dates, statistics, key all stories. This will guide you in yourquestion- words, distinctive phrases,should, of course, be ing, and, most important, in yoursearch for jotted down on the spot. these. Be alive, details. Learn how to dig for portable tape interested, and curious. Details are morevivid If you have access to a small, If your subject mentions recorder, by all means use it. Somesubjects may thangeneralities. of the micro- casually, for example, that he wasthe editor of be uncomfortable in the presence something you his college paper, find outthe name of the phone, but most won't be. It's college and the year in whichhe held the can check out inadvance. And a word about natural questions techniqueput the microphone downbetween position. These are simple, his that come up in the minds of someof your you and theinterviewee. DON'T wave it in unsatisfied. Every face, unless you're in a news-on-the-runsitua- readers; don't leave them do it. story is unique. It differsfrom other similar tion, where there's no other way to what to look stories in detail. Unless you know must be for and how to get it through properquestion- 5. Study your subject. Some persons flattered; others cajoled; a few buffed.Some are ing, your story will be incomplete. naturally shy; others will talk ablue streak. Evaluate your interviewee andguide yourself 2. Prepare for the interview. Wherever pos.: favorabl., to sible, particularly on a feature assignment,look accordingly. The majority will react factual approach and will not up your subject'sbackground and try to deter- a straight-forward, 50 44 Chapter 4GATHERING AND DISSEMINATINGNAVY NEWS be impressed by arrogance or excessive humility. waste yours or the interviewee's. Occasionally, a Only courtesy, intelligent curiosity, a sincere time limit is imposed on an interviewso that the desire to be natural and a knowledge of what journalist has to arrange his questions in order of you are after will help you come away from an importance. Although the relationship between interview with a newsworthy story. the journalist and his subject should be informal, These are major principles that can be applied he must remember that the nature of his call is in nearly all cases. But, as mentioned previously, business, not social. the alert and resourceful JO must bb ready to vary his technqiue according to the tempera- 10. Remember your sense of humor. Thismay ment and position of the interviewee, the nature break the initial ice or even save your interview of the story and circumstances. in case you run into a negative attitude. 6. Be specific. A question like "Anything new?" will, in most cases,elicit very little information because the average layman knows SPECIAL TECHNIQUES OF INTERVIEWING little about news values. Ask direct and leading questions. The best kind of interviewisone that proceeds in a friendly, natural, informal way. 7. Be accurate. The smallest error can cause There was a time when certain types of news- embarrassment and even a libel suit. Don't be men thought little of using deception or imper- afraid to ask questions and to check facts. Over sonation to get information they were after. the telephone theletter "S" can he easily Respectable newspapers and other media frown mistaken for "F." Therefore, spell out names by on such practices today. Some persons will resist using phonetic aids. Spell it "S-M-I-T-H": S as in giving information, which is their privilege. In Sidney, M as in Mary..." (and make sure it is some situations, the resourceful newsman may "Smith and not Smythe.") People dislike having have to fall back on such devices as trying to their names misspelled. Also, obtain the com- persuade the subject that divulging the informa- plete and correct addresses of people in a story. tion is in the public, or his own, interest; he may have to purposely interject misinformation in 8. Look for color. In persoaality features, the hope that the subjectwill correct and particularly, an apt word or phrase describing amplify the statement; he might try to put your subject's appearance or mannerisms will words in the interviewee's mouth by asking, help your readers "see" him. A helpful sugges- "Wouldn't you say that...?" This would let tion: as you talk to your subject, try to think of him know you already have part of the informa- words that would best describe him "in a tion, if that is so, and convince the subject that nutshell." In some stories, a reference to his the whole truth is better than half the truth. On movements, gestures, way of talking and the occasion, the resourceful newsman may even surroundings may contribute to a fuller picture attempt the old trick of telling the subject that of him. Often. you will be able to make some so-and-so had given you information that you comparison (but be careful not to offend) in are interested in checking. In many instances, terms of a familiar figure or object. mane or more of these gimmicks will smoke out a confirmation or a denialand a story. 9. Don't talk too much. You are interviewing Here is how John Gunther, author of "Inside someone to get information from him, not to U.S.A." and other books in the series, describes show off how smart you are. At the start, it may the do's and don'ts of journalists conducting be necessary for you to lead the conversation interviews. This is an excerpt from an article along general lines to put the interviewee at ease appearing in Harper's Magazine, April 1961. It is and to bring him around to your subject. But reprinted by courtesy of the author: after that, be self-effacing. On occasion, it may be necessary to play dumb; assume nothing and ". .One thing is never, never, never, to ask everything. Be conscious of time. Don't ask a man his own first name, job, or title. 45 51 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

These the interviewer should know before- some of the subjectsincluded in these cate- hand...I have found out. ..that almost gories. any person will talkfreelysuch is human In some cases the command's publicaffairs frailtyif you ask him the measure of his officer himself, through authority of the officer own accomplishment. Onetrick question is in command, is authorized to release certain to ask a man what he believes in most.. . items, ouch as "hometowners" and news of a The job of an interviewer is to get informa- purely routine nature. tion, not to show himself off. ..Finally I Release of information by any command is have found that thelast two or three accomplished by or with the assistance of the minutes of an interview are always the best. command public affairs officer. Offices or divi- Your victim is so glad that the ordeal is sions within a command cannot release informa- almost over that he loosens up. ..." tion for public dissemination without consulting the public affairs officer. For a complete study on the proper release AUTHORITY FOR RELEASING NAVY NEWS channels from the seat of Government down to an individual unit, refer tothe current public First of all let's define the term "release." affairs regulations. These regulations describe the procedures for releasing news at all levelsof interestlocal,regional, national, and inter- When information previously limiied to a national. controlled number of persons is made available to the general public it is said to be "released." If this is done in formal written METHODS OF DISSEMINATING NAVY NEWS form, the document itselfistermed a "release" or a "news release." Navy news material, properlyauthorized for release, can be channeled to the media inseveral ways. Nine commonly usedmethods are: Officers in command of all ships and stations, as well as seniorcommands, are authorized to The standard Navy news release release certain types of news without advance approval from higher authority. The telephone News of purely local interest is the first of this type. However, there are certain cuations. Spot news announcements All officers in command are responsible for keeping the Chief of Information and other News conferences concerned seniors informed of all events and actions in which there is any possibility thatthe Feature releases national news media may becomeinterested. There are also special procedures forhandling Advance releases relations with members of Congress andcivic officials. Interviews Spotnews,including announcements or answers to queries of an emergencynature, Background briefing where delay in issuing information would be against the best interests of the Navy, is releas- Personal appearances ablewithout advancedapproval of higher authority. Categories of news releases for whichlocal THE STANDARD NAVY NEWS RELEASE release is not authorized, without prior approval of higher authority, are covered indetail in With the increasing tempo ofcompetition public affairs regulations. See figure 4-1for among news media, thetelephone is taking BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 4GATHERING AND DISSEMINATING NAVYNEWS

SUBJECTS NOT RELEASABLE LOCALLY (unless prior approval received from higher authority)

ACCIDENTS AND CASUALTIES

a. Civilians on board Navy ships, etc., b. Foreign nationals in training with the Navy., c. Involving more than one service., d. Nuclear, a. Names and photographs of casualties.

BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH, CHEMICAL WARFARE, AND PSYCHOLOGICAL WARFARE PROGRAMS

CLASSIFIED INFORMATION AND INTELLIGENCE ACTIVITIES

FOREIGN NATIONAL AND FOREIGN COUNTRIES

a. Policy., b. U.S. Foreign Defense Plans., c. Operations and Training Exercises.

MOVEMENTS OF UNITS

a. Between ports in U.S., b. Movements within overseas areas

NEW WEAPONS AND EQUIPMENT

b. Performance or capabilities., b. Modifications resulting in improvement

NUCLEAR

a. Nuclear Propulsion., b. Nuclear Weapons capability of U.S. forces., c. Port visits of nuclear-powered ships., d. SSB(N) operations.

PERSONNEL

a. Movements of., b. Name and address lists (e.g. "For official use" directories)., c. Reduction in personnel., d. Statistics.

SCIENTIFIC RESULTS (Unclassified)

SUBMARINE SIGHTINGS

SUPPLY

a. Sources and quantities of strategic or critical supplies., b. Movements, assembly, and storage of supplies or material.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

TRAINING OF SPECIALIZED UNITS

165.187 Figure 41.Certain categories of news must be approved by higher authority prior to being released locally. 53 47 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

precedence over the typewriter and duplicating Most Navy stories are distributed FOR IM- machines as the primary news disseminating tool MEDIATE RELEASE. This authorizes the story of public affairs personnel. to be used as soon as it is received. However, in any technical, complex, or sensi- Occasionally, however,itisnecessary to 4) tivearea, and mostallroutine events, the distribute a story on a HOLD FOR RELEASE well-prepared and edited standard Navy news basis. This tag, along with the authorized date of releaseplaced in the hands of the media simul- release, is attached to important feature stories. taneously,supplyingallwithidentical Itisusually types in the spot where FOR informationremainsthemostsatisfactory IMMEDIATE RELEASE appears in the sample method of news dissemination. release form. A Navy news releaseisan official Navy Let's assume that CNO acccepts a speaking statement prepared in news story form. It is engagement in your city. If an advance copy of usually prepared by a JO, and edited and the speech is available, it may be released to approved by a PAO through the authority of the news media on a HOLD FOR RELEASE basis. officer in command. As a JO, you will be This would give news media several advantages. concerned .more with the Navy news release than First, newspapermen covering the event would with any other method of news dissemination. not have to take notes of the speech. They Most public affairs offices, particularly at would merely check their future release to make larger commands, use a printed heading for their sure CNO followed the text. Second, newsfilm, news releases. These are attractive andhelp TV, or radio people may not want to film or media identify the source of the release more record the entire speech. With an advance copy quickly, but they are by no means necessary. If of it in their possession, they could film only a printed heading isused, keep itsimple, key portions. Third, if the speech is important, informational, appropriate, and in good taste to enough, newspapers may decide to publish it cover all types of releases. The news value of the verbatim. The advance copy would permit them material, and not the package it comes in, is the to set the speech in type beforehand so that it important thing. A sample release format is could be published immediately after delivery. shown in figures 4-2 and 4-3. In general, however, news media prefer to use Certain information, however, should always news as soon as it is received. Newsmen take be included in the heading of a release. If you pride in bringing facts to light, not in with- don't use a printed form, make sure your release holding them. Never give them a story marked format includes: HOLD FOR RELEASE unless you have a good reason. 1. Name, address, zip code, and telephone number of originating command 2. Release date (when the material may be RELEASE NUMBERS.As a means of quick used by media) reference and orderly filing, a release number is 3. A release number assignedtoallout-going stories. There are various systems of assigning release numbers. Most commands follow the practice of beginning News releases should be double-spaced, typed a news series at the beginning of each year. The on one side of a sheet of paper only, and legibly firstrelease sent out in1974, for example, reproduced. Economy directives regarding dupli- would have a release number of 1-74. The cation on both sides do not apply to news second release would be 2-74, and so forth. All releases. releasesare numbered consecutively inthis manner until the end of the year. It must be TIMING OF NEWS RELEASES.The timing pointed out herethatre ,se numbersre of news releases is almost as important as their assigned to each story, no' to each copy of 4 content. An improperly timed or "slugged" story. If cne release is sent to 17 different handout may be lost in the editor's shuffle media, all 17 copies should bear the same release simply because it is poorly dined. number. 54 48 BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 4 GATHERING AND DISSEMINATING NAVY NEWS

#* NEWS RELEASE mander First Fleet

Flagship: USS PROVIDENCE (CLO-6) Phone: 435-9465

FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE RELEASE # 1-73 January 12, 1973

SHORT HEADLINE HELPS EDITORS IDENTIFY STORY'S NEWS PEG

WITH THE FIRST FLEET, Jan. 12 -- This is the recommended

first-page format for Navy news releases. It is for immediate

rel !se under a dateline. The "heading" contains the office

of origin, telephone number, the release number and the date.

Other recommended styles of datelines are!

1. For release origine*ing ashore:

SAN DIEGO, Calif., Jan. 12

2. For releeses originating at sea'

ABOARD THE USS JOHN F. KENNEDY A.T SEA, Jan. 12

If there La more than one page of copy in a Navy news

release, end each page, except the last, with the word 'more."

- more - .111

1619.1 Figure 4.2. Recommended &stooge format for Navy news releases. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Navy News Release Format - -2

Secohd and subsequent pages ofthe release should be

"slugged" for identity and numbered asshown above.

Don't hyphenate words between lines,and don't break

sentences or paragraphsbetween pages. Paragraphs are

indented five spaces. Begin your first paragraph about

one-half of the way down the first page.

The copy itself should be neatlytypewritten, double

spaced in lines about 60 charactersin length with one-inch

or better margin allaround. This allows the editor to edit

or make notes right onthe release.

When a number of copies of a releaseis necessary, use

Mimeograph, Ditto, MUltilith or anyother method of reproduction

legible which produces copy quickly. Make sure that each copy is involved, check and free of smudges. When a number of pages is blanks. to see that the pages arein order and that there are no

It should go without saying --don't clutter the newsman's

desk with a news release unless youtell him something that'

newsworthy.

Finish your story on the last pagewith either "-30-,"

"-end-" or "-USN-" to indicate theend.

-USN-

wrifitiNI"

165,9,2 Figure 43.Recommandal second and sulnaquantpage format forNavy news raleates.

50 56 Chapter 4GATHERING AND DISSEMINATING NAVY NEWS

SPOT NEWS ANNOUNCEMENTS NEWS CONFERENCES When an event of immediate arvi urgent news interest occurs within the command, such as an unscheduled VIP visit or an accident involving Whenever a news event is of great importance casualties, all available and properly releasable to the local public or there is a visit by a facts are issued promptly and without waiting prominent official, a command calls a news untila complete account is compiled. Spot conference and sends invitations out toall news of this type is usually released by bulletin interested media. InformAtion is released at a or memorandum form. However, if circum- news conference through a senior naval officer stances require, it may be read over the tele- or other Navy spokesman, an individual involved phone. Spot news is always issued FOR IM- in unclassified activity of public interest, an MEDIATE RELEASE. expert in newsworthy projects, survivors of an accident, and several other sources. Often,after an advance release goes out announcing the intended visit of a VIP or some FEATURE RELEASES other event of significance, the media themselves will request a news conference. Features or "time releases" differ from spot If possible, or if time permits, information news mainly in the degree of immediacy; that is, kits (discussed in the previous chapter) should it makes littledifference whether particular be prepared to supplement information made news accounts are passed along to the general public at news conferences. public today, tomorrow, or next week. Avoid if possible, requesting media to submit A feature may concern previously undisclosed questions in advance. When considered desirable, developments dating back into the past or some as in cases where highly technical answers would upcoming event or anniversary, and must con- be required for certain questions, correspon- tain a high degree of general human interests dents should be so advised. When written ques- This type of release is usually made in writing tionsare volunteered,detailed answers are but may be disseminated through an interview normallypreparedand disseminatedtoall or news conference. Often it lends itself to attendingmediarepresentatives immediately pictorial treatment by still or motion pictures. preceding the conference. Feature news is issued for both immediate and future release. A news conference can be abused. There is only one reason to call a news conference: to release information which cannot be covered ADVANCE RELEASES adequately by a news release. A news conference should not be used solely as a prestige vehicle. It Advance releases are issued concerning events should be called only if there is something to scheduled or anticipated for the future, and are say. Most media cannot spare the personnel for generally on a HOLD FOR RELEASE basis, this type of coverage. The quickest way to specifying exact times, to ensure simultaneous alienate a newsman is to make him cover in use by all interested media and to prevent person what he could have covered over the premature disclosure. An advance release often phone or via release. is accompanied by an invitation to media repre- A news conference can do a lot for the Navy sentatives to attend an event, and usually supple- if used properly. It establishes public esteem, mented by "followup" releases. Official photo- erases controversy and shows the Navy has graphs, printed programs, or other material nothing to hide. Newsmen are given the oppor- providing background in depth for a forth- tunity to ask questions and get all the informa- coming event are often enclosed with an advance tion they want, anditclears up misunder- release. Chapter 7 covers advance and followup standings. Finally, it enables all media to get the releases. same information at the same time.

51 51 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

INTERVIEW unspecific description of the individual imparting the information. In such cases, the ground An interview differs from a news conference rules are clearly understood and agreed to by all becauseitisusuallyinitiated by a media participants. In most cases, especially when the representative and involves communication of subject is not of a really technical nature, these information from a responsible nay.1 spokesman briefings are conducted by the public affairs to only one newsman. officer.

PERSONAL APPEARANCES BACKGROUND BRIEFINGS Personal appearances include formal speeches Background briefings differ from a routine and informal remarks by naval spokesmen at news conferenceor interview only in the public or semipublic meetings, participation in provision that a precise source is not identified public forums or Radio/TV programs, and other in the newsmen's stories. The content or source contacts with the public directly (whether or of a story written from a briefing is usually not reported by news media) in which informa- attributed to a "Navy spokesman," "informed tion is released in such a way as to appear as an military sources" or some other truthful, but official news announcement.

If CHAPTER 5

BASIC NEWSWRITING

In Chapter 4, you learned how Navy news was the framework of this discussion, several cf the gathered and disseminated to the media. This examples given might just as well be discussed chapter will deal with recognizing the elements under different elements. which make a news story and how these Remember, too, that this is just one possible elements are used in the construction of the classification;another textbook might have story. classified these elements in slightly different categories. What chiefly concerns youas a student Journalist is not so much memorizing a RECOGNIZING NEWS set of categories as developing your understanding of what constitutes an interesting news If you were to ask a group of newsmen what story. makes a story newsworthy, no two would give exactly the same answer. However, all would probably list, in slightly different terms, certain elements which when present determine a story's newsworthiness. Immediacy

A story which has just happened is news;one ELEMENTS OF NEWS that happened a few days agoishistory. Immediacy is timeliness. Few events of major For the purposes of this manual we will use significance can stand up as news if they fail to the following 10 categories as those covering the meet the test of timeliness. There is no point in major elements of news: submitting a news release on a routine change of command that occurred four days ago; the event is not big enough to overcome the time lag. A newspaper looks foolish if it publishes a news 1. Immediacy 8. Sex story, and after reading it, a subscriber says, I 2. Proximity 7. Emotion heard about that two days ago." 3. Consequence 8. Prominence An event that occurred some timeago, 4. Conflict 9. Suspense however, may still be timely if it has just been 5. Oddity 10. Prowess revealed. A newly discovered diary of John Paul Jones or the disclosure of a startling scientific accomplishment that occurred months ago, but has just been declassified are examples. In these If any one of these elements is present, a cases, the immediacy element revolves around story has news value, but many stories contain the fact that the news was revealed or disclosed more than one element. This latter fact must be TODAY. An up-to-the-minute touch is provided kept in mind in studying the material that by words such as "newly disclosed," "revealed." follows, for though the 10 elements are used as "divulged," or "announced today."

53 59 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Proximity gling to land a crippled plane or a coxswain's hr lie efforts to keep his crowded boat from Readers are interested in what happens close sviaping in heavy seas are other examples. to them. Proximity is the nearness of an event to the reader or listener and how closely it touches his life. People are interested mainly in them- Oddity selves, their families, their ships or stations, their friends, and their home towns.If Captain The unusual or strange will help lift a story Swansom relieves Captain Lehman as command- out of the ordinary. If an ordinary man jumps ing officer of NAS, North Island, it is news in out of an ordinary plane with an ordinary the San Diego area and in the two officers' home parachute and makes an ordinary landing, there towns. It is not news in Huntsville, Alabama, is no news values. But if the man has only one where no one knows either captain or cares leg, this is news. Or if his parachute fails to open particularly who commands a naval air station in and he lands safely, this is news. A sailor named California. Improvement or progress stories are B. A. Sailor is a good angle. So is the helicopter important in their degree of proximity. that towed a ship, the man that bit his dog, or The Navy's home town news program is based the plane that shot itself down with its own on this element. When JohnFedorko, seaman cannon fire. apprentice, USN, reports to the USS Waters, it's news for his home town paper. Backhome in Sex Barnesboro,Pennsylvania,heisnot John Fedorko, seaman apprentice, USN. He is Mr. Michael Fedorko's son, John, who used to help Sometimes sex is the biggest single element in news, or at least it appears to be the element hisfather in the coal mines and date the prettiest girls in the town. He is someone the that attracts readers the most. Consider all the readers know. The element of proximity is storiesinpapers whichinvolve men and present to a high degree. womensports, financial news, society, and crime. Sex, in discussing news elements, covers far more than Raquel Welch's impending visit to Consequence your command. The element of sex rangesfrom front-page sensationalism to society news involy News of change or news which affectshuman ing engagements and marriages. relations is news of consequence. The more Stories and accompanying pictures of movie people affected, the greater the news value. A starlets or other prominent beauties visiting your story on the advancement of 3000 pettyofficers ship or station are loaded with sex. But any type has consequence within the Navy,especially to of news which overemphasizes the "cheesecake" those who took the exams. A congressional act element is considered poor taste for an official which raises the pay of everyone in theArmed Navy release and is to be avoided. Forces is of great consequence both tothe Navy and to the public, which foots the billand also benefits frum the increased purchasing power of Emotion the serviceman, The emotion element, sometimes called the human interest element, covers all the feelings Conflict that human beings have, including happiness, sadness, anger, sympathy, ambition, hate, love, Sporting events, wars, and revolutions arethe envy,generosity,andhumor. Emotionis most common examples ofconflict in the news. comedy; emotion is tragedy; 'itis the interest Man may be pitted against man, teamagainst man has in mankind. A good humaninterest team, nation against nation, or managainst the story can range from a real "tear jerker" to a natural elements. A story about apilot strug- rollicking farce. 54 60 Chapter 5 BASIC NEWSWRITING

Prominence IDENTIFYING DOMINANT NEWS ELEMENTS Prominenceisa one-word way of saying "names make news." When a person is promi- Just how are these key elements applied in nent, like the President of the United States, judging the newsworthiness of an event? almost anything he does is newsworthyeven his First of all, the newsworthiness of a story church attendance. Several hundred civilians depends on the strength or intensity of the news may visit your ship or station in the course of a elementsitcontains. The more intense the month without raising a stir. But if one happens elements the more newsworthy the story. to be the governer of the state, you've got a After gathering material for a news story, you news story packed with prominence. Promi- will normally find that one or more elelments nence is not restricted or reserved for VIPs only. overshadow the others in intensity. Theseare Some places, things, and situations have promi- the DOMINANT ELEMENTS. This is sometimes nence. The White House, the Pentagon, Peking, referred to as the NEWS PEG. Christmas, the mini-skirt craze, the release of A news peg is the most significant or interest- POWsall these awaken interest. ing fact in a story. It is featured in the first paragraph, and all other facts revolve around it. In other words, it is a foundation around which Suspense you construct the facts of your story. For just a few moments, put yourself in this You most often see the suspense element ina hypothetical situation and assume that you are a day-by-day or hour-by-hour account of a desper- JO assigned to the Public Affairs Office, NAS ate search for a lost submarine, in a story of Moffett Field, California. The facts of the story, rescue operations in a mine where men are for which you have been given the task of trapped, or in the efforts made to rescue a Navy readying for a 1400 release to the local media, diver trapped in the wreckage of a sunken ship. are: A news story does not build to a climax as a mystery does. Still, putting the most important 1. Lt. John K. Stokes, USN, son of Mr. and facts first does not destroy the suspense of many Mrs. James F. Stokes of 2714 Caspian St., Long stories because the utlimate outcome isun- Beach, California, is a pilot attached to Fighter known and is usually revealed in progressive, Squadron 27 at NAS Moffett. periodic installments. 2. At 9 a.m. (always use civil terminology for external media) Lt. Stokes took off from the Naval Air StationinaSupersonic F 1 1F-1 "Tiger" for a gunnery practice over the Mojave Progress Desert. 3. At 9:20 a.m., while flying at 13,000 feet In our space-age society, we are interested in altitude, Lt. Stokes put his plane into a shallow man's exploration of the moon and other dive and fired a few bursts from his cannon. celestialbodies.Therefore, developments of When he pulled out of the dive a few seconds more powerful and advanced rockets to propel later, something smashed the plexi-glass canopy manned space flights are of great interest to of his plane. most Americans. But progress doesn't have to be 4. Stunned and bleeding, Lt. Stokes fought dramatic. For example, an improvement in desperately to control his damaged plane. He mooring lines, shoe leather, or paper clips can be finally managed to crash land in an orange grove significant progress. There is a great deal of about 35 miles from his point of ileparture. progress in Navy news stories. The Navy is 5. The forced landing sheared off the plane's constantlymakingprogressinseamanship, wings and caused considerable damage, but the weapons systems, aeronautics, nuclear propul- pilot escaped serious injury. He walked away sion, medicine, habitability, education, human from the crash but collapsed from shock and relations, leadership, and other fields. loss of blood. 55 61 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

6. After an emergency blood transfusion and examples. Your job is to provide a full account treatment for shock, Lt. Stokes is recovering at of a spot news story as soon as possibleeven in the NAS hospital. Doctors report his condition cases where the general effect isunfavorable to is good. the Navy. 7. A preliminary investigation into the cause CREATED NEWS is generally concerned with of the accident revealed that Lt. Stokes actually something the Navy has done or plans to do that shot himself down. His jet, traveling at speeds we want the public toknow about. Examples close to 900 mph, overtook the cannon bursts include air shows, open house, change of com- he had fired seconds earlier, causing thefreak mand, unveiling new ships, planes or weapons, accident. construction programs,specialachievements, Now that we know the facts in the story, let ship arrivals and many of the other day-to-day us see if we can determine the mostdominant events of Navy life. Your job is tobring the elements. Figure 5-1 will help you analyze them. information to the attention of news media, Elements have been classifiedin degrees of usually through a Navy news release. VERY STRONG, STRONG, WEAK, VERY WEAK AND NONE. As you can see, the elements of immediacy, CLASSES OF NEWS STORIES proximity, and oddity are listed as strong. They are dominant elements in this story,with oddity Most Navy news stories fall into four main taking a decided edge over the other two. They categories. They are: hard news, feature, sports, will be combined in the news peg, which will be and society stories. featured in the beginning of the story. The news The HARD NEWS story is designed primarily peg for this story could be writtenlike this: to inform.Itusually concerns a news item involving or affecting the readers, listeners or "A Navy plane was shot down by its own viewers. The hard news story has usually taken gunfire near San Jose today. The plane, piloted place since a previous issue of a newspaper or a by Lieutenant James F. Stokes ... radio or TV newscast. Much of the material As the story is developed, the other facts are found in daily papers (especially front page introduced to complement or supplement the items) or newscastsareinthe hard news dominant elements featured in the news peg. category. Figure 5-2lists a few other examples of The FEATURE story is about an event or analyzing dominant elements for the news peg. situation that stirs the emotion or imagination. The first element listed is the strongest. The The event may or may not have taken place, or others, if there are any, are supporting elements. the situation may or may not have arisen since Note that immediacy and proximity are not the last issue of a periodical or deliveryof a listed as dominant elements, unless they actually newscast. The feature story is designedprimarily overshadow the other elements. Immediacy is to entertain, but it also serves to createinterest present in practically every story because the or to inform thereader. It may be about such facts must be NEW to be considered NEWS. subjects as a sailor with the unusual hobby of Proximity is also present in practically every collecting 18th century etchings, a command local story. that has adopted a stray goat as a mascot, a Navy cook who worked in a leadingFrench restaurant before he enlisted, or, in a serious TYPES OF NAVY NEWS vein,theplight of achild who has been orphaned by an automobile accident. Most Navy news (and all other news as well) The SPORTS story may be handled as either can be classified aseither SPOT NEWS or hard news or a feature. These stories chronicle CREATED NEWS. the activities of athle' c teams, discuss upcoming SPOT NEWS just happens. A ship runs games and detail the accomplishmentsof sports aground. A plane crashes. A heroic rescue takes figures. In most cases of Navy sports, unless place in a storm-tossed sea. These are just a .".3w teams are prominent, such as that of the Naval Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING

NEWS ELEMENT DEGREE OF INTENSITY JUSTIFICATION

Immediacy Strong Accident occurred this morning. Story will be released this afternoon.

Proximity Strong Accident occurred locally. Squadron and pilot are attached locally.

Consequence Weak Measures will undoubtedly be taken to prevent further recurrence of this type, but this one incident in itself does not affect a great number of people.

Conflict Weak The pilot's struggle for survival is worth mentioning, but more details are necessary to make this element strong.

Oddity Very Strong Nothing like this has been recorded before.

Sex None

Emotion Very Weak The reader will sympathize with the pilot, but not beyond the extent one human being sympathizes for another human being in an unfortunate situation.

Prominence None The pilot is not widely known.

Suspense Weak Although the facts, as presented here, do not lend themselves to suspended interest, the story has a certain amount of drama and suspense.

Progress Weak Progress in aviation may eventually result from this situation, but there's nothing in the facts which will im prove mankind'shealth, comfort, or happiness.

185.7 Figure 51 .Analyzing news elements.

. 63 57 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

NEWS ITEM DOMINANT ELEMENT

Today is the final day for filing your 1972 income tax Immediacy return. Consequence

A Navy flier, who braved enemy ground fire to locate a Emotion downed fellow airman over North Vietnam, has been posthumously presented the Navy Cross. The Administration is near a final decision--perhaps it Consequence will come next week--on how much of a pay raise it will seek for the Armed Forces. President Nixon has sent to the Senate for confirmation Prominence the names of 50 flag rank selectee, which includes the Sex name of Captain Alene B. Druek. Captain )ruek, a Nurse Corp selectee, will be the Navy's first woman flag officer.

Seaman Floyd M. Pirtle, son of Mr. and Mrs. Floyd Proximity (in the Pirtle of Route 2, Fayetteville, Tennessee, is currently Fayetteville area) patrolling the Western Pacific with the Seventh Fleet aboard the Attack Aircraft Carrier USS Kitty Hawk. A Navy officer, who had never taken controls of an Oddity aircraft, brought an Air Force spotter plane in for a Suspense rough but successful landing recently. The incident came about after the pilot was killed by ground fire during a routine obseNation mission over the Mekong Delta. More new weapons systems than before, an improved Progress retention rate, better housing, and an increase in Prominence minority recruiting were some of the accomplishments that John H. Chafee was proud to list from his 3/2 years as Secretary of the Navy. The Navy midshipmen sank the Duke University 'Blue Conflict Devils* 34.7 today in the Oyster Bowl.

The first female seaman qualified today as a deep sea Sex diver at the Washington Navy Yard's Deep Sea Diving Oddity School. 1

185.8.1111.2 Figure 6.2.Identifying dominant news elements. Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING Academy, the material is aimed at ship and long a problem to men, was never a station publications. problem to the whale." The SOCIETY story, which may also be handled either as hard news or a feature, Perhaps this quotation is familiar to you. It is primarily concerns wives, daughters, and other from Moby Dick, one of the greatest sea stories family activities. Most often Navy society stories ever written. It was published more than 100 deal with the activities of officers and enlisted years ago and is still read today. Its author, wives' clubs, the happenings of the teenage set, Herman Melville, was known for his moving weddings, and local charity events. literary style. If a modern journalist were writing Other categories of stories frequently used in this piece for a newspaper, he might put it on metropolitan newspapers include interpretive paper like this: stories (where the reporter attempts to give an in depth analysis and survey of the causes or "The North-West Passage, long sought by possibleconsequencesofimportantnews man, may be known and used by whales. events),science writing (when the reporter "American and British sailors have re- attemptstoexplaininlayman'slanguage ported finding the barbs of harpoons from scientific and technological happenings), con- Greenland in the bodies of whales killed in sumer stories (where the media attempts to help the North Pacific.In some cases the their audience buy more wisely, maintain prod- wounds were only a few days old. This has ucts and homes better, cook or garden better, led some whalers to believe that whales etc.), and financial news (stories of business, must use some short cut from the North commercial or investment interest). Writers of Atlantic to the North Pacific." such stories are usually expected to have an academic background or experience in their And that is the difference between literary subject matter as well as the abilities to observe writing of 100 years ago and newspaper English and write well. today. Media writing is geared to the public, not the professor. The purpose is to inform, not to impress. All the frills are stripped away. Un- NEWS STYLE necessary wording cost the media money in the terms of time (electronic) or space (print). Many great writers have been known for their Newspapers are read in a hurry. They are read dramatic styles,vividdescriptions, and the at breakfast, on the subway, against the blare of eloquent conversation of their characters. It is radio or television, or over someone's shoulder. obvious however that these great writers were Many readers scan the headlines and had only not concerned with news style writing or the the opening paragraphs of a few articles. These fundamentals of newswriting. Take the follow- readers have neither the time nor the uesire to ing quotation for example. wade through literary writing. Many may have -limited educations. Surveys show that the aver- ."It is a thing well known to both age newspaper reader has the reading ability of a American and English whaleships, and as 12-year old child. well athing placed upon authoritative Does this mean that you have to write for record years ago by Scoresby, that some 12-year olds? Not at all. We are speaking of whales have been captured far north in the the readers' ability to grasp ideas but rather of Pacific, in whose bodies have been found their ability to understand difficult words. There the barbs of harpoons darted in the Green- is a great difference. 'rake this paragraph for land seas. Nor is it to be gainsaid, that in example. some of these instances two assaults could not have exceeded very many days. Hence, Gravitation is omnipresent; it is exerted by inference, it has been believed by some by every body on every other, no matter whalemen, that the North West Passage, so how remote or minute. Between two given 59 65 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

objects, its force varies directly with the ABCsOF JOURNALISM product of the two masses and inversely with the squares of the distance between Some principles of newswriting that you must their centers. Exerting itself throughout the apply everytime you attempt to put words on universe, itis gravitation that keeps the paper follow: cosmos in equilibrium. ACCURACY.If a writer has to pick one principle which he will never violate, this should be the one. To fall down in this area is to discredit your entire writing effort. As a JO, you This paragraph is obviously too difficult for will be working with facts. These facts will 1 adult with a 12-year reading level. Yet the involve persons, places, and things. They will adult mind could grasp the idea involved if we involve names, ages,titles, rank or ratings, translate the paragraph into simple English such addresses, and descriptions. You will work with as this: facts which are both familiar and unfamiliar to you. You cannot afford to be casual in your approach to facts. Your readers will often judge All bodies attract each other. This is true the Navy on what you say and how you say it. no matter how small or far apart they may An easy way to lose the public's respect and be. The heavier two objects are, the more confidence is by being careless in your handling they pull on each other. The farther apart of facts. When you send a story to a newspaper they are, the weaker this force becomes. In the editor depends on you for accuracy in every measuring the pull, distance is particularly got. important, for if you double the distance, The Navy news release heading which appears the force is cut to a fourth of its former on every story you distribute means that the strength. This force is called gravitation. information it contains is reliable and that it has Because of it, the earth, sun, moon, and been approved officially by the Navy. A mistake stars all pull against each other. The forces in a news story implies that the Navy is careless balance, and everything stays in its proper and undependable. Datelines tell when and place. where the story is written and should appear on all stories written for release. In the text of the story, when and where may refer back to the dateline. Almost any idea, no matter how complicated, ATTRIBUTION relates to accuracy. It means can be expressed in simple language. As a Navy that you name the person who makes a state- Journalist, you may have to explain some fairly ment which may be challenged. Good quotes technical ideas to readers who are not familiar liven a story, give it color, and aid in develop - with military life. You will have to do it in men of coherence. Attribution also ensures that language they will understand. It is up to you to the reader does not get the impression the do the work of simplification, not your readers. statementisthewriter'spersonal opinion. If they find your writing is over their heads, Attribution should never be used in a story they will skip your piece and go on to something merely to flatter a person by publicizing his or that is easier to read. If this happens, you are her name. not doing your.job. Also, remember that the story you write for general news media will BREVITY.The questionisoften asked, probably be read by someone with a Ph.D. How "Should I be brief in my writing or complete?" do you satisfy both; A good writer can present By all means, be brief, but not at the expense of the information so the less educated can under- completeness. The key is to boil down your stand and so the more intelligent won't become writing and elininate garbage. A compact piece bored. of writing is frequently much stronger than a 60 66' Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING lengthy story. An example is Lincoln's Gettys- make them think for themselves by an unbiased burg Address. This speech has outlived a flock of presentation of the facts. long harangues by later statesmen. One of the reasons for its survival is its brevity. UNITY.A news story should deal with one basic topic. There may be many facts and ins and outs to the story, but it is still one story. If CLARITY.Nothing ismore discouraging you set out to write a story on the services and than to read an article and then realize you do activities available at the enlisted men's club, not know what you've read. A similar frustra- and end up with a biography of the club tion arises when trying to follow directions on manager, the story lacks unity. The simple assembling toys, particularly when the instruc- solution frequently is to write two stories, rather tions read "even a five-year-old can assemble this than trying to combine a mass of information toy." You can't because the directions read as if into one. they were written in a foreign language. Assume that if there is any chance of misunderstanding, readers will misunderstand. Reread what you THE LANGUAGE OF NEWSWRITING have written looking for points where misunderstanding could occur. Writtenlanguageismade up of three elements: WORDS, SENTENCES, and PARA- COHERENCE.An article which skips illogi- GRAPHS. Itis the way these elements are cally from topic to topic and back again in a handled that makes the difference between jumbled, befuddled manner lacks coherence. literary and news English. Let us look briefly at Coherence means sticking together, and that's these elements separately. what stories and articles should do. Facts should follow facts in some kind of reasonable order. It may be logical order, chronological order, place Words order, or order of importance, depending on the subject; but order of one kind of another is vital. Words are your basic tools. Like any skilled Outiining will often help. technician, you should be able to select the best tools to do the best job. This means you should EMPHASIS.Make sure your writing em- use words that say exactly what you mean so phasizes what you want it to. You assure this in they can be understood by others. newswriting by petting the most important fact Every word used in a news story should add first (the lead-discussed later). There are other to the picture you are building in the minds of types of arrangement for emphasis that are used your readers. If you use an unnecessary, vague, in feature stories or in editorials. More will be orunfamiliarword,thispicturebecomes presented on this later. blurred. If it becomes too blurred, it may give the reader a distorted picture of the facts. This is OBJECTIVITY.To report news accurately, a form of inaccuracy which is just as bad as you must keep yourself detached from the putting the wrong facts down on paper. happenings and present an impersonal, unbiased, Itis an axiom of newswriting that words unprejudiced story. This is why you never see a which do not work for you, work against you. good newsman at an accident running around Here are a few tips on making words work for saying, "Isn't this horrible? I feel so sorry for you. the family. Why, just the other day I was talking to de Jed, and now he's dead." These may very USE SHORT, COMMON WORDS.Short, well be the JO's feelings, but he attempts to common words are easy to understand when in keep aloof in order to give an objective report. It many cases long words aren't. If you must use a is not your job to influence people directly, but longer word, make sure you are using it to to tell them what is going on. You direct their convey a special meaning, not just for the sake thinking only to the limited extent that you of using a big word. Why use CONTRIBUTE if

61 67 MEW JOURNALIST 3 & 2

GIVE meens the same thing? This also applies to into your news stories. If strong verbs are used, VERACITY for TRUTH, MONUMENTAL for you will find they help eliminate reliance on BIG, APPREHENSION for FEAR, CANINE for adverbs to do the work. In newswriting, adverbs DOG, and countless others. Practically every often do nothing more than clutter writing. part of speech contains long words which may be replaced by shorter and more exact ones. The WEAK (passive voice):Thevisitors same principle applies to phrases. Why say werewarmly "afforded an opportunity" when "allow" is receivedby more exact, or why use "due to the fact that" Captain Smith instead of "because?" in his office. STRONGER (active voice):Captain Smith AVOID GOBBLEDYGOOK.Gobbledygook greeted the vis- is confusing writing, often marked by pseudo- itors in his of- technical language that readers can't understand. fice. In writing a technical story, don't parrot the words some technical-minded researcher pours AVOID MILITARY JARGON.For those in out. Simplify. Ask him, "What does this mean in the Navy, the phrase "general quarters" is clear everyday English?" Few people, for example, enough. But for others, the phrase may means know what "arteriosclerosis" means. But when nothing; to some, it may seem to mean the area you say"hardening of the arteries," they where the general is housed. To assume that all immediately understand. your readers know general quarters means ;he command to man battlestationsfor crew AVOID WORDINESS.Many inexperienced members aboard ship is to make false assump- writers put unnecessary words into their news tion. You don't impress your readers by using copy. Call a spade a spade, not "a long-handled words and phrases they don't understand; you agricultural implement utilized for the purpose only irritate them. However, in some situations of dislodging the earth's crust." itisappropriateto use common military phrases. BL SPECIFIC.Inexactness is just as bad as wordiness. Readers want to know specific facts. SPELLING AND GRAMMER.A JO, or a person interested in becoming a Navy Journalist, VAUGE:Thousands of fans were turned away that afternoon. should have a"....itterthan average spelling ability. He should also possess a good command SPECIFIC:Three thousand fans were turned away before game time. of the English language as far as correct grammes is concerned. Therefore, no extensive lesson is AVOID TRITE OR HACKNEYED given in this area of study, although some basics EXPRESSIONS.They are the mark of either an are presented in chapter 9. amateur or a lazy writer. Some particularly bad examples include the following: One goal of every good writer is not to learn to spell perfectly, but to learn to spell well cheap as dirt smart as a whip enough so that he can spot a mistake when he fat as a pig nipped in the bud puts words on paper.If in doubt, use the good as gold blushing bride dictionary. Dictionaries are standard stock items grim reaper wee small hours in the Navy and every public affairs office ripe old age picture of health should have one. crystal clear quick as lightning USE A STYLE GUIDE.In newswriting the USE STRONG, ACTIVE VERBS.Whenever word STYLE refers to the spelling, punctuation, possible, use active voice and the simple past capitalization, abbreviation, and similar mechan- tense. They inject life, action, and movement ical aspects of grammar used in preparing copy Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING

(a term used to describe all news manuscripts). sentences. For example, you might use a 4-word Most newspapers and other periodicals have sentence, then a 15-word sentence, then an t'- r.i, own style sheets or local interpretations of 8-word, followed by a 30-word. This keeps your ,1}1.. rules. writing from becoming singsong.There are file important thing to remember about style considerations to keep in mind for sentence use: isconsistency. The recommended guide for preparing military news is the Armed Forces DON'T CLUTTER.Never crowd too many News Style Guide (NAVSO P2456.) However, details into one sentence. Although a compound any locally plepared style guide orstyle sheet is or complex sentence may contain more than one fine as long as it is internally consistent and is thought, you should, for the most part, stick to suitable for your purpose. sentences which express one thought clearly and concisely. Otherwise the reader is apt to get lost in a mass of clauses and details. Sentences DON'T REPEAT.If you have put in the lead The second element of language is the sen- of your story that 61 people were killed in a tence. The simple declarative sentence which training accident, don't mention that 61 were consists of subject and verb, or subject, verb, killed again in the story. If the reader has and object is the most common form in normal, forgotten a fact, he can look back. Newspaper informal conversation. For this reason, it is the space is valuable; don't waste it with redun- best sentence for most newswriting. Notice how dancy. Refrain from beginning a sentence with the following sentence becomes more readable the same word as the last word in the previous and understandable when it is rewritten in two sentence and avoid beginning consecutive sen- simple sentences: tences alike unless you do it deliberately for emphasis. SENTENCE: Followinghisgraduation from the Naval Academy in 1948, Brown was assigned to the destroyer USS Rouls- Paragraphs ton, where he served for three years as assistant com- The most general guidellne for writing para- municationsofficerand graphs is that they should be kept reasonably junior watch officer. short. When you use short paragraphs, you give the reader facts and ideas in smaller packages REWRITE: Brown was graduated from which are easier for him to handle. The mind theNavalAcademyin can grasp a small unit of thought more easily 1948. He spent his first tour than a large unit. Also, most news copy is set in of sea duty aboard the de- narrow columns with only three to five words per stroyer USS Roulstonas line. This makes paragraphs of normal literary assistantcommunications length appear as extremely long, unrelieved gray officerand junior watch blocks of body type (more detail on typog- officer. raphy,the appearance and arrangement of printed matter,is contained in chapter17). Simplifying sentences is not difficult, but it These large, gray blocks of type are monotonous will take a little practice. In time, you can learn to the rAier's eye, thus difficult to read. to use just the right number of words to achieve Itis recommended that paragraphs be less maximum clarity without destroying smooth- than 60 words. Two or three sentences per ness. paragraph are just about right, but it is perfectly There are no absolute rules, but a fair guide is acceptable to have a one-sentence paragraph, or to try to keep sentences 30 words or lessand even a one-word paragraph which expresses a shoot for 17 to 20. Vary the length of your complete thought. 69 63 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Yet, a succession of very short paragraphs But most news stories are constructed in just may give a choppy effect to the writing. For the opposite fashion. The climax is presented best effect, alternate paragraphs of short and first. medium length. This method packs the most important facts, Never begin succeeding paragraphs with the together with the barest necessary explanatory same words or phrases. This, too, can cause a material, into the first paragraph (the SUM- monotonous effect which will soon discourage MARY lead) and then moves into the detailed the reLder. portion of the story (the BODY) by covering the facts in diminishing cider of importance. This form of newswriting is commonly known THE STRAIGHT NEWS STORY as the INVERTED PYRAMID style since, when diagrammed, the story appears as an upside- The major difference in style between literary down pyramid. See figure 5-3. English and newswriting English was discussed earlier in this chapter. There isalso a big difference in structure between the literary piece ADVANTAGES OF THE and a newspaper story. INVERTED PYRAMID Journalism and architecture have more in common than is evident at first glance. While the The inverted pyramid offers several distinct designing and planning of a building is far more advantages in newswriting, among which are: complicated than the construction of a news story, in principle both are the same. In each PRESENTS PERTINENT FACTS FIRST. case, space is a prime element. Foremost among these advantages is the fact An architect uses bricks, cement, and other materials; a news writer uses words as his bricks and cement. If the building lacks design and careful construction, it will collapse; if the news CLIMAX *::::: (Summary story is not carefully planned, it will only serve ad) to confuse the reader and discredit the publication in which it appears. .11:1111:ii:::!: Before a JO can present his facts, he first BODY ...iiii;;;;*iiiiii: (Facts Diminishing must understand them himself, appraise them in correctly, and organize them in an orderly and .:111:113:111:111

easily understood manner. ::::::!: -- This process of organization and selection ii:::::::::::iiiiiiiiiiiiiff*:::***:*:*%*.:::;.. begins when the JO sets out on .1i. assignment. He is rarely able to get his facts in the order in H: which they will appear in his final story. The :. MINOR process of legible note-taking provides the raw DETAILS materialfor construction °Ihis story, and certain proven guidelines serve as his blueprint for building the final product. In fiction, a short story or novel is normally I. constructed in chronological order. This means ...... the author starts from the beginning, sets the time and place, describes the scene, introduces .1::!1::::i:i : his characters, then slowly weaves the threads of 1":" his plots and subplots until a climax is reached, L: :4 usually near the end of the story. He deliber- 165.12 ately holds back the climax to build suspense Figure 5.3.The structure of the inverted and to make sure you read the entire story. pyramid news story. 64 Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING that most readers have neither the time nor the It is not necessary that a writer answer all, of desire to read every word of every story in a these questions in his lead sentence. The SUM- newspaper. Through use of the summary lead, MARY LEAD does, however, attempt to answer the JO focuses the reader's attention on the several of the more important ones. To insist news, arouses his interest, and allows him to upon answering the five Ws and H questions as a swiftly skim important facts. In other words, rigid format will lead to lengthy, cumbersome spill the whole story in the first paragraph. The leads that may be misleading or hard to read. reader can decide for himself whether to con- The lead contains the news peg and is the most tinue reading the details or to go on to some- important part of the story. It can either make thing else. But even if he stops there, the or break any news story. inverted pyramid form of writing has given him Try to use not more than 30 words in the the essential facts. The primary objective of a lead, but don't make this an inviolable rule. news story, then, is not to withhold informa- Some leads, if well written, may require 35 or tion, but to present the facts with rapid, simple even 40 words. On the order hand, manyor directness. perhaps mostrequire fewer than 30 words to accomplish their objective. FACILITATES PAGE LAYOUT.This A good lead may be a single word, a single method of story construction is a valuable tool sentence, two sentences, a paragraph, or even to the makeup man who often finds himself two paragraphs. Whatever form it takes it must with an eight-inch story and only six inches of answer the questions a reader would normally column space. If the story has been written in ask: "WHAT has happened or is about to invertedpyramidi form, it becomes a simple happen?" "WHO is involved;" "WHEN and matter of cutting lines of type from the bottom WHERE didithappen?" And, sometimes, of the story until it fits the available space, or "HOW and WHY did it happen?" An effective "jumping" (continuing) the story on another lead directs the reader's interest into the body pageall without damage to the important facts of the story. which appear at the top. There are several other types of leads in addition to the SUMMARY. News story leads FACILITATES HEADLINE WRITING. can take almost any grammatical form and are Headlines for news stories should tell the main sometimes classified in such descriptive terms as facts in the briefest form possible. If a story is PICTURE, BACKGROUND, CONSTRAST, written in the proper inverted pyramid style, the QUESTION, PUNCH, QUOTATION, DIRECT copyreader (who writes the headline) can find ADDRESS, and FREAK. These terms, known as these facts in the first paragraph. He won't have NOVELTY leads, refer to the "angle" the writer to search the entire story for headline material, chooses. Returning to the summary news lead, consider it the most often used in beginning the THE LEAD straight news story. The .most direct approach (and best method for an inexperienced writer to The opening paragraph of a news story is use in constructing a summary lead) is known referred to as the LEAD (pronounced "leed"). simply as featuring the most important element. The leadis the first and most important Featuring the most important element means paragraph of any news story.It attracts the exactly what itsays; the writer determines reader and gives him the important facts first. which of the five Ws and H is the most A key fundamental taught in classrooms the important to his story, and then places it at the first time newswriting is mentioned, and re- outset of his lead. Each of the example leads in peated through college level is: in writing a lead figure 5.4 features a different W or H as the for a straight news story, the writer must answer most important element. six basic questions about the event. They are: The leads in figure 5-4 are given to show how WHO? WHAT? WHERE? WHEN? WHY? and any element may be featured. The "why" HOW? element (to prevent a forest fire in this case) is 71 65 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

lityPk*k 4 'if S ,ZiAA-41eit.M7'v1.;

WHO A smoke jumper extinguished a blaze and prevented a forest fire in Gallatin National Forest, Wyo, yesterday by diverting a mountain waterfall over a burning three.

NOTE:this is an impersonal "who" lead. The "who" can be identified in general terms when the individual or group is not well known by name such as "three 14avy admirals," "a former secretary of the Navy," or "three Navy seamen." When the impersonal "who" lead is used, the actual name or names should be mentioned further down in the story.

MI MMMMM7GMD On MI,alb MI =0 dm OM MI6 SIM MI Mow =ID INNS WHAT A burning tree didn't become a forest fire in Gallatin National Forest, Wyo. yesterday because a smoke jumper diverted a small mountain waterfall.

=II MI MD RIM MI UM 1111 MEI alII OMB 41.11 IWO VIM ON Oa SIM I MI =ID MIR AMID MI MINE OM MB

WHEN Yesterday a smoke jumper prevented a foivst fire in Gallatin National Forest, Wyo. when he diverted a small mountain waterfall over a blazing tree.

11 UM am OM NM ISM MEM MEI saw IMO MO map =MD MI MI MOM =MI

WHERE. In Gallatin National Forest, Wyo. a smoke jumper yesterday prevented a forest fire by diverting a small mountain waterfall over a burning tree.

I=M OM MI SIM =II MO MIN OW IVO GEO I MEM 111111111MIN OM MID MN OMNI =NM GEM Ole MEM ME,OMNI =II MIN MIN OM

WHY To prevent a forest fire in Gallatin National Forest, Wyo., a smoke jumper yesterday diverted a small mountain waterfall over a blazing tree.

MI ON MOM MIS NM MO MI MOD =II NNW =II SIIIIP=NM GEM NINO Men 114111 Na =MD MN. MID MID aim ems

HOW By diverting a small mountain waterfall over a blazing tree in Gallatin National Forest, Wyo. yesterday a smoke jumper prevented a forest fire.

111113 FROM 54.Any element can he featured In the lest

66 72 Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING clearly understood and can be dropped out of by type or calssification. Their names are not most leads toavoid redundancy and extra important anyway. The ability to write is more wordage. Other summary lead examples are important to a JO than the ability to catego- presented in figure 5-5 which answers all or most rize. of the necessary five Ws or H. Those omitted are implied or unnecessary. The five summary lead examples in figure 5-5 Identity and Authority are all WHO leads. In each example, WHO is featured at the beginning of the lead, thus giving There are two other considerations to keep in it more prominence than the other Ws or H. mind when preparing news leads: IDENTITY More examples of summary leads are illustrated and AUTHORITY. in figure 5-6, with a different W or H featured at In most local stories, especially hometowners, the beginning of each. it is necessary to identify persons fully in the lead. For example, suppose you prepared a home town story on a Navyman who formerly NOVELTY AND FEATURE LEADS resided in Louisville, Ky. Not being very experienced, you turn in a lead like this: Although the summary lead is the simplest, safest and strongest of all leads used in straight "Seaman Eugene M. Brainer, USN, reported newswriting, most media like to add a little for duty February 6 aboard the heavy cruiser variety when leading into a story. USS Columbusnow operating in Western Pacific Feature leads an a vital part of newspaper waters." writing. The featureleadpermits taking a mundane straight news piece and transforming it Although you have answered all the Ws and H into a story which will capture the interest and except WHY and HOW, in this case unnecessary, empathy of the readers. your leadisstill incomplete. The story is Novelty leads differ from the summary lead in meaningless until you identify Brainer as being that they make no attempt to answer all of the from Louisville. Even then, an editor of a five Ws and the H. As the name implies, novelty Louisville newspaper will want a local angle on leads are NOVEL. They use different writing the sailor. The only angle available to you is the approaches to present different news situations name of Brainer'sparents and their home to attract the reader's attention and arouse his address. curiosity. You must, therefore, identify Brainer more Feature leads must fit the mood of the story. fully in your lead. It is unlikely that many of the If you intend to set a particular mood or point newspaper's readers would know him merely by of view in a story, your intent or tone should be name, and a city the size of Louisville (popula- set at the beginning of the story. tion about 400,000) might have more than one If the situation presents itself in which a Eugene M. Brainer. To localize the story and to novelty lead would be appropriate, by all means avoid confusion or misinterpretation, you would use it. Do not get into the habit, however, of include more identification. Here is the way the trying to write a novelty lead for every story, lead should be written: because they are not always adapted to every situation. It is easy for the unusual to become "Seaman Eugene M. Brainer, USN, son of Mr. commonplace if it is seen or heard too often. and Mrs. Mack Brainer of 70 N. Williams St., Novelty leadslosetheir effect if they are Louisville, Ky., reported for duty February 16 overused. aboard the heavy cruiserUSS Columbus,a unit Figure 5-7 gives various examples of novelty of the Pacific's Seventh Fleet." leads most commonly used in newswriting. Although the eight types described here are the As you can see, complete identification of a ones most commonly used, it is a mistake to person in the lead sometimes makes that lead assume that all news leads may be categorized long and cumbersome. But it cannoi be avoided

67 3 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

HOMETOWN ER

WHO AT SEA ABOARD USS KITTY HAWK-- Seaman John L.Slayton, USN, son of Mr. and Mrs. Robert K. Slayton of Route 3, Fayetteville, Tenn., WHAT reported for duty WHEN July 25 WHERE aboard the attack aircraft carrier USS KITTY HAWK.

ONO WWI= =INN mowMIND ma MOM MM. wows maw. =Nem MOM =IMO MIMI.ma& alMiliM .111MI =INN Mill 1011111M 1111 4MMIIM 1B, Imp. AWARD PRESENTATION

WHO Agana, Guam -- A Navy petty officer WHAT was awarded the commendation ribbon WHERE here WHEN todcy WHY fog saving the life of a five-year old girl HOW by rescuing her from the shark infested waters of Telefofo Bay.

.111=1.1 01111M.nimns OEN= MOM /MOM 1M =NO 111101 =MD MN= 011.0 !MID OEM =NM 411=MIND MN= ACCIDENT STORY

WHO Norfolk, Va., Jan 7-- A Navy seaman WHAT was ki Iled WHEN today WHY when his car collided with a bus WHERE near Wards Corner on Granby St. - - OE- - - - ONO =MOM - MOM - wImnani =norm - Maw. MONO 11=11O1 =Ma 41111M CHANGE OF COMMAND STORY

WHO San Diego-- Captain Winston P. Gregory, USN WHAT took command of the heavy cruiser USS ST PAUL (CA-73) WHEN today WHERE in shipboard ceremonies here at North Island. IMM IMO MEM MEND 11111111 411 MINIM 011.0 - OEMs - MEM.. =1111 alM10 MIEN116 =111.0 MINNS MINIM NOM - CONVENTION STORY

WHO NAS Alamedia, Calif. -- Forty-five members of the surviving 55 famed Doolittle Raiders WHERE were present here WHEN this week WHAT for a t;iree-day program which commemorated the 25th anniversary of the first American bombing raid of Japan.

166.14 Figure 5-5.Examples of summary leads by story category. 68 74 Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING

%Tr %117 "4:Vgri, ," rilfiViri4041111.AWArliffei.M:',4 41 wq-0.04.111f ',.oiLATght4, ,,..ettitt,Ontmet-6..-.' ..'L . tt. 440314 'rC1 DOMINANT FACT gliki: ,t.:t ,,t.rP LEAD EXAMPLE t.s 1,! f..4 g.Atecup vim ,Ay .4.11,%V4Vpit' 0 # is4( 4

WHEN: Sometimes the time element With only five seconds left to play, Navy plays an important part in :ISscored the winning touchdown to defeat 4. Army 36.30 in the annual classic this after- the story. ;,: !Linoon at Philadelphia.

41111 MIMEO IMNINI MIND IM MIND MM. rMI/41MM MINIM slIMI NNNMI a a a fet WHERE:If the setting of your 14 Three hundred miles above the earth's story is unusual or fPatmosphere, two Navy astronauts are especially important, orbiting the earth in a space craft at play it up at the beginn- 41; speeds more than 50 thousand mph. ing.

MOM IMMIM MMUS III1I IMMO MI= =Mb MUM NEMNINM IMM NMI= mmINO MINIM MEMO MMUS MOM AMIN MOD +up;

WHAT: When a thing or action in Bowling two consecutive 300 games was a story is noteworthyand the unprecedented accomplishment of overshadows the other Dick Hitchens, USN, a crewmember of facts, it too, should be the submarine tender USS NEREUS, featured in the beginning.

MIMS. MINI=1 MIME; OMNI MINA MOM MIMI goomb arm OM. Nom MEN IMMO IMINA a a =min MINIM MOM MIlmo GINIM

WHY: The motive, cause, or reason Because he was iaised in an orphanage may also an important himself, a veteran ilvvy combat pilot feature of the lead. is attempting to adopt two South Vietnamese children whose parents were killed in a VietCong attack on their village.

IMMO MM. NNMI.a 01110 a.NON MEM a Mom ammo MUM MINIM a ISMS - MINIM MEND MIIIMN MINIMS MIMI I11M MINIM a a MIMI

HOW: The circumstances or the By hurling a 20mm shell magazine from manner in whichsomething the destroyer USS MATTOX yesterday, is accomplished in a news a Navygunner's mate prevented severe story is often important. damage to his ship and possibly saved the lives of several crewmembers.

165.15' Figure 5.6. Summary leads featuring the most important element, 69 75 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

jn :v4!Fitini:14%).:XtegliatillitRt41:40144,..26017,:f7ilitegeNTEigrAfro %Veg,, .-213 ultitT 0%,r.r/ .04N IP4V;4; iiii./ECtiLEADAD .i)tt EXAMPLE rA-ilsoaaetatowspaXagioi:

CONTRAST: The contrast lead compares '0 Fifty years ago, the U.S. two opposite extremes, entered the first World War generally to dramatizea V:,f w;th a Navy of 4,376 officers, story.The comparisons I' 69,680 men, 54 airplanes,one most frequently used are airship, three balloons andone tragedy with comedy,age air station. with youth, the past with Today, there are more than the present, and the beau- ;k 745,000 active duty officers and tiful with the ugly. To be men, 910 ships and 8,260 air- effective, the contrast must craft in our Navy. be sharp and clear-cut.

aMM, =NS email* IMmINE. 0111M 4M MIIMMID MEMO% OMNI. smimio alma apaliMirs111, emu. Omito PICTURE: The picture lead drawsa Thin and unshaven, his clothes vivid word picture of the droc. '-g from his body likerags person or thing in the on a scarecrow, Lieutenant Frank story.It allows the reader Brown, USN, today told naval to see the person or thing authorities about his six-week as you saw it. ordeal in an open rubber boat in the South China Sea. MINIM emaima 01.110 4E41=1. MM. OININ Ib 4? IMI=No .1=., MINN* IMMO ,111 11 ,111, 411110111 BACKGROUND: The background lead is High seas, strong winds, and similar to a picture lead, ft heavy overcast provided the except for one important setting for a dramatic mission difference.It draws a of mercy in the Gulf of Tonkin vivid word picture of the on the first day of the new year. news setting, surroundings, or circumstances. 411111= aly110 4111111 .11111, allM 1 MOM II . fl WORM *Maga / MOM* aiNIN am MOM FREAK: The freak lead is the most For sale: One battleship. novel of the novelty leads. The Navy is thinking about It is called a freak lead inserting this advertisement.... because it is just that.It employs a playon words, Sammy Smith, who i$ juSt Seven, alliteration, poetryor an wa$ digging in the Sand at unusual typographical $am$on$ Beach today and gue$$ arrangement to introduce what he found? the facts in the story and to attract the reader's attention.

165.16.2 Figure 5.7.Types of Novelty LAids. 70 Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING

1.75,4?,?4;17.11,611074$4.P'1,5471, igritWORMAtigfirliM ). of!.4:' f4.1r, TYPE OF NOVELTY LEAD EXAMPLE . J

PUNCH: The punch lead consists of The president is dead. a blunt, explosive statement designed to surprise or jolt 1: A girl is attempting to enter the the reader. Naval Academy.

IIIMM=III OMNI I MO =MS M =I= OM= OMB ID MIND4111 SIM .11 MEN .1MM MEND IMII

DIRECT ADDRESS: The direct address lead is g Your pay will increase by 10 aimed directly at the reader 'I'. percent next month. and makes him a collabora- tor with facts in the story. EI You can receive a college

It usually employs the ,,..t education at Navy expense if a If II pronouns "you" or"your." fs you qualify under a new program Iannounced this week. kt AIM 01=0 =N. mi. aim ammo aINN aim ~In OM SIM ------4 How does pay in the Navy compare QUESTION: The question features 4 a pertinent query which with civilian wages? arouses the reader's '?. 11. curiosity and makes him 1 Has the space age affected the want to read the body of .1i role of the Navy? the story for the answers. R To be effective, the question must be phrased i! in such a way that the 1 reader cannot answer it immediately with a straight, 15v "yes" or "no."

=MON asil.111. OEM OM. MN= alIMINO NMI, MOM 11=1 - - - -- =0 Imo ams41111 MmloINNISOINIIIMO IM 11. OM. =NINE

QUOTATION: The quotation lead features "You really don't know what a short, eye-catching quote freedom is until you have had or remark, usually set in to escape from Communist quotation marks. A quote captivity," says Lieutenant lead should be used only Dengler, USNR, escapee from a when it is so important or Viet Cong imprisonment camp. remarkable that it overshadows the other facts in the story.

1.15.11.1 Figure 5.7.Types of Novelty Leads. (Continued)

71 77 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 in home town stories where identity is more admiral is in a position to know and speak about important than the action, especially if the such matters. action is weak as it is in the above example. Contrary topopularbelief,people don't In many instances, however, full identifica- believe "everything" they read in the news- tion is unnecessary or impractical for inclusion papers. Many of them, as a matter of fact, in the lead. In general, complete lead identifica- challenge any statement that conflicts with their tion is unnecessary and should be avoided when preconceived opinions. Using authority in a one or more of the following is true: story helps you overcome this natural skepti- cism. People will believe certain facts sometimes 1. The action overshadows the person or more readily if they know or respect the person persons involved. to whom they are attributed. 2. There are too many persons involved to Here are two simple rules governing the use of identify all of them by name and rate. authority in a news story: 3. The identification does not mean much to the readers in a particular area. 1. Use it when it appears that the reader may 4. The WHO is a prominent, widely-known challenge a statement. figure. 2. Use it when the name of the authority lends support or emphasis to the facts. When a person is not fully identified in the lead, he must be identified by name, rank or In the Navy the authority for many state- rating, title, duty station, and possibly home ments is frequently implied. If a story obviously town address elsewhere in the story. This identi- deals with Navy ships, Navy men, or Navy fication is also important for places and things in equipment, it is often unnecessary to use "THE a story. If you use the name of an unfamiliar NAVY ANNOUNCED TODAY" or similar ex- town or city in a story, at least identify it by the pressions. If a newspaper editor feels a statement state in which it is located. If you use the name must be attributed to the Navy, he will insert of a ship or an airplane, giveitstype or the authority for himself. It is a bad practice to classification. insert this phrase in every story merely for the Impersonal identification may be used in the sake of using it or just to get the wo,"Navy" lead when the news subject consists of several into the story. Itis also particularly bad to persons unfamiliar to the reader, such as groups attribute every news release to the captain or or organizations. Nonspecific what, where, and admiral by name, especially when the subject of wrens may also be used depending upon the the story is remote from his immediate interest. news circumstances. For a wrap-up on preparing the lead, you AUTHORITY isthe source from which should keep these four objectives in mind: (1) quotes and information originate in a story. Like present a summary of the story; (2) identify identity, it should be used in the lead only when persons and places involved; (3) stress the news necessary. Authority should never be used in a peg; and (4) stimulate the reader to continue the story when the source of information is clearly story. :mplied. Here is an example of a lead where authority is necessary: THE BRIDGE

Longer tours, fewer, shorter and less Assuining that you have written the lead for a expensive moves can all be expected by story, what do you do next? In some stories, Navy people for the rest of this fiscal year, you will find that the transition from the lead to according to Vice Admiral David Bagley, the body of the story is a bit awkward. To Chief of Naval Personnel. smooth this transition, you use a writing device known as a BRIDGE. Attributing this statement to the Chief of A bridge is a connecting sentence or para- Naval Personnel gives it authority, because the graph between the lead and the body of the s72 Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRITING story. Although it is not always required, it can that the ship lost a blade on serve several useful purposes: her starboardpropeller and cracked her hull. It can fill in identification too detailed for the lead, but also too important to place lower Body: The relief ships punched their in the story: way through.. . A TIE-IN is similar to a tie-back, except that For example: itprovides information concerning OTHER events which are taking place and which supple- Novelty Lead: For sale: One battleship. ment the story being written.It deals with PRESENT events, while the tie-back deals with Bridge: The Navy is thinking about the PAST. inserting this advertisement in the nation's newspapers. Lead: Navy doctors are investigating ThebattleshipUSSVir- an outbreak of 17 cases of ginia, which is no longer fit scarlet flyer aboard the de- foractive service, will be stroyer USS Balast, a Norfolk- scrapped next month. based ship operating in the Mediterranean. Note that the writer used a freak lead to introduce his story. The entire lead consists of Bridge: Meanwhile, measures are being only four words, and the effect is good. The lead (Usedasa taken to prevent further out- obviously would not be as effective, however, if tie-in) breaks of the disease on other all the facts were presented in the first para- Navy ships. Navy personnel graph. have been warned to report to shipboard sick bays immedi- It can bring the reader up to date on past ately if they find themselves and present events related to the story by the sufferingfromfever,sore use of TIE-BACKS andTIE-INS. throat, or rashes on the neck and upper chest. A TIE-BACK is a newswriting device whim allows you to refresh the reader's memory about Body: The first case of scarlet fever past events related to the story being written. It wasreportedaboardthe is frequently used in followup stories (see next Balast April 27, about three chapter). weeks after she left Norfolk. Doctors said... Lead: TheicebreakerNorthwind, with the help of icebreakers It can explain or elaborate on one or more of Glacier, Staten Island and the the summary facts, usually WHY or HOW. In CanadianicebreakerMac- writing a summary lead, you may find that it Donald, is free from the Artic becomes Ion and unwieldy if your try to ice pack which threatened to present a detailed explanation of WHY or HOW. maroonheruntilnext But if the explanation is important enough, summer. instead of withholding it until the body of the story, include it in the bridge. Bridge: Northwind was making the (Used as tie-trip back from an attempt to Summary The Navy will begin replacing back) resupply the research station Lead: itstime-testedmanila lines ice-island T-3 when she began July 1 with a synthetic prod- experiencing difficulties in the uct of modern progressnylon polar ice. The ice was so severe rope. 73 79 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Bridge: After months of study and often followed by a cumbersome body. But Explaining experimentation,theShips when a lead has done its job, it will usually WHY: Systems Command has found provide an outline for the organization of facts that nylon rope is superior to in the body of the story. manila line in strength, dura- To some extent the organization of the body bility, and elasticity. is dictated by the material itselfif it is a series of events, for instance. So the writer has to write If you have to include the information from an orderly, well-organized story and at the same these two sentences in your lead,it would time keep in mind the relative imp, .,ance of become unnecessarily long and cumbersome. By various details. explaining the WHY in the bridge, you present Guided by his idea of news importance, the the information more clearly and make the story writer proceeds through the story by selecting more readable. the next most important incident, fact or detail; then the next important; and so on until he Itcan provide continuity and a smooth reaches the least important of all. At this point transition from the lead to the body of the story he has reached the apex of the inverted pyramid by bringing in one or more secondary, but with material of least value. The writer now significant, facts. For ex.unple: knows that the makeup man can slice one, two, or three paragraphs from the bottom of his story Lead: From now on,allof the without depriving the reader of the story's chief accounting for the Navy's vast news elements. Figure 5-8 shows a diagram of a network of ship's stores will straight news story structure. gountouchedbyhuman hands. A Tip to Consider Bridge: Univac,anelectronicdata processing system, will do the For more than a decade there has been a joband do it cheaper, too. trend among civilian newspapers toward greater informality in news presentation. This trend has Body: The Univac file computer was become known as "talking a story onto paper." unveiled today... An observant editor several years ago noticed that a newsman would come to the city desk The bridge in this story is strictly a transi- and describe a story he has covered. The story tional device that smooths the gap between the would sound attractive as he talked. Then the lead and the body of the story. Reread these few same writer would go to his desk and write the sentences again. Note how awkward the story piece, pouring hisfacts into the established would be if the bridge were omitted. newswriting mold. What had been interesting when he related it verbally then sounded like It can be used t.:o attribute a lead statement every other story that had appeared before to an authority. only the names and places were changed. Recog- nizing the value of the newman's conversational report of the story, the editor thereafter encour- THE BODY aged his writers to use a more conversational tone, coupled with simple language, in all their To produce a smooth final story, the lead and copy. body must coincide. The body is the detailed The main purpose of any news story is to portion of a news story that develops and communicate the facts, and to accomplish that explains the facts outlined in the lead (and the communication the story must be read. If an bridge, if there is a bridge). Here again the informal story, presented in simple, everyday importance of a neatly-tailored lead cannot be language,can accomplishthatpurpose,it over-emphasized. The unwieldy leadis most should, by all means, be used. 80 74 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 5BASIC NEWSWRIT1NG

1.:,./...arivroviclowomrtizvorxcewerearaavaorsviossornevosuartorvesdeorveghtmsa SUMMARY LEAD SAIGON, VIETNAM .... (NAVNEWS) A Navy officer w d never before taken controls of an aircraft brought an Air F otter plane in for a rough but successful landing recently.

I FACT 1 (bridge) e incident came about after the pilot was killed by ound fire ding a routine observation mission over the Mekong, elta.

sr FACT 2 Lieu ant John G. Graf, USN, of Aurora, Ill., wailied away from the e rgency landing only "slightly shaken up:A The incident oc red in a area 185 miles southwest of' gon.

FACT 3 Reports indated that he landed the light 0 "Bird Dog" singleengine pl at Ca Mau airfield in An Xin province.

FACT 4 Lieutenant Graf, vho arrived in Vietnalast July, presently is assigned as Navy mon officer with U .advisers in An Xuyen.

FACT 5 A former enlisted m the 39yeaOld officer served as on aerial photographer for seral years 'd his general familiarity with aircraft is credited wi helpin im land the plane.

Figure 5-8.Diagram of a straight news story.

I 1 CHAPTER 6

FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, ANDACCIDENT STORIES

Once a writer has mastered the basics of news- the injury occurred when he walked into a tele- writing, then and only then, is he ready to phone pole while scrutinizing an attractive secre- wrestle with the more complex news stories. tary on the other side of the street (humor). This chapter is designed to give you the skills Certain topics have human interest built in. and knowledge necessary to write effective fea- And, although they may not possess any of the ture, speech, sports, and accident stories. other elements of news values (timeliness, proximity, prr minence or consequence) they still have personal appeal. Human interest may fall THE FEATURE STORY into many categories;

When the lessons of writing the straight news Current topics story are learned,. when the newswriter has experienced the discipline of using words sparingly The unusual and extraordinary but effectively to report exactly what has happened, then he is ready to write features. Mysteries and catastrophes

Writing straight news strenghtens the writer's Romance and sex powers of observation and builds skill in using the language. It impresses on him the necessity Adventure and exploits for ruthless editing until his story is specific, clear, and vital. Feature writing isn't an exact Competitive contests science. Much depends on the skill, imagination, and creativenss of the writer. Child, teenage, and adult life

Animal life CHARACTERISTICS Recreations and hobbies What is a feature story? It has been called the story that "has to be told." It has also been Business, professional, and home interests called simply "human interest." Interest in human beings, and in events because they concern Social welfare men and women in situations which might confront anyone else, is called human interest. The Success and happiness. human interest or appeal may be of either a sympathetic or humorous response such as: A In any case, a good human interest story is shipboard explosion taking the lives of several built around the premise that the reader can eas- crewmember and the gallant efforts whi-re- ily identify with the subject or event. It involves vent the loss of the entire crew; or a r a fellow human being and couldhappen to or received a broken nose (sympathy). However, involve him. 82 76 Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, AND ACCIDENT STORIES

Human interest stories not only entertain, but For the chess game of world events is no are often informative in that they contain all the longer played in the smoke of battle, but in elements of a news story. However, the human planning rooms where statesmen, military interest aspects of the story outweigh its value as men and civilians in government call the a straight news story. plays thousands of miles from the scene of Major news events seem to tell themselves. the move.. The straight news writer can set down all the facts, arrange them together with appropriate words and have an adequate news tory. The fea- Grab Reader Interest ture, however, must be brought to public attention by the creative writer. As a Navy JO, it will Features may depend on prominence to attain be your job to recognize the human interest pos- reader interest like the prominence of an event sibilities of stories and turn a drab yarn intoa such as the missile crisis. The personality profile bright one without exaggeration or distortion. would also fit here. And in this case, the relationship between the .news elements of proximity and prominence should be considered. For The News Peg example, a story about one of the astronauts would be of interest almost anywhere because of The Cuban missile crisis of 1962 was an event. the prominence of the subject. But how about with intense hard news value. Confrontation be- the commanding officer of Agana Naval Air Sta- tween the two strongest world powers could tion. His proximity, to ks1AS Agana and surround- have been the lead paragraph on the story of ing com mtOnake him prominent World War III,Events in this confrontation enough to merit a personality sketch in the made the news wires sing for well over a month. local Guamanian newspaper but nowhere else, New York Times News Service covered the except perhaps his home town. intercept by USS Norfolk of a Russian ship re- Consideration for the target readership, then, moving missiles from Cuba in a lead that read: is important for the writer of feature articles. It soon becomes obvious that attempts to de- The captain of a Soviet freighter reluc- fine a feature story fall short, probably because tantly stripped the tarpaulin covers from the range of material is as broad as the full range eight medium-range missiles on the deck of of human experience. Anything that people his freighter Friday for photographing by a make, do, enjoy or respond to serves as a peg on United States destroyer. which to hang the feature story. Featurestoriesstiremotions,stimulate, Using this news event as a peg, and realizing divert, and entertain. That could serve as a goal that he could not compete with news service for the feature writer, but it doesn't tell what speed in making releases, the public affairs feature stories are. officer aboard Norfolk released a feature with Certainly, the account of one nations's the following slant: warship intercepting themissile-carrying freighter of another in international waters is Much of the old-style drama and military capable of stirring emotions and stimulating (i.ish of the international crisis is a thing of readers of the world. the cast. The thrill of "Victory at Sea" is But the story behind the storythe feature no longer as graphic in its modern context storyis the vehicle for unabashed revelation of as that famous World War II documentary the human interest element in any hard news movie. event, The Cuban missile feature does this as it continues: Today's coverar- of events that shape the lives of nations come, often as not, The Cuban Quarantine centers the eye of from the centers of government and mili- the world on the Carribbean, while the real tary command posts. events are charted far away in Washington 77 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

and Moscow. The drama of confrontation how this change will affect the reader. Thus the isstill very much set in scenes of ships writer localizes the news story and gives it patrolling the seas around Cuba. The lines expanded meaning. of battle are drawn by ships every bit as Military news: changes in regulations, pay, powerful, many times as sophisticated and mission, or anything affecting military readers, just as serious as the battleship behemoths could also interest general readers. The alert and of former wars. skillful writer can turn these bare facts and When the forces meet, as when the sometimes dull items into meaningful articles. destroyerleaderUSS Norfolk(DL-1) detectedtheRussianmerchantman Leninlsky Kosomol steaming out of the south Cuban port of Casilda through the Write About Men receding clouds of a tropical rain storm, the surface action begins with the flashing light The typical military editor of a commerical of exchanging calls. daily often feels "handouts" are hounding him Events followed rapidly asthe radio to death. They choke his style. They keep him waves emanating from the two ships pulsed tied to a typewriter doing rewrites. He'd rather

messages reporting contact and requesting ri be. workingon a feature angle or out working up instructions. Agettnets between govern- an enterprishyg story . lie gleets 'Ate daily hand- ments born at United Nations sessions out pile as the worst part of his job. Why? Not began to be implemented on the high because handouts do not contain legitimate seas. .. news. Most of them doburied somewhere behind, in or among fancy, $10 words and reams Be Observant of promotions. Newsmen say the typical military handout The successful and prolific feature writer fails most often by absence of names and developsakeen,inquisitivefacultyfor addresses of those persons around which the observation. A welltended landscape isn't just a story, or the event, or action is built. They say pleasant view to him. He wonders who keeps it infractions of several other basic rules ofjournal- trim and why; he inquires into the benefits of ism also frequently draw the handout to the conservation or erosion control and the alterna- wastepaper basket rather than to the printed tives, wildlife sanctuaries or outdoor living. And page. chances are, he can write the answers he receives However complex and amazing a ship may be, into an interesting feature article. a story that is more iron than flesh and blood The power of observation,thehabit of sailors will often sail right into the trash can accepting nothing at face value, of digging into along with the larger part of the day's handouts. unanswered questions below the surface of the event, are invaluable to the feature writer. What most media want in the way of a Navy A primesourceof ideasisthedaily feature is a particular manSeaman John B. newspaper. News stories which appear in the Boatwright, 20, of 2810 Prairie St., Landlock newspapers recordnational,state and local Cityperforming his duties to make her an events as they happen. They usually do not give efficientship. Names, properlyspelled and background material or cover all aspects of a accompanied by ages and addresses, keep wire story. But every day, news stories appear which services and newspapers in business. Details of open the way for a flood of feature articles. ships or stations are interesting to people back The ability to take a bare fact from the news home, especially if those facts relate Ito sons or page and give it meaning can produce a good husbands or home town acquantainces. A spar- article. But here as in wire service copy, the kling story about a search and rescue, for featuremustreflect LOCAL interest.For example, is a natural, both from hard news and example, a news story mentions a change in feature standpointsif those indispensable names, income tax regulations; the feature writer shows ages, and addresses are included. 84 78 Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, AND ACCIDENT STORIES

New, Odd, or Unusual often used to good effect infeature story writing. Leads like these, when well-phrased, The event and object sources are also rich in send the reader along into the body in quest of feature prospects. Here, the imagination and an answer to such a "way out" story: curiosity of the writer are put to the test. Most hobb:., amquite commonplace, yet an ordinary Ever here of a 'hurevac'? hobb:: ,:art provide good story material if there is It's hurricane hideout. The 8000 acres an element of the NEW, the ODD, or the that constitute the Naval Auxiliary Air UNUSUAL connected with it. In conjunction Station, Meridian, Miss., are a rolling wood- with hobbies and collections, museums supply land and 't would seem that they would be fine material for stories. Here the ideas usually unaffected by the hurricane season hun- come from historical circumstances surrounding dreds of miles away from Florida. Such- theobjectsoftheirdevelopment.Browse however, is not the case. through a museum and ask yourself these questions: Why is this object on display? What Note that in feature writing, the lead often significance does it have? What historical event is consists of more than a single paragraph. Some- connected with it? times the lead runs for several paragraphs. Take .Sterlep concerning historical events must be the following lead for example: especially well written and interesting because people don't like to read about events presented Fifteen months ago a young Greek in textbook style. But they are interested in Cypriot landed in New York and took a job what one person or group did in a particular inaBrooklyn factory de "oted to the historical event. manufacture of electrical appbances. These are a few common areas that produce ideas for articles. There are many others. The When he landed he could speak only a point is, the ideas are there. You must open few words of English, and that in a thick your eyes to them. accent.

Todaythatyoung man isFireman Writing the Feature Story Lead Andreas Kalivakis, serving as an electrician aboard a U.S. Navy warship. His accent is Any standard news or magazine-style lead fast disappearing; his English vocabulary is may be used to begin a feature story. It should, excellent; and he is the owner of a new however, always be written in a manner appro- certificate indicating he has passed all the priate to the subject. A light, humorous lead, for tests needed to prove he has the equivalent example, has no place at the beginning of a of a U.S. high school diploma. serious article designed to provoke deep and serious thought in the reader. On the other That lead stands the test for feature story hand, a ponderous lead is no way to begin a light leads:itgrasps the reader immediately and or humorous piece. makes him want to read more. A simple summary lead Was used to begin this A Marine Corps release excited the curiosity story: of the casual reader with this leau, then added a fillip by way of transition that prepared the A six-monthrenovatingjobona reader to take pleasure in completing the story: dilapidated 70-year old house won praise South Vietnam isfar from the green from a local real estate board for a captain hills of theU.S., but an o:d .fashioned stationed here. American-style stillis in daily operation there alongside the radio section of Head- That lead is adequate as a starter, but another quarters Company, Ninth Marine Regi- writer used a question lead. The question lead is ment, Third Marine Division. 8579 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

The still, however, doesn't produce al- handle,install,maintain, and operate those coholic beveragesit produces pure, dis- inanimateand intrinsically dullpieces of hard- tilled water. ware. The effect of the machine on the man and the Often a lazy Journalistrelying on the fact man on the machine must bepresented in a way that Navymen are naturally interested in articles that emphasizes people, and the writer must concerning their food, pay and equipmentwill make those people into rounded characters who hang a dull lead on stories about those subjects. become real in the reader's mind. In other The professional writer, though, will give his words, the story must have human interest. best to those stories because he knows they will be read by the greatest number of people and be The writer of the following feature lead did a service to them. just that, when he began his story this way: A dramatic example of wide interest to food comes from the guided missile destroyerUSS Themachine,ametalmonstrosity, Semmes.Annualcompetitionfor the Ney squatted in the center of the metal deck, Award to the best mess afloat sparked an circled by a knot of Navymen: a bemused enterprising skipper to support wider dissemina- young officer, three puzzled sailors,and a tion of hisship's cooking secrets.Semmes knowing old chief. ,published a r'ookbook of Navy recipes, cut to "I know what it's supposed-to do;" the manageable portions, and the whole country first sailor said, "and I know wherewe're took note. supposed to bolt it down, but who's ever Food editors featured the story in papers in going to operate a Rube Goldberg puzzle New York, Chicago, Philadelphia, Pittsburgh, like that?" Indianapolis, St. Louis, and Boston, as well as "You are, buster," the old chief said, Charleston, S.C.; Dayton, Ohio; Evansville, Ind.; "and... Norfolk and Portsmouth, Va. Also numerous network and local radio/TV made wide use of the feature material. Writing the Body Veronica Volpe cl the Pittsburgh. Press wrote, "For those unaware of the military usage of the An important point to remember when writ- word, the phrase "the best small mess in the ing the body of a feature story is to avoid Navy' might have questionable connotation, monotony. While the writer avoids monotony least of all merit." by varying sentence lengths, long sentences must The feature continued: be clear and easy to understand. Not so to the menof the USS Semmes Note the varied sentence length in this feature just returned from a Mediterranean tour from the Indianapolis News: and now undergoing overhaul in Norfolk, Va. The firstand lastissues of eight news- The military usage of 'mess' relates to its prpers were published atFt, Benjamin original meaningthat of a group of per- Harrison the other day. sons who eat their meals together, asdo the But their brief life span had little rela- men of aship's company or an Army tionship to the energy and interest devoted group... . to their publication. The papers were the last journalism exercises for 70 servicemen and women, graduating with a newspaper inone hand and a diplomafiom the An importer' fact to keep in mind when Defense Information School at Ft. Harrison writing about Navy equipment and weapons is in the other. that the reader can soon lose interest in a dull From all the Armed Forces, staffers in story about a machine or weapon. What he is the "quill and scroll" exercise got a glimpse interested in is the men in uniform who will into their military future. These military 80 Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, AND ACCIDENT STORIES

journalists will go to assignments through- Compare scientific concepts and technol- out the world. Many will find jobs on more ogy to objects with which the reader is familiar, permanent newspaper staffs, using what they learned at Ft. Harrison. Nine weeks ago, this basic military jour- Weave the necessary background into the nalistclassbeganclasses.Sincethen story for unity and coherence. students have spent 209 classroom hours in the Applied Journalism Department..... For example, let's assume you are describing some microtubing used in a new guided missile. Another point to note is the use of quoted If you tell the reader it is 3/1000 of an inch in material to carry the story along. Skillfully diameter, he will have trouble visualizing it. Tell conducted interviews with articulate experts will him it compares in size to a human hair and he provide the writer with quotations. These quota- can visualize its size immediately. tions,intersperSedwith expository material, In another story you might like to point out help to move a story along and to maintain a that a new jet plane carries more than 17,000 livelysparkthroughout.Explanationsand gallons of fuel. This is an impressive figure, but readily-comprehensible revelations from authori- it doesn't mean much to the average reader ties in a given field impart an air of authenticity you told him that the same amount of gaso. to writing, particularly in stories about technical could power his car for the next 20 years, it subjects, such as rocketry, instruments, engine would have more meaning. improvements, jet engine overhaul, and nuclear Whenever possible, avoid generalizations. Use propulsion. figures to back up any broad claims you may The writer, however he chooses to explain make. Don't merely say that the average Navy- technical subjects, should always bear in mind man uses too much water aboard ship. Add that when he is writing about a scientific or force and emphasis tothe statement with technical subject for a general audience, he must understandable figures. Tell the reader the aver- translate technical terms into lay language or, age Navyman drinks from two to four quarts of when that is impossible, define technical terms water a day. He uses five gallons of water daily that he must use. Definitions should be phrased merely to shave, brush his teeth and wash his in informal language. hands. Cleaning and food preparation in the When writing a feature on a technical subject, galley takes an additional five to eight gallons the following points will be helpful in planning per crew member. In addition, he uses up to 10 and organizing your body material: gallons of water when he takes a shower. Then tell the reader why this is important:' because Make paragraph beginningsforcefulto the Navy "makes" its. own water, drop-by-drop, impel the reader through the story. by distilling it from seawater. If pictures are not available and you have to Use technical terms sparingly, and include describe a mechanical device, describe it in terms informal definitions as you go along. with which the reader is familiar: "The Navy's new super-cavitating propeller looks like the Dress up difficult or dull passages with screw part of an ordinary kitchen food grinder." human interest items. In studying feature techniques, the writer should not overlook the finest training material Quote authorities as necessary to make the of allthe published work of other feature reader feel the facts are authentic. writers. When he discovers a piece in a newspape, or magazine that particularly interests himthe Simplify facts by the use of analogy. make him glad to read ithe should mad it3a and analyze the devices the author employed to Break down statistical material into figures make his work interesting, informative, enter- the reader can comprehend. taining, gripping. With a little adaptation and JOURNALIST 3 & 2 practice, he can make those technniqueshis Not a shot had been fired. The *war'in own. Cuba was still cold. One thing he will probablydiscover is that when a story leaves him with a satisfyingafter A choice quote from an interview often taste, oftenitwill be because it was good makes a good ending for a feature story. Here is enough to hold him to the endandbecause the how a Navy Journalist concluded a story about a dentists and tech- ending was a piece of artistic wfitingin itself. group of circuit-riding Navy nicians conducting a people-to-people dental program in Vietnam: The Ending "We'regladtogetoutwiththe The endingor conclusion of all goodfea- Vietnamese people," said Nichol! (a Chief ture stories terminates thearticle in a positive Dental Technician.) "The fact that there's manner. As in the lead,the writer is limited only an element of danger init is overshadowed by his ability in composing a conclusion. by the thanks of the people we're helping. One device frequently used is tosummarize We've never left a village or hamlet without the key points of the story. Another way toend a barrage of cheering andclapping from our a story is to present a newfact, generally a fact patients." that will highlight the importanceof the subject of the article. No matter how itis done, though, The story on the new piece of machinery the ending should leave the readersatisfied that ended with the following three paragraphs: the lead he found so gripping, the storybody he was held by, has, insummation, proved worth Sure, they had hated her to begin with, the reading time he has spent on it. that monstrous machine, but now it was The story about theUSS Norfolkintercepting their monstrous machine. Constant associ- the Russian missile-loaded freighter,used as a ation and the care they had lavished on her feature lead example earlier in thischapter, sums had made her their baby. The ugly monster up the action and putsthe story in a new light had become an object of beauty to them, a delicate thing to be protected. by using a different twist: A passing Journalist, new on board, Eventually, on orders from Moscow, stopped to drink in her loveliness. Helooked be going to touch her. canvas wasrolled back on all eight 70-foot as though lie might missiles. "Keep your cotton- pickin' hands off the In six hours, governments hadbeen con- baby," Quinlon snarled, and the other two tacted, orders issued and received,proving baby-tenders curled their lips at theJO photographs taken, and not a shot was until he scuttled away.. fired. Suddenlythe meeting was newsas much so as if it har' been amajor naval THE PERSONALITY FEATURE engagementbut not a shot wasfired. The The personali+y feature issimiliar to other dullpatrol ofUSS Norfolkhad been theendless features in that it appeals to people%interest in brokenandmomentarily special watches became meaningful. Hermission other people. It normally points out achievement, success or surmountedobstacles in had been accomplished. achieve- The next day,Norfolkreturned to her life and centers on a particular event or familiar patrol and ment. station on the now Personality features differ from other features observed a famous armistice onVeteran's herself the new in that they are almostalways about a single Day, November 11, 1962, about the armistice in a new individual. It gives interesting information veteran maintaining the person's life rather thanjust his opinions, kind of war. 4 BESTCOPY AVAILABLE Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH,SPORTS, AND ACCIDENT STORIES

The properly written personality feature isa Using direct quotations in a characteristic vivid word picture of the subjects personality manner. traits and physical featuresas well as a description of the things that make him unusualor Actually describing the subject's personal interesting. The effective personality feature appearance, demeanor, facial expressionb, and leaves the reader feeling that he has met the dress. (See figure 6-1). subject face to face and knows him personally.

Personality Research

Since the personality feature story delvesso deeply into the subject's traits and physical features, considerable research is required. Most of the required information must be gathered through interviews. Conduct interviews with the subject and persons who intimately know the subject or have something to contribute. Some information can also be obtained from printed background material and from personal observations of friends and associates of the subject. Personality features should contain:

Biographical data.

Description of the person, the details of the 165.219 setting, surroundings, and general atmosphere. Figure 6.1.A good photo showing the personalityin his environment will heighten the effectiveness Quotations from the interviewee, in which of your feature. he gives his principles for attainingsuccess, etc. Givingopinionsofothersabout the A general account of his achievement, subject. success, etc., in the words of the interviewee,or friends, or of the writer. Snowing how his friends and associates react to him. Presenting Information The following personality feature excerpts should help you to see how some of the In addition to the feature writing methods techniques are used: mentioned earlier in this chapter, personality features require a few techniques all its own. Bryan Tyler of the station's photo lab There are methods that can be used to enable approaches his art seriouslywith strong you as the writer to make your readers feel t. ey conviction and knowledge developed by have met the person face to face, heard him e xtensive. formaltrainingandmuch speak, seen him act, and know his thoughtsor practice. opinions and past life. Here are a few: He does not like photo contests but has won mangy. He would rather focus on the Telling of characteristic mannerisms and effects of Man than photograph Man him- actions. selfbut does both well.. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Tyler is a sensitive artist who knows how speech story. to take, and more importantly, why he First, the writing of a speech story resembles takes photographs.. any other news story in many apsects.The most .I like taking peopleless photographs important fact, the climax of the story, goes in that relate directly to Man either by con- the lead. This means, usually that the most tent or implication," as.Bryan puts it. important thing the speaker said goes in 'the During a tour of duty in Washington, the lead. Occasionally, the most important fact may portlyVirginian worked primarily with be something unusualaudience reaction, for official portraits. instancebut generally, what the speaker said, either in quote or summary is the feature. "...It can be frustrating shooting portraits," comments Tyler, stroking his bushy The Secretary of Defense may cover four black beard, "everyone dressed the same major topics during an address, but the main with his only identity worn on his sleeve point may have been the disclosure of a pay and placed in the same sterile environment. increase for all military personnel. This fact goes The portraits I keep and feel satisfied with, intothelead:"Allactivedutymilitary show people in their own environment, or personnel will get a 10% pay increase July 1st," inameaninfgulsituation,hopefully said Defense Secretary McDuff ina speech conveying some insight into the subject." before the National Press Club last night. "In petty officer 'Tyler, % think we have O aWelly that a speaker appeared before an one of theNavy'sfinest,"saidhis audience has very little story merit. The speaker commanding officer, "And there's not a must say something newsworthy, somethingthat person here who doesn't feel that way hasn't been officially disclosed before. about Bryan," The subject title of the speechisrarely Tyler finds stimulation and excitement important enough to become part of the lead. in searching for and producing meaningful Speech titles are usually catch-phrases which. photographs even in the most mundane revealverylittleabout whatisthe most important part of the story. For example, when jobs... "Photography should never end," Tyler the President of the United States speaks, the reflects, "just change subjects, and fulfill lead features what he said: "The President in a some meaningful purpose, either to me or major speech tonight called for another tax to the person for whom I am shooting." increase..." If the writer just started off with the information that the President spoke, no one The material presented here gives thebegin- would hay,: much insight into the importance of ning feature writer a start in the rightdirection. the speech. Writing courses, taken from time totime, can In structuring the speech story lead, include help. Criticism from experienced featurewriters WHAT was said and WHO said it. (See figure and editors is a great aid. Studying thework of 6-2.) WHEN and WHERE it was said can usually other writers, as mentioned earlier,is a fine be included within the leadif it does not guide to improvement. Reading aboutwriting become too cumbersome. It if does include alone, however, never taught anyoneto write. them in'the second paragraph. Like the disciplines of newswritingthe art of Usually a direct quote lead will not do, for feature writing is learned by doingbywriting. mast speakers do not summarizetheir talk in one sentence. Thus, the writershould paraphrase the lead, summarizing what the speaker said in THE SPEECH STORY one brief sentence. When you paraphrase, you must be careful to Journalists often become jittery whenfirst keep the speaker's meaning. Do not quote out of assigned to cover a speech story, forthey don't contextthat is, do not quote a sentence that think they can obtain the facts or put theminto gives a wrong impression when used alone. For story form. Actually, any writer whoknows the example, a newsman overhears thePresident fundamentals of news reporting canwrite a say,"I don't think I'll rum" However, after 90 84 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS,AND ACCIDENT STORIES

185.220 Figure 8-2.in a speech story, the speaker should beidentified by the second paragraph. talking to the President, the newsman discovers change one word. You use quote marks at the he meant he wouldn't run over to the golf beginning and end of the quote: "I think, course. If the newsman had quoted the sentence therefore, I am." A comma is used to set off the alone, he would have given the impression that quoted part of the sentence: He said, "That did the President was not seeking another term in it." To add the words "he said" at the end of office. the sentence, put the comma after the quoted When quoting, wait for a striking phrase or matter and before the quote marks: "That did summary of a key point. Use quotes in a speech it," he said. story to give the flavor of the speaker's talk. With quotes, you can convey to the reader what If quoted matter doesn't make a sentence,use the talk was like. To do this, the writer need not no comma and no capital letter to introduce the quote whole paragraphs, for they make the copy quote: He didn't "purge them." Note the periods dull. A few good quotes scattered throughout and commas are always inside the quotes. No the story will be enough. comma is needed after a quote :f it asks a To use quotes you must understand the basics question: "Did you go?" he asked Also no of quoting. A quotation must consist of the comma is needed with a quoted exclamation speaker's exact words. The writer should not point: "What a view?" yelled the astronaut.

85 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

HANDLING LONG QUOTES QUOTESUMMARIES Consecutive paragraphs of quotationsdon't Combining the guidelines discussed earlier and lead and the requirequotemarksattheend of each the material about identification, a paragraph. These are required only:when the en- second paragraph for a typical speech story tire quote ends. You do, however,begin each should read like this: new paragraph with quotes.But, as stated itis more effective not to use long President Richard M. Nixon has asked earlier, its train- quotes. the Defense Department to revise The ellipsis is a device of punctuation used in ing and education systems so that every quoting. It consists of three spaced periods (..) man in service will comeout with a skill used to show ommission of word or words nec- marketable on the civilian economy. essary to complete a statement orquotation. If a In his annual manpower report toCon- quote is long and a writer wants to useit, he can gress, the Presidentsaid, "There are some delete the unnecessary words by using the ellip- military specialists whose trainingdoes not sis. However, too many beginners gowild with lead directly to civilian employment.To the ellipsis. They overuse it, sticking thethree help them I have asked the Secretaryof maxi- dots in seate,ace, If you Alva use several Defense to make available, to the ellipsis, it is better to paraphrase the sentence. 4num extentpossible, in-service training If the writer starts a quote in the middleof a and educational opportunities whichwill speaker's sentence, he need not use theellipsis increase their chances for employmentin before the quoted words. For example,the civilian life." factors, An example of alead with a lesser known speaker may have said: "Considering all Informa- and my staff has done that for manymonths, I person mayread: "The Chief of Navy feel the trainee would be ready for Vietnam or tion said in a speechlast night that his office was 100 additional publicaf- any other combat zoneafter 20 weeks of basic requesting more than training, instead of the present eight." AJO's fairs duties andemphasized that a preplanned sentence may read like this: GeneralNeedam public affairs program wasessential." said, "The trainee would be ready forVietnam In the secondparagraph the writer usually gives fuller identificationof the speaker, the oc- or any other combat zoneafter 20 weeks of if basic training, instead of the presenteight." casion of the speech,where it was given and, Then, if the writer wants to end a quote in there's room and it's noteworthy,the attendance the middle of the speaker's sentence, heleaves Next, the writer uses theQUOTE SUMMARY the method of organization. four dotsthree for the ellipsis and one for method uses one para- regular period: "The trainee would be readyfor The quotersummary of Vietnam or any other combat zone after20 graph of quotes fromthe speaker, then one the writer's .prase. It does not matterwhich weeks of basic training. .." method al- Quoting, though, is only a part of writingthe comes rust, quote orsummary. This identifythe lows the reader to getthe flavor of the speech speech story. The writer must enables the writer to re- paragraph. through the quotes but speaker no later than the second story by summarizing Many times the speaker will be identifiedin the duce the length of his large portions. lead. quoted paragraph, fol- Even if you think a person iswell-known, For example, here is a paragraph: you must still includehis full name and full title lowed by a paraphrased know ex- in the story. That way the reader will write, spell, do than someone "Our children can read, actly what you are quoting rather which is more position. arithmetic, and use grammar, else with the same name or similar lot of meaning- If someone is relatively unknown, you may important than learning a give him a general job title for thefirst identifi- less rules." In the second In criticizingdrill or rote teaching, the cation: A college president. . argued that under paragraph include the speaker's name. school superintendent 92 86 Chapter 6 FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, AND ACCIDENTSTORIES

former methods a child might wina medal tion often. Beginners should attributeevery sen- in American history andstill not have tence expressing opinion, for too often they learned the meaning of American democ- forget, and It seems that the writer is mating the racy. statements in the story, Notice that the paragraph of summary is Attribution may consist merely of the phrase related to the quoted one. The speech story, like "he said." However, to besure the reader does any other, keeps related material together. Fig- not forget who is the speaker you shouldocca- ure 6-3 illustrates a speech story diagram using sionally insert his name. He may put the attribu- the quote-summary method. tion at the beginning, middle or end' of the BEST COPY AVAILABLE sentence. bat the natural place for attribution is at the end of the sentence. When writing a speech story, net*use such Quote "Take care of your men. They are the Navy'el most_preciou resource." words, unless quoted, as "I," "our," "us," "we," Summary This was the keynote of a speech deli ered "me," "yOu," or "your." Standing alone, these Friday by Rear Adm. H. A. Yeager, Assistanthief of Naval Personnel for Education and Tr& ning. words represent the writer's viewpoint. So if the Speccing before the clams of the Naval 0 ficer Candidate School here, Adm. Yeager empha ized speaker says our country needsmore nuclear themportance of maintaining good rat Hong between officers and men. surface ships,thewriter says:"The United Quote "The Navy into which you are now going tor your first assignment has a number of serious States needs more nuclear surface ships." If the p oblems facing it," Adm. Yeager said. "One of speaker says "I," it means just that and not the the most serious is the tailure of a high percentage of our first cruise Navyrnen to reenlist." newswriter. Summary Citiag current facto and figures, the a rTiirral Many newsmen covering speechesare tempted pointed out that the reenlistment rate was low.It would have to be doubled ifthe Navy hoped to to use vivid words to describe how the speaker meet its mobilization requirements. Quote "ou must know your men and take c re of talked. Unfortunately, the truth often conflicts them " the admiral continued,"Theme a e the with the vivid vert. The best verb touse Is esrdi al rules.But I add two more: knowhat your men are supposed to know, and helthem "aid." Here is the natural and neutral link be- learn it." Summary A m. Yeager advised the graduating o ficer tween the speaker and what he said. But many tostud, the mae training maruals the enlisted men study for a vancement.Hi told them to use writers feel their creativity is stifled by using too the same terms and the same approaches to their many "saids." There are, of course, synonyms work that are ught to enlisted men intheir schools and in th it textbook.. like cajoled, pleaded, beseeched, asked,mur- Quote "There ino substitute for tomtence," the admiral said"When we are fat w th peace and muted, digressed, assorted, told, declared and when our .hiare cruising in quie waters, men may list fair ess, kindliness, and siliar qualities thousands of others which can often be used for as what thedesire most in theirtikes'.But variety. When using these words to describe how come war a heavy winds," he add "they look for competen e, abilitknowled e, an know-hour." tospeaker expressedhimself,be sure you Summary In closingthe a the graduate. to guard their men's as they do their own, describe the speaker's emotions accurately. Al- and therewouldb no r enlistment problem. ways be alert to exact meaning and connotation. To add more color to the story, the writer 165.18 mayoccasionallydescribeinterestinghand Figure 6.3. Diagram ofspeech story using th movements or gestures that the speaker made, quotesummarymethod. When Premier Khrushchev removed his shoe and pounded it on a table at the United .Nations, every story covering his speech included it high in the account. Most speakers will not be that OTHER PROBLEMS flamboyant, but they may raise a hand toward the ceiling, or pound on the lectern for empha- Besides the organization of the story, the JO sis. An occasional mention of this adds flavor to must be aware of other problems in the speech the story and points up what the speaker feels is story, ATTRIBUTIONidentifying the source important. of information or opinionis needed in almost Before writing the story, you must get the every paragraph, The writer must make it clear facts. Most newsmen depend on tape recordings who is talking. Thus, he should include attribu- or a copy of the speech. Frequently a speaker 93 81 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 may be appro, 3hed eitherdirectly or through his public affairs stafffor a copy of hisspeech, if it is not supplied in advance. Should you find yourself in a situation where you must rely on your ownshorthand to gather facts, remember you need only the mainpoints of the speech. A JO is not expected tobe a stenographer. Most professional newsmen have their own system of note taking which consistsof short cuts. For example, a writer maydrop all vowels from his wordssoldier becomes sldr, et cetera. Or he may not dot the "i's" and crossthe "t's" when writing rapidly. If he wants to writedown the word responsibility, hetaight dash off "respons" and later, when looking overhis notes, he will understand thescribbling. Use your notes whilethey are fresh in your mind. By using a homemade shorthand, you canlis- ten to the meaning of the speech.You are waiting for the important points of the speech, not mechanically copying down every word as a stenographer does

THE SPORTS STORY Sportswriting, whether itbe for a great metropolitan daily or for a four-pagemimeo- graphed Sea Service publication, canbe the very lifeblood of the publication. No other editorial phaseof a newspaper has quite so much to offerthe writeror so much to challenge his imagination,his creativity, his endurance and his "stick-to-itiveness."(Figure 6 -4,) Sportswriting is a difficult side ofjournalism. It's tricky for thesportswriter who regularly 116.54 Football League team.It's Figure 64.Sports action provide writers anopportunity covers a National to display their most colorful reporting. tricky for the JOSNwho wades through the task of writing an eight-inchstory about a touch base yesterday. football game played on his weight championship boxing lastnight? Will a star player who has beenhurt be able to play? representative in the STORIES Will your activity have a BASIC TYPES OF SPORTS Olympic track team tryouts? much like writ- There are two basic typesof sports stories: Writing a sports news story is ing r straight news story.Put the most impor- NEWS and FEATURE. in STORY is the key one. tant facts first, thensupply additional details The SPORTS NEWS Other methods of sportswriting which an- descending order of importance. It is the basic type can be used,but this approach will keep your swers questionsthe reader undoubtedlyhas on his mind. For exa nple,who won the heavy- writing on a solid level. 88 94 Cilapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS,AND ACCIDENT STORIES

The SPORTS FEATURE STORY generally baseball, softball, hockey,soccer, lacrosse, or lacks the "hot news today" elementof the tennis. straight sports news story. However, this lack is Report the significance of theoutcome. If replaced by something appealing to readers the victory moved your team intoa third place human interest. Types of feature storiesare tie, say it. The fan wants to know. sports columns, analytical articles, predictions, 4, Highlight the key plays. Inbaseball, how and personality sketches. A sports feature is runs were scored; in football, how touchdowns frequently writing a routine story ina fresh were scored. manner. 5. Single out the starplayers and recount their efforts. 6. Use other items of interest ADVANCE SPORTS STORY to thy: fan, like if the crowdvas large or small, noisy or quiet, or if their were injuries. If you are writing about an upcomingsports eventanything from football to horse shoesto satisfy your sports readers, you must answer the Often the first thing the fanwants to know is following questions about the event: WHO won and WHAT effect the winhad on the standings. For example, "The LosAngeles What DAY, TIME, and PLACE willthe Lakers maintained their West Division leadand event be held? extended their winning streakto a record 33 games tonight in a 116-111 overtime victory. WHO are the opponents? In reporting the outcome ofathletic contests, also consider using the HOW elementhowthe WHAT ARE THE DETAILS of theevent victory was achieved. For example, "A field pal name of players, comparison of teamsor play- with two seconds remaining in thegame gave ers, background or history of event, significance Colorado a 3-0 football winover Southern Cali- of contest, and records of teams?) fornia here Saturday." There are other facts and figuresyou will want to include but those listed above givea SPORTSWRITING TIFS solid framework for the advancestory. There is nothing more disgusting to a fan than to read Here are seven clues to sportswritingsuccess about an event in which he is interested, andnot offered by a Navy Journalist who,prior to enter- see a starting time. It is equally frustrating to ing the Navy, was a professionalsports editor for read exciting details and not findany reference a metropolitan daily newspaper. They arecon- to the location. sidered a good starting foundation forthe begin- Remember, the story before the event helps ning sportswriter: build interest in the coming attraction. Theen- thusiasm built will fall flat ifany key facts are WRITE COLORFULLY.Sportsevents lend left out. themselves to colorful reporting. Theyprovide action, feats of skill and endurance,dramatic competition, strong emotionsall of whicharil AFTER ACTION REPORT legitimate aspects of the story which callfor strong action verbs and carefully chosen descrip- When you write the after action report ofa tive language, Even the setting ofa sports sports event, a checklist will help: eventthe outdoor background ofa football genie or track meet, the tense indoor environ- 1. Give the score. ment of basketball or boxing, the cheeringsec- 2. Mention the name of the sport. For the tions, the bandsoffer the wt ternumerous op- nonfan, a phrase which says the Tigers beat the portunities for including vivid details that make Bears 6.2 doesn't tell ii itwas in football, the scene come alive for the reader. 89 95 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

A word of caution: Don't get cornyor ignore CARRY THROUGH THE SLANTOF YOUR will let a accuracy in trying towrite colorfully. Never put STORY.All too often, a sportswriter deliv- anything on paper youwouldn't like to stand in feature-type story become a cut-and-dried him. Ignoring accu- ery of facts. Ifyou're going to use the casual front of the boss and read to it properly. racy is a sin hardto forgive. approach to a sports feature, do Make certain you carry that approachthrough RESEARCH YOUR PEOPLE.Moreoften the story. about people. So learn than not, you're writing ROUNDUP about themtheir sportsbackgrounds, their am- LEARN TO WRITE THE their abilities. You'll STORY.The roundup story is acombination bitions, their records and often resort write better, more colorful copy. storythe kind to which you must in effective sportswriting. It isused, for exam- have been DON'T CONCENTRATE ONDEVELOPING ple, when several football games STYLEMore than likely, played in the same league onthe same day. A SET WRITING done: it'll be an unnatural styleand you'll be doing Here's how the roundup story is yourself more harm thangood. Veteran sports- styles.Beginning 1. Gather all your game reports. writershaveindividual either the most lournatials aren't expected tohave them. 0 Pi your lead from important" game or the outstandingpersonal STUDY SAMPLINGS FROMOTHER JOUR- performance. NALISTS.No writer has amonopoly on the 3. Write your lead and two or threeaddi- good idea businessespecially insports work. tional paragraphs. 4. Open your next paragraph withsomething VARY PARAGRAPH ANDSENTENCE on the order of"in other Naval Base League LENGTH.Long, flowing sentencesaren't un- games yesterday,. . ." in lawful if used sparingly.The same applies for 5. Give a quick rundown of the scores paragraphs. But mix them up.A reader forms those other games. with part of his opinion of a storyby the appearance 6. Go back to your lead and embellish it speed with whichitreads. as many more paragraphs as arerequired. itmakes and high Outstanding professionalsportswriters aren't 7. Devote a paragraph or two to the afraid to make use of theone-word paragraph. points in each of those other games. Why should you be? The roundup story will prove to be a quick USE GOOD SPORTSWORDS.Sports lan- and effective way of covering several stories in be somewhat more guage is perfectlyacceptable if properly used. one. However, you'll have to Just as doctors andlawyers use certain words economical with your words than you normally and phrases, so do sportswriters. Terms such as are. The wordage piles upin a hurry in a gridirons, diamonds, linedrives, and starting roundup story. gates are acceptable. So arewords like catchers, trainers and ringers.Don't be afraid of good sports words whichdescribe exactly what is desired. SOURCES FOR SPORTS INFORMATION DON'T LULL YOURSELFINTO USING BROMIDES. Bromides, ortimeworn cliches, A big problem for many beginners in sports- can sneak intosports copy that isotherwise writing is where to gather the information, In good. "The grimreaper," "last-ditch stand," the Navy, there are five primary sources: "bad-hopgrounder,""hard-throwingright- artist" are sports page 1. SPECIAL SERVICES OFFICE,for all the hander," and "hook-shot including phrases that lost their usefulness afew thousand ins and outs of the recreation program, issues ago, Guard against the useof bromides, all schedules and locations of contests. 90 96 Chapter 6 FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, AND ACCIDENT STORIES

2. COACHES OR MANAGERS, forexact pain,misery, and sufferingtothevictims' details on condition of team members, starting friends and relatives. lineups, and technical details. Yet, despite the undesirability of this type of 3. TEAM MEMBERS, for accurateaccounts news from the Navy's viewpoint, covering and of what happened in thegame, opinions of writing accident stories is part of the JO's job. opposing players. Accident news cannot be avoided or withheld. 4. ATTENDING THE EVENT (OR PRAC- It must be released. TICES). This is the onlyway you can become an Accidents can happen anytime, anywhere. Be- authority. cause they are unpredictable, unfortunate, and 5. OFFICIAL SCOREBOOKS, foraccurate, undesirable as a source of news, the JO who detailed information on scores. covers and writes accident stories must be especially careful how he handles them, Accidents involve both life and death. They REFERENCE FOR SPORTSWRITING may cause human suffering, heartaches and anx- iety. Also, because accidents sometimes result Information on how to cover and write spe- from carelessness or negligence, theymay injure cific sports material has been deliberately left reputations or lead to disciplinary action. A out. To go into detail on how to cover baseball, careless word or phrase in an accident storymay for example, takes a lot of space. cause great damage to the Navy and to individ- Should you find you need to know more on' uals involved. More than in any other type of how to cover a particular sports contest, thereare story, accuracy is of utmost importance. many very good books available on the subject. Incollec:r,information for a story, the Most libraries will have several books to fit your Journalist mu:A be careful to avoid gossip and needs. You can find your most up-to-date and conjecture. He must be able to seek outproper readily available guide to sportswriting on the authorities and get his information right the first sports pages of your metropolitan dailies. time. He may not have the opportunity to verify it later. The JO must stick to the concrete fa,zts, resist THE ACCIDENT STORY any temptation to hide or cover up legitimate news, maintain high standards of good taste, and Five sailors are killed when one falls asleep at above all, be familiar with security restrictions the wheel after a weekend liberty- and other limitations. He must know what to young Navy ensign dies in a flaming plane release and what not to release. Never will his crash when something goes wrong with his jet abilities as a TO be put to a more exacting test. during a routine trainig hop- A Marine accidentally shoots a buddy witha gun he didn't think was loaded- ACCIDENT STORY STRUCTURE An airman carelessly crosses an aircraft flight line and walks into the blades of a spinning propeller- In any accident where a number of persons A civilian painter plunges to his death from a are killed or injured, the quickest and simplest three-story Navy building when the lines in his way of writing the story is to use the casualty scaffold break- structure illustrated in figure 6-5. This structure An explosion at a base facility kills 15 persons is adaptable to all types bf accidents and enables and injures 35 others- you to get the most important facts into the A Navy child dies in an ambulance after beginning of the story, drinking something from the family's medicine cabinet- THE LEAD.The lead of an accident story Accidents and disasters such as these take introduces the reader to the basic facts in the hundreds of lives each year. In addition to de- situation by summarizing the important five W's stroying life and property, they cause untold and H. For example: "Two San Diego sailors 91 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

the car. Seaman Apprentice David K.Becker, 19, son of Mr. and Mrs.Daniel M. Becker of 821 Sherman Dr., St. Louis,Mo. Injured were: Fireman Milton M. Jackson, 20, sonof Mr. and Mrs. Ralph J.Jackson of 4210 FloridaAve.,Lexington,Ky.,skull fracture, internal injuries. Engineman Third Class John C.Scole, 21, son of Mr. and Mrs. AltonH. Scole of 4109 American Ave., LongBeach, Calif., compound fractures, internalinjuries. Seaman Apprentice,Bruce J.Burns, 22, son of Mr. andMrs. Morgan J. Burns of Route 7, Nashville, Tenn.,broken arms, shock. The dead are alwaysidentified first in the casualty list, followed by theinjured. All casualties can be presentedindividually in paragraph form or in oneparagraph. 165.19 In identifying the victims,it is again empha- Figure 6.5.The accident/disaster story structure. sized that all pertinentinformation related to list. A newspaper near injured to- them be included in the were killed and three others seriously San Diego might use onlythe victims' names, day when their automobile blew atire and home 80, five miles ages, and rates.The parents' names and smashed into a tree on Highway town addresses might be cutbecause they have east of El Cajon." Note that the lead answers all ofthe five W's, no local newsvalue. The wire services,however, would want all but does not elaborate on anyof them. The like this would be most important facts in anyaccident story are the information. A story picked up mid serviced to newspapersin the vic- the number and identities ofthe casualties and of the paients and the cause of the accident. Thislead immediately tims' home towns. Names about these their addresses are important.By including all satisfies the reader's initial curiosity releases You leave its use facts, but more detailed explanations aresaved the information in your up to thediscretion of the media.It may also for the body of the story. queries Since five persons are involvedin this acci- save you thetrouble later of answering list their for additional information.Also note that the dent, it would be impracticable to identified among those names and completeidentities in the lead. driver of the car has been segment killed, and that specificinjuries have been listed Therefore, they are included in the next follow this of the story.. for those injured. Most newspapers practice. This eliminatesthe need for clu ttering up the body ofthe story with these detailslater. THE CASUALTYLIST.The casualty list casualities, it is recom- ratings, ages, next If there are 10 or more contains the names, ranks or mended that their names be placedseparately at of kin, home townaddresses, and other perti- in- the end of the story. The newspaper cantreat nent informationavailable on the dead and the names in an for the above lead might the list as a sidebar, or run jured. A casuality list adjoining box. Too many namesin the casualty be presented in this manner: list causes a big break betweenthe lead and the B. Painter, body, interfering with thestory's progress. The Dead are: Seaman Jackson structure has two distinct Pi- 21, son of Mr. and Mrs. CarlH. Painter of use of a casualty 680 Deamond St., Elmsdale,R.I., driver of vantages for the newspaper. Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS,AND ACCIDENT STORIES

First, this treatment gives eachname more the son of Mr. and Mrs. Carl H. Painterof prominence in' the story because ofthe typo- 680 Deamond St., Elmsdile, R.I. graphical arrangement. Each victim islisted sepa- Engineman Third Class John C. Scole, rately. The reader doesn't haveto ferret out 21, a passenger, suffered compound their names from frac- one long paragraph. He merely tures and internal injuries. He is theson of runs his eyes down the list quickly tosee if there Mr. and Mrs. Alton H. Scale of 4109 is anybody he knows. Amer- ican Ave., Long Beach, Ct lif. Second, the casuality list allowsfor easier handling in both the editorialdepartment and THE BODY.The body of the composing moth. an accident story tells the complete story in eetail. Itmay be de- Let us say the above storyappeared in the veloped in either logical first edition of or chronological order, a newspaper. By the time the but it should be written ina manner appropriate fourth edition of thepaper is ready to go to to the subject matter. press, one of the more seriously injured victims A straight fact story concerninga plane crash or an auto accident would ordinarily be devel- If the casualty structure is used,a complete oped in logical order after the revision of the story is casualties are necessary. The editor listed. The most important facts wouldbe pre- makes a few minor changes in the leadand body sented first. An accident of the story, then story, however, is most moves up the injured man's adaptable to chronological orderdevelopment. name under tie "dead" heading in the casualty In a heroic rescue, for example, where list. dramatic details play an important part, thestory would be told in narrative form. CASUALTY RELEASINGPOLICY.Under most circumstances, the names of casualtiescan- STYLE.The style foran accident story is not be released until the next of kin havebeen the same as for all newswriting. Simplicity,clar- notified. In this case, the story should bewritten ity, and brevity are essential elements.More and released in the customarymanner. However, than ever, the writer should tell thestory and the space ordinarily reserved for the casualtylist stick to the facts. should include this statement: "Names ofcasual- Maudlin sentimentalityor emotionalismthe ties are being withheld pendingnotification of old"hearts and flowers" routinemust be next of kin." avoided. Phrases such as "tragic loss," "grief- Later, when the namesare released, a news- stricken family," and "went to his final reward" paper may insert them in the proper place in the are the mark of an amateur. They are banned in story. It is not necessary, however,to withhold most newsrooms. the other facts in the story until thenames are available. Current policy regarding release ofnames of There are also certain errors insyntax which dead and injured such as whatcan or cannot be are peculiar to accident stories. For example: released is contained in BUPERS Manual and Death may occur followingan operation or Public Affairs Regulations. during an operation, but notas a result of an If only two or threepersons are the victims of o erntion.This implies negligenceon the part an accident, their names and identities should be of the persons performing it. incorporated into the paragraph structure of the Accidents happen and explosionsoccur but story. Do not list them separately,name by neither takes place. This Implies that Whave name, as in the casualty list. been scheduled. Let us assume that only oneperson was killed Everybody dies ultimately of heart failure, and another was injured in the above auto acci- but not of a heart ailment. dent. Here is the way thenames would be han- A fire is not tt conflagration untilit sweeps a dled following the lead: wide area. Conflagrationsare rare, A fire ap- Seaman Jackson.B. Painter, 22, the proaches confiscation proportions onlywhen driver of the car, was killed instantly. He is three or four city blocksare razed. 9 9 93 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

A fire may damage, destroy, gut or raze a Flowery euphemismsonce the rule in jour- house. It does not, however, partially destroy it nalistic accounts of deathare no longer recom- or burn it to the ground. mended in straight newswriting. They are less Although commonly used, planes do not col- objective and no more acceptable to the reader. lide in midair. The may collide on the ground or Why say corpst: or remains when body is a more in the air. There is no way of determining mid- accurate desc, ytion? The body is placed in a air. coffin, not t..irket. It is usually taken home, Weather often causes accidents and disasters not shipped. Funeral services, not obsequiae, are which make news. In addition, gale warnings, held. The body is buried, not interred. storms at sea, and hurricane hunts play major Thedescriptiveterms "young," "middle- roles in Navy stories. Simple weather terminol- aged," and "elderly" are often misused because ogy, however, is frequently misused by Navy they are relative. The criteria used by AP is: a JO's. Here are some of the more common terms person is young until he is 35, middle-aged from and their definitions: 35-65, and elderly after 65. But if you think a man's age is important, why use descriptive ad- A GALE is a strong wind with a velocity of jectives at all? Why not merely identify him as 30.65 miles per hour. being 35, 52, 68 or whatever his age may be. A STORM manifests itself by winds of unusual force ranging from 65-75 miles per hour. It is often accompanied by rain, snow, hail, and GATHERING THE FACTS violent outbursts of thunder and lightning. A HURRICANE or TYPHOON is a storm of Gathering the facts for a routine Navy acci- intense severity and violence, with winds over 75 dent story is simple. Often, the best source of miles per hour. The difference between a hurri- information is the personnel office. The "casu- cane and a typhoon is mostly a matterof geog- alty report" made by the personal office and raphy. In the South Pacific, for instance, it's a transmitted by priority message will provide you typhoon. In the South Atlantic, it's called a hur- with most of the necessary information. ricane. In gathering the facts for an accident story, A TORNADO is a rotary storm which is very make sure you get the following information: destructive but covers a relatively small area. It usually appears as a whirling, advancing funnel hanging from a mass of black clouds. 1. Casualty's full name, including rank or rate, file or service number, branch of service. 2. Status: Active duty or training. Certain medical terms crop up in accident 3. Type of death: killed in action, died of stories from time to time. They should be sim- wounds received in action, or death from any plified whenever possible: other cause. 4. Date,hour,place,circumstances and Abraisionsscratches cause. Lacerationscuts 5. Location and disposition of body. Contusions-bruises 6. Full name, address, and relationship of Trauma-shock next of kin, 7. Information stating whether next of kin Damage figures are also frequently used. You has been officially notified. should keep in mind t'lat initial figures are usually estimates, and should be stated as suQh. If These facts usually provide enough informa- the, figures are unusual or high, they shunt' he tion for a start. Note the following report briefly attributed to the authority who made them. answers all the questions necessary for an acci- A person is widely known, not well knowv. dent story. A few well-placed phone calls will But even when widely known is used, it m..ist be provide you with any other details you may followed up with specific accomplishments. need. The results may look something like this: 94 Chapter 6FEATURE, SPEECH, SPORTS, AND ACCIDENT STORIES

A Little Creek sailor was killed today Cause of accidents should not be attributed to when his automobile went out of control, negligence or human error, even if this is sus- struck a railroad track and overturned on pected at the time of writing. The cause may be Sewells Point Road near Ward's Corner. reported after a complete investigation has been The sailor was identified as Gunner's made. Mate First Class John J. Doe, 37, husband of Mrs. Dolores E. Doe of 1717 Atlantic 3. Date board of inquiry will be convened Ave., Atlantic City, N.J. andits members. If the accident is serious A veteran of 16 years naval service, Doe enough, media will want this information. was attached to the Special Services De- 4. Lives still imperiled. If men are still trap- partment, Little Creek Naval Amphibious ped, this rates coverage with the other casualties. Base. His death marks the first traffic fatal- 5. Property loss or damage. It is not neces- ity involving a Little Creek Navyman since sary that you state the price of an airplane each February. time one crashes,but when a structureis damaged by the crash, media will want to know A routine accident story of this type usually its value. runs about three or four paragraphs. It is brief 6. Disposition of the dead. State where the and compact, yet contains enough information bodies 11, .*1 been taken. to satisfy the requirements of most newspapers. 7. Care of the injured. This, like (6)is All accident stories, however, are not this sim- especially applicableinoff-station accidents. ple. When two or more casualties are involved, The story should state where the injured are you will have to dig for more details and write a being treated. story with a casualty list. Listed below are some 8. Statementsfromsurvivors,especially of the facts to be taken into consideration: where heroic acts are involved. They are unnecessary in routine accidents, however. 9. Rescue work still underway. This isrelated` 1. Accurate number and complete identities to victims still imperiled. of the dead and injured. 10. Human interest items such as noteworthy 2. Causeoftheaccident.Authoritative escapes, rescues, or unusual circumstancesin- sources should be consulted and quoted when- volved. ever necessary. If the cause of the accident is not readily apparent, the story should state: OTHER FACTORS TO KEEP IN MIND The cause of the accident is unknown. A board of inquiry will be convened to deter- Accidents are caused by various circum- mine it. stances. The major causes for most accidents are human error, mechanical failure, disturbances of Although the exact cause of an accident may nature, and "acts of God." be unknown, qualifiers may be used to present a When a pilot misjudges his plane's altitude, probable cause in the story. For example: attitude, or airspeed and crashes upon tie deck of an aircraft carrier, the accident may be due to It is believed the plane crashed because human error. of engine failure. If a hydrattlic catapult aboard the same carrier explodes and kills several aviation boatswain's The words "engine failure" are broad in na- mates, the causes of the accident might be me- ture, but sufficient enough to satisfy the curios- chanical failure. ity of most readers: If the same ship were battered about in a violent storm at sea and several crewmen are in- Exactly what caused the engine failure jured when they are thrown out of their bunks, will be determined later, following investi- the accident could be blamed on disturbances of gation. nature. 95 101 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Finally, there are accidents which cannot be But the reader never learns these facts unless attributed to any of the above causes and are they are mentioned in the story. Decisions and therefore classified under "acts of God." For ex- actions such as these should not only be in- ample: A bee stings the coxswain of a motor cluded in the story but should be featured in the launch, causing him to lose his footing, fall over- lead as well. This is the JO's responsibility. He board and drown. must have the common sense and ability to rec- When an accident occurs in the Navy and an ognize these facts and play them up accordingly. acco'tnt of it gets into the newspaper, the reader In another story, a Navy man is killed in a automatically looks for someone or something routine auto accident. There is nothing unusual to blat le. The reader often forgets that circum- or spectacular about it. Nobody else is involved. stances, as well as persons and things, cause acci- The man lost his life when the car blew a tire on dents. a sharp curve, veered out of control, and In writing an accident story, the Journalist smashedinto a utilitypole. Circumstances should attempt to explain these circumstances. caused the accident. With proper handling, an accident story may re- Yet, when the. story is published, a civilian sult in better understanding and appreciation by reader may think to himself; "Well, another one the public of the everyday hazards faced in the of those sailors from the base killed himself to- Navy. day.I wish something would be done about For example, take an aircraft accident in their reckless driving habits. It is not safe to which the pilot manages to parachute to safety drive the highways anymore." just moments before his plane crashes into an In a story of this type, the curcumstances isolated field. Regardless of the fact that nobody should be carefully explained. It might also be was hurt and there was no real property damage, pointed out in the story that this was the first many readers will approach the facts with a neg- auto accident in which a Navyman was involved ative point of view. Unless told differently, they in five or six months, if that is the case. The willthinkaboutthestoryintermsof reader will never know these facts unless you tell "carelessness" or "negligence." Either the pilot him. Try to wrap up your story with some posi- did not know how to handle his plane or the tive information. ground crew did not adequately prepare it for It must be emphasized, however, that under flight. These are typical reactions. no circumstances should facts be distorted or sugar-coated to put an accident in a favorable What the reader does not know, however, is light.If mitigating circumstances exist, they that the plane might have suffered a flame-out should be reported. If they do not exist, tell the over a heavily populated city. To protect the story straight and stick to the facts. You should lives of people below, the pilot may have de- strive to treat all stories as impartially and as cided to stick with the disabled plane until it objectively as possible. Never give a newspaper, reached an unpopulated area. In doing this, the or any other medium for that matter, less than pilot jeopardized his own chances for survival. your best effort.

96 CHAPTER 7

ADVANCE STORIES, FOLLOWUPS, AND REWRITES

At one time or another in your career as a Advance stories are used to promote practi- Navy Journalist you can expect to find yourself cally every major special event that is scheduled writing an advance story, writing a followup, to take place in the Navy. They provide the and rewriting a release received from an outside advance build-up and support required to attract source. attention, encourage participation, and assure Producing advance stories,followups, and success. Few special events could succecd with- rewrites, requires first that you know how to out the benefit of advance announcements by write, and second that you have a sharp eye for local media. accuracy. You also must have a sound know- Suppose your command was holding an open ledge and background of the subject about house. The event probably would be a complete which you are writing. failure if the public didn't know in advance All news can be classified as either spot news when and wliere it would occur, what activities or created news. Spot news results from an were planned, who could attend, and why the unexpected or incidental event. If you have open house was being held. advance knowledge of a planned event, the Three important things to remember when result is created news. For this reason, news is writing and releasing advance stories: sometimes labeled according to chronological sequences of events: Don't shoot the whole works in the first story. In a publicity build-up, plan the release of ADVANCE STORYA story of an event major facts so that they may provide good news which is scheduled or expected to take place in pegs for later advance stories. the future. SPOT NEWS STORYA story of an inci- Don't ruin a good thing. Advance stories dental or unexpected event, or reports of the must contain legitimate news, not mere pub- facts as they occurred in an event or incident licity puffs. Provide facts which readers will find foretold by an advance story. worthwhile and interesting. FOLLOWUP STORYA story which provides additional information, latest developments, or, Schedule your advance stories over a period in general, updates a spot news story. of time but don't over exploit an event.

Figure 7-1gives a typical example of an advance release that might be used to announce ADVANCE STORIES an Armed Forces Day open house. The initial release should be given to the press about three An advance story calls the public's attention weeks in advance of the event. The first release to a coming news event which might be missed if should contain the bare essentials in the way of it were covered as a spot news story. It answers information.Later releases elaborate on the the questions, "What is going to happen and sketchy facts presented in the initial announce- when is it going to happen?" ment. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

OFFICIAL ,NAVY pews re ease FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE RELEASE # 44-72

April 27, 1972

AIR STATION TO HOLD OPEN HOUSE

NAS MOPPET FIELD, April 27 -- The Naval Air Station will hold

open house Saturday May20 in observance of Armed Forces Day.

The announcement was made today by Captain L.B. Randolph,commanding

officer of the air station. Captain Randolph said the gates will be open

to visitors from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m. and the generalpublic is invited

to attend. Parking facilities will be available on the air station.

Special buses are being scheduled for those who wish to use public

transportation.

The theme for this year's Armed Forces Day is "U.S. Navy -Mark

of a Man." The Naval Air Station joins with thousands of other

military installations throughout the world in highlighting this

year's theme.

The main attraction of the open house will be an hourlong

performance by the "Blue Angels," the Navy's famous jet precision

flying team. Also planned for the oepn house programarelanumber

of displays and exhibits highlighting the great stridesMade in the

development of naval aviation during the past 60 years.

Further details will be announced later.

- USN -

185.25 Figure 7-1.The initial advance story should contain the bare essentials.

98 104 Chapter 7 -ADVANCE STORIES, FOLLOWUPS, AND REWRITES

Each advance story you release will depend The BODY of the story presents details of all on what you have to tell and its significance. new developments in the situation. The stories should be timed and released to achieve the maximum coverage. Each story should build up to the next one, with the best PRINCIPLES OF REWRITING and most important news pegs timed for release during the week of the scheduled event. The principles of rewriting are the same as Figure 7-2 shows examples of leads to stories those for good newswriting. If a story does not subsequent to the initial announcement. conform to acceptable newswriting standards, it should be rewritten so that it does. In other words, you take what somebody else has written FOLLOWUP STORIES and convert it into usable news copy. If you are assigned to a command publication, Followups, like advance stories, are parts of such as a ship or station newspaper, you will an overall story. In many news situations, there find that a certain amount of your material will will be important or significant developments in come from contributors who don't write in a story already released. These news develop- journalistic style. In addition, other material will ments must then be released to update the come to Yoti via handouts, clip sheets, naval original story.This method of reporting is messages,directives,officialcorrespondence, referred to as FOLLOWUPS, which, as the name and other outside sources. If you want your implies, follow up the facts presented in the publication to contain material which is readable initial spot news story. and consistently good, or if you have a local In writing a followup story, there are two angle and want it to be accepted by commercial distinct readerships which must be considered in news media in your area, it is often necessary to compiling your story: The reader who has read rewrite it. the original story and the reader who may not There are six basic reasons for rewriting copy. have read the original story. Using this consider- These reasons are: ation as a guide, your followup must not bore the reader who has read the original story while To Improve poor copy the same followup must not confuse the reader who has not read the original story. You can To up-date material satisfy the requirements of both readers by using followup story structure as explained and To transform informal reports into properly diagramed in figure 7-3. written news stories

FOLLOWUP STORY STRUCTURE To localize general information The LEAD of a followup serves the same purpose as the lead in any other story. In a To combine two or more stories followup story, however, make sure your lead contains a fresh news peg, a new angle, or an To change story emphasis entirely different approach from the one used in the original spot news story to which it is related. The TIE-BACK consists of one or two para- IMPROVING COPY graphs located between the lead and the body of the story which contains a brief but clear Often the first attempt at a story is a dismal synopsis of the information presented in the effort. Some members of a public affairs staff original spot news story. The tie-back is used to may not be thoroughly skilled in the writing craft. refresh the memories of those readers who saw Also, material for intended releaseis often the of iginal story, and to bring up to date those submitted from other wiff offices or depart- readers who didn't see it. ments. These articles, in most cases, need the 99 105 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

The "Blue Angels," the Navy's precision flying team, will

provide an exciting hour-long progrem of thrills and precision

flying at the Armed Forces Day open house at the Naval Air Station

on Saturday, May 20.

The "Blue Angels" have been thrilling...

a MEM MEN d 01111 a= ...... INN MOM Mos WOO Me dm. INS NIB MN ONO

A naval aviation "air museum," consisiing of 20 planes that have

played a major role in Navy history during the past 60 years, will be

displayed to the public at the Armed Forces Day open house at the

Naval Air Station on Saturday, May 20...

Included in the air museum will be...

mar am. ma ONO INS 0,1wo mird WWI WM 1111 41111111 d1=11 dm. 6111

Undersecretary of t!-A Navy, Honorable Pat A. Sutton, will be the

guest of honor at the Armed Forces Day open house at the Naval Air

Station May 20.

?he une -time vice president of ...

Mb IMO IMINSIM MEM IMO Inavi. Mob MINN GM WM Olo WWI OM MID MO MIN MI= NM MN, IMO OM MO MO NMI illI MI MID OM* IMP

A display of naval aviation ordnance, including exhibits

of the powerful Bullpup and other air-to-ground and air-to-air

missiles, will be shown to the public May 20 during the Armed Forces

Day open house at the Naval Air CteiLiv...

Captain L. B. Randolph, commanding officer of the air station said...

166.26 Figure 7-2.Later releases elaborate on the initial announcement.

100 REST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 7A'lliANCE STORIES, FOLJ OWUPS, ANDREWRITES

Navy firefighters and rescue teams continued The lead introduces a new to comb the twisted, fireravaged comport. angle or a fresh approach to ments of th, nuclear powered USS Tonkin Gulf today searching for additional victims a story that has already of yesterday's explosion which left more appeared in various media. than 450 crewmembers dead, injured or missing.

The explosion oc:urred yesterday while The tieback contains a the gift; attack aircraft carrier was con brief synopsis of the ducting routine air operations off the Virginia Capes. Preliminary reports information presented in from survivors indicated that the blast the original story. was centered in the area of the carrier's catapult.

According to Captain George Sadler, USN, The body presents details the Tonkin Gulf's commanding officer, 15 of all new developments. more bodies were recovered today from

the wreckage. Firefighters reported . . .

165.27 Figure 7.3. FoIlowup story structure.

professional touch of the rewrite man. A rewrite perhaps in interviewing face-to-facebefore he man organizes a poorly written, improperly can turn out a finished product. arrangedarticleinto asequentiallylogical There are times, too, when the rewrite man finished product. may have to convert a feature storyor a poor A rewrite man may have to turn a straight attempt at a featureinto a news story. There- news story into a feature. In this event he often fore, he must be an expert at both of these types needs to acquire additional information and can of writing before assuming the job of rewrite expect to spend some time on the telephoneor man. .1 101 107 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

One of the most frequent faults of badly should be introduced in the lead and the more written copy is the failure to give amply play in general aspects can be minimized. the lead to the dominant news element of the For example, suppose you are attached to a story. The rewriter must dig through the story, naval air station and receive a handout from an find the proper lead, put it at the beginning aircraft manufacturer stating a new type of whereitbelongs,and finelly, organize the plane is in production and will soon be made remainder of the story in coherent form. available to the Navy. The release contains a wealth of unclassified information about the plane and its potentialities. A little research on your part uncovers the TRANSFORMING INFORMAL REPORTS fact that an aircraft squadron in your command will be one of the first squadrons in the Navy to A telephone report is a type of informal receive and operate the new planes. You can report which must be transformed into a prop- now combine your information with that in the erly written news story. general releaseplaying up the local aspectand The idea of cooperation between the JO in then you will have a story of interest to local the office and JO on the scene is most important readers. to the Navy in times of stress, in accidents, and disasters. The initial release in these cases is generally COMBINING STORIES compiled by one person who receives reports telephoned by -JO's in thefield. He adds The rewrite man often puts two or more background material available in office files and stories together to make one. The combination sometimes works with materials brought back generally results in a round-up story with the ...... from interviews by other PA personnel to make first paragraph carrying a combination lead to a single, comprehensive release. emphasize various news developments. An ex- Other routine news stories are handled in ample might be a combination of the following much the same fashion, without the hectic stories: a story carried in the local paper about a atmosphere and pressure of disaster stories. For disaster that struck the area, such as a hurricane, example, the command's special services petty a huge fire, or a tidal wave and a news release officer may be the PA office correspondent for issued earlier by the nearby naval command athletic events. That doesn't necessarily mean he citing several men assigned to that activity who brings a finished story to the office. More likely, aided victims of the disaster. Both of these he telephones a contact in the PAO and gives stories, wrapped up with a fresh release about him the details of the game and the JO turns it awards for heroism presented to Navy personnel into a professional release for local media and by the mayor of the nearby town, nets the the command newspaper. rewrite man a multi-interest, highly readable story. LOCALIZING SHIFTING EMPHASIS Public Affairs offices receive news from many sources. News releases from the Department of It is standard policy in Navy public affairs to Defense, Navy Department, weapons manu- release the SAME story at the SAME time to facturers, shipyards, aircraft manufacturers, and ALL media. However,, on some occasions, you other outlets provide a good source for outside may find it profitable to rewrite the same release news. This news however, is usually broad in several times to meet the needs of different scope and slanted toward a general market and media. will,therefore,require acertain degree of Suppose you wanted to get a certain story refinement and localization to meet the needs of published in a variety of publications such as the your local readership. local papers, Navy Times, All Hands, Our Navy, When rewriting these releases, the local angle Naval Aviation News, the Armed Forces Press los' 02 Chapter 7 ADVANCE STORIES, FOLLOWUPS, AND REWRITES

Service,one or more of the trade publications, Figure 7-4 through 7-7 show introductions to and possibly home town newspapers. In addi- four different accounts of the same story as tion, you think the story is worthy of air time published inOur Navy, All Hands, Navy Tines, on radio and TV. Under normal circumstances, and one of several home town newspapers. you can't take the time to rewrite the same Although all the stories concern the rescue of a story several different ways and slant it to the grounded LST from a coral reef in the Bahamas, particular needs of different media. But there note how the story is rewritten each time to are occasions when this is aecessary if you wit; t present a new approach or to meet the style of to obtain maximum coverage for a special type theparticular publicationfor whichit was of story. When this is the case, you will have to intended. Although a certain amount of addi- keep rewriting the story in the style preferred by tional work and effort was necessary, the re- each of the different media. writes resulted in 100 percent coverage.

annum SALVAGE OPERATIONS

SAVE THE USS LST 291 A modern epic of the seaunequalled in recent naval annals for sheer endurance and ingenuitywas written early this year near a tiny, coral-studded island in the Great Bahamas. It involved a grounded Amphibious Force vessel that was res- cued from a treacherous coral reef after almost two weeks of relentless wed frustrating efforts by ships and men of the Atlantic Fleet. The salvage operations, which were carried out in the storm-ridden, shark- infested waters off Eleuthera Island, involved a dozen ships, the Navy's top salvage and underwater demolition teams, and aircraftthat were employed for everything from the evacuation of survivors to the transportation of explosives. Practically every trick in the Navy's salvage repertoire was used, and many new ones were thought up to cope with the unusual and near-impossible situations that hindered the immediate rescue of the grounded ship. The curtain went up on this modern epic of the sea about 0900 on 16 March with theLittle Creek-based LST 291 churning her way through the dark and murky waters of the Great Bahamas...

IMIIM11111111,

Figure 74.Our Navy, 165.21

109 103 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

TUGS, FROGMEN, TNT FREE STRANDED LST NORFOLK, Va.Eleven days after running aground in the Bahamas, the Shored-up.-LST 291 rode a tow-line to Jacksonville, Fla., and the crews of at least eight vessels which helped her off the beach breathed weary sighs of relief. In the early pre-dawn hours of March 18, the LST was homeward-bound with 118 Marine passengers and the amphibious gear they had used in the maneuversat Vieques, P.R. Suddenly, she struck a submerged reef off James Pt., Eleuthera Is., Bahamas, and ripped a jagged hole in her hull. BLASTING THEIR WAY TO SAFETY Fifteen minutes after she hit, word was One of the more unusual salvage passed to abandon ship. Her passengers stories of the year is the tale of an LST and all of her 98-man crew but a salvage grounded so fast on a coral reef that frog- detail scrambled ashore ... men had to blast a 1,000-foot channel to free her. USS LIST 291 was churning her way through the waters of the Great Bahamas 165.23 after completing two weeks of amphi- Figure 7.5.Navy Times. bioustraining exercises at Vieques, Puerto Rico. About 1,800 yards off James Point, Eleuthera Island, the crunching of steel and stone shattered the silence of the night.The LIST had hit a submerged coral reef. The grounding tore a two- foot hole in the evaporator room and twisted, warped, and gashed the heavy steel skin in other parts of the ship's hull. Water started pouring in through these openings and all of the lower compartments became flooded. Personnel were ordered over the side. Although the nearest land was lees than a mile away ....

165.22 Figure 74.All Hands,

1104 Chapter 7ADVANCE STORIES, FOLLOWUPS, AND REWRITES

DOING NEXT TO IMPOSSIBLE JUST ROUTINE TO NAVY COMDR. ROBERT K. THURMAN Cmdr. Robert K. Thurman, USN, the son of Mrs. R. L. Thurman of Cashmere, is earning high praise and recognition in Norfolk for his abilities as a Navy salvage officer. His most recent accomplishment as a salvage officer was the rescue of the Landing Ship Tank 291in the Great Bahamas afterit had gone aground on a treacherouscoral reef early this year. With Thurman supervising the salvage efforts, the Navy 1ST was finally freed after almost two weeks of relentless and frustrating efforts by ships and men of the Atlantic Fleet. Carriedoutinthe storm- ridden waters off Eleuthera Island, the salvage operations involved a dozer ships, the Navy's top salvage and underwater demolition experts, and aircraft that were employed for everything from the evacuation of survivors to the transportation of explosives. But this was only one of many such operations in Thurman's long and eventful naval career. Other notable achievements for him involved the battleship Missouri and the Military Sea Transport tanker Wascissa. When the USS Missouri went aground off Hampton Roads in 1950, Thurmanwas skipper of the salvage ship WS Windlaiss, which was instrumental in freeing ...

106.24

Figure 7 -7. From a home town newspaper.

105ill CHAPTER 8

WRITING FOR MAGAZINES

One of the most important but most often TYPES OF MAGAZINES overlooked media through which you can tell the Navy storyisthe magazine. There is a GENERAL CIRCULATION MAGAZINES magazine for every group inthe American aremostwidely-knownbecausetheyare public. These periodicals appeal to all tastes and commonly found on most newsstands. They temperaments. attempt to interest just about everyone, regard- What opportunities in the magazine field are less of education or profession. For instance, open to the Navy Journalist, or for that matter, each member of a family would probably be any navyman with writing talents? interested in Time and Reader's Dig.:st. Men will Every person, place, event or thing isa often find articles of interest to them in Good possible source for a magazine article. What one Housekeeping and Cosmopolitan, and at times person sees daily and takes for granted, another women will be interested in Argosy, Popular person with a well-developed eye for the inter- Mechanics, or Playboy. Some magazines are esting and unusual often can turn into a success- aimed at specific age groups, yet these are for ful article. All idea sources, as well as writing nation-wide readership, whether in Oregon or fundamentals in chapters 5 and 6 concerning Florida. Usually the general magazines pay well feature writing, also apply to magazine writing. for their articles imd only use material from top The Navy is a fertile source for subjects and writers who are known to the editor or who are ideas' whichcanbedevelopedintogood recognized for their past literary successes or magazine articles. All you have to do is look prominence in a particular field. However, this is around you. Better yet, thumb through some of not to say that itis impossible for beginning the current issues of the leading magazines. See writerstobreakintoprintwithgeneral what the professionals have written on the magazines. subject. The sea, and the men and ships that sail it, has fascinated readers for centuries. The modern saga of the sea and the men of theU.S. Navy are even more thrilling than TRADE JOURNALS are published for per- anything found in fiction. In many cases, the sons who have common interests in a trade or factual accounts of the modern Navy far surpass profession. Editor and Publisher an ;I The Writer fiction material. Atomic-powered ships, super- are written for professional journaliqs. The NEA sonic aircraft, intercontinental ballistic missiles, Journal is published by the Nationa, Educational earth satellites, probes into space and similar Association for educators. Such priodicals are achievements have stimulated the imagination of often good markets for the beginning or military even the most imaginative authors. writer. Articles about new methods, equipment This chapter will acquaint you with types of and successes in a particularfie d would be magazines and magazine articles.Itwill also interesting to all persons working in that profes- introduce you to the composition of articles, sion and such stories might help some readers and give you some tips on Low to research your improve their own methods to increase effi- idea and get the articles into print. ciency and profits. 106 1.12 Chapter 8WRITING FOR MAGAZINES

1111111111111P

HOUSE ORGANS are written and edited to ASSOCIATION-PRODUCED MAGAZINES promote employee and customer relations.They are still another group ofmilitary-oriented peri- do for the company roughly what the ship or odicals. These magazines are written and edited station newspaper does for the military. The either by employees of the Department of the Gebbie House Magazine Directory lists some Defense or privately-employed individuals, Pri- 6,000 to 8,000 house organs by industry and marily,thesemagazinesaresponsored by estimates there may be as many as 50,000 if military associations interested in the military irregularly published materials were defined as establishment and the inidivdual services. Many magazines. House organs are especially good are paid for by advertising.The U.S. Naval markets for features on former employees now Institute sponsors Proceedings; the Air Force on active duty or storiesabout Armed Forces Association publishes Air Force and Space use of the company'sproducts. House publica- Digest; and the Marine Leatherneck Association tions are interested in how their product is being publishes Leatherneck. used in the field, modifications that improvethe product or adapt it to a specific use, and the Associationsandcommericalenterprises relative success of the product. They are particu- publish trade magazines such as Armed Forces larly interested in any article thatimproves Management and Data Magazine, Journal of the relations or speaks favorably of their product or American Societyof Navy Engineers,and personnel. Military Medicine. Other magazines are published by commerical SERVICE-ORIENTED PERIODICALS are enterprises whose advertisers wish to appeal to aimed at active duty retired, and reserve person- militarypersonnel,e.g., Our Navy and the nel and their families who are interested inthe Armed Forces Journal. nation's military establishment and its activities. Many of the service-oriented magazines are This definition does not exclude those publica- listed in the marketing directories and some tions that are of interest to other readerswho publish style guides to help writers prepare have some connection or interest in theDepart- articles for that specific publication. ment of Defense and itsactivities, such as contractors, educators andcivilservice employees. They can further be defined as internal, THE MAGAZINE ARTICLE association, and commerical magazines. Journalism once was defined as "literature in .. INTERNAL MAGAZINES arepublished by a hurry," The reason is obvious.News stories are the government and circulated through distribu- written hurriedly. A news writer is faced almost tion channels to men and women on activeduty.-constantly with a deadline, His writing suffers Such magazines resemble house organs because because it is usually done with one eye on the they attempt to improve morale by dissemina- typewriter and the other on the clock. What tion of service information. They are printed at good is it if a news writer prepares a magnificent the expense of the government and carry no story and misses the final deadline for the last advertising, but areavailableto anyone at edition? Magazine writers are seldom faced with prescribed subscription rates. All hands is an suchdeadlineproblems.Theirarticlesare example of aninternalmagazine.Internal written more leisurely under less trying circum- magazines are normally written and editedby stances. members of the services and are published and Both news stories and magazine articles deal distributed on a basis of one copy per ten with facts, But while newspapers presentthe persons. bare facts without comment, except on the Other segments of the Navy and the military editorial page or under by-lines, magazines an also publish internal magazines that often take plify them with background details and show on many aspects of tradejournals, Examples are how they will affect the reader, Navy Chaplains Bulletin, Naval Aviation News, Magazines also deal with news, The news and the Naval Civil Engineer. which appears in newspapers has a perishable 107 113 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 quality. Its value and significance diminishes as have been written about Navy scientists, combat the immediacy wears off. The news in maga- heroes, chaplains, test pilots, and athletes. zines, however, is more enduring. Many magazine articles are just as informative and interesting a year after publication as they were on the PERSONAL EXPERIENCE ARTICLES day they first appeared in print. They also are remembered longer because they are read more Unusual adventures, unique accomplishments, leisurely and thoroughly. raretravelexperiences, and countless othe. personal experiences lend themselves to treatment in this type of article. TYPES OF MAGAZINE ARTICLES "I Went Down With the Maine," "I Survived the Bataan Death March," "My 60 Days Under Attempts have been made to classify the the Sea in an Atomic Submarine," "I Fly With variousarticleforms, .but usually any one the Blue Angels," and "I Walked on the Moon" article will exhibit several characteristics which are all typica! titles which appear over personal writers should understand. The following seven experience articles. types are recommended for Navy Journalists: Thousands of men and women' in the Navy PERSONALITY SKETCH, PERSONAL have had exciting personal experiences that EXPERIENCE, CONFESSION, NARRATIVE, could be developed into good magazine articles. UTILITY ARTICLE, INTERVIEW,and In many cases, however, they don't have the FEATURETTE. These types frequently overlap ability, the time, or the inclination to put these and the .dividing lines which spearate them are experiences down on paper. Here's a good oftenblurred, but the beginner must learn opportunity for the JO in search of ideas. something about them before he can start When writing an article of this type, the jO writing for the magazine industry. credits his own authorship of the article with the "astoldto.. ."by-line. Use caution when writing in the first person. Frequent use of the THE PERSONALITY SKETCH "I" can become, or appear, egotistical. Gen- erally, the third person (he) is considered more The personality sketch is a short biography readable. that describes a person and his achievements. The purpose of such an article, whether a success article, a profile, a biography or the shorter vignette,is to portray the intimate THE CONFESSION ARTICLE details of character and personality of a person who is widely-known, who has achieved some The confession article is not necessarily a form of greatness, or whose life is in some way "shocker" or scandal story. It is, however, an interesting or remarkable. The subject does not "inside story" of conditions or problems nor- have to be a famous show business or political mally unknown to the average reader. It often personality. The story could be written about involves common problems, handicaps, or short- anyone in the Navy who is interesting, well- comings which are overcome by determination known, or has done something unusual. A and common sense. Incidents related in con- common example is the "Most Unforgettable fession articles often are typical of everyday life. Character" series in the Reader's Most. A juvenile deliquent with a police record A Navy jet pilot who adopted an entire learns discipline and responsibility aboard a orphanage of Japanese children was the subject Navy destroyer. a midshipman's determination of one good personality article. Another dealt to overcome a speech defect saves his Navy with a Boatswain's Mate aboard a destroyer who career. A young man cures a morbid fear of spent his reenlistment bonus on football equip- water by joining the Navy. Subjects like these ment so that his shipmates could compete have lent themselves to treatment in confession against larger Navy ships. Still other sketches articles. 114 1°8 Chapter 8WRITING FOR MAGAZINES The most noticeable characteristic of the fast-paced, otherwise it may sound like a chapter confession storyisitsintimate, confidential out of a history textbook. toneas if the writer were persor.ally revealing The best markets for this kind of article are his secret to each and every reader. Although the the men's magazines and historical magazines. subject matter is personal,it must evoke an empathic response in the reader. Humor should not be overlooked in this THE UTILITY ARTICLE category. The subject's willingness to tellhis story shows he is not ashamed. If he can inject Any process, product, method, or idea that humor into the account, he shows an objective will help the reader become wiser, healthier, approach. wealthier, or happier is a subject for the utility Some subjects are best treated humorously. or "how-to-do-it" article. It is generallyshorter Many interestingarticleshave been written than most other articles and the writing is humorously about common phobias such as a usually expository or explanatory. visit to the dentist. This treatment helps the The Navy offers a wealth of ideas for the reader to see that most of the fear is unfounded. how-to-do-it article. Practically everyone has at If the humor is skillfully handled, the reader will one time or another deviseda scheme to chuckle to himself. improve his job, working conditions, or equip- Keep in mind, though, that humor must fit ment. These ideas are valuable if they can be the subject matter. Flippant treatment of serious written and slanted to some magazine. There are or distress subjects alienates thereader. thousands of trade magazines and house organs constantly looking for just this type of material. Editorsof PopularScienceandPopular Mechanics build their entire magazines around THE NARRATIVE this type of article. The utility article can be compared to a set of The narrative is especially suitable for writ- instructions presentedin an interesting and ing about Navy subjects. Sharp characterization, lively manner. The writer should ask himself the vivid description, dialogue, action, and suspense questions he feels the reader is most likely to are skillfully woven into the frameworkof a ask. Then, answer them clearly and simply. He narrative article to dramatize the facts. But the must assume that every reader is unfamiliar with facts are adapted to this type of treatment. The the information, even though some may be writer does not invent them, exaggerate them, or experts. embellish them in any way. The story must be This does not mean that the article must be authentic, down to the smallest detail. dull. A routine set of instructions for building a The reallifeexploits and adventures of simple cabinet can be interesting if properly navymen the world over are told in magazines presented. articles using the narrative approach. A heroic The first, second, or third person can be used rescue, an epic battle, a dramatic struggle against in these articles. The personal experience ap- the elements, a display of bravery and determi- proach is perhaps most effective for interesting nation in the face of overwhelming difficulties, and vivid writing. The third person style should are all subjects which may be developedinto be used only if the idea presented involves narrative articles. John F. Kennedy and PT-109 dramatic or entertaining situations. Most com- is a classic example. mon is the use of the second person,imperative Careful research is important in writing this voice ("You fit the wrench. . ."). kind of article, especially if it is about an event in which many of the magazine's readers may have taken part. An important error or omission THE INTERVIEW ARTICLE will immediately be noted by these people, who will then be skeptical of the entire article. At the Interview articles, basically, present questions same time, the writing should be colorful and and answers that offer a subject's views on a

109 115 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 given topic.Little background information is The writer may also need to research other given in the article because the subject is widely specific indices. The Air University Index refer- known to the readers or the emphasis is on the ences all items that have appeared in service- topic of discussion. The interview requires much oriented publications. Other special indices show advance planning, and the writer must have entries in periodicals pertaining to numerous thoroughly researched the subject before con- other subjects. The writer may also wish to ducting the interview. The Sunday newspaper consult the Library Card Catalogue, the Cumula- supplement, This Week, regularly includes an tive Book Index, or the Book Review Index, interview article. biographical dictionaries, encyclopedias, newspapers, and pamphlets to learn all he possibly can about his subject. It is not uncommon for a FEATURETTES writer to spend days, weeks, or even months collecting information before an interview or The featurette is probably the most popular visit. One writer, preparing to do a personality and best-selling short article found in magazines sketch on a well-known composer, spent three today. It is short and simple, and contains the months reading about symphonies, two months element of oddity or humor, sometimes both. studying the man's works, and one month Its purpose is to entertain. interviewing people who knew the musician. "Humor in Uniform" and "Life in these Only then did he feel prepared to interview the UnitedStates," regular sections in Reader's man. Digest,are good examples of the featurette. Complete research must also include learning Nearlyevery magazinecarriesatleast one all the writer can about his intended market. anecdote as filler material in each issue. Once it has been decided who the interested readers are, then the writer can determine what they read. Here one or more of the many market directories will be of invaluable assistance. RESEARCHING THE IDEA Once the market has been selected the next step is to obtain at least three recent issues of Any magazine article, whether for the glamor- the magazine. With these the writer can more ous nation-wide markets or the smallest of house closelyexamine contentforliterarystyle,, magazines, should begin with a good idea that is taboos, subject matter, and length of published supported by a statement of purpose. Without a articles. A study of advertising will further reveal purpose for writing the article, the author would information about the magazine's readers and too easily lose sight of his goal and the result where they are. This analysis helps the author to would likely be wasted time and an unintel- know this audience and tailor the article to fit ligible product. their needs. Many beginning writers failto narrow the As the writer examines the magazines, he subject to a workable idea. Such a sharp focus must be alert to the literary style or approach a could be on an individual, an episode, or theme. magazine takes inpresenting a subject. For The next step should take the writer to the instance, several magazines might handle a piece Reader's Guide to Periodical Literature. The dealing with the Defense Information School, Guideisacumulative index of published but each would treat it in an entirely different authors, subjects and titles that is current to way. The NEA Journal would like to know the within two weeks prior to the week of search. concepts and techniques of instruction, the RCA Using this reference the writer will pay particu- Electronic AGE would be interested in the use lar attention to coverage of his selected subject of radio-television equipment, All Hands might in recent years by all publications to determine want a story about the faculty and students, if his idea is still fresh and would not violate the Parade Magazine 'might prefer emphasis on the principle of exclusiveness. He will also take educational angle and benefits to the individual, notes to aid researching information for the and Quill might prefer a story on the profession- article. alism of military journalists. Chapter 8WRITING FOR MAGAZINES

After determining the basic approach, the V, MARKET ANALYSISThis part con- writer analyzes further to see how the material is tains an analysis of the contents of the maga- written. He must observe the character of the zines you have selected as possible markets. language, whether it is scholarly or adventurous, technical or general, personal or formal, humor- Figure 8-1 shows an example of a typical ous or serious. The writer mustalso look for magazine article outline. taboos on subject matter and content. Some magazines will not print slang, others will not mention competitors. Additionally, the writer WRITING THE ARTICLE should examine the magazine for its use of illustrationspictures,drawings,cartoons, As the categories of magazines articles over- charts, graphs, diagrams, etc.and then plan lap, so do the methods of writing used in each. appropriate artwork to accompany the article. However, a common pattern can be found. Withallthe research and market analysis A major element of most articles, one that completed, the author should turn to his outline givesflesh and hlood to the story,is the which will be developed until the frame is filled anecdote. Gordon Gaskill, in The Writer's Hand- with details, explanations, anecdotes, and items book, sums it up this way: "The average article that contribute directly to the article. bought by the big magazines today is crammed full of anecdotes. And by anecdotes I mean any specific, short, significant story, or incident." Generally, a magazine article can be divided into four components; the TITLE, the LEAD, OUTLINING MAGAZINE ARTICLES the BODY, and the CONCLUSION. An outlineisavaluable aid in magazine writing. It enables you to evaluate and organize THE TITLE your material beforehand so the article maybe written easier and faster. The title of a magazine article gives the reader Once an outline is prepared, you can concen- a good idea of what thearticle is about. It tratestrictly on the actual writing of your usually features a short, terse statement designed article. You'll know what facts you will use and to attract his attencion or to arouse his curiosity. where and how you will use them. A magazine It should make the reader want to read the article outline may be divided into five parts: article immediately. A title, like the article itself, should be slanted I, PURPOSEEvery article has a purpose. towards a particular market. Each magazine has This part contains the reason you're writing the its own requirements with regard to style, article and what you hope to accomplish by it. length, and typographical arrangement. Some It sets a course to follow once you start writing. magazines prefer titles which summarize the information in the article. Others want titles which are descriptive or feature striking state- IL SOURCESThis part lists the sources from which you may get interviews, research ments. Still others favor titles whichfeature material, and illustrations. questions, quotations, direct appeal, or alitera- tion. In developing a title for an article, the writer III.PLAN OF DEVELOPMENTHere, you must be honest. He shouldn't misleadthe reader list your pertinent facts, anecdotes, subtitles or with facts that aren't supported by the article. major areas of coverage, et cetera, in the order He should avoid exaggeration or sensationalism, you wish to present your material. The title should convey the tone and spirit of the material featured in the article. Declarative IV.POSSIBLE MARKETSThis part lists sentences with concrete nouns and activeverbs some of the article's prospectivemarkets, are best, BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

THE SEABEE TRADITION (Story ofthe Seabees: From World War II to Vietnam)

I. Purpose

A. To recall highlights in the colorful history of the Seabees on the occasion of their 25th anniversary.

B. To bring the reader up to date on the Seabee's present organisation, capabilities, accomplishments, and outlook for the future.

II. Sources

A. Interviews:

1. Captain William H. Story (CEC), USN, Commander Construction Battalions, U.S. Pacific Fleet. 2. CDR Ralph C. Taylor (CEC), USN, COMSERVPAC Staff Civil Engineer. 3. LCDR William D. Middleton, USN, 10, MCB-1, Da Nang,

11. Reference Material:

1. Unclassified Files, Base Construction Office. 2. Naval Orientation Manual, Chapter 24, pages 433 -441. 3.Encyclopaedia Britannica. 4.Reader's Guide to Periodical Literature.

C. Illustrations:

1. Unclassified progress report photos of Seabees engaged in all phases of work available at Base Construction Office. 2. Photos of Amphibious Seabees bringing equipment ashore at Chu Lai (COMPHIBPAC PAO). 3.Write Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Washington, D.C. for photo of Seabee insignia (color).

III. Plan of Development

A.Lead -- Introduce article with anecdote about Third Marine Division's tribute to Seabees:

"So when we reach the Idle of Japan With our caps at a jaunty tilt, We'll enter the city of Tokyo On roads the Seabees built."

Page 3. of 2

165.32.1 Figure 8.1.- Example of a magazine article outline. An outline will enable you to evaluate and organize your material beforehand so the article can be written easier and faster. 1 1 2 118 BESTCOPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 8- WRITING FOR.MAGAZINES

B.Body

1. How, why, and when organised. 2. Built more than buses, airfields, roads, harbors, docks, etc. 3. Seabees and Marines. 4. Earned "Can Do, Will Dos motto at Guadalcanal. 5. Carved airfield out of jungle in 13 days at New Guinea. 6. General Tandergriftls tributo. 7. Seabee Ingenuity. 8.Seabee's Magic Box. 9. Rhinos in Operation Overlord. 10. The Great 8-29 Base on Tinian. 11. Reduced in strength frog 250,000 to 40,000 after VW II. 12. Quickly.mobilised again for Korean war. 13. Gobi Point. 14. Landed at Nolmido Beach with Marines. 15. Halved take Inchon, 'world's worst invasion area." 16.Bea4ees on the ice. 17. Vietnam. NCB-10 at Chu Lai. 18. Organisation (Mobile Construction Battalions, Maintenance Units, Seabee balm). 19. Comparison of World War II Seabees and Seabees engaged in Vietnam conflict. 20. Buried dead whale at Newport (anecdote). 21. Round-up of important figures. 22.Outlook for the Mare.

IV. Possible Markets

A. Navy - )(wain' of Beapower

B. The Construction Worker (trade pablication)

C. The American Builder (trade publication)

V. Market Analysis

Page 2 of 2

186.32.2 Figure 8.1.- Example of a magazine article outline-continued.

113 119 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 Few writers develop a title before they write more facts. The body of the article must keep the article. They usually begin writing the article the reader interested. first, hoping that something in the facts will help Keeping the reader interested for two or three create an interesting title. thousand wordi is a tough job. To do it, you must carefully Neigh every word, every sentence, and every paragraph. The facts you use must not only be interesting in themselves, but THE LEAD they must be presented in an interesting manner. The body of a narrative or personal experi- The lead of a magazine article is similar to the ence story is probably the easiest to write. All lead of a news story, except that it's often you have to do is set down the details in the longer and more difficult to write. It may run order in which they happened. This is the only one paragraph in length, or it may run as simplest way to write the story, because you can much as 10 percent of the entire article. depend on the action to hold the reader's Whatever space is allotted to it, a lead must, interest. without wasting words, accomplish the follow- But an article which contains no action apd ing: just presents factual information is harder to write. You are constantly restricted by the facts Indicate the central idea to be conveyed in themselves, yet you must use skill and imagina- the article. tion in presenting them. The facts must flow from the article naturally, without awkward Contain a hint of the spirit and movement of pause or sudden changes. the article. Paragraphs should be written so they inter- lock. The end of one paragraph should naturally Locate the subject as to time and place. lead into the beginning of the next. Transitions should be accomplished so that the reader isn't Show any relation which may exist between aware of them. the facts and the reader. The key to making the body of the article interesting is to insert anecdotes, specific ex- Generate enough interest to make the reader amples, and hypothetical situations. These help want to read the rest of the article. illustrate points and emphasize important facts. The lead is the most important part of a magazine article. If it fails to sustain the reader's interest, he won't read the article. Because of this, many professional writers spend more time developing a good lead than in writing any THE CONCLUSION approximately equal part of the article. As trite as the expression may be, a good writer knows A magazine article should end as dramatically that a story "well begun is half done." as it began. If possibte, use an anecdote which Leads for magazine articles, like those for typifies the main points presented in the body. news stories, should be written in a manner The conclusion should neatly and succinctly tie appropriate to the subject matter. together all the threads of the article and bring it to a smooth finish. It should make the reader happy to have read the article and also leave him with the impression the writer wants to make. THE BODY Skillful writing is essential to the magazine article. A discussion on how to write in an The title of an article attracts the reader's informative and interesting manner is beyond attention. The lead arouses his curiosity, stimu- the scope of this chapter. However, attention is lates his interest, and whets his appetite for invited to the bibliography in Appendix It 114 Chapter 8WRITING FOR MAGAZINES

FINDING A MARKET The publisher usually applies for "first serial rights" on the article, which authorizes him to In most cases, a writer will have a particular publish it for the first time and which protects publication or a list of possible publications in the material against plagiarism. The magazine mind as soon as he gets an idea for a magazine uses a blanket copyright for the whole issue, article. buying individual rights from each author in To obtain a market for his article, the JO uses advance. a QUERY LETTER to ask a particulareditor if In dealing with the writer, the publisher draws he would be interested in the article contem- no contracts per se; usually the check paying for plated. Most editors do not have time to read the article carries a statement of the rights being full articles on every subject proposed by writers sold to the magazine and explains that endorse- and prefer query letters where nonfiction is ment of the check transfer these rights to the concerned. publisher. The query letter should be prepared in a Although a manuscript cannot be copyrighted business letter form and should be meticulous in until published, the writer's creation isstill style, punctuation, grammar, and spelling. A protectedby common law. If this work is poorly written query letter from an unknown plagiarized, the writer may sue for damages writer stands little chance of action with an under the laws of unfair competition. editor. Chapter 10 of this manual contains further The query letter should contain: information on the laws of copyright and also tells you how to secure a copyright on your own A strongly-written d,-;scription of the pro- material. posed subject.

A proposed word length. REVIEW AND CLEARANCE A suggested title. The Navy has a regulation which permits The writer's qualifications for writing the Journalists, as well as other Navy writers, to article, including a brief statement of his writing accept payment for articles under the following experience. conditions: the writing must be done during off-duty time; and the writer may not receive A statement that the writer understands he payments for any writing which his duty will submit the article "on speculation"that is, requires him to provide. without obligation to the publisher. Navy Regulations provide that material for publication on professional, political or inter- If the editorisinterested in the idea as national subjects must state clearly that the proposed in the query letter, he will give the opinions or assertions contained therein are writer a "go-ahead." If the first editor can't use those of the writer and are not to be construed the proposed article, the writer queries a second as official or reflectingthe views of the Navy magazine that might be interested, and then a Department. third and so forth until the list of potential Nor, will you as a JO, make a commitment to markets is exhausted. furnish an official manuscript (or any personal manuscript which deals with military matters or has national or foreign policy implications) to any nonofficial publicationwithout first sub- RIGHTS AND COPYRIGHTS mitting the manuscript to the Chief of Informa- tion as prescribed in U.S. Navy Public Affairs While the writer need not be an expert in the Regulations, field of copyright law, he nevertheless should If your article is not on the subjects described have a working knowledge of the subject. above,it may be submitted to a publisher JOURNALIST 3 & 2 without prior clearance. However, CHINFO re- Complete details concerning review and secur- quires that one copy of your manuscript, if ity clearance of prospective magazine articles published, be forwarded to the Office of Infor- may be found in Public Affairs Regulations. mation for inclusion in Navy Department files.

116 124 CHAPTER 9

COPY EDITING

One of the most important and exacting jobs and format and individual editorial needs of all on any publication is giving written copythe the newspapers that receive news releases from final professional touch of accuracy before it is his office. It is, however, sometimes appropriate sent to a typist or linotypist in thecomposing to put a brief heading on a story toreadily room. This job of catchingand correcting identify its subject. However, the Navy copy inaccuracies before they can be printed and editor doesn't have to worry about the technical distributed is called COPY EDITING. aspects of headline writing which are discussed Readers may have a high regard for a news- in chapter 16. paper that is carefully edited, butthey quickly Like any typical, beginning newswriter, a JO lose respect for one that is sloppy and full of striker is dismayed to see his "literary master- errors. piece" 'topped up, pasted back together again, The copy editor of both civilian andNavy and scored with the copy editor's pencil. But publications represents the last line of defense two heads are usually better than one.Most against incorrect copy reaching the reader.It is experienced writers will admit that the final his job to make sure nothing gets byunless it result, despite its mangled appearance, is a better meets certain standards. He is theguardian of piece of writing. both style and accuracy. Security is of the utmost importance in the The copy editor is always on the alert for Armed Forces. The responsibility for security questionable facts, ambiguous statements, and lies with every person who in any way handles a violations of office policy. It is his responsibility story, but the copy editor sometimesrepresents to catch errors in grammar, spelling, syntax, the last defense against a possible violation.If punctuation, capitalization, etc. He cuts out you have doubts aboutthe security classification words or sentences that are not needed andadds of any information you receive, check it with copy when necessary forclarity, emphasis, or your security officer. continuity. This chapter will acquaint you withthe Restoring objectivityto a story in places standard symbols and style used by the copy where a writer may have editotalized, quoted editor and will explain the proceduresand out of context, or insertedopinion without functions of copy editing. The basic pattern of attribution to a source or pertinent authority, is news style in this chapterfollows the style of also the responsibility of the copy editor.He the Associated Press and United PressInter- should be constantly alert for statements of a national. Most newspapers in the country now libelous or slanderous nature (libel and slander use this style. are discussed in chapter10). The copy editor on a civilian newspaper has one additional function.He writes headlines for COPY EDITING PROCEDURES thestories he edits. The Navy copy editor, unless he is editing a story for use in the ship or Copy editing follows a set system of proce- station newspaper, writes no headlines for out- dure. To be absolutely accurate, a good copy side releases because he has no idea ofthe style editor should read every story three times. First,

11.7 123 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

he reads the story quickly tograsp its meaning take care of routine clerical tasks such as this, and note its arrangement. Second, he rereads the but afloat, in most cases,itwill be the JO story more slowly and more thoroughly, correct- himself) types the final draft or the linotypist ing every mistake and addingor deleting as sets it in type, the copy editor's shorthand tells necessary. Third, he reads the story again to him that the final work should read: check his own corrections. This time he makes sure that no new errors occurred in copy editing Mr. Poindexter. and that the story reads smoothly. If the story contains too many mistakes anditappears Most of the copy editing symbols described in obvious that copy editing won't improve it, the figure 9-1 are standard to both the Navy and story goes back tothe originating JO for commercial media. There will be only minor rewriting. variations from one newspaper to another. You should learn these symbols anduse them to make changes in your own copy and thecopy of PREPARING THE ROUGH others. The original copy of a story is knownas a ROUGH. It is normally typed double spacedon one side of the paper only. In general a JO RULES OF COPY EDITING follows the same format in typing a roughas he does a finished Navy news release. It does not Here are the basic rules to keep in mind when have to be as neat, however, andmay include copyeditingstoriesusingtheappropriate the necessary corrections, additionsor deletions. symbols: The rough obviously does not need the letter- 1. Use a soft black lead pencil. head information usually carried at the top ofa 2. Make corrections above or within the lines release ready for dissemination. It is a recom- where mistakes occur. mended practice in large offices for the author 3. Place the necessary copy editing symbols at to put his last name on the rough. This enables their correct points of insertion. An example of the copy editor (usually the PAOor the senior a copy edited story is shown in figure 9-2. JO) to identify the writer. 4. Write legibly. Your longhand corrections will not do any good if they cannot be understood. COPY EDITING SYMBOLS 5. Use scissors and paste, or stapler, to move a paragraph from one position in a storyto To prepare copy for reproduction in its final another. form, the copy editor employs a special set of 6. If you want to add a new paragraph to the shorthand symbols (see fig. 9-1) to indicate the story, do not write it out in longhand in the changes he wants made. margin or on the back of the original story. For example, if the writer forgets to capitalize Type it out, then insert it where it belongs, using a letter such as the "M" and "P" in mr. scissors and paste or scotch tape. poindexter, here is what the copy editor does: 7. Keep in mind that after y ou copy edit a using a soft lead pencil, which is the tool of his story, you should have a finished product. Any trade, he would inscribe three horizontal lines obvious mistakes which slip by will be the copy under each letter that needs capitalization, The editor's, not the writer's. copy will then look like this:

mr. poindexter. COPY EDITING GUIDELINES 01. MN.

.101 MOO As a Journalist assigned copy editing duties, MOON you should always strive for accuracy rather When the office secretary (most large PA offices than speed. You might adopt the slogan, "All I ashore have civilian typists or Navy Yeomen to miss, they'll print." Before you try filling the Charter 9COPY EDITING BEST COPY AVAILABLE

11II OM MOD 41= OMNI 41010 f NEM /MID

I/MI IN. MN OMB INIMIE

I si a

t ),, (.1

tow MO MM. WOO m

s1 111111

124 9 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

SEALS 1-1-1

403 Simmons

V V NSEAAIRLANDN--4AVYIS NSEALSN OP COUN TER- INSURGENCY

Zink mosipeople whata allgE isOttheyilltell you it' one of those

funnhshiayanimals you see in the water barking for 44.sh at the soo,

or playing with rubber balls onlirtelevision shows.Ask the Navy or

the Viet Cons and you'd get a far different answer.

The naves answer would be that its seals are seals. Members of kya ;th lea-Air-Land counterinsurgency teams, skilled in a wide ay. of

dangerous specialities and supporting the Atlantic R1 and Pacific t9 fleet, well as friendly countries

The answer,couldbe that SEALS are bad news. a When our nation begn to build upitrm forces to counter 4L insurgency in friendly nations in 194 the Navy did its part in the

national di effort by forming the SEAL teams. They were developed

to work against enemy insurgent forces in their own hiding places and

to train friendly forces in this type of operation?.Since an assign.

sent like this covers a wide variety of t4a, and requires mature, well

trained men in superb physical condition, the Navy 'asked for volunteers

for its SEAL teams from the Frogmen of Aderwater Simeolitioniteams.There

were plenty of th

ighore

11111.29.1 Figure 9.2.An example of a copy edited story.

120 BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 9COPY EDITING

SEALS 2-2-2

This was a good group to begin with, because the

Demolition Team men were already able to swim in, land from, and fight in the water, and they had proved themselves to be reliable andhighly intelligent.Starting with these first volunteers, thv Navy developed its original SEAL teams.Much more training was neeessray however.

Though the UDT!s are masters of their trade, they normally operate 44E1J away from the beachNand the SEALS le tohave a much wider range.

To make its SEALS capable of operating up rivers andinlad.'Aenet beach, the Navy has trained them in all,1, of parachute entry, in- Vii1T) eluding the perilous HALO technique, where jumpers fallom,the /free aircraft opentheiglitesat the last possible moment to

avoid detection by an enemy on the ground.The SEALS were also

trained in all forms of land warfare, concentrating on the more

personal forms of combat vthliiii bare hands, knives, demolitionand

other weapons.

And they learned how to move as silently and as inconspiciously

ashore as they do in the water. .L4e.Mt/ When the training of the first SEALS was terminated, theNsbehad

&Ala it firstigeneration of what could be called MipmaSallo " ready to

find the insurgent, discover what has doing, and make him stopdoing

it. They were tailor made for a place like Vista's. While most of

16519,2 Figure 9.21-An example of a copy edited story-continued. BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

SEALS 3.3.3

their missions have been covered byfecurity regulations, it would not Laroe,

be wrong to say that they have operated in many enemyheld -places,.1

bringing backq0 and equipment that4belonged to the enemy.

The advantage that the SEALS have ove*othersipliar group is

that they are completely at home in the water or onthe land, a good

combination of talents needed to live and'operate in theconfused Qnf) conditions found in a country fighting internal uprisingsdirectedA

outside forces. (/5i Ly any grotOf men sie"typical of the modern Navy, it is the SEALS.

They are drawn from every rate in the Navy, fromBoatswain's mates

toYea4n, and from every type of ship and stati . They

are ere small closely knit groupsin which every man has4ghly /A

complex job that must be doneeiaotly right at the peril of injury

or death to himself and hisfellow team members. In perhaps no other

group except a submarine crew isthere so much dependence on the next

man and so much at stake inthis dependence.

When their story can beoldully we will appreciate them all

the more.For the present, the best testimonial for theSEALS is in

the number of frightenedark confusedenemy that have come in contact

(*kb them.

-30-

165.29.3 Figure 9.21 An example of a copy edited storycontinued.

122 128 Chapter 9COPY EDITING seat of copy editor, make sure you have a copy Writing an editorial, which is an article in a of a locally produced style guide. Another newspaper or magazine giving the editor's views handy reference is theArmed Forces News Style or those of the person or persons in control of Guide, NAVSO P2456. Both are designed to the periodical,is covered in chapter 15. The standardize all newswriting and word usages for electronic media also use editorial opinion in internal newspapers and external or public news special programs. Editorials require a very spe- releases. cialized type of writing with which you will become acquainted later on. Here are a few examples of editorializing in STYLE straight news copy:

Everyone in your office should be acquainted POOR: Lt. Post is exceptionally well with the locally accepted style guide, but it is up qualified for the position. to the copy editor to catch any violations of good style. IMPROVED: Lt. Poet has a degree in law and It is annoying for a news editor to pick up a has eight years of experience as Navy story, for example, and find "avenue" a Navy legal officer. spelled out one time, abbreviated as "ave." a second time, and used as "ay." a third time. POOR: An interesting program is plan- An office which is careless or inconsistent ned for tonight at the Enlisted about little things may eventually become care- Men's Club. less or inconsistent about big things. Once a IMPROVED:Here is tonight's program at the news medium start losing respect for you, you Enlisted Men's Club. might as well close shop. No newspaper will take thechance of publishing material whichis POOR: The decision was unjust. sloppy or carelessly prepared. Spelling, punctuation, capitalization, abbre- IMPROVED: The Judge Advocate General viation, and other mechanical aspects of gram- ruled the decision unjust. mar are details of writing which have a tremen- douslyimportantimpactontheclarity, CONTRADICTIONS readability, and effectiveness of your copy. Once your office gets away from using a set A writer sometimes contradicts himself in a style guide, your news copy will slowly become story without realizing it. When contradictions a hodge-podge of inconsistencies. occur, the copy editor should delete them or rearrange the facts more logically. Here are a few examples of typical contradictions: EDITORIALIZING Robinson's keen sense of responsibility, Editorializing means that a writer consciously devotion to duty, and hard work finally or unconsciously expresses doubt, censure, or paid off May 16 when he was advanced to praise in a news story. The only persons permit- Commissaryman Third Class. ted to express an opinion in a straight news The 16-year veteran.... story are the persons in the story itself. And then the opinion must be quoted or attributed If Robinson is such a responsible and devoted to the person who gave it. worker, why did it take him 16 years to make News stories should be written in the third thirdclass?Thereaderwillassumethat person. The writer should NEVER inject himself Robinson is not too bright or that the Navy does into a story unless he is writing under a byline. not reward good men. Facts should be reported as they are found without personal pronouns referringtothe A combat veteran of World War II, the writer. Korean conflict andthe Vietnam War,

123 12 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Captain Gunn wears the American Defense of the plane was attached to a squadron Medal, the World War II Victory Medal, the operating from the aircraft carrier Enter- Navy Occupation Service Medal, the Na- prise. tional Defense Service Medal, and the Na- tional Security Medal. This story is compact and clearly written, but The captain may be a veteran of three wars, it won't satisfy the demands of news media. but his medals indicate he has seen no combat. Among other things, they will want to know: Chief Clayborne Began striking for Per- 1. When the accident occurred. The Navy sonnelmanaboardthedestroyer USS announced the story TODAY, but nowhere does Mitchell in 1945. it say when the accident actually happened. 2. More detailed information on the victim. The Personnelman rating was established in Readers will want to know his middle initial, his 1948, so Chief Clayborne could not have been a age, his rate, home town addresses, and data on PN striker in 1945. He must have started out in his next of kin. another rating. 3. How the accident happened. The facts here are too generalized and vague. Despite this 3-15 record and his 7.89 4. What the plane was doing at Atsugi, when earned run average, Bob Baker is consid- it was attached to an aircraft carrier. ered a good pitcher. 5. The name of the squadron and where the .airier is operating. Baker's pitching recordspeaksfor itself. Classifying him as a "good pitcher" is opinion- A good copy editor should anticipate these ated and contradictory. The writer would have questions. With a little copy editing the story to do a lot of explaining to justify his com- may look like this: ment. A Navy ground ,crewman was killed by INCOMPLETENESS the spinning blades of an aircraft propeller last night at the U.S. Naval Air Station, Every JO should have a "news sense" that Atsugi. tells him which facts to collect and use and The crewman was identified as Airman which facts to ignore. But if the writer does not Frank J. Saxton, 20, USN, son of Mr. and have this ability or momentarily loses it, the Mrs. Andrew S. Saxton of 8238 Laurel St., copy editor must stop stories which are incom- Chicago, Ill. plete or inadequate and return them to the The accident occurred at 7:45 p.m., writer for amplification. This will save you the Japan time. The crewman was directing an troubll of answering phone calls from news AD Skyraider from the flight line onto a media who want more detailed information. taxi-way during a night exercise. For example, take this story: Saxton noticed a flare pot near the plane's right landing gear and signaled the A Navy ground crewman was killed in an pilot to stop. As he attempted to move the accident at the U.S. Naval Air Station, object from the plane's path, he slipped in Atsugi, the Navy announced today. front of theaircraft and fellintoits The Crewman has been identified as spinning propeller. Frank Saxton of Chicago,Ill. He was The plane and pilot are attached to directing a plane from the flight line onto a AttackSquadron93,normallybased taxi-way when the accident occurred. aboard the USS Enterprise. They were Bystanders reported he walked into the participating in night operations at Atsugi blades of the spinning propeller. The pilot while the carrier was docked at Yokosuka.

124 130 Chapter 9COPY EDITING

NAMES 9. Readers will want to know why. Watch the logic instatistical data. Double check league "Names make news," but they also make standings tr be sure the numbers of wins and headaches for the copy editor.Is the man's losses balance. name HAUFMAN, HOFFMAN, or Don't use postal box numbers for addresses. HAUFMANN? Did the writer accidentally leave People receive th,Jir mail in boxes. However, the "h" off the name SMIT,or is that how the they don't live in them. name is actually spelled? How about FRANCES In general, spell out all numbers from one to JONES in this story? The writer implies it isa nine, and use numerals for 10 and above. he, but males usually do not spell theirnames Numerals are used exclusively in tabular and that way. The names PAT, SHIRLEY, CAROL, statisticalmatters, records,electionreturns, MARION,JEAN, CLAUDE, MERLE and times, speeds, latitude and longitude, tempera- JERRY could be either maleor female. This tures, highways, distances, dimensions, heights, could lead to some embarrassing situations. And ages,ratios, proportions, military units, and what do you do when yourun across a name dates (Fourth of July and July Fourth accept- like Stanley Wozniawirsbinski? Youmay not be able). Fifth Avenue, Big Ten, and Dartmouth able to pronounce it, but you had better make Eleven are exceptions also. sure that it's spelled correctly. To eliminate Times are 6:30 p.m. Monday or 6:30 Monday confusion for the typist or linotypist, whena evening (never use 6:30 p.m., Monday night. name like Ppandrwske or Wozniawirsbinski is Night and p.m. are synonymous). correct as written, simply draw a box around the In a series of numbers, keep the simplest odd but properly spelled nameas shown in related forms: There are 3 ten-room houses and figure 9-1. 40 four-room houses in the development. He has 6 suits, 14 pairs of shoes, but only 1 tie. Casual numbers arespelled: A thousand NUMBERS times, no! Gay Nineties. Woudn't touch it with a ten-foot polebut: The flag hung from a 10-foot "Numbers don't lie," but a good copy editor polean exact measure. frequently proves them wrong. Always be wary Spell out fractions: Three-quarters of a mile. of numbers involving money, ages, dates, addresses,distance, performance records, statistical data, and other compilations. If a number looks questionable, always refer it to the writer for SPELLING verification. A BM1 may be only 23 years old, but most If you think you know how to spell well likely he is 32. A seaman whose age is listed as enough to get along without a dictionary, take a 42 may really be 24. The JO who wrote the story crack at these 10 words. Chances are, you will may have hit the keys wrong on his typewriter. miss a few of them: The beginning of a story may say that seven men were killed or injured in a plane crash, yet the 1. innoculate or inoculate casualty list may contain the names of only six. 2. embarrass or embarass Readers will want to know what happened to the 3. supercLde or supersede seventh name. A story may announce the 4. larnyx or larynx opening of a new commissary on March 12. A check with your calendar, however, indicates 5. interfered or interferred that March 12 is a Sunday, and commissaries are 6. indispensible or indispensable not normally opened on Sundays. 7. laision or liaison Another story says that ET1 Jack Kelly, was 8. diphtheria or diptheria married four years ago. However, his children 9. harass or harrass are mentioned and their ages are listed as 7 and 10. accommodate or accomodate

125 131 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

If you selected inoculate, embarrass, super- gi or la the final e is retained before some sede, larynx, interfered, indispensable, liaison, suffixes beginning with vowels. diphtheria, harass, and accommodate as the correct words, throw away your dictionary. But, Examples: a. Peace, peaceable. if you missed one or more, start using your b. Advantage,advantageous; dictionary regularly. These are only 10 examples courage, courageous of troublesome words in the Engligh language. c. Change, changeable, but changing. Of course, there are thousands more. Undoubtedly, you have your favorites when it comes to misspelling words. So, you should 4. Wordsendinginyprecededbya compile your own list of frequently misspelled consonant usually change The y to i before a words and then start eliminating them from suffix. Words ending in y preceded by a vowel your list. do not change the.y before a suffix. In mastering words, there are certain basic rules for spelling that will help you. Unfortu- Examples: a. Icy,iciest; mercy, merciless; nately, for every spelling rule, there are numer- modify, modifies, modifiable; ous exceptions. There are so many exceptions to pity, pitiable, pitiful. some spelling rules, they can just barely be b. Obey,obeying; joy, joyful, joyous. classifiedasrules.Thispointyoumust rememberYour dictionary is your final authority. 5. For the sound of ee, remember the rhyme, ` i before e except after c." The most useful of the spelling rules are listed below: Examples: a. Believe, belief, relieve, relief. b. Receive,conceive,perceive, 1. When a one-syllable word, or a longer word conceit. that keeps the accent on the last syllable, ends in a single consonant preceded by a single vowel, Exceptions: Weird,seize,neither,leisure, double thefinal consonant before adding a financier, inveigle. suffix beginning with a vowel. Examples: a. Clan, clannish 6. The rhyme above ends with "or when b. Plan, planned, planning sounded as `a' as in 'neighbor' or 'weigh'." c. Control, controlled 7. Verbs ending in ie generally change ie to y d. Refer, referringbut, reference before ink. (because the accent has shifted away from the last syllable of the basic word) Examples: Die, Dying, lie, lying. e. Occur, occurred, occurrence Learning to spell is more a matter of establish- 2. Words ending in a silent e generally retain ing a correct image of each word than of this e before a suffix beginning with a conso- applying rules. Usually the image is a visual one. nant. When the suffix begins with a vowel, the Knowing the correct pronunciation often helps, silent e is usually dropped. but in the English language we have many words for which pronunciation is no guide to spelling Examples: a. Excite, excitement; late, lately. (e.g., duty, beauty, grew, blue), so we must rely b. Tide,tidal;shape,shaping; on the way the word looks. While you are force, forcible. looking up an unfamiliar word, make an effort tofix in mind itsspelling along with the 3. When the final sound of the word is a soft meaning and pronunciation. 126 . 13Z Chapter 9COPY EDITING

PUNCTUATION Pine St., 249 58 8160. Newspaper usage has, inmost cases, elimi- Punctuation in writing serves the same pur- nated the comma before "and" and "or"but pose as voiceinflectionin speaking. Proper this practice does not lessen the need forthe phrasing avoids ambiguity, insures clarity, and mark at times. EXAMPLE: Fish abounded in the lessens the need for punctuation. lake, and the shore was lined with deer.

Period Semicolon

The period (.) is used: The semicolon (;) separates phrases containing commas to avoid confusion, and separates state- to mark the end of a sentence; EXAMPLE: ments of contrast and statements closely related. Close the door. EXAMPLES: The draperies, whichwere ornate, displeased me; the walls, light blue,were pleas- aftermostabbreviations; EXAMPLES: ing. The party consisted of E.E. Wright;R.J. U.S., c.o.d. Kelley,hissecretary;Mrs.Jordan; Martha Bowen, her nurse; and threeaccountants. (With- to separate integral and decimal numerals; out the semicolons, that could readas nine EXAMPLES: 3.75 percent; $3.75; 3.75 meters. persons.) to indicate omitted material (three); EX- AMPLE: "I pledge allegiance to the flag and Colon to the Republic.. ." The colon (:) precedes the final clausesumma- rizing prior matter, introduces listings,state- Comma ments and texts, marks discontinuity, and takes the place of an implied "for instance." EX- The comma (,)is used to separate various AMPLES: States and funds allottedwere: Ala- elements within a sentence and indicates a slight bama $6,000: Arizona $14,000. The question pause. Commas are used: came up: What does he want to do? The colon is also used: toseparateclauses; EXAMPLE: They fought the battle, but no one won. inclocktime; EXAMPLES: 9:20 p.m., 10:30 a.m. to separate a series; EXAMPLE: neither snow, rain, nor heat. in Biblical and legal citations; EXAMPLES: Matt. 2:14, Missouri Statutes 3:234:432. to set off attributions; EXAMPLE: "The work," he said, "was exacting and satisfying." Question Mark tosetoff apposition or contrast; EX- AMPLE: Wilson, the favorite, won handily. The question mark (?) follows a direct question. Occasionally it is used to indicateuncer- The comma is omitted before Roman numer- tainty, as with some dates or identifications. In als, Jr., Sr., the ampersand (&), dash, in street the latter useitis enclosed in parentheses. addresses, telephone numbers, and social secur- EXAMPLES: What happened to Dean? Colum- itynumbers. EXAMPLES: Louis XIV, Joe bus, an Italian (?) sailing for the Spanish Crown, James Jr., Smith & Co., Oregon 6.6666, 54321 discovered..

133 127 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Exclamation Point men's agreement so eloquently described by my colleague'?" The exclamation point (!) is used to indicate surprise, appeal, incredulity, or other strong Parentheses emotion. EXAMPLES: How wonderful! What! He yelled, "Help!" The parentheses "0" is used: to set off material such as nicknames or Apostrophe identification,an element of a sentence or insertion of identifying material. EXAMPLE: The apostrophe (') indicates, the possessive Harold (Red) Grange, the Galloping Ghost. It is case of nouns, omission of figures, and contrac- not customary (at least in the areas mentioned) tion. Usually the possessive of a singular noun to stand at attention. "That proposal," he said, not ending in "s" is formed by adding the "and one by (Prime Minister Hampton) Hales apostrophe and the "s." EXAMPLE: Bryan's are being studied." ball, but the girls' bats. The apostrophe is used: where location identification is needed but is not part of the official name. EXAMPLE: The after plural possessive; EXAMPLES: the Springfield (Virginia) Historical Society edition, boys' jackets; the marines' rifles. etc. in contractions; EXAMPLES: I've, isn't, to set off letters or figures in a series. don't. EXAMPLE: The order of importance will be (a) general acceptance, (b) costs, and (c) opposition. in omission of figures; EXAMPLES: '90s, The water is (1) tepid, (2) muddy from silt, and '80, class of '22. (3) unpalatable. The "s" is omitted and only the apostrophe used in "for conscience' sake" or in a sibilant Dash double or triple "s" as Moses' tab!It. The apostrophe is not used to form plurais. The dash () is used: EXAMPLES: MIGs, 73s, B-52s. 21 Cs. to indicate a sudden change and interjec- tion; EXAMPLE: The commanderdo you Quotation Marks know who I mean?approved it. If that man gains controlGod forbidour troubles will Quotation marks (" ") enclose direct quota- have just started. tions, phrases in ironical uses, slang expressions, misnomers and full titles of books, plays, poems, after dateline and before the first word of a songs, lectures or speeches, hymns, movies, TV story; EXAMPLE: NEW YORK, Dec. 13five programs, etc. persons were injured. ... Use quotation marks instead of parentheses around nicknames apart from the name. EX- Note that a dash consists of two strokes of AMPLE: Clark,the 285 pounder,isbetter the hyphen (or minus sign) key on your type- known as "Tiny." writer. The comma and period are placed inside the quotation marks. Other punctuation is placed inside quotation marks only if part of the matter Hyphen quoted. EXAMPLE: Why call it a "gentlemen's agreement"? The sequence in quotations: "The The hyphen (-) is used to separate compound question is 'Does his position violate the gentle- words, figures, abbreviations and figures, double 134 128 Chapter 9COPY EDITING

vowels in some cases, and to dividea word at months and days but notseasons; EX- the end of a line. AMPLE: Last summer our vacation beganon the The general rule for hypherc. is that "like" first Thursday in August. characters take the hyphen; "unlike" characters do not. EXAMPLES: Secretary-Treasurer (com- all holidays, historic dates, religious holi- pound word); 20-20 vision (figures); USS Amer- days, special events, military exercises, hurri- ica (CVA-66) (abbreviations and figures);re- canes, typhoons; EXAMPLES: Christmas, Fa- elect, but not reinstate (double vowelsin some ther's Day, Washington's Birthday, National cases). Safety Week, Operation Flip Top II, Typhoon Adjectival use of hyphens must be clear. Shirley, Hurricane Katherine. EXAMPLES: The 6-footman eating shark was killed (the man was). The 6-foot,man-eating all proper nouns or names; EXAMPLES: shark was killed (the shark was). Richard Allen, Bangkok, Santee River. Ordinarily in prefixes ending in vowels and followed by the same vowel, the hyphen is used: all names of countries and their languages, EXAMPLE: pre-eminent. (Check dictionary for unions, republics, and colonies; EXAMPLES: He exceptions such as cooperate, coordinate, etc.) learned to speak French in France. Union of The hyphen also serves to distinguish meaning South Africa, Republic of Korea; India isa of similarly spelled words. EXAMPLE:recover former British Colony. (from illness), re-cover (couch). The hyphen separates a prefix froma proper specific regions; EXAMPLES: Middle East, noun. EXAMPLES: un-American, pre-Christian Midwest, Southern California, Panhandle, Arctic era. Circle, but lower case antarctic or arctic in DO NOT use a hyphen: reference.

between "vice" and "president" or other appellations; EXAMPLES: Buckeye State, such title. Leatherneck, Project Mercury.

with adverbs ending in "ly" such as badly all decorations and awards; EXAMPLES: damaged, fully informed, newly elected, unless He was awarded the Medal of Honor. His father they are used as noun modifiers; EXAMPLE: received the Nobel Peace Prize. The newly-elected president. nouns and some pronouns referring to Deity such as He, Him, and His, but not who, CAPITALIZATION whose, or whom. Also capitalize Satan and Hades but not devil or hell, the first word of a sentence; EXAMPLE: Good grammar is essential. names of races; EXAMPLES: Indian, Chi- nese, Caucasian. Lower case yellow, white, black titles and ranks (rate) followed by a proper (Identification by race should be made only noun, but lower case titles standing alone or when it is pertinent.) following name; EXAMPLE: Secretary of State C.R. Dryden, but C.R. Dryden, secretary of the first letter of eacii word, except arti- state. EXCEPTION: Incumbent President of the cles, conjunctions, and short prepositions that United States is always capitalized. are not the first word, in titles of books, plays, hymns, poems, and songs; EXAMPLES: "All the all references to the Pope, except pontiff, Ships at Sea," "Damn Yankees," "0' Come All and the titles of foreign religious leaders, but Ye Faithful." lower case when titles stand alone or follow names. EXCEPTION: Pope and Dalai Lama are U.S. Government and state government capitalized in all usages. agencies,branches, committees, departments, 135 129 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 and legislativebodies when full name used; ampersand (&); EXAMPLES: Sims & Sons; EXAMPLES: Federal Aviation Administration, AT&T. Rhode Island Legislature, Interstate Commerce Commission. In addition, always capitally U.S. street, avenue, boulevard, and terrace in Congress, Senate, House, Administration. Be addresses when using a numerical prefix, but not sure to note whether itis the U.S. or state Point, Port, Circle, Plaza, Place, Drive, Oval, Senate. Government when used alone or with an Road or Lane. EXAMPLES: 30 E. 28th St. adjective is lower case. EXAMPLE: She works (single "E" with period); 16 Quentin Ave. NW for the government. (no periods in "NW"; 27 Sunset-Blvd., but Main Street, Fifth Avenue, etc. ideological or political areas; EXAMPLE: EastWest relations areata stalemate. Use versus and vs. (with period); EXAMPLE: lower case when referring to direction. EX- The case of Johns vs. New York. AMPLE: The western part of Germany is afflu- ent compared to the eastern part. states which follow cities (towns, villages), bases, Indian agencies, and national parks. names of organizations, expositions, etc.; EXAMPLE: The Boy Scoutswillvisitthe Ala. Ill. Miss. N.M. Tenn. World's Fair. Lower case scout and fair when Ariz. Ind. Mo. N.Y. Tex. standing alone. Ark. Kan. Mont. Okla. Va. Calif. Ky. N.C. Ore. Vt. Colo. La. N.D. Pa. Wash. ABBREVIATIONS Conn. Mass. Neb. R.I. Wis. Del. Md. Nev. S.C. W.Va. To abbreviate is to make shorter a word or Fla. Mich. N.H. S.D. Wyo. phrase by leaving out or substituting letters. Ga. Minn. N.J. Some military as well as civilian terms are so lorg that abbreviation is almost a must. How- Do not abbreviate Alaska, Hawaii, Idaho, Iowa, ever, always spell out the name of organizations Ohio, Maine or Utah. Never abbreviate the name or groups on its first use. If a name does not of states when they are used alone. have a commonly known abbreviation, the abbreviation should be parenthesized after the thefollowingprovinces andterritories first spelling. Thereafter, you may use just the when preceded by names of towns,villages, abbreviation.EXAMPLE: America'sDistant etc.: Early Warning Line (DEW line) has been extended. The DEW line was...1945. C.Z. P.R. V.I. Alta. B.C. The abbreviations that follow and those used Man. N.S. Que. Ont. Sask. throughout this training manual are basically Nfld. N.B. R.P. (Republic of the thosestandardizedforcivilianand military Philippines) newswriting by Associated Press and United Press International. In newswriting, abbreviate: United Nations and United States in titles but spell them out when used as nouns. U.S.A. time zones, aircraft and ship designations, and U.N. as nouns may be used in texts or direct distress calls, military terms, etc; EXAMPLES: quotations; EXAMPLES: He is a former U.S. EDT, MIG-17, SOS (but May Day), USS John F. Olympic champion. She is a member of the U.N. Kennedy, SS Virginia. Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organiza- tion (UNESCO). WhiletouringtheUnited business firms; EXAMPLES: Warner Bros.; States, she toured the United Nations building in Brown Implement Co.; Amalgamated Leather, New York. "When last 1 was in the U.S.A., the Ltd. (If "and" is in the firm name, use the U.N. was in its infancy." 136 130 Chapter 9COPY EDITING

(and capitalize) all religious, fraternal scho- must have a numerical preiix. EXAMPLES: He lastic, or honorary degrees, etc., but lower case used a 35mm camera. She was driving 60 miles whenspelledout; EXAMPLES:J.J.Jones an (per) hour but slowed down to 30 m.p.h. in earned his bachelor of science degree at Prince- the housing area. ton. J.J. Jones, Ph.D., will be guest speaker at 2 p.m. tomorrow. port, association, point, detective, department, deputy, commandant, commodore, field titles (and capitalize) Mr., Mrs., Mlle., Dr., marshal, secretary-general,secretary,ortrea- Prof., Sen., Rep., Dist. Atty., Gov., Lt. Gov., surer. Gen., Supt.,etc., when they appear before names but not after; EXAMPLES: He intro- Christmas or use Xmas. ducedLt. Gov. J.F.Petty.J.F.Petty,the lieutenant governor, will arrive at 10:15a.m. cities. Exception: Saint is abbreviated to (Use Miss before names of unmarried women St., when part of a city name. EXAMPLE: St. and Mrs. before the names of married women, or Augustine, Fla. Ms. in first and subsequent references, and also in group names. EXAMPLE: Those attenditv, T(t W tii4(1101N IN 'cities vat k%sett ithout a were, Miss Alice Jones, Mrs. Helen Jones. state suffix:

months when used with dates, but spell out Atlanta Honolulu New York* otherwise. EXAMPLE: the battle started Oct. Baltimore Houston Oklahoma City 10, 1967, and ended in January 1968. Abbrevi- Boston Indianapolis Philadelphia ations for months are Jan., Feb., Aug., Sept., Buffalo Los Angeles Pittsburgh Oct., Nov., Dec. Do not abbreviate March, April, Chicago Louisville St. Louis May, June or J11 ly EXCEPT when usedin Cincinnati Memphis San Antonio tabular or financial routine; then use Mar., Apr., Cleveland Miami San Diego Jun., Jul., and spell out May. Dallas Milwaukee San Francisco Denver Minneapolis Seattle mount when a mountain but spell out Detroit New OrleansWashington* * when a city. EXAMPLES: Mt. Everest, Mount Vernon, N.Y. (*) New York's five boroughs create a special problem in writing the correct address in news fort when an Army post but spellout when stories. The standard address practice is: a city. EXAMPLES: Ft. Sill, Fort Lauderdale, Fla. (Bronx) William B. Smith, 235 Converse St., Bronx, N.Y. Do NOT abbreviate: (Brooklyn) William B. Smith, 235 Converse St., Brooklyn, N.Y. days of the week except in tabular or (Manhattan) William B. Smith, 235 Converse financial matters. In these cast use Mon., Tues., St., New York Wed., Thurs., Fri., Sat., Sun. (Queensuse name of town) WilliamB. Smith, 235 Converse St., Forest Hills, N.Y. first names unless the person does. EX- (Richmonduse town name and Staten Is- AMPLES: William, not Wm.; Frederick, not land) William B. Smith, 235 Converse St., St. Fred; Benjamin, not Benj. George, Staten Island, N.Y. NOTE: Do NOT use Long Island when using a measurements. The one exception to this Long Island address. rule is the word millimeteronly when used (**) Washington is sufficient when the story with figuresinbothfirstandsubsequent deals with the U.S. Government or other entity references. Miles an hour and miles per hour are which obviously is associated with Washington, abbreviated in subsequent reference only and D.C. However, if either city or state might be

131 137 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 interpreted, specify Washington, D.C., or Wash- Department of the Army, DA; U.S. Army, USA; ington state.If Washington state is the only U.S. Air Force, USAF; U.S. Navy, USN; U.S. possible meaning, use Washington. Spell out if Marine Corps, USMC (U.S. is not mandatory in "sed alone and abbreviate if used with city. all instances but should be used when appropri- EXAMPLE: I hear he's a native of Washington ate and for foreign usage.) state. He comes from Seattle. All foreign services should be capitalized and spelled out. EXAMPLE: French Army. Use these well-known cities of the world Military jargon and colloquial expressions without reference to countries: should be avoided unless used in text or direct quotes. Eliminate abbreviated terms where pos- Amsterdam Geneva Ottawa sible to differentiate between a professionally Athens Hanoi Paris written news article and a set of travel orders. Berlin Havana Rio de Janeiro Some examples of military abbreviations are: Bonn Jerusalem Rome TAD, temporary additional duty; R&R, rest and Brussels London Saigon recreation; RON, remain overnight; 00D, offi- Budapest Madrid Seoul cer of the day (deck); PCS, permanent changeof Buenos AiresManila Sydney station, etc. Cairo Melbourne Tokyo When referring to members of a particular Calcutta Mexico City Toronto service, use the collective term: Copenhagen Montreal Vienna Dublin Moscow Warsaw Soldiera member of the U.S. Army Sailora member of the U.S. Navy Lower case abbreviations usually take periods. Marinea member of the U.S. Marine Corps If the letters from a word, periods are needed. Airmana member of the U.S. Air Force EXAMPLES: c.o.d., f.o.b., and a.m. Coast Guardsmana member of the U.S. Coast Guard Periods are not needed in 35mm(film), Guardsman a member of the Army or Air 105mm (armament), ips (taperecording speed). National Guard Exception: .22 caliber. (For military rank and title abbreviations, by MILITARY TERMS service, see figure 9-3.) Thousands of doctors, nurses, veterinarians, One of the chief complaints by civilianeditors dentists, chaplains, and lawyers serve the mili- concerning military journalism is theexcessive tary in their respective professional capacities. use of abbreviations fortitles and organizations. As such, they should be identified in news In the majority of cases, most peoplewithin a stories by their profession. This identification particular Service will know most ofits standard should be made in thefirst reference. EX- abbreviations. But, many will not knowthem AMPLES: Navy Captain (Dr.) Joe Johns of the all,particularly dependents, visitors, and new Portsmouth Naval Hospital conducted...Com- service personnel. mander Edna Knox, Navy Nurse Corps, told Alltitlesand organizationaldesignations medical authorities... Army Major (Dr.) Larry should always be spelled out in the firstrefer- Riley, a veterinarian, stressed the importance.. . enceexcept those that are so wellknown that Navy Chaplain (Commander) John Frisby will it would be a definite waste of space. presideover..(Note: A chaplains's rankis Military departments and services are written enclosed in parentheses. Subsequent reference is out, capitalized, and abbreviated in accordance always Chaplain Green). with the regulation peculiar to that particular Lawyers are not identified by profession in department or service. EXAMPLES: Department the military service per se. However, in all of Defense, DOD; Department of the Navy, Navy possible cases, they should be referred to in Dept.; Department of the Air Force, DAF; relation to their role in the story. EXAMPLE:

132 , 1d8 BEST Chapter 9COPY EDITING COPYAVAILABLE

.11I U.S. NAVY (U.S. COAST GUARD) U.S. AIR FORCE

SUBSEQUENT FIRST REFERENCE ABBREVIATION SUBSEQUENT REFERENCE FIRST REFERENCE ABBREVIATION With Full Nome With Lost Horne REFERENCE Without Name With Full Home With Lost Nome 1 Without Nome v.... Fleet Admiral fleet admiral FAdm. General genera Gen. Admiral admiral Adm. Lieutenant General genera LtGen. Vice Admiral admiral VAdm. Major General genera MajGen. Rear Admiral admiral RAdm. Brigadier General genera BrigGen. Commodore commodore Commodore Colonel calorie Col. Captain captain Capt. Lieutenant Colonel colons L$Col. Commander commander Cdr. Major major Maj. Lieutenant Commander commander LCdr. Captain captain Capt. Lieutenant lieutenant Lt. First Lieutenant lieutenant lstLt. Lieutenant (junior Second Lieutenant lieutenant 2ndLt. grade) lieutenant Lt(j.g.) Chief Warrant Officer warrantofficer Ensign ensirn CWO Ens. Warrant Officer warrantofficer Chief Warrant Officer warant officer WO CW04 or Mr. Chief Master Sergeant chief mastersergeant Warrant Officer veorant officer CW03 ar Mr. of the Air Force of theAir Force CMSAF Warrant Officer daunt officer CW02 or Mr. Chief Master Sergeant sergeant CMSgt. Warrant Officer warrant officer WO1 or Mr. Senior Master Sergeant sergeant SMSgt. Master Chief Petty Master Sergeant sergeant MSgt. Officer of the .1(a41 master ,c6fef MCPON Technics) Sergeant sergeant TSgt. Master Chief Petty Staff Sergeant sergeant SSgt. Officer chief MCPO Sergeant sergeant Sgt. Senior Chief Putty Airman 1st Class oilman A1C Officer chief SCPO Airman airman Amn. Chief Petty Officer chief CPO Airman Basic airman Amn. Petty Officer First Class petty officer P01 Petty Officer Second U.S. ARMY Class petty officer P02 Petty Officer Third SUBSEQUENT FIRST REFERENCE ABBREVIATION Class petty officer P03 REFERENCE With Full Name With Lost Name Seaman seaman SN Without Nome Seaman Apprentice seaman SA Seaman Recruit seaman SR Goner.), of the Army .. genera GA General genera Gen. U.S. MARINE CORPS Lieutenant General genera LtGen. Major General genera MajGen. Brigadier General genera SUBSEQUENT BrigGen. FIRST REFERENCE ABBREVIATION Colonel colons REFERENCE Col. With Full Nome With Lost Nome Lieutenant Colonel Witinnit Nome colons L$Col. Major major Maj. General genera Gen. Captain captain Capt. Lieutenant General genera Lt Gin. First Lieutenant lieutenant lstLf. Major General genera MajGen. Second Lieutenant lieutenant 2ndLt. Brigadier General genera BrigGen. Chief Warrant Officer warrantofficer CW04 or Mr. Colonel colon. Col. Chief Warrant Officer warrantofficer CW03 er Mr. Lieutenant Colonel colons LtCnl. Chief Warrant Officer warrantofficer 01102 or Mr. Major major Maj. Warrant Officer warrantofficer WO1 or Mr. Captain captain Capt. Sergeant Major of the First Lieutenant lieutenant lstLt. Army sergeantmajor SMA Second Lieutenant lieutenant 2ndlt. Command Sergeant Chief Warrant Officer gunner CW04 or Mr. Major sergeantmajor CSM Chief Warrant Officer gunner CW03 or Mr. Staff Sergeant Major sergeantmajor SSgtMaj. Chief Warrant Officer gunner CW02 or Mt. Master Sergeant sergeant MSgt. Warrant Officer gunner WO1 or Mr. First Sergeant sergeant lstSgt. Sergeant Major of the Sergeant First Class sergeant SFC Marine Corps sergeantmajor SgtMaj. Platoon Sergeant sergeant PlatSgt. Sergeant Major sergeantmajor SgtMaj. Specialist 7 specialist Sp7 Master Gunnery mastergunnery Staff Sergeant sergeant SSgt. Sergeant sergeant MGySgt. Specialist 6 specialist Sp6 First Sergeant first sergeant lstSgt. Sergeant sergeant Sgt. Master Sergeant mastersergeant MSgt. Specialist 5 speci allst Spy Gunnery Sergeant gunnerysergeant GySgt. Corporal corporal Cpl. Staff Sergeant staff sergeant SSgt. Spec' list 4 specialist SO Sergeant sergeant Sgt. Private First Class private PFC Corporal corporal Cpl. Private private Pvt. Lance Corporal lance corporal LCpI. Private First Class privatefirst class PFC Private private Pvt.

165.215.1 Figure 9.3.U.S, Armed Forces ranks and abbreviations for external or public news releases andinternal news usage.

133 139 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Coast Guard Lieutenant Henry Smith, the de- heed C-141Starlifterflew. . Each soldier fense attorney (trial lawyer, staff judge advo- carried an M-79 grenade launcher. The aircraft cate) a member of the Maryland Bar Associ- carrier USS Bon Homme Richard (CVA-31) ation.. "Bonnie Dick" returned. .(See Appendix III In many cases, news stories require the use of for alist of Navy ship and aircraft abbrevi- a person's service in addition to his name and ations.) rank, particularly in joint maneuvers. When this occurs place the service identifier before the rank and name. EXAMPLES: Navy Captain Rob RELIGIOUS TERMS Rogers; Coast Guard Lieutenant Jim King; Air ForceMajor Richard Johnson. (The "U.S." There is only one way to refer to confessions Army, Navy, Air Force, Guard, is optional of faith, their members and officialsthe correct unless tied in with foreign dissemination.)- way. While general usage and correcttitles of Identify ing women iii the Army, Navy, and some of the faiths are listed below, many are Air Forceis somewhatsimilar.When first not. In case of doubt, consult your chaplain's mentioning a women in the Army, Navy, or Air office. Force use the spelled-out rank and full name just Members of communions of the National asyou wouldfor malecounterparts.EX- Council of the Churches of Christ in the United AMPLES: Army Sergeant First Class Barbara A. States of America (official title, which may be Ryker, was awarded. ..Navy Chief Petty Offi- shortened to National Council of Churches) are: cer Wilma W. Clark will be promoted to.. Force Staff Sergeant Catherine J. Smith is the African Methodist Episcopal Church first... However, if the name could be mistaken African Methodist Episcopal Zion Church forthatofa male,afurtheridentifieris American Baptist Convention necessary. EXAMPLES: Women's Army Corps American Lutheran Church (WAC) CorporalBobbyJ.Smithwas.. Armenian Church of North America, Diocese Women's Air Force (WAF) Technical Sergeant Christian Churches (Disciples of Christ) Inter-

BillyJ. Jones said... . Wave First Class Petty national Convention Officer Terry J. Green reenlisted...(The acro- Christian Methodist Episcopal Church nym WAVES, in which each letter is capitalized, Church of the Brethren was derived from the long title Women Accepted General Council of the Congregational Chris- forVoluntaryEmergencyService.This tian Churches designation no longer exists, and use of the Greek Orthodox Archdiocese of North and acronym is incorrect. Over the years the term South America Waves (onlythefirstlettercapitalized) has Hungarian Reformed Church in America gained wide usage as a dignified expression in The United Methodist Church and out of theNavy. As such,itisstill Moravian Church in America considered and acceptable form of reference National Baptist Convention of America eitheras a noun or adjective.Itshould be National Baptist Convention, U.S.A., Inc. avoided in such phrases as "in the Waves" which Philadelphia Yearly Meeting of the Religious connotes an organization that does not exist. Society of Friends When writingabout women intheU.S. Polish National Catholic Church of America Marines, the first reference is always: Women Presbyterian Church in the U.S. Marine Corporal Frances E. Tyler. EXCEPTION: Protestant Episcopal Church in the U.S.A. For the highest ranking enlisted woman write; Reformed Church in America Sergeant Major of Woman Marines Bernadette Romanian Orthodox Episcopate of America Gross. Russian Orthodox Greek Catholic Church of Aircraft, Ships, and other military equipment America should be identified by popular name and model Serbian Eastern Orthodox Church designation, EXAMPLES: The Air Force Lock- Seventh Day Baptist General Conference

140 134 Chapter 9COPY EDITING

Syrian Antiochian Orthodox Church Jones. Ukranian Orthodox Church of America A nun whose familyname is Jones is called by United Church of Christ her church name: Sister Mary Joseph,and is Lutheran Church in America never referred to as Sister Jones. United Presbyterian Church in the U.S.A. Unity of the Brethren EPISCOPAL usage: A deaconor priest is referred to as Rev. John Jonesor the Rev, Mr. Other communions include: Jones. A dean is Very Rev. JohnJones, Rev. Jones, Mr. Jones or Dean' Jones. A bishopis Rt. Church of Christ Rev. John Jones, Rev. Mr.,or Bishop Jones. A Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints member of the Episcopal Church isan Epsicopa- Jehovah's Witnesses lian. Roman Catholic Church Seventh-day Adventists JEWISH usage: Rabbi John Goldstein,Rabbi Church of Christ, Scientist Goldstein, Dr. Goldstein (where degree is held). Cantor John Goldstein, Cantor Goldstein. Never Jewish groups are: identify a rabbi as Reverend Doctor.

Union of American Hebrew Congregations CHRISTIAN SCIENCEusage: Practitioner, Union of Orthodox Jewish Congregations Lecturer, Reader Joe Jones. Never Reverendin United Synagogues of America any form. Reader Jones of the First Church. The Mother Church (Boston church only). Rabbinical Groups: METHODIST u s age : Pastor,Minister, Preacher, Bishop. Use of Rev. Mr.Jones is Central Conference of American Rabbis acceptable. Rabbinical Assembly of America Rabbinical Council of America LUTHERAN usage:In the United States Union of Orthodox Rabbis Pastor John Jones, PastorJones. Mr. .Jones. Scandinavian Lutheran usage follows the Episco- The Synagogue Council of Americarepresents pal forms. both congregational and rabbinicalgroups of Orthodox, Reform and ConservativeJudaism. LATTER-DAY SAINTS (MORMON) usage: Their places of worshipare temples or syna- President John Jones. President Jones. Elder gogues. The generic term is Jewish house of Jones.Presiding Bishop John Jones. Bishop worship. Jones. ?residing John Jones of the Presiding .n general written reference to a clergyman, Bishopric. Members of the church are Mormons. use:the Rev. John Smith,or the Rev. Mr. Smith. Do not use Rev., without Mr.,a first Itis incorrect to apply the word church to name or initials. A chaplain is referred toas a any Baptist unit except the local church. The chaplain with his rank following in parenthesis organization of Southern Baptists is the South- on the first usage; EXAMPLE: Chaplain (Lieu- ern Baptist Convention. tenant) John Smith..then, Chaplain Smith. The American Lutheran Church, the Evangel- The title "Dr." is used only when thedoctor- ical Lutheran Church, and the United Evangel- ate degree is actually held. EXAMPLES: Rev. ical Lutheran Church merged in 1960, into the Dr. John Johns, Dr. Johns, Rev. JohnJohns, American Lutheran Church with headquarters in D.D.(Doctor of Divinity). Minneapolis, Minn. Unitarian and Universalist denominations are ROMAN CATHOLIC usage: Rev. Joe Jones. known as the "Unitarian Universalist Associa- Father Jones. Rt. Rev. Msgr. Joe Jones.Most tion." Rev. Joe Jones, bishop of the Denver Diocese. There are other faiths which have mosques, Bishop Jones. Francis Cardinal Jones. Cardinal dioceses, archdioceses, areas, synod, presbytery

141135 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 etc. If in doubt, consult yourchaplain's office want to capitalize a letter you must underscore for the accurate designations andchanges. it three times. An example of a copy edited message news release appears infigure 9-4.

COPY EDITING MESSAGE AND TELETYPE NEWS COMMON ERRORS IN SENTENCE STRUC- TURE A MESSAGE is an officialcommunication in brief form transmitted by rapid meanssuch as The sections on spelling, capitalizing, and telegraph, radio,flashing light,flaghoist, or punctuating have all contributed to constructing semaphore. A message usually is receivedby the good sentences. However, to be effective, sen- communications department, reproduced,then tences must be grammatically correct. Inaddi- distributedto staff members ofdepartments tion, they should be well chosen and effectively concerned. It is tersely written, contains many combined with an aim for clarity, emphasis, and abbreviations, and everything is printedin capi- interest. These aims are often thrown off target tal letters. by any one of the srariety-of.common errors in However, when operations andtime permit, sentence structure: timely news releases aretransmitted in news style and contain all theinformation necessary Sentence Fragments for a good news story. Sentences aregrammati- cally complete, including the necessaryarticles, A frequent fault in grammar among writers is adjectives, and adverbs. A good message news the incomplete sentence. By this is meant a release is very similar to teletype copy asit sentence that does not contain the two neces- arrives in a radio/TV or newspaper news room. sary parts, a subject and apredicate or verb. It is It requires only copy editing andduplicating to possible,of course,forthesubjectto be get it ready for release to newsmedia. understood rather than stated, but you should A message news release is sodesignated by the be sure in that case that it is clearly implied. word PRESREL whichis a standard Navy Here are some examples of incomplete sen- communications abbreviation for pressrelease. tences: In the same line as PRESREL arethe date and time the release was written.For example: The sightseeing tour, which was arranged PRESREL 091500Z JUL73. In this case,the for the liberty party. story written on the 9th day of the month atI50k,. The Z representsGreenwich Mean (There is no main verb. The relative clause has a Time. The use of a different letterhere would verb, "was arranged," but what appears to have indicate local time in the areawhere the story' been intended as a statement with "sightseeing originated. tour" as subject has not been completed.) All message releases are forimmediate release unless otherwise designated.Occasionally, cir- A tall thin, man with owlishspectacles cumstances may dictate the use ofsuch releasing and a bald head. instructions as: HOLD FORRELEASE UNTIL (date and time), FOR SECURITYREVIEW (The verb is omitted.) AND RELEASE, or FORSIMULTANEOUS RELEASE (here, fill in the appropriate data). Floated toward the beaches. Because message news releases arrive printed floated? in capital letters, you use adifferent system for (Here the subject is omitted. What that all the copy editing. You must assume the capital letters are lowercase and begin your copy Just as the searchlight swept across editing from there. In other words, anytime you harbor.

142 136 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 9-COPY EDITING

1PRI--eetemeetemA raTT51413iii

.11-117.Y..UMWIT:111.. IIT=71= . .

ITH THE WIIMMMINIO SECOND FLEET AT SEA-- ELEMENTS OF THE SECOND FLEET AND PLANES Mk FROM FLEET AIR WING ARE ENGAGED WITH UNITS OF THE FRENCH se ATLANTIC FLEET IN JOINT AIR, SURFACE, AND SUBSURFACE OPERATIONS mr IN THE WESTERN ATLANTIC PARTICIPATING U.S. VESSELS ARE THE

CARRIER INDEPENDENCE, GUIDED MISSILE FRIGATE BIDDLE, GUIDED

MISSILE DESTROYERS LAWRENCE, TATTHALL, AND CHARLES F. ADAMS AND

THE SUBMARINE TRUMPETFISH THE FRENCH UNITS WILL DEPART FOR =MO HOME AT THE COMPLETION OF THE EXERCIS ENROUTE, THEY WILL

CONDUCT ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE TRAINING WITH A NEW DETACHMENTOF amU.S. SHIPS FROM DESTROYER SQUADRON (5)THEYWILL INCLUDE THE GUIDED MISSILE FRIGATE LUCE, DESTROYERS LAPPET, CHARLES

S. SPERRY, ESCORT SHIPS ROELSCH AND VOGE, AND SUBMARINECORPORALS RV Ili 41a

168.30 Figure 94.An example ofa copy edited message news release.

137 143 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

(This tells when something happened, but the Often a run-on sentence is the result notonly main statement is still incomplete.) of faulty punctuation but also offailure to think the construction through andrecognize the re-

Bailey, the new striker, looking as if he .lationships of the various ideas. would burst with pride. RUN-ONDetaileddecontaminationisa (Therearemodifiershereforthesubject lengthy process, it is usuallycarried on at a "Bailey," but no main statement about him.) home base or rear area. Often an incomplete sentence results from BETTER RELATIONSHIPDetailed decon- failure to recognize that a modifying phrase or tamination is a lengthy process,usually clause is really part of the preceding sentence. carried on at a home base or rear area. For instance, use a comma instead of the first period in the example below. The result ineach RUN-ONAn emergencytourniquet can be neckerchief, it caseis one complete sentence instead of a made from something like a sentence followed by a fragntent. As wrapped ma emond thetimb and tied in an overhand knot. The cruiser was headed for the canal an zone. Steaming eastwardthrough the Carib- BETTER RELATIONSHIPToapply bean. emergency tuurniquetmade froM something like a neckerchif, wrap thematerial Don't be. misled by the fact that some writers once around thelimb and tie an overhand deliberately turn out incomplete sentences at knot. times. As the late Emily Post once said about etiquette: "Well bred persons sometimes break some of the rules, but tobreak them and get Dangling Modifiers away with it, you firsthave to know them." It is true that fractured sentences may occa- Misplacement of a modifier can confusethe sionally produce the exact effect wanted, but be meaning of the sentence, often withludicrous close to sure yoti know whythey are being used and that results. Modifiers should be positioned they are suitable to what is being written. the words they modify, becauseotherwise, they Beginning a sentence with "but" or another may seem to modifysomething else. Haste, connective is regarded by many as incorrect, carelessness, or lack of understanding of gram- largely because the connective standing first mar may cause awriter to use a construction seems to indicate afragment. This is one rule without thinking exactly what it is supposedto that may occasionally be ignored if bydoing so modify. This kind of error is fairly commonin you achieve a moreeffective statement. using participles and otheradjectives or with adverbial modifiers, as in the, examplesbelow.

Run-On Sentences DANGLING PARTICIPLEReturning to the Another common error in sentence structure ship, the package was found to be on his is the punctuation of two or more sentences asif bunk. they were one. Usually this occurs with sentences that are closely related in thought. IMPROVEDReturning to the ship, he found the package on his bunk, (it was hethat RUN-ONThe ship held its first swim-call, returned to the ship, not the package.) the water was 4 miles deep. DANGLING PARTICIPLEEntering theCO2 IMPROVEDThe ship held its first swim-call. flooded compartment, the gas overcame The water was 4 miles deep. him. 144 138 Chapter 9COPY EDITING

IMPROVEDEntering the CO2 flooded com- Misplaced Correlative Conjunctions partmentrhe was overcome by thegas. Correlativeconjunctions,(suchas NOT DANGLING PARTICIPLERunning rapidly ONLYBUT A LSO and EITHEROR)are out from the windlass, he caught his foot in often misplaced. Their correct position isjust the anchor chain. ahead of the words or groups of words they connect. IMPROVEDHe caught his foot in thean- chor chain as it ran rapidly out from the MISPLACEDThe Navy letter form NOT windlass. ONLY omits the salutation BUT ALSO the complimentaryclose. (The words con- MISPLACED PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE nected are "salutation" and "complimen- At the age of two his father died. tary close".)

IMPROVEDHe was two years old when his CORRECTThe Navy letter form omits NOT father died. ONLY the salutation BUT ALSO thecom- plimentary close. MISPLACED PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE Baker saw the driver of thecar that had MISPLACEDEITHER securelines to the hit him in the theater. arresting hook OR the hoisting sling. (As this sentence stands, the words that should IMPROVEDIn the theater, Bakersaw the be connected are "arresting hook" and driver of the car that had hit him. "hoisting sling." The sentencewill be better, however, if two complete preposi- MISPLACED RELATIVE CLAUSEThe tional phrases are used instead.) Chief Commissarryman discovered that old baking powder had been used in the bis- CORRECTSecure lines EITHER to thear- cuits, which caused all the trouble. resting hook OR to the hoisting sling.

IMPROVEDThe Chief Commissaryman dis- Other frequently used correlative conjunctions covered that the trouble with the biscuits are"both.. .and,""neither...nor," and was the use of old baking powder. "whether...or."

A frequently misplaced word is "only."Here Split Infinitives is an example to show how, by moving thisone word around in a sentence, you can change the Splitting an infinitivemeans placing one or meaning entirely: more modifiers between the "to" and the verb form. You will hear peoplesay that a split infinitive is no longer regardedas incorrect, but Only he could read thestrange dialect. thatisonly apartialtruth. Some writers (Nobody else could.) consider that splitting an infinitiveis desirable He could only read the strange dialect. (He at times for the sake of emphasis: forexample, could not write or speak it.) "To DELIBERATELY disobey,an order is a He could read only the strange dialect.(He serious offense." Even thissentence will grate could read nothing else.) on some ears, and generally, it is better to keep He could read the onlystrange dialect.. the adverb outside the infinitiveconstruction. (Only one dialect was strange, and hecould This is especially true whenyou have more than read it.) one adverb or a phrase. 14i JOURNALIST 3 & 2

AWKWARD SPLITThe only way to win occurs because, in acomplicated sentence, a against a fire is to regularly and THOR- nearby noun is mistaken for the subject.This is OUGHLY practice the rules of fire preven- the case in the sentence below, inwhfch the tion. plural nouns "officers" and "commands" seem to have confused the writer. Thesubject of the BETTERThe only way to win against a fire sentence, however, is "duty." istopracticerules of fire prevention REGULARLY and THOROUGHLY. INCORRECTThe primary duty of such staff dental officers serving in these commands Errors of Agreement are very similar tothose of a district dental officer. You probably have no trouble, most of the time, with agreement of verb and subject.You IMPROVED The primary duty of suchstaff is are not tempted to write:"The propellers was dental officers serving in these commands damaged." But how about "The propeller and very similar to thatof a district dental shaft was damaged "? Wrong, of course, but easy officer. to slip into when you are thinking ofthe two - OR - as belonging The primary duties of suchstaff dental partsof a compound subject commands are together. It should, of course, read "The prop- officers serving in these these of a district dental eller and shaft WERE damaged." very similar to In a compound subject with "or" or "nor" as officer. a connective, the verbshould agree in number with the LAST Noun in the subject. Gerund Takes the Possessive WRONGNeither the propellers nor the rud7 A GERUND is a verb (verb form) usedlike a der ARE damaged. noun.Itretains some of its verb qualities, CORRECTNeither the propellers nor the however, such as taking a subject or object, or being modified by adverbs. Only one ofthese rudder ;s damaged. the subjectdiffers from what wouldbe used with the same verb if complete. Thesubject of a When a parenthetical expression beginning the with words such as "together with," "with," or gerund is in the possessive case instead of "including" comes between the subject and the nominative. verb, there is a temptation to make the verb plural as if the subject were compound. For WRONGHad you heard about him passing example: the test? WRONGOne mast, together with a spar RIGHT: Had you heard about his passing the running athwartship, ARE used for flags. test? CORRECTOne mast, together with a spar "Passing" is a gerund with "his" as the subject running athwartship, IS used for flags. and "test" as the object. The completephrase is used here as the object of thepreposition Disagreement of subject and verb sometimes "about."

146 140 Chapter 9COPY EDITING

Error in Noun Clauses submits the best entry. The pronoun that introduces anoun clause is RIGHTThe award will go to WHOEVER sometimes given the wrong case because of submits the best entry. failure to recognize the structure of thesen- tence. The case of any pronoun is determined by "Whoever submits the best entry" is a noun its use in the clause of which it isa part. clause.. The whole clause is used as the object of the preposition "to." "Whoever" is the subject WRONGThe award will go to WHOMEVER of the clause and therefore nominative.

147

141 CHAPTER 10

LIBEL, RIGHT OF PRIVACY, AND COPYRIGHT

Is the first amendment the same to a news- All states agree that libel is aDEFAMATION, man as an umpire's"call 'em as I see 'em" an act which tends todegrade or lower a person license? Is the new city official really a crafty in the eyes of others. Its effects cansubject him communist sympathizer? to ridicule, hatred, or contempt(or all three), or To thegriefof many a publisher and they can cause him financial injuryby hurting newsman ithas been found that there is no his property or business, or causing him tolose absolute license to print whatever onepleases his job. about a private citizen or about his government. As you can see, a defamation does not have to Free speech and a free press, as guaranteed by be sensational to be libelous. A picture with the the constitution, have two sides: on the oneside wrong people identified in thecaption can be the right to use them, and on the other, the duty libelous. A newspaper headline, even if the story not to abuse them. When the newsmedia abuse under it is blameless, can be libeloud. their right to a free press they can commit an Radio and television are not exempt from age-old offense called LIBEL the defamationof libel. A picture on television can be as libelous as a person's reputation orhis goods. one printed ina newspaper. A radio news Because itis your job to write about the broadcast can defame an individual, although Navy, you should become acquainted with the there is some dispute in the courts as to whether danger of defamation. This chapter will give you the offense would be libel or slander.(Slander a good idea of what youshould guard against differs from libel chiefly in that it is spoken when releasingmaterialto news media or instead of being printed, written, or pictured. In publishing it in internal publications. It will also other words, slanderis defamation by oral communication.) acquaint you with the right of privacy and some True statements about a person can be of the laws of copyright. libelous. Many people think that libel results only from untruths told about another. This is LIBEL not so. The truth can defame an individual as much as a lie. Libel is a difficult offense to define. Libel A simple defamation, however, is not always a laws are State laws, and there are differencesin libel.Threethingsarenecessarybeforea the definitions of libel from state to state. For statement becomes libel. our purposes, however, wewill generally define libel as follows: 1. There must be a TRUE DEFAMATION. In other words, a person's character or property must in some way be degraded. LIBEL is a written, printed, or pictured 2. There must be CLEAR IDENTIFICATION defamation which unjustly holds a person of the person. This identification does not have up to ridicule, contempt, hatred, orfinan- to be by name. A writer (or an artist) can very cial injury. easily leave no doubt in the public mind as to a person's identity without mentioning his name.

148 142 Chapter 10LIBEL, RIGHT OF PRIVACY, AND COPYRIGHT

Even if only a few persons were to realize the accompany the rights of freedom of speech and person's identity, libel is still possible. press. A respectable news medium does not obey 3. The libel must be PUBLISHED. This does the libel laws merely because it wishes to avoid not mean that it must be printed in a newspaper. being sued, but because it believes in the dignity You recall from the definition that a libelcan be of the individual. written (as in a letter) or it can be pictured (as in a photograph or cartoon). Spoken libel,or slander, isalso,considered by the courts to have HOW LIBEL IS COMMITTED been published. As a Navy JO, however, you will not have to concern yourself too much about If news media today commit libel, it generally the legal and technical differences between libel occurs in the following areas: and slander. Itis sufficient fa, know that any defamation may be considered unlawful, regard- attacking a man's character or personal less of whether it is written or spoken. One of reputation; your jobs isto make sure that defamatory statements do not reach print or the airwaves via accusing him of a loathsome disease or a Navy news release. insanity; Libel as an offense is almost as old as man. Many early peoples punished those who would accusing him of a crime; harm the name or reputation of another. Libel before the invention of printing almost always by attacking his professional competence; took the form of slander. An early code of e.g., a lawyer, doctor, politician, or craftsman; Egyptian law recognized slander as an offense and against the sun god. After the invention of printing, libel became subjecting him in any way topublic very closely related to freedom of the press. contempt, hatred, or ridicule. Different governments in different times have takenvariousviewsofafreepress.For Instances of libel are more common than centuries, the struggle for some measure of press most people suspect, and court action does not freedom was an uphill battle. have to result before a statement becomes a Much of the trouble encountered in striving libel, There are hundreds of instances of libel for press freedom revolved around the fact that every day in the American news media. The vast for a long time governments considered any majority of them are minor or borderline cases; adverse criticism or comment to be libelous. and most of the more serious ones go unnoticed Thus, rulers went so far as to imprison or put to or uncontested. As a matter of fact, there are death writers who had criticized them in print. not too many court actions for libel. In some countries today, too much of the wrong kind of criticism can mean a newspaper will be closed. RESPONSIBILITY FOR LIBEL A balance between ruthless suppression and license was struck by the American Consti- Let us assume that you write a story and tution, and the courts have strengthened it in accidentally include a statement which offends the intervening years. Today, as one writer says, somebody. The person offended sues for libel. freedom of the press and speech are "the first Who is responsible? Who pays? A casual observer principle of the Anglo-American legal struc- might think that,ina suit againstalarge ture." He goes on to say that theyare a "specific newspaper, any damages will be paid by the legal principle defining the relationship, in a medium publishingthestory.Thisisnot democracy, betweenthepeopleandtheir necessarily so. elected representatives." Technically, everybody who had anything to Libel laws exist because the free press is a do withthe statement may be sued. This two-waystreet.Thereareobligations that includes you, the public affairs officer who

143 149 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 releasedit,the officerin command who is libeled in this manner does not have to prove ,responsibleforeverything you release,the that he suffered damage tohisreputation, military editor who accepted it, the editor who monetary loss, or other injury. Libel per se can approved it, and anybody else in the chain of support a lawsuit in itself. events who read it, understood it, yet allowed it There areprobably thmsands of words, to reach print or be broadcast. phrases and statements in the English language Another point worth emphasizing is that any which are libelous in themselves. Some of them person who REPRINTS a libelous statement is are of a political nature; others refer to race or justasguiltyas the person who originally religion; still others involve specific professions published it. and occupations. Others (and this is no doubt For example, assume that one newspaper the largest group) affect the honesty, integrity, publishes a libelous statement. Another news- or morals of anyone to whom they areapplied. paper picks up the story,credits thefirst Here are just a few examples of what NOT to newspaper with the facts, and republishes it. The call people or groups: second newspaper is just as guilty as the first if the cask' leaches cowl and libelisproved. Professional Groups Attorneys: shyster, Charges may be brought against both news- ambulence chaser, crafty, unprincipled, slick; papers. By the same token, wire services are businessmen: swindler, fraud, racketeer, double- similarly liable. dealer, cheat, phony, crooked; politician: liar, Occasionally, a newspaper will publish a wire grafter, perjurer, seller of influence, pocketer of service story that is libelous. In some cases, the public funds, criminal's partner; doctors: quack, newspaper cannot verify the facts in the story abortionist,faker,neglecter of hispatients, because the incident happened far away. Regard- incompetent. less, some States hold that the newspaper is just as responsible as the wire service, despite the AffiliationsRed,Communist,Nazi,a circumstances. member of the Ku Klux Klan, athiest, nudist, In short, a person can name in his suit anyone and socialist (sometimes). who had anything to do with the preparation of the story or its distribution. However, he will Honesty and MoralsUnreliable, a credit probably attempt, in his suit, to name only the risk, hypocrite, adulterer, unchaste, prostitute, principal offenders. drunkard, conspirator, mistress, thief. Obviously, there can be many more classifications of words and phrases which are libelous KINDS OF LIBEL in themselves, but we can learn one or two points from the above list. We can see that a There are two kinds of libel: obvious libel and word like "drunkard," for example, can have libel by inference (hidden libel). The formal synonyms, all just as libelous, and the same terms for each are LIBEL PER SE and LIBEL thing applies to most of the nouns and adjectives PER QUOD. Do notletyourself become in the list. confused by the Latin terms. The other point is that the meanings of words or phrases to the public can change. Over a period of years, the meaning of a word or phrase Libel Per Se can shift gradually until it is no longer libelous in itself, or libelous at all. The reverse is also The more obvious of the two, libel per se, true. A word or phrase harmle - a few years ago means "by itself," or "on the face of it." The may be libelous in itself today reader or viewer does not have to interpret or A word which has aim Jst entirely lost a study in order to understand the libel per se previouslylibelous perse meaning is "alco- because it is obvious or evident. Libel per se it; holic." A few years ago the word was synony- the more serious of the two types, and a person mous with "drunkard," but today it refers to an 144 Chapter 10LIBEL, RIGHT OFPRIVACY, AND COPYRIGHT illness, alcohol:sm. Words of this type, however, because it implied he was a Communist sym- should still be used with caution. pathizer. Whether the man was orwas not a In a libel suit, if the defamatory material is Communist sympathizer or a lobbyist for the libelous initself,the court decides on the party was beside the point. The man claimed he interpretationofthewordsandphrases had been defamed and was upheld by the Circuit involved; the news medium does not. If the Court of Appeals. court decides the material can be understood as "Guilt by association" is also a form of libel libelous by the public, the publisher involved has per quod. This form of libel, sad to say, has been no argument. employed for many years by unscrupulous politiciansandothersseeking positions of power. Perhaps the most obvious use of this method has been the linking of variouspersons Libel Per Quod to the Communist Party by innuendo. Duringapoliticalcampaign in the West The second type of libel, by inference, is several years ago pamphlets appeared describing more "hidden." Libel per quod means "because a United States senator who was running for of circumstance," or "by means of circum- re-election, as being friendly toward Communist stance." Tan libel per quod the statements, words, aims. One of the principal items of evidence or phrases involved may be harmless in them- given to support this claim was the fact that the selves, but become libelous because of attached senator had participated in the meeting, before circumstances. Usually such circumstances are America entered World War II, during which unforeseen by the publisher, and he can claim Russia and Stalin were praised as foes of Nazi that he acted in good faith. Good faith is nota Germany.Thepamphletswereclearlyan complete defense, however, as we shall see. example of circumstantial libelwhat the reader Here is a classic example of libel by circum- might infer. The intent of the writers of the stance: pamphletwasapparentlytodamagethe A news story told of an athlete's spectacular senator's reputationinorder toinjurehis feats on the tennis court Le previous Saturday. election prospects. In pint of fact, the tennis match wason Friday, not Satviday; a simple error. However, the story was libelous per quod because the athlete in LIBEL AND THE LAW question belonged to a religion which observes Saturday as the Sabbatha day of quiet and We have pointed out that the laws of libel are meditation. Thestory,asitwas printed, State laws, unlike the Constitution or other defamed the athleteas not being a devout nationallawswhichbind ALL American member of his church. citizens. Libel laws vary from State to State, and Libel per quod is the most common of all each Sti.te makes changes in its libel code from libels. Very few publishers intentionally under- timetotime. As aresult,thereislittle take the risk involved in printing material which uniformity among the States regarding award of is obviously libelous, but libel per quod occurs damages or the nature of judgments in particular often because of errors or negligence. There are types of libel cases. countless other examples of libel by circum- The State laws of libel are complex andcan stances: wrong names, wrong address, wrong be understood thoroughly only by an attorney dates, and so forth. or a person trained in this field. In this section Libel by circumstances may also result from of the chapter we will attempt only to describe what the reader may infer. In a story appearing someof the"groundrules" which apply in a national magazine, a man was describedas generally in all States. being a legislative representative (lobbyist) for There are two types of legal action whichcan the Communist Party. The man charged ina suit result from publication of libelous material: thatthisstatement damaged his reputation CIVIL ACTION and CRIMINAL ACTION.

151145 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Civil Action it is considered to have an ill effect on public morals. Civil libel action results when one person sues One of the gravest types of criminal libel is (brings court action against) another because of seditious libelthat which defames an estab- defamation. This defamation, again, need not be lished government or one of its agents in an to his character or reputation. It can be tohis attempt to thwart or otherthrow it. Such a libel, business, his occupation, or his property. if directed at the U.S. Government, becomes a Civillibel can be committed against legal Federal offense and can result in a long prison "persons" composed of more than one indi- term for the libeler. Seditious libel is rare. It has vidual. In this matter a corporation, a partner- occurred in cases where news media or indi- ship, or any other association of individuals can viduals have written violent defainations of the be defamed. General Motors couldsue an Government in their opposition to Federal laws individual for defaming its products or business or the decrees of Federal courts. Mere oppo- practices. By the same token, an individual sitionto acourt decreeisnot necessarily could sue General Motors. One corporation, too, libelous (though it could be seditious). Remem- can sue another. ber, there is no libel involved until there is An individual cannot sue the U.S. Govern- defamation. ment, however, unless the Government consents to the suit. Thus, if an individual felt he had been libeled, by an agency of the Government, DEFENSES AGAINST LIBEL ACTION he could not bring suit unless the Government consented. An individual, a newspaper, or other news Civil libel suits are always between persons, organizationisnotleft without some pro- whether thepersonisan individual or an tections when being sued for libel. There are two association of individuals. A sum of money is partial defenses which can mitigate, or lessen, the usual compensation awarded by civil courts the damages assessed against a defendant in a for damages. The amount has varied from one libel suit, and four outright protections which cent, a nominal sum to indicate vindication, to arecompletedefensesagainstlibelaction. as high as $175,000. However, only the two mitigating and two of Money awarded for legal damages is intended the four complete defenses will be discussed to compensate for mental and physicalsuffering here because they are the ones which could or contempt and ridiculeaswellasactual possibly confront a Navy JO. financial loss. The firstmitigating factor to consideris HONEST MISTAKE or GOOD FAITH, which appears in the libel codes of most States.Almost Criminal Libel self-explanatory, the law means that a defendant can be excused partially if he can prove the Criminal libel is less common than civil libel, libelous material was published unintentionally, but is much more serious. Criminal libelis a or without his realizing it was defamatory.The crime and can be prosecuted like any other "honest mistake" law does not remove liability, crime. In other words, in criminal libel, the State only reduces it, as does the second mitigating is the accuser and the punisher. If convicted of factor, retraction or apology. criminal libel, an individual can by imprisoned, A RETRACTION or APOLOGY, usually fined, or both, depending on the gravity of the printed with the same prominence as the original offense. libelous material, will sometimes satisfy a person Any libel which tends to disturb public peace who claims he has been libeled, But he is still and order can be a criminal libel. For instance, if free to sue if he wishes. One disadvantage of a a popular public figure were tobe libeled to the retraction or apology is that it puts the original extent that riots resulted, the libel would be defamatory remark before the public eye again, criminal. Obscene libel can be criminal because hopefully, though, in the nicest possible form. h 152 146 Chapter 10LIBEL, RIGHT OF PRIVACY, AND COPYRIGHT

An example is this story about a southern editor of the wielders of public or private power. This of a few years ago: function cannot be taken away. The editor was bitterly opposed by certain Manynewspapersengagein"crusades" people in his town, and he did not hesitate to againstdishonestorbunglinggovernment, become quite harsh on them in print. Oneman against crooked gambling, or other criminal insisted he had been libeled, and demandeda activities. As long as the newspaper approaches retraction. The next issue of the paper appeared such a "crusade" in a responsible manner, it is with the following line in large type: JOHN well within its rights. Every year Pulitzer prizes GREEN IS NOT A BRAYING ASS. are given to individual reporters for having In the above example, the editor successfully exposed and/or caused the correction of private and wittily continued his fued, but regrettably, or public abuses of power. he also compounded the original libel. TRUTH isthe best of the two complete defenses discussedhere againstlibelaction. RIGHT OF PRIVACY Actually, it is two defenses in one, becaLLe ome We now turn to an offense which is related to State laws read that truth alone will suffice as a libel; invasion of privacy. defense in a civil libel suit; others maintain that The "right to be left alone" hascome to be the truth must be "without malice." In either recognized by the courts only in the past 50 case, the defendant must prove that what he has years. As a right, however, PRIVACY is not published is the truth. absolute. A matter of public interest or concern If the law requires "truth without malice," can be published even though it involves the the defendant must also prove hk,good inten- privacy of an individual. A statement in the tions. Malice, however, as judvd bylhe courts Universal Declaration of Human Rights reads in today, does not mean only "intenrro harm." part: The consensus today appearsto be that "truth without malice" must be "truth for a good "No one shall be subjected to arbitrary reason." The good reason is usually judged to be interference with his privacy, family, home, in the best public interest or concern. or correspondence...." For example, a newspaper prints a story about a candidate running for a high public The point to remember is that there should be office, stating therein that the man has serveda no violation of a man's privacy without a prison term for embezzlement. The statement is compelling reason; usually in connection with true, and the newspaper's reason for printing it the public concern. To pry into a man's home is the "public good;" the man's history would life in connection with a news story is inex- give reasonable doubt of his qualifications for cusable unless there is some clear public need for public office. the information. If, however, the same statement had been On the other hand, a man cannot claim the made about a private citizen connected in no right of privacy if an important news event has way with the public welfare, there would have placed him, willingly or unwillingly, in public been no "good reason" in the case. view. Even so, this does not givenews media the FAIR COMMENT and CRITICISM is the right to push human dignity and decency aside. second complete defense against libel action. A publisher canclaimthisdefensein many instances. The courts are often lenient when fair COPYRIGHT comment or criticism is made of a political organization ut any powerful agency; in reviews The final section of this chapter deals with of musicals, plays, and books; or in articles another set of laws which (mom thenews dealing with officials or agencies of the U.S. media,writers,and publishersthe laws of Government. It has been established that one of copyright. Unlike libel laws, copyright lawsare a newspaper's chief functions is to act as a critic Federal statutes.

147 1553 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PUBLISHED WORKS Copyrightan exclusive right granted to To be protected by copyright, published protect original literary, dramatic, musical, works must be marked with a notice consisting artistic,and other intellectual works of ofthe word "copyright,"theabbreviation authors and proprietors, provided copies of "Copr.," or the symbol © together with the such works are properly marked with a name of the copyright owner andthe year of notice of copyright when published. firstpublication. Onmaps, photographs, drawings, works of art, and the like, the symbol © together with the monogram, initials, or mark Works which may be protected by copyright of the copyright ownerissufficient notice, include books, periodicals, lectures, or similar provided the owner's name and year of first productions intended for oral delivery, dramatic publication appear on some accessible portion of and musical compositions, maps, works or art the work. andreproductionsthereof,drawing, photographs, works of a scientific or technical nature, radio and television scripts, and countless other UNPUBLISHED WORKS objects requieng creative ability and ingenuity. Copyrightedmaterialsaretheexclusive Unpublished works, such as manuscripts, need property of the copyright holder for 28 years. not be marked with notice of copyright to be At the end of that time, the copyright may be protected. Accordingly, care must be exercised renewed by the holder or his heirs for another to avoid inadvertently invading or jeopardizing 28 years. When this second period has elapsed, the rights of authors or proprietors of such the material becomes public property. The basic works. purpose of copyright lawsis to prohibit the copying of intellectual products, for profit or notoriety, by others during the lifetime of the USE OF GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS author. Persons in any type of information work must remember that no copyrighted material Any material published by or for the United may be reproduced withoutthe permission of States Government, or any reprint in whole or the copyright holder. part thereof, is generally considered to be in the Basic guidancefor the procedures to be public domain. When copyrighted material is followed in obtaining copyright permission is to used (by permission of course) in a government be found in SECNAVINST 5870.1(Use of publication, however, it cannot be reproduced copyrightedmaterialsinNavy publications, by a private citizen or in another Government motion pictures, at'io and video tapes, and publication without permission of the original similar works). copyright holder. Copyrighted material ina Thereisa great misconception,however, Government publication will have a statement concerning the exclusiveness of copyrighted identifying the copyright holder and indicating material. Nobody has the right to monopolize that permission has been granted for this use. facts or ideas. If a newspaper story is copyrighted, for example, the copyright protects the story only as far as the literary form, style, and COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT language of the story are concerned. The facts or ideas are flee to anybody who wants to use To use any of the exclusive rights of a them, provided they are not expressed in the copyright owner, without his permission, is an same form or style as the original. infringement of his copyright. These exclusive

148 154 Chapter 10LIBEL, RIGHT OF PRIVACY, AND COPYRIGHT rightsinclude copying, reproducing, printing, extent,withoutobtainingpermission.For reprinting,publishing,exhibiting,translating, example under this doctrine, scholars and critics and vending the copyrighted work or portions have been held free to publish short extractsor thereof and, in some instances, the oral delivery quotations from copyrighted works, without the or performance of the work. permission of the copyright owner, for the Where a copyright is infringed by or for the purpose of illustration or comment. Government, with its authorization or consent, The line between "fair use" and infringement the exclusive remedy of the copyright owner is is unclear and not easily defined. There isno by suit against the United States in the Court of specific number of words, lines, or notes that Claims. Government employees are no longer can safely be taken without permission. When personallyliablefor copyright infringement using excerpts of mat..ialinthis manner, occurring in the performance of their official however, you must always acknowledge the duties. In cases involving Navy Personnel, prior source. to the time suit is brought, claims of copyright infringement may be settled by the Secretary of the Navy or his duly authorized representative, OBTAINING A COPYRIGHT the Chief of Naval Research or his designee. If you wish to obtaina copyright on a piece of material created NOT in the performance of FAIR USE your duty, you must follow these procedures: When reading the copyright laws strictly, a Produce and publish copies of the work writer may not copy a single sentence of a and include the necessary data to make it valid, copyrighted work without permission. However, as pointed out earlier. Circular 20 published by the Copyright Office in Washington, D.C. has something to say about Register your claim with the Copyright the "fair use" of copyrighted works. Office promptly after publication. This claim In essence, the circular states that although consists of the Application Form (available on the U.S. copyright statute doec not expressly request from the Copyright Office, The Library permit the use of copyrighted material without of Congress, Washington, D.C. 20540), two permission of the copyright owner, the courts copiesof your work aspublished,and a do, however, recognize certain limited uses of registration fee of $6. copyrighted material as "fair use." In the broaadest terms, states the circular, the A pamphlet edition of "The Copyright Law," doctrine of "fair use" means that in some alongwithcopyrightofficeregulationsis circumstances where the use is reasonable and available from the Superintendent of Docu- not harmful to the copyright owner's rights, ments,U.S. GovernmentPrintingOffice, copyrighted material may be used to a limited Washington, D.C. 20204. CHAPTER 11

NEWSPAPER AND WIRE SERVICE OPERATIONS

In spite of recent advances in the radio and (or MECHANICAL). Figure11-1shows the television field, as a JO, you will find that the organization of a typical large metropolitan Navy's major news vehicle is still the newspaper. daily. This chapter describes the basic operations and organization of commercial newspapers and wire services and the functions of their staffs. BUSINESS DEPARTMENT

NEWSPAPER ORGANIZATION The business department is concerned with the commercial side of the newspaper. It handles Newspaperorganizationfollowsabasic ADVERTISING, CIRCULATION, PROMO- pattern applicable to practically all newspapers, TION, and BOOKKEEPING. On large dailies a regardless of size. On metropolitan dailies the business manager may supervise all phases of the pattern is tightly departmentalized with brigades business department, with a separate manager in of newsmen, special editors, business represehita- charge of each of the four divisions. fives, mechanical personnel, and photoengraving superintendents. In turn, they are watched over by a publisher, and assisted by a hierarchy of Advertising executives. The publisher may be the newspaper's owner or an executive appointed by the Advertising provides about 75 percent of a newspaper's stockholders or board of directors. paper's revenue. Without it, no newspaper could His job is to set policies and run the business. He survive. Home deliveries and newsstand sales of has charge of all major departments. newspapers account for a small portion of a On small papers the identical services are paper's income. The 10 cents or more you pay performed by perhaps fewer than a half dozen for a newspaper hardly pays for the paper it is persons, including those who handle the stenog- printed on. Most newspapers are satisfied if they raphy and paperwork. The editor, who exercises can break even on subscriptions. But thenumber the authority of publisher and business manager, of copies sold has a lot to do with attracting also does some of the reporting and may be a advertising and establishing the rates the news- photographer, photoengraver and printer. He paper charges for advertising space. may even invade the realm of the paperboy if When the number of pages for each edition of an irate subscriber calls late in the day to report anewspaperisdetermined,the advertising paper undelivered. manager usually prepares a dummyshowing the The functions of a newspaper organization, position of the day's advertising. The remaining regardless of its size or circulation, are tb gather space if filled by the editorial department. The and write the news, to print it, and to make a average newspaper in the United Statesdedicates profit. To do this, newspapers, even the smallest about 60 percent of its space to advertising, and ones, are divided into three major departments: the remaining 40 percent to news, features, and BUSINESS, EDITORIAL, and PRODUCTION art,

. 156 150 PEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 1I NEWSPAPER AND WIRE SERVICE OPERATIONS

PUBLISHER

BUSINESS EDITORIAL PRODUCTION I DEPARTMENT DEPARTMENT DEPARTMENT

IOITORIN. COMPOSING ..1ADVERTISING CHIEF

H ENGRAVING I MANAGING --LCIRCULATION !MON MAKEUP

PROMOTION NEWS OR MAKE UP EDITOR HSTEREOTYPINGELECTROTYPING

PRESS

IBOOKKEEPING - BINOINO 1

MILITARY STATE TELEGRAPH CITY CABLE I SPORTS SOCIETY EDITOR 101TOR EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR EOITOR EDITOR

ENTERTAINMENT' STAFF REWRITE MIN FOREIGN CORRESPONDENT CORRIPONOENTS EDITOR

SPECIAL REPORTERS CORRESPONOENT IPNOTO.JOURNALISTO FINANCIAL COPY SUNDAY EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR

PICTORIAL STAFF

COPYREADERS LIGNIN

165.31 Figure 11-1.Organization of a typical metropolitan newspaper. As a JO, you can benefit from studying serve to learn what days they need news most advertising trends in your local papers. For and govern your output accordingly. example, Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday are considered medium advertising days in most Circulation newspapers. Thursday, Friday, and Sunday are considered heavy days. Saturday is usually the Circulation is responsible for sales and distri- lightest. bution of the newspaper. Of course, important news stories will get intothe newspapers any day of the week. Legitimate news is always in demand. A story Promotion with little news value might not survive on a day when the space is needed for advertisement. The Promotion strives to boost circulation and advertising may crowd your story out of the make the newspaper a more attractive vehicle paper. On the other hand, newspapers probably for advertising. The promotion manager origi- print fewer pages of news on light advertising nates contests and promotion campaigns of all days. Some papers tend to print more military types in order to boost the newspaper's advertis- news on certain days. Study the newspapers you ing and readership.

151 157 JOURNALIST 3&2

Bookkeeping Cable and Telegraph Editor Bookkeeping collects and disburses money The jobs of cable and telegraph editor are and maintains the newspaper's records. combined on some newspapers. But if they are assignedseparately, the cable editor handles foreign news while the telegraph editor handles EDITORIAL DEPARTMENT national news. Most newspapers have several correspondents The editorial department gathers,writes, on their staffs who, in most cases, forward their edits, and comments on the news. It operates as material directly to either the telegraph or cable a carefully trained, highly organized and re- editor. A correspondentisa newsman who sourceful team. From all its news sourceslocal covers a beat or assignment in another city, staff writers, correspondents, press associations another state, or another country. Although (most commercial newspapers subscribe to one titles may vary on different newspapers, here are or more of the major wire services discussed three types of correspondents normally em- laterinthischapter), and frompublicity ployed: sourcesa newspaper today receives many times more copy than it can use each day. From this huge mass of world news the editorial depart- STAFF CORRESPONDENTS are farmed out ment carefully selects the news to be printed. to important news-making cities. A newspaper's Washington Correspondent, for examplc, may cover news of the Federal Government. In the Editor-in-Chief home state capital another staff correspondent may cover news of the state legislature. In New The Editor-in-Chief, or justplain Editor, York another may cover the United Nations. supervises and coordinates the work of the These correspondents cover and write news editorial department and enforces the pub- stories which originate in their territories. They lisher's policies. He usually is responsible for the then dispatch it back to the home newspaper. content of the editorial page. Occasionally, one man will act as both editor and publisher. SPECIAL CORRESPONDENTS are more commonly known as "stringers." They earn a Managing Editor living by working full time on one newspaper, but sell items on the basis of a query to other Assisting the editor-in-chief is the managing publications.Time Magazine,for example, has editor. He sees that all the day's local, national stringers in practically every important city and and international news is gathered, written, and strategic point in the world, accurately presented to the public. His principal assistants are the news, cable, telegraph, and city editors. FOREIGN CORRESPONDENTS are correspondents who belong to a newspaper's foreign news staff. They are highly qualified analysts, News Editor familiar with a country's language,politics, economics, and problems. Only the largest news- The news or makeup editor d. .ermines the papers and wire services can afford them, but position and page in which news, pictures, and theirservicesare invaluable. Without them, other matter will appear in the paper. It is his American readers would beunable tokeep job to make the paper attractive and to see that abreast of important fa - breaking foreign news important news is played up prominently. events, Chapter 11NEWSPAPER AND WIRE SERVICE OPERATIONS

The City Editor While the photographer snapped his shutter, the reporter gathered names and addresses for the The city room is the nerve center of the picture caption, or explanatory material to go newspaper. Its boss is the city editor who has with each photograph. Now these two assign- the responsibility of gathering and editing news ments are usually combined. One newsman, of the city and nearby areas. He plans and commonly referredtoas a photo-journalist, directsthe work of alllocalrewrite men, takes his own photos and writes his own story as newsmen, the pictorial staff, and leg men. well. However, most newspapers must maintain apictorialdepartment totake,aswellas REWRITE MEN are veteran newsmen who process, their photos. write stories from facts phoned in by reporters, LEG MEN cover local events and phone the leg men (reporters who cover stories, but do not information to a rewrite man. The leg man must writethem), andtipsters. They are highly have a good nose for news and the ability to give trained,versatilewriterswith yearsof ex- information over the phone quickly and accu- perience. They are capable of writing copy rately. He seldom writes his own stories. quickly and interestinglyusually under the pressure of a deadline. In addition to writing stories from facts received over the telephone, The Copy Editor they rewrite unsatisfactory stories rejected by the copy desk, interview officecallers, and The copy editor is another man with an rewrite publicity stories and stories from other important job in the editorial department. He is newspapers. in charge of the copy desk, where material intended for publication is made to conform to REPORTERS employed by many metro- the newspaper's stylesheet. He checks this politan dailies are one of three types: material for accuracy, libel, determines space requirements, and then assigns headlines. 1. General Assignment Reporters gather and write most of the local news which appears in the newspaper. Their job is to be on hand in the COPYREADERS are the chief assistants to city room for whatever task may turn up. the Copy Editor. On large newspapers,in- 2. Special Assignment Reporters are experts dividual sections such as news, sports, society, or specialists in certain fields such as labor, and so forth, may have their own copyreaders. politics,aviation,business,farming,art,et On other papers one copy desk will review all cetera. A drama critic, for example, would be a copy. special assignment reporter. News comes into large newspapers from all 3. Beat Reporters cover specific beats or over the world. Itis delivered by hand, by territories on a regular basis. These beats may phone, by mail, by word-of-mouth, by radio, by includeCityHall,thepolicedepartment, teletype, and other means. Although a great deal hospitals, schools, or even military installations. of this copy is prepared and written by the Although many beat reporters know their terri- newspaper's own staff, much more comes from tories well, they are not necessarily experts or the wire services, feature syndicates, local press specialists on any one subject. A beat reporter associations, and part-time stringers. Still more is who covers the police department, for example, channeled into a newspaper's editorial depart- is not necessarily an expert on crime. ment by public relations men and publicists for politicians,manufacturers, organizations, and PHOTO-JOURNALISTS have become an im- anybodyelsewith prepared handouts. This portant asset to the commercial newspaperjust includes the Armed Forces. as they have to the Navy overthe past decade. While much of this material eventually is In former years, newspapers had pictorialstaffs, discarded, it all must be read. News releases teaming reporters and photographerstogether including Navy news releasesare one of the on assignments worthyof pictorial coverage. paper's most reliable, steady, and inexpensive

153 159 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 sources of information. To make sure all this getting news copy, advertising, photos, and copy is processed speedily and accurately, it other illustrative material into print. The edito- passes across a copy desk. rial output of any newspaper is geared to the capacity of the linotypes, presses, and dozens of other pieces of equipment in the production Other Editors department. Deadlines, on large papers, are cut to the minute so that the newspaper may meet Most newspapers located near a large military ccpetition and the demands of distributing installation have a MILITARY EDITOR. He agencies. evaluates, covers, writes, or edits military news. The production department of a newspaper Ifa newspaper you send releasesto has a using hie letterpress method of printing (letter- militaryeditor,send themtohim.Ifthe press printingis discussed in chapter 17) is ,particualr paper you're dealing with doesn't have usually sub-divided as follows: a military editor, give your releases to the city editor. COMPOSING ROOM. News copy is set in Some newspapers have STATE, SUBURBAN, type, usually on linotype machines. and NEIGHBORHOOD EDITORS. The state editor, of course, handles state news. Suburban ENGRAVING ROOM. Photos and other and neighborhood editors are usually found on illustrativematerialarepreparedfor repro- large metropolitan newspapers which publish duction. special suburban and neighborhood editions or sections. MAKEUP ROOM. The engravings and type If a newspaper has a Sunday edition, it may are assembled into page forms and prepared for have a SUNDAY EDITOR. He handles the the press. magazines section or any special sections not normally carriedin the daily section. Other STEREOTYPING (or ELECTROTYPING) editors who arenormally included on the ROOM. A duplicate casting of each page is made editorial staff include the SPORTS, SOCIETY, from the original forms. FINANCIAL, and ENTERTAINMENT editors. Their titles are self-explanatory. PRESS ROOM. Here,the newspaper is printed.

The Morgue BINDING' ROOM. The printed pages are cut, assembled, folded, and prepared for distri- Medium-sized and metropolitan newspapers bution. maintain extensive libraries or "morgues" consisting of clipping files on public figures and Each sub-division is headed by a foreman, local citizens. On smaller papers the morgue may who is assisted by various craftsmen such as consistmerelyofdrawersfullofold linotype operators (compositors), pressmen, en- "cuts"photoengravings of persons whose activ- gravers, and makeup men. ities often appear inpublic print or whose The mechanics of newspaper publication are pictures for one reason or another have appeared technical, involved, and highly worthy of study in the paper. All newspapers keep biographical by anyone connected with the production of a data. newspaper. Editors and staff members of ship or station newspapers must necessarily familiarize themselves with printing methods because, PRODUCTION DEPARTMENT as JO's, they will become intimately concerned with the layout and general appearance of a ThePRODUCTIONorMECHANICAL newspaper and other Navy publications some- DEPARTMENT, under the general supervision time during their career. Chapter 17 covers the of a plant superintendent, is responsible for fundamentals of printing required for the JO. 160154 Chapter 11NEWSPAPER AND WIRE SERVICE OPERATIONS

THE WIRE SERVICES m y be the news center for a state, asIndia- napolis for Indiana. Its purpose is to provide The two major wire services in this country subscribers inits area with an assortment of are Associated Press (AP) and United Press good material based on significant international, International (UPI) as pointed out in chapter 3. national, regional, or state events. Competition between the wire services is as The wire services serve their subscribers with keen as it is between rival dailies. A "scoop" by one or more circuits called WIRES. There are one wire service over the other by as much as 10 wires for important news of nationwide interest, to 15 minutes on a major air crash or important for regional and stateinterest, for financial political story is a world-wide "scoop." Minutes, news, for sports news, and even a race wire and even seconds, make the difference that will which carries detailed results from the nation's enable one paper to meet an edition with an race tracks. The wire service will serve a sub- important story while its competitor misses it. scriber with any one or all of these wires. Their The same intense rivalry is waged among large service includes not only news but features, financial papers where a "scoop" of a few pictures (via radio, wire, and mail), and special minutes in reporting a market quotationis coverage. Few newspapers other than the large considered a major accomplishment. Executives metropolitan dailies can afford all the wires. of the wire services are experts in the field of communicationtelegraphy, radio, and photog- The wire services are alert to individual needs. If theVirginian-Pilot,for example, requests raphyas well as news reporting, They supply all special coverage of a Norfolk Navyman who is these services to newspapers, radio, and tele- mriking news in Florida, the wire service serving vision. the paper will provide coverage. Members or clients of the wire services decide how much and what kind of news material they Subscribers of AP and UPI work on a want to receive and are assessed accordingly. cooperative basis. In addition to receiving news, They may get a brief "pony service" of several they must agree to permit their own news stories thousand words, or they may want the entire to be fed back into the network. This ensures report of several hundred thousand words. Some quick and thorough coverage of practically every may want photo or radio (written in radio style) significant news event which occurs in the service. Assessments may range from $10 to United States. more than $1000 a day. This may sound expensive, but AP and UPI provide services from Picturedistributionbythe wire services correspondents which many newspapers could parallels their handling of news. After a good not otherwise afford. spot news picture is. received, it may 8e sent from coast-to-coast by wire and overseas by radio circuits. FACSIMILE is the term used for OPERATION the method of transmitting pictorial and graphic information by wire or radio and reproducing it Ir. many respects, the operation of the two in its original form at the receiving end. wire services issimilar. The headquarters, or nerve centers, of both are located in NewYork Wire service copy is received in the news- City. Most of the news from outside the nation rooms of newspapers and radio andtelevision is sent there, then relayed by means of leased stations on either a teletype machine or a telegraphywirestobureausinkeycities telety peset ter. throughout the U.S. The bureaus in turn relay Newspapers using the toletypesetter (known the news over smaller regional and state wires to as ITS) receive their copy on two machines. A individual subscribers. MONITOR, similar to a teletype machine, spells A bureau may be the news center for a out the copy sent by the wire service. Unlike region, such as Boston for New England, or it teletype copy, however, it arrives in caps and

155 161 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 lowercase. Another machine called the REPER- LOCAL PRESS ASSOCIATIONS FORATOR produces a perforated tape which resembles a miniature player-piano roll. This In addition to the wire services, newspapers tape contains the same story received on the in large metropolitan cities may get news from a monitor, only in the form of perforations. local press association. These agencies are some- The telegraph or cableeditorreads the times called CITY NEWS BUREAUS. They have monitor copy. If he decides to use the story, he their own news staffs and specialize in complete sends the tape to the composing room, where it local coverage. Although many newspapers have is fed into a linotype machine converted for this enormous local news staffs of their own, they purpose.Thetapeoperatesthelinotype cannot possibly cover the hundreds of stories machine, which sets the copy automatically, in which break hourly in a large city. As a result, cap? and lowercase, with proper punctuation, the newspapers band together and form a local and right and left hand margins. If changes are press association which supplements their own necessary in the story, they are made on the coverage. Reporters for local press associations monitor copy which is sent to the composing are stationed at various strategic centers such as room. Corrections are then made in the type. police stations and other public buildings.

5 11662 CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

The word photography derives from the Greek pay particular attention to the information in words "phos" and "graphos" and means, lit- this chapter and the two that follow. They will erally, writing with light. A more useful defini- provideyou withthebasic knowledge of tion would be the recording of scenes by creat- photography you need for advancement to J02. ing an image of their reflections. To the amateur photographer photography is This particular chapter describes the process as simple as grabbing a box camera and tripping of still photography from composition to film the shutter with the sun behind until a roll of exposure and making the photographic print. film has been exposed. After the film has been exposed, the process becomes even simpler ' BASIC PHOTOGRAPHY the amateur. The exposed film is given to the nearest drug store and one or two days later, Basic photography can be simplified to the prints or slides are ready. following requirements as shown in figure 12-1: As a Navy Jounalist, you are required to know more than how to use a box camera and A light source where the nearest drug store is located. Getting to the ;orner drug store can be quite a problem A subject when your ship is underway. Although Navy JO's are not required to know Photographic film as much about the principles and techniques of photography as a Navy Photographer's Mate, the A camera JO must have a basic knowledge of photography. There will be times when Photographer's Chemicals for processing film Mates are not available and you will have to shoot the picture, process the film, and print A printing device your pictures. According to JO quals, you must knowthe Photographic paper fundamentals of photography; the principles and techniques of black-and-white and color photo Chemicals for processing paper coverage; how to operate Navy still cameras used in news photography and take news and feature The light source can be naturalsuch as the pictures with good composition; and process sunor artificial, such as incandescent or fluo- films, make contact sheets, and pictures for rescent lamps, flash lamps or electronic flash, or release. You must also know how to select lightgeneratedfromburningsubstances pictures for publication on the basis of composi- (flames). The light used in photography does not tion,quality,suitability,andstorytelling havetobevisible.Itcan be infra-red or factors. ultraviolet, but light must exist to be reflected If you can do these things already, you are in from the subject and form an image on photo- good shape for the JO exam. But if you can't, graphic film,

157 163 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

LIGHT SOURCE

MER

00% (00N1/4

SUBJECT

DEVELOPER STOP BATH FIXER WASH CHEMICAL FILM PROCESSING

LIGHT SOURCE

NEGATIVE CARRIER "-. DRYING NE.JATIVE

PHOTOGRAPHIC PAPER TIMER PRINTING DEVICE

TEMPERATURE R*tk °I1144 CONTROL

DEVELOPER STOP BATH FIXER WASH CHEMICAL PAPER PROCESSING

DRYER

185.190 Figure 12-1.The photographic process. Via Chapter 12 -INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

The subject can be anything. If it can be seen, negative holder, and a lens and focusing device it can be photr.c.raphed. As there must be light mounted on a frame allowing it to be raised and to form an image so must there be a subject lowered depending on the size of the projected f-o.a .which to form the image. image desired. The photographic paper is held in as definedhere,isa light sensitive an easel or taped to a board that can be moved ...nulsion of silver halides suspended in gelatin so as to use that portion of the projected image and coated on a transparent and chemically desired. neutral base, usually cellulose or polymer plas- Photographic paper has essentially the same tic. The choice of film typeis by size and emulsion as film. It is chemically processed the sensitivity to fit the camera and nature of light same asfilm,resultingina positive image. used. During the exposure, silver halide crystals Choice of paper types is dependent upon the in the emulsion undergo an ionic change forming type of printing, surface, size, and finish desired. a latent image which can then be reduced to a visible and usable image through a complex chemical process. EXPOSURE CALCULATION The camera is basically a light-tight box with an optical system at one end and an image For a latent image to be formed, the emulsion support at the other. Additions for focusing the of the film must be exposed to light reflected image,viewing,controllingthe amount and from or transmitted by the subject being photo- duration of light entering the box, film changing graphed. For this image to be usable; that is, to or rolling, range and exposure calculators and record tones in correct detail, the quantity of such are valuable accessories but not absolutely light and duration of exposure on the film must essential to the photographic process. A picture be controlled. can be made with a coffee can if it has a pin-hole The term exposure denotes the amount of at one end and a suppo:-.' for film at the other.. light which is permitted to act upon a photo- The processing of film to convert the latent graphic emulsion. A light of high intensity may image into a stable visible image for use in be permitted to act for a short time, or one of printing requires four basic steps: lesserintensity for a greater time; yet both exposures produce the same photographic effect 1. Developing or converting exposed silver on the film. The exposure formula for most halides tometallicsilver; the black or dark practical work is: portions of the visible image. 2. FixingorchangingtheOver halides EXPOSURE = INTENSITY X TIME unaffected by the developing to soluble salts. 3. Washing to remove the soluble salts and INTENSITY in this case refers to the brightness residual chemicals. of the image on the film'and depends on the lens 4. Drying so that the film can be handled. settings in conjunction with the light variables Once these steps have been completed you have reflected from the subject. TIME is the interval a negative ready for printing. during which the shutter is allowed to remain open to permit light to reach the film. Printing the negative or making a positive is done by contact or projection. The contact printer is usually a box with an internal light Correctexposureis dependent upon and source and a glass top that allows light to pass controlled by four factors: through it and the negative to form a latent image on photographic paper held in contact 1. The speed or sensitivity of the film. with the negative. 2. The intensity and nature of the light. The projection printer allows the image on the negative to be projected and the size of the 3. The size of the lens aperture. printvaried.Itconsistsof alightsource, 4. The duration of exposure. 16359 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

FILM SPEED BSIBritish Scientific InstituteBSI speeds are usually interchangeable with ASA. The BSI The film speed, or film sensitivity, measured system is rapidly gaining popularity in Europe. (or indicated) by exposure index, ASA or ASA speed, is stated on the data sheet packed with DEGREE Thereareseveral systems of film. This may be your first experience with a logarithmic film speed progressions stated in film data sheet and it is a very valuable piece of degrees.These are usedin Exposure Value paper that should not be discarded while the Systems which do not equate to an exposure film is being used. In addition to the film speed, calculation. it also gives necessary data for flash photography, film processing, use of filters, et cetera. In the United States the film speed is deter- COLOR SENSITIVITY OF BLACK AND mined by the manufacturer in accordance with WHITE FILM.When the human eye views a standards published 'by the American Standards person or landscape, itregisters two distinct Association, hence the term ASA or ASA speed. sensations. One is differences in brightness, and The sensitivity of film varies with the type of the other is differences in color. A flag isseen as emulsion used. Some emulsions react quickly to red, white, and blue; grass appears green. Colors dim light and short exposure, and the film is appear much brighter in sunlight than in shade. considered FAST. Other emulsions have just the Films for black-and-white photography 'regis- opposite reaction and the film is considered ter the image formed by the lens in terms of SLOW. The sensitivity of film to light is indi- brightness differences only.In the negative, cated by a numerical rating assigned to the film color differences are translated into brightness by the manufacturer. The higher the number, differences. There are several general classifica- the faster the film. A film with a speed rating of tions into which film emulsions can be divided 200, for example, is twice as fast as one with according to the way they interpret colorsthat 100. This means that the film with a speed is according to the way they translate color rating of 200 will require only half as much differences into brightness differences. Two of exposure to producethe same amount of the classifications that will concern you as a density as the film rated at 100, provided all Navy JO are ORTHOCHROMATIC and PAN- other factors remain the same. The ASA rating CHROMATIC. assigned is a numerical value used in conjunction Orthochromatic films give strong contrasts. with exposure guides, exposure meters, and All colors generally become white or black with other devices designed to assist the photographer relatively few grays. For example, suppose you in computing correct exposure. were shooting a picture of a girl wearing a red There are other methods of film speed deter- dress. In the background is a blue sky with white mination. Although the numbering Kltem may clouds. If you used ortho film without filters in be similar to ASA, the method of determination your camera, the girl's dress would turn out may be different and the speeds are frequently black. The clouds would disappear completely, not interchangeable. A few are mentioned for and the sky would turn out white. information only: Orthofilmsarepopularinportraiture, especiallyfor portraits of men. Ortho film DINDeutsche Industrie Normused in strengthens characterlinesinportraits.In most of Europe. photoflash pictures,itaids in securing good rendering of flesh tones. SCHEINENan old system used in Europe Panchromatic films give a more natural range and, to a lesser extent, in the Americas. of tones for the colors for which they substitute in nature, For example, in the same scene JISJapanIndustrialStandardPopular described above, the red dress would appear throughout the Far East. JIS film speeds can dark gray, and the clouds would not disappear. usually be used interchangeably with ASA if no In general, pan film is sensitive to the full range ASA speed is stated. of colors to which the eye is sensitive. 160 166 Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

CONTROLLING LIGHT Without light,the most expensive cameras and the finest films are worthless. Fortunately, HOW LIGHT ENABLES YOU TO SEE. nature provides us with sufficient source of light Light waves reach the pupil of your eye and are duringdaylighthours.At night,or when concentrated by the lens just behind the pupil to pictures must be taken indoors, there are various form an image on the inside wall of your eye. sources of manmade artificial light mentioned This part of the eye is called the retina and earlier that are available to you. The biggest consists of a great number of nerves which react problem in photography, however, ISN'T the only to the waves of the visible spectrum of availability of light. It is controlling the light light. Their reaction is carried to the brain, and that IS available to expose your film properly. you experience the sensation of sight. Simply defined, EXPOSURE isthetotal Your brain will sense an object as bright if amount of light necessary to produce a satis- that object emits or reflects a lot of light. If an factory image on film. The two parts of the object gives of little light, your brain will say it camera that control exposure are the LENS and is dull. Too much light stimulates the retina's the SHUTTER. nerves excessively and causes eye fatigue and headaches, while too little light does not produce enough stimulation. The Lens To overcome these difficulties, your eye is equipped with an iris which opens or closes All lenses have one function: to bend light automatically according to the amount of light rays so they will form a sharp image on film present. In bright sunlight, for example, the when the shutter is open. pupil of your eyeis contracted to a small When light strikes an object, a portion of it is opening; in a poorly lighted room, it is expanded reflected from many points on the subject in the to a large one. Your eye also can be covered or form of light rays. When the reflected rays of closed by your eyelids to shut out all vision and light from the subject strike the camera lens, the much of the light. lens bends these rays, causing them to converge on the rear wall (focal plane) of the camera. HOW LIGHT ENABLES YOU TO PHOTO- Each individual point on the camera wall GRAPH.The camera and the eye function in a corresponds to the original point on the subject strikingly similar manner. In making a picture, from which it was reflected. These points are the light rays coming directly or indirectly from a images of the points from which the rays luminous source are concentrated by the lens originated, and the sum of these points is a onto the rear inside wall of the camera. There, complete image of the subject. they form an image. Lenses vary in size, shape, and quality. A If this wall is covered by a light-sensitive simple, inexpensive lens may be made out of a material, such as photographic film, this image single piece of curved glass. More complex lenses can be converted by development into a per- may be made of many separate pieces or manent record. Too much light would spoil the elements. image on the film. Too little light would fail to Simple lenses are usually used in inexpensive make the sensitized material respond to the box cameras. They are set for reasonably sharp action of the light. focus from about six feet away to infinity. The The basic difference between seeing an object focus is pre-set and cannot be changed. The and photographing it is that sight is temporary major fault of these lenses is that the light rays and a photograph is permanent. The eye, of become scattered atthe edges of the film, course, automatically focuses on objects and causing the film to become slightly bluffed. The continuously makes adjustments for differences blur is usually not noticeable, however, until the in light and movement. The camera, unfortu- picture is enlarged. nately, is not quite so versatile. You must focus More complex, precision-made lenses are used for it and make the necessary adjustments for on more expensive cameras. Many of these light and movement. cameras are equipped with ANASTIGMATIC 161 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

LENSES. The term refers to lenses which focus Turning the control ring in the direction that light rays with equal sharpness on all parts of the reduces thesizeof the apertureis termed film. The film is not blurred around the edges, as STOPPING DOWN the lens. Moving the control in the case when simple lenses are used. ring so thatit enlarges the aperture sizeis termed OPENING UP the lens. Figure 12-2 illustrates how different size openings are pos- THE DIAPHRAGM.Inside most good lenses sible with the iris diaphragm. When the dia- isa mechanical deviceforcontrollingthe phragm is set at the largest aperture, the lens is amount of light which passes through the lens. said to be WIDE OPEN. This device is called the IRIS DIAPHF IGM. It The largest opening or stop at which a lens is also referred to as the T .7,NS APERTURE, can be used is referred to as the SPEED OF THE LENS OPENING, DIAPHRAGM OPENINGS, LENS. The speed of a lens is indicated on the AND f/STOPS (most frequently used). lens mount by a number which is .preceded by In many respects, the iris diaphragm is like the letter "f". The speed of a lens depends theirisoftheeye andservesthe same primarily upon the area of the circle of light it functionto admit an exact amount of light into transmits, and the distance the light has to the camera each moment the shutter is open. travel. Most diaphragms have a series of thin metal leaves (figure 12-2) for the purpose of admitting The maximum amount of light transmitted by an exact amount of light. These leaves are the lens is governed by the largest stop, and the arranged and shaped to provide an approxi- distance light has to travel is indicated by the mately circular opening which can be changed in FOCAL LENGTH of the lens. The term FOCAL self-defining. simply size when desired. LENGTH isalmost It One end of each overlapping leaf in the means the distance from the lens to the plane diaphragm's mechanism is located on a mount where approaching rays of light are brought to a which is secured to the inside of the lens. The point by the lens, so that a sharp image is other end is attached to a movable circular ring formed. The focal length of each lens is a built outside the lens. When the ring is turned, the in factor which cannot be changed by the center of each leaf moves toward or away from camera's controls. thecenter.Turningtheringcontracts or The standard unit of measurement used by expands the circular opening and regulates the manufacturers of lensesis the f/number, or size of the space between the leaves, f/value. Although thef system may appear confusing at times, it is used because it is a part of optical formulas used in advanced photography. The system for diaphragm marking is called f/stops and is based entirely upon the effective diameter and the focal length of thelens. F/stops in the English system (now almost international) are f/1.0, f/1.4, f/2.0, f/2.8, f/4.0, f/5.6, f/8, f/1 1, f/16, f/22, f/32, f/45, f/64, f/90, et cetera. There are also intermediate stops, such as 3.5, 4.5, and 6.3 which, if shown on an exposure meter, can be set by aligning the aperture indicator of the camera between the marked f/stops. The largest opening possible with a lens is 40.163 designated by the lowest f/number. The smallest Figure 122.The iris diaphragm of a camera functions opening possible is designated by its highest in the same manner as the iris of the eye in tinumber. An important thing to remember is controlling the admittance of light that f/numbers are fractions, The larger the 162 Chapter 12 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY number, the smaller will be the fraction of light DEPTH OF FIELD.The area of acceptably that will reach the film. sharpfocus before and behind the subject Another thing to keep in mind is that moving focused on is referred to as depth of field. (See thediaphragmcontrollever onefullstop figure 12-4.) Factors affecting depth of field are: doubles or cuts the exposure in half, depending on which way it is moved. For example, opening The Focal Length of the Lens.The shorter the diaphragm from f/8 to f/S.6 doubles the the focal length of the lens being used the exposure. greater the depth of field or vice versa. Figure 12-3 is based on a correct exposure of one second at f/8 and shows the relation existing The Lens Aperture.As thelens aperture between other f/values, aperture sizes, and the increases (in size), the depth of field decreases. equivalent exposure required to admit the same amount of light. The Distance Focused On.As the distance From this, you might expect that a picutre focusedonincreases,thedepthoffield taken at f/8 at one second would be identical increases. with the same picture taken at f/5.6 at one-half second. The exposure would be the same, but Maximum depth of field is gained by using the depth of field would be different. the smallest practical lens aperture and results in sharpfocus from foreground through background.If we focus on 25-feet and use an aperture of f/32, a depth of field from 9 feet to infinity is achieved. (For general photographic use, the term infinity means any distance greater than 100-feet.) Shallow depth of field is gained by using a large lens aperture and results in the object focused on being in sharp focus while the foreground and background are out of focus. Again, if we focus on an object at 25-feet and use f/4.5 as our lens aperture, the scene will be out of focus at points nearer than 21 feet and farther than 30 feet. There is considerable calculation involved in computing the near and far limits of the depth of field.Many manufacturers supply tables which give depth of field data for various distance settings and f/numbers. Most still cameras have, for your convenience, a depth of field scale incorporated with a footage scale marked on the camera, such as the one shown in figure 12-5. 1/4 SECOND 1/2 SEC, 1 SEC. f /16 With this scale, the photographer needs only f/22 f/32 to focus the camera and then read from the scale the nearest and farthest distances which will be in focus at any given f/stop. In figure 12-5, the camera is focused on 10 feet, If f/8 aperture is being used, everthing from 8 feet to nearly 15 DIAMETER'3' 21/50" 11/2" 12/25" 3/4" A feet will be in focus. If f/32 is being used, -so everything from a little under 5 feet to infinity 165.91 will be in focus. Once the distance focused upon Figure 124.Comparison between aperture, Naive, has been brought into position oppositehe and relative exposure. index mark on the scale, you can read off the 163 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

SHARP UNACCEPTABLE FOCUS HERE UNACCEPTABLE

185.210 Figure 12-4,Depth of field is the Btu of acceptably sharp focus before and behind the subject focused on. depth of field for the various openings. Con- trolled depth of field will help to emphasize or subdue foreground and background. With proper calculations, it is possible to completely blur out an unwanted background. TAT 8.4 FOCUSING THE LENS.Adjusting or changing the distance between the lens and the focal plane (where the film rests in the camera) to 32 sw produce a clear image is termed focusing. To aid

DEPTH in focusing, most cameras have either a FOCUS- <0.0 ING SCREEN which is a piece of ground glass which reflects the scene, a rangefinder, or a vernier scale. Most press and view cameras have all of the above mentioned focusing features. The ground glass is the most accurate and allows 185.211 previewing the depth cA: field by viewing through Figure 12.5.A typical depth of field scale. a pre-selected lens aperture. The rangefinder 164 Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 44, device can be used to focus on a specific point settings on the shutter do not give intermediate or for selecting a near or far pointof desired speeds. sharpness. A vernier scale is used to set a point of focus which is already determined or when estimating the distance from camera to subject. DETERMINING SHUTTER SPEED Incorrect focus will ruin a picture, therefore, the ability to focus correctly is very important. The correctsequencein determining the When focusing on several objects at different settings of the diaphragm and shutter for making distances, it is necessary to compromise. Seldom an exposure is to first composethe picture and will it be possible to focus sharply on each of focus on the subject, then down the diaphragm several objects at different distances. until the desired depth of field is obtained. If you focus exactly on the near object, the Select the shutter speed which combines with distant object may no longer be in sharp focus. this f/stop to produce a correct exposure.When Your best bet will be to reduce the size of your the subject isin motion, it is necessary to lens aperture to increase the depth of field and determine if the selected shutter speed is fast focus just short of midway between your near enough to prevent blurring the image. In the and far object. event it is too slow, the shutter must be resetto a speed which stopsmotion, and the diaphragm opened accordingly. This compromise sacrifices The Shutter some of the depth offield, but for some types of subjects this procedure is the onlymethod In combination with the diaphragm, the that produces a usable picture. If thesituation shutter is the other device employed to control does not permit sacrificing some depthof field, exposure. The SHUTTER SPEEDcontrols the other alternatives possible are: Use a filmwith a duration of time that light is allowed to strike higher speed rating, set up the camera at a the film. greater distance from the subject, use ashorter The two types of shutters commonly used on focal length lens, or select a different camera still cameras are the focal plane (usually placed angle so that the relative motion of the subject behind the lens) and the between-the-lens types. to the camera is decreased. Shutter speeds are usually marked on cameras Generally, the shutter speed is determined by as the reciprocal of thefraction of a second that the movement of the subject. If thesubject the shutter is open (1 is 1/1 or 1 second, 500is moves slowly, the shutterspeed may be slow; if 1/500 or 1/500th of a second). subject movement is fast, the shutter speed must The range of shutter speeds available on the be fast. The movement of the camera mustalso between-the-lens shutter are usually 3, 2, 4, 8, be considered and for this reason Itis not 15, 30, 60, 125, 250, 500. In addition to a given recommended to use a shutter speed slower than range of speeds, most shutters canbe opened for 1/60th without a tripod or similar brace. As the an indefinite period oftime. At the setting subject distance to the camera decreases,higher marked "T" (time), the shutter opens at the first shutter speeds must be used. pressure on the release and stays openuntil the Remember to consider these three things release is pressed again. At the setting marked when determining shutter speed to stopmotion: "B" (bulb), pressure on the release opens the shutter, but itcloses again as soon as the The speed of the subject pressureisreleased. On the more expensive shutters a higher speed of 1/1000 second is The direction of the movement available. The camera to subject distance

NOTE: Shutter speeds are available' only as Figure 12.6 gives a list of the slowest shutter marked. Unlike the diaphragm which canbe set speeds capable of stopping the action ofmoving betweenmarkedf/numbers,intermediate objects 25 feet from your camera. 171165 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

OSff r 2 I* 4 rg.

SUBJECT DIRECTION 14

Pedestrian (4 MPH) 1/60 1/125 1/125

Tractor (8 MPH) 1/125 1/250 1/250

SY Runner (12 MPH) 1/125 1/250 1/500

Sports, general (15 MPH) 1/250 1/500 1/1000

Horse, galloping (20 MPH) 1/250 1/500 't /1000

Automobile (35 MPH) 1/250 1/500 1/1000 .AFA 1.41ipt17; Ei t,j6k.Vtt._:,11AWALC,. i,m4rt4t:41q1kWr;147N

165.95 Figure 12-6.Table of slowest shutter speeds necessary to stop action.

DETERMINING LIGHT INTENSITY Estimating or guessing the exposure on the basis of past experience under similar condi- Many photographers underexpose or over- tions. expose their negatives and never realize how much better the negative (and then the picture) Using exposure tables, guides, or calcula- might have been with correct exposure. With tors supplied by film and camera manufacturers; underexposure, the film has not received enough and light to produce a density sufficient to record detail and show separation of the various tones Measuring the intensity of light with a light in the darker areas of the subject. The middle exposure meter. tones and highlights may appear quite normal. Overexposure, on the other hand, will produce such excessive density in the highlight area of The Exposure Meter the negative thatlittle or no separationis obtainedin the various brightnesses of the The exposure meter is the most accurate highlights, causing theprint to be flat and method, Its useisalways desired not only chalky white in this area. In this case, however, because of its accuracy but because it includes a the shadows and middle tones may be correctly mechanical computer for determining exposure reproduced, control settings on the camera. There are several The light used in photography can be existing types of exposure meters, such as the one shown or available light such as daylight, incandescent infigure12-7, which use photo-resistive or and fluorescent lamps, or light made especially photo-generative cells and measure incident or for photographic exposure such as flash bulbs or reflected light. electronic strob., lights. The intensity of either To the body of theexposure meteris type must be known to calculate an exposure. attached a circular calculator which enables The intensity of existing light can be determined quick coversion of light readings into exposure by various means. They include: settings of shutter speed and f/stop combina- BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

indicated for the scene being photographed with f/16 being the basic exposure iii sunlight.

FLASH GUIDE NUMBERS.The light intensity of flash lair ps is not stated on the film data sheet directly because it would involve a long mathematical computation for use: However, thefilmmanufacturer does most of the computation and publishes a flash guide number instead. (NOTE: Some flash units have attached calculators which give correct exposui., settings when the proper film speed and flash-to-subject distance are set.) The guide number is used as follows:

a. Select flash guide number from film data sheet for shutter speed to be used. Example: Tri-X Film, 1/125 second, #5. flashlamp, Guide Number is 340. 165.212 b. Divide Guide Number by lamp. to subject Figure 12.7.An exposure meter is the most accurate distance to find correct lens aperture to use. means of determining exposure. Example: If lamp to subject distance is 15 feet; 340 divided by 15 is approximately 23. Use tions. The calculators on different meters are f/22, the nearest aperture to 23. quite similar in that they consist of one or more c. Divide selected aperture into guidenumber disks which can be rotated for setting the speed to find lamp to subject distance. Example: In of the film being used, and the amount of light sunlight, the exposure is 1/250 second at f/32. being read. When these settings are properly The guide number for a #5 lamp at a shutter made, numerous combinations of shutter speeds speed of 1/250 is 250. It is desired to use flash and f/stops are shown on the calculator. Any to lighten the shadows on the subject. The one of these combinations will result in a correct aperture, 32, divided into the guide number, exposure, 250, is approximately 8, therefore the lamp to In figure 12-7, the film ASA is 32 and the subjec4 distance should be 8 feet. light reading 50. When the index on the calcu- d. If the guide number is too large to give an lator is aligned with the light reading of 50, the aperture or distance compatible with the lens result is correct exposure combinations from apertures or space available, use a higher shutter f 1.5 (black scale) at 1/800 (white scale), to f 32 speed. If too small, use a slower shutter speed. at 1/2. In either case, a new guide number will be indicated. Other Exposure Guides The guide number published on the film data When an exposure meter is not available, the sheet is based on: exposure guide liven on the film data sheet or the universal daylight exposure table shown in a. A lamp used with a polished reflector with figure 12-8 can be Wised. no screens, shields, or filters. To use the universal daylight exposure table, b. The lamp is aimed directly at the subject, simply set your shutter speed to the closest c, The subject is average inreflectance. number corresponding to the ASA speed of the d, The picture is taken in an average sized film being used, and then set the f/stop as room with light colored walls and ceiling.

167 AVAILABLE BESTCOPY JOURNALIST 3 & 2

" 'IrA,S;W,Wriet,,,M91:171WINTe4tWATAT'Wed:rinIV.;:+ttifIlaqi.1:0-PAZROAWay..7:e.siv `.:YArS''A ;! CLOUDY DULL OR ILLUMINATION BRIGHT SUN HAZY SUN CLOUDY BRIGHT . OPEN SHADE SCENIC REFLECTANCE STRONG SHADOWS SOFT SHADOWS WEAK SHADOWS NO SHADOWS 7 Li" tf41, '' BRILLIANT SNOW BEACH f/32 f/22 f/16 f/11 a. SR 80% MARINE

BRIGHT LIGHT to

CLOTHING f/22 f/16 f/11 f/8 ... SR . 40% OR SUBJECT

, AVERAGE t f/16 f/11 f/8 f/5.6

,..! SR 20% rt,,

4 DARK DARK M CLOTHING f/11 f/8 f/5.6 f/4.0 `.c SR --,. 10% OR SUBJECT

1.Set shutter speed to closest number to ASA Film Speed. A2.Set lens aperture to indicated f/stop above. t; 3.Variations: a.For front lighting, use indicated f/stop. .. ..? :A b.For side lighting, use one stop more than indicated. c.For backlighting, use two stops more than indicated. ( d. When sun is lower than 20°, use one additional stop. e.For close-ups (4 feet or less), use one additional :tap. ji f.For semi-distant sceneswithittle shadow detail and for all distance seen.,., use one stop less. V

-V '' 0.. '''.....-'t: '.. 'etc... .

185.94 Figure 12.8.The unisonsl daylight exposure table.

As any of the above changes, so must the (3)no reflector used .33 guide number. Following is a list of possible changes with factors. Multiply the published guide number by the factor shown to get an b. Flash bounced off wall or ceiling. Measure adjusted guide number for use in making the total distance light must tratel and divide into picture. If more than one change is required, guide number adjusted as follows: multiply by each factor in sequence. (1)Light colored wall or ceiling .75 (2)Dark colored wall or ceiling .33 a. Reflector: (1)single thickness of white hand- c. Subjectreflectance,neutralgreyasa kerchief over reflector .75 normal: (2)double thickness of white (1)Lighter than average subject 1.25 handkerchief over reflector .50 (2)Darker than average subject .75 174 168 Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY d. Space: Flash Precautions (1)In a confined area (a)with light colored One of the most embarrassing situations you (b)with dark colored sur- can experience is to go out on an important rounding surfaces 1.50 flash assignment and fail to get pictures. 1 he (2)Ina large room failure may be due to faulty or inoperative (a)with light colored walls equipment or just plain carelessness on your and ceiling .75 part. Flash equipment is quite dependable and (b)with dark colored walls seldom gives trouble if the following precautions and ceiling .50 are observed: (3)In open space (outuoors, gymnasium, theater, etc) .33 Make certain that all electrical contacts are clean and that they make a good tight connection. Dirty or loose fitting connections increase Electronic Flash resistance to the flow of electricity and may cause the lamp not tofireor fire out of In recent years the popularity of the elec- synchronization. tronic flash has grown while the size and weight of its power source has decreased making the Test the batteriesfor amperage,install unit more practicalforuse with press and fresh batteries when there is any doubt of their miniature cameras. Most electronic flash units strength. will recycle in 5 to 10 seconds and eliminate the need to change flash bulbs after each exposure. Be certain you have all of your equipment. The electronic flash unit produces a flash of A good way to make certain of this is to install excellent spectral quality characterized by soft- the equipment on the camera and test it for nessoflightandshort duration.Itisan satisfactory operation. It is most embarrassing to excellent source of artificial light for exposing arrive at the scene and start to assemble the both black-and-white and daylight color films. equipment, then discover that the shutter con- The principle of operation of all electronic flash necting cord has been left behind. units is the same. Electric energy is built up within a capacitor (condenser) and suddenly dischargedthroughagas-filledglasstube, Leave flashlamps in the protective paper thereby creating the flash. carton until ready to use. They are much less By measuring the amount of light (in units of likely to be damaged in handling or accidentally effectivecandlepower seconds) that actually fired by radiant energy from radar. When ready reaches the subject, a figure can be obtained to insert a lamp in the socket, be sure that the that can be converted directly into flash guide base contact of the lamp is clean by scratching it numbers.Manufacturersofelectronicflash on a rough surface. Do not wet the base of the equipment make such measurements and pro- lamp since this causes corrosion of the contacts yide exposure guide numbers for use with each in the lamp socket. different model flash unit that they produce. When using a conventional flashbulb there is a When makingflash photographs under delay of approximately 20 milliseconds before extremely cold conditions, keep the lamps warm the light peak is attained. However, the time until ready for use. A cold lamp is likely to from triggering of the electronic flash tube to shatter when fired. Use a clear glass or plastic the attainment of the light peak is very short., shield over the reflector to protect against flying usuallyamatterofseveralmicroseconds. glass. Keep the battery case warm if possible. Therefore, when using electronicflash with Batteries may lose up to 60 percent of their cameras whose shutters are fully synchronized, efficiency when exposed to very low tempera- the X settings must be used. tures.

169 175 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Just prior to making the exposure, double check the shutter speed and f/stop settings and RED ensure that the synchronizer is properly set for (reddishorange) the type of lamp and method of synchronization. Since there may be several types of shutters on the various cameras in the laboratory MAGENTA YELLOW (red finger! (lemon yellow) and some of them equipped with a solenoid for with violet tripping, it is possible to trip the shutter with no delay for the lamp to reach its peak, or a double delay may be set up so that the flash expires before the shutter is opened. BLUE GREEN (blue tinged with violet) (leaf green)

PHOTOGRAPHIC FILTERS CYAN (bluish aqua, shyblue) Another consideration in exposure calculation is the possible use of photographic filters. 57.446 A filteris a colored glass or gelatin disk, Figure 12-9.This diagram shows the primary and designed for mounting in front of the lens, secondary (s) colors found in white light through which some colors are unable to pass. Complementarycolorsarelocated on To use photographic filters properly you must opposite sides of the diagram. The diagram understand the nature of transmitted light. is an aid in determining the effe,:ts of White light is composed of three primary variouscolored filters in black and white colors:red, green and blue; a filter of a primary photography. color will transmit its own color and absorb the other two. For example, a red filter looks red because it transmits red and absorbs green and to the visual effects of colors in the -ziginal blue. scene. An example of this is the use of a yellow Secondary colors are mixtures of primaries. (K-2, Wratten #8) filter in daylight or a light Yellow for example, is a combination of red and green (X-1, Wratten #11) in incandescent light green. Because a filter passes its own color and when using a Panchromatic Type B film (Kodal: absorbs others, a yellow filter passes red and TRI-X Pan, Plus-X Pan, etc). Notice the term green and absorbs blue. incandescent light is used rather than artificial. Inselectingafilterinblack and white The reason for this is that fluorescent lighting is photography, the diagram in figure 12-9 can be similar to daylight and is corrected by use of the used to determine the effect of the filter on the K-2 filter. grey scale of the negative and the final print. On the final print, the result will be that a filter will The second use for filters is to provide lighten its own color and the colors adjacent to scenic contrast such as darkening the sky so that it and darken its complement and the colors clouds "stand out." Here, an orange filter (G, adjacent to its complement. For exmaple a green Wratten #15) or light red (A, Wratten #25) can filter will lighten green (its own color), and cyan be used. and yellow (adjacent colors).It will darken magenta (its complement) and blue and red A third use of filters is to lighten or darken (adjacent colors of the complement). a color to make it "disappear" or stand out in A filter is used in black and white photog- sharp contrast. An example of this could be raphy for several reasons: photographing an old document that is written in blue ink and has yellowed with age. Here, a deep yellow or orange filter would darken the A filter can be used to make the tones of blue writing and, at the same time, lighten and grey in the final product conform more closely possibly remove entirely the yellow stain.

170 176 Chapter I2INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

Filter Factor standardized procedureisset up and closely followed. Whenever a filter is used, it absorbs a part of At the present, Navy photo lab darkrooms, the light passing through it requiring a change in both afloat and shore, are painted a light green exposure. The amount of change depends on the that is easy on the eyes and enables work to be sensitivity of the film to the colors absorbed by viewed much more easily under safelights than the filter as well as the quantity of that color in when they are given a darker coating. The upper the type of light used. The effects of the filter in parts of the bulkheads and the overhead may be terms of exposure correction are given on the painted white, buff, or a light green which helps film data sheet as a filter factor. securebetter indirectsafelightillumination. Usually, two filter factors are given; one for When using white lights (ordinary illumination) use with daylight and one for use with tungsten in the darkroom, there should be as much light or incandescent light. The filter factor represents as is conveniently possible to have in the space. the mathematical amount by which the expos- Safe lightsareessentiallyenclosedlight ure must be increased. sources equipped with filters. A safelight's func- Thefilter factor may be appliedtothe tion is to transmit the maximum amount of light exposure by opening the diapiiiagm one f/stop which may properly be used in a darkroom for each time the filter factor is doubled. Thus, a visibility without damage to the sensitized mate- factor of 2 requires that the diaphragm be rial.Sincethecolorsensitivity varies with opened one f/stop larger than is needed for different emulsions, the color transmission of correct exposure without a filter; a factor of 4 thelight must vary accordingly to be safe. calls for 2 f/stops, a factor of 8 for 3 f/stops, Safelight recommendationsfornegative and etc. positive materials can be found in the instruc- An easy formula for determining exposure tion sheets accompanying the material, or in the correction when using a filter is to divide the PhotoLab-Index. film speed by the filter factor and using the Darkrooms are generally provided with power result as a corrected film speed on your ex- blowers installed in the bulkheads or overhead posure meter. As an example, using Kodak to provide adequate fresh air. TRI-X Pan film (ASA 400) and an X-1 filter It is difficult to maintain a darkroom at the (filter factor 4), divide 4 into 400 and use the optimum working temperature without special result, 100, as the film speed on the exposure equipment. The temperature of developers for meter. When using this method, make sure you prints, for example, should not vary much from return the meter dial to the correct film speed 70°F for best results. after using the filter. The sinks in modern laboratories are centrally A list of filters commonly used in Black and located to save unnecessary steps and time. The./ White photography are listed in figure 12 -10, are large enough to accommodate the largest trays normally used in the darkrooms, and their DARKROOM TECHNIQUES central location makes them easily accessible from almost any part of the working area. Tray The darkroom is the photographer's labora- racks are placed over the sinks so any liquid that tory and as such deserves some consideration as may splash or spill out runs into the sink and is to size, location, arrangement, lighting, venti- disposed of through the drain. lation, color of walls and overhead, temperature Hot and cold running water are absolute and humidity, sinks, and water supply. essentials in all darkrooms, and better equipped The location of darkroonis depends on the sinks have convenient outlets at several different available space and the type and amount of locations. work to be accomplished. However, it is obvious that even a small room well arranged is an aid to Some items which should be in all darkrooms production, whereas a rambling place that is too are: large is time consuming. Furthermore, there is less waste and the work is less tiring when a Safelights 171 177 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

.41,toprt.7mosisvatvonummluvammamokip% PHOTOGRAPHIC FILTERS

LETTER WRATT EN FILTER FACTOR PAN B COLOR DESIGNATION NUMBER DAYLIGHT TUNGSTEN

K-1 6 Yellow 1.5 1.5

K-2 8 Yellow 2.0 1.5

X-1 11 Green 4.0 6.0

X-2 13 Green 6.0 8.0

tC G 15 Orange 3.0 2.0

A 25 Lt Red 8.0 5.0

F 29 Dk Red 16.0 10.0

C-5 47 Dk Blue 6.0 10.00

B Dk Green 8.0 8.0

rkr 4.4!. .4.1\

185.97 Figure 12.10.Filters commonly used in black and white photography. .

Sets of trays for solutions the responsibility of the Navy's professionals the Photographer's Mates. Only on very rare Developing tanks occasions will the JO have this responsibility. Photo chemistry (photography is essentially a Contact and projection printers chemical process) is a very complex and complicated subject, a subject which would take Graduatesformeasuringandmixing several pages to cover. Therefore, this discussion solutions on darkroom techniques will be limited to your minimum requirements as a JO: to walk into a A thermometer darkroom (which has been previously set up for photo production), process your exposed film, Print tongs and make a good positiveprint from the negative. Instructions for time of development, Timer or clock with sweep-second hand solution temperatures and other factors usually Print dryer come with the film. If you should find yourself in a situation where you are required to mix Necessary chemicals for making processing your own chemicals, refer to the chapter in solutions Photographer's Mate 3&2, NAVPERS 10355-A, which covers chemical mixing, or the instruction The administration, organization, and mainte- sheet packaged with the chemical you wish to nance of photo labs and associated equipment is mix, Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

PROCESSING EXPOSED FILM unless it is alkaline and although the addition of sodium sulfite, which is slightly alkaline, does After a piece of photographic film is exposed, make a "complete" developer such as Kodak itis necessary to DEVELOP the latent image, D-23, it will be very slow working. STOP the developing action at .a desired point, In most recent formulas, an ACCELERATOR FIX the visible image and make it permanent, is added to speed the process of silver reduction. and eliminate the chemicals used. The accelerator offers the most variety in the It is important to remember the names and various formulas used,sincethe degree of functions of thesolutionsused.Itis not acceleration is dependent upon the degree of necessary to remember the names of the indi- alkalinity. vidual chemicals used; they are listed below Common accelerators, in ascending order of merely to define the nature and complexity of alkalinity are:: sodium tetraborate (borax) used the solutions. In all cases, the solution vehicle is in fine grain developers (Kodak D-76); sodium water. metaborate used in many general purpose film developers (Kodak DK-20, DK-50, DK-60a); sodium carbonate, used in "universal" film and DEVELOPERS paper developers (Kodak D-72); trkodium phos- phate and sodium hydroxide usedin very The DEVELOPER, isi eele 1 u whkb ,vistirous fotmulas. t" reduces the exposed silver halides in the emul- The RESTRAINER restrains the action of the siontometallicsilver.Inother words,it accelerated developer so that only the exposed develops a visible image. silver salts are developed. Potassium bromide is The primaryingredient of the developer used almost exclusively. solutionisthe DEVELOPING AGENT(S), usually metol and hydroquinone. Metol (mono- methyl-para-animophenol sulfate) is a soft working developing agent and can be used alone in STOP BATHS slow, soft developers (Kodak D-23). Usually, however,itis combined with hydroquinone The STOP BATH serves two important func- (para-dihydroxybenzene),a more vigorous tions. First, it "stops" the action of the devel- developing agent. In theory, metol is used to oper and second,itneutralizes the alkaline build density proportionately; hydroquinone to developer and prevents contamination and weak- build density super-proportionately. Other devel- ening of the fixer solution. The stop bath is the oping agents, such as glycin, amidol, pyro, and leastexpensiveof theprocessing solutions paraphenylenediarnineareusedinspecial usually being a weak (1-1/2% to 3%) solution of purpose developers. acetic acid. If only a developing agent was mixed with In many laboratories, the stop bath is formu- wateritwould, in theory, develop film. In latedto perform an additional function of practice, howLier, it would probably deteriorate hardening the emulsion of film prior to fixing. beforefulldevelopment couldtakeplace Thisisdone by adding such chemicals as because a developing agent alone would take a chromium potassium sulfate or sodium sulfate long time to do its job and, if the filmwas or using sodium bisulfite which is both an acid expos:d to it for such a length of time, part of and a hardening agent. theunexposedsilversaltswouldstartto develop. For these reasons, other chemicals must be added to the developer solution. FIXERS Perhaps the most important of these is the PRESERVATIVE, usually sodium sulfite. As its The function of the FIXER is to convert the =name implies, this che- 'cal prevents oxidation insoluble undeveloped saver halides into soluble of the developing agents, thereby "preserving" salts which can be 'removed from the emulsion. them, The developer solution does not work Improper fixing can cause stains.

173 179 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

The fixer universally used in photography is wetting agents for negatives are used to reduce sodium thiosulfate, commonly termed HYPO, the surface tension of the water on them, which is taken from its other chemical name, condition the emulsion against brittleness, and hyposulfite, In rapid fixing baths, ammonium speed drying. Photo-Flo is commonly used for thiosulfate or a combination of sodium thio- negatives and Flex-O-Gloss for prints. The main sulfate and an ammonia saltare used. The ingredient of both these solutions is glycerine. thiosulfate alone will "fix" an emulsion. How- ever, other chemicals are usually added. Sodium sulfite is added as both a preservative MISCELLANEOUS CHEMICALS and to create a peculiar cycle which allows it to be converted to sodium thiosulfate as the initial REDUCERS are used to lessen the density of thiosulfate is converted to a soluble silver salt, a processed negative bychanging the metallic thereby greatly extending the life of the fixer silver into a soluble salt that can be removed solution. Sodium sulfite also prevents precipi- from the emulsion. Different types of reducers tation of free sulfur from the silver/thiosulfate are used tc lessen, maintain, orincrease contrast reactionwhich would causestains on the during the density reduction. The main chem- emulsion. icals used in reducers are potassium perman- The above action takes Owe .only In an acid ganate, potassium ferricyanide, and potassium solution,therefore,acetic acid is added to persulfate. maintain the fixer solution's acidity. INTENSIFIERS are used to increase density To harden the emulsion and prevent damage in a processed negative bydepositing a secondin washing and later handling, HARDENERS are ary element on the silver image,increase the added, usually potassium aluminum sulfate. silver content of the image, or change the image Boric acid is often added to help maintain the into a multiple salt that can be redeveloped. The acidity and also aid in, hardening. main chemicals used in intensifiers are silver nitrate, potassium di-chromate, and mercuric chloride, TONERS are used to change the color of the CLEARING BATH image on prints by replacing the silver or The HYPO CLEARING BATHneutralizes the changing it to a stable salt. This is accomplished fixer residues and improves imagekeeping quali- by direct action or by bleaching and redevelop. ties as well as reducing washingtime. The main ing. The chemicals used vary with the colors ingredients of the hypo eliminator arehydrogen desired; the most popular being those that yield peroxide and ammonia. a sepia tone. The mainchemicals in sepia toners are selenium, gold, oruranium salts to replace thesilver image, or sulfur compounds that WATER WASH modify it. DYES are used to changethe color of the The WASH is accomplished by using plain gelatin emulsion. Theyare usually used in running water for 10 to 20 minutes if a hypo combination with toners. Any stable (not light- eliminator has been used and 30 minutes to 2 sensitive) dye can be used. hours if not. The length of time that washing is necessaryisdetermined by the nature and thickness of the base of the photographic COMMON PREPARATIONS FOR PROCES- emulsion. Improper or insufficient wash can SING cause stains in the emulsion. Some phases in the preparation for processing film are very similar, and many of them are PHOTOFINISHING CHEMICALS common topracticallyallfilmprocessing methods. To avoid unnecessary repetition, these Print Flattening and Glossing solutions and common steps are as follows: Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

Always check the level of processing solu- there are corresponding differences in details of tions, whether in trays or tanks, toassure that loading, manipulation, agitation, etc. The Nikor the film being processed will be completely tank and reel is an excellent piece of equipment. covered. Use an empty reel to check the solution It is constructed of stainless steel, is unbreakable, level in tanks. If the tray method of processing is and easily cleaned. The basic unit is composed used, or'y 4 visual check is possible. A sufficient of a spiraled and grooved reel to hold the film depth of .olution to cover the film adequately is and a tank with a light-tight cover, Each reel is mandatory. constructed for a specific size rollfilm suchas 35mm, 120, and 127. The tank cover hasa Check the temperature of all solutions. light-trapped pouring hole with a leakproofcap Heat or cool as necessary to bring the solutions to allow solutions to be poured in and out of the to the recommended temperature, and stir them tank during processing. Larger Nikor tanksare thoroughly, made which hold a number of reels stacked vertically, but thesetanks do not have the Check the operation of the timer. Be sure light-trap opening. that it runs properly and that it is fully wound. The proper loading of the film reel is one of Set it for the developing time required for the the most important steps of developing rollfilm type of film and developer being used. by the tank method. Make sure the reel is clean and dry before loading. Your hands must be Check the safelight for correct distance, clean, and if possible, wear white cotton editing size of the light bulb used, and the screen for the gloves. After removing the paper backing, attach type of film to be processed. the film to the core of the reel an ' hold the film as shown in figure 12-11A so that itis bent Check the location of trays, tanks, lids, the concave to clear the edges of the spiral grooves. timer, safelight switch, towel, and other equip- Turn the reel slowly and allow the film to fill ment needed so they may be readily located in the grooves. Handle the film by the edges only the dark. and load it with the emulsion facing the center of the reel. The tension on the film should be Turn offalllights including safelights. firm enough to prevent the film from skipping Allow a few minutes for eye accommodation grooves, but not firm enough to cause it to and check the darkroom for light leaks. If there overlap or fall into the same grooves twice. are leaks, correct them. If it is not possible to Before attempting to use the Nikor reel -to correcttheleaks, then thefilm should be develop film you should practice loading by shielded as much as possible from any direct using a roll of practice film in normal light and rays of white light. then repeating the procedure in total darkness until becoming proficient. Withthe whitelightsstilloff inthe Although some tanks have provisions for darkroom, turn on the safelight and check it for pouring the developer in after the film is inside white-light leaks. Any leaks should be subdued and the cover attached, it is best to have the as much as possible. Masking tape can be used tank already filled with developer. Place the for this purpose. loaded reel in the tank and briskly si" itate it for a few moments (both vertically and by rotating the reel) to break any trapped air bells. After DEVELOPING ROLLFILM placing the cover and cap on the tank, the remaining process may be carried out under It is more convenient to develop rollfilm in a normal room illumination. Lack of agitation small tank than in a tray. The results are usually causes local exhaustion of the developer, leading better, and the possibilities of damage to the to loss of contrast, and possibly allowing by- film are minimized. Design detail and construc- products of the developer to produce streaks on tion differ somewhat among the various manu- thefilm. Therefore, you must use an inter- facturer's model of rollfilm tanks, and obviously mittent and standardized form of agitation. 175181 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

been rinsed, pour the fixer into the tank, agitate the film continuously for 1 minute, then agitate the film at intervals during the remaining fixing time. The film may be washed by either removing the developing tank cover and running in a continuous stream of water, or by placing the film reel in a regular washing tank. Upon completion of the washing, sponge the film gently on both surfaces with a wet viscose sponge or wet absorbent cotton.This removes all dirt or sludge which may have settled on the film during washing. Dirt or scum is easily removed at this time, whereas it is practically impossible to remove it after the film is dry. Any foreign substances on dry film detract from A the quality of the prints which are made from the negative. Following the sponging, rinse the film and remove the water from its surfaces.The emulsions should not show any trace of water drops or streaks. The back mayshow slight streaks but no drops. Now, your film isready for drying. It can be dried by thenatural drying method through evaporation (suspended from a line by a film clip), or in a film drying cabinet (forced air and heat drying method).

PHOTOGRAPHIC PRINTING METHODS Photographic printing is the process of exposing an image to a sensitized material by B permitting light to pass through a negative or 165.105%107 through a positive transparency. The exposure Figure 12-11.Loading and agitating the rolifilm tank. can be made by either placing the negativein Hold the tank as shown in figure 12-11B, and contact with the sensitized material (contact gently turned upside down and rightside up for a printing), or by projecting an image of the period of 5 seconds. This type of agitation negative on the material (projection printing). should be done throughout the developing time Because it is usually intended to give an enlarged intervals of 30 seconds for the new thin base image, projection printing is more commonly films and 1 minute for the others. It is ex- referredto as enlarging. Although there are tremely important to standardize the system of many similarities between the two printing agitation so that development conditions and methods, especially in the papers, chemicals, and results can be repeated accurately time and time processing procedures involved, they are dis- again. cussed separatelyin this chapter for greater At the end of the developing time, pour the clarity. developer from the tank through thelight- When printing a picture, remember that your trapped pouring hole. Fill the tank with water prints will be only as good as your ability to use by running it into the pouring hole, agitate the intelligently the equipment at your disposal. A film and pour the water out. Do this two or good print should be clear and clean, reproduc- three times to rinse the film. After the film has ing in positive form all the details and tones of

I Chapter 12 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

the negative. A. poor print will not be accepted (lightamber) and Du Pont S-55X (orange by any news medium except if the elementof brown), Check paper data sheet forrecom- news is really outstanding. Your photographic mended safelights, ability will also be judgedon the basis of the finished prints you turn out. The printing processes parallel those offilm Low, Normal and High Contrast Paper exposure and development, yet are subject to even greater control. Because you can work Printing papers are available in several degrees under a fairly high level of darkroom illumina- of inherent contrast so that negatives that have tion, you can check each step by direct inspec- varying contrast can be properly printed. TLre tion. are soft low-contrast papers for printing high The chemistry of print processing is similarto contrast negatives, and hard high-contrast papers that of film development. It is possibleto use for less than normal contrast or flat negatives. the same developers but, for best results, it is Contrast grades are designated by numbers and wiser to use solutions specifically devised for each manufacturer uses a similar series of num- printing. bers. You will process prints in trays. In fact, much If you select the proper paper, normal print of the same technique used toprocess films in may be made from a wide variety of negative trays can be applied to making prints. contrasts. As you gain experience you will be A minimum of three trays should be supplied able to match negatives with the proper paper and arranged in the sinkso that prints can be contrast. You will have to make test prints, processed in orderly progression fromexposure experiment, and practice to develop the skill to developer, to stop rinse bath, to fixing bath. necessary for quickly selecting the paper grade When adequate sinkspace is available, the ideal from which the best prints can be made. setup is to have five traysone each of devel- Figure 12-12 lists the numbers used with a oper, acid stop bath, first fixer, second fixer, description of the negativesthatare most and water rinse. This system providesa savings suitable for printing with the indicated degree of in chemicals and better fixing of prints. The first contrast. fixer accumulates most; of the silver; the second fixer accumulates much less and ata slower rate. The function of the second fixer is to lower the Emulsion contrast residual silver complexes in the print toa safe grade number Negative contrast level. No. 1 More than normal contrast. PRINTING PAPER No. 2 Normal contrast. Before proceeding any further, a litte know- No. 3 Less than normal ledge of the makeup of photographic paper is contrast. necessary. No. 4 Very little contrast. The light.sensitive emulsions used for printing papers are much sloweror less sensitive to lightthan those used for film. Whereas you 165.213 expose films for perhaps 1/125 of a second to Figure 12.12.Contact and projectionpaper get an image, printing paper must beand often contrast grades. isexposed anywhere to 60 seconds or more to record an image. This permits you to work in quite an amount Variable Contrast Paper of darkroom light, Most photographic papers are blue-sensitive only and can be handled freely by These papersare coated with emulsions whose the light of such safelights as the Wratten #0C contrasts are dependent upon the color of the 177 183 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 light source used to expose it, that is, the imagr; subject. contrast may be varied over a wide range by The basic requirement for photographic con- changing the color of the exposing light. When tact printing is a means by whichthe negative these papers are exposed with blue light, they and paper can be held tightly together during render very hard or contrasty images; and when exposure to the printinglight. A contact printer exposed with green light, they produce very soft is used for this purpose. images. Hence, it is possible, by using filters, to The printer is simple and efficient.It is a duplicate (on only one grade paper) various boxlike enclosure with a sheet of frostedglass contrast ranges previously obtained with dif- across the top. A hinged coverclamps down over ferent contrast grades of other printing paper. the glass and holds the negative and paperin The filters used to control the color of the tight, uniform contact. As this hinged topis printing light are usually made of a lacquered pressed into position, a light or setof lights gelatin set in a rigid cardboard mount. A metal inside the box is automatically switched on to filter mount included as a part of every filter set, providethe. exposurelight.The lightsare holds the filter in place under the enlarger lens. switched off when the pressure cover or plateis Except for placing the proper filter in front of lifted. This printer is illustrated in figure12-13. the lens and using a different safelight filter, variable .contrast printing is the same as printing with any other enlarging paper. The negative should be focused properly without the filter over the lens. Then, place the correctfilter in the holder and expose as usual. Another factor to take into consideration when selecting photographic paper is the finishing surfaces. In news photo work, there are two with which you should be familiarsingle weight glossy (SWG) and double weight matte (DWM). Asingle weight glossy printis preferred by newspapers, magazines, and other publications. Television people must have a matte finished print, usually a double weight.

CONTACT PRINTING

Asits name indicates, a contact print is made by placing a sheet of photographic paper in absolute and uniform contact with a negative. When white light is directed toward the negative, the negative image controls the amount of light transmitted to the paper. The dense areas of the negative bar the passage of the light, and the clear or low-density areas permit the light to pass freely. The image formed on the sensitive coating of the paper is therefore a negative of a negative, which makes it a positive that presents the true 185.108 black-and-white relationships of the pictured Figure 12.13.Table model contact printer.

178 1S4 Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

Contact Printing Procedure or 20 seconds on the next exposure. When theteststrip,appears to develop Once you have the traysagain larger than the properly, rinse it in the short stop bath and then prints you are makingfilled with theproper immerse it in the hypo for about two minutes. If solutions, you are ready to makea contact print. your test looks right in white light, you can then First make sure that the negative is free of lint make as many prints as neededon the basis of and dust. Either of these will leave whitespots the exposure and developing time established by onthefinishedprints.Placethe negative the test. The low level of safelight will often give EMULSION SIDE UPthe dull sidein the the mistaken impression that the picture is fully printer. Now take a test strip of contactpaper developed when actuallyitisn't.Therefore, and place it EMULSION SIDE DOWNover the always check the print in white light before negative so as to include a fair sample of the kit; ng into production. If the picture hasa flat negative's tonal range from the densot high- and gray appearance, give the next printmore lights to the clearest shadows. In all photo- developing time. graphic printing, always have the emulsion of You can develop two or three prints ata time, the negative and the printing paper FACING As, one by one, theyare fully developed, EACH OTHER, If not, your images will be transfer them to the short stop bath, and then reversed; i.e., medals worn on the left side ofa I into the hypo. Asitate them to nukesure they man'ertrtifzim wed fri,Awit ect4. ,vigikA side of the do not stick 'together. After about two minutes print. you can inspect them by white light; but they Lower the lever on top of the printerso that should be promptly returned to the hypo for the padding forces the paper into contact with complete fixing. Ten minutes is normally suffi- the negative. cient to fix your picture in fresh hypo, Wash As this contact is completed, the electric them for 30 minutes in running water until all ci luit is closed and the lights will switchon. trace of hypo is removed. Count to 10 seconds by the darkroom clockor Be careful when you are fixingyour prints. timer, then unlatch the lever, lift the hinged top, Inadequate fixation will not completely elimi- and take out the test strip. The white light will nate the developing action, making the print automatically go out when the top is raised. vulnerable to stain or eventuallyon overall Slip the test strip into the developer EMUL- blackening of the print. Overfixation tendsto SION SIDF'P to prevent scratcheson the produce a thinning or weakening of the photo- emulsion fi.. residue on the tray bottomand graphic image. be sure that all of the strip is immersed atonce This procedure outlined will giveyou satis- to permit uniform chemical action on the factory prints if you start with a good negative. emulsion. Agitate the paper gently to ridany air However,thereare many reflnementi and bubbles that may cling to the film's emulsion. advanced techniques you can learn from experi- Watch for the appearance of the image. A ence and study which will enable you to get normal print should develop gradually, but good prints even if the negative is faulty, steadilyshadows first,then half tones, and finally the highlight details. The print should be completely developed in about one minute if the Masking the Negative developer is of proper strength and temperature, 68 degrees. If the picture flashesup quickly an i Most prints require white borders. Thismeans presents a general mottled appearance, you can that some type of mask is needed to prevent the be sure that it was OVEREXPOSED. Discard printing light from exposing the edges of the this strip and expose another on the printer, this printing paper,If the printer in use is not time with a 5 seconds exposure. If, on the other equipped with a masking device,a mask will hand, 6n seconds development does notpro- have to be made to fit the negative, The material duce a print that looks fully developed, the used for masks should be opaque andno thicker printing exposure was not long enough, Try 15 than 0,005 inch, BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PROJECTION PRINTING supports the projection unit (figure 12-14). A printing easel rests upon the base and holds the Projection printing differs from contact print- paper in position for receiving the image. ing in that the negative is separated from the paper and the image is projected, by means of a lens, onto the sensitized printing paper. The negative is placed between an enclosed light source and a lens. The lens receives the light that passes through the negative and projects the image onto the paper holder or easel. Changing the distance between the lens and the easel controls the size of the image. The image is focused on the easel by adjusting the distance between the negative and the lens. Thus, it is possible to enlarge or reduce the size of the projected image to practically any desired scale by simply changing and adjusting these distances. The image, may be projected to the same size, .to a largersize,or to a smaller size, depending upon the optical system used and the construction of the printer. Most projection prints are made to an enlarged scale; hence, the projection printer is commonly referred to as an enlarger. 4. Projection printing is a very adaptable and versatile process in which considerable control can be exercised. Although the main advantage of projection printing over contact printing is that large size prints can be made, there are severalother important advantages. Among these are the ease with which local printing control can be accomplished, Various special effects may be obtained, and the fact that both composition and perspective can be improved. 165.109 Figure 12.14. Vertical enlarger.

Projection Printers The enlarger is essentially a camera in reverse; that is, it projects rather than receives the image. There are many different makes and models In general, it consists of a lamp house with a of projection printers, or enlargers, but all are light source and reflector, a method of obtaining constructed to conform to the same basic idea. even illumination over the negative, a negative Horizontal enlargers are used when very large carrier or holder, a bellows, and a lens with a prints are frequently required. However, the diaphragm. The bellows and lens are attached to most generally used enlargers are the vertical controls for focusing the image, and the mount models; specifically, the negative is held hori- for the enlarger is secured to the standard in zontally and the image projected downward. In sudh a manner as to provide some method of any case, the planes of the negative, the lens and changing the lens-to-easel distance. the easel must be parallel to ensure sharply The negative carrier may be one of two focused images. Navy photo labs are equipped typesdustless or glass sandwich. The dustless with vertical enlargers which have a sturdy base carrier consists of two shaped metal sheets, or and an upright standard at one end which plates, with die-cut openings in the center. The 186180 Chapter 12INTRODUCTIONTO PHOTOGRAPHY

negativeis placed between these platesand fluorescent tubes. These produce positioned in the opening. When very little heat, the hinged are called cold light enlargers, and requireno plates are closed, they clamp the edgesof the ventilation. negative and hold it in position. Ifproperly The methods used to distributethe light designed, they functione ,cellently for negatives evenlyoverthenegativedivide 4 X 5 inches and smaller. The glass projection sandwich printers into two general classesdiffusionand carrier is simply two sleets of glass ina wood or condenser. metal frame, between which thenegative is placed. They are necessary for negativeslarger DIFFUSION TYPE.The diffusion enlarger than 4 X 5 inches, because largenegatives have a has a set of diffusing glasses (usually groundor tendency to sag in the center of dustlesscarriers. optical glass) between the lamp and the negative One disadvantage of glass sandwichcarriers is carrier to spread the light evenly over the entire that any dust or lint on them becomespart of surface of the negative. The lamp housing is the projected image. generally parabolic in design and the interior isa There are many types of easels inuse, each matte surf.' ceeither white or silver. The light serving the same basic purposeholding the source is an inside frosted or opal incandescent printing paper in a flat plane. Most easels hr.-ve lamp (some diffusion type enlargersuse fluores- adjustable masking strips to regulate the borders cent tubes) which is located so the light is of theprints. Those equipped with masks reflected diffusely down toward the negative usually have an adjustable guide for placing the and lens (figure 12-15). This gives softeven paper evenly under the masking strips. The illumination and tends to minimize negative adjustable guides and masks will enclose almost flaws(such as abrasion marks and surface any size rectangle from 3 to inches. scratches) and grain. In order to obtain changes in the scale of the projected image, itis necessary to alter the conjugate distances in amanner similar to that LAMP LAMP HOUSING in cameras. Specifically, to enlargea negative to a greater degree, the lens-to-easel distance must DIFFUSING be increased and the negative-to-lens distance GLASS must be decreased. Some enlargers, termed autofocus, are so designed and constructed that NEGATIVE when the lens-to-easel distance is altered the negative-to-lensdistanceisautomatically FOCUSING adjusted and the image is always in focus. These ADJUSTMENT printers operate conveniently for enlargements, LENS butanauxiliairyopticalsystem must be attached to reduce the image. size. An attachment of this type is not as convenient touse as the manual-varidble-focus models, whichcan produce both reduced and enlarged images with thesameopticalsystem.Nevertheless, the majority of projection printing requires enlargement, and for this work autofocus modelsare satisfactory. EASEL The light source for a projection printer is usually an opal incandescent lamp which is 185.110 located within the lamp house so the light is Figure 12-115. Diffusion enlarge.. directed down toward the negative carrier. The lighttight lamp house is ventilated to prevent The diffusion enlarger does not renderan excessive heat which can ruin both negative and image as contrastyas a condenser enlarger lens. However, at least one type. of enlargeruses because the difrise lightissofter than the 187181 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 straight direct rays formed by the condensing lenses. The difference in contrast between the diffusion enlarger and the condenser type is approximately one grade; for example, prints made on No. 3 contrast paper with a diffusion enlarger are approximately the same as prints made from the same negative on No. 2 contrast paper with a condenser enlarger. Printing Expo- sures common tothe diffusion enlarger are generally longer than those for the condenser type enlargers due to the considerable loss of light caused by diffusion. The diffusion enlarger is especially suitable for portraiture and other printing involving negatives 4 X 5 inches and larger. CONDENSER TYPE.The condenseren- larger makes use of a set of condensing lenses to project thelightrays evenly from an opal incandescent lamp through the negative. The condenser is a pair of planoconvex condensing lenses mounted as a unit with their convex surfaces opposed as shown in figure 12-16. The condenser type enlarger produces a sharp brilliant image, having more contrast than can be obtained with the same negative in a diffusion enlarger. Hence, the condenser type enlarger is especially useful for enlarging miniature negatives.

Projection Printing Procedure The setup for projection printing isbasically 165.111 the sameasforcontact printing, and the Figure 12-16.Condenser enlarger. developingprocessis. the same. From the enlarger's easel, the exposed paper goes to the Set the pap-. .-.rner guide and the masking developer, to the short stop bath, to thehypo, device on the ea,. form the border width and and to the wash. Of course, the trays mustbe print size needed. As an aid for composingand larger and the solutions greater, as yourprints accurately focusing the image, place a sheetof will be larger, but the physical requirements are white paper in the printing position on theeasel. 'otherwise identical. The same solutions canbe The base side of a finished print serves nicelyfor used for both contact and projection printing. this focusing screen. Then turn out all white lights. ENLARGER AND EASEL Turn the enlarger printing lamp on, openthe ADJUSTMENTS.Insert thenegative in the lens to its maximum aperture, and movethe carrier so the emulsion side is down towardthe easel around until the desired portionof the lens. In other words, the base of thenegative image is in the masked opening. Raise orlower (the shiny side) should be up or facing thelamp the enlarger unit on the standard orcolumn, and house.Replacethenegativecarrierinthe focus the imazn, shift the easel as needed, enlarger and make sure that it is properly seated. continue these adjustments until the imageis

182

ti 188 Chapter 12INTRODUCTION TOPHOTOGRAPHY

enlarged (or reduced) to the desired size, in explainedunder "ContactPrinting," cutit sharp focus, and composed correctlyon the lengthwise into several strips about 1 inch wide, easel. and place one of thesestripsin the easel, At this point several minor problems confront emulsionup. The procedurefor making a the operator, and he should take a moment to projection test exposure differs from contact study the image carefully. The picture is easier printing tests in thot a series of exposures can be to compose with the scene right side up. If it is given on one piece of paper. upside down from the operator's point of view, In order to determine as much infortnationas either rotate the carrier or remove the carrier possible from the test strip, it shoulel be exposed and reposition the negative. Most printingpapers in a series of steps. The steps should be planned are r. ctangular; therefore, the next problem is to togive each succeedingstep just half the determine whether to use a verticalor a hori- exposure of the preceding one, since ohanges of zontal format. In many cases, themanner in less than 100 percent in exposures do not show which the scene is composed on the negative is enough difference to be of value. Pour stepsare the controlling factor. usually enough, 2nd a suggested seriesmay be The easel should be moved around until the made by using the following procedures. best composition is obtained. While composing Cover three-fourths of the strip, andexpose the image, try to correct any errors of image the uncovered portion for 8 seconds. Uncover 'compositioninthenegative.Straighten the another one-fourth and expose for 4 seconds. horizon, and if possible try to prevent it from Uncover the third section and expose for 2 cutting the image on the print into two equal seconds. Uncover the remaining part andexpose sections. If the horizon is not visible, makesure for 2 seconds. This producesa series of expo- that vertical objects are parallel with the side of sures in which each succeeding section of the the masked area on the easel.If the space gulp has received double the exposure of the around the subject is not pleasing, try to remedy preceEing sectionin this case 2, 4, 8, and 16 theerror.Distortion of perspective can be seconds. Develop the test for the recommended reduced by making corrections while arranging time in a normal strength solution. At leastone the easel and focusing. of these sections should be close to normal in After the image is correctly composed and appearance and the next exposure, using a whole focused, the aperture of the lens should be sheet of paper (for the straight print), should be closed down sufficiently to necessitate an expo- approximately correct. sure of approximately 10 seconds. This length of If preferred, longer or shorter exposure times exposure is ideal because it permits a normal may be used provided they do not become amount of dodging (explained later) and is fast excessive in either direction. Very shortexpo- enough to be practical for quantity production. sures are not practical. Very long exposures The exact amount the lens should be "stopped subject the negative to excessive heat from the down" depends upon the density of the negative printing lamp and also waste time. and is difficult to determine without 'experience. Ten seconds is about as short an exposureas For beginners itis suggested that closing the should be used, because even slight changes in aperture down about two stops, to f/8 or f/11, time result in a large percentage of printing with a normal negative is a good starting place. error. Twenty seconds is the longest exposure Since dusty or fingerprinted lensescan diffuse that should ever be required for normalnega- the projected image, make surethe optical tives. If the exposure time passes these limits, system is clean. Lens cleaning tissue is provided change the lens stop to bring theexposure for this purpose. Turn the printing light off, within practical limits. remove the paper (the composing screen) from After the test print has been in the hypo fora the easel, and place it aside foruse with the next couple of minutes, it may be removed, rinsed in negative. fresh water, and inspected untler white lightto determine which of the test strip exposures is TEST EXPOSURE. -With the printing illumi- correct.If none of the differently exposed nation off, select a sheet of printing paper, as sections appears to be normal, the correct 183 1,89 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 r. exposure may 11indicated by choosing a time in the image is a card of suitablesize and shape that falls between two of the exposures. After pinned or threaded onto one endof a stiff wire. - the exposure time and paper have been decided This method of dodging allowsthe shadow of upon, select a whole sheet ofthe paper and the dodging tool to cover a small orlarge area, place it in the easel. Expose, develop, rinse, and uepending on thesizeof the card and its fix this straight print. distance from the surface of theprinting paper, Fix the straight print for about 2 minutes, without affecting the other parts of theimage. rinse it in fresh water, flatten it out in an empty This dodging tool is held betweenthe lens and tray, sponge the surface water off, and turn on the printing paper in such a mannerthat it the white lights for a careful scrutiny ofprint prevents the light from falling uponthe area to quality. The exposure should be approximately be dodged. Dodging is generally necessaryfor correct. What about the contrast? Agood print only part of the exposure time. Thetool used usually has a white somewhere in a highlight must be moved up anddown slowly and area, a black in thedeepest shadow, and a constantly to prevent a sharp linebetween the well-modulated scale of grays between these two area dodged and theother parts of the image. tonal extremes. If in doubt about the proper contrast, the best method is to makeadditional BURNING-1N.Another form of print con- prints on two other grades of paper.Inspect the trol, termed burning-in, is used to make an area vow and then decide whichprint .has the most ...darker which would otherwiseprint too light. pleasing or realistic contrast. This method also This :s done by using a cardboard or paperwith reveals how easy it is for a mediocreprint to a hole that issmaller but approximately the appear acceptable orpassable until a direct same shape as the area tobe burned-in. After the has beenade, comparisonismade with the same image normal overall printing exposure correctly exposed on the proper contrast paper thecardorpaperismoved into position grade. If there are distracting areas which are too between the lens mid the easel.The card holds light or too dark they can be darkened or back all the light except that passingthrough the lightened by additional exposure controlin hole onto .the area that needsadditional exposure. This device mustalso remain in motion successive prints. f during the time the light is on to prevent asharp DODGING.As indicatedearlier,enlarging outline of the hole. In some The dodging and buring-inshould be prac- permits a great degree of print control. the print. instance!), the brightness range of asubject may ticed before attempting to expose be too great to be reproduced ina print. Time the amounts of exposurefor every step of This is the only manner Nevertheless,adequatecompensationcan the printing procedure. usually be made by shading the areawhich in which the procedure canbe controlled well be enough to be duplicated foradditional prints, or prints too dark. Detail, for example, can of the image as preservedinshadowareasby"dodging" changes made in any portion (holding back the light) during part ofthe needed. For example, the entireprint may be be lightened exposure. Dodging canusually be accomplished exposed for 5 seconds, the spot to in projection printing dodged, and the image exposedfor another 5 more easily and accurately needing additional than in contact printing. seconds. Then the portion It is usually necessary to dodge or lighten some exposure may beburned-in through the hole in a parts of most projection prints toproduce a card for 5 seconds. Thisrequires a total expo- correctly exposed image. Since the dodging sure time of15 seconds, which is as long as changing the lens material is held and manipulated in the beamof should be tolerated without light from the lens, its location and coverage can stop. printing Ex )erience shows that exposuresof less than be seen and controlled during the because of the exposure. Hence, accuratedodging can be done 10 seconds are not easily made with the hands or various shaped cards,which difficulty in making the dodging orburning-in and used when begin- properly. If the test provescorrect, dupli- may be cut, from black paper trouble. If not, any needed. A favorite tool for dodging small areas cates can be made with no 184 190 Chapter 12 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY desired changes can be made inthe corrective Tray Procedure steps taken, and good resultsmay be expected after a few test prints. When onlya few prints Although most printsare washed in mechan- are required from each negative, it is much easier ical washers, smallgroups may be washed by and quicker to obtain correctly dodged prints by successive changes of water ina tray. Two trays projection than by the contact method. having deep sides should be used.The size of the trays is determined by the size andnumber of prints to be washed. Bothtrays should be filled WASHING PRINTS almost completely with water andall the prints placed emulsionup in one tray. The prints A thorough print washing is very important. should be separated, agitated,and then trans- If all of the residual chemicalsare not removed, ferred one ata time to the other tray. The first the print will not maintain itspermanence very tray is then empoPd. refilled with fresh long. It will soon become yellow, washed water, out, or and the procedure repeateduntil the wash is take on several other defects. Washingdissolves completed. When using thetray method, the and dilutes the soluble products andeliminates prints should be agitated two them with the disposal of the wash or three times in water. The each change of water and thewater changed at reasons for thoroughly washing prints are the S-minute intervals 411?t4 Id?out sixchanges have same as the reasons for negatives. in given for single-weightprints. Double- The length of timenecessary to thoroughly weight prints should be givenfrom 8 to 10 wash prints dependsupon the amount of agita- changes. tion they receive in the wash, thecomplet, ess and rapidity with which the water ischanged, and whether the printsare on single- or c'ouble- weight paper. A certain amount ofsoaking is necessary in the wash. Hence, very rapid renewal Mechanical Washers' of the fresh water in the wash bathdoes not speed up the washing process becausethorough Both shipboard and shore based washing is also dependent naval photo upon the time of labs are equipped with mechanicalprint washers. diffusionof the chemicals from thepaper. Designs varyto accommodate the type of Furthermore, as the quantity of the chemicals to printing accomplished by the variouscommands, be removed becomes smaller, the rateof elimi- but their general function isto wash prints in a nationisdecreased.If the prints collect in continuous and changing water bath. groups during washing, diffusion is hindered. One of the mostcommon types found in While it is most important that hypobe removed Navy labs is the Pako luxPrint Washer. This from prints, it is poor practice to washthem for piece of equipment consistsof a tublike tank a needlessly long time. Prolonged washingmay and a perforated cylindrical drumwhich revolves cause excessive softening of the emulsion and in the tank. (See fig.12-17.) Fresh water is dimensional changes in thepaper. Under favor- circulated in the tank andthrough the drum by able conditions, theusual washing time for an inlet and an overflow outlet. Thedrums, single-weight prints is 30 to 45 minutes and 1 which hold and agitate theprints, can be raised hour for double-weight prints. from or lowered in the tank bya foot pedal and If prints are removed from the fixing bathand lever arrangement. Thepower for rotating the added to a batch that is washing, thehypo from drum is supplied byan electric motor through a the added prints immediately diffuses intothose system of reduction pulleysand rollers. The in the wash. This makes itnecessary for the complete unit is supported bya frame and four timing of the washing period to beginanew legs. The drum hasa locking hinged door for when the last prints are added. convenience in loading me unloadingprints. BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 MATTE DRYER.A machine mattedryer cogsists of a drum over which awide endless cloth belt or apron travels. The drumis motor driven, and the types used by servicephoto units are usually heated byelectricity. The rate at which prints dry is regulated by thetemperature of the drum and the speed atwhich the drum rotates. The drum temperature iscontrolled by a thermostat, while the drum rotatingspeed is regulated with a variable speed motorand a speed reduction system. The prints areheld in contact with the drum by meansof the endless belt and are dried during onerevolution of the drum. When the prints which are tohave a matte surface finish are ready for drying,drain the surplus water from them, andplace them EMULSION SIDE DOWN on the apronportion of the belt. Do not allow water todrip onto the apron from the stackvi'grahed paints being fed into the dryer. The prints shouldbe properly dried when passed once throughthe dryer. The dry prints fall into the print trayafter completing the drying cycle.

165.112 Figure 1217.Print washer.

PRINT DRYING When washing is complete, the prints maybe dried by a convenient cleans,depending upon t'ae type of paper and theavailable means for drying. However, when usingglossy surface papers, the photographsdo not have a pleasing appearance unless they aredried in close contact with a highly polished surface. Themethod used in Navy photographiclaboratories is to dry prints on a drum type print dryer.The different types are discussed in thefollowing paragraphs. 165.113 Figure 12-18. Print dryer, Mechanical Print Dryers units are Basically there are two types ofmechanically GLOSSY DRYER.Service photo also provided several models ofmachine dryers operated,printdryersused by the Navy; both which dry prints to a ferrotyped orglossy finish, MATTE and GLOSSY. Fundamentally, with a wide types operate the same (figure12-18). Glossy print dryers are equipped

19286 Chapter 12 INTRODUCTIONTO PHOTOGRAPHY

conveyer belt which carries the prints around a color rendition, and light source.to beused. You chromium-plated,highlypolished,heated, willfindthat films suffixed with the word slowly revolving drum. Adryer of this type is 'color' (Kodacolor, Agfacolor)are color print very similar to the matte dryer discussedabove. films,whilethose The washed prints suffixedwith'chrome' are placed on the apron (Anscochrome, Dynachrome) indicatea slide portion of the conveyer beltEMULSION SIDE film. UP. The belt carries the prints between the Generally, most rules applyingto exposure polished drum anda rubber squeegee roller. The and composition in black and pressures of the drum and the roller white photog- squeeze the raphy can also be applied to colorphotography. surplus water off the printsand roll them into However, the important factor in smooth contact with the selecting color polished surface of the film for a specific job is to determinethe type drum. The cloth belt holdsthe prints in firm light source (daylight, tungsten, contact with the revolving drum. or photolamps) The speed and by which the film will be exposed.Color film temperature of the drumcan be regulated so the exposed by other than the light prints are completely dried with for which it was one cycle of the designed will rendervery unreal color imitations dryer. When the prints havetraveled one revo- of the original subject. lution around the drum,they fall off the drum How color photography into the print tray. is being used by newspapers, magazines, television, etc., is discussed in more detail inchapters covering the specific media. COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY

Color photography is theart of making a PHOlu JOB ORDERS photograph whichisarepresentation of a subject in form, tone gradation, and color. In areas where Navy photographiclabora- All modern color photographyprocesses are tories are located, one of the easiest based on providing means of an imitation, not on repro- getting photographiccoverage is by properly ducingthecoloroftheoriginalsubject. filling out NAVWEPS form 3150/6, Although the imitation the photo- appears to the eye as an graphic job order (figure12-19). This form exact match of the original color, thedifferences serves as the authority for the requested work, can be detected under vary closeexamination. the lab's job record, and receipt. Film for color photography The job order is available in two accompanies the work being performed.through general categories. Onetype is primarily for every phase of the photographic obtaining color prints, while process. the other is pri- To succec,:fully use the photo joborder, it is marily used for producingcolor transparencies important that a good understanding or slides. and relationship exist betweenyour unit and the photo- Color print film results inan orange colored graphic lab. negative from which a ptint.is made. In the color In submitting a job order,all information negative, as in black and whitephotography, all pertaining to the job should be tones are reversed. Color slides recorded to can be repro- avoid confusing the photographerperforming duced from color negatives. the actual work. In the case of color slide film, the result isa The job order informationyou must provide positive color transparancy,ready for viewing. includes: Just as the color prinf. filmcan be used to make color slides, color slidescan be used to make Name of your activity color prints. However, forthe best results,you should choose the filmwhich is designed pri- Your activity job number marilyforproducingthedesiredfinished productslide or print. Job security classification The two basic color filmtypes are available with many varying characteristicsin film speed, Number of views needed 187 193 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

POOTOORAPNIC JOS MOIR POI NO. (Pw OWN* Awl NAVVAIDO WORM 3180/0 (44141 of DAPP Ps PAW

/0.=74k °Mgr WWII NAN Of POI NwariAMERICA (CVA-66) PAO 746°-84 UNCLASSIFIED NOV MOM IMAM es owl) NO If NilPOMO 1A01111w SOI OP NOSS glossy 6 8 x 10 4 WAN mown NO WITHI awn -_CI spume 0 mon (XI ASAP mow NOUISONO X* LOCATION o1 Hangar Doe USN 738 110 AMERICA Deck LT John moromwoorme MO dm 4.14 Ow PAW LT John Doe, 22 Dec1971., 0830 INICIOWON OP 101 Best views of "MissAmerica1972"visit (For immediate release).

Dote IKON cowurnom of KAI COL IIIIINSION NONAIUN 41 Awki 17Dec71 738. Awsw=4.. NIMMAINT IMO APO tVd MOM OWN MINN Nam IV

GROUND/AERIAL TOTAL NO. NO. PRINTS IMAMS NO. OF PHOTOS NIOATIVI manta MIT NNW OP PRINTS TO SE MO N SUE IA124 NIG.

MOTION PICTURE PROCESSING PHOTOSTAT NH MAIO N MUM PAWS 10 N Car NO. OP TOM COPES IACH NO. COINS 0 IA AMA SS AM P0014011 PHOTOSTAT PHOATIVI

MITI wANNO PHOTOSTAT POSITIVI

IRCIAI INSTRuCTIONI AbOffIDNAI INERUCTIONS

MONO TOOTASI

OAT!

INSUISTINO AMC, WHIRR ST

WPM SOWS AND/O1 NICIATIVIS

Figure 12.19. -- Photographic job orders work best when a good understanding and relationship exists between your unit and the photo lab.

188 194 Chapter I 2INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

Size and finish of prints job should be described as clearly and completely as possible to avoid any confusion for Priority and date required the photographer. Your relationship with the laboratory person- Location of work nel should include an understanding that your job orders always allow for a creative or imagi- Person requesting job and phone number native shot along with the requested standard or sure-shot. In cases where the photographer's Person,to whom photographer should shot is better than the shot requested, use the report, when, and where better shot.Don't ever request "one to ten of every shot." Should you be allowed to select Description of the job to be photographed your prints by screening a proofsheet or negatives, select only the best shots to satisfy your requirement. Another method which fosters Most important of the job order information good relations with the lab is to rely on the isthe concise description of the job to be judgment of an experienced lab photographer photographed. All information pertaining to the and request the "best view of..." ..

19 589 CHAPTER 13

THE CAMERA

This chapter will familiarize you with the BASIC STILL CAMERAS development, present state, and operation of the camera. A variety of cameras, each having its own The earliest known camera was the camera distinctadvantage and disadvantage, can be obscura which originated in ancient Greece in found in the Navy's photographic inventory. 350 B.C.,andisbelieved to have been a While you should know how all of the basic still discovery of Aristotle, the Greek philosopher. varieties function, the first two are the most It consisted of a darkened room with a small important to the JO: opening in one wall. Light reflected from objects outside the room was admitted through the Single lens reflex opening and formed inverted and reversed images of those objects on thewall opposite the Twin lens reflex opening. The fact that a sensitized material to record the image was not to be developed until Rangefinder miniature the 18th century was one of the main disadvantages of the camera obscura. However, the Subminiature camera obscura did serve its purpose.It was a magnificent aid to medieval scientists in study- View ing the eclipses of the sun, and to artists in drawing perspective. Press-type From this early and crude beginning, inventors slowly improved the product. Glass lenses A description of each type will show why replaced the pinhole in the wall allowing a there is no perfect camera for all requirements. greater amount of light to enter and producing a Single lens reflex (SLR) cameras, very popular much brighter image. Portable boxes fitted with among photojournalist, are so named because lenses became known as box cameras. The box viewing exposure are through the same lens. camera, however, required thatthe screen be, set A movable mirror reflects the image, usually at one given position, or distance from thelens, through a prism, for viewing except for the split to insure a sharply defined image. Focal plane secondthatthe exposureis made. At the curtain, and blade type shutters have replaced moment of exposure, the prism is lifted aside, the earlier guillotine shutter which was a hole in permitting the image to fall on the film plane. an opaque slot that dropped by theforce of The use of a prism allows both vertical and gravity and admitted light for a split second. To lateral image correction for viewing but adds day's shutters give accurate and repeatable ex- weight and bulk to the camera. This type of posures from more than a second to lessOwn camera is popular in both the 2 1/4" X2 1/4" 1/2000 of a second. and 35mm rollfilm formats. Chapter 13THE CAMERA

The twin-lens reflex is a medium large (2 1/4" tilted in any direction, or rotated. It uses large X 2 1/4") image formatcamera. Its use of (2 1/4 X 2 1/4 inch or larger) sheets of film. The rollfilm allows it to take several pictures in quick view camera canhot be hand-held. The subject succession. It is called a twin-lenscamera be- being photographed must be framed and focused cause it uses separate but similar len: esone for by an inverted image formed by the lens on a forming the image on the film and the other for sheet of ground glass at the rear of the camera. viewing. The term reflex refers to theuse of a Framing, focusing, loading film in the camera, mirror for viewing which corrects the image and exposure are all done as separate steps. View vertically but transposes laterally. cameras usually have slow lenses and shutters Rangefinder (R/F) miniature camerasare and find their main use in portraiture, architec- mainly 1 X 1.5 cm format cameras. They are ture, and scenic photography. precision instruments that use separate or inte- The Press-type camera retains some of the grated viewing and focusing optics that retain focusing and optical features of the view camera. thevertical and lateral composition of the It has a carrying strap, outboard framing and subject without bulky mirror and prism combi- focusing devices, and a film holder box, flash nations. They are the lightest and smallest of the lighting equipment and a folding bed to make it cameras so far mentioned and for that reason are more compact and portable. It uses 6 X 9 cm to preferred by many professional photographers. 4 X 5 inch sheet film and can be adapted to roll Users of SLR cameras claim that focusing and film. It has a greater range of use than any other framing through the taking lens is an advantage camera but is heavy, bulky, and cannot be just as strongly as R/F camera users claim the operated quickly. added bulk and weight of the SLR mechanism and its possible breakdown are disadvantages. Neither claim the small film size is a disadvan- BASIC CAMERA FEATURES tage but users of large format cameras claim that AND OPERATING PROCEDURES real quality results cannot be attained froma miniature camera negative. The remainder of this chapter will outline the The subminiature camera uses a format smal- major features and operating procedures of three ler than 2.4 X 3.6 cm, usually 1.8 X 2.4 cm on cameras which are readily available to Navy 35mm, 1.2 X 1.6 cm on 16mm, or .9 X 1.2 cm photo labs which support large public affairs on 9 1/2 mm rollfilm. For many years these staffs. camerasdespite their precision mechanics and opticswere considered merely toys by the The three cameras to be discussed are the serious photographer. In recent years the ad- 35mm Leica and the 2 1/4" X 2 1/4 "Mamiya vances made in film manufacture and photo- C3 and Rolleiflex cameras. chemistry have caused photographers to recon- The value of the 35mm and 2 1/4X 2 04 " sider the subminiature, and its use as a pocket format cameras in news photography is recog- camera is growing. It is mentioned here because nized today by Navy as well as civilian journal- it is a logical step in the progression of smaller ist. The biggest advantage, from the ,TO's stand- cameras used by the photojournalist from the 8 point, is portability. They are less bukiy and X 10 inch and larger view cameras used by thus attract less attention. Because of their small Matthew Brady during the Civil War to the 4 X size and ease of operation they can be brought 5 inch combat cameras of World War II, the 6 X into action faster. Some of the other advantages 6 format popular from 1950 to the present day are: large film loads, high speed lenses, quick but slowly giving way to the 2.4 X 3.6 cm lens interchangeability, reduced time lag be- format of today's 35mm SLR and R/F cameras. tween exposures, and more economical opera- The view camera is large and bulky but offers tion because of smaller film size. maximum control of focusing and optical corrections and adjustments. Both the front (lens) Given correct exposure and proper develop- and back (film) planes can be raised or lowered, ment of their film loads, the 35mm and 2 1/4" 19197 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

LENS 90 mm FLASH BRACKET

LENS 35 mm FLASH GUN OPTICAL FINDER Niftinume,00.4 '2-

CABLE RELEASE

LENS HOOD FOLDING REFLECTOR

165.150 Figure 13.1. The 35mm Leica M2S Camera Kit.

X 2 1/4" cameras produce outstanding results. THE LEICA 35MM National Geographic Magazine, Associated Press, The Navy has recently adopted the 35mm United Press International and most large daily Leica camera kit shown in figure 13-1. This kit, papers have used the 35mm and 2 1/4" X 2 1/4" listed in the Federal Supply Catalog, includes format for years with excellent results. the following items: Leica M2S camera; 51)mm,

192 198 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 13THE CAMERA

f/2 dual range Summicron lens; 90mm, f/2.8 OPTICAL FINDER FITTING Summicron lens; 35mm, f/2.0 Summicron wide EXPOSURE COUNTER angle lens: exposure meter MC (some of the SPEED DIAL laterkits come with slightly improved MR meter); flash unit; universal carrying case; and 4110104, miscellaneous items of equipment such as filters and a tripod. M2 1020 776 All scales and controls on the Leica M2S can be read and adjusted while viewing .the camera from the top. A coupled rangefinder with several unusual features is built into the camera. Its field is SHUTTER RELEASE shaped so that it may be used either as a split image or as a coincident type rangefinder. Most ACCESSORY CLIP FILM ADVANCE LEVER important, the rangefinder and iewfinder are combinedinasingle window and viewed 165.151 Figure 13-2.Top view of Leica camera, Model M2S. through a single eyepiece. The viewfinder has a new type of bright-line available, and earlier model Leica lenses can be mask, which automatically shifts with the focus- used on the M2S with simple adapters. However, ing mechanism to compensate for parallax. only the 50mm, 35mm, and i0mm are available Auxiliarymasks forthe 90mm lens auto- in the Navy kits. matically appear when the corresponding lens is A built-in self-timer or delayed shutter release inserted;these produce a second bright-line is provided, and is adjustable for delays from 5 frame inside the 50mm outline. The Leica M2S to 10 seconds. Internal flash synchronization is camera has an external frame selector lever provided for all types of flashlamps or electronic which can be used without inserting a lens. flash without adjustment. The exposure counter Thus, the user can decide in advance which lens dial must be reset manually on the M2S for each he wishes to use simply by looking through the new cassette of film. finder and moving the lever. The camera has a hinged back for easier Filmwinding is accomplished by one or more loading, and no notch or tongue is necessary at strokes of the ratchet type lever (fig.13-2), the beginning of the film. The back has a which alsoresets the shutter for the next pressure plate (for maximum flatness of the exposure. This mechanism is interlocked with film) which works in combination with long the shutter release so that the release cannot be precision-ground film tracks. There is a built in tripped unless the film is fully wou film type reminder dial on the camera back All shutter speeds from 1 sea to 1/1000 marked in ASA and DIN values, with symbols second are found on the single dial chl top of the indicating black-and-white and two types of camera. (See fig.13-2). The dial has click-stops at color film. the various settings to ensure accuracy. The speed selection dial does not rotate when the film is wound or hen the exposure is made; Loading the Leica thus, speeds may be selected at any time. A bulb (B) setting is also provided for time exposures, The Leica is loaded with the standard 35mm intermediate shutter speeds between those actu- film cassette. ally marked values of 1/50 second (lightning flash symbol) through 1/1000 second and 1/5 Before opening the camera back, make sure second through 1 second may also be selected. thereis no film in the camera. This may be Lenses are mounted in quick-change bayonet checked byliftingthe rewind knob and turning it mountswithclickstopdiaphragmsettings. in the direction of the arrow; if resistance is Lenses from 21mm to 560mm focal length are encountered the camera is loaded,

1i9 AVAILABLE BEST COPY JOURNALIST 3 & 2

A B

a a a.a a a

C 165.152 Figure 13.3.Loading the Leica camera. (AI Inserting the leaderof film under the spring on the take-up spool; IB) inserting the film in the camera; (C) proper placement of film and engagementof film perforations; (D) tightening the film for smooth transport. Loading the Leica is quite simple if a few shown in figure 13-3(A), making sure the edge basic steps are followed. First remove the base of the film leader is up against the top flange. plate by turning the locking swivel from CLOSE NOTE: The emulsion side of the film should to OPEN and lifting it off. Then place the open camera on the table (bottom up) and swing out face outward on the takeup spool. the backplate. The Leica is now ready for loading. Pull out enough film from the cassette so that Hold the film cassette in the left hand and the the cassette may be inserted in the left compart- takeup Tool in the right; the extended ends of ment and the takeup spool in the right compart- both spools should be up. Insert the leader of ment with camera bottom up and lens facing the film under the spring on the takeup spool, as toward the user. (fig. 13-3(B).) Now check the

194 200 Chapter 13THE CAMERA. placement of the film from the back of the rangefinder eyepiece at the subject. After the camera, ensuring that the film perforations are subjectis focused (both images brought to- engaged properly with the takeup sprocket teeth gether) and composed, the camera is is ready to (fig. 13-3(C).) Next, swing the backplate up to take the picture. To take the picture, press the the closed position and hook the base plate over shutter release which is located at the center of the pin and swing it shut. Lock the base plate by the film advance lever pivot (fig. 13-2). This is a turning the locking swivel to CLOSE. To com- "soft" release, and a gentle pressure anywhere plete the loading of the Leica, pull up on the on its surface trips the shutter. Remove the rewind knob and turn it in the direction of the finger from the shutter release button before arrow until resistance is encountered (fig. 13-3 trying to advance the film; the film advance (D).) This tightens the film for smooth trans- lever is locked while the shutter release button is port. NOTE: If rewound too tight the film can down. be cinched. To advance the film and cock the shutter for In order to prepare the camera for operation, the next exposure, actuate the film advance advance the film by stroking the film advance lever one full stroke, or several short strokes (the lever (fig. 13-2) and tripping the shutter. Ad- film advance lever is of the ratchet type). The vance the film again. Manually set the exposure exposure counter dial automatically moves and counter to 0 and trip the shutter again. The records each exposure as the film is advanced. camera is now ready for operation. To ensure that the film is advancing properly, observe the two red dots in the center of the Viewing rewind knob while operating the film advance lever. They must revolve when the film is wound The optical viewfinder of the Leica features a ahead. new optical system in which a larger field of The film type indicator on the back of the view may be seen than is actually covered by the camera may now be set (as a reminder) to lens in use. The actual field covered by the lens indicate the type of film loaded in the camera. (0.9 magnificationalmost fullsize)isthen outlined in the viewfinder by a bright line reflected into the eyepiece by a prism device. Unloading the Leica The system of bright-line framing has two advantages which are as follows: When the entire roll of film has been exposed, the film advance lever encounters heavy resis- 1. Even if the image is viewed obliquely, the tan...e. To unload the Leica, it is necessary to field of view is correctly outlined. rend the exposed film into the supply cas- 2. An automatic parallax-correcting device is sette. To accomplish this, first set the rewind incorporated which shifts the bright-line frame lever, located on the front of the camera, to R. toward the lens axis as the lens is focused on Next, pull up the rewind knob (fig. 13-3(D)), increasingly closer distances. and turn in the direction of the arrow until resistanceisencountered. To overcome this resistance, turn the rewind knob one more full Theparallax-correctingdevice causes the turn; this detaches the film from the takeup viewfinder to show exactly what will be ob- spool and releases it from the takeup sprocket tained on the film, and pictures may be com- teeth. Then open the camera, as explained in the posed precisely even to the edges of the film. loading procedure, and remove the exposed Also moving objects can be viewed before they cassette of film. enter the photographic field of view, the same as may be done with a sports finder. Operation With the 35mm lens in position, only the outer bright-line frame is seen. However, with Once the proper shutter speed and lens the 50mm lens inserted, a second smaller frame diaphragm have been selected, look through the appears in the center of the viewing field; this

195 201 JOURNALIST 3 & frame outlines exactly the field of view of the view of 45 degrees; also included is the 90mm 50mm lens. If the 90mm lens is inserted, a still Summicron f/2.8 lens, which is a high speed lens smaller frame appears in the window, outlining of long focus. It has click-stops from f/2.8 to its field of view. The parallax compensation f/16 and an angle of view of 27 degrees. To mentioned earlier works automatically inall complete the Summicron lens trio, there is the cases; no manual adjustment is required for 35mm Summicron f/2 wide angle lens. This lens either field size or parallax correction. has both high speed and a wider angle of view. The 35mm Summicron lens has an angle of view of 64 degrees. The lens has click-stops from f/2 Rangefinder to f/16. Thedistancemarkings onthefocusing The Leica rangefinder iscoupled to and mounts of Leica Summicron lenses indicate the operated by the focusing lever of the lens. It distance from the film plane to the object. differs from most rangefinders in that a separate Therefore, if focus by measurement rather than rangefinder eyepiece is not supplied; the range- by rangefinder is desired, the distance should be finder and viewfinder are seen at the same time measured from the back of the camera, not from through a single eyepiece and in a single win- the lens to the subject. dow. The index for the distance scale is located on The second image formed by the rangefinder's the stationary (nonrotating)portion of the optics appears in a small rectangular area in the focusing mount and is either a triangle or long center of the viewfinder viewing field. Because index line. Also included on the stationary part of its rectangular shape and the large surround- of the mount is the depth of field scale. ing area, it may be used for focusing by either the coincidence or the split-field method. Look- DUALRANGE SUMMICRON LENS.As ing inside the rectangle of light, the image is seen mentioned previously, the 50mM, f/2 Summi- double; on focusing the lens by turning the lens cron lens is dual range (has two focusing rings). mount focusinglever(helicalmount), the The normal range is from infinity to 3 feet 4 double images may be fused together. Accurate inches (1 meter), and the closeup range is from focusing is attained wnen the two images have 35 inches to 19 inches, To use the closeup range, been fined.Itisalsopossible to focus by first set the focus to the 3-foot 4-inch (1 meter) observing any line in the subject (above and mark. This is also at the focus end stop position below the rangefinder field) and adjusting the (fig.13-4). Then pull the lens focusing mount lens until the second (movable) image in the forward and turn it clockwise (when facing lens) small area forms a continuous line with the parts past the end stop and into the 35-inch focus above and below the rectangle. position. The lens is locked in this position until After focusing, the subject distance may be the optical- finder is attached. Next, take the read from the focusing scale of the lens if optical finder (fig. 13-1) and slip it on the special desired. This reading is valuable in determining fitting located on the lens barrel (fig.13-4), flash exposures by the guide number method. pushing it back as far as it will go. This releases the focusing movement for the closeup range. Although the camera is set for closeup work, Lenses this does not change the method of operation. The focus isstill automatic with the coupled The Leica system contains interchangeable rangefinder. Alsv, the viewfinder image frame is lenses too numerous to discuss in this chapter. still coupled with the focusing movement in the The lenses detailed here are the three Summi- near range for parallax compensated viewing. cron lenses provided with the Leica camera kit. However, when using the closeup range, itis The 50mm f/2 dual-range Sumrnicron normal advisable to work with smaller f/stopsf/8, f /11, angle lens is considered best for general use. It and f/16 due to the shallow depth of field with has click-stops from f/2 to f/16 and an angle of the larger f/stops.

1202 BEST Chapter 13THE CAMERA COPYAVAILABLE

camera shutter speed dial. Therefore, once the exposure reading is taken and dialed in, the shutter speed is automatically set (fig. 13-5). To attach the Leica Meter MC to the Leica camera, first set the shutter speed dial to B. Next, turn the knurled ring of the exposure meter as far as it will turn in the direction of the arrow (fig. 13-6). Lift the knurled ring and turn it (same direction) a little farther. Pick up the meter, with the photoelectric cell forward, and slide it into the camera accessory clip. Finally, turn the knurled ring back until it drops and clicks into the shutter speed dial. The meter is now coupled to the camera and ready for operation. The black triangle on the meter indicates the shutter speed that is set on the camera (fig. 13-5). The ASA or DIN film ratings are also set END STOP OPTICAL FINDER with a dial located on top of the meter (fig. FITTING 13-5). The Leica meter has two sensitivity ranges. 165.154 These are selected and set with the small selector Figure 13-4.Setting 50mm duel-range lens for dose- knob located on top of the meter (fig. 13-5). up work. For outdoor photography or intense lighting, move the sensitivity selector to the black dot CHANGING LENSES. To remove a lens and use the black aperture numbers. When using from the Leica camera is quite simple. Hold the the meter indoors or in subdued light, move the camera in the left hand and press inward on the sensitivity selector to the red dot and use the red small circular red button-just to the left of the aperture numbers. lens. With the right hand, firmly grip the lens barrel and turn the entire lens barrel until the ASA 5 DIN FILMSPEED SETTINGS red dot on the lens barrel is opposite the one on APERTURE FIGURES (f /STOPS) the body of the camera. The lens may now be pulled straight out METER SPEED To insert a lens on the Leica camera, simply CHANNELS DIAL. hold the camera body (without lens) in the left INDICATOR SENSITIVITY \ 4 hand and the required lens in the right hand. RANGE KNOB Line up the two red dots (as mentioned in removal procedure above), push the lens into the 401, camera body, and turn it clockwise until it clicks into position. The lenses not mounted on the camera should be capped front and back. Lens caps are provided with the Leica camera kit.

165.157 Figure 13.5. Leis Meter MC mounted on the Leica M2S camera. Leica Meter MC OPERATION OF THE LEICA METER. The Leica Meter MC, which is included with When using the Leica meter, either a specific the Leica M2S Camera Kit, couples to the Leica lens aperture or shutter speed may be selected. 197 203 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Flash Photography With the Leica All electronic flash units and most types of flashbulbs can be synchronized with the Leica M2S camera; synchronizer contacts are built into the shutter mechanism, and no accessory contact devices are required. Therefore, synchronization is automatically adjusted for thevari- ous shutter speeds andflash units, and it is only necessary to plug the flash unitcord into the KNURLED correct outlet on the back of the camera. RING The flash unit supplied with the Leica M2S Camera kit is composed of three unitsflash bracket (attaches to base of camera), flashgun, and reflector (folding type). (See fig. 13-1). The two flash outlets mentioned previously are located onthe back of the Leica. The left-hand outlet is intended for electronic flash and type F (focal plane) bulbs.When using electronic flash, set the shutter at anyspeed 165.158 between 1 second and 1/50 second (whichis the Figure 134.Positioning the Leica meter on the M2S lightning mark on the speed ring dial).With camera. electronic flash, the effective exposuretime is, of course, governed by the flash durationof the electronic flash tube, and the film exposureis The lens aperture settings are the figures onthe controlled by adjustment of the lens aperture. dial at one end of the alternately light and dark The right-hand outlet is used withsynchronizing meter channels (fig. 13-5). Eachchannel width is type M flashbulbs. equal to approximately one lens stop changein exposure. The point at whichthe needle meets NOTE: Both electronic flash and flashbulb the channel edge has a corresponding position at units may be connected and used atthe same the other end of the channel nexttothe time. aperture figures on the meter (fig.13-5). This is the correct lens opening to use. For apredeter- mined lens stop, point the meter at thesubject Preventive Maintenance and rotate the knurled knob (connected tothe speed ring dial) until the, selected aperturefigure TheLeicacameragives many years of on the outer dial facesthe same channel to trouble-freeoperationifhandledcarefully, which the indicator needle points. This auto- stored under reasonably good conditions,and matically sets the shutter at the correct speed. cleaned periodically. During each periodicin- However, if a selected shutter speed is desired, spection, remove all items from thecarrying case turn the knurled knob until the blacktriangle and brush out all compartments.Also, inspect points to the speed, then set the lens aperture the camera and accessories for damage,loose (on lens barrel) to the figure facing the channel screws, and so forth.Clean the camera and them to to which the needle points. accessories thoroughly before returning For all incident light measurements, attach the case. When a camera is used orstored to a the opal incident light adapter (supplied with warm, moistclimate, it is necessary to clean it the meter) to the meter and follow the same more frequently and put alight coat of oil on procedures, but with the meter at thesubject the metal parts in order to prevent rustand position and facing the light source. corrosion.

Z04 198 iiChapter 13THE CAMERA If there is a malfunction of the Leica camera, correction, and problems associated with the take it to a qualified camera repairman; do not square negative format when printing. The stan- attempt to repair it yourself. To protect the lens dard size printing paper being 8 X 10 inch surfaces against dust, dirt, and other types of causes a loss of part of the square negative during foreign objects, cap the lenses with the lens caps enlargement. Therefore, composition of the sub- provided. To clean the lens surfaces, use a soft ject must be done accurately in the camera. camel's-hair brush or a clean, dry, soft linen Figure 13-8 illustrates the Mamiya C3 from cloth. various angles, witha completelistofthe important camera parts included.

THE MAMIYA C3 Loading the Mamiya C3 This twin-lens reflex camera, like any other --camera, performs only as well as the individual Loading the Mamiya C3 Qiffers from loading who operates it. The Navy has had twin-lens other twin-lens reflex cameras; the film does not reflex cameras as standard stock items for some have to be wound around a 90-degree bend. time. However, just recently the Navy adopted, Because the supply spool of film and the takeup and is now supplying as standard stock, the spool lie in the same plane, the photographer has Mamiya C3 Professional Camera Kit (fig.13-7). greater control over thefilm asitis being The exceptional sturdiness of this camera, to- loaded. gether with its lens flexibility, has made it well suited and adaptable to photo journalistic work. NOTE: Before loading the Mamiya C3, turn the multiple exposure/film stop selector (fig. 13-8E) to ROLLFILM. Mamiya C3 Features Next, place the camera (lens down) on a firm The Mamiya C3 pree..sional camerais a working surface. Open the back lid by turning twin-lens reflex camera, using 120 rollfilm, and the back lid catch button (fig. 13-8J) so that the has a full complement of interchangeable lenses red dot is aligned vertically. Then push the back which range from wide angle (63mm) through lid catch button to the right, in the direction telephoto(180mm). Each of the interchangeable indicated by the arrow. The back lidis now lens sets consists of both the taking lens and the released and may be swung open. Also, the film viewing lens, both of which are identical in focal counter (D) is reset to 0. Pull out the takeup length. spool catch sfud (M) and giveit1/4 turn in either direction, so that the stud remains in the Also, each interchangeable lens set houses its out position. Insert the takeup spool in the own Seikoska shutter, having sreds ranging takeup spool chamber. After the takeup spool is from 1second to 1/500 second and B (Bulb); positioned correctly, release the takeup spool each is separately synchronized for either flash- catch stud (M) to its original position. Next, pull bulbs or electronic flash. out the film supply spool catch stud (L) in the Like any camera, the Mamiya C3 has both its same manner as the takeup spool catch stud. advantages and disadvantages. The square nega- Place the new roll of 120 film in the supply tive (2-1/4 X 2-1/4 inches) which means compo- chamber. Ensure that the paper band around the sition can be accomplished without turning the film is removed first. Now pull the paper leader camera, its compact size allowing ease of han- out far enough to permit inserting the tongue dling and rapidoperation,its ground glass end into the longer of the two slots in the viewing during exposure, 12 exposures on one takeup spool. Once the film has been properly loading, and interchangeable lenses are all advan- positioned over the film gate, and the film tages, Some disadvantages are the small negative leader (tongue) has been secured to the takeup size, necessity of processing a whole roll for only spool, grasp the filmwind crank (B). Turn the a few shots, no swings and tilts for distortion film-wind crank until the start marks (double

199 205 PEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 WM=

HANDLE

SUNSHADE 180 mm LENS 105 mm LENS 180 mm SUNSHADE 65 mm LENS 65 mm 1

MASK 65m:1171r PORROFLEX SUNSHADE 105 mm MASK 180 mm

165,180 Figure 13-7,The Mamlya C3 Professional Camera Kit,

200 BESTCOPY Chapter 13THE CAMERA AVAILABLE

LEGEND

A. FOCUSING KNOBS (Right and Left). J. BACK LID CATCH BUTTON. S. LENS-SHUTTER CATCH LOCK BUTTON. B. FILMWIND CRANK. K. RED WINDOW COVER. T. LENS-SHUTTER ASSEMBLY CATCH. C. SHUTTER RELEASE BUTTON. L. FILM SPOOL CATCH STUD. D. FILM COUNTER WINDOW. M. TAKEUP SPOOL CATCH STUD. U. DISTANCE SCALE. E. MULTIPLE EXPOSURE FILM STOP N. START MARKS (Right and Left). V. EXPOSURE CORRECTION SCALE. SELECTOR, 0. SHUTTER COCKING LEVER. W. FILM SPEED DIAL (ASA). F' FOCUSING HOOD FRONT. P. SYNCHROFLASH MX SELECTOR. X. BACK LID HINGE RELEASE . O. FRAME VIEWFINDER LID. O. SYNCHROFLASH TIP. Y. FRAME VIEWFINDER MASK STUDS. H. MAGNIFYING GLASS. R. LENS-SHUTTER ASSEMBLY Z. CABLE RELEASE SOCKET. I. FOCUSING HOOD LOCKSCREW. CHANGEKNOB

166.161 Figure 13.8. The parts of the Mamiya C3 camera.

201 207 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

headed arrows), printed on thepaper leader, automatic when the multiple exposure/film stop come into alignment withthe camera start selector (E) is set on ROLLFILM. At this setting marks (N) located near theupper part of the the shutter release button (C) is operable only film gate as shown in figure 13-9. once with each film advance operation. How- Swing the back lid closed, and applyfirm ever, this locking of the shutter button does not pressure at each corner of the lid toensure that work when the camera is unloaded. both corners engage correctly with thecamera body. Lock it by simultaneously pressingthe back lid catch button (fig. 13-8J) down and Unloading the Mamiya C3 turning it to the left. Next, set the film speed (ASA.) dial (W) to correspond with theASA of Once the last exposure (number 12) is made, the loaded film. turn the filmwind crank until thepaper film backing is felt to pull loose from the supply spool. Then open the back lidcover, as outlined in the loading procedure, andremove the roll of exposed film. Seal the roll of exposed film with the attached gum label.

Viewing

Viewing with the Mamiya C3camera is accomplished by lifting the focusing hoodcover (fig. 13-8F) upward. When the focusing hood is fully open, the .back and sides springup and form an enclosure (hood) around the focusing ground glass. Directly under the ground glass isa Fresnel type field lens which gives added brightness over the entire field of view for faster focusing and for easier composingeven under dim lighting conditions. 165.162 Figure 13.9.Loading the MamiyaC3 camera. Viewing isaccomplished in either of two mannerseye level and waist level. To prepare the focusing hood for eye level viewing, first press the frame viewfinder lid (G) all the way down until it lock9 in place. Onenow sights FILM ADVANCE.To advancethefirst through the rear peephole and looks through the frame of film into the correct position, turn the opening of the eye level "sports" finder. film-wind crank (fig.13-8B) in a clockwise direction until it stops. Once the film is advanced, the NOTE: When using the eye level method of film counter (D) automatically indicates the first viewing, ensure that the appropriate mask (fig. exposure (numeral 1). Now turn the film-wind 13-7) is attached to the frame viewfinder mask crank counterclockwise until it stops, and fold studs (fig. 13-8Y). the crank out of the way. (Folded position is shown in figure 13-8.) Repeat the above film When using the eye level method of viewing, advance procedure after each operation of the especiallyforactior,or sports,it may be shutterexposure taken. impractical or unnecessary to focuson the The red window cover (fig,13-8K) may be slid ground glass. Therefore, focusingmay be accom- open to ascertain whether or not the camera plished by using the appropriate lens distance contains film. Double exposure prevention is scale (fig. 13-8U). 208 202 Chapter 13THE CAMERA

Focusing NOTE: Use the appropriate exposure correction scale for the particular lens in use when Actual focusing is accomplished by rotating making parallax corrections. either of the focusing knobs (fig. 13-8A). This feature permits use of either hand, whichever is most convenient. To correctly focus with a twin-lens reflex camera, rack the lens forward to 1.5 bring the image on the ground glass out of focus. Then rack the lens backward slowly until the 2 image returns to sharp focus. Using this method consistently greatly improves one's technique. There are times when critical focusing is necessary, especially for closeup work or when IMAGINARY 3 using either the wide angle or the telephoto LINE lenses. Critical focus, with the Mamiya C3, is accomplished by using the magnifying glass provided. To bring the magnifying. glass into position, press on the frame viewfinder lid (G) until the magnifying glass assembly flips up. Hold the eye directly over the magnifying glass and focus the subject on the ground glass as GROUND GLASS described earlier. To secure the magnifying glass, gently push down on the magnifying glass 165.163 assembly until it snaps back into its folded Figure 1310.The Mamiya C3 ground glass. position.

Parallax Lenses Parallax refers to the difference between what is seen through the viewing lens and what is One of the main advantages of the Mamiya C3 actually transmitted to the film by the taking cameraisthe abilityto interchange lenses, lens.Since, on the Mamiya C3, thereis a thereby permitting use of the camera under a physical separation between the viewing and wide variety of shooting assignments. taking lenses, parallax correction is necessary at The Mamiya C3 Camera Kit (fig. 13-7) con- close subject distances. The clear lines drawn tainsthreeinterchangeablelenses-65mm, across the upper section of the groundglass (fig. 105mm, and 180mm. All are fully corrected 13.10), in conjunction with the camera's expo- anastigmat lenses. The 65mm, f/3.5 wide angle sure correction scale (fig. 13-8V), are used for lens is well suited for closeup work because the correcting parallax errors. lens-subject distance may at times be as close as When the exposure correction scale indicates 4 inches. The 65mm wide angle lens has f/stops a factor of 1.5, the upper line on theground ranging from f/3.5 to f/32. The 105mm, f/3.5 glass (fig. 13-10) defines the upper limit of the long focal length also has an f/stop range from subject as it appears on the film. When the f/3.5 to f/32, and is considered the all-purpose exposure correction scale indicates 2, the lower lens of the three provided inthe kit. The line on the ground glass defines the upper limit. 180mm, f/4.5telephoto lensisparticularly If the exposure correction scale indicates 3, use suited for stage action photography, portraiture, an imaginary line across the center ofthe ground and candid shots in situations where the subject glass (fig.13.10) as the tipper limit of the cannot be easily approached. The 180mm lens subject matter. has f/stops ranging from f/4.5 to f/45.

203 209 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

CHANGING LENSES.To change lens shut- For flash photography, the flashgun or elec- ter assemblies on the Mamiya C3, place the tronic flash unit may be attached to the acces- camera on a firm working surface. Make sure the sory clip. The flash cord is then connected to lens mount is fully retracted into the camera the camera synchroflash tip (fig. 13-8Q). body. Set the lens-shutter assembly change knob When usingclass M flashbulbs,setthe to UNLOCK as shown in (A) of figure 13-11. In synchroflash M-X selector (fig. 13-8P) to M. This this position the lens locking springs release and permits accurate, synchronization at all shutter a light trap that protects the film front exposure speeds. If an electronic flash unit is used, set the closes. Notice also that a red warning signal is synchroflash M-X selector to X. The X setting visible on the ground glass. Next, push the should also be used when taking pictures with- lens-shutter catch lock button towards the front out flash. of the camera as shown in (A) of figure 13-11. Then press down on the knurled head of the lens-shutter assembly catch (fig. 13-8T). Allow it Accessories to swing forward and over to the opposite side of the camera as shown in (B) of figure 13-11. The Mamiya C3 Professional Camera Kit has The lens-shutter assembly can then be lifted out the following accessories: and off the camera body as shown in (C) of figure 13-11. To insert a new lens-shutter assembly on the 1. Lens covers for each lens-shutter assembly. camera body, carefully lower it into position on 2. Filters (screw-in type). the lens mount as shown in (D) of figure 13-11. 3. Sunshades for each lens-shutter assembly. Then move the lens-shutter assembly catch to its 4. Viewfinder masks. original position and turn the lens-shutterassem- 5. Neck strap which attaches to the strap bly change knob to LOCK. This secures the lens eyelets. locking springs and opens the light trap. Notice 6. A grip handle which screws into the tripod that the red warning signal on the ground glass is socket. It provides you with a steady grip on the no longer visible. camera during exposure. 7. A Porroflex unit which is a reflex minor attachment that permits eye level viewing and Shutters focusing. To attach the Porroflex to the Mamiya C3, first remove the focusing hood assembly by The shutters of each of three lens-shutter loosening the lockscrew (fig. 13-8J) and lifting it assemblies are the between-the-lens type and are off. Then slip the Porroflex on and tighten the identical. The shutter speeds are engraved on a lockscrew. The Porroflex is indispensable for rotating speed ring, which is turned until the candid and press photography. desired speed appears opposite the triangular indicator mark. The speeds range from 1 second to 1/500 second and B (Bulb). The shutter Preventive Maintenance works independently of the film advance mechanism; therefore, it must be cocked before each When using the Marliya C3, you should bear exposure. This is accomplished by pushing down in mind that it is a precision piece of equipment on the shutter cocking lever (fig. 13-80). and deserves careful handling. Never force any To release the shutter, use a steady downward working part of the Mamiya C3; if a knob or pressure on the shutter release button,fig. button does not function properly, have a 13-8C). When using a cable release, screw it into qualified camera repairman check it over. the cable release socket (fig. 13-8Z). In general, the Mamiya C3 camera kit should be checked over and cleaned periodically; how CAUTION: After the shutter is cocked, DO often depends on the type of work to which the NOT attempt to change shutter speed, as this camera is subjected. At the time of inspection, may cause shutter malfunction. 210 check operation of each lens-shutter assembly. 204 BEST Chapter 13-THE CAMERA COPYAVAILABL

LENS-SHUTTER CATCH LENS-SHUTTER LOCK BUTTON ASSEMBLY CATCH

4011

LENS-SHUTTER ASSEMBLY CHANGE KNOB A

C Figure 13.11.Changing lensshutter assemblies on the Mamiya 205 ;n1 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Check the ground glass focus against the dis- offtapesealand beginthreading backing tancescale. Go over the entire camera and paperprinted side outwardsthrough the roller tighten all screws which may have worked loose. of the film feeler mechanism (fig. 13-13E) and Clean out the film chamber and inside of the push the paper leader into the long slot (fig. bellows with a low-pressure air supply. Clean all 13-13F) of. the take-up spool, using the crank lenses with a soft camel's-hair brush or wipe for correct positioning. The arrow or line on the clean with a soft, lint-free linen cloth. film backing paper should align with the start marks (lower silver squares) on the body of the camera (fig. 13-13G). Tighten the backing paper THE ROLLEIFLEX 2 1/4 TWINLENS by one half turn of the crank, while braking the REFLEX full spool with the thumb (fig. 13-13G). Close the camera by pressing the back with your palm, The Rolleiflex has been a Navy standard stock folding down the back lock lever, and securing item for many years. The Rolleiflex is known it. for its ruggedness and its precise photo quality. Advance the film to No.1 by turning the Known commonly. as the "Rol lei," this camera crank continuously until it stopspast a slight is equipped with 80mm f/2.8 exposure and resistance during the last turn, when the counter viewing lens, with f stops to f/22 and focusing mechanism engagesand then in the opposite from 3feetto infinity. The Rol leiuses a direction until it stops again. The crank will now between-tile-lens shutter capable of speeds from be locked in the starting position. The film 1 to 1/500 second, plus B and MX synchroni- frame counter will indicate No. 1, the shutter zation and a selftimer. will be cocked, and the film will be in the Other features of the Rol lei include a com- correct position ready for the first exposure. bined shutter-cock and film advance crank; automaticfilmloading and frame counter; double exposure prevention with provision for Setting DIN/ASA Rating and Correct Exposure intentional double exposures; adjustable pressure plate to accommodate 35mm, 120 or the To adjust the DIN/ASA speed rating, first longer 220 films; a built-in exposure meter determine the speed of the film to be used. The coupled to the lens aperture wheel; and an DIN/ASA rating can be found on the film box adjustmentforcompensatingfilters.(Fig. or accompanying instruction sheet. Gently press 13-12). and turn the film-speed selector knob (figure 13-12H) until the corresponding speed rating appears above the indicator mark in the DIN and Loading ASA window. The intermediate film speeds are indicated by dots between the actual numbers. To, load, open the camera by pushing the Whenever a different speed film is used remem- safety back lock at the tripod socket to the side ber to reset the new DIN/ASA value. (fig,13-13A),liftthe back lock lever (fig. A film-type reminder is located on the side of 13.13B), and pull the back open. the focusing knob (see fig. 13-12F). Turn the Next adjust the film guide plate (fig. 13-13C) knurled knob to set the film typeblack and to accommodate the type film to be used. Press white, color artificial light, color daylight, or the plate against the back, push it up or down color negative. until it stops, and let it spring forward into its If a filter is being used which requires a longer normal plane. When using 120 or 220 rollfllm, exposure because of the filter factor, set the the inscription 2 1/4 X 2 1/4 must be visible as filter factor number to the corresponding num- in figure 13-13C. ber located on the edge of the film speed To insert a new film spool, pull out the film selector knob. If no filter is being used then the spool knob of the lower spool chamber (fig. setting should be zero. 13.13D), insert the film, right side first, and Now that the proper DIN/ASA value and allow the film knob to return to 12010. Tear filter factor have been set, the correct exposure 206 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 13THE CAMERA

LEGEND

A. SHUTTER RELEASE. J. EXPOSURE COUNTER. B. SHUTTER-SPEED SELECTOR KNOB. K. 120-220 FILM SELECTOR.

C. EXPOSURE METER. L. FILM ADVANCE /SHUTTER COCKING LEVER. D. APERTURE SELECTOR KNOB. IL EXPOSURE METER DIAL. E. FLASH SYNC TERMINAL. N. DISTANCE SCALE. F. FOCUSING KNOB. 0. DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE. G. TAKE-UP SPOOL LOCK. P.f/STOP DIAL. R. FILM-SPEED SELECTOR KNOB. 0. SHUTTER-SPEED DIAL. I. FILM SPOOL LOCK . R. FOCUSING HOOD.

106.210 Figure 13.12. The parts of the Rolleiflex. 213 207 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

1011111111111h:1'111111111111011111

165.217 Figure 1113.Loading can be set by first selecting either the shutter for by the proper pointer adjustment. speed or f/stop and then adjusting the second The Rollei automatic exposure control covers factor until both pointers of the exposure meter an extremely wide measuring range andis are aligned (fig. 13-12M). limited only by the poorest illumination. Should you select the shutter speed first, turn the shutter speed selector knob (fig. 13-12B) untilthe ,desired shutter speed (redfigure) Focusing and Viewing appears on the f/stop dial (fig. 13-12Q), and then adjust the f/stop by turning the aperture To open the focusing hood (fig. 13-12R), lift selector knob 'fig. 13-12D) until both exposure the rear edge of hood. To close, fold in both meter pointers are lined upthe correct expo- sides. sure is now set. To raise the focusing magnifier, press the The exposure meter is directly cross-coupled sports (direct) viewfinder panel inward. At the to thespeed and stopsettings. Adjustment same time, grip the upper edge of the hood with according to the meter automatically sets the two fingers, pushing the panel gently inward depth-of-field indicator as well. with the fingertip. To close the magnifier, just Thedecisiontosetthe speed or f/stop push it down until it locks in place. depends solely on whether you prefer a faster To focus, turn the focusing knob until the shutter speed or a greater depth-of field. picture is pin-sharp or until the two halves of the Anysuddenchangeinlightintensity image meet in the center of the viewfinder. The indicated by the moving meter heedlecan be Rollei can be focused on objects as close as 3 noticed instantly and can then be compensated feet. 214 208 Chapter 13THE CAMERA

Sport scenes and fast moving objects can be anism can be by-passed: After exposure,move framed more conveniently through the direct thereleaseringatthebase of the crank view (sports) finder. Only a slight raising or counterclockwiseandthenturnthecrank lowering of the camera is needed to alternate through one complete backward revolution until between observing the center portion of the it stops. This operation cocks the shutter fora focusing screen (to control sharpness) and the second exposure without advancing the film. full open view in the finder. To open the finder press the panel inward all the way and to close gently tap both sides of the hood. Preventive Maintenance Dependable performance isthe reward for careful handling of your camera. Releasing the Shutter The makers of Rol lei recommend the following care: Up to the moment of exposure all camera settings are kept under perfect control: sharp- Clean all optical surfaces, with a camel's hair ness,framing,exposure, shutter speed, and brush to remove dust, then gently wipe off depth-of-field. However, they car, be readjusted fingerprints with a softcloth or doeskin. On instantly if the subject so requires. thecontoured undersurtace of the focusing To unlock the shutter release, move the screen, useaclean soft brush only; avoid releasetothe down position and press tI' touchingthescreen. To preventadust- shutter release gently. After each shot, swing out attracting electrostatic charge, breathe onto the the crank, turn it forward with one continuous surfaces before and after cleaning and let mois- swing, until it stops and then swing it back again ture evaporate, do not wipe off. tostop. The shutteris now automatically cocked. The crank will turn only after the NOTE: The lenses have abrasion resistant shutter is released. Double exposures or blank anti-reflection coatings. The reflex mirror is also frames are positively eliminated. covered with a special protective layer to with- standscratches and corrosion. However,all NOTE: For intentional multipleor trick cleaning should be done carefully and only when exposures the double exposure prevention mech- necessary. CHAPTER 14

BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

Photojournalism is a form of communications Thirdly, you must know to whom you are which plays a vital part in modem news report- communicating. Is it a specific audience which ing. To convey its message, photojournalism uses has some knowledge of your subject? Is it to a harmonious combination of photographs and other Navymen, or dependents? Is the group words. Many of the leading magazines and mixed with men, women, and children? The way newspapers attribute their success to photojour- you will cover or approach a subject is depen- nalism. The reason for this is simplea good dent upon the specific audience. picture can at a glance portray the essence of a Most importantly, you must master the use of news or feature story. the camera. Your camera is a mechanical device Well composed, action-packed pictures with that sees only a limited area and exercises no carefully worded outlines have reader appeal, selection over action that takes place in front of realism, and permanence. Do you remember the it. In skilled hands, these limitations can be the photographs of the raising of the American flag camera's greatest asset. You, as the man behind over Mount Suribachi, the signing of Japan's the camera, can use this limited view to exclude surrender aboard the battleship Missouri (figure the extraneous and focus on your message. You 14-1), the swearing-in of Lyndon B. Johnson do this by determining which lens, camera angle, aboard Air Force One, or the planting of Old lighting, and timing will capture the picture Glory on the moon? How many of the words which will best communicate your story. written about these events do you remember? This chapter will introduce you to photojour- Pictures that capture the essense of a news nalism and discuss some of the techniques by story or develop a feature on some aspect of which it is applied. Maximum emphasis will be Navy life are in great demand. The photojoumal- placed on achieving good photographic composi- Ast's objectiveisto communicate primarily tion, interest, impact, and technical quality. thrOugh photographs. To be an effective photojournalist you must understand the following fundamentals. HISTORY OF MILITARY First you must know and understand your PHOTOJOURNALISM subject. No one can communicate information about a subject of which he has no knowledge. It isn't necessary to approve of a subject in order The history and growth of military photojour- to understand it. But unless you understand nalism has been brief but significant. It had its your subject, how can you interpret it accu- beginning slightly over 100 years ago when rately with your photographs and get someone Matthew Brady and his assistants were commis- else to understand it? sioned to document the Civil War pictorially. Secondly, you must know why you are Their photographs were made on wet plates communicating. You should always have a pur- which had to be processed immediately, thus pose for your message. Why send a messageif limiting the photographer's mobility. Their film there is no purpose for it? The purpose might be was of low sensitivity and they could not as simple as sharing an emotion orexperience. photograph action. There was no means to get Know or establish the purpose and fulfill it. the photographs to the publisher quickly, so 216210 f. BEST COPY!WADABLE Chapter 14 BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

..../1 '4

k, , . '1 %., ,. *r, , r .1 "; 4 , i., Vs . fie r M 141 . I' , , I lf ., .$ Lt: , ..., .;,

Jr r

165228 Figure 141. - -TOKYO BAY, JAPAN Fleet Admiral Chester W. Nimitz signs the Japanese surrender document aboard the battleship USS Missouri (BB-63). Looking on, from left, are General Douglas MacArthur, Admiral William F. Halsey, and Reef Admiral Forrest P. Sherman, Deputy Chief of Staff for Fleet Admiral Nimitz. JOURNALIST 3 & 2 interest was limited. No processes for reproduc- and became afinerskill.Artistry and the ing a photograph in a newspaper were known at "looking behind" pure recording on film led that time, except by having an artist copy them photographers in the Korean War to begin to into line drawings. These problems did not concentrate on people.In these areas, they destroy the desire for pictures or the value of began to document moods and feelings, to look photojournalism as it then existed, but rather for pictures that expressed what was not readily posed challenges to cause people to search fora apparent on the surface, and to concentrate on better way to use the pictures taken. pictures for news releases. It was during this By the time of the Spanish-American War period that the military photojournalist became and the equally important Hearst-Pulitzer circu- a professional. lation warcamera equipment had gotten small During the Vietnam War years, photography enough to be portable. Film on unbreakable but continued its advances in equipment and pro- dangerous cellulosebase had been invented cesses. Along with these advances, photojournal- which could be exposed in one place and ism reached new highs, providing just short of a processed many miles away and many hours "you were there" atmosphere of the war. later. Sensitivity had been raised so that action Today, the Navy photojournalistfillshis could be photographed. Quicker transportation mission as a vital member of the naval establish- speeded news photographs to the publisher ment.His goalisto communicate through while their news value was still high. Methods of photographs with the military and civilian public photoengraving,thoughstillcrude,allowed telling the Navy's story to his countrymen and newspapers to print several halftones along with their allies. He must have initiative, the ability to etchings and line cuts. communicate, be able to plan, be creative, be Military photographers took many pictures able to cooperate with the people he will work during World War I, but the importance of these with, and he must possess the desire to excel. photographs as an adjunct to the written history of the war was not realized for many years. The period between the World Wars was very importanttophotojournalism."Piaything" ENLISTED PHOTOJOURNALISM photography yielded to more exacting photo- COURSE graphy as a science. Cameras designed for press work became available in a price range within An advanced nine-month photojournalism the budget of the average newspaper. The sound course is conducted annually at a civilian institu- motion picture, the miniature camera, the fast tion for selected Navy and Marine Corps Jour- lens, the flash lamp, flash synchronization, and nalists and Photographers. The subject matter hundreds of film, emulsion, and laboratory taught is very sophisticated in anture. Some of innovations were put to use. Most important, theareascoveredare:News photography; publicdesirefor news pictures and editor feature photography; cutline writing; picture acceptance of photography as a tool of journal- storywriting; pictorial layoutin brochures, ism came to be recognized. magazines, newspapers, and so forth; introduc- World War II saw news photography in the tion to .the graphic arts; color photography; and military services rise to a peak. Early in the-war some general news reporting. the services drafted professional photographers Graduates of this course are assigned special and formed teams to document the history of NECs (PH-8148) which designate themas a United States international involvement. They photojournalist (Documentary/News Still Photo- went one step father; they used their talents to grapher). After acquiring an NEC of this type, a show the horrors of war. They took pictures Journalist or Photographer will normally be with stopping power, pictures that had impact, assigned duty only where his specialized talents pictures that forced the viewer to look and read are needed. the copy. Details for application to attend this training Photography, by the time of the Korean War, cow are contained in the Manual of Naval rose above an improved and exacting science, Photography (OPNAVINST P-3150.6). 212 Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

PHOTOGRAPHIC COVERAGE In shooting a boxing match for example, you would work at top speed and usually under great Photographic coverage is invaluable in most pressure. You record developments as they publications. Through effective layout, photo- occur, with little regard for the control ofthe graphs can be used independently as lead stories men in the ring. Your ingenuity and alert ob- with merely a cutline accompanying them. In servations will have to be called upon to ensure other uses, photographs can support headlines any technical quality at all. In shootingwei-- and written spot news accounts as well as known personalities, photograph them doing feature s' ones. something. A pictureof this type without The photograph serves as a definition for action, regardless of the prominence of the words. No two people imagine identical pictures personality, is not in itself a story-telling picture. through words along. Groups of words rarely The successful and usable news picture is the cause like mental images in everyone.Different one with impact, the one that immediately people see different pictures in their mental draws the reader's attention either to the cutline interpretations of verbal descriptions of a given or to the accompanying story. scene. From a photograph, everyone getsthe same mental picture. Feature Photos TYPES OF NEWS PHOTOS The purpose of the photo feature is to tell a story about a given subject, selected and planned Whatisanews photograph? Just about by the photojournalist, using real people or real everything said about recognizing and gathering things, in real or believable settings. Arrange news can also be applied to the newspicture. t ierything to appear as if the story isactually News pictures also have common news elements. happening; you willhavefullcontrol over These same 10 elementsimme:!jacy, proximity, composition, posing, arrangement, and expres- conseqt ence,prominence,suspense,oddity, sions of the subject. (See figure 14-3.) Create a conflict, sex, emotion, and progressare essen- lighting effect that establishes mood or realism tialto successful photojournalism. You can in your picture and select a precise camera angle judge the newsworthiness of a photo by the whichisneeded to give emphasis to your degree to which these elements are present. The photographs. In shooting the feature story you newsworthiness of a photo, like that of an event, are rarely hurried, and there areopportunities to depends on the strength of intensity of the news change your setups if you're not entirely satis- element it contains (Figure 14-2.) fied. You may also take time to exercise your Nearly all news photography is classified in technical know-how (in processing control) so as two categoriesSPOT NEWS and FEATURES. to produce a photograph of the highest quality. This applies to sports as well as any uther type An additional point in the favor of shooting of newsworthy activity. Since the spot news feature coverage is that you may "cover" your- picture achieves a dramatic quality, the unre- self by taking additional pictures; the straight hearsed actionis obvious to the reader. The news photographer is afforded little more than a feature picture, on the other hand, is made up of elements that allow it to tell its story with a split second for the quick "grab" shot. brief cutline or, on many occasions, no cutline at all. COVERAGE PLANNING

Spot News Photos Planning isessential to good news photography. When you are aware of the subject or In covering unrehearsed action, control over event you want to portray, plan the photo- the kind of picture you will get is somewhat graphic coverage in such a manner that the story limited by the situation. may be toldthrough photographs alonftif 21W PEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

165.229 Figure 142.Spot news photography often involves the shooting of unrehearsed action suchas the rescue and assistance team from the destroyer USS Charles R. Ware fighting a fire aboarda stricken tanker. necessary. The photographs must have imagina- Shoot only when you have in mind what tion and a professional news touch if the results you want to get. are to be acceptable to the news media. Strive for simplicity, interjecting the human Keep thepictures from looking posed. element into your pictures. Create impressions, Posed pictures are permissible and posing often use people, and remember always thatitis is necessary for best results, but this fact should people andv iiatthey do inthe course of not be discernible in the finished photograph. everyday living that makes news. The stageshould be set,props placed for Same of the aspects of good photography are dramatic effect, and the people told what to do action (actual or implied), naturalness, balance, and how to look. Whenever possible, do not ask and effective use of natural or artificial lighting. the people to "hold for one more." Most people To ensure a professional quality to pictorial will do almost anything required for the first coverage of news events, keep these tips in mind take; thereafter they quickly lose their interest during planning and shooting: in, and cooperation with the project,. and the 27.k 4 Chapter 14 BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

ever,will you be concerned with sweeping panoramas, unless of course they tell the story you want told.

Learn as much as you can of the event and the principles involved before you leave the public affairs office.

IDENTIFICATION

Always record sufficient information so that you may properly identify and prepare cutlines for your photographs upon returning to your office. There are several methods available for getting proper identification for your shots. You may have an assistant who could jot downthe information. Tape recording the identifications is an excellent method, Also, you could make a quick proof print and take it back to a person who can make the proper identification (this method should be pre-arranged). More information on preparing cutline is contained in Chapter 16. 165.230 Figure 142.Feature photos tell a story about a given subject selected and planned by the photo. journalist. The feature photo above shows SHOOTING SCRIPT a student holding a lizard ir,hismouth which isedible food during a survival, Some professional photojournalists plan their evasion, resistance, and escape course, shooting with great care, including a complete shooting schedule or script. However, the script should be studied prior to the assignment and committedtomemoryratherthanbeing picture suffers. However, if you feel that for checked shot by shot at the scene. Often when some technical reason you did not get the shooting at the scene you may have to depart picture the first time, do not hesitate to speak from your script. You must stay one jump ahead up and ask for another shot. Remember, you of the action and when the unexpected occurs, were sent on the assignment to get pictures and be prepared to make a change, keeping in mind this is what you are expected to deliver. your story angle and objectives. A good scriptis usually divided into two A smile or pleasant expression does not parts. The firstpartisconcerned with the show a lack of dignity; it shows that Navy men general idea of the picture story. All pertinent and women also have fun. If a happy emotion information as to names, places, times, and Mr your story, photograph the faces that fit the contacts are listed in this part. The second part emotion as shown in figure 14-4. lists the picture ideas and information pertinent to each shot. Move in on your subject and make your The followingisatypical example of a pictures show the desired action. Seldom, if shooting script: 215 221 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

3it

hYt 1,,4;s

185.231 Figure 144."SAILORS HAVE MORE FUN"If a happy emotion fits your story, photograph the faces that fit the emotion as shown above. Chapter 14 BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

Part 1: out to the students the proper method of viewing a scene. Use a shallow depth of a. WHO: NAME OF SUBJECT field, about waist-level camera position. PHI W.F. Strayer, 234 56 78 USN, Instruc- WHY: To identify aninstructor and a tor Phase 11, Naval Schools of Photography, couple of students attending the photo Pensacola, Florida. school. b. WHAT: SCOPE OF SUBJECT (Theme) c. SHOT 3: MEDIUM SHOT PH(A) School instructor and class during Instructor working with two different stu- training situation in the Phase IIarea in dents. Shoot from a low angle to separate building 1500 and in the field. subjects from background. WHY: To geta variety of pictures of c. WHEN:BESTPOSSIBLE TIME TO instructor and stu../znts and to show the SHOOT SUBJECT interest of the student in learning photo- The classisengagedinpractical work graphy. during the second week of each month. Shoot during the first practical assignment d. SHOT 4: MEDIUM SHOT which is from 1200 thru 1600 daily. Instructor pointing out toa student a special point of interest about the scene d. WHERE: SHOOTING LOCATION (Build- being photographed. Shoot over student's ing, street, ship, division, crew, or working shoulder using shallow depth of field. areas) WHY: To show instructor and student NA TTU Bldg. 1500, Phase II, east base- discussingthe job plan on which the ment and the grounds directly adjacent to student is working. Bldg. 1500, NAS, Pensacola, Florida. e. SHOT 5: MEDIUM SHOT e. WHY: REASON OR PURPOSE FOR Instructor checking a 4 X 5 inch film SHOOTING SUBJECT holder.Shootjustpastthestudent's To inform the Amcrican public of the shoulder atthe instructorabout waist training received by Photographer's Mate level. Class (A) School students. WHY: To show the reader the concern of the instructor relative to the equipment f. HOW:POSSIBLE CONTACTS AT and the student with whom he is working. SHOOTING LOCATION Leading Chief Jones, or PHI D.L. Hardy; f. SHOT 6: CLOSEUP telephone extension 4278. View of the instructor looking through the ground glass of the camera, with student Part 2: behind instructorabout waist level. WHY: To identify the subject being photo- a. SHOT 1: LONG SHOT graphed and instructor helping the student PH(A) School instructor in field with stu- to photograph the subject. Subject appears dents. Shoot between two row:, of students on the ground glass of the Speed Graphic. from a low angle to separate subjects from background. g. SHOT 7: CLOSEUP WHY: To show the reader the number of Instructor explaining the function of the students in the class and the system used to frontstandard on the Speed Graphic. acquaint them with the Speed Graphic. Shoot from a waist-level position. WHY: To illustrateto the reader the b. SHOT 2: MEDIUM SHOT intricate instrument with which the student Instructorworkingwith two students, is working in photo school. It can also be adjusting the Speed Graphic or pointing used as another identification shot. ZZ3217 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 h. SHOT 8: MEDIUM SHOT Remember, the shooting script is only a guide. Instructor discussing problem with a stu- for shooting a picture story. With a basic idea of dent and, if possible, another instructor. thesubjectanditsimportancewhich the Try to have the student showing something photographer gets through his own research slightly lower than waist level. one can better understandthesubject, and WHY: To show the reader the interest of obtain better results. the instructors in their students. A good shooting script should employ 'the following techniques: i. SHOT 9: MEDIUM OR CLOSEUP Instructor looking at the negative along with the student at the light table, discus- CHANGE OF PACE. During the actual sing exposure of the negative. Shoot from shooting session in covering a particular subject, opposite side of light table, from a high interest must somehow be maintained in in the angle, to show negative on the table. Use story.Interest can be retained by having a available light. The light table lights up the change of pace or varietyinthe coverage faces of the student and instructor. technique used by the photographer.Static WHY: To show the reader the conditions coverage of a subject can be eliminated by first under which the student completes his understanding the reason for certain types of assignment, using the instructor to help pictures to be taken; and second, by keeping him solve his problem of exposing film. these points in mind during the script writing and during the actual shooting. J. SHOT 10: MEDIUM SHOT Instructor discussing negative with other LONG SHOTS OR OVERALL SHOTS. Instructors in Phase II office. Shoot across Taken from a distance or with the aid of a wide desk with negative as the only thing in angle lens, these shots show the subject in its focus. Shoot existing light. entirety; relate it to its surroundings, and clarify WHY: To illustrate the conditions under the relationship of its different components to which theinstructors work together in one another. They are pictures which, at one helping the students obtain usable results as glance,present many different aspects of a quickly as possible. subjectwhichsubsequentlyisfurtherex- plainedin some of the other pictures in the k, SHOT 11: MEDIUM SHOT story. This type of picture is best taken from a Instructor looking at prints made by two high vantage pointroof, scaffold, ladder, etc. students. Shoot from the side. Have both students and instructor looking at the print MEDIUM SHOTS. These shots normally being held by one student. comprise the majority of the pictures that make WHY: To show the reader what the stu- up the picture story. They correspond to the dent's and instructor's missions are and impression which the eye receives in reality. their working relationship during the prac- They are used to show people, objects, things, tical assignments in Phase II. interiors, and action.

1. SHOT 12: MEDIUM SHOT CLOSEUPS. Closeups are explanatory pic- Instructor handing student a finished job tures which permit thephotographer.to show that has been graded. Shoot from a high importantaspects of the subjectingr'ea'ter angle over the student's shoulder, with job clarity and detail than would have appeared in and hand being the only things in focus. reality to an observer. Only in the form of a WHY: To illustrate the fact that the in- closeup can a face, a pair of hands doing things, structor helps the student not only during or a small but important object appear monuv the practical assignments, but also grades mental, interesting, and in proper proportion to the results obtained by the student. its significance to the story.

; 22118 Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

EQUIPMENT READINESS aggressiveness. Upon receipt of an assignment, your whole attitude must be that of determina- Speed is the essence of news photography, tion. Come what may, you must get pictures. especially spot news that just happens. It is, A Navy photojournalist is frequently in con- therefore, of utmost importance that you always tact with notable personalities from the military have a ready camera on hand with adequate organizations, the local and Federal Govern- supply of film,flash, and other associated ment, foreign countries, private industry, and equipment. When a spot news event occurs, you also many hundreds of people from all walks of will have little time to get your gear together life who at some time or another have had an and check it out. This means, then, that you association withthe Navy or other Armed must start your day off with a complete 'check Forces. of the equipment assigned to you. Almost without exception, all of these people Keepthecamerafreefromdirt,dust, may be photograph d without incident under moisture, and excessively rough handling. Store nearly any circumstance. Fear of what is ahead it in a readily accessible place in its carrying case and fear of standing in the shadow of great men when not in use. Whenever possible, the photo- cannot be a part of the personality of the news journalist operating from a PAO shop is assigned photographer. Be appropriately respectful but his own camera and accessories. Usually an neverfeel subservientorinferior.Finesse, arrangement of this type is worked out between courtesy, and straightforwardness in pursuing the public affairs officer and the officer in the job at hand immediately result in coopera- charge of the local photo lab, who, in most tion as well as quick action in seeing that the cases, would have administrative control over all mission is accomplished. photographic equipment. People being photographed rely on the photographer's ability to get the coverage desired and

., usually await the photographer's instructions. SELF-CONFIDENCE Photographers and newsmen are not unfamiliar sights on the horizon to the VIP. When a man Gaining an attitude of self-confidence is one has reached a state inlifeat which he has of the most difficult and important aspects of become a public figure, he is conscious that he becoming a good news photographer. A person- no longer enjoys the privacy of the average ality for the profession is a prerequisite for citizen. Therefore, knowing he is news, he is anyone who chooses to become a news photo- ready and willing to assist members of the grapher. working media. But, he cannot do this until you You must look upon occurrences with an have presented yourself. When your presence objective view. The knowledge of the mechanics with equipment in hand is noted, your VIP of photography is not enough. A photojournalist subject knows, through many years of experi- must possess an inquisitivenature that in- ence, that your job must be done with speed in herently causes him to want to know more order to meet deadlines. about what is going on around him. Diligence, In presenting yourself to a subject, usually the study, and practice are necessary to learn to use initialintroductionis made by an aide or the tools of the trade proficiently; aggressiveness assistant; however, there are times when you and a will to understand the motivations of your must do this yourself. An honest and courteous fellow men willaid you in your quest for approach at a diplomatic moment can be easily competence. effected. Simply remain in close proximity to The man who has a thorough knowledge of your subject, await the earliest break in con- his field and consistently displays such attributes versation, step forward, and state your name, as honor,finesse, diplomacy, courtesy, and rate, place of duty, and why you are there. honesty, as well as a straightforwardness, auto- When you are acknowledged, take the minimum matically develops self-confidence. of time necessary to get your pictures. Work All too often a photographer misses pictures with sureness, deftness, and thoroughness. If of great pictorial value because of the lack of you feel you did not get a picture, bring this to 219 225 BEST COPY All/ iLABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 your subject's attention immediately. Often you will find that straightforwardness gets you that second chance which so seldom comes to the news photographer. It if is impossible to shoot another pictureatthemoment, anditis sometimes, keep your eyes open and remain on the alert.Another opportunity may present itself. Be ready for it.

CREATING GOOD PICTURES Creating good pictures, news, feature, or otherwise, depends heavily on the imagination and know-how of the man behind the camera. He must possess a storehouse of imaginative ideasfor presenting simple, yet interesting pictures which emphasize a definite point of view.The shot must have both visual and emotional impact and offer the viewer something, at least a view, he doesn't always see, as shown infigure14-5.All of the qualities mentioned are a must for a photographer striving for good photographic composition. Basically, photographic composition is a combination of a main subject and its supporting elements to form a harmonious whole. This means that you must be able to recognizethese elements and then arrange them into the picture that will tell your story. Learning the art of good composition is similar to learning any other skill. First, learn 165.232 the rudiments correctly. Then, through much Figure 145.Good pictures must have emotional and practice and attention, develop the talent to the visualimpact suchas the photograph highest degree of perfection. In the early stages above showing underwater demolition team trainees undergoing strenuous physi- of learning, we depend almost exclusively on cal training with a log. what we can see and hear, imitating what has been done before. Much can be learned about composition by studying various works of art best. You should also arrange the subject in the and collections of good photographs. Each one picture so that it is clearly and predominately offers an example of how to present a subject in the main point of interest. The main idea of the an effective and interesting manner. By the picture should be immediately recognizable to simple process of attempting to duplicate some anyone viewing your photograph. If presented of these photographs, many of the basic ele- properly therewillbe no doubt as to the ments of composition can be learned. principal object and what was intended to be The proper placement of the subject within shown. the space of the photograph is one of the most There are no fixed set of rules to follow important elements of good composition. When- which will insure good composition. There are, ever possible, you should select and arrange the however,certaingeneralprinciples, such as subject elements, choosing the viewpoint and simplicity, point of interest, and balance, which lighting conditions which present the subject should be learned and used as guides, Being 220 226 Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM aware of these principles and applying them as point of interest may be a single object or much as practicable when composing a scene numerous ones arranged so that attentionis greatlyassists you inmaking an interesting directed to one definite point as shown in figure presentation of your subject. Application of 14-6. these principles alone, however, does not neces- Lines, shapes, human figures, etc., should be sarily produce a good picture. There are other directed so that they look or move toward the factors which contribute to a good composition point of interest in the picture. If you have a as well as the requirement that. the negative be group of people gathered around a table talking, technically correct as to focus, exposure, and keep theinterest intact and centralized by processing. having them lookat each other or at one individual of the group (The Last Supper by Leonardo daVinci). This unit of interest causes SIMPLICITY the observer's eyes to be drawn to the same point. Human figures attract attention more Frequently, the simplest arrangement of your strongly than most other subject matter. For subjectmatter makesthe most interesting instance, a photograph showing a person stand- presentation. Although each picture is made up ing at a distance in front of a building may leave of numerous small parts and contributing ele- the observer wondering whether the person or ments, none of these should appear conspicuous the building is the main subject. When including or portray more interest than the main object. people ina scene,don't photograph thcm The main object is the reason for making the looking directly at the camera. When people picture in the first place;all other elements should merely support and emphasize the main object. The scene should not be cluttered with a confusing number of objects and lines which detract from the subject. A viewpoint should be selected which eliminates surrounding distractions so that the principal subject .is readily recognized.If numerous lines or shapes are competing for interest with the subject, it may be difficult to recognize the main object or determine why the picture was made. Study the scene from all angles and decide exactly what you want to show, then strive to maintain this single idea as clearly as possible by eliminating se. unimportant or distracting elements from the picture. Keeping the arrangement simple makes the job of composition easier and the picture more interesting.

POINT OF INTEREST Most photographs, with a few exceptions, should have a single point of interest which tells 165.233 the viewer thisisthe reason for taking the Figure 14.6.The point of interest ofa picture is the photo. All other details support the point of point to which the eyesare drawn. The interest. The point of interest is the point to point of interest may besingle object or which the eyes are drawn. If there is nothing in numerous ones arrangedso that the et the picture to attract attention to a particular tention is directed to onedefinite point as area, the eyes wander throughout the scene. The shown above. 227 221 BEST COPY AVAILABLE MAILRBIE BESTCOPY JOURNALIST 3 & 2 look directly at us, we normally return the gaze is by the use of leading lines, shapes, or patterns. by looking directly into their eyes. However, Leading lines can be used to convey psychologi- when they look in another direction, our atten- cal impressions; curved lines lend gtace to a tion is drawn from them to the point at which photograph, while strong horizontal lines com- they are looking. Thus, if people are grouped bined with vertical lines indicate strength and around a piece of machinery or an aircraft, power.It may be a road, an arm or leg, a which is the main object of the picture, have shoreline, a patch of light or dark tones in the them look at the object rather than at the scene, or a line of sight (see figure 14-8). A good camera. leading line is one that starts near a corner of the scene and continues unbroken until it reaches the point of interest. It should end at this point, Rule of Thirds otherwise attention is carried beyond the main object in the picture. Point of interest, as used here, has exactly the same meaning and is frequently called the center of interest.Itis called "point" at this time Foreground and Background simply to prevent giving the impression that it should be located in the center of the picture The area in front of and behind a subject can space.Although good composition can be be used to set it off from the rest of the scene. obtained in some cases by placing the point of interest in the geometrical center of the picture area, it is generally a good idea to avoid placing it there. Too frequently it divides the picture into equal halves and makes it quite difficult to create a feeling of balance. Some photographers draw lines on the ground glass, dividing the picture into thirds both vertically and horizontally, and thereby locate the point of interest at one of the four intersections of theselines as illustrated in figure 14.7, This division is sometimes referred to as the rule of thirds. With many subjects, it is found, one of these intersections is the best location for the point of interest and gives the best feeling of balance to the composition. Most of the attention should be attracted to and held at this point. An artistic feeling for arrangement is an invaluable aid in composing a scene in order to make a striking photograph. If the principal object is too close to one edge, appears top-heavy, or in any way leaves the observer feeling that it is misplaced in the picture, the point of interest should be moved to another location; or a camera angle change to include another object may also balance the composition.

185.234 Leading Lines Figure 14.7.One of the four intersections formed by the vertical and horizontal lines in the rule One of the most common techniques in of thirds is usually a good location for e directing attention toward the point of interest composition's point of intereet, 222 228 BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

4...:714.401111% arall10,-

,arm1011111110- AtliNitt

165.235 Figure 14-6.Leading lines help direct attention toward 165.238 a composition's point of interest. Leading Figure 14-9.The point of interest in the photo above is lines can be a road, an arm or leg, a shore- framed using a cargo net in the fore- line, or even a line of sight. ground.

Camera Angle Avoid, however, a busy foreground or background. Too many details or unattractive details Camera position is very important in good will detract from the main subject. For instance, composition. It can help you to place emphasis a flag pole, or a sword of the command insignia, where you desire. Angles can be used to create growing out of someone's head lessens the effect the unusual when the scene is commonplace. of the photograph. Using a high, low, left, or right angle to your subject can produce an entirely new effect. Avoid shooting everything from the common eye-level. This is the same view seen by your Framing viewer all day long. Walk around the subject and determine which viewpoint will have the most Another method of confining attention to the impact, or the most pleasing effect. point of interest is by framing it with fore- When the camera is placed above the level lstf ground objects as shown in figure14-9. The the subject,itcreates a distant and detached object could be an arch, a window, a tree limb view. Shooting from a low angle produces a or even an arm or leg. dramatic and a statuesque effect. When the 223 "29/44 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 camera is aimed at a 45-degree angle toward the EXISTING LIGHT The successful photo- subject, it lends depth to the subject and gives journalist consistently uses existing lightlight the best identification. On the other hand, a that is there-- to capture a scene as it is. front view creates a flat appearance and will not last very long in the viewer's mind. Using existing light allows you to photograph asubjectquietlyandwith a minimum of equipment. That means you can devote your entireattentionto thesubject.And, with Lighting existing light, you can capture the mood of the situation, while artificial light might destroy it. Lighting is one of the important creative Existing light is the light that happens to be elements of composition. By controlling the on the scene, but is not limited to daylight. It light and directing it where it is wanted, minor may range from daylight pouring through a objects or distracting elements in the scene can window, the artificial light from a table lamp, to be subdued and thereby give more prominence the light from a fireplace. The pictures in figure tothemain point of interest. The type of 14-10 were taken with natural or existing light. lighting best suited for a subject depends on the The types of lighting you will encounter are: type of subject and the purpose of the picture. If maximum detail is desired in the shadows, the Front light. This is light that comes more or illumination should be soft and diffused. Side less from behind the camera. This is "flat" light lightingis most effective in showing texture. and provides little contrast because it throws However, light falling diagonally on the subject shadows behind asubjectso they are not from above and to one side of the camera is the recorded by the film. Front light is poor light most natural form of illumination. We are because it creates no illusion of depth and has accustomed to seeing most subjects under this no mood. Usually this type lighting should be condition in which the shadows are cast off to avoided. one side and slanted away from us, creating the Side light. This is the most common type of greatest apparent depth and roundness in the lighting. As it strikes the subject from the side it subject. brings out texture and provides depth that the Shadows are the kev to apparent depth in a front-lighted scene lacks. photograph. Without shadows the subject is Back light. This type of lighting is not easy to without form, curvature or texture, appearing use, primarily because the light source more or flatandlifeless.This does not mean that less faces the camera, illuminating the subject shadows should be harsh and black to achieve from the rear. However, it is dramatic light and these effects. They may be soft, yet of sufficient is the best for creating a mood. density to show the most delicate roundness of Light that comes directly from above or form. As a general rule, harsh black shadows are below a subject usually provides the worst type undesirable in a photograph due to the complete of illumination. In ho'th cases the light casts loss of detail in them. From a compositional unusual shadows, especially around the eyes. standpoint, however, black shadows can be very Finally, no matter what direction the light is useful in balancing a scene and directing atten- coming from, the general rule in black-and-white tion to the point of interest. photography is to expose for the shadows. While viewing the scene from various angles to To use existing light effectively you must be select the best camera position, observe critically aware of its strength and direction. Its strength the effects of illumination. In all probability, the will determine the exposure and the amount of most complementary lighting on an outdoor contrast. But more importantly, the direction of subject occurs only during one short period of the light will determine the effectiveness of your the day. For this reason, time your picture to pictures. take advantage of the most suitable available light or plan to create your own illumination AUXILIARY LIGHTThere will be many with auxiliary lights. times in your naval career wheexisting light BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

SIIIMIR.VMEMENNIN/

f 3.

74t7pormr.L....111/1

166,237 Figure 14-10.The pictures above were taken using existing light light that is thereto capture the scenes as they were. 225 231 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 =MI will not be adequate to allow you to capture the silhouetted subject gives overall strength to a picture you want or to create the desired effect. composition and isolates the subject through To remedy this situation, you will have to use contrast of thedark foreground against the auxiliary lighting. lighter background as shown in figure 14-11. Usually auxiliary lighting is thought of as bulb or electronicflash.However, other ways of bringing more light to a scene, such as incandescent lamps, foilreflectors, and even candles, may also be considered auxiliary lighting. In any case,itis used to increase illumination, fill in .1° shadow areas, or to stop action. 40. , Normally, the photojournalist resorts to auxil- .1161, AP . iary, lighting to add illumination. Usually this :* sob /*...' fr....4-- means bulb or electronic flash. But a simpler +AO way sometimes is to merely change the light .77ttek* bulbs in a room to higher wattage bulbs. The .,.,; *.""'"'' bulbs will give increased light but will not des- .645,( '.4419t 2, ..011 ANI 111111111111 troy the mood of the scene. When iiash must be used to add illumination the best results are obtained "hen the flash unit is removed from the camera. (Remember what was said about front light.) The off-camera flash provides more natural looking lighting, particularly when held high, by simulating side-lighting from ceiling lights, windows, or lamps. Or, it may be bounced from a wall or ceiling to give a soft, shadowless lighting comparable to the light from an overcast sky. Auxiliary lighting also is used frequently as a fill-in flash to "open up" harsh shadow areas, particularly outdoors in bright sunlight. This 1,44.4,1.epw also may be accomplished by simply reflecting sunlightintothe shadow areawith afoil reflector or light-colored board. Occasionally youwillneed to"stop" a subject's motion in a photograph. This can best be done with electronic flash, which offers a flash duration ranging from 1/1,000 of a second on up. The electronic flash canfreeze most action. However, it should only be used when other techniquesblur, panning, peak action would not be as effective. The important thing to know about auxiliary lighting is when and how to use it effectively so as to duplicate as closely aspossible existing light. 185,238 Figure 1411,Asilhouettedsubjectgivesoverall Silhouetting strength to a composition and isolates the subject through contrast of the dark When asubjectisbacklightedand then foregroundagainstthelighterback- underexposed,thisiscalledsilhouetting. A ground. M r- 23i BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

Patterns

Photographs can be made whichare pleasing in their composition and yet haveno specific point of interest. Theseare usually pietures of intricate designs or patternsas in figure 14-12. Such pictures are usually dependentupon the

whole pattern or design for theirharmony and fOr effectiveness.

COMPOSITIONAL LINES

The formation of lines ina composition is unavoidable. For example, linesare formed by the horizon, a person's limbs, the side ofa shirt, a fence, or a winding road. These linesvertical, horizontal, diagonal, or curvedlendtheir own wil element of emphasis toa composition. Vertical lines formed by elements in compositionsuggest strength and dignity (a sentryat attention), while horizontal lines suggest tranquilityand rest(a ship on the horizon at sunset).The diagonal line suggests action (climbingaircraft), and a variety of lines indicatesactivity such as the activity aboard the Navy yawlin figure 14-13. A feeling of grace and beauty isconveyed to the viewer by theuse of curvaceous lines, such as those in the billowing sails in figure 14-12, or those used in glamourand fashion photography.

185.239 BALANCE F10111114.12. Some compositions have no specific point of interest but are pleasing solely A good composition should have balance. In through their intricate designs or pat other words, your viewer shoudn't get the terns. uneasy feeling that the elements may come tumbling out of your compositi,m. A balanced composition gives a feeling of harmony to the distance from the center counter-balancea much whole setting. Elements of balance are placed in larger object just as though theywere on a pair opposing sections of a photograph in such a of scales. A small object of considerableimpor- manner that each section appears to have an tance and weight can be used to effectively equal amount of weight or value and the objects balance a large but less important object (as all appear to belong in the scene. Balancecan shown in figure 14 -14,) It is the mental impres- best be achieved by offsetting unequal sizes, sion of weight which is a factor in determining shapes, ::ies, or objects in a scene. the relative placement of objects ina scene. Size A good method of balancing objects of unlike alone does not determine the weightor value of shapes and weight is by placing them at unequal an object. The object's tone and placement in distances from the imaginary center of support. the picture are factors in determining its impor- In other words, a small object placeda greater tance. 233227 IBEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

f. LPGa; , 'Afartt

165.240 185.241 Figure 14-13.A variety of compositional Figure 1414.In good compositional balance a small lines suggests activity. element of considerable importance (the first women in the Navy to qualify as a Tone heavy equipment operator) can be used to effectively balance a large but less Tone refers to the color of each object in a important element picture. In black and white photography, the nothing more than shadows or cloud formations. color would run from white through all shades The balancing of equal or unequal tonal areas of grey and up to black. One of the most can be simplified by dividing the picture space effective ways of giving impact to the point of and arranging the objects in opposite thirds of interest is to contrast it sharply by color with the picture or at the intersections of the vertical the other objects in the picture. Tone helps to and horizontal lines. establish the mood of the picture. Variations in tones or contrast are important elements inthe distribution of weight in a DEPTH PERCEPTION composition. Darker tones create the impression of greater weight. Thus, a large light-toned As fas as the physical characteristics of a ,"9ct can be counterbalanced by a smaller photograph are concerned,ithas only two ark-toned ooject. The contrasting tones may be dimensionslengthandwidth,Nevertheless, 228 234 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

since we are accustomed to viewingnature in three dimensions,itis important that photographs also give the illusion of depthto make them appear more realistic. Theimpression of depth and distance is normallyobtained by mentally comparing the relative size ofvarious objects, near objects appearinglarge and the more distant objects much smaller, even though they arethe same physical dimensions. The

illusion of depth in 1'; photograph can easily be 4 created by the placement ofcommon objects in ,++; , :t+ theforeground or backgroundsothat the I , .11t± 1. relative sizes of all objectscan be determined or :'24,31+.-*K4rAS' by the selection ofa camera viewpoint which !Ikf.' gives the impression of distance byperspective. This illusion of distance is sometimesenhanced by exaggerating the perspective bychanging the camera position, by use of a wide anglt lens,or by emphasizing texture and modelingthrough the use of strong side lighting. Focusingthe principal object critically sharp and leavingthe background somewhat out of focususually directs more attention to the subjectand tends to increase the feeling of depth. Back lighting the subject gives better separationand makes it appear to stand out more prominently from the background, accentuating the subjectand increasing the feeling of depth. Thefeeling of depth can also be increased by makingthe foreground darker in tone than themain point 165.242 of Literest or the background. Insome cases this Figure 14.15. Good action is shot at its peak. is done during printing by simplyburning in the foreground. short and sometimes difficult to determine. To capture this action requires precise timing, and know-how (see figure 12-6). However, in feature ACTION development you have the advantage of being able to plan the action logically after studying Action in a photographic compositioncan be the job. eitherphysical action or itcan be implied action. In physical action, suchas a fleet runner, the THE PICTURE STORY motion or position of therunner cannot be held. It changes after the split secondin which the Knowing the detailed techniques for develop- picture is taken. ing a picture story are requirements for Action can be implied by senior a position which Journalists. At the JO 3 & 2 level, however,you suggests a physical action will take place,or it should be familiar with the various categories. can be facial in which the subject's face suggests There are four basic types of picture storiesin or expresses action or a definite emotion. addition to the single photo-cutlinetype. They Good action is shot at its peakas shown in aregenerallyclassfiedasIllustratedTest, figure 14.15. Where the action is fast-moving,as Picture-Text Combination, Pure Picture Story, itis in a sporting event, the peak of actionis and Picture Story Withina Text Story. 229 s a) JOURNALIST 3 & 2

ILLUSTRATED TEXT storyis told in words, the other in pictures. Both are complete in themselves. The text may The text, or story, is written first,then one or be used without the picture story, or thepicture more photographs areusedtoillustrate, or story may be used without the text.The dramatize its content. In reality, thisis not a combination of the two in a singlelayout, true picture story, since the pictures areinciden- however, makes the spread much moreeffective tal rather than an integral part ofthe text. The than either would be alone. photographs are used to dress up the page, make itattractive, giveit character, or establish a THE SINGLE PICTURE mood. Many magazines use the illustrated text format. They frequently introduce each story The single picture story is the most basicform which with a single illustration, full page size, of photojournalism. Singlepictures, filled with serves to attract thereader's etention and leads impact, allow the viewer to"feel" the action him into reading the story. and thus become involved with thesubject. The single picture story is similar tothe lead PICTURE-TEXT COMBINATION picture used in a longer picture story. It sums up the subject, evokes some emotion, orkeys the As the name itself indicates, thepicture-text action or the setting. The single picture,while combination type of picture story employs a strong, is also simple. combination of both pictures and text. The Every photographic situation is different so pictures, however, carry the weight of the story. there is no magic formula to tell you how to put The story is told primarily by relatedpictures impact or strength into a picture to makeit arranged in some form of continuity. The textis meaningful. important and provides worthwhileinformation Occasionally, the single meaningful picture is r'lative to the pictures, but it is subordinate to simply a matter of luckbeing at the rightplace the pictures. This is the easiest type of picture at the right time. More often thepicture is the story to develop, and the one mostcommonly result of careful planning. In either case, the used in the Navy. event is only captured because of thephotojour- nalist's timing. (See figure 14-16.) Timing means capturingthe moment of PURE PICTURE STORY greatest significance. There is no exact wayof predicting that moment. To be successful, you In the pure picture story there is no text, must anticipate what is coming andbe ready except for a brief introduction cutline.Of the four basic picture story types, this is the most when it arrives. difficult to develop. Pure picture storiesfre- quently are presented in sequences ofpictures THE ABSTRACT taken at brief intervals. For example, a pure picture story of a VIP's arrival might show his A photojournalist may be objective orsub- plane landing,his disembarkation from the jective in his approach to a subject. plane, shaking hands with a member of the When he is objective, he will try to recordthe greeting party, inspecting an honor guard,and subject as faithfully as possible. He will present entering a limousine. Pure picture stories nor- the subject for the viewer's owninterpretation. mally are used only when the action is simple When the approach is subjective, thephoto- and familiar enough to the average reader to journalist engages his feelings in hiswork. He require no lengthy word description. approaches the subject from thestandpoint of his reactions. He wants the viewer tofeel as he PICTURE STORY WITHIN TEXT felt when he recorded the subject.With this approach, the viewer is handed the reactionsof Thepicturestorywithintextactually the photojournalist. He sees as thephotojournal- presents two separate but related stories. One ist has seen, 230 236 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 14 BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

To sense and capture abstract elements you must have an understanding of what makes people react. And too, you must react yourself. You must see beauty and uglinecv, feel loveor hate, wonder at the great and small, andsense and appreciate your own. emotions (See figure 14-17.) To communicate the abstract in picturesyou must develop and use your inner sensitivity. The more itis used, the more your pictures will become a successful reflection of your experiences and emotional nature. And, the more these elements appear in your work; the more viewers become involved with the pictures.

THE INFORMAL PORTRAIT

Strong, expressive informal portraitsare the result of a successful interaction between the photojournalist and his subject. The most important element when shooting an informal portrait is to honestly convey the character and personality of the subject. With few exceptions, this cannot be done ina studio where thesubjectisposing.Inthis situation, he may appear very formal and withdrawn. The informal portrait is best made when the

subject is being himself. And thismeans when he. is in familiar surroundings, suchas his home, or his place of work. In these surroundings his hands, gestures and facial expressions beginto 165.243 convey his character and personality. Figure 14-16. Occasionally, the single picture story is The informal portrait is an excellent medium simply a matter of luck. More often the for relieving the boredom of the plastic formal picture is the result of careful planning. In either case the photojournalist must portraits, the police mug shots, and the "grip capture the moment of greatest signif- and grins" in Navy newspapers. Ifa person is of icance. the caliber or character to be selected "Sailor of the Year," project that character and personality rather than the person's ability to shake hands. Don't expect to get the best possible informal Itis the subjective approach that must be portraits by taking only two or three pictures. used to photograph the abstractthoughts, emo- When you begin, your subject willvery likely be tions, etc. These are the subjects that primarily uneasy and tense. As you shoot he will gradually involve feelings rather than fact. become relaxed. Thatis when your picture A photograph that captures an abstract idea begins to reflect his personality. or emotion conveys to the viewer something The eyes and the mouthare the important with which he can identify.It stimulates his parts of the informal portrait. They are where imagination and causes him to react emotion- theexpressions unique to each person are ally. revealed. Your job is to coax the expressions out 231 237 PEST COPY AVAILABLE

JOURNALIST 3 & 2

.4Zot,t.

, T "4 At",'

Ain

165.244 Figure 1417.The aublicte of abstracts primarily involve feelings ratherthan fact. You must see beauty or ugliness, feel love or hate, or wonder at the great and small and you must senseand appreciate your own emotions. its Chapter 14BASIC PHOTOJOURNALISM

of the subject. Usually thiscan be done through would beto keep the portrait simple and a little conversation while youare shooting, or concentrate on the face. by having him engaged in hiswork or talking Quite often it will be the available light thatis with another person. When he becomesinvolved the principle factor for adding depth andmood and forgets thecamera, the real expressions to the subject. Although formal portrait lighting begin appearing. (See figure 14-18.1 should be avoided, you should master itstech- There is no strong ruleon how much of your niques. This will give you an understanding of subject should be included inyour portrait. lighting's various effects and the changes itcan Ideally, an informal portrait willinclude every- make to the mood or shape ofa subject's face. thing that relates to the subject andnothing that The best lenses to use for informal portraits does not. In some cases this willmean including aremedium telephotosbetween 85mmand parts of the background because it relatesto the 105mm. A medium telephoto will minimize the subject. Or, it will mean throwingeverything out distortion you may get by workingtoo close of focus except the subject's face.A general rule with a normal lens and it will allowyou to work at a distance from your subject thatmay make BEST COPY AVAILABLE .him Jess conscious of the camera.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Always keep in mind that the onlyreason for taking a news picture is to get it published.A print suitable for personal viewingmay be wholly unsuitable for reproduction ina newspaper or magazine. Most printed media use the half-tonerepro- duction process (discussed in ch. 17) in which photographs are converted intoa pattern of dots. These dots vary in size accordingto the intensity of the tone they will produce. In light areas, the dots are so small they are almost invisible. In dark areas, the dotsare so close together that they look like a solidmass of black. The amount of printing ink applied by the dots, of course, is in proportion to the light and shaded areas of the original print. Because of this, pictures intended forrepro- duction must be clean and bright. The black must be strong enough to withstanda little "watering down." Important halftones in the picture must be clearly separated so they will not blend in with each other or become lost al- together in reproduction. Therefore, a picturecan be good in content and composition but not usuable for reproduction because itis lacking in three technical 185.245 elements required: focus, detail, andcontrast. Figure 1418.The eyes and the mouthare the impor- FOCUS, as discussed in previous chapters, tant parts of the informal portrait They means that the subject must be distinct, the are where the expressions unique to each image sharply defined. Focus for reproduction person are revealed. must entail extreme sharpness since halftones 233 239 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 lose some of their original sharpness inthe Officers in command status are responsible reproduction process. for the taking of official or unofficial photo- The halftone will not produce fineDETAIL. graphs, andareresponsiblefor supervision, Small detail in a newspaper is usually lost and censorship, and release of photographs.Un- therefore detail must` be overemphasized. The official photographs taken aboard ship, station most effective way to emphasizedetailis to or aircraft are eithersubmitted to the command- such move in close with the cameraand concentrate ing officer or a properly designated officer, on small areas. Anydetail which is important to as the PAO, forscreening to assure that no a picture should be aslarge as possible and classified matter is revealed. adequately lighted by natural light or the addi- The review of photographs must be objective tion of fill-in reflectors or flash. in nature. The prompt release forpublication of CONTRAST is the difference between the unclassifiedphotographs of interestto the light, dark, and the intermediate tones of a public and beneficial to the Navy isconsidered life, picture. A picture with normal contrast willhave mandatory. Photographs of general naval an image with a full rangeof tones from white such as ceremonies and athletic events, are not to black with all the intermediate greys.The :considered to be of a classified natureand image will be boldly definedbutwill not should be released automatically. Photographs reproduce well. A picture low in contrast or of doubtful classification for which releaseis "flat" has many intermediate grey tonesbut desired must be referred to the Chief ofIn- lacks clear blacks and whites. It has nobrilliance formation. The original negative and two prints or snap, lacks strengthand appears dull. It will should be forwarded to CHINFO, complying reproduce in halftones as an indistinct or"mud- with instructions for handling classified matter. dy" blur. Only a picture of normal contrast can In general, the directives for the public release be considered usable for halftonereproduction. of naval information as set forth in the Informa- tion.SecurityProgramRegulationDOD 5200.1-R or its Department of the Navy supplement OPNAV Instruction 5510.1 seriesalso SECURITY AND CLASSIFICATION apply to photography.

Because of the many new technical develop- FORWARDING PHOTOS TO NPC ments in the Navy, you will probably come in contact with security problems early in your job Whenever a photograph taken by acommand as a photojournalist, historical or news detailed is considered to be of wide Photographsdisclosingpertinent Wash- information of a classified nature are to be value, the Naval Photographic Center in ington, D.C. desires it for disseminationand accorded the same classification as the subject of record purposes (after you've made local useof the photograph, No classified photographs can it of course). Instructions for handlingphoto- be released for publication, No classified photo- the U.S. graphs are to be transmitted by facsimile, All graphs of this nature are covered in Nary Manual of Naval Photography,OPNAV pictures cleared for unrestricted public use must Instruction 3150.6 series. Upon receipt,NPC "OfficialUnitedStates Navy bestamped makes it available to appropriate officesin the PhotographReleased for Publication." Also, Depart- don't forget the Credit Line described in chapter Department of the Defense or the Navy 16. ment.

240

234 CHAPTER 15

INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRSPUBLICATIONS

Navy internal information has been described newly commissioned ship that does not have its as that information that will contribute to better own newspaperyet. You are the only JO understanding of WHY the Navy exists, WHAT aboard, and the commanding officer decides to is happening in the Navy, and WHERE the Navy take advantage of your training and experience is going in the fkatire. It informs activeand to launch Volume I, Number 1. Where doyou retired military, dependent, and civilianmem- begin? bers of the Navy's internal community. Internal Before you do anything, take time out to read information covers new policies andprograms, a few important directives and publications. You and newsworthy achievements by individualsor cannot start publishing a Navy newspaper be- their commands. cause you think itis a good idea. There are This chapter discusses various printed internal certain rules and regulations thatgovern the information media used by Navy Journalistsand establishment, organization, and operation of others in the Navy's internal informationpro- ship and station newspapers. gram,including newspapers, brochures, and Ship and stationnewspapers are published cruisebooks. under authority of NAVEXOS P-35 Department Probably th- most important of the printed of the Navy Publications and Printing Regula- internal media is the ship or stationnewspaper. tions. The Ship or Station Newspapers section of It reaches practically all members of its intended NAVEXOS P-35 covers such itemsas policy, audience. Some of these newspapersare edited, cost, size, frequency of publication,use of color, published, printedand distributed by Navy and actual printing. It will tellyou what you can personnel. As a Journalist,you must have an and cannot do with your publication! understanding of how a ship or stationnews- The Navy Ship and Station Newspaper Hand- paper is published from start to finish. This book (NAVSO P-3536) provides information chapter will explain how to establish, organize, necessary to create, evaluate, and improve an and administer a Navy newspaper. The technical authorized Navy newspaper. The publication aspect of producing a newspaper will be covered outlinespoliciesandoffersinformation on in chapter 17. determining the need foranewspaper and how to survey its readership to findareas requiring improvement.Specialemphasisisgivento SHIP AND STATION NEWSPAPERS modernizing ship and stationnewspapers both visually and textually to interest all thecrew Ship and station newspapers,range in size which includes a large and varied readership. The from small mimeographednews sheets to smart, handbook not only outlines policy, but also professional-type publications which resemble provides advice and guidance. Study this hand- small-town weeklies. As a JOyou will have book; itwillsave you work and possible many opportunities to work on a ship or station embarrassment. paper, both full time and in a collateral duty Once an officer advisor is appointed, staff capacity. members are assigned, andyou get adequate Let us assume that you have just reportedto a working space, where doyou go from here? 235 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

perform a The Paper's Mission modern society. Your newspaper can valuable service as a forumfor the exchange of As far as the Navy is concerned, allship or ideas. Use it in such a waythat people can air station newspapers have the same primarymis- their gripes and discuss itemsof interest and sion: to promote the efficiency, welfare,and concern. A goodship or station newspaper, contentment of personnel. In other words, your responsive to the needs of itsdiverse readership, paper serves the crew.(Figure 15-1.) canfillthe gaps of the civilian newspaper, magazine, radio, and televisionmedia. It should Navy people of all ages are seeking answers to to the entire a wide variety ofcomplex questions about contain information o1 interest

.9* 165.222 Figure 16.1. All ship and station newspapers havethe same primary missionserving as a positivefactor in promoting the efficiency, welfare, and contentment of acommand's personnel.

242 236 Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS readership. The news, pictures, and features unprejudiced. There is no excuse for printinga published should be informative and entertain- story that will injure somebody's feelings or ing. reputation. Your paper must be loyal to the Navy, your commanding officer, andyour shipmates. Your skipper should rate the highest Establish the Paper's Local Policy respect. His policies require your full support. Refrain from publishing material thai issugges- Every newspaper is guided by certain policies. tive or off-color, regardless of how subtly itmay Yours will be no exception. Policies are neces- be phrased. sary because they establish definite guidelines Lend a hand whenever there is a worthy forthe staff tofollow intheir day-to-day project underway. Give space to current issues activities. such as voting, drug abuse, race relations, etc. However, inestablishing local policies for Encourage participation at religious services,as your own paper, you have to exercise good appropriate. Recruit talent for "smokers" and judgment and alittle common sense. Your other shipboard entertainment. Support worth- policies should be reasonable; they must serve a while .charity campaigns. Promote morale and definite purpose. 'The Navy has already estab- esprit de corps. lished certain basic policies for ship and station newspapers.Your commanding officer may want to implement these along with some of his own. You too may have some suggestions. Size, Frequency, and Format In general, Navy policy may be summarized follows: Now that you know what your mission and policies will be, the next logical step in launch- Editorialcontent of ship and station inga newspaper is determining itssize,fre- newspapersshouldincreaseknowledge and quency of publication, and format. While Navy understanding of the Navy and of the mission papers vary, most of them belong in one of two and activities of the ship or station. categories: the DAILY PRESS or the WEEKLY NEWSPAPER There should be no emotional appeal The DAILY PRESS, is not normally printed in which is considered detrimental to the interests the U.S. or when a ship is in a port which has of the Navy or the nation. access to a commercial, English-language daily. Its main functions, is to publish current news of Gossip columns and editorials not having the world, including domestic and sports news, a direct bearing on naval affairs are not permit- when a ship is at sea, at a remote station where ted. no paper is available, or in a foreign port having no English-language daily. Commercial advertising is authorized only Aboard ship, the daily press usually contains under certain specified conditions which will be selected news items taken from the ship's discussed later in this chapter. teletype. It is usually printed with mimeograph equipment or offset equipment using direct Political campaign news is permitted only image masters. outside the continental U.S. inareas not serviced Although practices vary, the typical daily by civilian newspapers. It should be impartial press runs from 4 to 8 pages and is distributed to and nonpartisan. News coverage involvingoppos- the crew each morning around breakfast time. ingpartiesorcandidatesshouldbewell- Copy is typed straight across the page with a balanced. brief typewritten headline describing each news item. Because of the frequency of publication, In addition to the five points mentioned there few ships take the time and effort to justify are other factors governing your paper's policy. copy and lay it out in columns. Figure 15-2 Your news coverage must be fair, impartial, and illustrates a typical daily press.

, 2413 237 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

the CI1ATT

VOL. 14. I. 20 MONDAY. 23 APRIL 1973

POPE WISHES PEACE TO WORLD

An millions around the world celebrated Vaster Sunday, Pope Paul VI made new appeals in his annual Easter message for peace in Indochina, the Middle Bast and Ulster and offered prayers for world leaders working to end strife and injustice. In Jerusalem, chilly, overcast skies and the threat of possible violence failed CAMBODIAN to dampen the enthusiasm of thousands of ON =NM.=ID Christians eslebrating the holy day in the Holy Land, while Israel's government maintained a sharp surveillance on its borders PHNIM PM -Panzer chief of state Chong with Arab neighbors. Hong confirmed Sunday that Cambodian President In Sidon, Lebanon, Americans living Lon Nol duos agreed to the formation of a four - in Beirut and worshipers of other nation+ man eprgan of decision" to rule the country. alities gathered in the ruins of an an- The four mmsbers will include Ion Nol, Chong cient castle to show aaonort for Pales- Hong, Sirdk Natak and In Tam. tinian refugees and heard an American Power will be squally divided, Chang Hong Jesuit orient say that "Most of the world said' "Four people will be like one." There has little of no comprehension" of the are still details to be worked out, he said, refugees' suffering. such as whether or not the chairmanship of the About 250,000 persons stood shoulder four -man body would rotate and what to do if to shoulder under gray skies to hear the there is a two-to-two split on policy decisions Pope deliver his message and hit tradi Chong Hong said he saw Lon Nol Saturday. tional blessing urbi et orbi - to the city The four-man committee would bring togeth- nifty, and to the world. er four prominent personalities of the March In yesterday's message, the 10th of le, 1970, ouster of Prince Norodom Sihanouk. Pope Paul's pontificate, the 75-year-old Chang Meng was chief of state following the Pontiff said he was directing his remarks fall of Sihanouk but he has not been active in to "those places where peace does not yet politics for the last two years. exist LA where it is uncertain and in In Tar, a former leader of the National danger." (See CA4BODIA, page 4)

KHOO DOUBLE -TM CELTICS

NEW YORE - How the New York Knicks overcame a 16-point deficit early in the fourth quarter and beat the Boston Celtics. 117-110,in double overtime SUnday will be debated long after the NBA Playoffs are finished. The Knicks Pointed to Walt Frasierts breaking out of a game-long slump to score 25 of his team's last 41 points. Then there was a renewal of their usual dynamic defense, which produced 10 fourth-quarter turnovers. The Celtics, who played without star forward John H;vlicek, claimed they were simply robbed by referees Jack Madden and Jake O'Donnel. Now dour three gamestoo one in the East- ern Conference semifinals and facing possible elimination Wednesday night in Boston, the Celtics were not inhibited by possible league fines for referee-rapping in their postgame comments. "It's a shame. It's stealing," said Boston guard Paul Wesphal. "It's like going into a bank, putting on a masks pulling a gun and stealing the money." The Knicks, who played as if they had suffered a psychological letdown when they saw Havlicek walk onto Madison Square Carden floor in street clothes shortly before the game, were able to exploit the foul problems of guards Don Chaney and Jo Jo White. They started when they trailed, 76-60, with less than 10 minutes to play. Frasier had scored only 12 of his career playoff high of 37.White was in the gams, playing with five.

108.52(165C) Figure 15.2. Daily newspapers are printed when a ship is at sea, when a ship is in a port which has no English language daily, or at remote stations where no paper is available. 238 244 Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS

Ashore in overseas areas, the daily press may nonappropriated funds are not authorized to use take the form of acarefullyedited daily any paid commercial advertising. Itis permis- newspaper similar in format to some small-town sible, however, to advertise activities of the ship weeklies. They usually are printed in a profes- or station supported by the particular paper sional style and contain avariety of news, such as Navy exchange, special, or club services. features, pictures, and illustrations. Itis also permissible to print advertisements The WEEKLY NEWSPAPERisdevoted from individuals (ride/riders wanted, lost and almost entirely to Navy news, with great em- found, etc.) pi, -Med that the item or service phasis on news with a local flavor. Weekly being offered or requested is not a commercial newspapers are published by practically every venture. command thathas enough manpower and money to produce them. Many are smart looking publications with personalities that reflect Civilian Enterprise Newspapers the prestige and character of the commands that publish them. A CIVILIAN ENTERPRISE newspaper is There is no such thing as a typical weekly ship defined as being either a newspaper, comic or or stationnewspaper. The size and format feature supplement, or area guide that is pub- depend on your operating funds, printing facili- lished by a civilian publisher for a Navy or ties,staff, and other considerations. A large military readership. shoreinstallationmaypublishan8-page, These newspapers are profit-making enter- 5-column, tabloid-size paper with a circulation prises for the publishers with paid commercial of 10,000 or more a week. A ship or smaller advertising as the primary source of revenue. A shoreinstallationmay publish a 3-column percentage of the revenue may result from mimeograph or offset paper. subscriptions or sales of individual copies. Before you decide on the type of paper to Regulations governing the establishment and publish, discuss the matter with the leading control of civilian enterprise publications are petty officer in your print shop or with the head spelledoutinthe Navy Civilian Enterprise man at the local printing establishment. He will Publications Handbook (NAVSO t'-3530). tell you the most economical and practical way A disclaimer must be printed on the front of publishing your paper under your own page of each copy of civilian enterprise news- particular circumstances. There is more on this papers stating, in substance, that the paper is not in chapter 17. an official publication of the Navy and that the appearance of advertising does not constitute Navy endorsement of the products. Sources of Funds The publisher of a civilian enterprisenews- paper is chosen by bid. The officer in command The two sources of funds from which a ship of the ship or station to which the newspaper is or station newspaper is financed are APPROPRI- directed (in the case of civilian enterprise, it is ATED and NONAPPROPRIATED (ship's store usually a large naval station or Navy complex) profits). setsforththespecificsofpublications: If appropriated funds are used, you will be frequency of rublication, ratio of news to restricted by the size of the crew and other advertising lineage, editorial do's and don'ts, and factors. Newspapers published with Government any other conditions that may be appropriate. appropriated funds are rareother than daily Once these conditions aresetforth, allin- news sheets. In most cases, weekly papers are terested publishers are allowed to submit their financed by nonappropriated funds or they are bids for consideration. Selection of a publisher is published by civilian enterprise. A paper pub- normally for a period of one year and the lished by nonappropriated funds may be any agreement is formalized in a license agreement size, frequency, or format desired or whatever (provided in the CE Handbook). the budget can afford. The Navy cannot exercise editorial control Newspapers published with appropriated or over thesepublications, but theofficer in 2452" JOURNALIST 3 & 2 command can prohibit on-station circulation of BULLETIN behind the name of your ship or any issue that he considers to toe in bad taste, station paper does not show much originality or subversive, detrimental to discipline or otherwise imagination. contrary to the best interest of his command. Also avoid names that may be twisted into Military personnel and civilian employees of something uncomplimentary. "The Scabbard," the Navy annot be members of the editorial or for example, could easily be shortened into administrative staff of a civilian enterprise pub- "The Scab." lication, nor may their names appear in the A goodpromotionalstunttostimulate masthead or staff box. By-line credit for indi- interest in a newspaper is to run a "Select he vidual articles and photographs, however, are Name" contest among your prospective readers. permitted and encouraged. U.S. Savings Bonds or cash prizes provided by Since the publisher's prime source of news and Special Services are good incentives. feature material for inclusion in the paper is the Navy PA office, the command itself in great part determines the type and scope of material. In Organizing e Staff point of fact, most of the material in the Navy's CE papers is prepared by the PAO staff, much in Now comes the task of organizing your staff. the same manner as if they were putting out the This won't be much of a problem, because you newspaper. will not have much of a staff. Four or five All news stories officially prepared and fur- people are just about the limit on most ship or nished to the CE publisher must be made station newspapers. available to any other publisher and should be The staff of a ship or station newspaper sent to all local media to avoid the appearance includes four key positions: the commanding of giving "exclusives." Therewill be little officer (or officer in command), the officer-in- conflict as other publishers will not be particu- charge (or officer adviser), the editor, and the larly interested in most of this material. reporter. Regardless of the size of the newspaper The remainder of this discussion on ship or or its staff, these four positions must be filled station newspapers concerns those published and reflected in the masthead. It may be that with appropriated or nonappropriated funds. one individual performs the duties of both editor and reporter, but both functions exist. To get the whole picture of how most ship or Choosing a Name station newspaper staffs are organized, we will start at the top with the commanding officer. He The best way to choose a name for your is considered the publisher of the paper. His paper is by asking the crew whom it will serve. position is identical to that of the publisher of Let them name it. After all, it is their paper. any civilian newspaper. The commanding officer You are only working on it. determines the local policies under which the Remember, however, that the name of the paper must operate and is responsible for every- paper is a key to its personality. It should be thing that appears in that 'paper. He normally catchy, original, and nautical. Pick a name from delegates the supervision to an officer adviser, the crew's nominations that looks good in print. usuallythe public affairsofficer. From the A collection of Navy newspaper nameplates officer adviser, the chain extends to the editor. appears in figure 15-3 The key to success or failure of a modem The names of many Navy newspapers express newspaper is the availability of qualified staff a certain type of readership. "The Dolphin,"for members. Modern newspapers depend mainly on example, is a newspaper published for sub- local news stories rather than o'ide sources mariners. "The Gator" is published for am- and canned copy. The increase in vocal copy plus phibious force sailors. the willingness to touch on relevant and contro- Whenever possible, avoid stereotype, unorigi- versial topics demands a good staff. Figure 15.4 nal names such as "The NAS PODUNK Bul- is a typical ship or station newspaper organiza- letin." Merely addings the words NEWS or tion. This can be varied according to available 246 BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 15 INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS

241 24 7 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

!COMMANDINGOFFICERI

[PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICER I

EDITOR

PHOTO EDITOR

IPHOTOGRAPHERS

165.223 Figure 154.The organization of your newspaper will depend on the available personnel and other local considerations. The impo-tent thing, howover, is to have a formal organization and someone in charge of getting the job done. personnel and other local considerations. The THE DEPARTMENTAL REPORTERA important thing is to have a formal organization member of each department volunteers to act as and someone in charge of getting the job done. a reporter of departmental news. This plan is The editor, normally the senior enlisted mem- effective if reporters are given adequate time to ber of the staff, is responsible for the organiza- workp on their news assignments and if the editor tion of the working staff. This includes planning makes daily contact with them. Copy may lack thecontent of each issue, instructing staff Journalistic perfection, but a good editor allows members of their duties, ironing out problems, necessary time for rewriting. editing or rewriting copy as necessary, writing headlines, layout and makeup, and all the other THE STRINGERSThese persons write details that will result in a readable newspaper. news stories upon request or they may volunteer If the editor is the only member of the staff he their services. They can be excellent sources of may have to accomplish all of the jobs. feature material, although you may not be able If you have editors of departments they can to rely on them for regularcontribution. determine what is newsworthy in their area of Within the family of stringers are those persons responsibility.Reporters generally gather the who have experience or interest in a special information and put itinto readable form. subject. For example, a philatelist could write a Reporters don't have to be full time, although feature on stamp collecting; a wife or dependent there are obvious advantages in having them on child might develop a story about getting along the job throughout the day. in a new assignment. The possibilities are limited Let's look at some ways you can gather news only by your imagination. regardless of how much time your reporters can A very important staff member is the layout spend on the job: and makeup man, who is concerned with the technical side of editing. His job is to make the THE BEAT SYSTEMA reporter visits all newspaper look attractive. He does this by departments. For example, ifthere were 16 determining the design and position for pages, departments and four reporters, each reporter's news copy, and typography in general. He also "beat" would be four stops. Over a period of crops and scales the pictures to be used, His goal time, reporters can build a rapport with those is to make the newspaper as visually stimulating being contacted, thus adding to quantity and aspossible.Newspaper designwillbedis- quality of news being collected. cussed in more detail in chapter 17. 2462 Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS

What to Publish many names. People love to see their name in print. There is no strict formula that governs how Feature material can be used very effectively much of what will appear in any newspaper. In to create interest in the paper and to break up the final analysis, the desires and tastes of the hard news. You can use features to acquaint readers and the policies of the commanding your readers with new equipment, to let them officer will prevail. know about interesting personalities, and to In the past there has been a tendency to advertise the accomplishments of individuals and accentpositive news while eliminating less units. friendly or controversial items. The news also For your reader's sake, never murder a good leaned heavily toward senior officers, change of personality feature by using the individual's commands, and news extolling key Navy Depart- "mug" shot or a congratulatory hand crank ment officials. For these reasons, most ship and shot. Try to show the subject in a situation station newspapers suffered a loss of reader featured in the story. credibility among Navy personnel of all ages. Pictures create tremendous reader interest in You can help to regain these audiences. The newspapers. Imagine, if you can, a newspaper easiest way to please most of your readers is to without pictures. As a reader, does the idea concentrate on local news. The crew will be appeal to you? Pictures should be used to tell a most interested in what is happening around story, to illustrate and support stories but never them and what is happening to their shipmates. merely tofill a space. Don't bombard your A ship or station newspaper provides a perfect readers continuously with the same old drab forum for discussing problems, real or imagined, non-pictures of cake cuttings, hand shakings, and they should be discussed openly and with- plaque holdings, hand raisings, salutings, and out malice. Only then can Navy newspapers gain camera muggings. A picture of your team's star credibility, readership, and influence. Editors football player standing at attention holding his should discuss these considerations with their helmet in one hand and a football in the other commanding officers with the aim of using the just won't make it. A picture of the command- newspaper to achieve a true dialogue among all ing officer accepting the championship trophy in Navymen and women. front of the real champions is just as bad. A A unit newspaper is a prime two-way com- picture of the football star plunging through an munications systembetweenthe command opposing team's line will demand more of the officerandhiscrew."Hotline"columns, reader's attention. Make sure that the pictures question-and-answer pieces, or "ombudsman" used in your newspaper reflect propriety, good features are exceptionally effective means for taste, and the highest standards of photojournal- two-way communications. ism. Of course, to achieve balance in your news Cartoons and comic strips can have an educa- coverage, you have to publish a certain amount tional as well as an entertaining value. They can of news from outside sources. But don't fall into liven up a paper provided they are used with the habit of depending heavily on it. discretion. If you have your own staff artist, There is always plenty of good local news have him prepare a reserve stock of material. available if you only take the trouble to look for Here again, is an area where a talented volunteer it. Make sure that important directives concern- can be used. ing the crew are routed to you. Always loc k for Editorials have an important place in the a local angle in material received from outside service newspaper. It is through editorials that sources such as the clip sheet distributed by the the commanding officer can talk directly to his American Farces Press Service. command. Editorials must be welt' written and, Sports news is an important part of a ship or above all, they must reflect the policies of the station newspaper. The amount of sports news commanding officer. More on editorials will be will depend on the desires of your readers along presented later in this chapter. As a JO, your with the amount of sports activity at your editorial writing, in most cases, will be limited to command. This should be local sports news with the ship or station newspaper. 243 249 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Unit, activity, or division news is one of the subordinate unit or the publicity chairman of most important ingredients in a ship or station the club. These people are not members of your newspaper. Much of the news you receive from newspaper staff but you can depend on them to the various squadrons, divisions, departments, et provide reports of their activities. Keep in mind cetera on your ship or station will be written as that you may get only a list of facts from these correspondent columns. You should screen this people which will require that you write the material for possible feature stories and for story. On the other hand, if some of these eliminationof gossip-columnmaterial.Itis "stringers" should give you a well-written story better to print seveltd short news stories than to that requires a minimum of rewritL,, encourage lapse into a newspaper that consists of page after them by giving them a by-line in the newspaper. page of correspondentcolumns. When unit This amounts to a public pat on the back that columns are used, many readers will read the should serve to inspire other correspondents to column about their unit to the exclusion of all do better. else. The other outside source of news available to youisthe public affairs staff at your own headquarters. You should make arrangements to Sources of News receive a copy of every news story released by them. You may have to rewrite these releases to You might ask the question, "Where do I get show your readers what the story means to enough material to fill a weekly ship or station them, since the releases are probably slanted newspaper?" The answer is simple. It filters in toward an external medium. from throughout the Navy complex, but it can generallybeclassifiedaseither LOCAL or NAVYWIDE. Some sources of material for NAVYWIDE. ship and station newspapers on the Navywide levelare: The weekly American Forces Press LOCAL.The major sources of local news are Service clipsheet, Navy internal news releases the people and the activities of the command. contained in NAVNEWS (see figures 15-5 and You will find that the commanding officer will 15-6), the NAVOP (Weekly Newsgram) message, furnish either directly or indirectly, much of the servicewideperiodicals;exchange newspapers news that appears in your paper. He sets the (you can exchange papers with commands in policies for his command and is the first to your geographical area, similar type commands, know of future plans and commitments. ships in areas where yours might deploy, or fleet Every officer in command has a staff. From commands) naval messages, instructions, and these officers and men you will get the details of notices. When using this type material be sure to new training programs, athletic and recreation rewrite it as necessary to show its relevance to schedules, current promosnpolicies, and plans your readers. for construction of buildings. You must find out The American Forces Press Service, NAV- for yourself just which members of the staff can NEWS, and the NAVOP Weekly Newsgram are furnish the news you need. discussed in detail in Chapter 3. How to sub- Most naval installations have officers' clubs, scribe to AFPS and NAVNEWS is also covered CPO clubs, petty officers' clubs, enlisted men's in Chapter 3. Both AFPS and the Navy Internal clubs, wives' clubs, and scouting activities among Relations Activity require a copy of each issue other organizations. Since you are interested in of your publication if you subscribe to their getting news of the people and activities of your services. command, these groups certainly deserve to be canvassed as potential news sources. There is no need to depend entirely on your EDITORIALS own staff to achieve complete coverage of your local news. There are two local sources outside In forming,influencing,andentertaining your staff that will be invaluable to you. readers are the editorial purposes of both Navy The first of these is the unit reporter of the andcivilianeditors.Themajordifference 244 250 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 15 INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS

na.-ewsa navy news service NAVY INTERNAL RELATIONS ACTIVITY, OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF INFORMATION

411t #11- 1.41.404, r

poet :1st ofe

THE NAVY: MIME AND 'PROFESSIONALISM

185.224 Figure 151,NAVNEWS is a Navy internal news service. The material in NAVNEWS can be used in any internal communications medium,

I 245 251 COP11011.011 SST JOURNALIST 3 & 2

cwrepiop Fp NPVPuwampl 4.0y mai Poi 'ONO an in MOM t.I.1%1 p w.. .11.4.9 PPM P Iwo paha PP SeloppaPOI nohig S.P. Pp ,.Ii MU III

Ath

I 0 II itIN III!lit fili 3 1tlifi 1110.11 illi,;1111 Iliiiii1111111;11111 N 1.4 iipt la 11111 [1111 1.1031.1i loi1,11011 111,1111P6 111111 .8 .01 iptil Gi !WTI! Pit 111141.1 41011141111eilik PP; lid 3!Ilifi111q11 111' 1011 ryil)11111:111 III/ ;I fif1'1'111 iiiiPP'hill 't 911 1;11111 1 1111111 ; L111111111 :511;111111 10411 -I1111 II. I 11111. 31 P. [11 1411i 0111 Mil/ Hill Iiiilitlif 11 Ill II pilii 1111 ii i. lib WI' AN f II II 111,11ilot !tip 11111111111illiliiiiilli g 2 11111111111 111 Iffilivilliiiilitivarelii,iil'Ai 11 .111i is ..! 10111 filiwi.htsial! 11Ili al!311.ii ,'' a !figMi' lt Iii .: 0 /11.10111 1l!p liappri pplu lippiirmpliii;4, 1 61101111 .1 01111 .1.1,11,11iirlo!iiiiiiiii. 1111.11111/1111lli, Jill Iiiii:Iiii 11111114111iiiiiiiihqii .tit Q /11111101104/111141111 i laiiiiIii I moil 252 246 Chapter ISINTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS between civilian newspaper editorials and those purpose is to inform the reader. It helps the in ship or station newspapers in policy. reader to see and understand significant issues. The civilian newspaper derives its editorial The busy reader needs background to under- policy from its sense of public interest. Pub- stand what local significance emerges from the lishers and editorial staffs normally consider totalevents of theworld. An informative themselvespartofa privateorganization editorial will give him the information he needs. devoted to abstract ideals of freedom of the The informative editorial answers questions for press, justice, liberty, charity, equality, honesty, readers.Itisfactual, anditsconclusionis good government, and the preservation of the unbiased. Many military editorials are in this family. category when the commander or a member of The ship or station newspaper editorial page hisstaff explains the background for policy reflects the views of the commanding officer to changes,effects of new programs on local the command. The commanding officer is the operations, the need for safe driving or why a "publisher." and the editorial page speaks his navyman should be an amateur ambassador in a information policy. As a Journalist assigned to a foreign country. ship or station newspaper, you will write edito- The editorial to INFLUENCE tries to convert rials keyed to your commanding officer's think- the reader. It uses logical argument to convince ing and desires. the reader that he should agree with a specific Straight news reporting concerns itself with point of view. The readerisaskedto do reportingthefacts.Interpretativereporting something in the conclusion, to take positive explains the news behindthe news: causes, action. The most successful editorials written to effects or events presented by people expert influence are those that show evidence of sound enough in the subject at hand to speak authori- reasoning by recognizing a problem, defining it, tatively about it.Editorials give opinions and suggesting solutions, and deciding which of them views about events and how they affect the is desirable so that readers will agree and initiate paper's particular readership. action to support the writer. Both civilian and Editorials are written in the writer's individual military editors use this type of editorial to urge literary style and may contain a news tie-in, a their readers to support worthy causes. cogentargument,anadvancerebuttalof There are certain methods and techniques probably counter-arguments, and a firm conclu- which writers find useful in advancing a good sion. cause or seeking positive reaction. Be as careful There is no set editorial style or conventional of facts as you would in any form of newswrit- form. For the salof discussion, however, most ing. Editorial honesty requires that the full story editorials have four parts: the TITLE should be told accurately. Dismissal of facts which do catch the reader's eye and excite his attention; a not happen tofitthe writer's opinion is LEAD or opening statement announces the dangerous method of argument. Seek out the problem, entices the reader to continue reading; causes, analyze their meaning, and review past the BODY where the fact and opinion combine events for their message about today's problems to interpret and discuss the issues at hand; and or predictir is for the future. the CONCLUSION, which may be a simple ToEl TERTAIN,editorialssometimes summary, an exhortation or plea for action, provide humorous commentary or ironic jabs at advice, or the lever twist that ties the whole man'sweaknessesandshortcomings.These thing up neatlyandsticksinthe reader's editorials may look with nostalgia at the good memory as the editorial's parting shot. old days, reflect human-interest angles absent from normal straight news reporting or entertain as they inform or comment on holidays, anniver- Types of Editorials saries, or special events. The editorial to entertain may be sheer inspiration, or appear to be. The INFORMATIVE editorialis known by The wise Navy editor sees in the entertaining other names, such as interpretative, explanatory, editorial an opportunity to brighten up his page. and expository. Whatever the name, its chief He does wellto keep a file of this type of 24702513 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 editorial against the day when a hole appears in THE STAFF EDITORIAL.This might be his layout along with an imminent deadline. the entire staff meeting to discuss the next issue. Many of these editorials are timeless, many have Here is where ideas can be sounded out and become classic. "Is There A Santa Claus?" and developed; editorial assignments are then made FrancisP.Church'seditorialreply,"Yes, accordingtoindividualor collectivetalent, Virginia, there is a Santa Claus," appeared in the background, knowledge, or style. oldNew York Sunin 1897. It is reprinted every year becauseitentertains with a homespun NEWS SERVICES.The American Forces message and still evokes the nostalgia of past Press Service furnishes a variety of editorial Christmases. riaterial for their editors. The Department of Defense publishesCommander's Digest,another source of editorials. The most important thing Sources of Editorials to remember about using editorials from news services is that they should be localized to be Even though it would be improper for a JO applicable to your command. on a ship or station newspaper to write bitter exposes against master at arms brutality or GUEST EDITORIALS.Invite talentedor administrative malfeasance with the command, interesting persons from the command to write thereareplentyof good positive editorial aneditorial.Alsoconsidereditorials from subjects to place before your readers. prominent local civic organization. By reading This incomplete listwill help you with the exchange newspapers, military editors may find suggested flavor of military editorial subjects: editorials appropriate for reprinting. While these areunwittingly "guest editorials."thisisa legitimate practice. But be sure the reprint it Navy tradition credited to its original source. Drug abuse Voting LETTERS-TO -T H E-EDITOR. Whilethis Health care benefits feature is an excellent two-way communications Pollution abatement or feedback system, it is equally as valuable as Retirement benefits an editorial device. Editorial care must ensure Race relations that overzealous letter writers keep their com- Career advancement ments within the bound of propriety and good Military justice taste. Education programs Alcoholism INQUIRING REPORTER-PHOTO- Navy day GRAPHER.Similar to letters-to-the-editor but Humanitarian programs usually less inspired, this device may be used on Dependent benefits editorialpages.Space limitations,at times, Physical fitness might make it more appropriate for use on Military security another page. The pictures you use should Histories anniversaries enhance the feature Safety CARTOONS.Some of thebesteditorial Few ship or station newspaper st ffs have comment isconveyed when an editorialis members who write editorials exclusi' ely. But presented in graphic form. Cartoons liven up the most of them can certainly profit by paying page, reach a greater audience and are often the more attention to the editorial page. What, then, best remembered message of the page. Photo- are some sources of material to improve the graphs can sometimes serve same purpose as editorial page of a ship or station newspaper? cartoons. 254 248 Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS

Meeting Deadlines stories in which the commander or one of his principal officers is the major participant. Con- A sacred rule on any newspaper is meet the centrate on what the men are doing, what their paper's deadlines. problems are, and what their accomplishments In launching your paper, you must decide on are. a regular publication date. Select a date that will provide maximum coverage of the week's news Highlightaspectsof Navylife' which and will prove suitable in your particular circum- directly affect individual Navymen. stances. Once you decide on a date, stick to it. Before you can establish a firm publication Use the best pictures obtainable. dare, you must set deadlines for your own staff and outside contributors. Obviously, they must Use good sound judgment. get their copy and illustrations in on time.

Don't Armed Forces Newspaper Guide Be sensationalistic or crude. Irresponsible The Armed ForcesNewspaperGuide journalism has no place in Navy newspapers. (NAVSO P-2062) is a must for all beginning ship or station newspaper editors. It is published by Allow any materials that attack American AFPS and may be ordered through Navy supply principles and its system of government. Don't .channels. The Guide isa compilation of the allow any materials that advocate ideologies and technical information needed to produce a ship forms of government hostile or ,zontrary to the or station newspaper. interest of the United States. Lampoon any personalties. A FEWS DOs, A FEW DON'Ts

Always remember that your newspaper will FAMILYGRAMS be competing for attention with other media. Your ship or station paper must be appealing When you consider a Navyman's morale, you and meaningful or it will not be read. must consider the morale of his family also. If a man's family is depressed about separation, it will show in his letters from home and possibly Do in his work. One of the best ways to keep family morale Allow unit-wide participation: Letters to up is to keep them informed, and the best way a theeditor,contributions fromnon-staffers, commanding officer has to accomplish this task feature stories, poetry, etc. is the familygram. They are easy to prepare and have proven to be enormously effective.

Tell it like it is...the good and the bad. A familygram is an informal letter from the Make your newspaper a forum for two-way commanding officer to the families of his men. communications. Familygrams are published by ships, squadrons, andadvancedbaseswhenNavymenare Loosen up the paper's writing style so it is separatedby duty from theirfamiliesfor free and flowing without stilted languageuse lengthy periods of time. They 211 written in a phrases and generally accepted slang consistent chatty manner, describing operations at sea, with the audience you are trying to reach. ports ofcalf,and anything that may give dependents or relatives a feeling of knowing Discourage excessive use of pictures and what's going on out there.

249 255 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

On most ships, familygrams are prepared by They can be monthly, duringa deployment, or the public affairs office for the CO'ssignature. as the situation dictates. Therefore, you can expect tocome in contact with this internal medium sometime duringyour career. BROCHURES Each family receivinga familygram has one tie to a ship or station. That tie istheir sailor. So, in your familygram, i'lre are numerous "casual publications" in you must have news and the .avythat requirethe JO's specialized names. Welcome new men aboard byname. knowledge and skills in writing, photography, Mention outstanding performances, and do it layout, and typography. Theyare referred to as with names. Talk about shipboardrelaxation casual publications because they and humor, again using are not pub- names. lished at regular intervals for thesame reader- Somewhere inyour familygram,tellthe ship. As a matter of fact, seldom do they families of the continuing have concern for the crew's the same objectives. Eachmay be different and safety, and how training emphasizes safety. may serve an entirely different purpose. Give a brief description of your ship's activi- These publications go by a variety ofnames. ties and ports of call. While the ship'sroutine But for the purposes of clarity, letus classify all may be routine to you it isn't to the families 'wilds, booklets, area and welcoming aboard back home. 4, .ides,andsimilarpublicationsasBRO- Tell them (within rules and regs) whenthe CHURES. ship will be returning home, especially ifyou are Brochures are an excellent medium for both on a deployment. internal and external relations in the Navy.They The familygram canalsobeatwo-way enable you todeliver your message in an medium and families should be invitedto write interesting and sometimes dramaticmanner, with any questions they might have about their using a combination of text and illustrationsto men or the ship. achieve exactly the effectyou want. In addition, A handwritten note at the end of the typed your message is presented in a form that ismore body of the familygram isa great device for or less permanent. The recipient of a brochure furtherpersonalization by the commanding usually takes it home with him, rereads it, and officer. "Thank you for themany kind letters and notes that possibly even keeps it asa souvenir. Figure 15-7 I have received from 'home.' shows several good examples of Navy published Your words .of inspiration and appreciation will be well and long remembered. brochures. ..," the note There are two types of approaches used in might read. preparing a brochure: With any imagination at all, familygram topics are endless. Your familygram news doesn't have 1. The SHOTGUN APPROACH. Hereyour to be something that just happened. Youcan, in messageis aimed at everybody who would an interesting way, explain: GQ, unreps, highline possibly be interested in the subject. transfers, division rundowns, damage control, 2. The RIFLE APPROACH. Hereyour mes- flight ops, etc. Maybe the cooks havea real sage is aimed at one or more specific groups who pleaser in their Tonkin Gulf homemade sausage. have a special interest in the subjector in one Pass the recipe along to the folks back home. Of phase of it. course, the recipe will have to be broken down from the 200 pounds of pork usedon the ship to maybe 2 pounds back home. A question isa The Shotgun Approacl. letterfroma crewmemher's familycould generate excelie.q4 material. Suppose your -command was planningan open A good picture or sketchcan be very helpful house for Armed Forces Day and thousands of in your effort to spinan old shipboard tale or visitors were expected. To acquaint all ofthem describe the beauty of a foreign land. with the mission, history, organization, facilities, There is no set frequency for familygrams. and layout of the command,you would prepare 250 r 9gsz_ BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 15-- INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS

41. .,,4,1 a t, , ,v4 4-,A,,) ,411.'4,;.tr.;',rll' -.4,,, ,,I I 1 ; ,' , ' , - 4 e 'ht.i 4.t.4 4. , Wt.vari,

,1.'4$7,t. "o'tr,"

. ,,,t1

WV'

251 257 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 a WELCOME ABOARD brochure with an tion of miscellaneous information which serves Armed Forces Day theme that would appealto no useful purpose. everybody who turned out for the event. This would include civilians, members of other armed Write it simply, clearly, accurately, and services, military dependents, andmen of your interestingly. own and other stations. Your brochure would have to appeal to the college professoras much Be informal. If possible, inject an occa- as to the day laborer. In other words, it would sional bit of humor. have to have mass appeal. This is the shotgun approach. Use many illustrations, preferably one on each page. A good picture is still worth more than a thousand words, regardless of how The Rifle Approach overused the expression may be.

All welcome aboard brochures, however, do Convey your message without obviously notusetheshotgunapproach.Take, for "snowing" your readers. Nobody likes propa- example, the indoctrination type of welcome ganda, even if it is our own.' brochure used by many commands for new men reporting aboard for duty. Giveita distinctpersonality with an The purpose of this type of brochure is to attractive format. Make it worthwhile and worth acquaint the new man with the command, but keeping. Be original and imaginative. not in the same manner as in the open house brochure. This brochure would contain more Be practical. Select a format and printing 4 information of a practical nature TO HIM. It process which your command can afford. might cover such subjects as housing, recreational facilities, religious services, location and open hours of the Navy exchange, laundry, tailorshop, cobbler shop, and dependent's THE WELCOME ABOARD BROCHURE information. This is the rifle approach. Another example of the rifle approach would We have already mentioned the welcome be a "port of call" brochure aimed at a ship's aboard brochure prepared in conjunction with crew to acquaint them with a particular port or an open houle. Let us take a quick glance at a foreign country which the ship is scheduled to typical one, see how it's prepared, and what it visit. A brochure of this type should cover such contains. The basics presented here will apply to things as a brief history, the main sight-seeing the preparation of all brochures. interest, money exchange system, and some DOs and DON'Ts.Brochureeditorscan gather advance information on ports by writing the PAO shop in the area or PAO shops aboard ships Cover that have recently visited the area. An attractive cover will go far towards getting your brochure read. There are two types of A Good Brochure covers that you can use:

Because brochures vary so greatly in purpose, 1. SELF-COVER. This type is printed on the size, format, and personality, it is impossible to same paper stock as the body or inside pages of lay down rules for preparing them. Here are a the brochure. Its biggest advantage is economy. few tips, however. The entire brochure can be produced in a single printing form, with the cover and contents Planandprepareitwith adefinite printed simultaneously. Printing costs, therefore, objective in mind. Don't just make it a collec- are lower, and the cost of binding a separate

258 252 Chapter 15 INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS cover is eliminated. Yoi: must be careful, how- unnecessary expense by discussing the sin and ever, to use a good paper stock so that printing format of your brochurewiththeprinter won't show through backed-up pages. BEFORE you start putting ittogether. The 2. SEPARATE COVER. This type enables following points should be taken into considera- you to use coated paper stock for the cover and tion: a cheaper grade of paper inside. However, the cost of printing and binding is more expensive. SIZE. Small, pocket-sized brochures are Colored paper stock may be used effectively generally the best. If the brochure is too big, the withsketchesandillustrations.Sirivefor recipient may be tempted to discard it when he originality in your coverthat rules out a giant is done with it rather than carry it home. A replica of the ship's insignia. For economy, use small brochure, however, fits snugly in the hand both sides of the front and back covers. bag of pocket and causes no trouble to the person who carries it.

Content NUMBER OF PAGES. This depends on what you have to say and how much room it If open house is being held in conjunction will take to say it. Eight to 12 pages is just about with Armed Forces Day, for example, the the right number of pages for most welcome contents may include: aboard brochures. It is also a good practice to plan your brochure so that it contains pages in An introduction or welcome from the multiples of four. By doing this you can avoid commanding officer, with a brief explanation of the wasted cost of blank pages and the extra the special occasion, its theme, and its meaning. expense of assembling and binding loose pages.

A program orscheduleof theday's PAPER. Paper is manufactured in various events,including a description of what the colors, weights, and finishes. Select the paper visitor may expect to see and where. which is most economical and best suits your needs. A simplifieddiagramor map of the installation, showing points of interest with PRINTING PROCESS. Your priltor will appropriate directions. advise you about the printing process that is most economical and best sited to the brochure A history of the installation, including a you want produced. The following chapterwill brief description of its mission, functions, size, also assist you in determining the right printing organization,andunclassifiedgeneralcap- process. abilities. An account of the command's ties with CRUISE BOOKS thecommunitywithregard todefense, economy, employment, and contributions to A well-edited cruise book can make important general welfare and civic betterment. contributions to morale as well as internal and external relations. Cruise books are similar to This list, of course, may be modified to match high school annuals or college yearbooks. They the specific purposes of the brochure. employ informal text and graphic illustrations to cover a cruise or a brief period in the history of the ship and her crew, rods: Size and Format They tell the Navy's story from the vantage You can save yourself a lot of time and point of an operational command.

253 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

They give each crewmember a vivid insight available to the crew: into the operation of his ship and the importance of each man's contribution to the ac- 1. Financing can be obtained entirely from complishment of the ship's mission. money in the welfare and recreation fund with one copy distributed free to each member of the They provide each crewmember with a crew. This is the simplest and easiest method lasting memento of an important period of his because it eliminates a great deal of work on life. subscriptioncampaigns,recordkeeping,et cetera. However, only the larger commands can They reach the crewmember's family and afford this method. friends and tell part of the Navy story witha 2. Financing can be obtained in part from rare personal approach and appeal that few money in the recreation fund with crewmembers other media can equal. who want the books paying the remainder of the cost. This method is more common than the They have greater permanence than any first but it has complications. It involves taking other "message." Years after a navyman finishes orders, handling money, and conducting an his hitch, he will show off his cruise book and active publicity campaign to spur book sales. recall with fond satisfaction the "good old days 3. Financing entirely from money 'collected in the Navy." from the crew. This method involves all the problems of method 2 in addition to pricing the The commanding officer exercises command cruise book out of the reach of many crew- responsibility over publication and financing, members. For this reason, it is seldom used. and all other phases of the project through his designated cruise book officer or committee. An Taking orders for cruise books is a time editorisdesignatedtoorganize, plan, and consuming job and is usually handled by the supervise the activities of the cruise book staff. cruise book business manager. When the book is In many cases, you will be assigned editorship. sold to the individual to cover part or all of the Early in your planning stage, you should production costs, an organized selling campaign thoroughly examine copies of previous cruise is almost a must. This involves announcements books prepared by your ship and also those of in the Plan of the Day, the daily press sheet, the other units. weekly or monthly newspaper or magazine, and The ultimate objective of every cruise book is spot announcements on closed-circuit radio and totell an interesting, well-documented story television if available. A table where 0/Ors rim with text and illustrations. It must be carefully be taken should be set up in a conspicuous planned, economically prepared, clearly written, location or use Division or Department cruise and interestingly illustrated. But above all,it book representatives. Record each man's home must have appeal to the principal subject in the address so the book can be mailed to him if he is storythe crewmembers of the ship. detached before publication. After you decide to publish a book, the editor, along with the commanding officer or officer in charge, will plan the specifications and Page Size cost. Here are a few other facts to consider in publishing a cruise book: Most books are either 9 X 12, 8-1/2 X 11, or 7-3/4 X 10-1 /2 inches in size. These are standard sizes offered by most publishers. Publishing Funds

The cost of your book will be determined Binding largely by the number of pages and the number of copies to be printed. There are three methods The books may be side-stitched or Smyth by which cruise books are fittanced and 206) sewed. The side-stitched book is slightly less 254 Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS expensive, but it doesn't open flat and a half through" andgiveaflimsyappearance. A inch of space is lost along the inside or "gutter" heavier paper (usually 100 pound) makes the edge of each page. book slightly thicker and heavier, but usually does not justify higher costs. Embossed finish paper may be preferred (stipple, linen, etc.). Cove::: You may prefer to add more variety to your book with colored papers or inks. This largely The least expensive cover would be a heavy- depends on personal taste and budget. weight paper (cover stock). Since this type of coverwoulddrasticallyreducethelife- expectancyof the volume, and the savings Use of Color would be nominal at best, a more permanent bindingisusuallypreferred. A cover with Color photographs of foreign ports and at sea artwork and title, applied by the silk screen shipboard evolutions can add a great deal to process,or a lithographed cover carrying a your cruise book. The use of color is highly photograph printed in one or more colors, is recommended, but it can be expensive. One ship more desirable, although more costly.Most found that eight pages in four colors added more expensive are the embossed covers, with designs than a dollar to the cost of each copy. in raised patterns applied by brass dies. The To print one spot of a second color on a page more elaborate the die design, the higher the involves running an eight-page sheet through the cost of the cover. Cover designs are either press twice. Therefore, economical use of color originated by a staff artist or a member of the requires close consultation with the publisher's crew. Sometimes it's a good idea to run a cover representative in planning the color runs to take design contest among crewmembers. advantage of an economical layout. The full color or "natural color" process is more expensiveusually $200 to $300 more per Type page.Each printerwill determine hiscost. Carefulconsultationisadvised.The same Less expensive books may be set on IBM principle of watching page placement will apply. machines or in Varityper (specialized forms of An additional cost factor involves the number of thetypewriter).Compositionfromthese separate photographs used, since there is con- machines may be called lithoprint, lithotype, or siderable added cost in making multiple nega- lektratvpe. Usually, if the type is named other tivesfor each picture. For all the economy than "linotype" or "hot metal" it indicates a factors involved in the use of color, consult the modified form of typewriter composition. printer. He's the expert. Past experience shows that the more elaborate Also, if your budget is limited but you still books should be set in linotype (hot metal), but want to use color, investigate the possibility of recently many of the larger publishers have using "stock color" pictures maintained by most installed new equipment providing fototype (set cruise book publishers. These stock shots consist by one of several machines developed for the of scenic views of many of the ports visited by purpose). This process compares favorably with U.S. ships, and the pictures are usually quite the more expensive linotype. So it might be good. Many ships in the Pacific Fleet re-use the worthwhileto "leek apublisher's offering excellentstockshotsinthepossessionof before arbitrarily specifying hot metal. Japanese printers.

Paper Material or Stock Special Effects The most commonly used paper in cruise Various devices are used to dress up the book. books is 80-pound, No. 1 glossy enamel. A Printers have differing policies regarding charges lighterweightpaper maytendto"show for special effects. Almost all of them cost the 25526-A. JOURNALIST 3 & 2 printerextra money to produce, but some produced by a firm outside the United States. printers include some of them in the basic Some ships have found that they can save quotation. It is well to check with the printer money by having cruise books produced in a bef "re making extensive use of these. They foreignport. However, this practice requires include reverses (type appears in white against a careful consideration of several other factors in dark background) or overprints (type of artwork addition to that of financial and production appears over other artwork or photograph), responsibility. bleeds (picture runs off edge of the page), Language barriers can introduce serious prob- verticalsordiagonals (typeissetrunning lems. Quality of reproduc...ion as well as paper, vertically or diagonally, rather thaii with the binding, and covers will need a more careful base of each letter on the same horizontal line), scrutiny than when dealing with a firm in the die cut outs (part of the inside of the page is cut United States. The amount of service the pub- out so that a picture on the following page- lisher is prepared to provide is very important. spread appears through the opening), "gate-legs" Will he offer the advice, help, and supervision in or "foldouts" (a spread is inserted which will planning layout that can be expected of the fold out one or more extra pages, hinged at the American publisher? Will there be difficulty in outer edge of the normal page), and many visiting his plant to proofread and handle other others. details? Will there be a transportation problem in getting the books delivered to wherever the ship will be upon completion. Publisher Negotiations If the suggested precautions are observed, there should be no insurmountable problems in Before a printing contractissigned, bids dealingwith the printer.However, any ex- should be solicited from a number of publishers perience involving unsatisfactory printers should (at least three). The publisher must be selected be reported to the type command PAO so he with care. The quality of his work, his coopera- may help other ships avoid a repetition. tion, and his services will determine the final After thepublisherhas been selected, a result. Make sure you have the basic specifica- written contract should be executed. Make sure tions ironed out and readily available when that the contract consists of an agreement on: approaching a publisher for his bid. He needs theBASICSPECIFICATIONS(mentioned this information before he can give you an earlier), details on what assistance will be pro- estimate. vided by publisher'srepresentative, working materials and aids supplied by printer (cruise book kits, layout sheets, artwork, etc); dead- BASIC SPECIFICATIONS include: number lines, proofreading arrangements, delivery time of copies, number of pages, page size, n :,.nber of and place (specifying whether freight charges to color pages and photos, kind of paper, kind of destination are paid by ship or printer); and a type, kind of binding, type of cover, delivery base price thereon. time and place, and an approximate number of In addition, the contract should quote prices black and white photographs. for any items on which the printer may make The public affairs officer of a type or group extra charges. These should include prices for command will usually have a list of reputable extra pages (in multiples of four or eight page publishers. Help also may be obtained from the increments or however his press runs are set up), local Navy Printing and Publications Service extra copies (together with final date for enter- Office. Confer with cruise book staffs from ing order for extras), and a detailed list showing other similar ships on their experience with his charges for printing second color and full publishers. Other factors to keep in mind are the color.If extra charges are made for special financial and performance capability of a pub- effects, these should be clearly listed, as should lisher. A printing contract should be made only charges for editor's alterations to original copy. after carefully examining these factors. This is If the printer offers the proposal in the form of particularly applicableifthe book is to be a standard printed contract, read it carefully to

. ce,-4GV 6 Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS ensure that it covers the points outlined above. Next, prepare a "dummy" book. This is im- No significant item in a publishing contract portant because here the book begins to appear should be based on oral agreement. in recognizable form. All the work that follows A clear understanding in the matter of copy will be based on the dummy, and a lot of care deadlines is important. In order that the pub- should go into its preparation. lisher can deliver the books as promised, he must The positions of all pictures, artwork, head- receive the copy and artwork as scheduled. Firm lines and copy should be noted in the dummy. deadlines should be established and kept. It is Unexpected changes in ports visited, however, unfair to throw major changes at a printer late in will require some flexibility in arranging the the programchanges in numbering of pages or layout. placement, or content of copy. You can expect Following preparation of the dummy, photo to pay a substantial penalty for such changes assignments, text, and 'artwork can be given to when they cause the printer added expense. the staff. To achieve consistency in style, the Changes in page numbering aftts production has text should be written by a few people as started can be very expensive. Changing the possibleor at least everything should be edited number of copies involves extra.press runs by the same man. duplicating many of the major original costs of Stories, features, captions and port of call the book. text should be written as the cruise progresses. Keep in mind that the printer will run groups Do not let this material pile up. You may find of pages together, and certain sections of the yourself with more materialthan you can cruise book should be submitted before others. handle. Pages containing photos of the men present Write-ups on each division should be assigned problems of correct identification and spelling. to men within the division. They are intimate They should be planned for submission first. with their divisions and can provide color and Also, color material should be submitted as soon interesting sidelights that an outsider would have as possible because it requires several additional a hard time uncovering. runs. Artwork, of course, is an asset to any publica- Close liaison with the printer during production.If you can locate a man with artistic tion is imperative. The best arrangement is to ability, the results will be 100 percent better. If permit the cruise book editor to work at the you cannot find an artist, then take advantageof publishers' for a few days to make last minute whatever is available from your printer. changesand to check proofs astheyare produced. This results in more speedy production and actually lowers the price: of the book in General Interest Photography many cases. The delivery date for cruise books should be A cruise book is basically a picture book. set as close to the end of the cruise aspossible. And, good photographyisa must. Pictures The book is of greatest personal value following should be sharp,clear,well-composed, and the ship's return home. Furthermore, distribu- interesting. More than anything else, they must tion problems are greatly reduced ifthe crew capture the color and atmosphere of the com- can take the books withthem before they are mand. Candid pictures have proved to be best. transferred or depart on leave. Don't be afraid to use just that portion of a photograph which makes the best picture. Crop- ping will also help you to vary the shape of Detailed Planning your pictures which will allow you more variety in your layout. After the printer has been chosen and the Pictures must be in good taste because cruise contract signed, you are ready fordetailed books are taken home and shown off to the planning. families and friends of crewmembers. They First, you will draw up an outline, noting should be screened so that possible offensive subjects to be treated on each page of the book. pictures are not published. What may appear to JOURNALIST 3 & 2 be funny or clever on the day of publication at sea. may fall on a most unreceptive audience months For liberty shots ashore, it is a good practice later when wives, parents, and sweethearts see it, to send photographers on sight-seeing tours or when you are reminiscing about the days at handled by the ship's welfare and recreation sea. No one wants to be remembered by a officer. In most cases, photographers will be tastelessphoto caption or snapshot. A dis- permitted to make the tour free or at reduced organized, off-color book will give the impres- cost if prior arrangements are made with the sion of an equally disorganiz xi ship. tour agents. Select photos to display sites which Practicallyeverylargeship inthe Navy make a liberty port interesting to residents as publishes a cruise book and usually is willing to well as tourists. Try occasionally to frame the exchange the books with other commands. If subject with a navyman. The suggestion of a you are looking for picture ideas, it would be a uniform will confirm that your were there. good idea to study the cruise books of ships the Identificationsareextremely important for same type as yours, as pointed out before. photographs. Try to add interesting details to If your shipislarge enough to have an the captions to jog memories in later years. authorized photo lab, photography won't be too much of a problem. Pictures can be taken, processed aboard, and printed to fit the layout requirements of the book. Photos of the Crew Small commands, however, must depend on amateur photos taken and submitted by mem- The easiest way to make your cruise book a bers .of the ship's crew. Every ship has some complete success is to include a picture of every amateur photographers who will devote some of man in the command. By doing this, each man their liberty time to shooting cruise book photos has a feeling of BELONC"NG and wants to get a in exchange for film or free admission to some book because he is part of the ship's crew. of theguided tours conductedforliberty Using a group shot of each division affords parties. Processing, printing, enlarging, and lay- one method of getting a large number of men out can be quite a problem aboard a ship into a comparatively small space. There are without a photo lab.In this situation, the severaldisadvantagestousingthis method, publisher may agree to process the pictures or, however: in most cases, some arrangements can be worked out with a senior command having the necessary 1. Each crewmember's face is so small in the facilities. group shot that men in the last row sometimes There should be extensive photo coverage of are hardly recognizable, ports visited, the ship, and the crew at work and 2. Group shots frequently make the men play. Use pictures that best illustrate the men look stiff and unnatural. and the jobs of the various divisions. Include a 3. Scheduling an entire division for pictures is pictorial section on all sea evolutions conducted extremely diffcult. by your ship: gunnerypractice,carrier air operations, replenishment atsea, man over- The present trend. in cruise books appears to board drills, missile launches, highline transfers, favor the use of individual pictures of each and so forth. Also include religious services, member of the ship's crew. This eliminates many recreation activity (smokers, skeet shoots, swim of the problems caused by group pictures and parties), and something to depict a routine day provides a better opportunity for achieving more Chapter 15INTERNAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS PUBLICATIONS variety of layout. It also makes it easier for you some last name, first initial and rate. to make sure that there is a picture of each Before closing the discussion on cruise books, member of the ship's crew in the book. it must be noted that the Public Affairs Regula- But whether you use group shots or individual tions has a few things to say about cruise books, shots of the men, correct identification and spel- including the fact that a copy of every book ling of names is imperative. Whenever possible, produced by naval units should be sent to the proof prints or proof pages should be verified Chief of Information. You must also send the for correctness with the division concerned. Men name and address of the publishing firm, the should be identified by rate/rank, first name, number of volumes ordered, and the total cost and last, in that order, rather than the cumber- of the contract.

265

259 CHAPTER 16

WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES

This chapter discussesthetechniques of lines but their form was very different from writing headlines, or heads (the title lines overa what we are accustomed to today. Figure 16-1 ,newspaper article), and cutlines (the explanatory shows a multi-decked headline carried by the matter supplementing photographs). New York Sun over the story of the assassina- After you've studied this chapter, you will tion of President Lincoln in 1865. know how to prepare acceptable headlines for Toward the turn of the century (during the ship and station newspapers and how to write Spanish-American War) technical improvements cutlines for photographs appearing in internal and a circulation war between the Hearst and publications as well as those taken for outside Pulitzer newspapers in New York helped speed release. the adoption of multicolumn headlines. Impor- tantstorieswereintroduced by screaming headlines across the entire page, followed by as HEADLINE PREPARATION many as eight or more related heads. Sometime headlines were even longer than their stories., Headlines are like newspaper magnets. When By the end of World War I, however, many they are graphically appealing, headlines attract editors began experimenting with headlines that and hold the reader's attention. Headlines, in were more streamlined and more compact. They one form or another, are as old as newspapers. found that the space they saved could be used The first American newspaper headlines were more advantageously for news and advertising nothing more than labels. A large capital letter especially advertising. may have been used to set off the first paragraph of each story, or the front page headlines were one-line labels showing the origin of the news HEADLINE FUNCTIONS (England, France, Spain). By the Limo of theRevolutionary War, The modern trend in headlines is toward American newspapers had made some progress simplicity. Most newspapers now use heads that in the art of writing headlines, but not much. A say what has to be said in a minimum of words. full-page account of the battle between theBon A good headline not only conveys the news ina Homme RichardandHMS Serapis,for example, story, but also the significance and meaning might have been carried under a 10-point (old behind the story.It never implies moreand English type face) headline which read: should not say too much lessthan actually appears in the story. It contains no misleading suggestions. It leaves no false impressions. gpic Ant ?Jett Ingeneral,aheadlineservesfour main functions:

During the Civil War, American newspapers It attracts the reade..'b attention and entices began putting more information in their head- him to read the story. 264 260 Chapter 16WRITING HEADLINES ANDCUTLINES

It gives the reader the essential facts of the story at a glance. Even if a reader fails to read a story, he still has a good idea of what is in the IMPORTANT. news merely by reading the headlines. It denotes the importance of the story by ASSASSINATION itssize and position on the page. A large OP headline is used over a long, significant story. A PRESIDENT LINCOLN reader often can tell the importance of a story by the size of the headline appearing above it.

The President Shot at the Theatre It helps make each page, and the entire Lest Evening. paper, an attractive product.

HEADLINE NOMENCLATURE SECRETARY SEWARD IMO II IIS III Here are a few headline terms with which you OUT should become familiar (see figure 16-2):

NOT MORTALLY WOUNDED. The main headline appearing over a story is called the TOP or MAIN DECK. Clarence and Frederick A headline under a main deck is called a Seward Badly Hurt. SUBORDINATE or SECOND DECK. Each deck is a complete headline and thought.

ESCAPE OF THE ASSASSINS. READOUTA subordinatehead which acts as a transitional device to take readers from a main head to the lead of a story. Intense Excitement In Washington. A small headline inserted between paragraphs in a long story is called a SUBHEAD.. Subheads are usually set in the same size and SCENE AT THE DEATHBED OF MR style as the body type, except they are bold face INICOLN. (type which is darker or heavier), A short line of type used above the main L Wilkes Booth, the Actor, the Alleged headline, normally in a smaller type size and Assassin of the President, underlined, is called a TEASER or KICKER. Bo., No., ie. This device is sometimes used to introduce a feature article with some pun line above the TNT OPPIGIAL1. DISPATON main head.

185.77 HEADLINE STYLE Figure 16.1.A multi-decked headline appeared in the New York Sun in 1865, over the story of For stylevariation, headlines can be set President Lincoln's assassination. all-caps, caps and lower case, or downstyle.

261 Z65 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

[1_5,000See Armed ForcesDay Displays Recruit Review Highlights

TWOLINE FLUSH LEFT HEADLINE USED AS Third Annual Celebration SECOND DECK READ. (Great Lake:, tbe "World'1.11.,0.0 Natal n- OUT ler," will play host to more1,nn 15 .11(10 vbatos un Sakti... day. Armed Forces Day. More than 20 Great Lakes.ietivoies will exhibit&inlay, BANNER HEADLINE USED rte give demi ittslitil Um, alIIP 11:iiiiinoth celebration. Wightidthe day lung AS TOP OR MAIN DEC .1 iieit illbe the 1- Field lit 1100 i3 p 1 AIll pun',dinewillWell iiti hearAdult, alRoque A ofSlat inul 19v toThe whim al %ill be hiutpi plied tar the maim" petrwia tlio SIc Peruvian (Hiker. Sixoilierharsh rook mg °weer. id the Pei tiviali Nut v ace .101111 ponying ((Attu, Salaluts tut u 11ure eek Win or lllilyd Si de, usual SUBHEADS ARE PLACED TheyincludeRAdrn E. riot.) !toile Cuitunnittler a1 rho AT REGULAR INTERVALS Capt Ciitilerient nodal. KICKER USED TO Moreau of Ship., Capt. Al- IN THE STORY TO dtiFrey's.Chiel.Moreauat INTRODUCE BREAK THE MONOTONY Supplies and Aceounir. Cdr. Carlos 4.1111)1010, plug Seel elm y:LI. Cdr FEATURE HEADLINE OF SOLID COLUMNS I VI'llUtICIO Silos midLt.Carlrir Saidlaa. Medicul Corps OF TYPE Celtler gates on Mulishly will he open to visiinrs front 01100 to lala). Open Buildings During the open house '.!shoe, con go through typical eollee (GalleySr,barracks(bldg.25', dispenanry tbldg. Waive small stores(bldg. 200 acid recreation Ms. Fixit centers ibidge. 211 and 711. Also open to Visitors will be the Center', two Moine& chapels in bldg.. 3 and 4. the visitor's revel). lien room !bldg. 421, the fire Nta ilea(bldg Moxpliul Cluvpx School ibldga. 10011 and 10111.. and Drippy Faucet's No Problem Navy txt.hunit...1,1,1g

165.78 Figure 16-2.This figure illustrates the various terms discussed under HeadlineNomenclature.

All-Caps Heads five) letters, are set with the first letter incaps and others in lower case. The all capital letter headline style is allbut extinct. All-cap heads, while theyare easier to Downstyle write than others, are the most difficultto read. Use of the downstyle head hasincreased in recent years, In downstyle heads, the firstletter of the first wordand the firstletter of any proper nounis set as a cap, with all other Caps and Lower Heads letters being lower case. Downstyle ispresented in the way personsare taught to read and write. The most widely used headline style is the The styleis visually attractive and lacksthe upper and lower case head. In this headline style numerous capital letters in the headline which all words, other than articles, conjunctions, and serveas "eye stoppers," thus enhancing the prepositions of fewer than four (and sometimes readability of the line, Chapter 16WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES

HEADLINE FORMS STANDING HEADSThese are mostly labels, used for regular or recurring content, Headline forms constantly come and 2o. such as sports and action line columns. Today's trend is toward simplicity. The most common headlines are easy toread, easy to JUMP HEADSThese heads are designed write, and easy to set (figure 16-3.) Some of the to carry a reader's eye back into a portion of a most common headline forms are: story continued on another page. CROSSLINEA single line of type over a HAMMERHEADOften called a reverse column or columns. It can be centered, flush kicker, this head is set twice the size of the main right or left. head and set flush left and no wider than half the width of the headline area. FLUSH-LEFT HEADConsists of two or three-line head with each line set flush left. The WICKETThis is a short two-line head that lines do not have to be equal in width or set full. runs at the left of a single line oflarger head The white space atthe rightis considered letters. The wicket should be smaller than half enhancing because it allows air to breathe into the point size of the main head so the two the otherwise stuffy column spaces. Flush-left is wicket lines can fit between the mainline and the most commonly used head today. baseline of the main head. FLUSH HEADConsists of two or more TRIPOD HEADThis headisatrans- 1: les filling the entire space (also called FULL- position of a wicket using the same combination LINE). of type sizes. The single short line of larger type is to the left of the two lines of smaller type. BANNERS--A crossline form of headline The left element of both wicket and tripod running across the top of a page. If it runs above should be short. the flag or name plate, it is called a SKYLINE. A STREAMER applies to the widest and biggest ROCKET HEADSThe first words of a multi-column head on a page,regardless of. story's lead are set in display type, with each whether it's the full width. line decreasing in type size. 6 STEPLINEConsists of two or morelines, BREAKLINESThis variantis an adap- neither full, with the top one set flush left and tation of a kicker in which a kicker-like set of thelower oneflushright(alsocalleda words is ,;entered above the main head with a STAGGER or DROPLINE). broken rule running left and right. INVERTED PYRAMIDTwo, threeor NOVELTY HEADSThesearetypo- more lines, each shorter thanthe one above, and graphical tricks, such as setting part of a head all centered. upside down. HANGING INDENTIONConsist of a full There are many other headline variants. line with two succeeding lines indented from the left, HEADLINE FITTING

HEADLINE VARIANTS A well-written headline no headline at all if it won't fit the allotted space in your newspaper. There arecountless variations of headline If all letters of type were the same width, as styles, all of which are looked at essentially in they are on most typewriters, writing headlines terms of their visual impact when usedin would be very simple. Letters in type, however, conjunction with another of the basic styles: are of different sizes, 263

. 267 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

0Black History added O50 Mile Swim at Naval Academy Beats Jogging Alcoholism affects 6.5 Moving? million Americans check ®New Vehicle Regulations taxes Hit at Accident Causes The Right To Vote Local Navy Women First You Defend It; Use It!I ®With Ship-Bound Orders

What issue wouldyou like to see Opiniondiscussed in the Opinion column?

--A Good Combination-- 0 Miss You and the Red Cross

OGRAMPUS A government cost-sharing plan for health care services

166.225 Figure 16-3.Some current headline formsare, Flushleft IA), Flush-right 113), inverted Pyramid IC), Hanging indention OA Stepline (EL Crossline, with Kicker (FL Flush (0),Tripod (H), Breakline and Hammerhead(J). To determine whether a headline will fitor called a HEADLINE SCHEDULE. It is nothing not, a UNIT COUNT system is used (fig. 16-4). more than a display of the most commonly used In the system each letter is assigned a unit value, styles and sizes of headline types available at a which expresses its width in relation to other particularprintshop. The chart givesthe letters. For instance, a capital "M" or "W" is minimum-maximum unit count for each line about twice as wide as a lower case "a"or "c". based on the number of columns theline Therefore "M" or "W" is worth two units while stretches across. Figure 16-5 illustrates a typical the "a" or "c" is worth one unit. headline chart. The number of units permitted in a headline Each headline listed on the chart is often varies with the size and style of the type and given a key or code which tells the printer the width of the space the headline will occupy. name of the type style and the number of The key to a newspaper's headline typo- collmns the headline covers. Using figure 16.5 graphy is the HEADLINE CHART, sometimes fc. example, a headline with. a key "A5" would

264 Z.68 BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 16 WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES

indicate a headline set in a 60 point type style called Tempo Bold Reg., which has a minimum- HEADLINE WIT COUNT maximum unit count of 23-26 stretched across five columns (indicated by the number in the Lower case letters: all characters count "AS" key). one unit with these exceptions: Assume that you have to write a one-column, m and w 1 1/2 units two-line, caps and lower case head for a story f,1,i,r,t and j 1/2 unit about the enlisted men's club. You consult your Capital letters: all characters count headline chart and for the type you wish to use 1 1/2 units with these exceptions: the minimum-maximum count is 12-14. These M and W -- 2 unit:7 are your limitations. You mustkeep your I--1/2 unit Punctuation marks count 1/2 unit, headline within this count. So, you come up except the question mark, which counts as with the following: 1 unit, Symbols %, #, &, @ ) and figures New EM Club except 1 count one unit each, the figure 1 11/2 111/2 111/2 2 111/21/2 1 1 counts 1/2 unit, Spaces between words count 1 unit each. Opens Tonight 11/2 11 1 1111/21 1V2 1 1 Y2

165.79 Your first line in this head count is 131/2 units, The second line is 13 units. Both of these counts Figure 16.4. The headlineunitcount system was adopted to help headline writers determine are within the limits set on yourheadline chart. which heads will fit an alloted space. Since headlines are set in display type, rather than the small body type used for the story, they sometimes are set in a different section of

HEADLINE CHART the print shop than the story. If this is the case, NIT NIADLIMI .SOUN DUCRIPTION Bias headlines are written and forwarded to the AS Interim 'O' Club Work Starts 11.14TIIIPO SOLD SRSO PT es hall Scipatation Set lot Some gm. 7IS4TWO SOLO Kt45 Pt. printer on a separate sheet of paper (usually a

Cs Community Chest Dare Begintoct I 111111111100 OSLO ITL.48 Pt half page) with proper code designation. The ...... 1511 MIMI MINIMI, If as lasoban ham Ram blank space left above the story is similarly Sus, Mo dal Cud eel 5111011 IMP Mt 41 Pt

15.11 MOM 1110.511111114 It coded, using a slug line or the first few words of ea Illwerocies Found 11.55 MPG MI M.41 N. to Win f coonotnent the headline. , 3io te.....0th sa.6.4.1 11-14TSIIPO SOLO SUIsPT

.....1, 15.5. WIMP 114.11111111111 .5 1.5 ts SAM' Dan/ ha a Sod MT 4 %Wino URI( WU MNstoIn IS Pt LailoiX1TuT NiHitch Hiking 10HleTIMPO ligL01111411 Pt On Ft..way -1611il.1115.15.0 its.1 Is, *Awe. /11. SITOPS SOLO finSO Fs HEADLINE WRITING 41Ira:nig' 101TOMO SOLO tn.SS PI KS 114mo tatI./ 114OOPARIOS NIB. VI 11. WWII Headline writing requires skill and concen- L I 101,14 q.t.1111.0 SOLO SIISO Pt wat" tration. First of all, your headline must give the NI irc.. 11.14HYPO SOU) 111S.SO IT. rMO No aw Inn 71W0 SOLO tti: is Co /I 14 so pit essence of thy: story. While explaining the story M.O.. 01 111.111 SWUM Ott SI M. accurately, your headline must also fit into a 11.14 MIMI ISL. 14 M. -171I-112rV..... 14142IWO SOLO 181IS Pt limited space. I atm sva Some copy editors approach headline writing by looking for a key word or two which expresses the high point of the story. Then they add other words until they have a headline. 185,82 Other copy editors begin by forming a sentence Figure 16.5.A typical headline chart lists the sizes and styles of types available, along with a which contains the essential elements of the minimumaximum unit count for a given story. Then they edit out excess words (adverbs, line. adjectives, articles, etc.) and minor details until 26d65 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

all that remains is a well tailored headline which POOR: tells the story essentials. Headlines are written in telegraphic English, Halloween Dance To Be Held and usually containas the "bare bones" of Oct. 31 at Fleet Park languagea subject and verb. Other strolg uses of telegraphic English might include subject- BETTER: predicate or subject-verb-object constructions. A straight news headline is written for a Halloween Dance Slated straight news story and a feature headline fora Oct. 31 at Fleet Park feature story. If the story is a colorful account of some Do not begin a headline with a verb which event or trip, the headline should be colorful. If might convey the imperative mood (implying a the story is a romantic or dramatic account of command). For example: an event, the headline should follow form. If it is a human interest story with an element POOR: pathos, the headline should not be humorous. It the story is humorous, the headline should not Reject New Pay Raise be pathetic. For Armed Forces The followingaresome of thegeneral principles of headline construction practiced by GOOD: most copy editors: Armed Forces Pay Raise VERBS.Headline writers use verbs in what is Rejected by Congress sometimes called the "historical present" tense. This means they use the present tense verb to BETTER: describe action which has already happened. Primarily, this tense is used to convey a sense of Congress Rejects immediacy. In the same way, many people New Pay Raise normally speakinthepresenttense when For Armed Forces describingexcitingexperiencestofriends. Present tense verbs contain fewer letters than do Togivethereaderabettersenseof their past tense forms. immediacy, the verb should be in the first line of Frequently, verbs may be omitted when a headline. When it can be avoided, the verb implied. For example: should never beinthe bottom line of a three-line head. NAS Boatswain's Mate (Appears) On `To Tell The Truth' ARTICLES.Omit all articles (a, an, the) and other unnecessary words. For example: The verbs IS and ARE are frequently understood. It is not necessary to use them except for POOR: clarity. The infinitive "to be" is also awkward in headlines and should be avoided: Today's Submariners Are "Lucky" Says Veteran of theUSS Grant

POOR: BETTER:

New Pay Raise Is Approved Today's Submariners "Lucky" Says Veteran ofUSS Grant BETTER: VOICE.Use the active voice in preference to New Pay Raise Approved the passive voice whenever possible:

266 Chapter 16WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES

POOR: headlines, or the story, should cover the other news. More Men Being Sought BE SPECIFIC.As with all forms of news- For A-Subs writing, it is better to use specifics rather than generalities. BETTER: A headline which says: Navy Seeks More Men Auto Crash For A-Subs Proves Fatal

POOR: does not contain nearly as much information as:

Navy Underwater Fleet 2 Die as Car Bolstered by New A-Subs Smacks Tree

BETTER: Anothercustommostheadlinewriters observe is phrasing headlines in a positive, rather New A-Subs Bolster than a negative manner. This is based on the Underwater Fleet principle that a newspaper is supposed to tell readers what did happen, not what did not DECKS.Make each deck (not necessarily happen. Therefore, when writing about a family each line) a complete construction. Write the which escapes injury when their car overturns headline so it will stand alone and make sense, and burns on a highway, a good headline writer especially when it is used as the main deck. For would probably say: example: Family Escapes POOR: Flaming Death

Decade of Off-Duty Study rather than Earns Degree at Memphis No One Hurt BETTER: In Car Fire

Memphis Chief Earns Law Degree After Decade of Off-Duty Study OPINIONS.Headlines on stories dealing with opinion should show the source of that opinion. Because headlines are restricted to a small If a story is attributed to a second-hand source, space, copy editors generally limitheadlines to this should be reflected in the headline. one specific idea expressedforwfully rather than several ideas vaguely expressed. If space REPEATS.Avoid repeating words inthe permits, editors sometimes connect two inde- same headline deck. Also watch out forsimilar pendentthoughtsbyasemicolonina phraseology in adjacent heads and decks: headlineor add another section to the headline (a second deck)to include additional importar t Former Columbus EM aspects of the story. Returns to Columbus If a story involves a plane crash which kills AS Legal Officer one crew member, injures the pilot anddisrupts a training exercise, it wouldprobably be wise to THE FIVE W's.A good headline generally limit the main deck to the death. Subordinate has the WHO and the WHAT of the story in the 267 2'71 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 first line, with the following lines explaining the SPLITS.Do not split words, phrases, proper HOW and the WHY, if necessary. nouns, or compound nouns between lines: People expect newspaper stories to concern events which have occurred since the previoas WORDS: edition was published. Therefore the WHEN can usually be omitted. If an event has yet to 122,000 EM Advance- happen, however, the reader should be warned ments Predicted Off by the inclusion of the WHEN through theuse February Examinations of the future tense or a specific day or data. The WHERE in a headline on a local story is PHRASES: generally omitted. Readers expect theirnews- papers to print local stories and will assume a Crewmembers of storyislocalunless the headlinespecifies. USS Coral Sea otherwise. If a story is not local, the location Visit Portugal should be given. PROPER NOUNS: SHORT SYNONYMS.Use short, vigorous words. Headline writers usually have a vocabu- Rear Adm. Robert J. lary all their own. They learn to think in terms Corcoran kssumes of short synonyms for longer expressions when Command of CarDiv 9 writing headlines. Many copy editingtexts contain lists of short synonyms for headlineuse. COMPOUND NOUNS: For example: Norfolk Chief Petty Named for appointed or elected Officers ponsor Set for arrange or schedule (511171n s Picnic Win foi Victory Ex for former LINE BALANCE.Try to balance headlines Job for appointment, or position typographically: O.K. for accept, approve, or adopt Try for attempt UNBALANCED: Vet for veteran Hike for raise or increase Navy, Coast Guard Icebreakers Tell for reveal or inform Save U.K. Ship

BALANCED: In addition to these synonyms, there are many more which are used commonly in Navy Navy, Coast Guard Icebreakers newspapers. They are: Rescue Grounded U.K. Corvette Sub for submarine ABBREVIATIONS.Use commonly known Flyer or pilot for aviator andacceptedabbreviations when they are Jet for jet-propelled aircraft appropriate. Do not be afraidto use Navy All hands for entire ship's company abbreviations for ships, aircraft, ratings, ranks, Ships for reenlists commands, titles,etc.,inship and station Crew for crewmembers publications. Here are some commonly used Plane for aircraft or airplane 'Navy abbreviations: Exec for executive officer C.O. or skipper for commanding CPO for chief petty officer officer or captain P01, P02, and P03 for petty officer grades

268 272 Chapter 16 WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES 411111.111111

Com Rats for commuted rations the photograph cannot give falls to the picture's NCO for non-commissioned officer cutline. A cutline supplements the picture by EM for enlisted men/man explaining action, naming people, and giving LDO for Limited Duty Officer background information. GQ for general quarters The cutline writer is normally a middle man. Sec Nav for Secretary of the Navy He takes a piciure, which is inflexible, and adds BuPers for Bureau of Naval Personnel the cutline, which is flexible, and comes out with a story. He determines what additional Usetheseand other Navy abbreviations information must be given to communicate the ONLY in ship or station publications. They story the picture is meant to tell. should never be used in press releases to civilian Cutlinewritingisaspecialized formof news media. The Armed Forces News Style newswriting. It answers the same basic questions Guide contains recommended abbreviation use. as the news story. Yet, it does this in a single, concise paragraph. The cutline writer must be PUNCTUATION.--Newspapereditorsgen- alert to answer any questions which the photo erally adhere to the following style for head- may arouse in the reader's mind. lines:

Usesinglequotation marks instead of GATHERING CUTLINE MATERIAL double. Gatheringmaterialforcutlinesgenerally Use commas to replace the word "and." involves the same methods and techniques as Also where natural, use commas to mark pauses gathering information for a news story. The or breaks in headline construction. major difference is that you would not need as much information but it must be pertinent to Use semicolons to divide thoughts where the ;cene in the picture. needed, especially three-line heads. There are a few things to consider before writing a cutline: Use periods only after abbreviations. What is the story-telling value of the picture? In a caps and lower case head, start each Will the picture be for internal or external line and every important word with capital use?(Picturesfor civilians may need more letters. information.) Will the picture be released to a home town Articles (which are rarely used) and prepo- paper? If so, you must include a home town sitions not leading off a line are not capitalized tie-in. in a caps and lower case head. Capitalize "to" Will the photo be used alone or with a story? when it is part of an infinitive. With the basic considerations in mind, it is generally good practice to stick to the old but CUTLINE PREPARATION reliable five W's when gathering cutline material. Findtheanswerstothemost pertinent Picture.; have a unique story-telling ability. questions and you have more than enough They are most effective when accompanied with information with which to write your cutline. some explanatory text. For example: A missile launching may make an exciting picture, but it fails as a news vehicle unless the WHOGet the full names of all identifiable reader understands the WHEN, WHERE, and persons. WHY of the picture, as we" as the more obvious. WHAT and HOW. WHATNote whatis happening in the The function of providing information which picture at the time it is being taken. 269 Z7.3 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

WHERENote or determine where the cutlines. Some want only one or two words to picture is being taken. tease a reader into reading the accompanying story. Others use no cutline at all. WHYThis is the news peg, or the reason Only one method of cutline writing will be why the picture was taken. discussedinthischapter.This methodis considered the handiest formula for a novice WHENNote the time and date the picture writer. was taken. There are four major components involved in constructing a cutline. They are (1) explanation HOWIf there are circumstances that led of the action; (2) identification of persons or to the picture being taken and they .require thingF in the photograph; (3) background infor- explanation, make sure you know how they mation; and (4) the credit line. came about. THE ACTION.Thefirstsentenceof a cutlineisthe most important. It must link CUTLINE COMPONENTS with the picture by describing its ACTION. One of the peculiarities of the first sentence is We will not go into detail here on how your its verb form. The verb in the first sentence of a pictures should be posed and what to look for in cutline is in the present tense. The reason for the way of composition. Of primary concern thisisthat photographs,likepaintings and now is the text that accompanies the picture and sculpture, capture one moment of time and keep how it should be written. Although newswriting it in the present. and cutline writing are closely related, they are Another reason for using the present tense in different. The lead in a news story is the most the first sentence is that it gives the reader a important part of the story. But that is all it sense of immediacy, as though he were actually isthe most important part. The facts presented witnessing the event shown. Thus a cutline in the lead may be expanded and elaborated which reads, "Navy Seaman John Sloane, swims upon in the bridge and body of the story. through swirling flood waters of the Merrimack The cutline differs in that it is more than a River to rescue six-year-old Wendy Koza " PART of the storyit is the WHOLE story. has more dramatic impact than one which reads, Everything you have to say about the picture is "Navy Seaman John Sloane swam through..." saidin one paragraph. That paragraph must One p:oblem which arises:Fo-rn the use of the contain the essential facts, and the facts must be present tense in the first sentence is what to do tied into the scene in the picture. The length of with the WHEN element. To put the time a cutline is always governed by what must be element in the first sentence would result in a told about the picture. It may consist of one sentence such as, Hank Aaron hits a line drive to word, .one sentence, or it may consist of five center field yesterday.... " This is somewhat sentences. There are no set lengths. Strive for jarring to the reader and should be avoided. To simplicity and brevity. The shorter you can alleviatethis problem, the time element in write a cutline and still include all the essential cutlinesisusuallyreservedforthe second information, the better it will be. sentence. This avoids awkward sentences such as As in headline writing, a cutline is written in a the one just quoted. manner appropriate to the subject matter. In other words, write a news cutline for a news THE IDENTIFICATION.The second part of picture and a feature cutline for a feature-type a cutline is the identification. This includes an picture. identification of all persons and things vital to There are probably as many ways to write the storytelling function of the photograph. cutlines as there are newspapers, magazines, Everyone who is involved in the central action and other periodicals. Just about every publi- of thepictureshould beidentified. Don't cation has its own individual requirements ar.d identify persons who are blurred out, obscured, styleof cutlinewriting,Some want long or too far away for recognition. Anyone in a Chapter 16WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES picture who attractsthereader'sattention Slightly more complex is identification by should beidentified. The reader's curiosity elimination. Suppose there are four people in a should never be frustrated. If the identity of a photo. One of them (A) is receiving a medal pertinent figure in a photo is unknown, make from another (B). These two are identified by this fact a part of the cutline. action. A thirdperson(C)istheaward The next oueetion concerning identification is recipient's wife. She is identified by obvious where it shcald be placed in the cutline. The contrast. Therefore, the fourth person (D) is best answer to this is that it should come as high identified by elimination. For example, the as possible in the paragraph. Many times it will identification in the cutline might be handled be possible to identify people at the same time like this: "Lt W.E. Brinkley receives the Distin- the actionis described. For example, in the guished Flying Cross from his squadron leader, statement "Seaman Apprentice John P. Smithe Cdr W.P. Jackson. Lt Brinkley's wife Edna, and sounds taps to climax Memorial Day cere- LCdr J.E. Thums, VAP-61 XO, look on." monies .", the identification is included as Finally thereis the traditional left, right, the subject of the action. Sometimes, however, center or from the left identification. It is not it may be preferable to use an impersonal necessary to say from left to right. This wastes identification (A Navy musician sounds...) in space. If one starts from the left, there is no the first sentence. In this case, the complete place to go but right. This type identification identification should come in the second sen- should be used only when the 'other means of tence. identification will not suffice or when there is a The only exception to the general ground rule chance of confusion. stated above is in the case of group identifi- In cutline identification, avoid bromides such cation. When there are several people to be as "pictured above" or "shown abo .."Itis identified in a photograph, it is better not to apparent to both the editor and the reader that clutter thefirst two sentences with a list of somethingispicturedor shown above the names. This is apt to discourage the reader from cutline. Even worse are such phrases as "posing finishing the cutline. The recommended way to forthispictureare" or"smilingforthe handleagroup photographistousean cameraman is," et cetera. impersonal identification in the first sentence (such as, "A group of Navymen...") and then BACKGROUND INFORMATION.The third list the names later in the cutline. This achieves component of the cutlineis the background complete identification without cluttering the information. This consists of additional facts or important first sentence. explanations needed to clarify the photo. The The identification itself can be handled in one length of this section of the cutline depends on of several ways. The idea is to handle it in the two factors mentioned earlier:(1) where the most natural and concise manner consistent with photo will be used and (2) how the photo will clarity. The best way to identify people is by be used. action. If Joe Smith is passing a football to Sam The amount of background' information Jones, it should be obvious from the photo needed to explain a photo of carrier operations w $iich one is passing and which one is receiving to a civilian reader will obviously be greater than theball. Thus they are identified by their that needed to explain it to crew members who activity and you won't have to use left and right are participating in such operations. identifications. If a picture is to accompany a news story, Another simple manner of identifying some don't duplicate details used in the story. If the members of a photo is by obvious contrast. If picture is to be used alone, the cutline must be there are two sailors and Miss New York in a complete. picture, it is not necessary to identify Miss New Cutlinespreparedforpicturestoriesare York as being to the left or in the center. She is similar to those writtenforsinglepictures, well identified by obvious contrast and place except that a story is told by means of a series identification would be superfluous. of related pictures. In this case a main cutline, 225 BEST COPYPIRIUBLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2 usually written for the lead or key picture of the side by side under one heading or piece of art) story, can supply background information for for three-column pictures (see fig. 16-7). Cut- the entire story. lines should not be set wider than two columns, Although present tense is used to describe the action, the correct past, present, and future tense is used when presenting background facts related to the action. Be careful, however, of changing tenses in the middle of a sentence.

THE CREDIT LINE.The last component of the cutline is the credit line. Most ship and station newspapers use credit lines for photographs. There areseveral ways of crediting photographs. Some newspapers and magazines gin photographers personal credit lines (this is encouraged for ship or station newspapers). Others use a blanket statement which states, for instance, that "all photos are U.S. Navy photos unlessotherwise credited." Yet, 'the recommended way is to put the credit line at the end 'ii 4.Nutsfe..Aute Miera. 114400114~irYoko. Lod*" of the cutline itself. The credit line, should VA thrift.. heAtabae.goArs.AM111.6.94~16. fmwatib am"soma. follow the last word of the cutline, in paren- Stil~~41"41 grows. lawai1/4, 6.4.~....~/ abomprb, theses in the following manner: (U.S. NAVY PHOTO by J03 BRYAN TYLER) or (U.S. 165.88 NAVY PHOTO). Figure 16-8.Cutlines under two-column pictures are best displayed when set two-columns wide. CUTLINE TYPOGRAPHY Captions If you are writing cutlines for external release you needn't concern yourself with the way the Captions are small headlines or display lines cutline will be set in type. If however, you edit a which may be used with cutlines. Their func- shipor stationpaper you will need some tions are basically the same as those used over a knowledge of cutline typography. Good cutline news story:(1) to summarize, (2) to attract typography heightens the impact of a picture by attention, and (3) to dress up the page. makingtheexplanatorytextasvisually There areseveralkinds of captions. An appealing as possible. It is a good idea to rewrite OVERLINErunsabovethepicture.An and reset American Forces Press Service cutlines UNDERLINE runs between the picture and the because syndicated cutlines may violate your cutline. SIDE CATCHLINES are used with local style and the type faces used on AFPS pictures c i three columns or more and run on mats may not match yours. the left side of the cutline. If a headline is not For better display, cutlines are usually set in a used, the first few words of the cutline may be larger or a different type face than that used in set in bold face or all capital letters to serve as a the news columns. Some papers use the same LEAD-1N LINE. These four types of captions size and style as their body type, except that it are illustrated in figure 16-8. All such display is set bold face. lines should be large type, preferably the kind Cut lines under multicolumn pictures are best used in a small headline. displayed when set two columns wide for two-columnpictures(seefig.16.6),ora MORTISED PICTURES.Pictures that con- column-and-a-half wrapped (the term wrapped tain dead areas of sky or unimpottant back- means to place two or more columns of type ground can be mortised(i.e.,a rectangular

00'476 Chapter 1 6WRITING HEADLINES AND CUTLINES

'Phisflauntww. &AA. il+SIWAAMortaAL44bsa "owl ftw AU"... Warr Iftft.o :'J. W. SAWAOIA auw.MmwawAI4k/OA IOAANafta

165.85 Figure 16.7.A cutline for a threecolumn picture is displayed best when set a columnandahalf wide, under the picture. window or space cut out), and the cutline placed "keyed" together. For example, if the picture in the space. This saves page space and may appears on page 1 and the story on page 4, the actually improve the picture. This practice is cutline will carry a line which says "Stcryon time consuming and expensive with letterpress page 4." This keys the two together for the production, but lends itself easily and inexpen- convenience of the reader. sively to )ffset. There are times when a newspaper may not have space to publish both story and picture. LAYING OUT CUTLINFS When this happens, one or the other will be discarded. If it is the story that gets the toss, the When laying out a page, you should treat each cutline must be rewritten to include the essential picture and its cutline as one unit. The relation facts. of picture to cutline must be obvious. Readers willseldom spend much time hunting for When a picture and acutlinedreto be misplaced cutlines. In addition, cutlines may be released with a story, or when you are writing a run beside or above pictures. This adds variety, story and cutline for your command's newspaper, the best practice is to write the story and in some cases, helps page layout. . first. After the story is written, write the cutline It is a common practice for most newspapers for tile picture. There are two important reasons to run the story and accompanying pictures forthis:(1) Itenables youtoavoidany side-by-side. hue to space limitations, however, duplication of phrases or ideas that appear in the this isimpracticalattimes.If a story and story; and (2) it enables you to write tighter, accompanying picture must be separated in a more compact cutlines.Having written the newspaper for any reason, the two arestill story, the salient features are clear in your mind,

273 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

OVERLIN E

UNDERLINE BOW. ,.v.., w...A9.4"..

A IIAAAJNAvAn&A.AAA"NAre.

SIDE LEAD-IN LINE Au-. CATCH KAA0610040".AAMAAA"MAAAA0w.. .1 LINE

165.86-.89 Figure -16-8.The four basic caption forms are, the overline (A the underline (B), the side catchline (C), and the lead-in line.

and it is easier to pare the cutline down to its simple senter:,:e form. An additional component, essentials. however, must accompany a cutline for outside releasethe DATELINE. DATELINES The dateline consists of the where and when and is used as a lead -in to the cutline. For When preparing cutlines for pictures to be example, a datelined cutline would read like releasedexternally, you need not concern this: yourself with headlines or display lines. You "ABOARD THE Um. ENTERPRISE AT SEA, merely write your cutlineincomplete and DECEMBER 13Carrier pilots leave .." CHAPTER 17

PRINTING, LAYOUT, AND MAKEUP

The printing fundamentals discussed in this LETTERPRESS chapter will acquaint you with the technical aspects of producing a ship or station news- The most common method of civilian newspaper. In other words, it tells you how to get paper production is letterpress. Approximately your paper into print. Although the following 35% of all commercially printed military news- discussionisaimed primarilyat newspaper papers are. letterpress reproductions. production, these basics can also be applied to Letterpress, in its simplest form, could be any other internal publication you might be compared to a rubber stampthe ink is put on a called upon to publish. raised printing surface and then pressed onto the From thischapter, you will: (1) get an paper. The raised letters, mounted on metal explanation of the principal printing processes bases or wood blocks, account for the term most commonly used in ship and station news- "relief printing" sometimes used for letterpress. paperproduction(differencesamongthe The keys of a typewriter produce another very methods, the advantages and limitations of each, simpl a kind of letterpress printing. Figure 17-1 and the differences in the way copy and art are illustrates the principle. prepared for each); (2) receive a brief introduction to typography; (3) learn how to layout and makeup a newspaper page; and (4) learn how to proofread.

PRINTING PROCESSES

Ship and station newspapers are reproduced in a variety of ways. Readability and cost are the important considerations in selecting the means of production for ship and station newspapers. In most situations the method of newspaper productionwillhave been determined long before you become a staff member. Even so, a command's needs and anewspaper's needs lhange from time to time and a periodic re-evaluationofa newpaper'sproduction methods is necessary. 57.2 Ship and station newspapers are printed by Figure 17.1.The principle of letterpreu printing Is vary three basic procesta LETTERPRESS, OFF- simpleme Ink is put on a raised printing SET LITHOGRAPHY, and MIMEOGRAPH. surface and than pressed onto the paper.

275 29 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Copy Preparation There are three basic kinds of engravings:

If you work on a letterpress newspaper, your 1. A LINE ENGRAVING is used for every- work with the printer begins when you send him thing that does not have tone gradations in it your copy-theted to be printed-in type- (type matter, line drawings, solids, ruled lines, written form. You will help him by keeping the borders, etc.). copy as neat as possible. Setting type is an 2. A HALFTONE ENGRAVING is used for expensive proposition, and you cannot afford to photographs, wash drawings, and any other pay the printer to spend time figuring out your original material which has gradations of tone handwriting. values from light to dark. Make neat corrections, using the standard 3. A COMBINATION ENGRAVING is sim- copy editing symbols described in chapter 9 of ply part line and part halftone. this manual. Mark all paragraphs clearly. If the printer misses seeing a new paragraph, several lines of type may have to be reset. Prepare your Figure 17-2 illustrates the three basic kinds of typewritten copy so that a paragraph ends on engravings. .he same page it began-not split over two pages. An engraving is a pattern of lines cut into a This will help the printer, particularly, if he has piece of meta/ or plastic and. usually mounted on more dual one person setting type at once (he wood. While metal engravings are the most can give one page to one Linotype operator and common, plastic engravings are now being used another to a second operator). more and more-particularly in instances where Here are some additional rules to keep in the press run is relatively small. mind when submitting copy to the printer: Line engravings print only as lines and solid blacks, although flat gray tones may be intro- Type all copy double-spaced on one side of duced into them. These gray tones are created the page. If using plain bond, make it 8" X by optical illusion. They are actually small black 10-1/2". solids (such as tiny dots) which are separated from one another by white space. The eye mixes Keyalltypewritten copy toits exact the white space with the black dots subduing position on the layout. (Layout discussed later their color so that a flat, gray tone results. This in this chapter.) is known as a One or a tint. Tints may be applied by the qugraver or they may be applied Number all copy sheets. Sometimes two or to the original art in the form of acetate shading more compositors will work on the same assign- sheets. It is more expensive to have the engraver ment, and the sheets must be numbered. This lay the tints, of course. Crossword puzzles and prevents an inadvertent loss of a sheet. most cartoons are produced from line engravings. Keep a copy for reference. Halftones are used to reproduce illustrations, such as photographs and wash or watercolor Include explicit, directions tothe type- drawings. In the halftone process, the entire setter. illustration is converted into a pattern of dots. These dots vary in size according to the intensity of the tone of the original. In light areas, the Art Preparation dots are so small that they are almost invisible. In dark areas, the dots are large and close Artwork for letterpress is usually reproduced together so that they look like a solid black through a proceis known as ENGRAVING. (The mass. The eye blends the dots together to word "art" when used in this chapter will refer produce an illusion of continuous tone. This toallphotographs,drawings,illustrations, tone is different from the flat tone used in line cartoons, cr.. ssword puzzles, and so forth that engravings because the dots vary in size and this might be reproduced in a newspaper.) produces graduated tones instead of a flat tint. 2714 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 17PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

N., ti

LINE HALFTONE WASYNATION

57.24.0 Figure 17.2. The three basic kinds of engravingsare Line, Halftone, and Combination. To make a halftone, the photograph to be Letterpress Equipment reproduced is placed on the copy board ofan engraving camera and is photographed through a There arc three major kinds ofletterpress screen. The screen breaks the image into dots on equipment: the negative. After the film has been developed, the picture is transferred to a metal plate. This is 1. PLATEN PRESS. Paper is fedto a flat done by placing the negative on top of a light surface called a platen whichcontacts the inked sensitive metalplate. A powerful arc lamp form clamped against the bed ofthe press. Paper contact-prints the image on the plate, much as a and form meet ina near-vertical position. negative is printed on paper in your photo lab. 2. FLAT-BED CYLINDER PRESS.Paper is The process for producing line engravings is held on a cylinder by grippers androlled over essentially the same as for halftones except that the printing form lockedon a flat bed. The form no screen is used. moves horizontally and the paper revolvesover Protect your artwork carefully for transit to it. . the printer. This is particularly important for 3. ROTARY PRESS. Bothpaper and plates photographs. Finger marks, smudged typed mat- are on cylinders rolling against each other. The ter, excess rubber cement, and wrinkles damage plates are curved. artwork. If you must write on the back of photos, write in the border area and use a soft grease pencilthe impression of hard pencils or Duplicate Plates ballpoint pens has a way of showing upon engravings. Clean up all guide pencil lines on In letterpress work, a form is the printer's lettering. Mount fragile or thin originals on term for an engraving, or a combination of illustration board. If artwork must be rolled, roll engravings, type, ornaments, and headlines made it with the image to the outside. It is best to up in the form of one single page. A CHASE is send all originals flat, reinforced with a card- the frame into which the form is wedged (locked board stiffener. Forward cutlines with the copy. up) before it is put on the rem

277 JOURNALIST 3 & 111.11M1111F

A short press run usuall, is made directly throughatechnical photo-chemical process from the original form. However, when several which leaves the nonprinting areas of the plate thousands of copies are to be made, the printer receptive to water. On an offset press, two sets prepares a duplicate. He may do this to protect of rollerspass over the plate cylinder. One the original plate frok1 wear or so that the job spreads water over the plate. Only those parts can be duplicated two or more times onthe representing white space remain damp. The same run to cut down press time. second roller spreads ink, which sticks only to The two most r ommon forms of dup icating the parts of the plate that are drythat is to the plates are through processes called STEREO- parts which on a letterpress would be raised. The TYPING and ELECTROTYPING although, plas- platethenpasses againsta rubber covered tic and rubber plates are also coming into use. "blanket" cylinder which accepts the inked Both processes may be made from engravings image and "off-sets" or transposes it to the alone or from the locked chase containing both paper which is carried through the pressand type and cuts. (A CUT is printer's slang for pressed against the blanket by an impression eng-aving. The word cut is also used to describe cylinder. This process is shown in figure 17-3. any piece of art used in apublication.) Most large ship and small shore station news- Stereotypes are made by placing a sheet of papers, and many brochures are produced by blotter-like paper over the original plate ami fact tidicgmlity. subjecting it to pressure in a special press. When Therearetwotypesofoffsetlithog- the paper is removed, it carries an impression of raphy: DIRECT IMAGE and PHOTO-OFFSET. the plate and is called a MATRIX or MAT. The mat is then placed in a device known as a casting box. The casting box is filled with hot metal and DIRECT IMAGE allowed to cool. The result is a stereotype plate. In making electrotypes, an impression of the Direct image is the simplest type of lithog- original is made in wax or plastic. This mold is raphy. In this process, copy is typed directly then dusted with graphite and flowed with a onto a flexible plastic or heavy paper plate solution of copper sulphate to which iron filings called a "master," using a special typewriter have been added. The ironreacts with the ribbon. Line drawings may also be done directly copper in the solution to form athin coating which acts as an electrical conductor when the mold is placed in the electroplating solution and INK ROLLER current is applied. WATER ROLLER Rubber and plastic plates are made by a process similar to that used inmaking stereotypes. A plastic matrix is made from theoriginal and a duplicate plate consisting of hard rubber PLATE or thermosetting plastic is thenmade from this matrix in a special molding press.

RUDER OFFSET LITHOGRAPHY BLANKET olAria-.50.."- Offset lithography is rapidly gaining favor AP#4,7,4,0 PAPER among newspapers. The number ofmilitary papers usingprintedoffsetlithography has IMPRESSION doubled in the last four years. It differs from cYLINOft letterpress in that the printing is done from a flat surface. The fact that oil and water do not mix allows use of the flat surface. 57.8 Figure 17.3.A simple diagram of offset lithography. In, offset printing the plates are prepared

j 282 278 Chapter 17PRINTING LAYOUT AND MAKEUP on the master with a special pencil, ink, or The Pasteup ballpoint pen. These ribbons, pencils, inks, and pens contain an oil base, just as the ink does on The set copy (whether it is a hot type proof offset presses. or cold type composition) is mounted, along Most ship's newspapers (also the daily press) with line art, on a pasteup (layout sheet) foi are printed by the dire:t image method. photographing. The editorial department is fre- The offset press most commonly used in this quently involved in making this pasteup, so your process is the "Multilith 1250." These presses, responsibility in an offset operationgoes beyond operate on a smaller scale than large offset that of letterpress. machine.', but the principle behind them is The manner inwhichartand type are practically the same. They are popular aboard mounted on the pasteup has a great effect on ship because they are relatively easy to operate the quality of the finished product. Care must and require little floor space. They can be used be taken to avoid shadows and wrinkles.If for printing sheets as large as 11" X 14" and as possible, the pastel" should be made to the small as 3" X 5". Its maximum printing area is actual size of the newspaper. 9-3/4" X 13". In some cases,a Navy editor may only indicate the sizes and positions of the various elements on his layout sheet and then let the *PHOTb-lbf F SET printerposition them accordingly. However, much time and effort can be saved when you Photo-Offset, the technique of transferring make the complete pasteup yourself. It is easier type proofs and mounted art onto plates, is a for you to cut and paste the paper then it is for more flexible type of lithography. A printer sets theprinter to work with the photographic the copy in regular letterpress type, makes negatives and positives for his final assembly. proofsusuallyonFlossypaperandthen For the pasteup operation, you need such photographs the proof. Once the proofs of the items as a drafting board or table, prepared type are taken, the type itself is not used again. pasteup (layout) sheets, a "T" square, steel On small scale operations, the copy may be straightedge, rulers, rubber cement,erasers, an typewritten instead of set in type. When this is india ink set, a cutting edge (X-Acto-Knifeor the case, it is particularly important to use an single edge razor blade), light blue lead pencils, electrictypewriter so the letters are evenly sciqsors,a scale system to determine repro- spaced and of equal darkness. If your print duction size (scaling, the method of finding the shop has a Varityper, by all means, make use of proportional reduction or enlargement size of it to set your type. The Varityper is essentially copy and art,will be discussedin another an electric typewriter with variable spacing and section of this chapter), and a line gage (a rule, changeable typefaces. The variable spacing sometimes called a pica rule, graduated in picas, permits you to "justify" or line up the right- used by printers for taking measurements). hand margin of your copy so thatitlooks printed rather than typed. Type prepared for offset work on a regular Art Problems in Photo.Offset typewriter, IBM electric, Varityper, or Justo wrier is referred to as COLD TYPE COMPOSI- LINE.Line art (illustrations, rules, hiadlines, TION. Type set on metal slugs from letterpress borders, cartoons, crossword puzzles, and any typesetting equipment is referred to as HOT other piece of solid color art) to be included on TYPE COMPOSITION (molten lead is used to the pasteup should be enlarged or reduced to the cast the images). exact size alloted for it on the layout sheet. Copy to be set in type for offset purposes is Type proofs must be carefully cl.,ecked tosee prepared and submitted to the printer in the that the lines of type are straight and that the same manner as it is for letterpress. proofs are pasted down square with the page.

283 279 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

These proofs, as well as art, must behandled plate is made. Only the shape and size of the with great care. The camera will record every halftone is indicated on the page layout. This is error and every smudgeof a careless pasteup. To accomplishedinseveralways. The simplest correct or eradicate them isalways costly and medic i is to "mask out" the area where the often impossible after the plates are made. halftone will be positioned by either india ink or Light blue lines are ordinarily used onthe black paper. Another method is to square off pasteups to indicate margins.Light blue will not the space on the pasteup and put down a piece of show up in the final photography. If necessary, red adhesive film and cut it to fit the halftone you can draw inblue lines yourself, but in a area. The cameraphotographs the red the sarr week to week operation, it is much better to as black. The red cellophane is more expensive have them prir ted on standard layoutsheets. butis much easier to use and often more Check with your printer for advice beforehaving accurate. Red or black space on the pasteup your layout sheets printed.He can advise you on appears as clear space on the negative.It serves the various types of margins whichshould be as a window through which theplatemaker can markedand on the mount of extra white space accurately position the halftone negative into to leave for him to work with. the line negative. Any lines you want to appear on thefinished Therearethree methods for submitting page must bedrawn or pasted in, in black, on photographs, or original halftone material, to the pisteup sheet. Only lines in blackIndia ink the printer: will reproduce clearly on the offset plates. If type is not available for headlines,they 1. If photos have been printed or cropped to may be hand lettered.There is also a line of the exact size they will appear in the newspaper paper letters,known as Fototype and letters (a one-to-one shot in printing terminology),they pointed on waxed acetate known bysuch trade may be mounted in theirpredetermined position na*es as Art Type.These letters may be used on a separate layoutsheet. Therefore, you will for display matter. Fototypeletters consist of submit two pasteupsone containing the line individual characters printed on lightcard stock work and the other the halftones. and made up into complete assortments.They enlarged, come in various sizesand faces. The cardboard 2. If photos are to be reduced or type characters areset and then mounted they are submitted in the same manner asthose directly on the pasteup sheet. Acetatelettering forletterpress.Theyshouldbecropped similar. The letters are cui from asheet (trimmed to remove unessentialparts) and is later in this containingthemasterassortment andare scaled. Cropping will be discussed mounted directly on the layoutsheet one after chapter. adhesive another. Tne waxed backing acts as an 3. If a halftone is to be of irregular shape the for the letters. In addition, there are several "headliner" preparation procedure is somewhat different. machines on the market which producedisplay In this case, the "window" for the platemaker matter photographically. The heads areset in can be made bypasting the actual photo in long lines or strips, which are then trimmedand position on the line pasteup, attaching a clear pasted in place on the layout. You willprobably acetate sheet over it and then, with red orblack have access to one of these machines. Chapter opaque paint, carefullypainting in the area 16containsfurtherdiscussion of headline indicated by the outline of the photo under the which preparation. acetate. There is also a special material can be used to outlinethe illustration. It is HALFTONES.Halftones cannot be pasted acetate with a red coating. This red is translu- onto the layout with your type andline cuts, cent, and c 4n be scraped away from theoutside because they must be photographedthrough a outline of the halftone, leaving the red shape for halftone screen. Therefore, they are alwaysshot the camera to record as the window. If thejob is as separate negativesand then spliced into the very complicated, itis better to let the printer master (line) negative of the pagebefore the do this kind or preparation. A good printer will

1.284 280 Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT ANDMAKEUP advise you on the best method of preparing the paper, the wax spreads, or is cut through photos for photo-offset printing. All printers leaving a note the shape of the letter. The have different requirements. mimeograph machine consistsessentiallyof Be sure to protect your pasteups carefully. If feeding and delivery units and a perforated they are damagedor if they get dirtyyoumay cylinder cuvered by a piece of cloth. Ink placed have to start over. It is a good idea tocover in this drum soaks through the perforations into them with a tissue overlay and to protect them theclothcovering. The finishedstencilis between layers of cardboard when taking them mounted on the cylinder and when the machine from one place to another. is rotated the ink is forced through the cut portions of the stencil onto the paper.

MIMEOGRAPH PRINTING Care and Handling of Mimeographs

One of the most common methods ofrepro- Before attempting to operate a mimeograph, ducing newspapers at sea is the mimeograph study the operating manual prepared for the machine. Almost all daily presses are printed by model of machine you are using. If you are using this method, especially on smaller ships without the mimeograph for the first time, get assistance a Multilith. Good, professional-looking weeklies from an experienced operator. The principle of and monthlies can also be turned out with operation is simple, but the machine is delicate. mimeograph equipment. A minor mistake in operation or adjustment The mimeographed newspaper hasmsly could spoil the appearance of your work. advantages. The major ones are its low cost of If you are unfamiliar with a mimeograph btt production and ease of handling. A mimeograph responsible for the care of one, a brief explana- stencil, if well prepared and properly handled, tion of its parts and operating principle will be can reproduce from 3000 to 5000 copies. On helpful. small ships and activities where mimeograph is Figure 17-4 illnstrates the parts and operating most likely to be used, this is far more than the principle of a mimeograph machine. At the top number of copies usually needed. of the illustration is the stencil. Impressions in All you need to get into the mimeographed the stencil's surface, made by the typewriter or newspaper business is a mimeograph machine, the stylus, permit ink to flow through the stencil mimeograph ink and paper, a typewriter, sten- when it is attached to the revolving cylinder. cils,correction fluid, a straight edge, and a The cylinder of the mimeograph is shown at stylus. Of course, there are more elaborate B. Before the machine is started, ink is poured materials that will help you add a professional into this cylinder through an opening (point C). touch to your paper. Among these are a mimeo- The stencil is attached to the circumference of scope or illuminated tracing table,lettering the cylinder, D, which is then revolved, either guides, shading plates, and precut stencil draw- electrically or by hand operation. (When the ings. But even with this full kit of equipment, stencil is placed on the cylinder, care must be your primary asset will be imagination. exercised to avoid wrinkling or tearing the While very few military commands have the stencil.) Below the cylinder is a roller, E, which equipment to electronically cut local photo- revolves in the opposite direction from D. Paper graphsintomimeographstencils, American from a pile, F,is aligned and fed into the Forces Press Service provides both pictures and machine one sheet at a time by the retainer and cartoons for use in mimeo papers. In addition, feed mechanisms. As the paper passes between anyone with art ability can easily draw or trace the roller and the cylinder, it comes in contact line art onto mimeograph stencils. momentarily with the stencil and receives the Preparing stencils for mimeographiii is no impression from the ink passing from the cylin- more difficult than ordinary typing once the der out through the stencil openings. More ribbon selector has been set to white. The stencil information on mimeograph printing will be pre- itself is very much like a piece of ordinary sented later in this chapter under "Mimeograph waxed paper. When the typewriter key strikes Layout." 285 281 AVAILABLE BESTCOPY 2

point type. Most of your headlines will range from 12 to 36 points. The depth of acolumn of type or art (measured down the page)is given in A inches. A COLUMN INCH is one columnwide and one inch deep; ai hotograph 2 columns wide and 3 inches deep occupies 6column STENCIL inches.

INK TYPE CLASSIFICATION IMPRESSION D PAPER Did you ever stop to think how many different kinds of handwriting you come across B in a single day? Some are largeand bold; some are weak; somesmall; some clear; and some are almostillegible.Typestyles,called TYPE IMPRESSION FACES, are much the same. ROLLER The first totem of selecting a typeis, of course, clarity. Type mustbe legible. But there is more to it than that. Likehandwriting, type FINISHED COPIES faces reflectcertaincharacteristics,such as refinement, dignity, boldness, or strength.Prop- erly used, they can convey thefeeling or mood of a message. They may be warm,brisk, dignified,modern, or old-fashionedwhateveris needed to emphasize or suggest thethoughts expressed in the copy. 6.4 Type can be used to attract thereader's attention. The use of large, boldfaces is one of Figure 174.The operating principle of the eye. But the mimeograph machine. the most effective ways of stopping large, bold type is difficult to read. Itshould be TYPOGRAPHY limited, to a few words, and should befollowed by smaller, more legible faces thatinvite reading. TYPOGRAPHY is the art of printingwith Most kinds of type have both capitalsand type. It involves the style,arrangement, and small letters. Printers use the termUPPERCASE appearance of the printed page.As editor of a for capitals and LOWERCASE for smallletters, should be famil- terms that originated from the customin shops ship or station newspaper, you the iar with a few tape terms. where type isset by hand, of keeping less-used capitals in the upper case andthe small letters in the lower one. printers knew PRINTERS' MEASUREMENTS As early as the 17th century, they had to organize their typefaces in an Type size is measured inPOINTS. One point efficient manner. So we have it thatthe largest of an inch. category of classification isTYPE RACE. The is approximately one seventy-second shown in Twelve points equal one PICA.Points are used six main races, or classes of type, are to measure the height of aletter of type. The figure 17-5. width of a line of type isgiven in picas. Most about 12 picas (2 inches) ROMAN.Roman is the type most com- newspaper columns are magazines, news- wide. Type, ranges in size from3 to 120 points. monly used for the text of Your stories will usually be printedin 8 or 10 papers, and boo's.It is chosen because everyone

2,86 282 Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

gothic, and contemporary type style inuse today. They are used in text matter to show emphasis. Although italics were originally used for text, they were rather hard to read in lengthy articles, and are now used less and less E for this purpose. ROMAN GOTHIC ITEXT oomm Immo. onmom mama mom mmo memo mmimm mom SCRIPT.Script type faces have littlecon- necting links or kerns that combine the letters and give them the appearance of handwriting. They are suitable for announcements and invita- Ei tions. CONTEMPORARY.The past thirty years ITALIC SCRIPT ICONTEMPORARY have been truly significant in typographic history. The old gothics have had their faces lifted, and everywhere new streamlined faces have appeared. Contemporary type refers to the 45.207071C thousands of modern, artistic faces thatare used Figure 17-5.The six main classes of type, in a variety of ways such as advertisements, labels on cans a,' boxes, display composition, is familiar with it and because it is the easiest and TV commercial:.. The example of contem- to read in smaller sizes and lengthy articles. porary type shown in figure 17.5 is bold (heavy Roman types are divided into two classifica- block), but the same group contains light 'face tioAs: MODERN and OLDSTYLE. The chief letters. In general, modern types tend more to difference between modern and oldstyle roman the use of light faces. is found in the serifs (the little cross-strokes at From races, type is further categorized into the ends of the main lines of a letter). The type faces which are similar, though not exactly oldstyle letter has soft, rounded serif's, while the alike in design. These groups are called TYPE modern letter has heavier shadings and thin FAMILIES. Each family has a name anda clean-cut hairlines. certain basic family resemblance. Many type families are named for their creators such as GOTHIC.-. -Study the difference between the Bodoni, Goudy; some names come from nations roman letter and the gothic letter. You will or regions: Caledonia, and Old English. Some notice that where the roman letter is composed families include dozens of type faces, all dif- of a series of thick and thin lines, th?, gothic ferent in some way, yetall having general letter is constructed of lines of even weight. It characteristics that unmistakably identify them has no serifs; it is perfectly plain. as members of their particular family such as the Bodoni family in figure 17-6. TFAT.Text type is sometimes referred to as The next category refers to the weight, width, "Old English." Text was the firsi type style used and angle of type. This category is called TYPE in the history of printing. Although it is still SERIES. When a series carries only the family used frecocntly, it is generally limited to a few name, with no adjectives indicating variations in lines of copy. As far as newspaper work is width, weight, or angle, it may be assumed that concerned, it should be limited to something the type' is normal. The usual distinctionis formal,suchasreligiousannouncements, between big letters (called display or headline prayers, programs, and invitations. type) and small sizes (called body or text type). TYPE FONT is the next category and it has ITALICS.Initalictype,thelettersare all the letters, numbers, and characters necessary slanted and made to match almost every roman, to set copy in one size of type.

Z87 283 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

the word is generally capitalized. You may use II POINT 11000NI TOOK either regular capital letters or slightly smaller ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm capitals of the same style of type.

11 POINT 1000NI 100K ITALIC ORNAMENTS, such as stars (called dingbats ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm in printer's lingo) and dots (called bullets), are IS POINT 1000NI used to add interest and beauty to a job. When using ornaments, you should always select some- ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl thing that goes well with the style or type that 11 POINT 1000NI ITALIC you are using. Above all, don't overdothem. Fancy types and decorations should be used ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl only if they make your newspaper page more II POINT 1000NI SOLD effective. Decoration, just for decoration's sake, was abandoned at the turn of the centuryin ABCDEFGHIJIabcdefghijkl favor of simple harmony and balance.

16 POINT 1000NI SOLD ITALIC BORDERS and RULES should be selected ABCDEFGHIJIabcdefghijkl with the same care that is used in selecting a 11 POINT ULTIA11000N1 type face, because the same generk.1.1 principles of typography apply.Figure17-7 shows some ABCDEFGliabedeiggh typical ornaments and borders. II POINT ULTIA1000NI ITALIC A study of type size and classifications could take up an entire book. The basics presented ABCDEFGlabedefgh here will help you both in preparing an attrac- POINT 1000NI CONDINUD tive publication and in conversing with the printer. For all practical purposes, all you have ABCDEFGHUIELMabcdefghijklma to know is the answer to the question, "What II POINT ULTIA11000NI IXTIA CONDINSID kind of type is available to me?"A trip to your ABCDEFGHLIKLIabcdefghijkl print shop will give you that answer. A wealth of additionalinfo:mationandillustrationson II POINT SODOM OPIN typography, if you wish to study the subject ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl beyond your rating requirement, can be found in the rate training manualLithographer 3&2, NAVTRA 10452-B.

45.207(57)B BEST COPY AVAILABLE Figure 17.6.Some type faces from the Bodoni family.

A modern newspaper uses one or twofamilies of compatible type. It achieves varietyin the , series choice and point size. ofir) sifilj:*wats3 ORNAMENTS AND BORDERS 1:=ttttttt INITIAL LETTERS are large, ornatecapital *1 4 +C03 letters that are sometimes used at the beginning of a paragraph to dress up the page.They come in all sorts of styles. 57,17 When an initial letter is used, the remainderof Figure 17.7.Ornaments and borders.

. 284 Chapter 17PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

NEWSPAPER DESIGN He must have a good working knowledge of typography. Beyori the copy-editing and type-selection considerations discussed in this and preceding On ship and stationnewspapers, layout is chapters are the techniques for puttingthe usually handled by the editor. On largecom- material together in sucha way that your paper mercial dailies, front-page layout is usually done emphasizes what is important, makesan attrac- by one of the executive editorsmanaging tive appearance, and draws and hold the reader's editor, news editor, or copy chieftoensure eye. All of this is accomplished through good top-level emphasis of particular stories and ideas. layout and makeup designed to achieve thebest Other pages are done by department editors overall appearance and style of thepublication (sports, feature, editorial) and by copy editors. and to allow the reader to obtain the maximum Remember your layout is your blueprint and information in the shortest time. blueprints are drawn toscale.So, start by Layout is the planning of the position and making up a standard layout sheet showing the page on which each piece of copy or art will page with it's columns drawn either to scale or occupy in your publication, the decision as to to size. (A layout sheet of actual page size is the the kinds of type to be used and how to use easiest to use.) The layout sheet; should be them, and the indicating of these planson the marked for column inches, The top of each page layout sheets. should allow space for showing the issue, the Make-up is normally the execution of that page, and the section of the paper,.The best way layout by the printer (the compositor), although to indicate which story goes where is to write in sometimes the terms "layout" and "make-up" the story slug (the short identification line that are used interchangeably, For instance, the name goes right before the writer's name on a piece of "make-up editor" is used on some newspapers copy. See figure 17-8. You can use keys for art instead of "layout editor." We will consider the and your headlines can be written in. two terms interchangeable.

Copy Fitting THE BLUEPRINT As a layout man, you must be able to The blueprint for a newspaper are its layout determine an approximate column inch size of a sheets which is a detailed plan or sketch showing story from typewritten copy. By making a few the arrangement of art, heads, and copy to guide simple calculations, you can determine before- the compositor in making up the actual pages. hand how much space the typewritten copy will The layout is an absolute necessity '1' you are fill when it is set in type (on the basis of a 2" or going to avoid the amateur editor's nightmare 12 pica wide column). For most 8-point type, finding out the day before publication that you four typewritten lines (on a regular 8 X 10-1/2 have only 8 pages of material for a 12-page sheet of paper) equal eight lines of set type, or publication. What is more, if you piece together one column inch in depth. If other than 8-point a publicationatthelast minute without a body type is used, check with your printer. He layoutthrowing in an article here and a picture will furnish you with a simple fitting formula for thereyou will come up with a meaningless all sizes and styles of type faces available to you, hodgepodge. taking into consideration such things as varia- Whether one considers layout an art or simply tions in column widths, difference in typewriter a mechanicalskill,itis clearly an involved, letter characters, et cetera. demanding fun :don. A few "musts" for a good You must mark copy clearly with all neces- layout man are: sary instructions to the typesetter before it is forwarded to the printer. A piece of copy must He must have a keen news sense to know contain (if the printer is going to make up the which stories to emphasize and how strongly. entire page from your layout plan): a key to its

2852S9 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

THE AMPHIBIAN Amphibious Force Pacific Fleet

Record EM Advancements A cm' Predicted forTest Takers)

Exams 1/1/1 JOSE Jackson

'NavyEnlisted. who have just completed taking the February ad- o vancement exams should be happy about arecently-completed.ganning

report which forecasts a "projected" total of more than 122,000

vaancies in pay grades E-4 through E-7during(Dmonths covered by

the promotion cycle.

Law figures intlicat;rpmmotion spots will be available for

more than 5,800 new chiefs, morethan 15,000 newfirstclass petty

.--.... officers, nearly 42,000 second class POs and more than58,003 third

class petty officers.

LETA August, 103,000 promotions wereforecast, and morethan OA

105,000 had earned their new stripes by lecember. The totals could go

-higher than the predicted 122,000 when the final returns are in,

sometime this summer.

...... Ly qualified test-passers can be found to fit the predicted

vacant:1n, the February tests seem likely to produce the largest crop

of advancements since the ravy went to thebi-annual promotion cycle. 4. f!)

iliti4141M1111=1,

166.61 Figure 17.8.-A pleceofeopymaylooklikethiswhenforwardedtotheprinter. 18o 290 Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP position in the layout, the type and size of as to delete a dead area in the picture. In the headline according to a headline chaft (see dead area a cutline, nameplate, flag or head, and chapter 16), specifics on size and style of type story can be inserted. In cropping a picture in face (if it varies from the standard body type which you are trying to show who the people previously agreed upon between you and the are,it is best not to crop through the joints printer),andcolumn width (1column,2 because it makes the people look as if they are columns, etc.). Figure 17-8 is an example ofa decapitated. piece of copy marked for the printer. To crop a picture, you must mark off the After you have finished your layout,you unessential parts. This can be done in a number should be able to relax. A good printercan make of ways: up your pages exactly as you want them from your blueprint as long as you provide all the if the photograph or piece of artwork is information he needs. expendable (you have several originals or the Indicating on the layout sheet where each negative, or chances are the photo won't be used elementwillbeplaced(sometimescalled again), you can do your cropping on a paper dummying or roughing in) may be doneas each cutter. This is the most accurate method and the segment of material is forwarded to the printer. one most commonly used by ship and station You may also dummy just before press time, newspaper editors. using your record of copy and art forwarded to the printer as a guide. Some printers willeven When a section of a valuable photograph is give you rough proofs of galley type, headlines, to be reproduced, you may mask it by covering and art and let you make a pasteup dummyon a the picture face with a sheet of paper which has layout sheet. Pasteup dummies ensurea high a window cut to expose the desired area. degree of accuracy in page makeup because they give the printer a better overall picture of what The margins of giusby _:::ay be you want. Don't get a pasteup dummy confused marked with grease pencil or ink as shown in with a pasteup for photo-offset work. A pasteup figure17-9. Some printers prefer photos, or dummy is merely a guide for the printer; a other art, that have been marked with ink since pasteup for photo-offset is smooth copy to be the grease pencil tends to come off on the glass photographed for printing. of the copyboard when the job is photographed. This section has covered layout techniques for letterpress and -offset printing, but most of the You may also indicate the section of the basic ideas discussed here can also be applied to picture to be used by outlining it with chinese mimeograph layout which will be taken up white. separately. Grease pencil marks may be removed later Art Fitting with a dry cloth, and the chinese white with a damp cloth. It is difficult to completely remove When working with art in newspaper layout, the ink marks, but you can lighten them with a there are two iiiipogant functions with which damp cloth or eraser. you must be familiarCROPPING and SCAL- If a picture or piece of art, after cropping, is ING. to be reproduced in its exact size (as cropped), Cropping is used when you want to reproduce there will be no problem of layout fitting. All only a portion of a picture. Pictures should be you have to do is key it to the position that cropped to give them the desired size, emphasis, you've left blank on the layout sheet and mark and composition. Pictures are also cropped to it "S/S" for same-size (or one-to-one). focus on one specific area of the picture to However, if the picture is to be reduced or achieve a desired effect in makeup. A picture enlarged,scalingis the procedure for deter- can be cropped to show the hugeness or small- mining the pictures dimensions when repro- ness of things. A picture can also be cropped so duced. 287 291 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PHOTOGRAPH BEFORE REP' I. IN THE MARGINS TO INDICATE, C,

44,,,41717e "r. trii;-.1" -4 Vyr

v 4 cit10:'; 4-

4.1

:h4./.4 ,

114 THIS IS HOW TOP' 0.WILLAPPEARAWKWARO,. 'iREPRODOOED:i

57.35.011650 Figure 17.9. How to crop a photograph. Z92288 Chapter 17PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

You must always remember that when the printed on the reverse of a photo with a grease width of the photograph is increased or de- pencil. For instance, you mark a photo "P1 -A, creased, the height is also increased or decreased reduce to 4 X 5" (width is always given first in proportionately. When you know the width, you art sizes). The "P 1-A" is your key letting the can calculatethe new depth by using the printer know that you want the photo to appear following formula: on page one, fitted into a space designated "A" of the layout. It also tells him that you've scaled original width the photo and when reproduced, it will occupy a increased or decreased width space 4" wide and 5 inches deep. Usually, an editor devises his own "key" system. original height increased or decreased height Mimeograph Layout

For example, suppose you have a photograph Most mimeographed newspapers have either that is 3 inches wide and 6 inches deep. You two or three columns to a page. Special news- wish to reduce it so that it will fit into one paper stencils are available commercially with column (remember that an average newspaper two and three columns marked on them. With column is 2 inches wide). To find the new depth the three-column format it is easier to vary page that this photo will occupy on your layout, you layout and keep it attractive to the eye. Also, simply substitute the figures in the formula:. the three-column format tends to look more like a newspaper and less like a hastily-put-together 3 6 news letter. 2 X The American Forces Press Service has a servicethroughwhichyoucanget a Cross-multiplying, you get: professional-looking nameplate made for your mimeographed newspaper if you send them a 3x= 12, or x = 4. sketch of what you have in mind. They can furnish you stencils with your nameplate precut Therefore, your new depth when reproduced into them, so that it appears neat and uniform in will be 4 inches. every issue. Care should be taken in designing Another simple method of scaling is illus- the nameplate. For the most part, the more trated in figure 17-10 (reduction) and figure simple and uncluttered it is, the better. 17-11 (enlargement). Use layout sheets for a mimeographed paper The systems illustrated in figures 17-10 and the same as you do for letterpress and offset. 17-11 can also be used for fitting cold type Simple, sharply defined headlines with sufficient composition in photo-offset layout. It is some- white-space framing them will break up your times necessary to photograph cold type com- body type. Smaller heads can be set in all caps position on a smaller scale so that it will fit into on the typewriter. a certain area. Typewritten copy is frequently If you want your paper to look really sharp reduced by one-thirl or one-half of its original and professional, justify the right-hand margin, size, On rare occasions, it may be enlarged. as in figure 17-12, Justifying is not difficult and Scaling may also be done with a slide rule, can be done on your layout sheet. Type the scaling wheel (circular slide rule), or any one of copy in the columns until it almost fills the line. many patented devices available, Most printers Where there are extra spaces left over, fill them use the scaling wheel, such as the Robertson in with slants. Then, when you are cutting the Percent-Eze, Jr, Calculator (which is accompa- stencil for the press run, compensate for these nied with simple directions), leftover spaces by inserting extra spaces between Photographs or other artwork must be appro- words. This same system is used; of course, in priately marked so that the printer will know cold type composition for offset lithography exactly what you want. Instructions are usually (both direct image and photo-offset), 289 293 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

l-...... -. 3" ...... m...1 Igo- 2" "1

SUPPOSE YOU HAVE A THEN,DRAW A DIAGONALMEASURE OFF 2" ON COMPLETE THE REC- PHOTO 3" WIDE ANO 6" FROM THE LOWER LEFTYOUR BOTTOM LINE ANDTANGLE AND MEASURE DEEP. you WISH TO RE- CORNER TO THE RIGHT DRAW A BROKEN LINE ATTHE SPACE. IT IS THE DUCE IT TO FIT INTO A UPPER CORNER. A RIGHT ANGLE FROM ITAREA YOUR PHOTO WILL 2"COLUMN.FIRST,ORAW TO THE DIAGONAL LINE.OCCUPY WHEN REDUCED. A RECTANGLE THE EXACT SIZE OF THE PHOTO.

57.15.0 Figure 17.10. - Scaling for reduction.

/ / I / // / I / / i / 1 / I I h.2" --.1

SUPPOSE YOU HAVE A DRAW A RECTANGLE EXTEND THE BASE DRAW THE BROKEN LINECOMPLETE THE PHOTO 21 WIDE AND 41 2" X 4" AND RUN A I", WITH A BROKEN AT A RIGHT ANGLE TO RECTANGLE AND YOU DEEP,WHICH YOU WISH DIAGONAL ACROSS IT, LINE. THE BASE LINE AS WILL HAVE YOUR NEW TO ENLARGE TO 11/2 BEFORE. EXTEND THE DEPTH. COLUMNS WIDE (OR 3"). DIAGONAL LINE TO MEET IT.

57.18.0 Figure 17.11. Scaling for enlargement.

i 294290 Chapter 17-PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

30000000000000000C0000CXX 3000000000000000-00000000t w00000ccooc000mriar.....x= WASHINGTON (NAVNIA6)-- WASHINGTON (NAVIEWS)-- WASHINCTON(NAVNEWS).. The Navy Nurse Corps,/ The/Navy Nurse Corps,/ TheNavy Nurse Corps, established in 1908,//// establiahsdan#19082///4 established in 1908, observes its 66th annir observes its 66th mini-/ observes its 66th anniversary on May 13. It / versaryjonNay/13. It// versary on May 13. It was on this day in 1908/ was onithis day in 1908/ was onthis day in 1908 that the first 20 nurses that the first 20 nurses that the first 20 nurses now known as the "sacred now known as the "sacred now known as the "sacred twenty" reported to the/ twenty " /reported to the twenty"reported to the U.S. Naval Hospital in// U .S . Naval, Hospital/ in// U.S. Haul Hospital in Washington, D.C. for//// WashingtonA.C.Ufor//// Washington, D.C. for orientation and duty. orientation and duty. orientation and duty. During the first World During the first World During the first World War, 1,835 Navy nurses// War, 1,835 Navylinurses// War, 1,035 Navy nurses served aboard hospital,/ servediaboardihospitel// served aboardhospital ships and at hospitals,/ ships/and/at hospitals// ships andat hospitals overseas and stateside,/ overseasl and stateside,/ overseasand stateside, where they established// whereltheylestablished where theyestablished an enviable record of/// anfenviableirecordfoa an enviable record of achievement and devotion achievement and devotion achievement and devotion to duty. to duty. to duty. Although reduced to/// Althoughlireduceditorn Although reducedto 332 mmmbers during the// 3321meebersiduring the // 332 members during the depression World War II depression World War II depression World War II

67.29 Figure 17-12.-How to justify copy on a typewriter.

In planning page layout for a mimeographed stylusa sharp pointed instrument designed to newspaper, do not be stingy with "white space;" cut through the wax layer of the stencil. You however, don't overuse it. Space is a premium in can also trace ready-made designs in much the the mimeographed newspaper, and white space same way. should be used where it will do the most good. Headlines are cut into the stencil using the rixperienced editors of mimeographed news- stylus and plastic lettering guides with the letters papers have found that informal balance(type cut out of them. By following the lines of the groupings are balanced against art, art against letter in the lettering guide, you can make neat, boxes, etc.)has movement, life, and vitality. uniform headlines. Already prepared artwork Boxes occasionally lend color and emphasis to a (both line and halftone) is available for military page, but oneor two at the mostwill be newspapers. The American Forces Press Service plenty. Comic strips, if used, look best at the (AFPS) supplies precut stencils for this purpose bottom of inside pages. to all ship or station newspapers, on request. By Ears, small boxes at either side of the flag, can following simple instruction, it is possible to cut be used to carry information like slogans or out the portion of the precut stencil to be used short announcements. Kt, beware of wasting and "strip" it into the newspaper stencil. space on ears unless you have something worth- Another way of varying the appearance of the while to say. mimeographed page is through the use of shad- Drawings can be used in the mimeographed ing or backgrounds made by using "screen newspap:g and will add to its appearance. Some plates"available from mimeographsupply people,referto make free-handdrawings, dealers. The screen plates are pieces of hard cutting into the stencil with a mimeograph plastic with a pattern on one side. By rubbing a

291 29.1 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 blunt stylus on portions of the stencil against paper. the screen plate, you can cut the design into the stencil.Screenplatedesignsarevaried crisscross, dotted, lined, et cetera. NEWSPAPER MAKEUP Black isthe most commonly used mimeo- graphink,andfor the purpose of routine Newspaper makeup is defined as the design of newspaper work, it will be quite adequate. For a newspaper page or the manner in which, special effects, it is possible to use other colors, pictures, headlines, and news stories are arranged and a mimeograph, dealer can supply you with on a page (figure 1,7-13). information about using colored inks in mimeo- The objectives or purposes or makeup are to graphing. indicate the importance of the news, make the Neatnessis the key word in preparing the page easy to read, and make the page attractive. stencil. The neater the paper, the more pro- Your readers know that stories with large fessionalitlooks. The readerislikelyto headlines' are more important than those with associateconsciously or unconsciouslycare in small headlines. producing the newspaper with care in reporting. A mimeographed newspaper can present its news as accurately and clearly as a printed newspaper, The Front Page Focal Point but it must be neat and professional looking to assure reader confidence. Each page of a newspaper has a focal point, In addition to the obvious steps of being neat, which is a point on the page to which the reader gettingartinstraight,liningup headlines normally looks for the most important story. properly, keeping the margins straight, et cetera, Reader habits, a newspaper's policy or style, and you should be careful in typing the copy on the advertisement can dictate the focal point of a stencil. newspaper. The first step in typing should be to clean the On the front page of most daily newspapers, typewriter keys. Dirty keys make fuzzy letters the focal point is generally in the upper right- on the stencil. Make sure the ribbon setting is on hand corner. This position may seem to conflict "white,"which preventstheribbonfrom with the usual upper left-hand corner as dictated coming up between the typewriter key and the by books and other periodicals. Americans have stencil. This setting, which most typewriters been trained to read from left to right and top have,. is the proper setting for stencil cutting. If to bottom, but newspaper practices and reader this setting is not 'used, the keys will not cut habits have all but altered this pattern on many deeply enough into the stencil for the ink to get newspaper front pages. Through the use of through properly. banner headlines which extended more than half A plastic sheet (available through mimeograph the width of the page, readers have been trained dealers) used over the stencil will help prevent to seek the upper right-hand corner of the front you from cutting too deeply into the stencil. If page. Newspaper readers begin their reading by you do not use the plastic sheet, the centers may following the banner headline across the page be cut out of certain letterso's and e's and and continuing down the right-hand side of the p'sleaving ugly black spots on the final copies. page. Therefore, many newspaper readers have Try to proofread and make corrections while the come to expect the most important story in stencil is still in the typewriter. Stencils can be each issue to appear or touch in the upper corrected easily by usinga standard stencil right-hand corner of the front page. correction fluid. Once the fluid has dried, the Today, the right-hand focal point isn'tas correction can be typed in immediately. important to makeup editors as in the past Additional information about mimeographed because fewer newspapers use a banner headline newspaper layoutis availablein the Armed every issue on the lead story. However, many Forces Newspaper Guide.Also, mimeograph newspapersstillplace their most important supply dealers will be glad to furnish you with story in the upper right-hand corner of the front information about how you can improve your page because of established practices.

; 296 292 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

LIME CREEK. VIRGINIA

Figure 17.13.Good newspaper page makeup indicates the importance ofnews, and makes the page attractive and easy to read. 293 297 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Some newspaper editors use the upper left- The CIRCLE is used in newspaper makeup hand corner as the focal point. These editors feel in an attempt to get the reader to read around that readers have been trained in school to read the page. The line is carried out on the page by from left to right, so why shouldn't they read a displaying stories, headlines, and pictures on the newspaper that way. Other editors use the upper page so that the reader sees each being as center of the front page as the focal point. Only important astheother thereby creating a time will tell which is the best focal point on the tendency on the reader's part to read all the front page. stories. The circle is used to a limited degree in newspapers today.

Inside Page Focal Point The HORIZONTAL LINE is used in newspaper makeup to get the reader to read back and On the inside pages the focal point is the forth on the page. The line is carried out by upper left-hand corner if there are no advertise- displaying stories, headlines, and pictures hori- ments. Therefore, the focal point is influenced zontally on the page. The horizontal line is a by a newspaper reader's natural sight tendencies post World War II development and is probably and is not hampered by customs. the most striking change in the appearance of On inside pages with advertising, the way ads newspapers in this century. It is characteristic of are placed on the page influencesthe position of many present day newspapers. the focalpoint. The focal pointisalways opposite the lower corner of the page that is anchored by the largest mass of advertising. Makeup Patterns

Makeup Lines Newspaper makeup falls into one of several basic patterns: You will use vertical, diagonal, circular, and horizontal lines in makeup work. (1) In FORMAL BALANCE makeup the page is divided vertically in half. Each element The vertical line is used to get the reader to to be placed on one side of the vertical center read up and down the page. The line is carried lineis duplicated by the same treatment of out on the page by displaying stories, headlines, elements at the same point on the opposite side andpicturesvertically on thepage.Itis of the line. The vertical line is the type of line characteristic of the makeup of newspapers in used in formal balance makeup. In this type early America. It is still used to a limited degree makeup there are two lead stories and both are in making up newspapers today. usually of equal importance. See figure 17-14A. The DIAGONAL LINE is used in news- Formal balance makeup forces the news paper makeup to get the reader to read through into a formula, and doesn't distinctly tell the the page. The line is carried out on the page by relationships, values, and relative worth of the displaying headlines and pictures on the page so news. that together they form a diagonal line from the upper left-hand corner to the lower right-hand Formal balance makeup creates an artificial corner of the page. Also a page can contain a looking page, and the makeup is the dominant double diagonal by forming another diagonal in factor on the page. the oppositedirection from thefirst. The diagonal line lends a sense of rhythm to the Most of thenewspapers using formal page. Itis characteristic of many of today's balance makeup vary its use often enough to newspapers. escape the deadening effect of sameness. BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

ifoutbent Cfrommanb W,iu 1,11111CMION 00 UN1110 11/1111 10011110 12111 4..1. VMS.

.140.1P.n..NM.I 11.... I: fifIlnirli 10 Lept Kierke iiii.

aza....t.t.....= nsre...t.....-:::::: EF.d.sz.,=-7 .:.7...... :-..z.. e ....a.,_ ..mr.jr.:: ....itt2.7=1: ! :7'741: . :i.;70.7A.1

:4""::::..:Z."1:1;E: ....7.-i:-....7.:.,...... : ..-, tr.-.....a::.;.... r)Odin/. 1144.1;iresEnt 1'141 .... 1.1. =.%r..;==t74:.:.=.:7417.."7"1."Em.ft... -.=2...1"iF.g.T. re-P. ==-=.-;.-;USAF'S° to Hold Brierpgs :V,4,741:2:-:--t .r.m...-..1.1:...... z.. On Dependent Registration lit-Mirrz-":,*9,-17.rf-X-1-7i.. mom1. =. I -r---=...z... zr.r.:-....-:r..-.: ...... ""..nM=.= ..00=1.1.. I ---..ric.r.=4:6.=1 +11.0.1=t00 .4...... a..:,.....IAAIA Wow 11.." I siellin To Pettleipaie is MIMI Peigrm

gra:tr.= riFurtetz-":

.1.:ID :FM.....111 Z.

FORMAL BALANCE ® QUADRANT

Gen Jaildira .Gets 2d Star Emphasized By

0 CIRCUS

185.247 Figure 17.14.Newspaper front pages showing theuse of (A) Formal Balance, (B) Quadrant, (C) Brace or Focus, and ID) Circus it.' ,...keup. e7 (IQ 295 Ac e-f "' JOURNALIST 3 & 2

(2) In INFORMAL BALANCE makeup the Focus and Brace makeup is the most tradi- page is divided vertically inhalf. Each element tional of allcontemporary newspaper page to be placed above the horizontalfold of the makeup. Certain letter or figure patterns can be page on one side ofthe vertical center line is seen on the Focus and Brace page. Note in figure duplicated by the same treatment of elements at 17-14C that the figure 7 is seen in the layout the same point on the opposite side of theline. pattern. Al3o note that by stair stepping copy, But as you move below the fold of the pagethis attention is focused on the corners or they are exact duplication drops off. The vertical lineis braced up. the type of lineused in informal balance makeup. In this type of makeup there are two Brace or focus makeup is useful when you leadstories and both usually are of equal have one story that outweighs any other in news impoetance. value.

Informalbalancemakeup enablesthe Brace or focus makeup is useful in getting editorto vary his makeup as necessaryto readers to read through the page. prevent distortion of the news. ..--.0*/44 (5) In Circus makeup, which is also called Since the informal balance makeup deviates RAZZLE-DAZZLE makeup, the page is made that all somewhat from a prescribed formula, itmakes a up by placing elements on the page so more interesting looking pagethan a page elements scream for the reader's immediate displaying formal balance makeup. attention; therefore, there is no focus of interest on the page. The circle is the type ofline used in circus makeup. In this type of makeup the lead (3) In QUADRANT makeup the pageis story is placed in the upper left-hand corner or divided into four quarters and a major element the upper right-hand corner depending on which (picture or headline) which is an eye-stopper, is you are using as thepage's focal point. See placed in each quarter so that diagonal quarters figure 17-14D. balance each other. The diagonal line then is the type line used in quadrant makeup. In this type Circus 11.4keup is probably the most diffi- of makeup the lead story is placed in the upper cult type of makeup to use successfully, because left-hand corner or the upper right-hand corner, very seldom can a pagebe made up so that no depending on which is being used as the page's one item stands out above anyother, local point. See figure 17-14B. Circus makeup is characterized by immense Quadrant makeup formalizes quarter-page type, large art masses arrayed in unorthodox balance. shapes and positions, use of colored ink for headlines, use of white space, movement of the Quadrant makeup is useful for giving equal nameplate to a minor spot on the page, use of display to equally good stories. widelyvaryingheadlinetypefaceswith emphasis on the boldest weights and preference (4) In P RACE or FOCUS makeup the page is for multicolumn displays. made up by placing headlines andpictures on the page so as to form a diagonal line fromthe (6) In HORIZONTAL makeup the pageis upper left-hand corner to thelower right-hand made up by placing elements on the page sothat corner and by using strongtypographical display the majority of the elements present a hori- inthe upper right-handcornerforsharp zontal display. In this type of makeup the lead emphasis. The diagonal line is the type of line story is placed in the upper left-hand corner or used in focus or brace makeup. In this typeof the upper right-handcorner, depending on makeup the lead story is placed in the upper which you are using as the page's focal point. right-hand corner as shown in figure 17-14C. See figure 17-15.

r: BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 17-- PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

F 110

Horizontal !Inn DA0 tSIEETR IAT17011V-rEllESS lution was to In the lateis recognizednarrow columns SHORTHORT that long graycause eye strainusehorizontal 1930s, graphic format with a The idea of expertsrecog- colUmns of bodyas the reader sweeps down the mixture of sons roundingeT art nized hurizontaltypo contribute long columns. vertical thrust. and columns has wakeup as an asgreatly to the Most readers Many military is not new. Tho set toa nowt. overall greyness tc newspapers have attrac.of a page. are forced magazineshave papers moved strongly used end contin- tiveness and Purtherptestsabandon the long The so- into horizontal. ue to use this readability. Itshowed that thestory. tochnique. Simply put, we get a hori. FROM TV. thehorizontalzontal reotang. le -- the head Theoriginftl look is nothing idea monofrom morethan--forline included. TV. One of the example ruttingAnd if we had Modular is many leats3yee of a25-inith storyart, it too Modernized mil- NOT is a 15-inchpart a! the rec- itary AOUIpap Scolumn, but in tangle. Art, era is rounding Trend two 7i.inchcal.headandtext photographs and vanssetsidecan be set into other artwork. L by side, Thusa block form. STILL in The squaring of rectang- Supervision Key ular art is.b7 Close Continuous no means on the mkvati4 They're getting bolder. To modern newspaperPage If you use will read, and be- rounder} artwork As you have probably.They lieve, what they read if remembers surmised, close end con- Use it very tinuous supervision isthe material is factual, told in lang sparingly.The the koy to successfullycredible, understand, overuse ofa modernizinga newspaper.uags they can and concerns matters they techniquewill It's well -worth doing. believe are important to soon causeits Young readers are inter- Is your newspaper death. ested in what's going onthem. in their service, doing these things? 1 2 STANDING White space can be allowing elements to graphics ouches jump 3 a detriment as well float aimlessly. Too beads, tory endings, asan asset to page much air disrupts the small and insignifi 4 layout. Too much air reader's eye - movement cant art, one-column around centerof page patternby drawing heads create an un- and between elements attention to itself. easiness. The reader weakenslayout by Weak, lackluster feels cheated.

186,248 Figure 17.111.-Horizontal makeup is an asset to a newspapers attractiveness andreadability, f afa JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Horizontal makeup provides strong hori- form front pages, large art and news form to fit zontal units with a few vertical displays for the purpose of the page. contrast. The "TV Crop", or rounding of picture Horizontal makeupischaracterizedby corners is one concept employed in total design, large multicolumn headlines, large horizontal another is "windowing", surrounding the entire pictures, white space and odd-column measures. page with a thin border. (See figure 17-13.) Both are used to increase visual impact. (7) In FUNCTIONAL makeup the page is Figures 17-13, 17-15, and 17-16 are examples made up according to no set pattern, and it is of Total design. Note that stories on these pages based on presenting the day's news in the way tend to flow left to right rather than up and that will be most appealing and convenient to down. Also that headlines styles tend to be more the reader. The vertical line, diagonal line, circle, varied. or horizontal line could be the type of line used in functional makeup. In this type of makeup (10) MODULAR DESIGN makeup employs the lead story is placed in the upper left-hand the concept of vertical and horizontal rectangles corner. or building blocks such as those used in figures 17-13, 17-15, and 17-16. Functional makeup always lets the news dictate the makeup. Newspaper Formats Functional makeup is characterized by few banner headlines,stories that run over the There are three formats used in ship and nameplate, short and floating nameplates, no station newspapers: full format, tabloid, and decks on headlines, more and larger pictures, no magazine or compact, as illustrated in figure jumps, use of kickers, and use of down-style 17 -17. headlines. A newspaper's format is the shape, size, and general physical form of the publication. (8) In MAGAZINE makeup the page is made up according to no set pattern, and it is based on A FULL-FORMAT newspaper is one which presenting the day's news in a way that will measures 16 or 17 inches in width and21to 22 appeal artistically to the reader. The vertical inches in depth. A full-format newspaper can be line,diagonal line,circle, or horizontal line made up so as to have five columns, six columns, could be the type of line used in magazine seven and one-half columns, eight columns or makeup. The lead story is placed in the upper nine columns. left-hand corner or the upper right-hand corner, depending on which you are using as the page's A TABLOID newspaper is about half the focal point. size of a full-format newspaper. It measures 10 to 12 inches in width and 14 to 18 inches in Magazine makeup uses a mix of news and depth. A tabloid format newspaper can be made artistic pictures. up so as to have two, three, four, five, five and one-half, and six columns. Magazine makeup is characterized by headlines and stories, headlines and descriptions of A MAGAZINE-FORMAT or COMPACT what stories are about, and headlines and page newspaper is about half the size of a tabloid numbers of stories. newspaper. It measures 7 to 8 inches in width and 10 to 11 inch's in depth. It can be made up (9) TOTAL DESIGN newspapers are those so as to have one column, two columns, and that generally follow a single theme, use free- three columns. BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 17PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP 4L

Per Instructional purposes only

Wednesday, Mont 15, 1972 Vol. 72, No. 11 e Pt. Benjaminews Harrison, Ind. 46216

:11

ly SAtemCIORMIT hate emptied the hest overall grads petit average. ISC-8 graduates Melee Meer 'Medea will voodoo It will be vp, vp and away fir 54 e watobsthe sewed will redid journalise and Weedeastingotodentsthe Asedisties of the BMW States trrow.emoThey Amor Award amd the thirdwill redid de 'steadied to indeedthe DIM Dietingdished students report from the Otenee Irdematies &tootleAdievement Award. isremation dosialiet dodo attar Awards will oleo be stood 10 weeks or ostensive training. rel. to the top three step loving grattesties, the ), jevrealims dente. he top lamer Mies will and 15 breaddraing umbers will be redid a pen pets The dead and for new duties heeded ell ever the world roe their third students will redid the some newt awards asthe eerrosposding ,fevreo will Ulm plsec is desslim etsdested 210 of dotes-lard sell at lo soso Obber award" to he prodded Award" will to gives to she throeiodide the med Serial Award journalism bend debate, theseto be gives to the editor sad dart willbe the top three etvdeati (Cestinved an page 5)

188.249 Figure 17.18.Total design makeup uses "TV crops" and"windowing" to increase the visual impact of a newspaper page. 299303 ti- JOURNALIST 3 & 2

attention it deserves on the page. The editor uses type, headlines, pictures, white space, and color to achieve contrast. Contrast can be achieved with type by contrasting regular type with boldface type.

0 0 6 0 6 6 600 6 z, Headlines can be contrasted by using bold, black, full-column heads with headlines with kickers or heads thatare indented and by contrasting roman type with italic type.

Contrast with pictures can be achieved by contrasting verticals with horizontals or by contrastingsmall column widths with large column widths.

Contrast through color can be achieved by contrasting black type with color boxes, pictures, and heads.

In the RHYTHM concept the aim is to get the reader to move from one element to another element on the page. Rhythm is achieved in newspaper makeup by staggeringheadlines, stories, and pictures on the page. The UNITY concept of newspaper makeup is used to tie the page together; therefore, the page is not divided into one, two or more sections. 165.260 Figure 17.17. Ship and station newspapers fall in one A page that lacks unity is called a paneled of three formats, fullformat, tabloid or magazine. page. Design Concepts The way to avoid paneled pages is to cross the column gutters with headlines and pictures The concepts of design used in makeup are in the middle aces of the page. balance, contrast, rhythm, unity, and harmony. In the BALANCE concept the editor tries to balance heads against heads, pictures against The HARMONY concept is used to give a pictures,stories againststories, and artwork newspaper a standard appearance from day to against artwork. This balance, however, is a day. The harmony generally refers to typo- relative balance, and it is not measurable but is graphic harmony. something gauged in the viewer's mind. There- fore, the editor has to feel rather than measure Use only one, or maybe two, type faces the balance for a page. This feeling is one that is with romans and italics to achieve harmony on a developed by experience. The makeup editor page. If more than one face is used, there should looks at the page as a whole and then tries to be a contrast between the two. Two faces that achieve a relative balance in either the horizontal resemble each other seldom work well together. or vertical halves of the page. In the CONTRAST concept the editor strives Never have five or more different type to separate display items so that each gets 'the faces on a page. Chapter 17- PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

PICTURE STORY LAYOUT PictureDirection.Somephotographs, because of their compositional direction, are The picture story layout is a special challenge naturalright-handor left-hand photographs. to a layout man. A good picture story is a This means that the photograph is a natural to logical,well-organized, self-contained unitin be used on the right or left side of a page, a which each part has a specific function. photo display, or picture layout. Picture stories, The format used in laying out the picture are viewed in the same manner that weread, story depends upon space limitations and what from left to right; therefore, the lead photo- youasthe layout man consider the most graph should be one which has the subject facing attractivearrangement.With animaginative toward the viewer's right and the ending photo- photographer, the number of interesting picture graph facing toward the viewer's left. When stories which your publication can produce are possible, all lead and ending photographs should unlimited. Once you have been provided with a be taken twice, once with a left direction and variety of interesting, action-packed pictures again with a right-hand direction. By duplicating that are suitable for reproduction, .the layout is these shots, it gives layout flexibility. All photo- up to you. Let your experience and good graphs have direction; that is, left, right, upward, judgment be your guidein determining the downward, straight in, or straight out of the arrangement of pictures,headlines,cutlines, page. text, and borders. Here are some major points to remember in HEADLINES, CUTLINES, AND TEXT. laying out a picture story: These elements have double functions: First, they give the reader facts which supplement the Number of Pictures. The number of pic- pictureseditorially; andsecond,they serve tures required to make up a picture story graphically as elements of composition which depends upon the importance and complexity of contribute to the compositional organization of the subject. the picture story. Figure 17-18 is an example of a picture story layout. Lead and Last Picture. The most important A good picture story layout can add immea- picture of any picture story is the one that sureably to the interest and attractiveness of opens the storythe lead picture. This picture your publication. Like feature stories,p4-ture has a double function: First, it must attract the stories can be made-up in advance and used as readers attention and make the person want to either regular attractions or to spice-up occa- know more about the subject; and second, it sional issues. must show the subject and theme of the story in a graphically interesting form. The lastpicture is almost as important as the lead. The closing picture should show the reader the subject's PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER significance to the story line or theme. All of the discussion in the chapter thus far Body of the Story. The body which shows dealt with the tools and materials available for important scenes of the subject in action must presenting your ship and station newspaper's be varied and lively in regard to visual rendition reader an attractive, interesting, and convenient and presentation. To provide this variety and look at the news. Whether you achieve the liveliness in a story, the photographer should desired product will depend on how these tools start with a good script, excellent change of pace and materialsareusedinassembling your in coverage techniques, and a quick eye for the newspaper. unexpected developments during actual shoot- If you are the man responsible for laying out, ing. By careful study of major picture maga- making-up, or actually pasting-up your news- zines, photographers, as well as layout mcn, can paper, you should adopt a basic typographic gain a great deal of insight into the type of plan or style. First, read all of the copy being pictures being used in picture story assignments. considered for the newspaper. Study closely the

r bos AVAILABLE BMCOPY JOURNALIST 3 & 2

411.'" ,a

1.0

111

64.

f 106 Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP pictures and other artwork. Visualize the news- MASTHEAD story message or ideas and the nature of the pictures and artwork all together. Decide the A newspaper's masthead is often referred to relative importanCe of the elements and then incorrectly as a nameplate. A mastheadis a working with the page as a whole, put the page statement which should appear in every issue of together using the principles of good layout and a newspaper to give information about the makeup. newspaper. The individual elements involved in makeup A militaryauthorized/officialnewspaper's are nameplate; flags; masthead; headlines; pic- masthead includes the name of the newspaper; a tures; whitu, gray, and black areas; typographic disclaimer, which consists of the name of the devices; special inside pages; constants and other newspaper, type of newspaper, frequency of makeup devices as shown in figure 17-19. publication, for whom the newspaper is pub- Makeup creates recognition of a newspaper. A lished, location of the military installation, and good editor will vary his makeup each day, or statement that the information within the news- each week, so that the readers will not be bored paperisnotofficial; and alisting of the with the newspaper. On the other hand, each newspaper's personnel. The authorized/official page will resemble yesterday's or last week's newspaper's masthead usually appears on the enough so that the reader can immediately editorial page. identify it. Three elements that help the reader A military civilian enterprise/unofficial news- to identify a newspaper are the newspaper's paper's masthead is generally broken up into nameplate, flags, and masthead. parts; the disclaimer appears on the newspaper's front page and the name of the newspaper, name of the publisher and any other information NAMEPLATE appears in the masthead usually located on the editorial page. The military civilian enterprise/ The NAMEPLATE should be simple in design, unofficial newspaper's will not contain the attractive and in harmony with the paper's names of any military personnel. The disclaimer character. Its type should either harmonize or on a military civilian enterprise/unofficial news contrast with the headline type. The nameplate paper consists of the name of the publisher, can combine type and artwork together. The statement that the publisher is not connected artwork, however, should not make the name- with the military, statement that the infor- plate jumbled and hard to read. (See figure mation within the newspaper is not official and 15-3.) statement that the appearance of advertisements The nameplate can be made to float on the within the newspaper does not constitute an page. Although a nameplate that runs clear endorsement by the military of the products or across the page can be made to float, a floating services. nameplateusuallyoccupiestwoorthree Although newspaper mastheads traditionally columns and is placed anywhere in the upper have been placed in the upper left-hand corner third of the page. of the page on which the masthead appeared, the current trend is to drop the masthead to the bottom of the page. FLAG A newspaper's FLAGS are displays used by a newspaper to indicate section pages or special HEADLINES pages, such as editorial, sports, and family pages. Just like nameplates, a flag should not dominate Headlines contribute to all five concepts of its page and should appear above the fold. Flags newspaper designbalance, contrast, . rhythm, can also be floated. unity, and harmony.

1:3°3307 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

BANNER HEADLINE

'EAR wi PLATE EAR

1.14Tillan,T111' I 1=11 4.1'1' 11'1.1=141A HAMMER IS OFTEN CALLED A REVERSE KICKER. 111 CUTLINE

ONE LINE SPREAD HOOD

[SIDE HEAD

165.251 Figure 17.19. A variety of individual elements are involved in newspaper makeup.

When layingoutheadlines,they should Whenheadlinesandpicturesareused always be separated. Heads that appear side by together, they should be placed so that the side are called tombstoned heads. Heads that run reader is not confused by their position. It is directly across from each other can be read as best not to place a picture between a headline one head and the tombstones prevent each head and a story, because many times the reader from gaining its share of attention. However, if begins reading the cutline thinking it is the first you have to tombstone heads, one of several paragraph. thingscanbe donetobreak up atrue Heads of the same column width should not tombstoneuse different type sizes, make one be placed lower on the page that one that is head roman and the other italic, use a different smaller in point size, or higher on the page than number of lines in the heads and leave white one that is larger, This does not mean that the space between them. bottom of the page can'tcontaina large Chapter 17PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP multicolumn head. It means only that heads of advertisement next to an accident story. the same width should decrease in point size as Running two pictures, two boxes, or a picture they descend the page. and a box, side by side, except in cases where Don't run stories out from under their heads. the subjects are related tend to cancel each other This creates a readability problem because it out. It is best to separate unrelated artwork with confuses the reader as to where to find and body type. finish reading the rest of the story. Reader's eyes have a tendency to follow the A story can be wrapped (to continue a story line of sight of people in pictures; therefore, if from one column to the next) under its main people in a picture look off the page, readers head or lead to achieve variation. A story is will tend to look off the page. To prevent the always turned to the right from its main part. A reader from doing this, the main subjects in turn running above the headline of the story will pictures should look straight ahead or into the confuse the reader and cause him to abandon page. This also holds true for pictures showing the item. action. The motion should go towards the center A story requiring a jump to another page of the page whenever possible. This reader should be split in midsentence, never at a period tendency can be used to your advantage. The or paragraph. For example(Continued on page line of sight and motion can be used to guide the ,col. 1will direct th a reader. The reader's eye through a page. jumped portion carry a brief head or key Try to avoid running pictures on the hori- work taken from the main head to identify it as zontal fold of a newspaper because the area a continuation. The "jump head" should be along the fold becomes distorted once the keyed to the same type style and face, although newspaper has been folded. it will seldom be in the same type size, as the Don't give a picture more display space than original headline. Never jump a story on a it deserves, especially mug shots. Mug shots can hyphenated word, nor carry over the last line of float in copy, but it is best if they stand or hang a paragraph. from something. If a mug shot floats, it is best to float it within a sentence in a paragraph. Mug shots, in most cases, should be accompanied by PICTURES a name line. By omitting the name line, the reader is forced into trying to find out who the Readability studies have shown that pictures individual in the picture is. Thumbnails'or pork are one of the most popular elements in a chops also are used in making up newspaper newspaper.Forthis reason alone,pictures pages. Both terms refer to half-column mug should be placed on a page so that they receive shots. A thumbnail is used best when it looks maximum display. into the story or directly out of the page. A Pictures of two columns of more should be name line in most cases also should be used with placed on a page so that they stand or hang from thumbnails. something which gives support to the picture. A picture can stand on a headline, another picture, or the bottom of the page. A picture can hang from a headline, another picture, or the top of WHITES, GRAYS AND BLACKS the page. A picture of two columns or more should not float in copy, but a one-column A newspaper page is made up of varying picture or smaller can float in copy. degrees of whites, grays, and blacks. Some pages Picts'.: es and headlines which are not related may contain other colors. A good newspaper should be separated by more than a rule if the does not let any color dominate the page. What reader might thinkthat together theyare a good editor strives for is a relative balance of humorous or in bad taste. colors on a page. You won't have any problems Avoid any clashing items. For example, don't with white pages, black pages, or any other run a chaplain's column next to the pin-up of colored pages. Your problem will be staying the week. Nor should you place a mortuary away from gray pages. 305309 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 71=

There are many ways to relieve grayness or RULES AND DASHES gray-out which is created by large areas of body type. One way is to use multicolumn pictures to Rules and dashesare two of the most break up columns of type. Another way is to use commonly used typographic devices in news- thumbnail photos. paper makeup. Properly used rules and dashes Type can also be used effectively to relieve separate unrelated items and unite related ones. grayness. To break up gray areas in a long story, There are two types of rules usedthe column you can set selected paragraphs in bold-face rule and the cutoff ruleand there are three type. Another method of breaking up long gray types of dashes usedend dash, jim dash, and stories is to use bold-face subheads. A subhead is dinky dash. usually set in about the same type size as the The column rule is a vertical, thin line, which body but usually bold-face. A third method of runs from the top to the bottom of a newspaper using type to break up grayness is to use page. Use the column rule to separate columns bold-face, all cap lead-ins. This method is par- of type and to separate unrelated items, such as ticularly effective in matter which is set in wider photographs and stories, from the rest of the measures. In two-column matter the first three page. Part of a column can be deleted to indicate to five words of the paragraph containing a that the items joined are related. lead-in are set in bold-face and all caps, and in A cutoff rule is a horizontal, thin line, which one-column matter the first one to three words runs across one or more columns of a newspaper of the paragraph are set in bold face and all caps. page, depending on the width of the items to be The paragraphs to be setin any of the separated or united. A cutoff rule is used to bold-faced methods above should be those separate unrelated items, such as boxes, photo- paragraphs that introduce a new element into graphs, multicolumn headlines, and advertise- the story, or ones that contain information of ments from the rest of the page. A cutoff rule more than usual interest. Two paragraphs using helps the reader's eye turn the corner from the same bold-faced method should not be run where a story ends in one column to where it side-by-side because they tend to cancel each begins in the next column, except when the other out. story wraps from the bottom of a page, then no Special effects can be obtained with special cutoff rule is needed. art such as boxes, and dingbats (art borders An end dash, which is also called a 30 dash, is around individual stories, announcements and a horizontal thin line, which runs seven to nine ads,or the entire page). These devices are ems in length (one em equals the square of the effective gray breakers but should be used given size of type being used) and is centered in sparingly so that their use does not create a one or more columns depending on the width of cluttered effect. In using boxes, you can indent the items to be separated. An end dash is used to a story on four sides and use a box of white separate one-column stories from the rest of the space all around the story. You can also indent page and to indicate the end of a story. on two or four sides of a story and then use a The jim dash is a horizontal, thin line, which ruled box. runs three to five ems in length and is centered White space provides margins to frame your in one or more columns depending on the width page. Side margins should be the same width, of the items to be separated. A jim dash is used but bottom margins should be about one-fourth to separate decks of headlines and to separate a wider than your top margins to give your page a separate but related story or items within stories lifted look. White space is also used to give from the main story. breathing room around headlines and pictures in A dinky dash is a horizontal, thin line, which much the same manner as margins frame the runs one em in length and is centered across one page. or more columns depending on the width of

306 310 Chapter 17 PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP items to be separated. A dinky dash is used to of publication. It does not carry a page number separate subdivisions within sections separated and is usually separated from the flag by a by a jim dash. border and a cutoff rule or by two cutoff rules. In most cases rules and dashes can be elimi- An inside page folio line generally runs at the nated or held to a minimum with good effect in top of each page. It can be run also as part of a newspaper makeup since white space usually and flag that appears on special pages or within the sometimes more effectively can perform the masthead on the editorial page. The inside page same function. folio line consists of a page number, which should be located on the outside corner of the page, and the publication dare. An inside page OTHER NEWSPAPER CONSTANTS folio line is separated from the rest of the page by a cutoff rule. Newspapers have other elements that usually appear in each issue, and other makeup devices that are used in designing newspaper pages. PAGE PERSONALITY One device that is used is to line up copy along a horizontal plane above and below heads, The quality of the layout and makeup of the pictures,flags, nameplates and artwork, and inside pages of your newspaper should receive along the bottom of the page. the same attention as the paper's front page. Another is to make sure about one-fourth of Readers should not be short changed once they an inch of white space is left between the leave the front page of a newspaper. Special bottom of a story or a piece of artwork and the pages, such as editorial,family, and sports artwork or ascending letters of the headline should have their own personality. which follows below the story. Also leave about The editorial page probably is the least read one-eight of an inch of white space between inside page of all the pages. The reason for this descending letters of the headline and its story. can be attributed particularly to makeup. Most Avoid having widows at the tops of columns. editorial pages are very dull and very gray. A A widow is an incomplete line as one that ends a good editorial page should be as different in paragraph. When there is a widow, carry two makeup from other inside pages as possible. A lines to the new column or page. good editorial page should use pictures and When wrapping copy, wrap at least one inch artwork, white space, odd-column sets and other of copy into the next column. This is approxi- elements of makeup to achieve the desired mately six lines of type. Studies have shown that effect. anything less than an inch of copy lacks eye --1) Family pages offer many subjects for attrac- appeal. tive pages. A good society page should use large, When wrapping a story, split paragraphs at the dramatic pictures, feminine type, white space, bottom of the column when possible to indicate and artistic designs. to the reader that the story continues in the Big, dramatically cropped pictures and large next volumn. bold headlines complement the masculinity of A folio line is a newspaper's identification sports pages. A good sports page should use lines on each page. On the front page it is action pictures, masculine type, white space and different from those on inside pages. odd-column sets. A front page folio line joins the nameplate Inside news and feature pages should be as and consists of the volume number, which is the attractive as front pages within the limitation of number of years the publication has been in available space. A good inside or feature page print; the issue number, which is the number of should use pictures, white space, multicolumn issues published within the present year; city, heads, artistic designs, and grouping of related state and zip code of the publication; and date news and features.

307 311 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PROOFREADING several errors in the same line, the marks should be placed in the proper sequence along the margin of the proof and should be separated by Proofreading is one of the final steps in the diagonal lines. If the line is long, the proofreader printing process (from the JO's standpoint, of divides it mentally and marks corrections for the course, not the printer's). left side of the line in the left margin and In hot type printing, after the printer has set corrections for the right side In the right margin. your copy in type, he will return the material to In marking cold type composition for correc- you with the first proofs. This will be a rough tions (pasteups for offset), the proofreader tapes printing of the type already set. Your job will be a sheet of tissue over the proof and marks his to read through the proof to make sure there are corrections on the tissue overlay at the point no errors and that it conforms to the copy. If where they occur in the text. the printer has made an error, he will correct it A table of standard proofreader's marks is without charge. But if you want to change shown in figure 17-20. A proof with mistakes L something from the original copy, he will charge called a dirty proof. A clean prenf is one with you for the extra work it makes for him. no errors. A dirty proof is Ft wn in figure These first proofs are called galley proofs 17-21. because they are proofs of long rows of type After the printer has made corrections, and direct from the galleysor traysin which the you have approved the galley proofs, he will type sits until makeup time at the print shop. In take the type and assemble it, along with photos photo-offset printing, you are likely to be given and other art, into pages according to the layout the complete pasteups of pages (printer's repro- plan you've given him. From these, he will make ducibles and therefore sometimes called repros) page proofsand will usually give you a final for proofreading. chance to check to make sure that there are no Proofreading usually is done by the editor errors. Make sure headlines are on top of right that is youin addition to what is done by print stories, stories "jump" to the pages they are shop personnel. The reason for this is obvious. supposed to, paragraphs are in proper sequence, Checking the content of your publication is part and cutlines are under the right photographs. of your job. Check the body type, too; sometimes a slug can Proofreader's marks and copy editing marks be misplaced or jumbled. But routine type- are, for practical purposes, the same. The main setting errors should have been caught long difference is in their usage. As a rule, editorial before this. You will make the printer a perma- corrections to the manuscript are made directly nent enemy if you start making unnecessary in the body of the copy. If this isn't possible, alterations. the corrections are inserted above or below the If you work closely with this part of the line and the place where they are to go is newspaper operation, it would do you well to indicated by an insert caret (A). Proofreading ask for a tour of the newspaper printing plant. symbols are placed in the margins of hot type Seeing the printer at work will make you much proofs so the printer can see them more readily, more aware of his problems than you might and a caret is placed within the text to show otherwise be, and help you to give clearer and where the correction is to be made. If there are more useful directions for what you want,

3.1 308 Chapter 17PRINTING, LAYOUT AND MAKEUP

PROOFREADER'S MARKS

0 Insert period oar. Copsused in margin Insert comma wis Capsused in text 4% Insert colon Ctat, Caps & small capsused in margin Insert semicolon Caps & small capsused in text Insert question mark A6.Lower caseused in margin Insert exclomation mark / Lower caseused in text Insert hyphen Wrong font Insert apostrophe 0 Close up fir VInsert quotation monks Delete * Insert 1en dash ct, Close up and delete jk. Insert 1.em dash 9 Correct the position * Insert space a Move right A Insert lead C Move left ..1411 Insert virgule n Move up V Superior U Move down A Inferior H Align vertically Parentheses = Align horizontally CA Brackets C Center horizontally

13Indent 1em 01Center vertically co Inden' 2ems J Push down smog Paragraph 49". Use ligature ' et No paragraph JO. Equalize spec . used in margin Dy, Transposeused in margin or'" Equalize spaceusqd in text N Transposeused in text le"Decrease space Ar Spell ou' Let it standused in margin Italicused in margin Let it standused in text Italicused in text Dirty or broken letter ifoBoldfaceused in margin otteluiseesCarry over to next line OW"Boldfaceused in text Mo'4611Carly bock to preceding Illid AP.. Small psused in margin °AltSomething omittedsee copy Small capsused in telt. 11 eQuestion to author All+Roman type A Caret-General Indicator used to writ exact position of error In text.

Figure 17-20.Standard proofreader's marks.

BEST COPY AVAILABLE

313309 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PYGMALION Fini hing touches were put on Little Theater produc motion of "Pygn lion" this week in ofopening night 1141628"XVednesday.A rags OrrMigebes" theme, and 0flig:=2ggsgSjIL:!...9. Shaw is the story of a young Professor Higgins, who transforms a cockne over girl into a "lady of qualit Shaw's play is a variation upon the mythological theme of P fa malion and Galatea. The m to. logical Pygm a a yuung fellinlove 4,4,0 the statue of a woman which he ...".""400....,ke had created. Director of the show is Misr""'". EllenPetroff, civilian employee. Petroffpreviously worked witht e cm as stage manager December production,

TakingleadingrolesInthe comedy will be Dick White, YNTA as Professor Henry Hi ns and Mrs. Betty Norg 11 as iDoolittle. White took the lead in the theater's productionof"Charley's Aunt" and dliected "Harvey," the group's lest effort. Mrs. Norgaerd v 111 be !milting her first appearance with the NTC group. CHI^ aNSNA technic' tree or, a Antrim, YNSN, hu been named stags manager for the show. Thetheater's customary one week run policy has been changed for the show. The play will be presented on Wednesday,ednesday, rionFda and Saturda Marc ma a Po go for all performances are 3, 6, I, srA)44.tk %.7"4, ..woobit 12 and 13

16548 Figure 17.21.A dirty proof.

314 310 CHAPTER' 'le

THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA

There is no faster way for the Navy Journalist is primarily a music and news service. Its great to get the Navy message to the most people strengths are intimacy and immediacy. Radio is simultaneouslythanthroughtheelectronic described as a one-to-one medium between the mediaradio and television. Every day, around announcer and listener, hence its intimacy. The 6600 commercial and 500 educational radio ability to get to the scene of a news event, often stations and about 700 commercial and 200 within minutes, and report to the public, gives educational television stations carry entertain- radio an immediacy that listeners appreciate. ment and information to the people of the Likeradio,televisiontoo is becoming a UnitedStates,Canada, and Mexico. These personal companion to a mobile public. The people are YOUR audienceor at least they can recent k...ivent of miniaturized sets has frued the be your audience, if you are aware of their TV audience from the living room, and wherever existence and make an effort to reach them. the TV audience goes, its entertainment goes The electronic media offer almost unlimited with it. access to the Navy's public. More than 98 Television brings authenticity and impact in percent of all American homes have at least one its reporting of news. People believe what they radio; there are 64 million or more sets in see, whether it's an Apollo splashdown or a Amerman automobiles, and millions of portable battle in Southeast Asia. The impact of John radios accompany the American people as they Kennedy during the Kennedy-Nixon debates is go about their daily business. Every person in widely credited with influencing the election of the country lives within the broadcast range of 1960. at least one radio station and nine out of ten It is obvious that the electronic media is very people live within the coverage area of at least influential. And, practically all Americans can be one television station. reached with the Navy's message through radio The last 50 years can be described, collec- and television. tively, as the age of broadcasting. The develop- Some time ago, a popular TV entertainer' used ment of radio during this period progressed from the last few seconds of his network show one a handful of low powered pioneer stations to a evening to appeal for blood donors to help a complex of powerful networks and individual littlegirl who needed a rare type of blood. stations. They have growninnumber and Although only six out of 100 persons have the influence not because of their powerful trans- type of blood needed, within an hour the mittersandsophisticatedequipment,but hospital received enough pledges from all over because they are responsive 'o the needs and the nation to meet "all future needs" of the desires of the listening public. As those needs stricken child. change, the broadcast product changes. Other appeals over both radio and television The greatest changes in radio came about with have produced results just as astounding. The the spread of television just after World War II. electronic media have proved their value in both The great radio dramas lost their Audience when informing the public and in advertising. people found they could tune in their television What makes radio and television so successful and see their favorite characteis. So, radio today inreachingthepublic? Probably itisthe 311 315 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 Ms, personal touch, the person-to-person relation- to take advantage of the tremendous possibilities ship between the performer and his audience or radio and television as information media. that just can't be duplicated by newspapers and Tt e most important, of course, is in the dis- magazines.Radio andtelevision have other se.nination of Navy news. This will be discussed advantages, too. The listener usuallyisin a in detail later, but basically it involves writing receptive frame of mind when he tunes in, and N ivy news specially for radio audiences and only a minimum effort is needed to listen or preparing special material for TV. Then there are watch. But the greatest advantage by far is the to lks, spot announcements, interviews, drama- PERSONAL APPEAL OF THE HUMAN ti nations, and discussions with Navy personnel VOICE. In spite of this country's high literacy a )out the Navy, First, however, let us learn a rate,therearestillalotof people who ttle more about the organization and regu- understand the spoken word better than the lations of the broadcast industry and about printed page. Navy public affairs policy as it applies to these Radio and TV have large audiences and all of media. thepeoplelisteninggetthestorysimul- taneously. Rapid transmission is what makes the difference between news and history. Radio and television are not "perfect" media, THE FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS however. They have some disadvantages and COMMISSION limitations. A message over radio or television (except for repeated commercials) is usually a The Federal Communications Commission one-time-only affair. If the listener is not tuned (FCC) was created by the Communications Act inatthe specific time of the broadcast or of 1934 as a Federal agency composed ofseven telecast he has lost it forever. If he is interrupted commissioners appointed by the President, by in the middle of a program, he cannot put it and with the advice and consent of the Senate. down and come back to it later as he can a Of these seven commissioners, none may hold newspaper, book, or magazine. Sometimes his any interesteither financial or otherwisein attention is divided between the set and what- the broadcasting industry during the time he isa ever else he happens to be doing at the time. As member of the Commission. Also, no more than a result, he may only hear part of,the story and four of the seven commissioners may be from be misled or confused, the same political party. Finally, the amount of solid information that One of the FCC's major activities is the may be aired is severely limited by the clock. generalregulationof broadcastingincluding Theaverage15-minutenewsprogram,for televisionaswellasradio,Thisfunction example consists of about 12 minutes of news, includes: two or three commercials, and a station break, It contains about 2000 words of news copy, acting on applications to build and operate roughly equivalentto four columns inthe broadcasting stations; average newspaper. Many radio stations carry only five-minute news shows with a 30-second theassignment of specificfrequencies, commercial at each end and sometimes another power, time or operation and call letters; in the middle. These short newscasts consist of compact news capsules, each containing about the periodic inspection of equipment and the same information as inthe lead of a engineering aspects of operation; newspaperstory,Shortfeatures, sometimes humorous, are often added to provide a change passing upon transfers and assignments of of pace. In spite of these limitations, many facilities; people obtain ALL their knowledge of the day's news from radio/TV coverage, modifyingandrenewingconstruction There are many ways for the JO and the Navy permits and licenses;

312 h 316 Chapter 18THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA

reviewing the general service of each station or "frequency." Frequencies are measured in to determine whether it has been operating in kilohertz(thousands of waves or hertz per the public interest; second) or megahertz (millions of hertz), and these frequencies are the numbers that appear licensing radio operators; and on most radio dials. The frequenciesthatcan be assignedto otherwise discharging domestic regulatory broadcasting stations in any country are deter- responsibilities. mined through international agreements. Within eachcountry,governments furtherregulate The FCC has also established that no person, broadcasting to ensure that all stations conform group, company, or other type of owner may to international regulations and that nearby own more than seven AM, seven FM, and seven stations don't interfere with each other. TV stations (and of the seven TV stations, no There are two basic methods of transmission: more than five of them may be VHF stations). amplitudemodulation (AM) and frequency Under the Communications Act itisthe modulation (FM). You do not need to know the responsibility of each station owner to operate technical differences between the two, but you in the public interest. The commission periodi- should know the difference in programming for cally reviews the complete performance of sta- area coverage. tions, usually when they apply for renewal of licenses, to determine whether they have lived up to the promises made in their initial appli- AM BROADCASTING cations for license. The review of broadcast station performance does not, however, give the AM transmissionisthe standard system. commission authority to DIRECT a station to "Long waves" follow the curvature of the earth, put a PARTICULAR PROGRAM on or off the so the area of coverage for AM is governed by air.The FCC has no authorityoverpro- station strength. This is measured in watts, units gramming. of electrical power. The higher the wattage, the The commission cannot interfere with the more extensive the area of coverage. By a system right of free speech on the air, but it does insist of networks to be described later, AM broad- that this freedom be broad enough to provide casting spans the continent, enjoys a larger full and equal opportunity for the presentation audience than FM, and has little trouble filling of both sides of publicissues. Under such air time. conditions, operators of broadcast stations have AM stations are assigned frequencies from the right to editorialize. 540 to 1600 kilohertz and broadcast at powers Under the Communications Act, a station is from 100 watts up to 50,000 watts, which is the not required to sell or give time to all who seek maximum power presentlyallowed by the to go on theair.Because programming is Federal Communications Commission. primarily the responsibility of the station, the commission does not ordinarily monitor or pass on individual programs, or require thefiling of FM BROADCASTING radio scripts. However, broadcast stations are required to keep a PROGRAM LOG and a FM has several advantages over the older AM TECHNICAL LOG, and a record of all requests system. FM has higher fidelity characteristics for political broadcast time. andisordinarily free of static, fading, and background overlapping from other stations. FM stations broadcast over higher frequencies than BROADCASTING AM stations. Thedialof your FM setis calibrated in megahertz rather than kilohertz, Every radio or TV transmissionincluding and runs from 88 to 108 megahertz. official radio broadcasting by Navy ships and While the higher frequency accounts for a aircraftis broadcast at an assigned wave length number of FM's advantages, FM has one serious 313 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 limitation. High frequency waves travel in a licensed to such diverse bodies as private non- straight line rather than following the earth's profit institutions, religious groups, independent curvature. Thus, an FM station's range is limited schools, and other miscellaneous institutions of to roughly the line-of-sight distance between education. transmitter and receiver antennas. Most FM Educational radio offers direct and supple- stations serve areas within a radius of approxi- mentaryinstruction,culturalenrichment, mately 35 to 75 miles, although high-powered informal adult education, and general infor- FM stations sometimes reach out 100 miles or mation. more. Because of the uneven development of edu- In television transmission the sound portion is cational radiofacilities geographically, some FM and the video portion is AM. Since the TV areas of the country are wellserved, others are station broadcasts on two frequencies simul- not. The Northeastern quadrantis generally taneously,pairsoffrequenciesarecalled blanketed with educational radio licensees (at "channels" for convenience. Sets are tuned to least in the major metropolitan centers), as is channel numbers rather than having exact fre- much of the Great Lakes region and the major quency numbers shown on tuning dials. cities of the West and Pacific Coast. As might be expected with so many different kinds of licensees, their stations have various EDUCATIONAL BROADCASTING kinds of functions. The colleges and higher educational authorities use their stations for Educationalinstitutionswere among the cultural enrichment, student training, and in a pioneers in experimental broadcast, and held few cases, for student teaching. In addition, they many early AM licenses. For various reasons, tend to see their station as having public affairs notably the increased competition from com- purposes. The school districts focus upon direct mercial broadcasting, most of these stations teaching and supplementary instruction. The were off the air when the FCC wascreated. non-profit institutions and public libraries pri- There remain, according to the Federal Com- marily cover adult education, particularly cul- munications Commission, 20 AM educational tural enrichment, and the theological groups radio stations (in the U.S. as of mid 1972). generally favor informal adult education, with a These, for the most part, are licensed to land few accentuating religious education. gran* colleges, those which had the fortitude to A growing number of licensees believe their continuebroadcastingduringthedifficult stationsshouldhavebroadcommunity decades of 1920 and 1940. functions. This most often means extending the resources of their academic institution into the community. It is also coming to mean providing EDUCATIONAL RADIO other services of value such as news, weather, domesticinformation,andsocialproblems In 1938 FM broadcasting was authorized and directly affecting the community, in that same year, one FM educational radio station went on the air. The rapid growth of FM increased strikingly in the years following World EDUCATIONAL TELEVISION War II, and by mid 1972, 500 educational radio stations were in operation with construction The FCC firstallocated TV facilitiesfor permits granted to 78 more. Most FM stations exclusive non-commercial educational use in are located between 88.1 and 91.9megahertz, 1952, the band reserved for educational radio use. The Public Broadcasting Act of 1967 signed As the dominant licensees, the colleges and byPresidentJohnsoninNovember,1967, universities are the most important group in extends for three years the construction grants educational radio. The public school systems are authorized by the Educational Television Facil- licensees of over 100 in-school and instructional ities Act of 1962. The 1962 Act helped to build stations.Another 50 or more stationsare 92 non-commercial television stations. By 1980

1 31414 Chapter 18THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA there will be an estimated 377 non-commercial not networks (discussed later in this chapter) in televisionstations in operation, reaching an the commercial sense, as the stations are not estimated 94 percent of the people. The Public connected by network program lines. Rather, Broadcasting Act of 1967 also established a the member stations of NET and PTL exchange Corporation for Public Broadcasting. Headed by programs of film and tape. The commercial a 15-man board of directors (nine appointed by networks and stations also provide the edu- the President with the advice and consent of the cational stations with many documentary-type Senate and the remaining six to be named by the programs which have been aired previously on board itself) the corporation is to have major their commercial outlets. responsibility in channeling funds to commercial As you can see, educational broadcasting radio and televisionstations,programpro- offers unlimited opportunities for Navy subjects, duction groups, and educational television net- especially documentary and historical features. works to stimulate quality in programming. It It is also obvious that it's an excellent outlet for can also, directly or through contracts, conduct the U.S. Navy Rec- 'siting Service which you research, demonstration, or training in matters might find yourself helpirg support sometime related to non-commercial broadcasting. Title III during your career. Educational broadcasting, of the new Act also authorizes the Secrei:ary of especially TV, has made rapid progress in this Health,Education, and Welfare to make a decade and expects to grow considerably larger comprehensive study of educational TV and within the next 20 years. Therefore, you can radio, especially in the areas of school uses of expect to become more and more involved in television, radio, and allied electronic instruc- this type of broadcasting as you advance in the tional media. Journalist field. FCC expects educational TV licensees to make their station facilities available to other local educational institutions, sinch such assign- NETWORKS ments are made to serve the educational and cultural needs of the community. Except in Network broadcasting is defined by the Com- particular cases, TV educational eligibility is not munication Act as "the simultaneous broad- extended to municipal authorities in places casting of an identical program by two or more where an independent educational authority connected stations." Through a system of tele- such as a board of educationis established. phone wires, radio relays; and cables, networks Although thereis no requirement that non- make it possible to broadcast the same program commercial educationalstations broadcast a simultaneously on many stations throughout the specified minimum number of hours, corn country. mercial and educational television stations are Networks are indispensable to the American both subject to the same TV service require- systemofbroadcasting.They were made ments, such as station separation, antenna height possible because advertisers with regional or and power, and so forth. national products to sellwanted to launch Several colleges and universities hold com- promotional campaigns simultaneously in large mercial TV authorizations and operate on a areas. They are needed because listeners all over profit or non-profit basis. Many schools have the nation want to hear entertainment which closed-circuit TV systems, and other adjuncts to originates in New York, Chicago, and Holly- link classrooms for instructional purposes. wood, and news and special events originating Programming on these stations features infor- from any point on the globe. mational, educational, and cultural shows. Many A network may consist of several stations stationsreservedaytimebroadcasthours owned by one company, independently-owned exclusively for instructional programs designed stations which are affiliated with the "network" to be viewed in the classrooms of the public (thatis,they broadcast part or all of the schools. Much of their programming is provided network's programs), or a combination of the by the National Educational Television (NET) two. Strictly speaking, any two station con- and Public Television Library (PTL). These are nected by wire or radio relay to broadcast a 319315 RADIO STATION ORGANIZATION ICORPORATE BOARDSTATION MANAGER I IPROGRAM DEPARTMENT* PROGRAM 1DIRECTOR INEWS DEPARTMENT NEWS DIRECTOR ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT CHIEF ENGINEER 'ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT I OFFICE MANAGER ISALES DEPARTMENT SALES MANAGER RecoruAnnoncers d Librarian StringersNewsmenNews Writer TELEVISOR STATION ORGANIZATION PlantTransmitterControl Maintenance Room Engineers Engineers ReceptionistBookkeepersSecretaries SalesmenTraffic Manager CORPORATESTATION BOARD MANAGER I IPROGRAM DEPARTMENT*PROGRAM DIRECTORI NEWS DEPARTMENTNEWS DIRECTOR I IENGINEERING DEPARTMENT I [ADMINISTRATION DEPARTMENT'CHIEF ENGINEER OFFICE MANAGER SALES DEPARTMENTSALES MANAGER TalentResidualStudio Directors Directors NewsmenNewsPhotographer Writers TransmitterVideoAudio Engineers Engineers ReceptionistSecretariesBookkeeper SalesmanPRTraffic Man Manager ArtistRecordFilmPropFloorScript and ManManagers Writers Librarian Tape Librarian NewsfiintMeteorologistStringers Editor PlantCameramen Maintenance ClerksShipping and Receiving AccountPromotion Servicemen Man Figure 18-1.A typical metropolitan radio (A), and television (B) station personnel organization *Denotes people most important to Navy public affairs personnel. chart. 165-33:.34 Chapter 18THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA

program simultaneously constitute a network there are either four or five different depart- during the time of broadcast, even if it is onlya ments. These are: SALES (sometimes called one-time occasion. Any Navy cooperation with, Advertising); PROGRAM (sometimescalled or assistance to, a network must be coordinated Operations);ENGINEERING; ADMINIS- through CHINFO. TRATION; and NEWS. It is becoming the trend There are four national radio networks. The inbroadcasting todayto make the NEWS NationalBroadcasting Company (NBC) has Department a separate department. However, in about 200 affiliated stations. some radio and TV stations News is still a part The Columbia Broadcasting System (CBS) has of the Program Department, and as such the about 250 affiliated stations. News Director reports directly to the Program The American Broadcasting Company (ABC), Director/Manager. With the greater emphasis formerly part of NBC, operates a nation-wide many stations are placing on News, and with radio network of approximately 400 affiliates, some stations having a full-time News format, mostly on regional or local channels. the News Department has now taken on extra The Mutual Broadcasting System (MBS), has importance.Thus,manystationsarenow 525 affiliates.It generally does not engage in making their News Department a separate func- largescale program productions of the pro- tion on an equal status with the other four portion attempted by the other three national departments. Personnel and staffing levels differ networks, and is the only national network not widely from station to station. In smaller sta- engaged in television. tions one person works in more than one Besides these four national radio networks functional area. In large stations, the depart- there are approximately 60 regional networks. ments are separated and often further divided Regional networks link stations within certain into sections. See figure 18-1(A). geographical areas. They accommodate advertisers who market their products regionally and therefore don't need the national networks. PROGRAMMING Examples of such networks include: The Lob- ster Network (in Maine); the Yankee Network The Program Department was one of major (in New England); and the Intermountain Net- importance in the early days of radio, with the work (in the West and Midwest). majority of programming being produced live. The Program Director had to create, staff, write, and produce hundreds of big band shows, radio RADIO AND TELEVISION dramas, anradioplays. That has virtually STATION ORGANIZATION disappeared allbut a few major market stations today. Before you prepare to do business with a AmericanForcesRadioandTelevision radio or television station you should learn its (AFRT) stations, along with the majority of organization. In the time that broadcasting has commercial stations,usually determine their been a business, radio and television stations format based on audience. Stations are either have evolved a set pattern of organization. The Top 40, Country and Western, Middle of the organization is functional, and is independent of Road, or a varying format. This format is not the type of station, radio or television, the size determined by the Program Director, but by the. of the station, and the location of the station. overall ownership and top management of the. The only instance where this organizational station. Today, the term Program Director is structure varies is in the field of non-commercial largely a hold over from its former meaning. In broadcasting. In non-commercial broadcasting, actuality, the PROGRAM DIRECTOR is the operating revenues are derived from sources assistant Station Mariam assisting him and other than the sale of air time, so there is no filling in for him in his absence. In medium and department equivalent to the Sales Department small stations, the Program Director and even of a commercial station. the Station Manager, in a few cases, pulls an air In most commercial broadcasting stations shift himself. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

ENGINEERING NEWS The Engineeng Department is responsible The News Department is responsible for the for the technical quality of the transmitted gathering, editing, writing, and presentation of program. They are also responsible for main- news. This includesalllocal news and the taining the transmitter within the power and national and international news that may be frequency requirements of the FCC license. The furnished fromthebroadcast wireservices. engineering department furnishes operators for (Most network affiliated stations leave the bulk the transmitter, and for studio equipment in of the national and international news reporting some stations, and maintains this equipment. to the network, with the exception of some Personnel in the engineering department are in-depth newscasts or world-wide news roundups tested and licensed by the FCC. The supervisor that they may put on the air themselves.) This of this department is the CHIEF ENGINEER, department is headed by the NEWS DIRECTOR who reports to the Station Manager. In most who will either report directly to the Station AFRT as well as commercial radio stations, Manager, if his is a separate department, or to announcers work directly from the control room the Program Director/Manager if the News and operate the console themselves. Department is part of the Program Department. Depending on the size and scope of the News Department,theircoveragecapabilities and ADMINISTRATION responsibilities may include local government, state government, law enforcement agencies, The Administrative Department is responsible farm news, business news, and woman's news. for the "paperwork" that a station requires. This The sports section is usually part of the News department keeps the books and employee Department and the Sports Director reports records. In smaller stations this department may directlytothe News Director. only have one or two members, besides the The News Director is the man you will con- station manager. The head of this department is tact with "hard news"storieschanges of the OFFICE MANAGER. command, achievements of personnel,accidents, et cetera. Feature material, Navy recruiting "spots" and SALES other material usually are placed through the Program Director or Program Producer.The The Sales Department is the lifeblood of a Program Producer has no actual managerial commercial broadcast station. This department function, but is concerned with creating pro- is responsible for the revenue that supports the gram ideas, procuring funds andtalent, and station. The Sales Department sells the "time" handling administrative problems directly con- the commodity of the commercial broadcaster. cerned with his shows. It is the responsibility of the traffic section of Although television is also dividedinto the this department to make up the daily log of same four orfive departments, the difference broadcast operations (a legal requirement) and from radio comes in the additional sectionsand file these logs after the day's operations. In some personnel. See figure 18-1(B). stations "traffic" comes under the Programming Department. The supervisor of the Sales Depart- BROADCAST STATION RELATIONS ment is the SALES MANAGER. This department can assume central importance to the It is imperative that good relations be main- commercial broadcaster, as it can make or break tained with the broadcast stations with which the operation of the station. This department you deal.If good relations are lacking, the does not exist in non-commercial or AFRT informationobjectivewillbe impaired, or stations. negated.Effort expended to establish good

322 318 Chapter 18THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA station relations will be paid back with interest considered by the FCC to be public service and further your information mission. programs. The basis for good station relations is a sound understanding of the motives of the commercial broadcaster. He isinbusiness to provide a BROADCASTING LAW service and to make a profit. If this goal is not realized, he won't stay in business. Profit making It would take an entire shelf of books to depends on the ability to attract a mass audi- compile all the laws applicable to radio and ence. The station must serve the public interest, television. You need not know these laws, but if and it must also interest the public. you have occasion to review them, they can be found in FCC regulations. Broadcast ethics are covered in the code of the National Association RADIO AND TELEVISION of Broadcasters. There are other references, but PROGRAMMING these are the most important. Libel and copyright laws pertain to radio and All radio and teltvision programming is either television (see ch. 10). At present, legal prose- COMMERCIAL, SUSTAINING, or PARTICI- cution for derogatory statements made over the PATING. A commercial program is one spon- air is considered a local matter and is subject to sored by a business or person trying to sell State law. Since broadcasts are written as well as products or services to listeners and viewers. The spoken, radio defamation is considered BOTH sponsor buys air time from stations or networks libel and slander in many States. to make his "sales pitch." Retractions and apologies do not remove the A sustaining program isbroadcast at the threat of libel actions but they are advisable in expense of the network or station, either as a order to prove good intent and lack of malice, public service, or to attract sponsors. Sustaining and they tend to lessen the damages. time is used to fill the unsold portions of the broadcast day. Participating programs are a combination of commercial and sustaining broadcasting. When a NAVY POLICY station cannot find a sponsor for a whole program the program may be scheduled as The question of policy comes up often when sustaining with two or three "open" spot you are involved with the electronic media. The announcements between programs or segments Chief of Information advises SECNAV and CNO of the program. The sales department then sells on matters of policy relating to the use of radio these spots to different sponsors and the show and TV for public affairs purposes. This means becomes a "participating show" with two or that the answers to most of your questions on more sponsors. The spots that are not sold are Navy radio and TV policy can be found by filled with station promotions or public service referring them to higher authority, especially the announcements. Chief of Information, if necessary. You will find A public service program is broadcast in the information on Navy policy concerning radio interest of the public. The FCC encourages a and TV in the U.S. Navy Public Affairs Regu- policy of having a portion of a station's air time lations. devoted to public service. Newscasts, weather The Navy does not buy air time. However, the reports, divine worship, health service programs, Navy can cooperate with those responsible for and programs pertaining to the welfare of the procuring commercial programs, provided the community or the NationNavy programs, for product advertised does not lessen the dignity of instanceare considered to be in the interest of the Navy, and the script in no way implies Navy the public and are classified as public service. endorsement of a prod::: t. If these programs are unsponsored, they are On a strictly local level, the commanding considered sustaining. If sponsored, they are, of officer may authorize Navy cooperation with course, commercial. In either case, they are radio and television stations. If there are five 319 323 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 local radio stations, you should send them all ask local Navy activities for Navy cooperation in the same news release. You could also have a the prbduCtion -of 'program material. Even if the radio show on each of them, but if two or more materialis clearly unclassified, itis MANDA- of them are hooked up to air the same show TORY that approval for participation in net- simultaneously, this constitutes a network and, work broadcasting be obtained from CHINFO. therefore,comes underthecognizanceof There are special provision of Navy public CHINFO although your office or the appro- affairs policy and communications instructions priate Navy public affairs office may be desig- governing commercial broadcasts from Navy nated the "action office" for CHINFO. ships. Read Public Affairs Regulations and check Representatives of national radio and tele- with your ship's communications officer before vision networks and commercial concerns often discussing this subject with broadcasters.

324

320 CHAPTER 19

PREPARING RADIO MATERIAL

Now that the theory and basic set-up of the listener interest, the writer soon discovers that broadcasting media have been discussed in the the best way is by using the elements in three previous chapter, this chapter will reveal the definite stages. These stages are (1) to attract working aspect of these mediawhat is heard or immediate interest (2) to maintain interest, and "seen" by your audience. This is where you (3) to satisfy attention. In other words, the work hard and rush to meet on-air deadlines and writer must attract a listener at the beginning, the rigid standards of broadcasting. This is the hold him throughout the middle, and finally place where the JO fits into the business of radio convince him that it was worth the time he broadcastingpreparing Navy material for this spent. The satisfied listener is one who has medium. gained a certain amount of information that he didn't have before.

THE BASIC ELEMENTS THE TECHNIQUES All radio writing, like any other style of writing requires that you write in a certain way. Radio writing techniques are designed to Through years of experimentation and trial and capture and hold the audience until your mes- error, three basic elements or rules have been sage has been delivered. Here are six such developed. Modern radio writers use these ele- techniques: ments in putting their information across to the public. The elements are: 1. AURAL SENSE APPEAL. Radio depends entirely on the ear, it must work completely on 1. SPEECH.The most important element is the listener's mental image inspired by sound speech becauseitis generally the one used waves coming from his radio loudspeaker. specifically to reach the listener with the desired 2. RAPID GETAWAY. Radio programs must information. captureanaudiencewithinthefirstfew 2. SOUND.When used on radio, sound must moments of presentation or lose the listeners. be easily distinguished so that the listener is able Programs must present a challenge, a promise, or to interpret the sound and understand what is a conflict to arouse attention within the first being conveyed. The roar of a jet engine and the few moments. muffled sounds of other flight deck activity will 3. POWER OF SUGGEST:ON. The human help the listener to visualize the scene. mind is a vast storehouse of scenery. The radio 3. MUSIC.Music has great suggestive power writer suggests to the audience what the scene because it plays on human emotion and colors should be and through their mind's eye they can scenes. It touches the heart and mind. see anything from a pin hole to the Grand Canyon. The elements above are used by radio writers 4. PACING AND TIMING. The writer must to get across their information and to increase or prepare his material for delivery within a defi- heighten the meaning of what is said. To assure nite time frame. Within this time frame he 321 325 . JOURNALIST 3 & 2 controlsthechangesinquality,emotion, flow. Copy that is written in a stilted and formal thought, or feeling of his material. manner will have littleappeal for the average 5. FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT. Theradio listener. writer can take his listener from one point on 5. AURAL SIMPLICITY is the sum total of earth to another, or even into outer space with all the five points on radio news style. The words, sound effects, or appropriate music. while idea of radio news style is to make the 6. CONFLICT. Radio writers callconflict the news so clear, easy to say,brief and to the point, backbone of interest in radio writing. Conflict is thatitwill be immediately understood the the ageless formula of hero against villain, good momentthewords come fromtheradio against evil,thefightfor survival, and the receiver. A good radio newswriter tests his copy solution of difficult problems. by reading it aloud before it is submittedand eliminates any flaws or violations of style that his copy might contain. RADIO NEWSWRITING

A Navy Journalist's first encounter with radio COPY FORMAT writing is usually as a radio newswritcr. It ishis job to meet the deadlines and rigid standardsof When writing copy for radio, you normally broadcasting with the Navy's news story. start off with a general "what-happened"lead Radio news style is dictated by the need for followed by a body of significant facts.This getting and holding the attention of an audience. body doesn't have to include ALL the factsof Radio news must be written so the listener has the story only the most important ones.This is no trouble ,whatsoeverunderstanding what is different from newspaper writing, in thatthe being said. Radio newswriting is guided by five most common newspaper lead is the"five-W" or principles: summary lead. For radio,it would be too cumbersome to include the who, what,where, 1. FACTUAL CLARITY is the quality most when, why and how in the lead. There is notime important in radio writing of any kind. Eventhe for non-essential details in radio news items. The clearest story on the air may be misunderstood average length of a radio newsstory is 30 on the basis of onehearing. The listener's seconds air time. attention may be divided between a numberof The lead sentence must gain the attentionof that will distractions.Therefore, a radio. newsstory the listener and orient him on the facts should be perfectly clear if it is to avoid the risk follow in the body of the story. of being misinterpreted or misunderstood. The body of the news story can be developed 2. SENTENCE BREVITY is a must forradio in any one of three patterns, or anycombination newswriting. Because radio news is spoken and of the three. not read, long sentences with a greatnumber of details and modifying clauses are difficult to 1. CHRONOLOGICALLY: Narratethe story announce and tend to confusethe listener. of the happening from its beginning toits Normal radio speech sounds best when sentences conclusion. iden- average about 17 words inlength. 2. EXPANDING the W's: Specifically 3. WORD UTILITY is important becauseof tify the who, when, where, etc., andfurther sentence brevity. The average speechdelivery amplify the "what-happened". rate of an announcer is about150 words per 3. DESCENDING IMPORTANCE:After minute. Words must be chosen wiselyfor their explaining "what-happened" in the lead,place descriptive color and precise meaning.Everyday the facts in order of descending importance. language. is always preferable to the long fancy searchedforinthe "We feel we are rapidly approachingif we words thatmust be point at dictionary. have not already reachedthe crossover 4. CONVERSATIONAL FACILITY aidsin which the Viet Cong will begin to feelthe pinch holding the listener's attention. Your copy must of a military manpower shortage,"explained

F.326 322 Chapter 19PREPARING RADIO MATERIAL

Carlos Blackwell, Director of the International listener could misinterpret a story if itwere Development Mission in Vietnam. written this way: Perhaps the above paragraph makessense when you read it, but how clear would it beif "John R. James of the advisory staff of you heard it on the radio? To begin with, is it the President was killed this morning ina conversational? Of course not. Forone thing it plane crash." is too long, Although theaverage is 1? words per sentence, don't strive to hit it each time. Your if a listener tuned in late he might hear: storywill become choppy and monotonous. However, anytime you go over 25 words,you "...the President was killed this morn- should see if the sentence can't be cut down. ing in a plane crash." Another thing wrong with this example, for radio purposes, is the attribution. Inconversa- Any time you have a sentence with dependent tional style, attribution comes before thestate- clauses, it's usually better to divide it into two ment in a sentence. Of course,you need to sentences, for the sake of aural simplicity: remember toavoidbeginningstorieswith unft.miliar names. Sometimes it's best touse the "A Presidential advisor was killed this title of the person. If youwere quoting the morning in a plane crash. He was identified President of the U.S. or some other widely as John R. James." known person, however, thenuse of the name would be acceptable. Also, be careful to avoid ambiguouspronoun Now let's look at how thatnewspaper lead references: might be rewritten for radio: "The President and Vice-President met The Viet Cong may be feeling the pinch today behind closed doors. Reports said he of a military manpower shortage. This is had no comment about the meeting." (Who the opinion of Carlos Blackwell, Director had no comment?) of the International Development Mission in Vietnam. Blackwell said that if the-Viet As forstyle,its renuirements vary from Cong are not already suffering amanpower station to station, and you must be versatile shortage, They will be verysoon. enough to adapt your style to local requirements. Some very basic style guides that nor- Inthisform we haveageneral"what- trdly stay consistent apply to numbers, abbrevi- happened," or in this case, what is happening,or ations, and mechanics. what may happen, lead. Concerning numbers: spell out numbersone The word "pinch" adds to the impact ofthe tvi nine and use figures from 10 to 999. Spell out lead, because of its descriptiveness. This time,it hundred, thousand, million, etc. Exceptionsare was there for you already, but in most instances the spelling out of numbers in addresses, tele- you will have to find your own dolorful words. phone numbers, dates, and time. Next comes the attribution. It is notcon- As for abbreviations, never use them unless tained in the lead sentence. butcomes in a they are well known and can be easily recog- sentence by itself. This is followed immediately nized by a civilian announcer. by a restatement of the lead ina more complete Avoid splitting words between lines and form. splitting sentences between pages. Includea line In broadcast writing, it is perfectly acceptable count or indicate in some manner the time to repeat facts further down in the story. The length of your story or spot. reason is that the listener may tune in after the Always type on one side of the paper and story starts and not understand what it's all double space your copy. Each page should be about. numbered. Another point worth repeating is, makesure Above all, in radio newswiiting, remember to the listener understands what he hears. A write conversationally, and NEVER sacrifice 323 3g7 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 factualclarityfor the sakeof any other calling party knew he was being recorded. consideration. Now upon agreement of the party being There are many other aspects of radio new.. called, the "beep" need not be on the recording. writing we could delve into, but theabove are This type of news report is still, however, called basic, and of the greatest importance. a "beeper" report. Never neglect the beeper-phone report as a fast means of getting your news out, but, at the Nobody wants to NEWS BULLETINS same time, DON'T overuse it. hear an entire newscast made up of telephone Many times inexperience leads to too much reports. enthusiasm. This can be a hindrance to your office and to the local radio .,ration. If you receive information that seems asif it SPOT ANNOUNCEMENTS may be of great importanceto your public, be The sustaining point of a commercial radio sure to doublecheck. In 1964 a bulletin was releasedststing that station is the commercial. Although, %tither the Nikita Khruschev had died. This was aclassic Navy nor American Forces Radio and Television example of an error due to overenthusiasmand stations use them, commercials have a valuable failure to double check. Always be sure of your counterpart for Navy Public Affairs use, and source before releasing abulletin. that's the spot announcement. If you use a bulletin-type of release, make Spot announcements come in two forms: sure the information warrants abulletin. If you Both are usually short-60 seconds or less. constantly send out articles as bulletinswhe they should have been normal routine news 1. SELLING SPOT. The purpose of the releases, before long you'll be known asthe selling spot is to have the listeners take some Journalist or the command that cries"wolf' all type of action as a result of the idea you have the time. presented to them. The spot can also be used to change attitudes. Examples of these are "Be there", "Do it now", and "See your recruiter BEEPER PHONE REPORTS today". 2. INFORMATION SPOT. The purpose of Many times when bulletins or other timely the information spot is purely to inform. In this news articles are to bereleased, you don't have type announcement, you are not trying to get time to hand-deliver copy to the station. your audience to do something, nor are you This brings into play an important aid to any trying to change their attitudes. You simply newscast: BEEPER-PHONEREPORTS. want to give them information. A beeper-phone report is nothing morethan a news release telephonedto the station and recorded on tape for insertion in a newscast orif it's a bulletinperhaps it will be carried SPOT WRITING TECHNIQUES live on the news program. If it's used in a newscast, it can be an aid In writing the announcement, whether itis a because it breaks up the monotony ofhearing selling or information spot, you should keep in the same voice for 5, 10, or 15 minutes.It also mind several techniques which will paydivi- lends authority to the story, because it comes dends in quality. from somebody "in the know" or on the scene. The reason for calling these reports"beeper- CAREFULLY PLOT THE PITCH. Before phone reports" is that the FederalCommuni- you put a word down on paper, youhave to cations Commission used to require that a know the nature of the audience you wish to recorded phone conversation or report have an reach. If the audience is in the lower income electronic "beep" every few secojltgo the bracket, gear the spot to the special needs and i 324 Chapter 19 PREPARING RADIOMATERIAL

wants of this group. One approach could be the benefits you have pointed out in promoting the economic securityangle; another the"get- idea. Here is a closer look at the selling spot ahead-in-the-world" appeal. On the other hand, structure. audiences in small rural towns might find the travel theme exciting and interesting. The spot writer must study the prospective audience in order to tell it how to get the things it wantsor 1. ATTENTION. A lead such as "Doesyour needs. cigarette taste different lately?" is almostan automatic attention-getter for a large segment of NEW TARGET AUDIENCES. Always be your listening audience.It draws the listener on the alert for new audiences. Although the into your message by provoking his interest and stress in writing may be recruiting, you should attention.Copythatispointedtoward be prepared to write spots that will sell the emotional and motivating drives iscopy that public on attending an °rem house, a parade, or sells and should be slanted toward a particular rt demonstration. These special events appeal to group with a need for a particular product. many audiences. Some spots might be directed Spotsselling baby food, for example,are toward fathers, children, and teenagers, or even directed at mothers who are concerned with the to mothers in the audience. health of their babies. These spots point out the baby food's healthful ingredients. In thesame DELIVERY. You should strive for a direct way, the slant toward a particular group is used and personal approach in your writing. Even by the Navy in recruiting. Such spots are aimed though the audience may consist of several at young men in age group 17 to 25 and words thousand people, the copy is directed atone such as security, travel, education, missiles, and person. Make him feel that the message is electronics are used as attention-getters. When directed to him. Address the listener in terms of "you," "you've," "your" and "you're." Always the attention portion is directed toward the listener's desires, aspirations, dreams, and ambi- refer to the listener in the singular and ina friendly manner. tions, you will be taking the first step toward getting him or her to listen to the appeal and the WORDS. Select words carefully. Write spots action portions of your spot. in the active voice with verbs that are positive 2. APPEAL. "Why don't you begin to enjoy and colorful. Some of these verbs are: go, see, the finer things in life?" You've probably heard take, try, get, visit, ask, call, be, and buy. Be that in one form or another. In the appeal conversational but avoid slang. Keep your words portion, you present the selling materialthe simple and don't try to impress the listener with message you want to get across to the audience. an extensive vocabulary. Speak to the listener in One thing to remember is to avoid cramming too the language he knows. You should also avoid many points into a short announcement. Keep it special military terms and abbreviations that the simple and stay with the subject. For example, listener is not familair with. in a recruiting spot if you start off talking about travel as the attention-getter, don't drift off into education or some other subject in thesame STRUCTURE OF THE SELLING SPOT announcement. Another word of cautiondon't promise the impossible. Be sincere and honest There are many ways to structure the selling with your audience. spot. One way is the three-pronged approach ATTENTIONAPPEALACTION. First, you form your basic idea and attention-getting lead sentence. Then you present the merits, advan- 3. ACTION."BuySavingsBonds each tages, and appeal of the idea. Finally, you payday""Learn how you can travel the world motivate your listener to take action to gain the with the Navy"these statements invite action

325 4329 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 and tall the listener what he can do. Theaction TIMING THE SPOT step gives the listener a definite course tofollow. The step should be forceful, combininginvita- Timing is extremely important in spot writ- tion and demand, and compel thelistener ing. On commercial stations, you'll be compet- toward a positive action. Remember, theaction ing with other public service agencies for free air step is designed to motivate the listenerto buy, time. Naturally, a station can allot only so much join, write, or perform according to theaction time for public service announcements. you have suggested in the message.The success To determine the length of a spot you must of any spot announcement as a sellingdevice is have an average to go by. The average announcer measured bythelistener's response to the reads at the rate of 15 lines per minute, based product advertised. Figure 19-1 gives anexample on a 10-word line. For a 30-second spotit would of a selling spot. take about seven or eight lines. If you use music orsound effectsirtyour spot, you must remember to take these into consideration in STRUCTURE OF THE INFORMATIONSPOT your timing. A 30-second spot with10 seconds or sound effects would average four to fivelines The information spot differs from theselling of copy. A stop watch will be helpful in timing spot in purpose and structure.In writing the spots. information spot, you begin with ATTENTION Whenever you write a spot, it's best to include andfollowitwith APPEAL.Because no a "kill date" and cut-off time sothe station will response is desired from theaudience, you have know when to stop using it. A spot that is heard no need for anaction step. Your job is to over and over, day after day,for a long time compose the message in aclear, concise form soon gets to be dull and irritating tothe listener. and to get the maximum amountof interesting Also, if you have an open house spot telling information into the brief 10, 20, 30, or60 people to come out on Sunday, it would seconds you may beallotted.Figure19-2 certainly sound ridiculous to hear it the follow- illustrates the information spot. ing Monday.

RELEASE FOR RADIO 20 Second Spot

October 16 through November 2

YOU CAN BE WORKING TOWARD ACOLLEGE DEGREE RIGHT NOW WHILE RUMEN INSTIIUTE....LOCATED AT ACTIVE DUTY. THE UNITED STATES ARMED FORCES

THE UNIVERSITY OF W1SCONSIN....PROVIDESSERVICEMEN A CHANCE TO COMPLETE

COURSES THROUGH CORRESPONDENCE. TO LEARN ABOUT RECEIVING CREDITS IN A

VARIETY OF COLLEGE COURSES, VISIT ICORCOMMAND'S EDUCATIONAL SERVICES

OFFICE TODAY.

186.38 Figure 19.1.An example of a 20second selling spotannouncement.

1 330 326 Chapter 19PREPARING RADIO MATERIAL

RELEASE FOR RADIO 30 Second Spot

August 9 through August 25

DO YOU KNOW WHAT THE MITERS U-S-0 STAND FOR? THEY STAND FOR UNITED

SERVIOEMEN0S ORGANIZATION....A GROUP OF HARDWORKING MEN AND WOMEN WHO

MAKE A HONE AWAY FROM HOLE FORM:MRS OF 7KBMILITARY.VOLUNTEER

WORKERS MAN THEIR STATIONS ALL OVER THE WORLD IN ANEFFORT TO KEEP THE

MORALE HIGH. NO MATTER HCW NEAR OR FAR PICK HOMI....THEREISALWAYS A

U.S-0 CENTER NEARBY. THESE CENTERS OFFER ENTERTAINMENT OF EVERY

ELSCRIPTION....FRCif PING POND TO FREE BROADWAY SHOWS.THE U-S-0 IS

INDEED A SERVIORNANIS Han AWAY nom Ham.

-11/1D-

165.35 Figure 19.2. An example of a 30.second information spotannouncement.

SPOT FORMAT AND PREPARATION BUILDING THE RADIO PROGRAM So far,this chapter has dealt mostly with Whether writing a spot announcement foran AFRT station or a local commercial station, news and spot announcements. However, there there are several general rules concerning format are other ways of using your journalistic abilities and pmparation that must be followed. to get the Navy's message to the public byway of radio. One way is the radio program. Write your spot following the style guide of First of all, let's make it clear thata music the station. A station manager might rejectyour show is not the only kind of radioprogram. spot if it is not in the style his announcersare There are ten program types that have become used to reading. standard.Theseare(I) musical,(2) news, Submit clean copy. Don't give anannounce- (3) interview,(4) feature,(5) sports, ment to a station if there are untidy corrections (6) drama,(7) specialevent,(8) audience made on the copy. Check tosee how many participation, (9) discussion, and (10) variety. copies of an announcement are needed by each The great majority of radio stations today station. program music. Most of these specialize in a certain kind of music. Remember to tailor your If a station manager asks you to havea spot at message to the audience unique to each kind of the station by a given time, don't miss the program format. Any of the ten program types deadline. may be presented live or recorded on tape. Violating the above rules is the best way to Without this versatility, radio could not offer ensure that your copy never reaches the air the quality of programs presented daily through- waves. out the country. 327 '`331. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

If you decided to write a book or story, you'd script is how is sounds, not howit looks on probably decidefirst what you wanted to paper. sayyour OBJECTIVE orPURPOSE. This is also true in building the radio program.You INTERVIEWING must have an objectivea particulargoal in mind. One of the best ways to promote the Navy on Your objective, naturally, is to tell the Navy's the air is through the use of interviews. story or a portion of it.It must be -done Perhaps the most valuable aspect to bear in interestingly and factually. Careful thought in mind about interviewing is that youshould stating the purpose of the program will help strive for QUALITY; not quantity! Toooften, listeners recognize the value of a program and Journalists and public affairs officers are too will, perhaps, induce them to listen again. interested in leaving 100 interviews per year or Once you have an objective, a detailed PLAN per reporting periodrather than 100 percent is an absolute necessity. Your plan shouldhave effectiveness. An ineffective interview probably ananswer toany question involved with your will not clear the Fleet Home TownNews program. Smart, flexibleplanning will assure Center (chapter 23) or your local news director, proper use of personnel andmaterial. It will also and, if it should, it destroys the listeners'desire aid greatly in accomplishing the goal ofthe to hear those to follow. program. Before you begin an interview, be sure to The problem of "how to say it"involves know your subject matter. Don't gointo an FORMAT. This should not be confused with interview "cold." "type." Format refers to the structure of a Bring along a question outline but don't write program. Through a familiar mannerof presenta- out the answers because thiscould cause the tion, a program tries to establish its identityin interview to sound "canned." If you use a the listener's mind with the aim ofbuilding a question outline, you are conducting aSEMI loyal and regular audience. The format for a AD-LIB interview. series of programs should be establishedbefore The fully-SCRIPTED interview is the onein the first program is broadcast, and,usually, the which all the questions and answers arewritten format will remain standard throughout the out. The opposite of thefully-scripted is the series. AD-LIB INTERVIEW' For this one,nothing is Informational material for your program may written out. All of these methods of inter- be frequently buried and can only be brought to viewing have their drawbacks and advantages.In the surface through RESEARCH. Hidden color most cases,the SEMI AD-LIB is the best and details are often revealed onlyfollowing interview for the JO's use. research and to round out a subject (or personal- Besides the three methods of interviewing, ity). Research gives a note of authority to that there are also three types of interviews,They are voice which the listener hears. the PERSONALITY, theINFORMATIVE, and WRITE AND RE-WRITE. Creative genius will the COMBINATION. be rare in the average Public Affairs Office,but The PERSONALITY interview obviously con- the journalist with an interest in his business will centrates on the person you'reinterviewing. He more than make up forthis lack. The .cript may be a famous person orperhaps only widely writing assignment is not to be feared.The known in his home tom Still, theinterview is techniques can be 'learned and the art practiced. centered around the individuaL When you have turned out the last page of your An INFORMATIVE interview is onewhich is script, put the entire script aside beforereading centered around the subject that theinterviewer it again. When you read it again, youwill find and the interviewee arediscussing. The inter- that some re-writing isnecessary. This is a viewee may be expressing his view on asubject construction step that cannotand must notbe or explaining apoint. But the subject matter and ignored, Finally, when all of the "BUGS" are not the interviewee isfeatured in this form of ironed out, read it aloud. The true test of a radio interview. 3323" Chapter 19PREPARING RADIO MATERIAL

The third type is the COMBINATION inter- interview. view. As you would imagine, it'sa combination 5. TAPE VERSUS LIVEInterviewsmay be of the personality and the informativetypes. presented"recorded" on magnetic tapeor Sometimes it's a little difficult to decide which "live". The live broadcast requiresan excellent of the three you're actually doing. An example sense of timing by the interviewer. A live of a combination would be an interview with the interview is hazardous because there'sno chance President of the United States, discussinga to edit the interviewee's word foraccuracy, recent news topic.Inthiscase,since the propriety, and good taste. Once it has been President is so widely know, it automatically said...it is too late. Recorded interviewsare becomes a personality interview. However, he is preferable since they can be checked and edited expressing his views or giving the facts about the prior to broadcast. A recorded interviewalso particular topic or subject, so it is also informa- offers flexibility in the way it is programmed. tion. Thus, you put them together and you have 6. LOCATION OF THE INTERVIEWItis a combination interview. always best to go the interviewee for the recording session.. If you bringa man into a quiet studio where there is nothing butthe YOUR ROLE AS INTERVIEWER microphone, he will probably clamup completely. But, if you talk to him in his normal The interviewer represents the listeners. He surroundings, he will feel more atease and won't must put himself in their place, remembering even notice the microphone in front of him. that they cannot see the guest, and ask the Natural sounds heighten audience interest. Don't questions that they have in mind. He must make be afraid to take the microphone to the inter- the opening interesting and keep the body viewee's office, out on a military exercise,or informative. He must develop his questions ina into a combat zone. logical order to lead both the interviewee and Some other basic things to be corcemed with the listening audience to the conclusion. The when interviewing are: broadcast interviewer must have the ability to be concise. He may want to includea great number Never ask questions that can be answered of points on a specific broadcast, but must select with a simple yes or no. These questions can't only a limited number of thevery best points always be avoided and, although they sometimes and wrap them into a neat package. bring about the desired answer anyway, they As interviewer, there are several pointsyou aren't recommended. shouldconsider in striving for an effective interview. Keep your voice levels equal. 1. NEWSWORTHINESSIstheinterview newsworthy? Is it something that the listener Don't answer your own question. wants to hear? Try to find a news peg for the interview. This will help to build. Select a topic on which your guestcan 1 TIMELINESSWill the interview be out- speak as an expert or with a certain degree of dated by the time it gets on the air? Is it a authority. feature type which can be used any time? If it Rehearse carefully, but not to the point of has to go on the air at a certain time, makesure losing the spontaneity of the interview. Don'tlet it is prepared well in advance of that time. the interviewee memoria hisanswers. 3. GOOD TASTE AND PROPRIETYThe dictatesof commonsense,courtesy,and Explain unusual terms, abbreviations, and decency are important guides to use when background noises. determining what should or should not be asked Suit the mood and pace of the interview to and or broadcast. the subject matter. 4. ACCURACYA technically perfect interview is useless if it is not accurate. Be sure that Maintainaninterested,friendlytone yourfactsarerightbeforereleasingthe throughout the interview. 329 333 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Don't monopolize the conversation. The run one hour, whileone-half mil tape, not listener wants to hear the intervieweenot you. recommended for commercial use because of its delicacy, runs for one-and-one-half hours. Don't talk down to the interviewee. Don't appear "too smart", or completely TAPE EDITING ignorant. The audience expects you to know something about the subjectbut just enough to Editing is nothing more than removing seg- ask stimulating questions so that the interviewee ments from, or adding segments to, atape can present even moreinformation. recording.Reasonsforeditingvaryfrom removal or adding of complete sections, or Stay within 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 minutes (unless combining selections, to such methods as cutting a feature lengthinterviewusually no longer out and replacing a single word. than five minuteshas been requested). Since sound is reproduced at the magnetic gap of the playback head on a tape recorder, toedit You can learn only so 'much aboutinter -tape =widely. On mastprofessional, three - viewing by reading. Such is also the casefor headmachines,theheadsareERASE, newswriting, spot announcements, bulletins,and RECORD, and PLAYBACK. Play what youhave programs. When approaching anyof these areas, recorded before cutting the tape, noting care- always remember to ask yourself thesethree fully whether the words you want to edit canbe questions: Is it going to make a goodimpres- cut out and still leave natural-soundingspeech. sion? Will it benefit the Navy? Am I going tobe Mark the tape for editing at two points:just satisfied with it? All your answers shouldbe before the first sound of the part you wantto YES. Then ask yourself the finalimportant eliminate and just before the following part you question: IS IT QUALITY ORQUANTITY want to leave in. Editing this waywill maintain THAT I'M STRIVING FOR? The answershould the speaker's natural pace. After youhave first always be QUALITY. marked both points, cut the tape at the point, moving the tape reels by hand,and pull out the tape you are eliminating upto the AUDIO TAPE EDITING, SPLICING, second mark. Place this part of the tapein the STORING AND HANDLING splicer and cut it. Then put the otherloose end of tape in the block and splice the twoends There are three common types ofmagnetic together. recording tape: cellulose acetate,polyester, and Leave in the necessary spaces between words, mylar. Because of its economy,cellulose acetate longer spaces between sentences andphrases, is the most widely used.It is smooth and and don't forget to leave space sothat the flexible and provides flawless sound repro- speaker can breathe. duction at low frequency response.Polyester offers extra strength as an additionalfeature. It is not likely to break, but willstretch. Polyester SPLICING is also preferred for long storagebecause it is virtually unaffected by humidity orother fac- Thera; are two basic types of splicers. The swelling. The third earliest model is the EDITALL typewhich may tors that cause shrinking or channel slightly type to consider is mylar tape.It has, basically be a plastic or metalblock with a tape, but narrower than therecording tape and running the same characteristics of polyester the the problem of warping andstretching is much the entire length of the block. Cutting across Careful treatment is a must channel at the center of the block is athin more prevalent. diagonal groove (usually at 40 or 45 degrees). A when you use mylar tape. Inbroadcasting 1.1 /2 commonly. On a razor blade pulledthrough the groove cuts the mil acetate tape is used most piece of splicing 7" reel,1-1/2 mil tape, at 7.1 /2 inches per tape. The ends are joined with a second will run one-half hour. Onemil tape will tape which must then be trimmedwith scissors 334 "° Chapter 19PREPARING RADIO MATERIAL

or a razor. To avoid protruding splicing tape, it finger or thumbnail back and forth over ita few is necessary to cut into the edge of the recording times until the splicing tape takes on some of tape very slightly. Narrow splicing tape avoids the color of the tape under it. the cutting but requires some practice to keep The ends of the tape must butt together the splice from being crooked. The groove in the perfectly as shown in figure 19-3. This is so block is slightly curved and the sides have tiny there will be no exposed adhesive on the splicing protruding dovetails machined in them. You tapetoaccumulatedust,dirt,and oxide press the tape, with the shinier side (baseside) of particles. the tape facing up, into the groove, by running The angle at which the recording tape is cut is your finger over the tape the length of the not critical as long as the tape is cut on a block. The tape snaps into the groove and the diagonal and both ends are cut at the same tape edges are held under the tiny dovetails. angle. However, tape 7.ut with a square end NEVER try to remove the tape by peeling itout invariably makes a noisy splice. It also takes of the groove. The proper way toremove tape more of a beating as it passes over heads and from the groove is to grasp it by both hands at idlers and is therefore more likely to fail. the ends of the block, pull the tape taut, and snap it up and out of the groove. The second type of splicer is the GIBSON TAPE HANDLING GIRL, which comes in many styles. Whether it is advertised as just a plain splicer or a Stereoor a Recorded tape will remain magnetized forever Stereo-5 splicer, it is used for thesame job unless altered by magnetic means. There is no editing1/4 inch magnetic tape.All of the measurable loss of magnetism over a- period of models are alike in having two sets of blades. A time. Also, no matter how often played, the diagonal blade cuts the tape, the splicing tape is noise level of tape does not rise as does the applied, and the trimming blade is pulled into surface noise on a disc recording. Magnetic tape poisiton and pushed down. It automatically is tough and easy to handle, but it can be trimsthesplicetoaslightly wasp-waisted damaged and does deserve a certain amount of contour, hencL, the Gibson Girl name. The chief care. advantage of the Gibson Girl is that it makesan An occasional cleaning of recording head, .excellent splice and the blades are adjustable and capstan, tape guides, and other parts will assure replaceable for wear. Unfortunately, in terms of utmost wearing life for your tapes. convenience, it leaves a little to be desired,as To cause erasure, a magnetic field must be the tape must be removed from the recorder strong enough to exert attraction or induce head assembly for each splice. vibration in the tape. It is unlikely that such The diagonal cut across the Editall Block was erasure could happen accidentally. However, designed for cutting with a single-edgerazor tapes left in the path of a strong magnetic field blade. With the tape in the groove ready for could become erased. Magnets found in certain cutting, hold the razor with the forward point in types of machinery can cause erasure, as can the slot, and cut the tape by pulling the blade X-rays. Mark tapes to be mailed: RECORDING back toward you while holding it firmly down. TAPEDO NOT X-RAY. Make CERTAIN THE RAZOR BLADE IS NOT MAGNETIZED. If it should be magnetized, it will magnetize the tape and you will hear a click as it is played back. STORAGE After you edit out the tape you want deleted, put the two cut ends firmly together in the One of the major causes of tape distortion is block. Then apply, squarely, approximately a excessive tension in winding. A thousand-odd one-inch length of splicing tape. The easiest way layers, each adding a minute stress, can add up to do this is to slide the piece of splicing tape to tremendous pressure on tape nearest the reel sideways against one edge of the groove. Press hub. If tape is allowed to weave back and forth the splicing tape down firmly by running your during winding, distortion will increase. There. 331 335 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

periods is not permanently affected.Subsequent storage under normal conditionsfor 16 to 24 hourswillcompletelyrestoreitsdesired 140.8111660) qualities. them Figure 19.3.The ends ofspliced tape must butt When storing reels of tape, avoid storing together perfectly to prevent the accumu- unboxed. The original bon protectstape from lation of foreign particles on the exposed dust and physical damage to itsedges. Wind reels adhesive. of tape loosely and store them on"edge" or flat on individualshelves. Avoid stacking as the tension is weight may distort the plastic reels ordamage fore, an ever wind at moderate of tapes desirable. the edges of the tape. Occasional use Magnetic tapes can be affected by abnormal improves storage characteristics.Playing tapes temperature and humidity. Forexample, low releases strains and adhesions.Avoid excessive humidity will dry out acetate tapesand make tensions in rewinding tape for storage.The tape them brittle. High temperatures will causephysi- may become stretched orpermanently distorted cal distortion and loss ofstrength. if wound too tightly. Ideally, magnetic tape should bestored where Magnetic recording equipment andmaterials between 40 and 60 which you can expect to come incontact with relative humidity stays be pe sent and thetemrerature between 70 and 75 during your career as a JO will, in most cases, degrees Fahrenheit. If large variationsexist in accompaniedwithfactoryinstructionsfor relative humidity, tape may bestored in sealed operation and maintenance. Theseinstructions, is suggested of course, vary considerablywith each different containers. For long-term storage, it instructions on how that such containers be sealedwith a pressure- brand. Therefore, specific sensitive tape. Also, occasional useof the tape to operate a specific typeof magnetic recorder, You must resort improves storagecharacteristics. A magnetic for example, have been left out. tape exposed to extremeconditions for short to the factory guides for thisinformation.

336 332 CHAPTER 20

PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

Television is one of the most influential media news from militaryestablishments and will of our times. Its audiences not only hear ofan readily use it if the format meets with certain event but can also, in many cases, witness the requirements. No medium, needless tosay, will event in all its sights and sounds, and in living use copy that requires drastic changes to meet color. the individual publication'sor station's format. The long range effects of television on today's Televisionnewswritingrequires the same society arestill being studied. Some studies principles as radio news. The audio portion of suggest a causal relationship between violence on television news should be accompanied with televisionandjuveniledelinquency.Other visual material whenever possible to heighten the studies show that children who watch Trare impact and interest of the presentation. generally better informed on events of the day. In any case, virtually everyone in America today is within the reception range of at leastone television station. Approximately 95% of the SCANNING, ESSENTIAL AND homes in the United States have at leastone BORDER AREAS television receiver. The average TV viewing time per home per day is about six hours. Next to RegardlAss of the size of a television visual, working and sleeping the averageperson spends there are three very definite area limitations to more time with television than with anything keep in mind when designing or preparing art else. work. Everyone recognizes the influence, impact, and selling power of television. Therefore, the 1. The total area that the camera "sees" is efforts of a Journalist to properly prepare Navy called the scanning area. This entire image is material for television is time well spent. fully transmitted, but the outer edges and the For this reason senior Journalist and broad- corners are not usually displayed on the home cast specialists are required to have a broad and TV set due to alignment of the set to "fill" the detailed knowledge of television script writing entire picture tube. A properly aligned receiver and production procedures. However, at the will display all scanned information at the top regular J03 an_ d 2 level, you will probably be and bottom center of the picture, but willcrop most involved with preparing releases for local corners due to the non-square corners of the televisionstations.Withthisinmind, this picture tubes. chapter acquaints you with the fundamentals of 2. The part of the picture that is seen by the preparing news, spot announcements, and visual viewer should be no less than the total amount materials for television. of essential information to be putacross to the Preparing material for television is basically viewer, so this portion of the visual is called the the same as preparing material for radioit is essential area. In the case of program titlesor prepared to be heard, but heard in coordination credits, for example, the essential area includes with watching an image on a screen. all of the title or other lettering. Every visual Television stations in most areas welcome needs a scanning area and an essential area. 333 337 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 NM& 3. There should always be a border area. The with televisioncameras. The powerful lights border provides a handling area, protection for a require .1 for television bounce off the surface of picture from damage if dropped, and provides a a glossy photo and cause a .glarethat would background if the artwork is over-scanned. See make it unusable. This is not to say that a glossy figure 20-1. photo is stricvly taboo. In an emergency, or in the event that your photo is of great news value, the angle and intensity of lights may be modi- STILL PHOTOS fied so the glossy photo can then be transmitted. Glossy prints may also be sprayed with a dulling Television pictures have an aspect ratio of spray that will give them an acceptable finish. three to four. That is to say, television camera Thirty-five millimeter (35mm) slides may also tubes and picture tubes in the home receivers are be submitted intheir standard two-inch by three units high to four units wide. Thus, photos two-inch (2" x 2") mounts. In the case of black intended for use on television should also be and white television, the slide (transparency) three units high and four units wide. A close may be either negative or positivebecause of the approximation to this which is highly acceptable abilityof most televisionstations toelec- totelevision news directorsisthe standard tronically reverse polarity in TV cameras. This 8 X 10 inch matte-finish photo. If you don't means that a negative film, which mostNavy have matte paper, the answer isto "matte- photo facilities are limited to, appears positive finish" your prints. This simply means placing by merely flipping a switch. your prints face down on the dryer apron. The Check with your target station to see if it has image will be against the apron instead of against thiscapability. Thisisalso true of motion the drum. picturefilm. Every effort should be made, Extremely important in the above paragraph however, to provide positive transparencies, or is the word "matte." In this context it means a film, to avoid the necessity of the TV engineer's surface or finish that is without luster or gloss, having to reverse the film. Only when news or one that is otherwise dulled. Intelevision, deadlines,time,orlimitedphotofacilities photos are placed on card-stands and "shot" prevent urgent Navy news (accidents, etc.) from

SCANNING AREA

1/10 HEIGHT OF TOTAL SCANNING AREA

1/10 WIDTH OF TOTAL . SCANNING AREA

SAFE TITLE AREA

174.84 Figure 20.1, Scanning, Essential and Border Areas for TV GraphicsThis standard wasdeveloped by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers and the networks to guard againstloss of lettering and other essential information. TV receivers and monitors often "clip" theedges of graphics due to improper adjustment.

1 338 334 Chapter 20PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL being properly prepared for TV station should this case, it will probably be your job to prepare negative transparencies/film be delivered to a a SHOOTING SCRIPT. This is nothing more station (and not even then, if the station does than a set of directions to the photographer to not want it). ensure that he shoots the pictures you need to Almost all stations now have color capabilities telt the story. and you should plan your visuals with this in Be sure to tell the photo lab what you want. mind. Some stations, since the advent of color The photographer is the expert at operating the television, will hesitate to air anything but color movie camera.Lmever, there is nothing in his photos, slides, and film. With this in mind, plan rating requirements that requires him to know to shoot important news events in color, if what is newsworthy or how to plan newsreel possible. Even stations which do not broadcast coverage. You may get the opportunity to work in color can use color film. with an experienced photo-journalist (a PH or The most economical color coverage is the JO with a special job classification who has color transparency 35mm slide. This involves the completed an advanced photo-journalism course least amount of time from camera to television, at a civilian institution) who has a news sense in addition to being least bothersome to the and always turns in just what you want with a station itself. Again, remember the three-to-four minimum of direction.But remember, the aspect ratio. Think horizontally. In other words, responsibility for planning the coverage is yours. unless a TV station considers a vertical photo extremely important to the story, or a portion of it usable, the station probably will not use it. THE SHOOTING SCRIPT Another thing to keep in mind is "transmission loss." Basically, transmission loss is that portion A shooting script lists the time and place of of the picture which is lost between what the each scene to be photographed (usually a few TV studio camera viewfinder sees and what more scenes than you actually need), the foot- actually appears on the home receiver. To make age or numbers of seconds you want in each up for this, frame and print your photos loosely, scene (about twice as much as you plan to use) and instruct your photographers to do likewise. and a brief description of the action you want in You may have noticed that when old motion each scene. A shooting script is shown in figure pictures are featured on television the tops of 20-2. heads sometimes are choppedoff.Thisis because the picture was designed for projection on a motion picture screen, which has no "loss." TIMING

You (or your PH) will prdbably be working NEWSFILM with 16mm silent film. This means you will have 24 frames per second, and 40 frames per foot of Televisionstationsreceivenewsfilmfrom film. See figure 20-3 for a conversion chart for various professional newsfilm distributors. These 8, 16, and 35 millimeter film. You can readily distributorsreceiveNavy newsfilmfootage use these figures in computing the length of the regularly from the Department of Defense. In footage desired.or you can merely list the addition, local stations often supplement this length in seconds. The average finished news "canned" coverage with films of local events. filmshould run from 30 secondsto two When thisis the case, the local station may minutes, depending on its news value and the prefer to shoot the film itself or they ask you to amount of time the TV station wants to allot it. provide it. The amount of time a station will allot, of If the station shoots its own film, your job is course, 'depends on the station's editorial or to work with station photographers, telling them new,s_judgment. The best practice is to tell the what is going to happen and helping them in newsdirectororother appropriateperson every way you can. If the Navy is to shoot the approximately what is planned, the names of film, you will work with the Navy photo lab. In prominent people involved, if any, and ask him 335 339 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Diamil Film Footsie Shooting Instructions

0900 stain 24 feet Cameraman on truck moving about 10 miles Gate (40 sec.) per hour. Long shot of gate as you

approach it--then pan down when you go

under--to long shot of people on both

sides of street an they walk toward

second gate. (Do not get hood Of truck

when you pan down).

1000 Ross 36 feet Long shot of men marching on Ross Field. Field (60 sec.) Medium shot of bleachers (people

filling entire picture) and pan to

reviewing stand. Close-up of Admiral

observing review and long shot of

marching men as they go by reviewing

stand.

(10 1100 Bldg. 24 feet Oet shots of four good displays. #4 (40 sec.) seconds each) .

1130 Bldg. 24 feet Get close-up of mayor presenting 04 (40 sec.) ribbon for the most outstanding exhibit

and sodium shot of exhibit.

103.37 Figure 20-2.A typical Armed Forms Day nmsefilm shooting ipt. 336 1 340 Chapter20-PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

FRAMES TIME 8MM SUPER 8MM 16MM 35MM

24 1 Second 0.3* 0.296 0.6 1.5

120 5Seconds 1.5 1.48 3.0 7.5

240 10Seconds 3.0 2.96 6.0 15.0

360 15Seconds 4.5 4.44 9.0 22.5

480 20Seconds 6.0 5.92 12.0 30.0

720 30Seconds 9.0 8.88 18.0 45.0

1440 1Minute 18.0 17.76 36.0 90.0

2880 2Minutes 36.0 35.52 72.0 180.0

7200 5Minutes 90.0 88.80 180.0 450.0

14400 10Minutes 180.0 177.60 360.0 900.0

21600 15Minutes 270.0 266.40 540.0 1350.0

43200 30Minutes 540.0 532.80 1080.0 2700.0

*(Al) film lengths shown in feet)

165.38 Figure20-3.-Motion picture film conversion table. how much footage or time he would like. Figure 20-4 is an example of the newsfilm Whatever the requirement, double the length of narrative release that would accompany the film footage or time. For example, if a station asks made from the shooting script in figure 20-2. for a film one to one-and-a-half minutes, shoot Note that it is divided into two columns. The from two to three minute,: of film. left columr is devoted completely to the video, If your shots are well planned, it should be or visual section, and the right column to the easy to edit this down to the desired length. This audio or sound section of the release. may be done by a Journalist with film editing The first item above the video column tells experience, by the photo lab, or by the TV thetelevision crew that a 60-secondB & W station, depending on what the station requests. newsfilm will he the picture source. It also says that the film is a silent one (SIL) as opposed to sound-on-film(SOF).Alsonoticethatall SCRIPTING NEWSFILM information in the video column is capitalized. In the audio column the first item is NEWS- When writing the script to go with the film, CASTER (or it can be ANNCE. fa announcer), remember that it is the film i.iat tells the story. telling the director that both the newscaster's The narration should supplement it, not over- voice and the film should start together. Like power it. the video column, all items not to be read by the

337 341 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

60-Second 8 & W newsfi1m (SIL)

AUDIO

SCENE #1 NEWSCASTEt: MAIN GATE & VISITORS ARRIVING Armed Forces Day was celebrated

today at Great Lakes Naval Training

Center, and the rod carpet was

spread out for thirty thousand

visitors.Many guests arrived early

enough to see recruits parade on

Ross Field.

SCENE #2 (ON CUE).These navymen have just MEN MARCHING completed recruit training and will

soon report to their assignments at

advanced schools, or with ships of

the fleet, Many spectators at today's

parade have sons marching in the ranks.

SCENE 03 (ON CUE)Rear Admiral David Jones, ADMIRAL CH STAND Commandant, Ninth Naval District,

inspected graduates as they paraded

by the reviewing stand,

SCENE #4 (91 CUE) Visitors also saw special EXHIBITS exhibits showing various phases of

training navymen go through hero. A

panel of judges, made up of Wauksegan

citizens, chose the most outstanding

exhibit.

SCENE #5 (9N cm) Mayor Robert Johnston MAYOR & EXHIBIT awarded the top prize to the exhibit

from the Instructor Training 8attaol

at the Great Lakes Training Center.

vIMIMMIIIIMMIN111111.1111 ,1111Mail 185.39 Figuele-Scriptfora newsfilm rele4:se. 338 Chapter 20PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

newscaster (or announcer), but merely put there TELEVISION SPOT ANNOUNCEMENTS to help the director, are in upper case. In the audio column they are also underlined. In public affairs work, spot announcements When the newscaster/announcer finishes the are used primarily to promote special events first paragraph (notice that there are no indenta- such as ship visits, open houses, exhibits, and the tions), he sees: "(ON CUE)." This tells him to like,and to promote the Navy's recruiting look at his television monitor, located in the efforts. studio, and wait for the scene described in the The first step in preparing TV spots is to video column to appeal before continuing his check with your local station to find out what narration. This same procedure follows through- type of material it prefers and what timing best out the entire story. fitsits schedule. Spots vary from 10 to 60 The final item to take into consideration on seconds, but most stations prefer either 10 or 20 the audio side of the script is the copy line second public service spot announcements. count. As in radio, this is the method used by Therearethreetypes of visual material TV announcers and newscasters to time their normally used for spots: MOTION PICTURE copy. In a standard TV script, lines average five FILM, TITLE CARDS, and SLIDES. words in length, and read at an average pace of 28-32 lines per minute. When writing copy to accompany a general MOTION PICTURE FILM feature film, a line count is not as important as .with a straight news story or news feature. This Preparing film for a spot announcementre- is because with film much of the action needs no quires the same techniques as newsfilmcover- explaining. There is no need to have someone age: preparation of a shooting script, editing the talking all the time, if the film tells the story for film,and writing the narration. The audio itself. Another thing to remember when using portion employs the same writing technique as film in a news story is that you only insult the the radio spot. viewer when you say something like: "Here we see people entering the main gate of the Naval Training Center." The viewer can obviously see TITLE CARDS this for himself. We have been discussing planned news. There The plain title card has printed information may be unplanned events, such as accidents, on it and no pictorial material at all. This card fires, or rescues at sea where you have no script may be dark or light with contrasting letters. and must settle for whatever film is available. Plain cards show little imagination and should This often will be film made for record purposes usually be avoided. by photographers who shoot without a thought The title card that has both printed material of releasing the film to TV. When this happens, and some kind of pictorial information is the you must take what you can get, do as good an illustrated title card. The picture may be either editing job as possible, write a script and release art or photography. The lettering may be either the packageafter first making sure the footage on the card itself or on an overlay. is unclassified or releasable, of course. If you are A supertitlecardis one that has white fortunate, you might be able to supplement this lettering on a black background. This image is footage withfilm of the same subjectto "superimposed" or keyed over another picture establish the scene and show ships, area, equip- from another camera. Don't, however, super ment or personalities involved. If you do this, title over someone's face. Use only the lower make sure that the added footage goes with the third of the safe title area to avoid a "super- live coverage and that it is releasable. It's a good face." idea to let the station know what you have A title card must give the needed information added so there will not be any misunderstand- in the fewest possible words. People watch TV ing. This should also be noted in the script. to look at pictures, not to read long messages.

339 34 3 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

The purpose of thecardisto hold their time to look your material over, do any addi- attention and to reinforce the aural message by tional artworkthat may be necessary, and showing a picture, a time, a place and a date, or schedule the spots so that they will do you the similar essential information. The bulk of the most good. information goes in the audio which is written The station can tell you how many slides or like a radio spot. cards to prepare for each spot. Normally, only The title card illustration board should be one is used on a 10-second spot and two or three 11 X 14 inches with the essential information on a 20-second announcement. To provide the contained in a 6 X 8 inch area. station with flexiblematerial, prepare three slidesor cards and two scriptsone for a 20-second audio and one for 10 seconds. Desig- SLIDES nate one of the slides or cards for the shorter spot. All three can be used with the longer script Since title cards tie up a studio camera during if the station wants to do so. the busy moments of a station break, most Figure 20-5 shows the script for a 20-second stations prefer slides. spotwitha slide andtitlecard.Like the To make a slide, you start with a title card. newsfilm release, it is in two columns with video Exact dimensions ve very important, since you directions on the left and audio script on the must allow for the curvature of the tube and the right. tendency of many receivers tocutoff the outside edges of the picture. To make sure you come out with the right sizescanned area, SOUND-ON-FILMINTERVIEWS prepare the card so that the essential informa- tionlies within an area 6 X 8 inches. Then Many of the fundamentals of radio interview- photograph it so that the slide actually includes ing discussed in chapter 19 of this manual are an area 8 X 10 inches. This willproduce a slide equally valid for television. As in some of the with sufficient background area to ensure that other areas of TV production, filmed interviews your messagewill just about fill the screen have evolved from established radio practices. without cutting off the date or time of the The principal difference between the two is event. that the audience now becomes a viewer, as well Producing visualmaterial for TV spots is as a listener, forcing the writers and producersof fairlytricky work. If you have some artistic filmed interviews to be constantly aware of the abilityor know someone who hasand if you video material that will be presented. Interviews have access to a 35mm camera or can set up play an important part in today's television fare. your local photolabin do the work for They may be very brief, such as those used to youyou will increase eh,. ces of yourmaterial enhance a newscast, or they may be an entire being used by producing clean, professional- program. looking video material for your local stations. Sloppy title cards or slides, of course, will single you out as an amateur. AUDIO If you do not have the talent or facilities to produce cards or slides, you may be able to get The audio portion of a television interview is the station to produce them for you if your the same as a radio interview with one excep- event is sufficiently important. But you must tion. In television there may be some demonstra- show up at the station with good audio spots tion or some visual aid to which the interviewee and some ideas for video. Try to include some might make reference during the program. Ad- photos that could be mounted on the cards or lib interviews, as well as the completely written used as models for the studio artists. and rehearsed interviews, should be reserved for TV spots should be prepared about amonth very special cases. in advance and delivered to the station at least The semi ad-lib format, in which the inter- three weeks before the event. This gives them viewer is wellprepared and the interviewee gives 340 ; 344 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 20PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

AUDIO-VISUAL DiVISIM DIRECTORATE FORDEFENSE INFORMATION

20- Second Spot (SlideetTitle Card)

DO NOT USE AFTER 11:30 P.M. NOVINBER 291%

VIDEO AUDIO

SLIM N1 SOUND: APPROPRIATE XMAS )(US1Q (OVERSEAS SERVICEMEN y. OPENING XMAS PARCELS) MIC

If you plan to send a gift to a serviceman

overseas in time for Christmas you can

still do so and save on poetess.

Between now and November 30th you can

mail a parcel to a member of the Armed

Forces overseas at the ordinary postage

rate.

TITLE CARD#1 It will be air transported on a space (EMPHASIZING DEAD- LINE, WEIGHT AND available. basis frau the continental SIZE SPECIFICATIONS) United States to the serviceman -. provided

the parcel does not weigh over five pounds

and measure more than sixty inches in

length and girth combined.

106.40 Figure 2045,-Format for TV spot announcement with slid, and title card, 34 1345 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

"off-the-cuff" answers, should be the rule for Determine the points of interest which the Navy productions. An information objective is audience uld like to hear. Remember, you are the prime consideration when selecting subjects taking the place of the listener as you ask and topics. Although the semi ad-lib method of questions. interviewing is recommended for Navy purposes, theparticipants must project anairofin- Arrangematerialina logical sequence formality and relaxation in their conversation. which will permit an orderly development of the interview:

VIDEO I. Interviewee's title, name, field. 2. His position in field. The background set for an interview is an a. Learn about his personality to establish important consideration. An audience probably him as a person in the interview. will not concentrate for a long time on just a b. Why is he in this field and for how long. head and shoulders shot of the interviewee against a neutral background. If there is some- 3. What you are going to discuss. thing interesting for the viewers to watch, their a. Why the subject is important and news- attention can be more easily maintained. This worthy. does not mean that there should be so much b. Why he is an authority. activity in the background that it causes the c. Developmental questions such as facts, viewer to be distracted. The need is for some- opinion, and comments. thing to supplement the audio and maintain d. Peak or climax question (next to last). interest. Among the many approaches to main- e. Cushion question(but not an after- taining interest, the most common, but probably thought). the least desirable, is the set in which the two f. Summary. principals are seated side by side for an informal chat. There are, of course, other ways to structure Viewer interest can be heightenedifthe an interview. You could take a chronological intervieweeis shown at his place of duty or approach: past, present, future. Or you could engagedin someactivity.If the interview use a geographical approach: north, midwest, extends beyond two or three minutes, there is westcoast,and soforth. You could also generally a need for visual material such as maps, structure it according to sociological considera- photos, demonstrations, and other aids. tions of the audience: men, women, children, teenagers, young people, middle agers, or old- sters. INTERVIEW TECHNIQUES Other considerations to keep in mind when conducting filmed interviews intended for TV The success of the interview depends to a use are: great extent on the resourcefulness, skill, and ability of the interviewer and on the preparation he has made. Some of the considerations are: Look at the camera only when you want to talk directly to the audience, as at the beginning and end of the program, C all the background material possible on the interviewee and his topic before you first At all other times, look directly at the meet him. Search references, official records, subject. Ask him the questionsnot the camera, manuals, and so forth. Before the interview warn your guest not 6 termine the points of interest which the to be distracted by camera movements, time int( .iewee wants brought out. cues, and other engineering maneuvers.

346 Chapter 20PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

EDITING AND SPLICING 16MM FILM SPLICING

Although getting your material on filmis Before you can begin editing motion picture important, itis equally important to properly film, you must learn how to splice properly. edit and splice your end results.Just as a Splicing is the method used to piece together the diamond is enhanced by cutting and buffing, so matching elements of a filmed news story. Film isfilm. Both are enhanced by what is taken is no stronger than its weakest splice. If a splice away. breaks in the middle of the film, the remainder It takes good editing to bring life to motion of the story is generally lost. Utmost care must picture footage. The various shots are just so be taken to make the strongest, most secure much jumble until all the pieces of the filmare splices possible. The guidelines in figures 20-6A re-organizedandassembledinacoherent through 20.61-1 will enable you to make con- fashion. Editing takes up the slack in film by sistently solid splices. Of highest importance is a removing all unnecessary footage such as: false good hot splicer, fresh cement, care, and clean- starts, bad takes, duplicated action, bad shots, liness. and out of focus scenes. It is the film editor's job to create the best possible story from the available footage. This is most often the case EDITING when the shooting is done on a fast breaking news story, or when filmed without a shooting There are two basic methods of film editing. script. Successful film editing determines how These are CONTINUITY CUTTING and COMPI- well the film tells the story. LATION CUTTING (theterm cutting here In accordance with basic film editing prin- means to switch instantaneously from one scene ciples, the following equipment is necessary to to another. accomplish the task.

An editing table, with light colored enamel Continuity. Cutting or formica top, to reflect light through the film. Continuity cutting is used when the story- A pair of rewinds. telling is dependent upon matching consecutive scenes.It consists of matched cuts in which A table-top viewer. continuous actionflows from one shot to another. A splicerpreferably the "hot" type, for When action shown is not a portion of the quicker, stronger splices. previous scene, a transitional device known as a CUT-AWAY is used to change positions, move- A barrelor cardboard box, lined with ments, or characters, or to denote a lapse of cotton cloth, over which is suspended a pin or time. This eliminates a mismatch or jump-cut, clip rack to store the selected scenes before they which would cause the film to appear jerky or are spliced together. out of sequence. In a shot containing a portion of a previous Film cement, scissors, reels, cans, china scene, such as when cutting from a long shot to marking pencil, felt cloths, and cleaning fluid. a medium shot, positions, body movements, and looks should be matched as closely as possible. A 16-millimeter projector. A person's head should not suddenly change directions, nor should an arm be raised, then A table top sound "reader" if single system suddenly appear lowered. If this sequence must sound-on-film is to be edited. be used, then a cut-away should be inserted to

343 Zi4 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

165.41 165.43 Figure 20-6A.The portable hot splicer is a precisir Figure 20-6C.With the film clamped in place, raise the instrument used to splice 16mm motion entire right unit to the up position. The picture film. It is available through nor- other end of the film is then placed in mal supply channels. Always keep the the left unit, emulsion side up, on the splicerclean,oiled, and adjustedto pins along the guide. Allow at least one ensure a good splice. set of sprocket holes to protrude for splicing. Lower the left holding arm and lock the film into place.

pok_2_4449,4,21.

165.42 Figure 20-613.With both upper jaws open, place film to be spliced on the right lower jaw, ensur- 166.44 ing that guide pins engage in the sprocket Figure 20-CD.With the built-in carbon tipped scraper, holes and that the emulsion side of the scrape the film with a backward motion film is up. Bring down the upper right to remove all emulsion from spot where jaw and lock in position with vertical splice will be made. Film cement will not lever. adhere to the emulsion; therefore, it is very important that the emulsion be scraped cleanly from the left-hand ex. posed *etton el the film

348344 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 20PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

165.45 165.47 Figure 20-6E.After the emulsion has been removed, Figure 20-6G.After a few seconds, release pressure on leaving the clear film base exposed, use the left section by raising the locking the cement applicator to quickly apply a lever. This will allow air circulation and thin, even coat of cement to the scraped aid the cement to dry faster. After a few portion of the film. more seconds, unlock and raise the top plate of the right section. The splice should be complete and ready to be inspected and tested. All perforations

ANNEION and edges should match.

165.46 Figure 20.6F. Once the cementisapplied, quickly lower the right-hand levor and lock into position. This one maneuver trims off both excess film edges and applies pres 1(6.49 sure to weld the splice. Figure 20.6H. To test the film, grasp it with both hands and gently curve the film with the splice at the top of the curve. Check carefully to ensure that the complete spliceis bonded together. A good splice will be smooth and hard across its entirety and win ,form a continuant wove in the film. For further test, gently "pop" the film out to a straight line. A good splice will hold.Ifit separates, begin again with new frames. Never att3mpt to resplice at the point of an old broken splice. 345 349 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 eliminate the appearance of a jump-cut. This is arrives at the last moment to save the heroine not so important when cutting from a close-up (figure 20-7C). to a wide shot. In this instance, most of the Continuity cutting is the most commonly referencematerial was outside the frame of used method in editing films for news or feature vision, therefore does not need to be matched. releases. Cut-awaysoften called protection, reaction, insert, or cover shotsare thought of as secondary action, and do not need to be a part of the Compilation Cutting main attraction. They are usually a second to a second-and-a-half in duration. The second method of editing is COMPILA- If the main thought is centered arounda TION CUTTING. This is used in documentary parade, cut-aways might consist of close-up type tams of surveys,reports,history,or shots of the crowd; children intently watching, travelogues.Film segments are tied together eating candy, or clapping; adults with different through narration. The narrative explains the expressions of emotion, or carrying children on shots which may have little orno matching theirshouldersthingsthatareof human relation. These shots or scenes may be longor interest and related to the main story, but not short shots, or they may go from long shots to actually a primary part of it, as shown in figure close-ups, without any special transitions. 20-7A., A film editor who has a good selection of cut-aways can often make a marvelous story out Simple Sequence of an otherwise drab and common place event. TIttottliftway cancover a multitude of camera The beginning film editor needsa basis on operattrelibis and result in the formulation of which to build his film editing ability. This basic an exciting clip of news film. It can close-up the process is known as the SIMPLE SEQUENCE lengthy transition of a VIP arriving at an airport, and calls for three primary shots: and entering the limousine. Simply insert a cut-away of the welcoming party or other 1. An ESTABLISHING SHOT to relate the onlookers between the departure from the air- subject to its surrounding area and to establish craft and the entrance into the limousine. future cut-aways. Another method of denoting lapse of time is 2. A MEDIUM CLOSE-UP to tighten the the use of CUT-INS. The cut-in is a part of the picture area and center the main subject. primary action rather than secondary. To denote 3. A CLOSE-UP view of the subject or object a person climbing a long flight of stairs, establish of the story. the person as he begins to climb, then cut in a close-up of feet as they take the steps, then cut This is the basic formula used by most film back to the person at the top of the stairs. A editors.To begin the editing process,first person may walk a city block in just a few preview the entire film in the order it comes seconds by cutting into his feet walking, or his from the processor. With the story in mind, hand carrying a brief case (see figure 20-7 B). select the best shots in order of the basic Then there is the old standby of CROSS- sequence. Beginning with the establishing shot, CUTTING. This method employs the use of two select the segment, allowing sufficient time to different actions or events that will finally be establish action, cut the segment from the film, related (the "meanwhile back at the ranch" and hang it over the cutting basket. Proceed style, or the hero riding hard to save the life of through the film, taking out desired sections and the heroine who has been chained to a buzzsaw placing them in order on the clip rack. When the by the villian). The action would be cut back desired segments have been removed from the and forth between the desperate rider and the original film, tape the excess film together and sawasit comes dangerouslycloseto the place it on a separate reel for storage or future heroine's head, then showing the progress of reference. Then take your establishing shot and each, then finally relating them as the rider begin putting the final film together, splicing it 346 350 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 20PREPARING TELEVISION MATERIAL

347 351 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 tail to head of each segment, inserting necessary poorly exposed. Make sure the sound quality is cut-ins or cut-aways as you go. The final shot on clear and distinct. Distorted or low level audio the film might be a re-establishing shot, similar will destroy the realism of good film. Although to the original establishing shot. Once the film is it is often done, it is unwise to edit film footage splicedtogether,runthefilmthrougha to match a prewritten script. Edit with a story projector to check for flaws which may not have line or general script in mind, but match the been noticeable on the bench viewer. Make scenes to tell the complete storybeginning, necessary changes, corrections or additions, and middle, and end. the film is ready to be scripted. Incidental to the technique of editing, but very important to the final outcome of your production, are the mechanics of good film Sbund-On-Film handling. Handle your uncut film with great care. Wear white cotton gloves. Your film will Thus lar we have discussed the editing of getconsiderable handling and issubject to silent film. Sound-on-film editing is more restric- scratching. Itis an original product and can tive, but follows the same basic principles as never be replaced once it bccomes scratched and silent film. When editing sound film, the editor useless. must of necessity edit on sound cues. Therefore, The first step is to screen the uncut footage; he must keep in mind that 16mm film travels get the feel for how you want to cut the film. through a projector at the rate of 36 feet per Take notes on how you want the scenes to minute, or 24 frames per second. The sound appear on the screen. track is advanced on the 16mm film, 26 frames At the editing bench, look at your film again ahead of the corresponding picture frame. When on the viewer marking the beginning (head) and cutting a sound statement, leave at least 26 end (tail) of each scene you intend to use with a frames after the final frame of reference to china marking pencil. (China marking pencil include the sound statement. If two nonconsecu- marks can be easily removed with a soft cloth, tive statements are used, it is necessary to insert but once you cut the film, there is no turning a cut-away between them to avoid a jump-out. back.) Thesecut-aways might be a scene of the Go through the footage again. Remove the listening audience, an interviewer, a shot of a scenes as you have marked them. Place them in cameraman or reporter. It need be only as long correct order in an editing barrel, or tape each as a normal pause in speech, about a second or scene into a small roll. Each time you remove a second-and-a-half. Cut on the final word of the scene for uso, splice together the "out takes" statement, insert the cut-away over which the the scenes you don't intend to use. Always treat final words will fall, and begin the next state- the "out takes" with the same respect as you do ment. the "takes". Often, you will find that before When editing any film, only the best quality you are finished you will need a scene that is in scenes should be used. Avoid scenes that are the out take reel.

348

C. 352 CHAPTER 21

THE AMERICAN FORCES RADIO AND TELEVISION SERVICE

The field of broadcast journalism is open to (AFRTS). Management is no longer left solely to those Navy Journalists who have qualifying the Army but has been shifted to the Army, voices. Qualified JOs are trained as broadcast Navy, and Air Force, each managing its respect- specialist (NEC 3221) and serve with the Ameri- ive outlets. can Forces Radio and Televisionoutlets aboard Today, there are approximately 400 Ameri- ships and overseas (figure 21-1). can Forces Radio and Television stationslocated in twenty-five countries, Alaska, and eight U.S. territories, plus U.S. Navy ships at sea. Even HISTORY AND MISSION Antarctica, an international territory, has its AFRTS outlet. The estimated AFRTS audience Early in World War II, military authorities is 1,250,000 servicemen and women and more recognized the need for asingle source of than 20 million people in various host nations. information and entertainment for the millions The American Forces Radio and Television of American servicemen servingall over the Service's mission is to provide information and world. Besides the morale factor, there was an entertainment to U.S. military personnel and urgent necessity for an immediate means of their dependents overseas and aboard ships telling the sailor aboard ship and the fighting around the world. The policy for AFRT is set man inthefield what was going on inall forth by the Department of Defense and states theaters of war and at home. that the flow of news and information shall be Oniy one mediumradiocould fill the need, free and uncensored. AFRTS news broadcasts and it was from this need that the Armed Forces are based on commercial news sources.These Radio Service (AFRS) was born. Top name commercial sourceswire services and radio net- entertainers, writers, musicians, and production worksmay not be edited to change editorial people in and out of uniform contributed their content. time and talent to the new radio service. Record companiesandthebroadcastingnetworks donated their services, and in a very short time, ORGANIZATION servicemen were getting the best entertainment to be found anywhere in the worldall through American Forces Radio and Television is a AFRS. function of the Department of Defense, specifi- The end of the war still left the U.S. with a callyof theDirectoratefor the Office of sizeableworld-wide troop commitment, and Information for the Armed Forces (IAF), in the AFRS stayed on. office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Over the years since the first station went on Manpower. the air in 1942, AFRS has grown to become the The Office of Information for the Armed American Forces Radio and Television Service Forces provides the following services through

349 353 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

ryr

165.51 Figure 21-1.Navy broadcast specialists are assigned to AFRT outlets around *he world. its two field activities and the Defense Informa- programs are decommrc;alized and pressed :.)n tion School; programming, news and advisor/ transcriptions; television shows are also clecom- services, motion picture service, and training of mercialized and transferred to 16mm film for personnel to man the AFRTS outlets all over the distribution. world. Each week, AFRTS-LA mailstovarious American Forces Radio outlets 85 hours of recorded programs. Also shipped are records for AFRTS LOS ANGELES "DJ" programming, which become a part of the outlet's library. The oldest of the IAF field activities is the American Forces Television stations receive a American Forces Radio and Television Service, TV priority package of about 55 hours of films Los Angeles (AFRTS-LA), which provides a and kinescopes of stateside TV programs. Unlike balanced flow of stateside radio and TV enter- iddio units, TV units are sent to key stations tainment programming and musicradio pro- which play the programs and then ship the films gram transcriptions, 'TV films and kinescopes, to other stations on a regular :schedule. This is a music recordings of all types, and programming cost reducing measure. aids such as slides, sound effects, and production All of the programming material is provided musicfor overseas AFTRS outlets. The radio to AFRT outlets without charge, and is for use 350 354 Chapter 2THE AMERICAN FORCES RADIO AND TELEVISION SERVICE in conjunction with locally-produced programs vision News Service, a weekly shipthent of news to provide well balanced viewing. footage from the Services, including Pentagon news conferences and events. These short, newsreel type films are designed to be used by local AFR',VASHINGTON stations at their own option. Special documentary projects are also produced by AVPS, such as In order to improve the flow of news to U.S. 30-minute films on drug abuse, race relations, military forces world-wide, the Armed Forces and other specific subjects of interest to military News Bureau (AFNB) was established in January personnel. 1967. AFNB is now American Forces Radio and The AVPS facility has the in-house capability TelevisionServiceWashington(AFRTS-W). to film or videotape in studio sets or at remote However,thefunctionremainsthesame. locations. AFRTS-W is a 24-hour-a-day all-news operation. Newscasts on the hour and half-hour are relayed live from the Columbia Broadcasting System, Broadcast Industry Cooperation American Broadcasting Company, the Mutual Broadcasting System, and the National Broad- The mass-media information and entertain- casting Company. News comments, opinions, ment industry in the United States has given sports,andfeature news programs arealso AFRTS permission to rebroadcast materials to transmitted from these networks. Other program overseas facilities of the Department of Defense. sourcesincludeUnitedPressInternational The radio and television programs are furnished Audio, Westinghouse Broadcasting, universities at no cost to the U.S. Government. Through and colleges, public and private agencies such as continued and close contact, officials of the the Smithsonian Institution, and government Office of Information for the Armed Forces are agencies. able to obtain a steady supply of features and The AFRTS-W audio s..r,.'e is transmitted by radio/television series. shortwave, by landline and cable, and by satel- lite, The newscasts are decommercialized by use of a seven-second delay, live-loop. This system allows AFRTS engineers to preview commercial DEFENSE INFORMATION SCHOOL cues and announcements and to replace them with pre-recorded announcements on subjects of The sole training agency for American Forces interest to military personnel and their families Radio and Television personnel is the Defense without cutting a word of the news content. Information School (DINFOS) located at Fort AFRTS-Washington also provides a worldwide Benjamin Harrison, Indiana. The school trains teletype news service with continuous transmis- officer as well as enlisted broadcasters for all the sion to 30 major AFRTS networks or key Armed Forces (figure 21-2). stations, and a daily transmission of six 100-line The Radio and Television Department of news and sports summaries. DINFOS offers a six-week officer course and a ten-week enlistedcourse for the prospective military broadcasters. Students are taught all Audio Visual Production Service (AVPS) phases of radio and television station administration, operation of basic equipment, directing, The Washington-based AVPS operation pro- production, and announcing, Navy Journalists duces program material for release to AFRTS who successfully complete the broadcast course outlets. AVPSisresponsiblefor "Direction are designated Broadcast Specialist NEC-3221, (current year)," a 30-minute panel discussion Once designated NEC-3221, a JO is normally show based on the format of "Meet the Press" assigned either to one of the Navy operated or "Face the Nation." Its concept is to discuss radio or television outlets, to a jointly-manned "military news for the military professional." staff of an AFRT outlet, or to a shipboard radio AVPS also produces the Armed Forces Tele- or TV facility, 351 355 BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

iap" Funding of individual AFRT ouilets, however, is the responsibility of the service to which they areassigned. Navy AFRT stations, for instance, are equipped, maintained, and operated from the funds of the Navy alone, and they receive no money allocations from DOD or any AFRT field activity. Broadcasting equipment(control consoles, mikes,turntables,amplifiers,shortwavere- ceivers, studio tape recorders, TV cameras, light systems, switching systems, etc.) and consum- able supplies are paid for from the operating funds of either the local command controlling the AFRT outlet or a senior command exer- Mr 111111ft e cising budgeting and funding jurisdiction over the local command.

NAVY RADIO AND TELEVISION OUTLETS

American Forces Radio and Television outlets under Navy control ashore or at sea are normally operated as a branch of the command public affairs organization, as JOs are the only rating who receive formal training in Radio and Tele- visionbroadcasting.Stationengineeringis usually provided by the command's Interior Communications Electricians. As in the other services, AFRT outlets in the 165.50 Navy are administered on lines similar to those Figure 212.Prospectiv?broadcastspecialists are of commercial radio and television (see chapter trained in all phases of radio and television 18). However, Administration of the Navy out- production at the Defense Information letsaresubjecttospecialrequirements of School. military broadcasting. Instructions for such administrative matters as The Defense Information School, AFRTS-LA, maintenance of program and engineering logs, and AFRTS-W are all unified activities,:Ley are maintenance of film, tape, and record libraries staffed by broadcast specialists of all the Armed and the use of AFRT program materials are Forces as well as civilian personnel. outlined inthe American Forces Radio and TelevisionHandbook (DODInstruction 5120.20M). These publications are promulgated AFRT FUNDING as DOD directives and constitute the standard operating procedures for AFRT outlets all over Funding of the field activities of AFRTS the world. (AFRTS-LA and AFRTS-W) is provided by the In addition to DOD instructions, Navy broad- Department of Defense. The programming ma- casters are also guided by SECNAV Instructions terial provided to AFRT outlets by AFRTS, in the 1700 series, covering particular require- such as radio transcriptions, films, and the news ments for the administration of Navy-controlled and information services, are free of charge. AFRT outlets.

352 256 CHAPTER 22

COMMUNITY RELATIONS

U.S. Navy Public Affairs Regulationsdescribe unwelcomed. A friendly public can makeyour COMMUNITY RELATIONS as "the relationship skipper's job much easier and thereby help the between military and civilian communities. It command perform its mission. comprises all contacts, official and private, be- Good community relations will meana lot to tween the command, all of its personnel, and you. Afloat and ashore, they mean better recre- nearby communities." ationfacilities,better treatment from local As a Journalist, you will be an asset to any merchants, and a better break when itcomes to public affairs office when 7,,ou learn to think in housing. terms of good community relations. This chapter describes some of the planned Community relations is not a separate area of activities which the Navy uses to carry out its public affairs.It is more an approach to your community relations programs. entire public affairs program. The community relations approach is recognition of the fact that the country is made up of a lot of communities, THE COMMUNITY RELATIONS each containing most of the same elements that PROGRAM make up our Nation. This means that the state of the Navy's general relationship with the A community relations program is a planned American public is a composite of our many command function which evaluates public at- community relations throughout the country titudes,identifies the mission of a military and overseas. organization with the public interest, and ex- When a naval air station provides an air show ecutes a program of action to earn public under- for Armed Forces Day, when a group of Navy- standing and acceptance. The public affairs men march down Main Street on the Fourth of officer is usually responsible to the officer in July, when a Navyman addresses the Rotary command for the execution of this program. Club, or when a ship takes a group of civilian Your first association with a community rela- leaders for a short cruise, the Navy is building tions program may be largely behind the scene. community relations. The Navy also builds com- However, they have great value in promoting the munity relations through domestic action pro- success of the eventas well as developing you grams such as aiding citizens in time of floods or for more responsibility later. Soon there are other disasters, or helping peoples of foreign likely to be occasions when you will be working countries. more independently and sharing heavy respon- The smartly dressed, well mannered sr.ilor on sibilities for the success of a program. Even as a liberty affects the Navy's community relations beginner, it is important that you understand program just as much as the sloppy sailor. The the purposes and policies of community rela- effects, however, are opposite. tions and know how your duties, at whatever Good relations are important to the Navy be- level, are related to the broad objectives. A very cause the Navy can do its job a lot better with small error or oversight may spoil the effect of a public support. It is difficult to operate a Navy program that has taken extensive planning and installation in a community where the Navy is many hours of hard work. 353 357 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

INFLUENCE OF MORALE If you are stationed ashore, you will be assis- ON COMMUNITY RELATIONS ting the PAO in organizing and maintaining an information file on the community. Go to the The firstingredient of a successful com- public library, the chamber of commerce, and munity relations program is good morale among the morgues at the local newspapers. Find out the crew. The public will not be impressed with all you can about the community's history, any organization whose own members do not economics,politics,and naturalresources. believe in it or speak well of it. An unhappy Gather all the information you can on the com- crew can do more damage to an outfit's reputa- munity's principal industries, educational in- tion than can be repaired with a hundre 1 good stitutions, community organizations, and the news releases. A happy crew an do more than like. anything else to sell the Navy to the public. The PAO will probably want you to help As a JO you can do a lot to help promote build and maintain a card file of leaders in com- good morale. You are usually more up to date munity affairs. These include military leaders on current events at the command than most of (including Naval Reserve and retired officers), the crew. If you are connected with the ship or media representatives, State and local govern- station paper, you can see to it that it is a smart mentofficials,officers of veterans' groups, publication which passes the word, gives recog- prominent clergymen, eduvators, industrialists, nition when it is due, and boosts morale. You labor leaders, and leaders of service, business, can establish an active home town news pro- professional, and social clubs, gram. You can prevent the spread of rumors The Chamber of Commerce can be a big help by putting out straight dope and refraining from in compiling your list. So can local recruiters, repeatingrumorsyourself.None ofthese naval reservists, and others who deal frequently things is terribly big by itself, but together they with the public. have a real influence on morale, which we have it is a good idea to make up a 3 x 5 card for said is the one big essential of a good com- eazh prominent member of the community. The munity relations program. card should contain the person's full name, home address, telephone number, business af- filiation, address, and phone number. Also, you can make up another set of cards on each major COMPILING AND USING INFORMATION organization in the community, listing on each ABOUT COMMUNITY MATTERS the name of officers and other important members (each of whom has his own personal card in Planning a community relations program the first card file). An example of both types of starts with knowledge about two groups in- cards is shown in figure 22-1. volved: the NAVY and the COMMUNITY. Plan- These files are invaluable. There are numerous ning and directing the program, of course, occasions when the officer in command will done at a level some distance above yours, but want to invite civic leaders to an official func- you should understand what is involved so that tion, or to contact them when he needs to enlist you can help the PAO carry out the details. the support of community organizations in a You cannot be much of a success in the JO program. When this happens, he will turn to the rating unless you know your way around in your PAO for the VIP list, which must be complete command and in the Navy. You must know the and up to date. Navy's mission, your outfit's mission, and what You haveless need for this information makes both of them tick before you can explain aboard ship, but you raust still consider com- them to civilians. Likewise, you should know munity relations. When your ship puts into port, something about the community. You should you become as much a part of the Navy's com- a.o have a knowledge of naval history (see munity relations of fort as the sailors stationed at chapter 25). Did any important naval events oc- the local base. cur nearby? Are any naval heroes natives of the Most fleet and type commands maintain port area? information folders which are furnished to ships 354 358 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 22COMMUNITY RELATIONS

of a foreign port, and to enjoy themselves more ashore. SMITH, Dr. John P., M.D. 345 S. Main St. MA. 3.7892

Office: 730 N. Third St. INFORMING THE COMMUNITY DE. 6.3500 President, Klwanis Club Afloat, you inform the community by for- Post President, State Medical Association Colonel, Medical Corps, Army Reserve warding news releases about the ship well in

Wife, Mrs. Dolores E. Smith, is Program Chairman advance of a forthcoming visit. The releases of East High School PTA should tell as much as possible about the ship,

Guest cruise, USS ShangriLa, her history, her mission, the size of the crew, the purpose of the visit, the length of her stay, and specifics on whether or not she will be open to TYPICAL 3 x S FILE CARD ON LEADCo IN COMMUNITY AFFAIRS. NOTE THAT THE CARD SHOWS INDIVIDUAL'S the public for general visiting and guided tours. FULL NAME, HOME AND OFFICE ADDRESSES AND PHONE PERTINENT INFORMATION. A large ship visiting a port for the first time or NUMBERS, AND OTHER putting into a port not often visited by the Navy, should prepare a complete media informa- NAVY LEAGUE OF THE UNITED STATES tion kit (see chapter 3) containing photos of the Inland City Council ship, the commanding officer and the executive President:Robert T. Carlson officer,a history of the ship, biographies of 1st VP: Peter Garvey 2nd VP:, Charles K. Van Horne various officers, a general release on the visit, Secretory:Michael Gates Treasurer:Bernard B. Brown and feature stories as appropriate. Try to write Directors:Rev. C. L. Sylver..r features on local men serving aboard as these are Dr. Joseph J. Bratauskas RADM H. E. Loomis, USN (Rat.) especially welcomed by media in the port. J. Randolph Hein: The releases and information kits normally are Luncheon, third Tuesday of each month (except August), sent well in advance to the commandant of the usually at Lumpini's Village Inn. 50 members naval district in which the port is located for release to local media. If the port is overseas, TYPICAL 3 x 5 FILE CARD ON MAJOR ORGANIZATIONS IN THE COMMUNITY. EACH INDIVIDUAL LISTED ON THIS CARD they are sent to whatever U.S. authority can SHOULD BE THE SUBJECT OF ANOTHER CARD IN THE VIP best make the release, in accordance with cur- FILE ON COMMUriTY LEADERS. rent instructions in Public Affairs Regulations. This may be a Navy command in the area, the 165.179 U.S. Nqvy Attache in the capital of the foreign Figure 22-1.Community relations files contain country, and Army or Air Force command, or pertinent information on local leaders and organizations. an office of the U.S. Information Agency. In- formation for release to a non-English speaking port should be airmailed well in advance to before planned visits. These folders contain in- permit translation of your material. There is formation on harbor facilities, supplies, recre- more on ship visits later in this chapter. ation, opportunities for sight-seeing, and other Ashore, informing the community means subjects of interest. Pertinent information often planned coverage to tell the story of your base, is extracted from these folders and printed in not only to the 'large metropolitan dailies, TV, the Plan of the Day. You can help pass the word and radio stations, which may serve the area, but by learning as much as possible about every new also to media in the smaller surrounding comport your ship visits and writing up this informa- munities. Planned coverage requires that you tion in the ship's paper. Most ships visiting, for:: look around for good stories and review those eign ports also publish Port-of-Call pamphlets already in your files to make sure that you are for the crew's information. This information releasing a complete, accurate, and interesting enables the crew to understand the inhabitants account of the station's activities.

355 359 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

TYPES OF COMMUNITY movements, or maneuvers conducted as a part of RELATIONS PROGRAMS military training, even though incidentally observed by the general public, are not considered There are several types of community rela- special events. tions programs conducted by the Navy at all Special events are an important part of com- levels of command, both in the United States munity relations. A well-organized special event, and overseas. Here are the major activities, each planned to accomplish a specific purpose and of ',hich can be broken down into many sub- carried out smartly, can really present your out- programs: fit's story to the community. In addition to contii.:iuting to community Liaison and cooperation with associations relations, special events a:so increase local media and organizations and their local affiliates at all coverage of Navyactivities.Creating news- levels. worthy situations or taking advantage of existing situations will enable you to further good com- Cooperation with Government officials and munity relations and to effect liaison with media community leaders. representatives. It is not possible to list all the things that can People-to-people and humanitarian acts. be included in special events. Parades, band con- certs,shipvisits,air shows, commissioning Encouragement of Navy personnel and ceremonies, guest cruises, athletic events, ex- their dependents to participate in activities of hibits, speeches, open houses, fairs, art shows, local schools; churches; fraternal, social, and and celebrations of Navy anniversaries, national civic organizations; sports and recreation pro- holidays, and military observances are just a few grams; and other aspects of community life to of them. The field is so varied, and so wide the extent feasible and appropriate, regardless of open, that there is almost no limit to what you where they are located. can do. Although running these events is not your Participation in and organization of inter jobat least not at this stage of the game. You national,national,regional,State, and local should know the Navy's policy on special events special events. and something about exhibits, open houses, and the guest cruise program. A complete discussion on the Navy's overall community ielations programs is contained in Public Affairs Regulations. We will cover only a SPECIAL EVENTS POLICY part of one large area with which you will come in contact and be expected to assist.SPECIAL The Navy's policy regarding special events is EVENTS. spelled out in detail in Navy Public Affairs Reg- ulations.Broadly speaking,itisthe Navy's policy to stage special events when appropriate SPECIAL EVENTS and to take part in community events when this can be done economically so that community Special Events can be described as a variety of relations or recruiting will benefit. The regula- programs staged both in the civil domain and tions set forth specific conditions for partic- aboard ship or station, to SHOW the Navy to the ipation in various types of events. public rather than just TELLING them about it. Navy Public Affairs Regulations provides an They include the type of event in which the excellent Special Events Check List which you Navy goes out to' find the public. Of course will want to consult in the course of your plan- these events are not connected with the military ning. In addition to preventing slip-ups due to flinctioning of the Navy and are intended pri- overlooked details, it may give you some ideas marilyfor nonmilitaryaudiences. Exercises, that will enrich and improve your overall event.

356 i360 Chapter 22COMMUNITY RELATIONS

EXHIBITS MOBILE MODEL.This is a collection of models representing Navy equipment, or a full One of the simpler types of special events and or large-scale model, suitable forconversion to a one you may be called upon to set upwith a parade float. minimum of supervision,isthe exhibit. An exhibit, is more than just a collection of gear STATIC INDOOR DISPLAY.--This exhibit stuffed into a window or booth. It is a carefully is designed usually for viewing from the front planned arrangement of objects designed to tell and both sides. The exhibits, shipped in reusable a story or convey a message. crates, average eight feet in height, eight to ten Navy exhibits are visual displays designed to feet in length, and about four feet deep when enhance the civilian community's understanding assembled for public view. of the Navy. They are excellent vehicles to carry the Navy story to inland areas where naval ships ISLAND DISPLAY.The island display is cannot visit. They are used for the following similar to the static display, can be viewed from purposes only: all four sides.

To inform the public of the Navy's mission CRATE DISPLAY.An exhibit con- and operations. structed inside its own carrier and requiring only the opening of the front cover for viewing. To disseminate technical and scientific information. PANEL DISPLAY.An exhibitusually constructed of four-by-eight-foot panels, either To assist recruiting of Navy military perfor wall presentation or for use with some form sonnel and civilian employees. of simple framework. An exhibit should tell a story or convey a message. It should be interesting andthe viewer should receive your message. You should plan SETTING UP EXHIBITS your exhibit carefully so thatit conveys your story accurately. The six types of exhibits describedabove are avlilable in various categories at the NavyEx- hibit Center in Washington, D.C. Mostof them TYPES OF EXHIBITS are on a loan basisonly. The procedures for requesting them are outlined in Public Affairs Navy exhibits consist of representations or Regulations. collections of navy equipment, including items However, you might be called upon to assist of equipment, models, devices, and information in setting up a simple window exhibitwhich and orientation material placed forpublic in- would be locally constructed. Suppose you are formation purposes before audiences at con- assigned the job of rigging up a display forthe ventions, conferences, seminars, demonstrations, main window of a local department store.How fairs, or similar events (figure 22-2). Alsoin- would you go about it? cluded are general purpose displays in public The first step, of course, is to determinewhat buildings or public locations. you hope to accomplish. Forexample, suppose Types of exhibits include: you are plugging an ArmedForces Day open house that will be held at the Naval AirStation MOBILE WALK-THROUGH.A display coming up in about a month. Youphone the permitting viewers to walk through its elements, store and ask for the head of thewindow display usuallyenclosedin a van or trailer. Many department. If he is willing to use your display, displays use sound systems; some are even you ask whether or not you can comedown and equipped with heating andairconditioning look the window space over before decidinghow units. to fill it. 357 r 361 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

THEFLEET BALLISTICMISSILE

165.181 Figure 22-2.An exhibit is a carefully planned arrangement of objects designedto tell a story or convey a message.

You start by noting the exact dimensions of explanatorysigns willnot get any message the window, the location of electric outlets, and across. The professional display people may not the size of the access doors. This last itemmay know very much about the Navy, but, since they be the most important of all. You would look are usually graduates of commercial designing pretty foolish trying to get an eight-foot object schools, they are clever when it comes to theuse through a three-foot door. of color and motion to attract attention. They You are reminded by the store's display can assist you on this. people that the most important qualities of good A window display is seen by people walking display are unity and simplicity. Thatmeans you by on the street. You watch a few people walk are going to try to get only one message across by and note thatittakes them about five and that you are going to do itas simply as seconds to pass the window. Even allowing for possible. A display with two or three themes, the fact that they can see into the windowa several competing points of interest, anda lot of short distance before they reach it, you figure 358

1 1362 Chapter 22COMMUNITY RELATIONS that you've got about 10 seconds in which to tain a great deal of detailed information and attract their attention and get your main point usually have no one distinguishing feature to across. attract attention; or any heavy equipment or If the exhibit is a good one, people may stop machinery requiring lifting equipment to inst,,!: and look for a minute or two. But you 11..lve to and special power to operate. get something in there that will serve the pur- Since the Blue Angles (figure 22-3) are going pose of a headline and the lead of a story to give a precision flying demonstration during something that will attract their attention and the open house, you get an idea. You borrow a tell them enough instantly to get your message flight suit, complete with helmet and oxygen across to the people who just walk by. mask. You acquire a mannequin and cress it Now, let's go back to the first step: deciding in the flying suit and stand him on one side of what you want to accomplish. The purpose of the window, looking toward the far side. Over your exhibit is to get people to come to the there you rig four aircraft models of the type open house. A secondary purpose is to get a currently flown by the Blue Angels. You sus- Navy message across to the people who will see pend them with nearly invisible wire in close the exhibit, but will not come out to the base. formation, flying up and out toward the back One approach would be to put a piece of corner. You turn the mannequin's head sothat equipment in the window to attract attention he is looking toward them. and a sign telling the viewer that your base will Now you have some attention getters,al- be open to the public on Armed Forces Day, though you have no very clear message and Saturday, May 20, from 0900 to 1700. This is nothing in the window says "Navy" in big blue r of a bad plan if you remember twothings. letters. You also have no motion and little color. First, the equipment has to be an eyccatcher For motion, you can attach a colored paper that will tell part of the story itself. Second, the streamer to the tail of each plane and put a small sign has to be simple and attractive. and written electric fan up in the corner, out of sight and in civilian terminology. dead ahead of the planes. When it is turned on, If the equipment is a World War II .50 caliber the streamers fly out behind the aircraft, much machine gun, it will NOT convey your message. as the actual planes leave vapor trails of colored What does a machine gun have to do with water. inviting the public out to see the latest in naval For a message, you get the base sign shop or aviation?Ifitis a complicatedgadget or graphic arts section to make up a postertoplace something that needs a lot of explanation, it below the planes. The viewer's eyes will natu- probably will not convey any message atall. rally follow the line of the dummy's vision and What you need is a simple item that anyone can the streamers of the aircraft, so just below them recognize ata glance, something that means is a good place for the message. NAVAL AVIATIONnot justaviation,but Make it a simple sign, certainly nothing longer something that is modern, and yet sufficiently than "See the Navy's Blue Angels at the Naval unusual to attract the public's attention. It also Air Station open house Saturaday, May 20, from has to be something that is readily available, 9 to 5. Precision flying demonstrations at 10:30 portable, and something you can get without and 2:30." Next to the mannequin you put a spending money or interfering with operations small stand-up Armed Forces Day poster. This and training at the base. explains the occasion without cluttering up your This category includes shin or aircraft models, big sign with a lot of details. articles of uniform and flightgear, training You are just about finished. For a background devices, models and mock-ups of missiles, and a you use a blue drape. The storeprobably has few items of real !quipment. In this simple one. If not, you probab1; can find somebunting window display, it most emphatically does not at the Naval Air Station. include such items as an operating radar set, The space between the dummy and the air- which would be difficult and expensive toin- craft still looks a little empty. How can you fix stall; Loran, which requires considerable expla- the window without cluttering it up and dis- nation; ammunition display boards,which con- tracting the viewer from the main message? Try 359 363 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

JOURNALiST 3 & 2

185.182 Figure 22-3. -An aerial demonstration uy the Blue Angels isone of the Navy's most spectacular special events. out a set of Navy wings, cut out of plywood or for the experts, such as the U.S. Navy-Marine posterboard and mounted on the back curtain. Corps Exhibit Center mentioned earlier in this Now put a drapery of a lighter color at each end discussion.Ittakes time, special talent, and of the window so that the blue aircraft models usually considerable money. You probably will won't be lostagainst the background. Red, not have an opportunity to work much with white, or gold will do. major exhibits, but you should visit Navy and Of course, you wouldn't put the display to- commercial exhibits wherever you can. Youcan gether by adding one thing, going outside to learn a lot about how to tell a story visually by look in the window, and then deciding what to visiting fairs, science museums, and other places do next. You should plan the whole thing on where good exhibits are on display. paper, making a rough sketch of the design and A thought to keep, in mind at shore commands assembling your materials beforehand. Then, with sufficient space to accommodate them isa when itis time to put the display up, you permanent display or exhibit which visitors to merely go down to the store with your gear, the command can see on a continuing basis. This follow the plans, and do the job with a min- might be placed in a high-traffic area near the imum of changing things around. entrance, or in a 'separate building with other Construction of complicated exhibits is a job exhits which go to make up a display-museum.

360 364 Chapter 22COMMUNITY RELATIONS

OPEN HOUSE, VISITS TO NAVAL hand in the planning, and the public affairs ACTIVITIES, AND SHIP VISITS office will very likely be the project officer in charge of the details. Senior JO's often are given OPEN HOUSE key responsibilities, and you also Will play an important part. A special event that has a very important Deciding what areaswill be open to the place in a community relations program is the public, preparing displays to tell the story of the ship or station OPEN HOUSE. An open house is ship or station, establishing routes for the vis- an occasion when a ship or station acts as host itors to follow, providing guides who are able to to the general public (figure 22-e!). answer questions accurately and courteously, An open house is actually one huge exhibit, preparing welcome aboard brochures, and such often with other special events thrown in. Just important details as parking, refreshments, heri as in a window display, you should begin by facilities, and security all figure into the plan- deciding the purpose of the event. The details ning of an open house. You will certainly be are then planned to accomplish that purpose. involved in preparing advance publicity such as Planning and carrying out an open house, of news stories,photo releases, spot announce- course, are all hands operations. The captain or ments, and in spot news coverage of the event executive officer probably will take a direct itself.

or,

:111v.7419* 1.

At f ' og 4""

31t WV.'"

165.183 Figure 224.An open house is one huge exhibit with other special events included. Open houses afford ships and stations an opportunity to host the general public. 361 36 5 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

CASUAL VISITS AND TOURS in advance and coordinated with the American "Country Team" at the Embassy. While you as a In addition to the open house, also classified Journalist will not be directly concerned with as GENERAL VISITS, there are two other types doing this, you should know its importance and of visits to naval activities: let it assist you when determining or working on CASUAL VISITS are visits to ships or stations visit planning items. by individuals or specific groups, distinct from the general public. Details and procedures con- The crew must be made aware of local tra- cerning these visits are a matter of command ditions and any tourist attractions, particularly discretion. significant background for visits to foreign ports. TOURSare occasions when a ship or station Here is where the importance of a Port of Call is host to a specific group on a scheduled date. brochure figures in. Some of the larger shore commands also regularly schedule one, or more sightseeing-type tours Welcome Aboard brochures (where fea- daily during seasons when many vacationers ask sible, in native tongues of non-English speaking to visit the command. foreign ports) should be prepared to hand out to visitors.Assistanceinhaving your brochure translated into the local language can usually be .PREPARING FOR SHIP VISITS arranged with the U.S. Information Service in the area to be visited. Be sure to work this out Requests for ship visits generally originate sufficientlyinadvance to insurethat your with civic groups desiring Navy participation in brochures will be ready on time. Help with signs local events. Often, Members of Congress en- to be placed on ships machinery can also be ob- dorse these requests, advising the Navy of their tained in this manner. interest in a particular event. Some examples are the Fleet's annual participation in the Portland, Arranging media interviews with members Oregon Rose Festival; the Seattle, Washington of the ship's company who have interest' .g Seafair; the Mardi Gras; the Black Ship Festival backgrounds may yield dividends in establishing in Japan; and the Coral Sea Celebration in good relations with port communities. Australia. In preparation for such visits there are several Shipboard tours are arranged and set up as important things to be done, among which are: feasible.. Signs should be prepared and printed (bi-lingualinforeignports). An adequate The ship's crew is briefed, usually by the number of selected and trained guides not only CO, XO, or through the ship's newspaper, on the will make visits more meaningful to visitors, but significance of the visit. will help their passage through the ship's facilities.For visitstoforeignports,find out All hands are reminded that they are rep- whether any of the ship's company can speak resentatives of the entire Navy, an attitude par- the foreign language concerned. Those who can ticularly importantinareas normally having should be used as hosts or tour guides whenever limited contact with the Navy. possible. Visiting hours and tours are generally limited by the crew's meal hours and daily In visits to a foreign country, coordination routine. with the American Embassy (Attache, USIS) on In addition to general visiting, where members all public affairs matters is a vital part of in- of the public are invited during specified hours, suring that our national foreign policy objectives special group visits of various types (children, are met and aided by the visit, and that a "one- orphans, Navy League, scouts, professional or- voice" system exist regarding the purpose and ganizations,etc.) should also be considered. objectives of the visit. In this regard, good-will Overseas,itis especially valuable to use the projects,PROJECT HANDCLASPdeliveries, special group visit technique with high school and other activities should be mapped out well and university level students, professional groups 362 366 Chapter 22COMMUNITY RELATIONS and others as indicated and dictated by the area specific cruise, the district assistant for public concerned. affairs pulls out his list of nominees and, with Public Affairs Regulations contains the the commandant's approval, selects the ones to general rules and policy governing open house, be invited. visits to naval activities, and ship visits. PA Regs contains a number of helpful suggestions for making the guests feelat home aboard ship and for ensuring that they seem as GUEST CRUISES much "Navy" as can be shown them and meet the crew. It is an especially good idea to have The guest cruise programisdescribed in them eat at least one meal in the general mess Public Affairs Regulations. The policy and gen- and meet any crew members who may be from eral regulations governing these cruises are long their home towns. and detailed and they are subject to frequent A special type of guest cruise is the depen- changes. Therefore, you will have to break out dents' cruise, a one-day operation on which the PA Regs for a complete study of current regula- wives, parents, children, and other guests of the tions for this important community relations crew are shown what life at sea is really like program. (figure 22-5). Dependents' cruises, of course, You must be especially familiar with the pose a lot of special problems, such as providing administrative guidance concerning the various adequate head and rest facilities, special safety types of guest cruises. This will enable you to precautions, and an organized program to keep assist the public affairs officer in preparing the the visitors occupied without wearing them out. necessary forms, requests, reports and other cor- These cruises pay tremendous dividends, such as respondence relatedtoaparticular type of in helping a wife understand why her Navy cruise. These are several different cruise cate- husband cannot spend all his time in port and gories, such as: Secretary of the Navy Guest what he does with his time while he is at sea. Cruise Program, Public Affairs; Media Embarka- Anything that builds family understanding of a tion; Professional, Civic, and Church Groups; Navyman's job is good for his morale and bene- Youth Organizations; and Dependents' Cruises. fits the Navy. Information on all of this is covered in PA Regs. A guest cruise is really an open house underway for carefully selected guests. The Navy SPECIAL PROGRAMS would like to have all American taxpayers visit its ships and go to sea to witness fleet opera- A varietyof publicservice organizations tions. Since this is obviously impossible, we do sponsor and direct programs of interest to the the next best thing by invitin" specially selected Navy which merit attention a:gd support. You civilianspeople who have a wide acquaintance and your public affairs officer will find these within their communities and who can help tell organizations useful in Navy public affairs activ- the Navy's storyto take part in regularly sched- ities, and will want them in your community uled operations, usually of only a few days relations programs. duration. The NAVY LEAGUE is a non-partisan, civil This is where your VIP file comes in. Each organization supporting all elements of strong navaldistrict commandant and certain other national defense. It offers cooperation and as- commanders maintain lists of people who have sistance in all matters tending to enhance the been carefully selected to receive invitations for Navy's efficiency. guest cruises. In most cases, these lists are made The Navy League sponsors: to a large extent from nominations submitted by commanding officers of activities within the The Navy League Cadet Corps. district. When CHINFO, who controls quotas for most cruises (other than local oneday cruises Advisory Councils on Navy Affairs. such as for dependents), informs a commandant that he can extend 10 to 15 invitations for a The U.S. Naval Sea Cadet Corps.

; .363367 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

165.218 Figure 22-5.The dependent's cruise is a special type of guest cruise on which dependent's and other guests get to see what life at sea is really like.

The Shipmate program. of command community relations. The objectives of the naval program of co- The Marine Corps Affairs Committee. operation with the Boy Scouts of America are:

Navy Day. To familiarize the nation's youth with the objectives, customs and traditions of the Navy A publications program. and Marine Corps.

The Navy League awards. To encourage voluntary participation by naval personnel in programs sponsored by the The BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA are among Boy Scouts of America. those youth organizations which are entitled to Navy cooperation beyond that extended other Indealing with AMATEUR SCIENTIFIC individuals and groups during the normal course GROUPS, commanding officers usually stress 364 368 Chapter 22COMMUNITY RELATIONS the importance of formal basic scientific training Navy wives, wives groups, and service organiza- to provide leadership for future technological tions. The Wifeline Association produces several progress. The technologicalaspects,require- publications of interest to Navy wives including ments, and accomplishments of the Navy should Sealegs, a handbook for the Navy Wife, and a also be stressed. series of guideline publications covering such The Na"v's cooperation in the AEROSPACE topics as social hints for the enlisted wife and EDUCAT.)N WORKSHOP gives the Navy a guides for wives of executive and commanding valuable opportunity to promote and advance officers. nublic interestinnaval aviation,as well as The FLEET RESERVE ASSOCIATION is a .:thering modern education. The Aerospace nonprofit, nonpartisan,nonsectarianservice Education Workshop Program is designed by organization of career enlisted men (active duty, tea:her-traininginstitutestogiveuniversity, Fleet Reserve, and retired) of the United States colhge, and secondary school educators a com- Navy and Marine Corps. The Association is comprehensive background in the field of aviation. posed of regional districts throughout the world. The DEFENSE ADVISORY COMMITTEE About 60 percent of its members are on active ON WOMEN IN THE SERVICES (DACOWITS) duty. is composed of nationally prominent women in The objectives of the Association are: government, business, industry, and education. it advises the Secretary of Defense on matters To take care of members and their families concerning women in the Services. DACOWITS who are in urgent need. members also conduct an information program about Service women's activities and related To assist in recruiting for the Naval Service. special events, such as Armed Forces Day and Navy Day. To meet socially and to keep informed on The ACADEMY OF MODEL AERO- United States naval matters. NAUTICS, a non-commerical organization,is the official governing body for model airplane The primary service offered to the member- activities in the United States. Upon request, the ship as a whole is direct representation in discus- AMA provides Navy shore commands with the sion of legislation concerning military personnel names of volunteers in the command area willing which is being considered by the United States to assist with model-airplane activities. A prop- Congress. The Association has accredited lobby- erlypublicized odel-airplane meet attracts ists who appear before United States Congres- thousands or visitors aboard a navy activity, sional committees. builds good will, and aids Navy recruiting. The NAVAL ENLISTED RESERVE ASSO- The NAVY WIVES CLUBS OF AMERICA, CIATION promotes career service in the U.S. INC., is 'a national organization composed of a Naval Reserve and the U.S. Marine Corps Re- board of national officers, five regional vice- serve. The active members of the Association are presidents, and local clubs at many naval activ- enlisted Navy and Marine Corps Reservisits on ities throughout the continental United States active or inactive duty or retired. and overseas. Membership in NWCA is composed The NAVY RESERVE ASSOCIATION is chiefly of wives of enlisted men serving in the composed of officers of the Navy and Naval Navy, Marine Corps, Coast Guard, and the Reserve. Their activities are coordinated by Active Re, me units of these services; wives of Naval District preside itts. enlisted men who have been honorably dis- The NAVY-MARINE CORPS COUNCIL is charged with pay or retired, or who have been composed of nine national Navy-Marine Corps transferred into the Fleet Reserve upon com- oriented organizations: pletion of active duty, and widows of enlisted men in these services. The NAVY WIFELINECSOCIATION pro- Fleet Reserve Associatio.i vides a point of contact alai communications between the Department of the Navy and all Marine Corps League

365 369 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Marine Corps Reserve Officers Association objectives in support of the Navy-Marine Corps Team. Naval Enlisted Reserve Association In your first year or two as a JO, you probably will spend more of your time workingon Navy League of the United States internal media such as ship and station newspapers and geneial Navy news releases than on Navy Mothers' Clubs of America the details of your command's community relations program. A knowledge of the principles of Navy Wives' Clubs of America,, Inc. community relations is important at every level of the journalist rating, however. If you are com- Women Marines Association munity relatiors conscious, you will do a better job ir. every phase of your work. Remember, community relations are important to the Navy The mission of the Council is to further the and to your .command, and a healthy relation- collective efforts of the several organizations in ship with civilian communities will benefit every areas where they have common interests and man and woman in the Navy.

366 371) CHAPTER 23 HOME TOWN NEWS

RECOGNITION. To be recognized as being provided them. Most of them do use it, however, worthy of praise, appreciation, and approval isa as indicated by surveys conducted by FHTNC. basic need and desire of all human beings. They More than 12,300 newspapers, radio, and also long for that feeling of being a valued part television stations have requested home town of a successful whole. Fulfilling these needs and news material from FHTNC. While there may be desires, from a psychological viewpoint, is the only one newspaper in a man's home town, or purpose of the "Hometowner." none at all, often there are newspapers in other Hometowners are those tape-recorded inter- nearby communities that also cover his home views and newspaper articles which heralda town and they too receive releases on him. home town serviceman's accomplishments or Radro and television stations in the area that status in his branch of service such as those have requested such material also receive re- shown in figure 23-1. leases. On an average about six releases are made on each name submitted to the Center. Home town news stories are sent to the media FHTNC that have requested releases for the communities listed in the "Parents' Address," and "Wife's The sea service activity responsible for edit- addressbeforemarriage,"blocksofthe ing, reproducing, and disseminating home town authorized FHTNC form (NAVSO 5724/1) as news stories to media in the United States, its shown in figure 23-2. Occasionally, when there territories and possessions, isthe Fleet Home isno address for theindividual's or wife's Town News Center at the Naval Base, Great parents, the address in the permanent home of Lakes, Illinois. The Center, created in 1945, falls record is used. directly under CHINFO and serves the Navy, Participation in the home town news program Marine Corps, and Coast Guard. isnotmandatory,however,itshouldbe Fleet Home Town News Center (FHTNC) presented in a positive manner when you assist centralizes the processing and distribution of personnel infilling out the NAVSO 5724/1. hometown news material.It standardizes the While some personnel may not be interested in form of material distributed and the methods of home town publicity, their parents, wives, rela- distribution according to the desires of news tives, and friends almost certainly are. media. Fleet Home Town News Center services are provided to all interested media on an equal basis, PROCESSING FHTNC MATERIAL As the news arrives at the center from JO's and other personnel all over the world, itis Perhaps one of your first jobs after reporting evaluated for newsworthiness, edited, processed, to a ship or station as a JO will consist of and distributed to "client"newspapers, radio submitting material to Fleet Home Town NEWS stations, and special interest publications. The Center. Your office may already have a sound clients do not pay for this service norare they FHTNC program, or it may be up to you to obligatedinany way tousethe material establish one. 367 371 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Duncan Geis Navy Senior Chief Petty 001. cer HARRY K. DRIVER, son of Indoctrinated Mrs. D. E. Driver of Rt. 2, and Price Peak' Named husband of the former Miss Syl- Midshipman Marshall H. via BNB of Rt. 5, both of Mocks- Duncan, son of Mr, and Mrs. vine, jias returned to his home. for Lincoln Countian MarshallR. Duncan of115 port of Charleston. S. C. aboard Willow Road, has completed the guided missile frigate USS Chief Personnelnian Floyd W. 10 ,,weekrofindoctrination Wainwright to complete a 49,394 training atthe Naval Acad. Price, son of the late Mrand mile. 220 day "round the world Mrs. Byard Price. of Route7, emy, Annapolis, Md. anise." Fayetteville, now has a mountain Along with 1,250 other new While on the cruise he visited peak on the continent of Antarc. midshipman, Duncan attended ports in North, South and Central Ilea named after hint. lectures, spent hours on the America, Asia, Africa and par. The DepartmentofInterim selectedChief Petty drillfield, participated in ticipated in two operational pert. Officer and Price's name for the newly dis p h y si c alconditioning ads in the Gulf of Tonkin off the covered mountain peak. now call. sports activities, and came to coast of Vietnam. ed "Price Peak . know the Naval Academy a A 1951 graduate ofFlintville High School,ChiefPrice . isa little better. IN WESTERN PACIFIC The academywillbehis Navy veteran of 12 years service. home for the next four years Navy PO 2,C. Fred Wilcox The naming at the peak inhis Jr. is now serving aboard the honor came because he has served until graduation and commis. with the Mr Development Squard stoning send him out into the aircraft carrier USS Ticonde ron (VX6) at the Naval Mr Stat. active regular Navy. nga In the Western Pacific. He ion at Quonset Point. R.I..for A Midshipman Duncan is a 19 Is the son of Mr. and Mrs. the past seven years. 71 graduate of North Syracuse Fred Wilcox of IOW East Har- The VX6 Is the Navy's Mitotic CHIEF FLOYD W. PRICE bor Drive. support Squardron which flies sup Central High School. plies men and equipment to and onthefrozencontinent.Thewith thesquadronfor flve squadron Is the only one Its typemonth period. during the Antarc. ..MM pruvidIng aerial support for theticsummer, providingsupport scientific endeavors of the U. S.for the scientists there. He returns Antarctic Research Program.to Quonset Point for seven months which isattempting to uncoverbefore going back to the "Ice." more information and date about Retort. enlisting in the Navy In INews Of OurServicemen the relatively unknown continent.January 1955, Chief Price attended ChiefPricedeploysannuallyBerry College In Rome, Gs.

NavyLieutenant(junior Lt. (j George It Root .11..,Seaman Roberto grade) Timothy , D.Kelly, on of Lt. Col. and Mrs. G. R. soli of Mr. and Mrs. Henry Roct of 1451 Parkway Drive. G. Kelly 'of 38 Mills Pond completed Basic JetFlip'.On USS Saratoga Road,St.James,is now Tr lining with Training Squad. participating in launch and run Fnur at the Naval Air Sta. Navy Seaman Albert E. Ro recovery operations for Apol- tinn, Pensacola. berto Jr., son of Dr. and Mrs. lo 15 with Helicopter He is a 196 graduate of SpoolAlbert E. Roberto of 25 Buck- Support Squadron One American High SAW, Seoul. aboard the assault ship USS NOM, and a 1970 graduate ofingham Rd., end husband of the the University of Texas, Austin. former Miss Barbara A. Guad- Okinawa in the Pacific. iana of 42 Beverly Rd., is now He is a co-pilot with the serving aboard the attack 10- Pacific Recovery Force sta carrier USS Saratoga with aboard one of the primary Frank Garda the U.S. Sixth Fleet In the Medi- aircraft, which will be on Receives Degree terranean. statidn until the spacecraft The 15-year-old carrier, now is successfully on course to Frank C. Garcia,sonto at Mr. and Mrs. Frank Garcia.on her eleventh deployment to the moon and recovered theMediterranean, went two splash-down. Hatboro. received his bachelor of science degree duringdays in Greenock, Scotland and He is a 1988 graduate of graduation exercises and is scheduled to visit Spain, I- St. John's University. commissioning. ceremoniestaly, Greece, France and Mal- atthe United States Navulta. Academy. Annapolis. Md.. FRANK C. 0,11teiA June s. Garcia. a 19447 graduate of Upper Morelli!. ; High School. ABOARD CARRIER OVEREND WINS WINGS has been selectedto attend Navy Seaman Jerry W Rod. Navy Ensign William J, Over ON USS ENTERPRISE Nuclear Power School at dy, son of Mr. and Mrs. Kenneth end, son of Mr. and Mrs. George Navy PO LC. Curtis J, Rohl Bainbridge. Md. IL Roddy of1311Igre&rick D.Overend Jr. oral/ Sunbeam nette has deployed tothe While attending the Naval Drive, Is aboard the attack diet. Ave., was awarded his Naval western Pacific aboard the Academy, Garcia was a mem craft carrier USS F. D. Relsiev aviator's "Wings of Gold" at the nuclear attack aircraft carrier berofthephysicssociety. eit which Is participating In the NavalAir StationinCorpus USS Enterprise for duty with sigma phi sigma: Ifiasurer--North Atlantic Treaty Organize. Christi, Tex, the U.S. Seventh Fleet. He 11 ofthe Trident Society and Lion (NATO) training exercise His wings were presented to the husband of the former sub commander on battalion "Dawn Patrol 71" in the Medi. him at graduation ceremonies Miss Joy A. Murphy. station. terranean Sea. AIIMINISM=PM1 /..a.momaa=III.

165.170 Figure 23.1.Hometowners, such as the individual story (topright) and roster stories shown above, appear daily in thousands of newspapersthroughout the United States and its territories.

368

F 372 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 23--HOME TOWN NEWS

AUTHORIZED HOME TOWN NEWS RELEASE 1. Print or type all entries

NAM-5724/1 (Rev. 7-65) ,., N 01o4 SO' GOIe 2 The 4Releste Aulburtted By" boa may b. used when ten or less forms are submttted. TO: Fleet Nom* Town Mows Center, Great Lake', Illinois, 60086 3 A transmittal letter should be used for over ten submtsatona.

FROM (A.IIriIT AAA. dad Aili,eill fInetele rral. Simetron or Nit, etc.. PHOTO NUN'(" RELEASE NUMBER d. .molt 1.111 Commanding Officer 0 DATE PPPPP FIED Training Squadron TWENTY AELf4SE AD'"D'"ED 'Y NAS Oceana, Va. 23511 C.) 0 u FILL IN AS APPLICABLE By person Involved Nowt Ottei. Middle le I. loot, SEAviCE 'RANCH AGE J'AcK £. NEWroN USN 1 a0 etamsmtmr NOMA or etcoso Meade ,Co. S . 4 Of,. Mile) /.2/0 BROAD STREET. aevEzAND,MAUVE 0 P0111.TS MARITAL STATUSIChefopplseoaleOiltf yov tot e.e p PPPPP Only OP ifp AAAAAA 4411 Mu wl..i f 1 (Mused 4 ttttt i. 1 4 por ly end it netPAblIlbed.)

m01.111 EDIVONCEDO [7]tttttt TE0 114 Dr4A:10 ODECEASED 0 :=4.r0 E1:21:110 PARENTS NANA (divet. !fluid faille, tom Of Mother only. delete 11, .. .f r *AI). Pelee. "1/01.") MUM Elsu-scs(:)., Iw,.rNe-sCAROL SMITH 11

PARENTS ADDRESS (Mooed No.. 3 4 Ctfy. 3file) '(Tite add.... Atli be mood to ) /4/0 BROAD STREEL__T CLEveLANP, MAINE ® NDSIAND'S/Olfl'S NAME (heel 114441e In . We) Well.. boded. aottartiar: roe MARRIED PERSONNEL .01ANDISeelfEIS ADDRESS WORE ILAII11A0I IMAM No., 3 4 , CtI Slit.) ONLY

TM NIGH SCHOOL (NA e,Clly, 31410) ATTENDED GRADUATSD NOT ING /97D g4TON 1416H SCNOcL, eIEP114114 ME. I I"M/944 to 119 70 YOUR COLLEGE (Nose, City. SIAIe) ttttt DEO WEADUAYED

illNANDINO I FROM TO if I NAM( AND ADDAESS or HIGH AMU/COLLEGE N ttttttt Aif APPLIGAILE NAME AND £001151 OF COMPANY/UNION/ ttttt NNAS/CNURCN/PROPILISIONAt RUSLICATIONS ® C)

TO DATE 1 ttttt 0 SEAviGE !ORFIILATISEIRIRIEtIT'IVA!IM!!!!°!EAlttt IIINAvY mAIINI CORP, COAST GUARD 0 (Sees Lill JAN. IA, /970 fOOMEA 115(101 UNIT fit Applicable) ILDWICN

out EMPLOY(* fIttee NU., Cif,. $ tttt )(If .ppiie.b(e)

0.11 UNWED ttttttt 00 ell0fESSI0NAL ASSOCIAfICNS W6 SA /9 V C) TO SE FILLED IN BY ACTIVE DUTY FOR TRAINING AND SELECTED RESERVE PERSONNEL OALY tmotevfo Cl (Cower N.A. dAd .001 'me

1 "t5 (* 0E unit AND LOCAT 010

DATE ENTERED SERVICE OATE ttttttt 0'now A-rivc0010 DATE JOINED RISME

SNIRS/STATIONS OuAiNG befivE DUTY Ms. brill delft else. el 4.11.1) . Duties assigned at present unit: 0 £00CATIONAL SERVIefS CLERK

...... or Fuson in.yotylo DOE The aboveinformationis certifiedle becorrect lad, I /a SEP 7/ Put nee' story on recede Type head to foot end double spec copy. Include the WHAT. WHERE. end if Applicable the HOW And VIWY, end tho ACTUAL bat of the NEWS EVERT. @ GPO 019.412

105.170.1 Figure 23.2.Semple of completed FHTNC leleate form NAVSO 5724/1.

369 373 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Regar,;:css of the situation you find, you have Copies of news releases, citations, and letters a job to do. Your first step should be locating may not be submitted as substitutes for the the latest FHTNC "How To" guide or the Public authorized FHTNC release.However,these Affairs Regulations which will contain specific, items hould be attached to the form when they up-to-date instructions for submitting material provide information important to the story. to FHTNC. The Center insists that these instruc- NAVSO form5724/1wasdesignedby tions be followed. Although the information CHINFO to bring about uniformity by all com- contained in this manual may become obsolete mands, reduce administrative effort, and acceler- after a few years, the Public Affairs Regulations ate processing of home town news releases. It publishes new changes in policy, methods, and can be procured through normal supply chan- procedures as they occur. Make sure you keep nels. If the form is temporarily out of stock, or your Regulations up to date by making the if you run out unexpectedly while operating at appropriate changes as they aredistributed. sea, FHTNC will accept a facsimile. The substi- NOTE: All JO exam items will be based on tute, however, must include the same informa- current changes to the Public Affairs Regula- tion in the same order as contained on the tions. Also, FHTNC publishes, at appropriate printed form. intervals, its "How To" guidance pamphlet. It PAOs, JOs, and other personnel engaged in reflects advance information on new techniques public affairs work should make sure they have not ye:. incorporated in PA Regs or this manual. enough printed forms on hand to handle their "How To" may be obtained from FHTNC upon workload before departing on any extended request. operation. The multilithed substitute should be Preparing material for FHTNC is an extremely used only in emergencies. simple process. Here is a typical situation: Success in using NAVSO 5724/1 depends on Assume that a new man reports for duty four things. aboard your ship or station, The Public Affairs Office is listed on the man's check-in slip. When 1. Each person reported on sk.uld fill out he reports to your office, you give him a copy of the form in his own handwriting, preferably in the Standard Form NAVSO 5724/1 to fill out. printing andinink.However, thereisno You tell him what it will be used for, and ask obje.tion to making entries in pencil. him to print legibly. Figure 23-2 illustrates the 2. Information must be accurate. Make sure Standard Form and figure 23-3 gives specific that the man filling out the form understands instructions for filling it out. the information lie puts down is to be released Many commands have the man complete the for publication. False information may result in form with a carbon copy so that the public embarrassment '.o the person reported on, per- affairs office has a permanent file of NAVSO sons mentioned in the news story, FHTNC, and 5724/1s'. This file is extremely useful when the the newspaper publishing the story. command submits its hold file to the Center or 3. Theinformationmustbecomplete. suddenly is involved in a spot news story that Always check the forms after they are turned in should not wait for the JO to solicit new forms. for inadvertent omissions, After the form is filled out, you check it for 4. The person filling in the form must sign it completeness, accuracy, and spelling. You intital in the space provided at the bottom. Forms the man's check-in slip and he departs, The final cannot be processed without the signature of the step is to prepare the news story as prescribed person involved. by (23) of figures 23-2 and -1-3. In this case, your news peg is that the man has reported Three common errors to be avoided are: aboard for duty. All of your home town stories, of course, will I. Failure to stamp the "from" block with not be about men reporting aboard. But, by the unit's return address stamp, Blank "from" proper use of NAVSO 5724/1, you can easily blocks easily result in misfiled forms at the adapt this simple procedure to practically every Center where more than 30,000 forms are routine news event of home town interest. handled each month, 370 374 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 23HOME TOWN NEWS

OFill in complete name and address, including OFill out completely.If parents are not together, FPO and zip code of submitting unit. indicate whose address is listed.

°Recordhere submitting command's photograph @Personsnow attending high school should so number if a picture accompanies the form. The same indicate. Those who graduated should give theyear numbru should appear on the form, on the negative they were graduated. preserver and on the prints submitted.Failure to identify each photograph in this manner may result in discard of the photograph. °Followprocedure described in 13.

1S 8 1f use by submitting command. Information required to determine outlets 0 For for the story.

Insert typed name and signature. Date of initial entry into present service.If the person filling out form had prior service in another ®Actual date of preparation pi form. Alined Force, indicate as follows: USA 11/1/44 12/17/45.

@Printor type. Do not retype printed forms unless absolutely necessary. ()Monthand year.

0 If Reserve,so indicate. 0Examples: Radio Broadcast Society of America, National Rifle Association, Fleet Reserve Associa- lion. 0 Complete address is required to identify the news media which will be interested in the story. @Followprocedure described in 17. 0Fill out as many blocks as apply. For example, if parents are divorced and mother is remarried, two 0At the bottom of the form is a block that asks blocks should be marked.If parents are both living for "ship/stations during active duty."Instead of and together, no blocks should be checked. Infor- this information, personnel should put their duties mation in item 9 must agree with item 11, or the story assigned at the present unit in thisspace. will not be used. Explain to individual filling out form that this information is held confidential by Actual signature of the person to whom the form FHTNC. pertains. This signature is necessary to ensure that person concerned has checked material to be re leased on him and verified its accuracy. 0Refers to terson filling out the form, not to his or her children.If person filling out form is a ward, grandchild, etc., put this information in the block. (Needed for single stories only).If typewriter is not available, news stories may be printed. 0 Normally, stories receivedmore than 15 days after This item must be filled out completely in order they occur are not used by Fleet Home to give the information necessary to properly distri- Town News Center. Exceptions are made in thecase of deployed bute the story. Do not omit parent's first name. Infor- units, units involved in extended operations, motion given here must ogre's with item 9. etc,

181.171 Figure 234Instructions for filling out FHTNC release form NAVS015724/1. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

2. Failure to alphabetize submission. All sub- roster. The group of completed NAVSO 5724/1 missions shouldbealphabetized withtheir forms making up the roster will have no news on master story attached to each group. Do not the forms themselves. submit forms by city and state. A roster story can be used to give a personal- 3. Submitting nonprocessable forms. Forms ized echo of a news event previously covered as indicating "Do not release" or with incomplete front page news. Take the following example: addresses, result in technical kills. Avoid wasting your efforts and contributing to erroneous An amphibious force moves in and makes a releases by considering every item before sub- landing. The enemy reels back on itsheels. mitting forms. Within a few hours the wire service story is in the metropolitan dailies. About the same time a JO also goes to work. A few days later lolal TYPES OF HOME TOWN STORIES papers carry a story like this:

There are two types of home town news Fireman Richard L. Dempsey, USN, son stories: The ROSTER story and the INDIVID- of Mr. and Mrs. Roy H. Dempsey of 234 UAL story. For each of these story types, use Iwo Ave., Decatur, Ga., serving aboard the tom .14;AVS0 '572411 .to pxeseritmsential bio- minesweeper.IfE Ftictk,A, lasistedin graphical data. clearing a channel for landing craft during ROSTER stories are clerical work savers while the Ke Ga amphibious assault September at the same time they afford the widest possible 17. coverageof personnelactivities.Submitting home town material is speeded up by grouping Or... individual forms to which one story applies. A roster story may be used for as few as ten men Seaman John H. Story, USN, son of Mr. or for thousands. For example, if you are and Mrs. Samual L. Story of 917 Lakehurst submitting forms for 15 personnel who have just Dr., Moorhead, Minn., is serving aboard the been promoted, you need provide only one cargo ship USS Stores which brought in the story about the fact that the promotions were supplies to support a Marine special landing effected. Simply indicate the effective date and force hitting Ke Ga beaches September 17. the new rank for the individual on the forms. It doesn't matter if the promotions are to different grades or ratings; merely say in the master story, Or... "was promoted to his present rank on - (date) -." Reporting aboard stories can also be grouped in ChiefBoatswain's MateStephenC. this manner. (Stories about transfers are not Tompkins, USN, son of Mr. and Mrs. desired.) NathanF.Thompkins of Route#2, INDIVIDUAL stories are those stories of a Bledsoe, Tenn., anti husband of the former singular nature which do not lend themselves to Miss Brenda S Saxon of 235 E St., San grouping, such as medals and other awards, Diego, is serving aboard the destroyer USS retirements,schoolhonor graduates,and Kelso which provided gunfire support for meritorious promotions. the Ke Ga amphibious landings September 17.

PREPARING THE ROSTER STORY Unless the sweeper had struck a mine, the cargo ship had gone aground, or the destroyer A roster story consists of two parts: the had sustained a hit, it is unlikely that the outside master story and the group of individual forms world would have been aware of the actions of often referred to as a roster. All news informa- these ships during an amphibious landing on tion contain xi in the master story must be enemy held territory. They were just as essential applicable to each man on the accompanying to the mission, however, as the more publicizpd 372 3 76 Chapter 23--HOME TOWN NEWS amphibious assault or dock landing ships men- Your next consideration will be compiling the tioned in the wire service stories. individualforms.Disseminate copies of the Perhaps the situation is not as spectacular as standard form to members of the command for amphibious landing. A man's ship may not be in their completion and return. After you have actual combat, but his prese ice in another part collected anu screened the forms for complete- of the world is of diplomatic significance. The ness and accuracy, arrange them alphabetically story might read: by last names. The material is now ready for forwarding to FHTNC. On top place the letter "Yeoman Third Class Donald H. Wright, of transmittal (discussed in detail later) attached USN, son of Mr. and Mrs. Carl S. Wright of to the master story and last, the completed 1456 Washington St., Denver, Colo., visited forms. the port of Lisbon, Portugal aboard the Here are a few other points to keep in mind heavy cruiser USS Newport News, which when preparing roster stories for FHTNC: anchored after a week long training excer- cise with navies of member nations of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization." 1. The TIME ELEMENT is extremely important in ALL stories submitted to FHTNC. Thus, the roster story makes national news Always use the exact date when an event occurs have a particular meaning f.A.1ate town from or is ackeduled to take place. Media will not use which the man came. The man's relatives feel a stories when the time element is merely de- glow of pride, his acquaintances feel a closer tie, scribed as "recently." They want a specific date and, for the remainder of the community, the used in the news peg to assure them they are not scene of these far-off happenings moves closer, running stale news. because they can associate what happened to 2. NEVER accept or use a SERVICE AD- someone they know. DRESS foraman's wife.Mrs. Black, for In preparing a Roster story, your first con- example, might be making her home temporarily in Norfolk, Va., because that city is the home- diseration will be the writing of a MASTER port of her husband's ship. Actually, however, STORY, or a single story which is applicable to she was born and raised in Smith, Ark., where allpersonnel involved. Assume that you are the home town folk know her best. The story assigned to write a master story for a ship would be of no interest to the Norfolk media, participating in a training exercise. Here is what but would have news value in her own home the story may look like after it is written: town. f{ 3. In many cases, home town stories can be is scheduled to participate in made into spot news events with a little advance anamphibioustraining exerciseinthe planning. For example, you can submit stories Hawaiian Islands beginning Sept. 14 while serving aboard the attack cargo ship USS on advancements, fleet exercises and operations, Skagit. visits to foreign ports and similar events which "Known as "Cperation Clear Ridge," the can be anticipated about two weeks in advance exerciseisa routinetraining operation of the event. This will enable FHTNC to get the involving Navy and Marine forces.Itis stories to the newspapers by the day the event 'designed to develop proficiency in planning occurs. and conducting an amphibious operation. "After a live firing exercise and rehersal on the island of Kahoolawe, the amphibi- MAINTAINING UNIT HOLD FILES ous troops will storm ashore under simu- lated battle conditions on the island of A Hold File is a group of NAVSO 5724/1 Kausi on D-DaySept. 20. forms; one for each member of your command "A recreational visit to Pearl Harbor will who isparticipating in the home town news be made following completion of the ex- program. When FHTNC rec 'Ives the forms desig- ercise." nated by a commr,nd for use as a hold file, 373 377 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

FHTNC will acknowledge rec 'ipt and indicate Hold files should be submitted on the eve of the serial number assigned to the unit's hold file. deployment. Fleet Home Town News Center maintains UPDATE OFTENWhen deployed with a holdfiles onlyforunits deployed overseas hold file at FHTNC, make additions, deletions, during the actual period ,f the deployment. and changes, or verify the accuracy of the hold Fleet Home Town News Center willnot file as is, at least every 60 days or FHTNC will maintain hold files for land based forces de- return the file, A longer period is allowed for ployedinacombat zone becauseof the fleet ballistic missile submarines and other desig- casualty problem. nated commands. Most changes to hold files Ships and other mobile commands when not other than additions or deletions are in the form deployed and commands. that do not deploy of promotions. Submit a new form for personnel should maintain their hold files locally. who are promoted. The new form willbe The hold fileis an important tool that can processed as a promotion story, then added to facilitate participation in the home town news the hold file in place of the old one. progr.im but there are limitations toits use. FHTNC must be an addressee on all casualty When tne hold file is at FHTNC it may only messages originated by commana: whetherthe be used in connection with stories that apply to casualty is combat or non-combat. This practice the entire command. Examples of such stories helps to insure that no stories will be released on are deployment and returnfrom deployment, deceased or injured personnel. It would be very crossing the equator, participating in training cruel for a family to read that a loved one is exercises, unit awards, etc. There is an exception participating in a fleet exercise when they were in the case of hard news stories. For example, a notified of the man's dealth a few days earlier. ship deployed in the Western Pacific with a hold Stories submitted for use with a specified fileat .FHNTC., goes to the aid of a sinking hold file number may be sent to FHTNC by fishing boat. A boat crew volunteers to make message or mail. The master story for usewith their way to the stricken vessel to rescue the the hold file will indicate deletions to be made men. Despite darkness andheavy seas they from the file and authorize use of the story in effect the rescue. Thisis a hard news story. conjunctionwithapplicable holdfileserial Immediacy is critical to such a story. Submission numbers. Figure 23-4 illustrates an example of a of release forms by mail would take too long. In master story forwarded by message,using the this case the names of the boat crew and the hold file method, facts of the story may be submitted by message. FHTNC will pull the men's forms from the hold file and process the story on a priority basis. LETTER OF TR ANSM1TTAL (Include in such a message authorization to use the remainder of the hold file for a less dramatic All news materiE. !- you submit by mail to but worthwhile story about the rest of the FHTNC should be St,'e,as an enclosure to the crew.) letter of transmittal, with the exception of 10 Forallroutineindividualstories,a new forms or fewer which may be authorized for NAVSO 5724/1 must be submitted for the man release by placing a signature .n the appropriate concerned. This holds true even though your block on the 5724/1. Study Lie sample letter in unitis deployed and maintains a huld file at figure 23-5 and use it. It would also be a good FHTNC. While this involves an apparent duplica- idea to acquaint yourself with your command's tion of effort, such stories will be processed procedures for handling correspondence (see faster than if the files had to be researched to chapter 24). findtheformsforthe many hundreds of. The letter of transmittal serves several im- individual stories received by FHTNC each day. portant purposes: Hold files should be arranged llphabetically First, it makes everything you send "official," by last names, Forms marked by individuals "do and gives FHTNC C..: authority to process it. not realease" should not not be submitted to Second, the letter aids FHTNC in processing FHTNC. the material faster by indicating the type of 374378 Chapter 23 HOME TOWN NEWS

NYBNRHCA36 RXB488 RR RUEGHC DE RUCKRY 030C 09/1400Z ENR

R 091400Z 1 FM USS NEWPORT NEWS TO FHTNC GLAKES UNCLAS SVC ZUI RUCKEX 018C 06/1224Z 061218Z C AA BT UNCLAS PRESREL A. PA REGS NAVSO P 1035 1. THE FOLLOWING PRESREL HAS BEEN RELEASED IN ACCORDANCE WITH REF A. 2. REQUEST USE OF PRESREL WITH MY HOLD FILE K-164 AFTER 062000Z NOV. 3. QUOTE (STD, SLUG) WAS ON BOARD THE HEAVY CRUISER NEWPORT NEWS WHEN SHE RETURNED TO HER HOMEPORT, NORFOLK, ON NOVEMBER 9TH, AFTER A TWO MONTH CRUISE THAT TOOK HIM ABOVE THE ARCTIC CIRCLE AND TO THREE EUROPEAN PORTS. (STD. SLUG) SERVES AS A MEMBER OF THE SHIP'S COMPANY ON THE NEWPORT NEWS WHICH IS THE FLAGSHIP OF VADM KLEBER S. MASTERSON, COMMANDER, SECOND FLEET. DURING THE CRUISE NEWPORT NEWS PARTICIPATED IN THE FALL NATO EN,RCISE "TEAM WORK" IN THE NORTH ATLANTIC. FOLLOWING THE EXERCISE THE SHIP VISITED THE CITIES OF PORTSMOUTH, ENGLAND; BERGEN, NORWAY; AND COPENHAGEN, DENMARK. FROM OCTOBER 24-30 NEWPORT NEWS PARTICIPATED IN THE JOINT U.S. SPANISH AMPHIBIOUS WARFARE EXERCISE "STEEL, PIKE I" OFF THE COAST OF SOUTHERN SPAIN. THE HEAVY CRUISER WILL SPEND THE THANKSGIVING AND CHRISTMAS HOLIDAYS IN PORT. UNQUOTE 4. DELETE MM2 JACK NAHMOD, CHICAGO, TTLINOIS FROM HOLD FILE FOR ABOVE PRESREL. BT

10.172 Figure 23-4.Master story released by message using the hold filesystem. material submitted, its general subject matter, Center, Bldg, 1-B, U,S, Naval Base, Great Lakes, and the number of stories involved. Illinois 60088, Finally, the letter enables the senderto make sure that all enclosures are included before the material leaves the command. POSSIBLE TOPICS FOR HOMETOWNERS Letters of transmittal must be signed by the commanding officer or his representative. The Home town news material normally falls into PAO often is authorized to sign for the CO, three categories: MILITARY ACHIFNEMENIS, Only the original copy of the letter of transmit- PERSONAL ACHIEVEMENTS, and PARTICI- tal is forwarded to FHTNC with the enclosures. PATION STORIES. Herearesome of the The mailing address for all FHTNCcorrespon- subjects which might form the basis foryour denceis Director, Fleet Home Town News releases, 375 379 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

(COMMAND HEADING)

Code File # Ser Date

From: To: Director, Fleet Home Town News Center, Bldg. 1-B, U.S. Naval Base, Great Lakes, Illinois60088

Subj: Home Town News Material

Ref: (a) Name of, submitting command) Hold File #

Encl: [X] (1) (Number of) NAVSO 5724/1 forms. EX] (2) List of persons no longer aboard. EX3 (3) Master Story. [X1 (4) List of names and new rates of men promoted.

[ii1. Enclosure (1) is authorized for release. EX (a) The form(s) are to be added to reference(a). (b) The forms are not to be added to reference(a).

[X] 2. The names listed in enclosure (2) are tobe deleted from reference (a).

Reference (a) is current and is to be released with t13. enclosure (3).

[X] 4. Enclosure (3) is authorized for release withreference after the changes noted in the above paragraphs arecompleted.

this time. 15. Enclosure (3) is NOT authorized for release at You will be notified in a separatecommunication as soon as release is authorized.

El6. Enclosure (3) is to be held for release until

(4) as [X] 7. Change the rates of personnel listed in enclosure shown.

By direction

1815.173 Figure 'AM.Sample letter of trenemittel for releasewithout photos, 376 Cha s ter 23HOME TOWN NEWS

1. MILITARY ACHIEVEMENTS. e. Participation in exerises or operations. a. Attending courses, schools, or training f: rarticipation in crisis actions. sessions. g. Participation in space-vehicle recovery b. Graduation or completion of training c perations. courses. 11. Participation in evacuation operations. c. Awards, such as medals, including those i. People-to-people activities, suchas de- for Good Conduct, or letters ofcom- livery of charity goods or crew contribu- mendation. tions to destitute persons. d. Advarcements or promotions. j. Return to the United States. e. Honors earned in school, in training, or in routine service witha unit, aboard a ship, or at a station. HOME Tt.,':11: NEWS PHOTOS f. Reenlistments. g. Life-saving efforts. Good photographs enhance the potential h. Unusualaccomplishmentsbeyond usageof home town news releases. Either routine duty, such as development ofa formal or informal portraitsare useful home new idea or item of equipment. town news photographs. The photographsrange i.Daily routine, which should includea from the basic "head and shoulder,"or "mug," description of the individual's duties. shot to the man in his working environment. j. General quarters and fire station duties, The man's face should be clearly identifiable, as they would be during an actual evenif heisstanding beside his surfaced k. Other officialduties consideredcol- submarine at the North Pole,or cleaning his lateral to daily routine. weapons on a river craft in Southeast Asia. While 1. Retirements (if releaseis received at vertical compositionsare generally more accept- FHTNC 15 days before actual retirement able to space conscious editors, photographs date). with impact may lend themselves to horizontal in. First-time accomplishments. format and will be givenevery consideration at the Center. 2. PERSONAL ACHIEVEMENTS. The emphasis must beon the subject of the a. Off-duty scholastic achievements, such story if more than one person is ina picture. as USAFI completions, night classes, This is true even if the man's wife, family,or graduations. commanding officerare b. Hobbies. included.Unfortu- nately, photographs that make nice souvenirsof c. Successes in writing, art, or stage talent. formal ceremonies do not usually lendthem- d. People-to-people program undertakings selves to use by newspaper editors. An informal carried out on an individual basis. portrait taken just beforeor after the ceremony e. Awards from organizations for outstand- will frequently providea more suitable photo ingservices, such as Freedoms Founda- for release. tion, or from local clubs. If a photograph of twoor more persons is f. Off-duty assistance given to localgroups, submitted, full identification ofever:tone in the such as Boy Scouts, churches, and other picture must be included community groups. on the back of the NAVSO 5724/1 form. However, only thesub- g. Sports participation. ject's !ast name is requiredon the photographs or negative. Here are a few tips: 3. PARTICIPATION STORIES a. Reporting or serving aboard ship, at Don'tsubmitphotos which might be station, or with a unit. embarrassing to the subjector the mrvice. b. Deployments or changes of location. c. Places visited. s Strive for good tight composition,avoiding d. Training conducted. wasted space betweenpersons in the picture. 377 381 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Make sure subject is properly attired for smaller than 2 X 3inches. Borders are not the job he is doing. required. Subject's last name should be printed near an Use imagination in setting up your shots. edge on the back of the photographs with a Don't make the picture look "posed." soft-lead pencil or felt-tip pen. Photographi should be placed in a negative If background isrecognizable, make it preserver or any envelope cut to servethe same appropriate. purpose and then the envelope should bestapled to the back of the NAVSO form in such a Avoid shadows caused by hat brims which manner that the prints may be easilyremoved may make the subject look like abandit. without removing the staples. Negatives may be submitted in lieu of prints. Don't waste a photo mailer to send FHTNC Proofs and prints are not required when nega- photos which are uncomplimentary such as tives are submitted. However, the subject's last those showing excessive skin blemishes em- name should be entered on the negative'sborder phasized by harsh lighting, eyes closed or look- with black ink. Negatives should be forwarded in ing off in a distracted manner, unflattering facial the same manner outlined for prints above. expressions, largeareas of the face in deep When assembled and ready for mailing to shadow so that the subject is rendered unidenti- FHTNC, the material is arranged as follows: fiable, and underexposed or overdeveloped por- I. Letter of transmittal on top. See figure traits of dark skinned personnel. These are 23-6 for sample of transmittal accompanying immediate rejects. photos. Many photographs are rejected at the Center 2. NAVSO 5724/1 with the caption informa- because the commanding officer, for example, tion. due to his rank ar41 position, is favored in a 3. Negative preserver containing the negative picture to the detriment if the newsmaker. The or photos. 4. The jacketisfastened to the NAVSO pictureisfor the newsmaker's home town Make sure an 5724/1 by a staple, through the top side of the newspaper- -not the commander's. jacket only in such a way that the negative or enlisted subject is not relegated to a minor role prints may be easily removed without removing in the picture. For additional information on photographic the staples. composition, refer to chapter 14. Exposed film will be developed and processed by Fleet Home Town News Center only for those commands which do not have access to a DON'T DELAY FOR PHOTOS Navy photo lab. To ensure proper identification, the first frame of each roll of film should be a Home town news releases should not be photograph of a card clearly indicating the roll delayed beyond five working days while await- number, date, and submitting command. A list ing the finisher processing of photographs.If of personnel, in shooting order, should accom- therewill be excessivedelay,the NAVSO pany each roll in addition to a properly com- 5724/1's should be forwarded without photo- pleted NAVSO 5724/1 for each subject. Include graphs, film date with each roll of film, indicating the ASA and exposure problems, etc. SUBMISSION OF PHOTOS TAPE RECORDED INTERVIEWS When photos are submitted to FHTNC, it is AND GREETINGS important that these instructions be followed: The Cent.. lr requires six, black and white Radio interviews with naval personnel bring prints no larger than 3-1/2 X 5 inches and no to the American ,public an intimate picture of 378. Chapter 23HOME TOWN NEWS

bSS ST. PAUL (CA-73) Fleet Post Office San Francisco, California 96601

CA73:AJS:scs 5724 Ser Date

From: Commanding Officer, USS ST. PAUL (CA-73) To: Director, Fleet Home Town News Center

Subj: Home town news releases; forwarding of

Ref: (a) U.S. Navy Public Affairs Regulations (NAVSO P-1035)

Encl: (1) ST. PAUL news releases #68-71 through #75-71 with corresponding photographs

1. Enclosure (1), forwarded in accordance with reference (a), is authorized for release and has been verified for accuracy.

J. D. OLIVER By direction

185.174 Figure 23.6. Sample letter of transmittal for release withphotos. the Navy, its mission, and its work. This is why The latest and most up-to-date specifications the Navy has set up aprogram through Fleet for all FHTNC procedurescan be found in the Home Town News Center to process interviews PA Regs and the latest FHTNC "How To."So, and greetings to radio stations throughoutthe befjre setting up a program for hometown United States. The interview witha Navy man interviews read these sources. should reveal information about the Navyas well as about the man himself. In addition to the NECESSARY EQUIPMENT interview being playedon the radio, a mailer is provided by FHTNC so that the radio station Taperecorded interviewsmay be prepared can forward each interview to the parents after on a variety of equipment. Audio quality is it has been aired. important but you don't needstudio-type Taped Navy rauio interviews enjoy phenome- recording equipment. Ifyou have a choice, use a nal success. More than 85 percent of those good quality portable recorderthat has 7 1/2 received by FHTNC are broadcast by radio inches-per-second speed. Use standard sizetape. stations in the men's home communities. Local This is the type of recording FHTNCcan handle stations stress local news, especially in small most efficiently and this is the regularbroadcast cities and rural areas. They must, in orderto speed of most radio stations. However,cassette survive against television and the networks. So and slow-speed tapescan be processed on a your market is wide open. slightly more time-consuming basis. 379383 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Tapes should be submitted on either 7-inch or that no bothersome echos or undesirable back- 5-inch reels for fastest handling at the Center. ground noise is audible. Approximately 10 two-and-a-half minute inter- 2. Discuss the interview with the subject views will fit on one side of a seven-inch reel of before making a recording. This will give you a tape recorded at 7 1/2 ips; or five interviews on few f-cts about the subject and some idea of a five-inch reel. At FHTNC theinterviews are what to discuss. For example, if the man tobe "dubbed" onto individual three-inch reels far interviewed did not complete high school, it distribution. would be embarrassing to ask him when he graduated. The pre-interview discussion will also help relax the subject and reduce any mike SELECTING AN INTERVIEW LOCATION fright he may have when the actual taping begins. You should also tell the interviewee in Soundproof studios are ideal, but impossible advance what questions he will be asked so that to find in most of our Fleet units. So the next he won't become stumped during the interview. best thing is to catch your man on the job. In If the interviewee does not want to discuss this way, you can capitalize on background certain aspects of hislife or service career, noises. If you are interviewing a flight deck respect these wishes. crewman, the sound of a jet taking off at the 3. Before beginning the actual interview, turn beginning of the interview will add startling on the recorder andrecord the identification realism to your production. However, on the material as in the following example: other hand, if you are interviewing a Yeoman, the steady staccato of a typewriter can be most "Reel One, Take One, Seaman Joe Dorry, annoying. Be careful of the background noises United States Navy, of Smallerton, Pennsylva- you choose. nia." Determining where to record home town interviews is usually decided by: Wait five seconds and begin the interview. After the interview is finished, wait 20seconds, 1. Type of recording equipment being used; then give the indentification Material for the 2. Convenience of those being interviewed, second interview: and 3. Desire to get the color of an on-the-job "Reel One, Take Two, Radioman Third Class interview. David Johnson, United States Navy, of George- town, South Carolina." If you do not have a portable tape recorder at your disposal, interviews will have to bemade in After another pause of five seconds, the a location where electric poweris available. A interview begins. ship's library or chaplain's office is often a good location. The word should be passed that hometown interviews are being made in a certain THE BODY OF THE INTERVIEW location at a certain time or arrangement can be made in advance with division heads for sched- Now that you have set the stage and in. uled interview appointments. troduced the star of the show, let him do most of the talking. The folks at home want to hear him, not you. PREPARING FOR THE INTERVIEW You should now aim the discussion into two areas: The most important pre-interview steps are:

1. Establish a good taping location, set up the 1. CIVILIAN LIFE.Establishthe person equipment, and test the microphone and record- being interviewed firmly in his home town, so ing levels. This will ensure proper voice level and everyone will recognize him. Ask questionssuch

38t) 384 Chapter 23HOME TOWN NE' S

as: "What high school did you attend? Where Don't use questions that can be answered did you work? Where do your parents live?" Get in a yes or no fashion. Choose questions that specific answers. The answer, "I worked at a requiretheintervieweetoelaborateinhis plaster company in town" or, "I went to high response. schoolin Smallerton"isnot enough. Many listeners will only know the subject slightly. Don't monopolize the conversation. Let However, that specific information will clinch the interviewee do most of the talking. his identity in the minds and interest them. The civilian stage should last about 30 seconds. Don't allow excessive background noise to 2. MILITARY LIFE. The second, and most overwhelm the voices. When background noise is important,isthe subject's Navy experience. present explain it to the listening audience. What is his job? What is the mission of his unit? How long has he been in the Navy? Where has he Don'tuseexcessive volume level.This been? Any interesting experiences? What is his problem, overmodulEtion, causes many other- average work day like? This is the meat of the wise good interviews to be killed for technical interview. The military stage should run between quality by FHTNC. The problem is caused by a minute and thirty seconds and two minutes. either improper volume control setting or improper microphone-to-subject distance or both. You might choose one of the following means of ending your interview:

"Thank you, Joe. We have been talking with SPECIAL EFFECTS ,Seaman Joe Dorry of 21 Elm Street, Smallerton, Pennsylvania, now serving aboard the aircraft Background music during an interview is not carrier USS INDEPENDENCE in the Mediter- desired. Should the interview require editing, the ranean." or "Joe, what are you looking forward background music would be broken up. With to most upon your return home?" You must be properfacilities,specialeffects can bein- careful with this method. Don't let the inter- corporated. A good example of using special viewee ramble on for two more minutes trying effects is a Navy interviewer in London using the to make a date with his wife at the Gullywasher sound of Big Ben as an attention-getter and then Hotel. Continue and conclude your interview corning on with "This is your Navy correspon- with a statement like this: "This has been your dent in London." A boatswain's pipe, the sound Navy correspondent speaking to you from the of marching men, rifle fire, the general quarters Seventh Fleet destroyer USS Benner in the alarm, or ship's bell can also be used effectively. South China Sea.We've heard today from Gunner's Mate Second Class James 0. Johns of 21 Oak Street, Tanners Crossing, Arkansas. We SUBMITTING THE INTERVIEWS now return you to your local station." Tapes should be forwarded to FHTNC as soon as practical after they have been completed, Here are a few don'ts: usingthe guidelines for forwarding FHTNC material. Each submission should include bio- Avoid using phrases peculiar to the Navy, graphical data, either on standard form or the such as topside, TAD, CAG Nine. These terms Home Town Interview Data Sheet (NAVSO may be common in your unit but not in middle 5724/2) shown in figure 23-7. The latter is America. If such terms are used, explain them. preferred. Interviews should be on the tape in the same order as they are listed on the data Don't use dates. Mention of specific dates sheet. make interviews extremely perishable, since the When 30-second holiday greetings are submit- delay between recording and airing kills the ted,use bothforms 5724/1and NAVSO impact. 5724/2. This helps to speed the processing of 381 38 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

HOWL TOWN NA010 INTINVIEW DATA SWEET mvse-sno 544 AIR 0104 tO7 .4 10 f11041 (4 moo ard @II) ( ins et. 0. oEnt,. .te so oppropietel MILLNO . IC 'loot Nome Tom Notts CoAter. Wrist tags. IIIIROIC 63014 mammAAAA. TAKE INTIM/1E0U COMPLETE SHIP OR FAMILIES NAME INYNTFWER .PEED REMARKS NO NAME AND RATE HOME ADDRESS STATION AND ADDRESS

q 4

105.170.2 Figure 23.7.Home town radio interview data sheet NAVSO 5724/2.

these tapes during the high volume perbd such Gent under separate cover. Fleet Home Town as Christmas and Mother's Day, The Interview News Center needs both to process your submis- Data Sheet helps the Center locate specific sion, interviews in case a casualty or other problem arises before the tapes are mailed. A letter of transmittal should accompany all THE SEA SERVICES REPORTER tapedreleases,identifying thereels of tape enclosed and giving authority for release as in To distribute information to commands in the "figure 23-8. Acid to help them improve their home town Tape recordings should be wrapped ina FHTNC publishes periodically the Sea strong container marked "Magnetic TapeDo Nerh'ees Reporter. Distribution is made to all Not X-Ray," and sent air mail. The letter of commands in the Navy, Marine Corps, and Coast transmittal should be with the package and not Guard. 382 BEST COPY AVAILABLE Chapter 23HOME TOWN NEWS

USS HANSON (DDR-832) Fleet Post'Office San Francisco, California96601

DDR832:PCS:ajk 5724 Ser Data

From: Commanding Officer, USS HANSON (DDR-832) To: Director, Fleet Home Town News Center

Subj: Home town tape recorded interviews

Ref: (a) U.S. Navy Public Affairs Regulations (NAVSO P-1035)

Encl: (1) One (1) Home Town Radio Interview Data Sheet (2) One (1) tape with seven (7) interviews

1. Enclosures (1) and (2) are forwarded herewith in accordance with the provisions of reference (a).

P. C. SHACKLEPORD

186.177 Figure 23.8.Sample letter of transmittal for tape-recorded interviews.

383 387 CHAPTER 24

THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

Home for the Navy Journalist is normally the office at the center of command activities. It is public affairs office. Itis also home for the important that the information issued by the public affairs officer and the rest of his staff. public affairs office be credible. The size of a public affairs office and staff In public affairs offices of all sizes, the term depends directly on a command's mission, its shipshape carries the same meaning as, it does in size, and its public affairs objective. The avail- the boatswain's locker.It means your public ability of space and the number of visitors affairs office must be befitting to the unit, tidy, expected, such as newsmen, also determine the and orderly. Shipshape also means that per- actual size, location, and manning level of a sonnel are kept usefully employed, that work is public affairs office. accomplished systematically, and the the entire The "office" of a collateral duty public affairs office functions smoothly and efficiently. The officer aboard a destroyer may be a corner of his daily work routine should call for maximum desk and one file drawer. His part-time clerical accomplishmentwithminimumconfusion. assistance will be taken care of by a YN or PN in Everyone in the office should know what is the ship's office. In a cruiser, a cubby hole of expected of l'im.The hallmark of. a well- about 6' x 8' is usually set aside for the public organized office is that everyone knows what to affairs office. The staff might consist of a LTJG do and when to do it, without being constantly as PAO, a J03 as the leading Journalist, and a reminded. striker: On the other hand, a very large public affairs staff, such as one which an ocean fleet A public affairs office is a place of business. commander is authorized, will require several Whether it is the largest or the smallest type rooms, a 165X Captain as PAO, several officer described aboveor one of the in-betweensa assistants (PAO, Line, and Aviation), a JOCM/ PAO shop's operations should be conducted in a JOCS, a JOC, two J01 s, and a multitude of JO business like manner. This is important, because 2/3s and strikers. a PAO probably receives more visitors each year The ideal public affairs layout, if possible, than any other department in the command. would have a private office for the public affairs You never know when a high-ranking officer, a officer, since newsmen are often reluctant to news media representative, or some prominent discuss potential stories if strangers are present member of the community may drop in. Their for fear of leaking a tip to another newsman. It impressions of the Navy and Navy public affairs should also have a room or area with at least a willsbe based largely on the appearance of the desk, typewriter, and telephone for the con- office and the conduct of its personnel. venience of media representatives,although A dirty deck, overflowing trash cans, clut- space available to public affairs seldom permits. tered desks, and personnel lounging around with The ideal public affairs office should be located apparently nothing to keep them occupied, all as close as possible to that of the officer in present an undesirable picture. A situation like command. This arrangement would make the this should never be permitted to develop, and it public affairs officer easily accessible to the is the responsibility of everybody in the office officer in command and"place the public affairs to see that it does not happen. r3:84ass Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

This chapter will acquaint you with some of agencies of theUnitedStates Government, thepractices andprocedures that must be especially those within theDepartmentof carried out in order to have a properly admin- Defense. Some civilian firms that deal exten- isteredpublic affairsoffice.In many cases, sively with the Navy have also adopted the naval especially aboard ship, you will find yourself as form. the administrative assistant to the public affairs officer. You will find it easier to maintain an JOINT LETTERS.A joint letter is a naval office atmosphere that is consistently pleasant form of correspondence used when two or more and courteous if you have confidence in your navalactivities or bureaus originate a letter ability to perform your duties correctlythat is, concerning a particular subject or administrative if you are thoroughly familiar with routine problem common to both. procedures and know where to find information quickly. Speed is one of the chief requisites of MULTIPLE-ADDRESS LETTER.A the JO. multiple-address letter is a naval form of corres- Normally only the larger public affairs offices pondence used to address two or more activities rate the permanent services of a Yeoman or whiCii are individually identified or addressedas civilian clerical personnel. If your office does a group. Carbon copies (tissue sheets) contain not rate full time clerical assistance you will be the letterhead, typed or stamped. There must be expected to perform the routine administrative one copy for each addressee. duties. This includes preparing correspondence, typing news releases,filing,using the Navy NAVY DIRECTIVES.Theinstructions DirectivesSystem,caring for and operating and notices of the Navy Directives System are office duplicating equipment, keeping records, forms of the naval IcAter. Since a directive is maintaining supplies, using reference material, distributed to a: number of addressees,itis obtaining transportation, and being familiar with normally produced on a duplicating machine. security of classified matter. These subjects, as they apply to the Journalist, are covered in this ENDORSEMENT.An endorsementis chapter. used to approve, disapprove, or comment on the contents of aletter which is forwarded, as required by Navy Regulations, through one or OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE more addressees beforeitreachesitsfinal addressee. Generally, when space is adequate, an Official correspondence in the Navy includes endorsement should be typed below the pre- all recorded communications sent or received by ceding communication. a person in the Navy in the execution of the duties of his office. SPEEDLETTER.A speedletter is a naval Besides letters, correspondence includes such form of correspondence used for an urgent things as messages transmitted by telegraph or communication which does not require tele- radio. It also inciudes endorsements attached to graphic transmission. A speedletter may be used letters or memos. for urgent correspondence with persons or There are two princit.11 types of letters used agencies outside the Department of the Navy. in the Navy: The NAVAL FORM and the The primary purpose of a speedletter form is to BUSINESS FORM. call attention to the communication, to impress upon the mind of the receiver the necessity for prompt action. When necessary to speed up NAVAL FORM delivery, a speedletter may be sent by AIR MAIL or SPECIAL DELIVERY, or both. Study WithintheNavy,officialcorrespondence the speedletter illustrated in figure 24-2. usually is prepared in naval form. A naval letter format is illustrated in figure 24-1. This format MEMORANDUM.The memorandum is a alsoisused when writing to certain other form of naval correspondence used for informal 3b89 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

I INCH (IF LETTER. HEAD TYPED OR STAMPED)

DEPARTMENT Or THE NAVY Name of Activity Address of Activity * "Refer to" line CLOSE UP Originator's code IF ANY * Pile number 4 LINES ITEM Pate OMMITTED

*SPEC/AL POSTAL SERVICE 7 LINES --

From: Title of head of activity prepari ,letter, name of activity, location or mailing address if neci3sary To: Title of head of activity receiving letter, name of activity, location or mailing address if necessary *Via: (1) Title of head of activity whose endorsement is required, name of activity, location if necessary (not numbered if only one) (2) Title of second "Via" addressee, et cetera, if any

Subj: Brief topical statement of the subject of the letter

CLOSE UP *Ref: (a) Citation of a letter or other written document, official IF ANY short title of originator, location of activity if not HEADING indicated in title, the abbreviation "ltr", the identi- ENTRY fication symbols, of (date) OMITTED *Encl: (1) Material enclosed with letter, identified in the same manner as references (number of copies if more than one) (2) (SC) Material forwarded under separate cover, identified in the same manner as references (number of copies if more than one)

APPROX 1. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX1CXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I INCH XXXXXXXXXICXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. 1 INCH

410 Jo, 2. XXMEXXXXXXXXXXX=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XIIXXXXXXXXXIOCXXXXX XXXXX Xxxsacxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxacxxxxxx XXXXXXXXXXX/MXXXXXXXX

a. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXMCXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXXXXXXXXXX 3CXXXXXICKXXXICKXXXXXXX XXVICXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXIIXXXXXXXX

(1) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXMC XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

(2)Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .Xxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.

b. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxnxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.

I INCH, AT LEAST

95.17.1 Figure 24.11 Naval letter format.

386 r 390 ) I 4

...... 0.4 4 +4...... 011 O.. 000 0+ 4 ..... 0.000. 4 4, *44 44. 04 ...... 40 40

.0.0++. 4, 0 4...... 00

4.0 0.. .4. *******

444. 4

... 4i,

4 O

4.0 ..... 4,,, ..... Or. .440 .44. 4* ********* ...... 00 OOOOO .00. ***** 4. 0$00 ...... *04 04. JOURNALIST 3 & 2 communicationswithinand betweenhead- BUSINESS FORM quarters components of the Navy Department, between fleet and force commanders and units A business form letter should be used when of command under their jurisdiction, and within writing to persons or agencies outside the Naval a field activity. Establishment who have not adopted the naval form of letter. Although most business form letters are similar in form and style, you should FEATURES OF NAVAL LETTERS.A follow th.' format shown in figure 24-3. naval letter has no salutation or complimentary One of the major differences between the close. Instead it has a definite format of its own. naval form and the business form letter is that The date of the letteris- the date of the the business form uses the salutation and the signature, by day, month, and year, in that complimentary close. order. All margins and space between parts of If the exact name of an official is not known, heading and paragraphs are standardized. Punc- he or she may be addressed by title only, with tuation is used as sparingly as possible. Study "My dear Sir:" or "My dear Madam:" as the carefully the details of format of a navel letter in salutation. 1f there is doubt as to whether the figure 24-1. addressee is a man or a woman, the title "Mr." is used with the. name. If the 'marital status of the The body of a navalletter contains the woman addressed is unknown, the title "Miss" is substance or essential facts of the communica- used with the name. If correspondence is re- tion in simple, concise, impersonal, and tactful ceived from a women who identifies herself with language. There should be no repetition. Each the title "Ms," your response should be "Ms" paragraphshouldexpress ONE complete with her name. All titles in the address and thought in logical sequence. If necessary to add salutation, except Dr., Mr., and Mrs., are spelled to the clarity of a letter, put tables, diagrams, in full. and sketches in enclosures. The preferred form of the complimentary If a letter is in reply to another letter, answer close in the Department of the Navy is "Sin- ALL questions, expressed or implied. cerely yours," but in a few instances the more When drafting a letter to superiors of the formal and impersonal close "Very truly yours," person who will sign it, be careful about respect may be appropriate. and courtesy due them. For example, a junior The above material on correspondence covers officer always INVITES ATTENTION TO a almost everything you need to know on the special matter; he DOES NOT DIRECT ATTEN- subject for advancement to J03. However, when TION TO. you need additional information on the proper It is a good idea ALWAYS to make a rough preparation of correspondence, refer to the draft of a letter (double-spaced for convenience in correcting) for the signing officer to check DepartmentoftheNavyCorrespondence and review, as desired. Then type the letter Manual (SECNAV Instruction 5216.5 series). single-spaced with his suggestions included. These are the specific instructions for pre- MESSAGES paring and handling correspondence: A message is a written thought or idea (an Official correspondence should be typed or official communication), expressed briefly and printed. to the point, and transmitted by rapid means. A naval message should be used only when the Correspondence must be kept at minimum information is of an urgent nature and must be in number, copies, and content. transmitted rapidly. The ORIGINATOR of a messageisthe Official correspondence will be forwarded command by whose authority the message is through the chain of command or control, sent. The DRAFTER actually composes the unless otherwise stated by Navy Regulations or message for release. The RELEASING OFFI- competent authority. CER authorizes transmission of the message for 388 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

OPNAV 5210 141 (10v. $1) 100107. 771.11 10 Naval Speed /ester USE FOR URGENT DO NOTCLEAR THROUGH LETTERS. ONLY COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE

CHICK TYPO01 MAIL OANWMATION El'mutat El commutes° *Appropriate designation OOTRUCTIONS *Down and declassification Li AM El COMM= ea° TO Meow type pbooloboll le peneleeiblo sPACAAL DEuvere [Originator's code I. Roth Ail owes oval be appropriate for vioifot envelop Sc bulk ambles. es beefoled. loch* tO. Mitten Toes, elm Imost. Use dote sod brad* ea stades for window int elope adeneles. TIN Title of head of activity, name of I. Give priority to preemies. -ewes*, old wasp activity, mailing address of make& Avoid Onwoeoseumb i Tommie. activity CfsoniftweloW mmeeMMA malYWftWie ebleolpeetelerWleweevelope.000/1121WW. dPIW, eireolblonwhenbidboebblOWoolued.Mber slideraniloplialsumultevmd. to ItellmalL mmelleftersshould be poets on NP of INPdar cointponliama

Feld IttlANINCLA AND ANCLOSUNIII, II ANY; TOOT AND IDONATUDD /LOCI

*Subj: Brief topical statement of the subject of the speedletter *(Classification symbol)

*Ref: (a) Identification of referenced document

*(Classification symbol) lxxxxxxxxXxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx XXXXXXXXo XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXo

*(Classification symbol) Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.

NAME OF SIGNING OFFICIAL

lit*Encl (1) Description of material enclosed with speedletter (2) (SC) Description of material forwarded under separate cover

*Automatic time-phased downgrading and declassification notation

COAT TO *Title of information addressee *Title of second information addressee how' ADDRESS Title of head of activity, name of REPLY AS SHOWN AT LEFT. activity, mailing address of OR, REPLY HEREON AND activity REtURN

* Asterisks indicate items that may not be required *Appropriate designation

95.20' Figure 24.2. Navel speedletter form.

389 393 IJ i I

.,tr

I 1 t 2

- ALF. L.1,1,-nt. '1,14` nt.t Sa1111111 AIL 4,113 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 24 THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

NAVAL MESSAGE OPNa FORM PIO/ 29 My 34919/N 0101. 103.4001

NE ggggga' Name of authorised official,Wang°" Drafter Is nameINONBLITNI P*01 PAWLS MiliUmEgrade (if any), Acts Deeig Grade, ActOJTJAL____ 55331 reineo houvgD Iry CN1C110 IV 1 Aug ?3 1 14110401 NA OATIVTIME 40010 N "ASH 1/414101*11 91101111 10111N9 INFO

\Placean I in the appropriate ham

SPECIAL HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS (if gay)

FM Abbreviated title of originating command (Operating signals, if any, are put hers)

TO Abbreviated title(s) of the command(*) and/or activity addressed for action

INFO Abbreviated title(s) of the command(*) and/or activity addressed for information

CLASSIFICATION (Special handling and/or passing instructions, if any)

SUBJECT LINE (Brief as possible and limited to one line, plus the subject identification code)

A. Reference(s), 1:Mini:Mod by letter(s)

1. USE UPPER CASE WITH A MAXIMUM OF 65 SPACES PER LINE, MEASURED FROM THE LEFT- HAND MARGIN. PARAGRAPHS FULLOW THE SAME SEQUENCING AS THE NAVAL LETTER. IF TiOt MESSAGE IS CLASSIFIED, REFER TO THE SECURITY MANUAL FOR THE CORRECT'OP CODE.THIS CODE IS THEN INARTLII AT THE END OF THE MESSAGE.

10000LECODUCCOODUCCXXXXEUX . 0900 90 000 00 00099 9 9 .9 099009 99 90 0 000 OOOOOOOOO

lOGLXXXLCOODOOMOULXX=0=1003001=COLVXCGDOLX30000000OCCODOCOLMXILIXXX 90 9 00 9 0 00009 000000 00

Dist: Desired distribution appears here on the first page of the message.

pA11/11111 011091' UNCLASSIFIED OM.

31A7(165C) Figure 24.4,Naval message form,

391 395 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

and in the name of the originator. Usually the which indicates the time zone. Normally, the commanding officer the releasing officer, but date time group isthe time the originator he may delegate releasing authority if he wishes. delivered the message to the communications center for transmission. The group is assigned and inserted by the center. MESSAGE FORMAT

With a few exceptions, military messages sent Precedence by electrical telecommunications are arranged according Zo a standard joint form called the The precedence assigned to a message. is BASIC MESSAGE FORMAT. The form is sub- determined by the subject matter of the text stantially the same whether the message goes by and the time factor involved. The assignment is radiotelegraph, radiotelephone, manual teletype- the responsibility of the originator. There are writer, or by automatic tape equipment. This is true even though the format exists in four four precedence categories used to-specify the- versionsone adapted to the special require- relative order in which messages are to be ments of each of the primary transmission handledFLASH, IMMEDIATE,PRIORITY, media. Here we will study the radiotelegraph and ROUTINE. These categories indicate: message format, the one of first and most To the originator:The required speed of immediate importance. Communicationsrequiringexpeditious delivery of the message to the addressee. delivery normally are prepared fore transmission The relative as brief, concise messages. They contain three To communication personnel: principal parts: HEADING, TEXT, and END- order of message processing, transmission, and ING. On the message form, the classification delivery. assigned or the abbreviation UNCLAS is typed To the addressee:The relative order in or stamped in the same manner as for the naval which to note and./rr take necessary action on gt letter. the message. The heading of a naval message includes the following components: DATE -TIME GROUP, Multiple address messages having both action PRECEDENCE, ORIGINATOR, ACTION andinformationaddressees may either be ADDRESSEE, and INFO ADDRESSEES (IN- assigned a single precedence, in which case it FORMATION ADDRESSEES). The form of the indicates the precedence Ior the addressees, or messageanditstransmissionrequirements they may be assigned two precedences, one for dictate which components, elements, and con- all action addressees and a lower precedence for tents will be used in the heading. Figure 24-4 all information addressees. shows an example of a message blank. This is the Definitions of the four precedence categories form on which the original message is prepared are: when forwarded to communications for trans- FLASH (Z)Reserved for initial enemy con- mission. tact reports or special emergency operational combattraffic. FLASH messages are hand carried, processed, transmitted, and delivered in Date-time Group order received ahead of allother messages. Brevity is mandatory. (Time standard: not fixed. The date-time group is expressed. in six digits Handled as fast as humanly possible with an and a time zone suffix, plus an abbreviated objective of less than 10 minutes.) month and a two digit year (190800Z JUL 72). IMMEDIATE (0)Reserved for messages re- The first pair of digits denotes the date of the lating to situations which gravely affect the month; the second pair, the hour; the third pair, security of national/allied forces or populace the minutes; followed by the capitalized letter and which require immediate delivery to the 392 G. Z1 5 6 Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

1111111MIN. addressee(s). (Time standard: 30 minutes to 1 trict commandants also issue directives to subor- hour.) dinate commands. In addition there are the local PRIORITY (P)Reserved for messages which directives of your own ship or station. All of require expeditious action by the addressee(s) theseare numbered according tothe same and/or furnish essential information for the system to which the instructionNavy Marine conductofoperationsinprogresswhen Corps Standard Sub /ect Classification System, ROUTINE precedence will not suffice. (Time SECNAVINST 5210.11 (current series), is the standard: 1 to 6 hours.) key. ROUTINE (R)Reserved foralltypes of messages which are not of sufficient urgencyto justify a higher precedence, but must be de- PURPOSE OF THE SYSTEM livered to the addressee(s) without delay. (Time standard:3 hours to start of business the The use of this single Navywide numbering following day.) system for directives enables each naval activity receiving directives to:

PRESRELS Group directives by subjects and combine related subjects. The largest percent of message traffic which you will be required to preparefor transmission Distinguish between directives of a con- will be "PRESRELS." PRESREL is the standard tinuing nature and those of a brief duration. Navy communications abbreviation for a message news release. Obtain complete sets of instructions upon Most news releases with the dominant ele- activation or commissioning. ment of immediacy are hand delivered tolocal media from shore activities and ships in port. Determine by use of periodic checklists, However, when an important story breaks at sea, the current status and completeness of its set of or you have a news releaseoriginating from a directives. shore activity of immediate interest other than local,it is imperative that it reaches the news Determine, by use of subject indexes, what media by thefastest means available. News directives are in effect on a subject. releases of this type are normally transmitted by message to the nearest navaldistrict head- File directives (or keep them in a binder) quarters for dissemination to local media. and describe them as references by one easy For additional information on the preparation method. of messages (style, punctuation, symbols, abbre- Use the same numbering system for cor- viations, etc.) consult the communications de- respondence files as for directives. partment.

THE NAVY DIRECTIVES SYSTEM TYPES OF DIRECTIVES

Most of the directives concerning thepublic In format, Navy directives are naval fore; affairs field are issued by the Chiefof Informa- letters, except of course the occasional notice tion or the Secretary of the Navy.However, that is sent as a message. SECNAVInstruction there are numerous Navy directives issuedby the 5215.1 (The Navy Direr tives System) provides bureaus, systems commands, andoffices of the for three types of directives. Navy Department that might affect your'work INSTRUCTIONS contain information on a from time to time. continuing nature or require continuing action, Fleet, force, and type commanders anddis- or action which mustbe taken but cannot be

1 393a97 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 completed in less than 6 months. An instruction 13000-13999Aeronautical and Astronauti- has continuing reference value and is effective cal Material until the originator cancels it. NOTICES are directives of a one-time nature, These major subject groups are subdivided or those which contain information or action into primary, secondary, and sometimes tert4ary applicable for abrief time only (usually 6 breakdowns. Primary subjects are designated by months or less, but in no case more than one the last three digits (the hundred group) of the year). A notice has the same force and effectas code number. For example, in the public affairs an instruction but does not have permanent field, most correspondence falls within the 5700 reference value.It therefore contains a para- series. The major headings applicable to you graph which indicates when it shall be canceled. within the series are: When the exact length of timea notice is to remain in effect cannot be determined at the 5720 Public Relations time of issuance, the specific date for record 5721 Speeches purposes is set far enough in the future to allow 5722 Exhibits all necessary use of the notice. 5723 Guest Cruise Program Both instructions and notices are used to 5724 Fleet Home Town News Program prescribeorestablishpolicy,organization, 5725 Reserve Program methods, or procedures. Any activity may issue 5726 Community Relations them to personnel, commands, or activities 5727 Press Relations under its judisdiction. 5728 Audio and Visual (Motion and Still CHANGE TRANSMITTALS areusedto pictures, Radio and Television) transmit changes to instructions and notices. Each transmittal describes the nature of the change ittransmits, and gives directions for PUBLIC AFFAIRS FILES making them. The success of any file system can be measured by thefiler'sability tofilematerial SUBJECT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM correctly where it can be located promptly by anyone in the office. The filing must also be The Navy-Marine Corps Standard Subject kept current and not allowed to age in a Classification Systemcontains a list of numerical "to-be-filed-later" basket. subjectclassificationcodes, composed of 13 The amount and variety of files kept by your major subjectgroups. Each of these major office will depend on the mission of the com- subject groups is designated by a 4 or 5 digit mand and the tasks handled by your office. numeric code. The major groups are: Since information is often needed without warning and without delay, an incomplete fileor 1000-1999Military Personnel one into which documents have been thrown 2000-2999Communications without sorting into chronological or other 3000-3999Operations and Readiness order may be as useless as none at all. The 4000-4999Logistics system must be uniform, and everybody in the 5000-5999GeneralAdministrationand office should be acquainted with it. Generally, Management your files will contain: 6000-6999Medicine and Dentistry 7000-7999Financial Management Records of the command's past and present 8000-8999Ordnance Material publicaffairsactivities,includingcorres- 9000-9999- -Ship Design and Ships' Ma- pondence and material regarding future events; terial and 10000-10999General Material Reliable, up-to-date reference material that 11000-11999Facilities and Activities Ashore will enable the staff to do its work more 12000-12999Civilian Personnel efficiently. a9s394 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE AMMINIM

134.82.9 Figure 24.5.A picture of a ship underway is best for public affairs use such as ininformation kits. ,

The following files are considered essential, When the command is an aircraft squadron, even for a small public affairs office: photos usually feature representative pictures of itsplanes in flight (figure 24-6) and general scenes of squadron structures such as hangers COMMAND FILES and other points of interest. Likethe command history,biographical The command file contains reference material sketches of the commanding and executive concerning the command, including a command officers, or other senior officers, should be brief history and statistics; biographies of the CO, and clearly written. Seldom should they exceed XO, and other senior personnel of the com- two pages of double-spaced typewritten copy. mand; records of change of command cere- The sketches should feature pertinent and inter- monies; and related photographs. esting facts from the officers' careers. The command history contains a brief, clearly Most biographies and histories are written in written resume of the command's mission and chronological order, beginning with the commis- activities since it was commissioned. Interest- sioning date and continuing until the present. ing statistics on the command are useful. However, itis sometimes a good pro-ole to Photographs are always in demand. If the write histories and biographies using the 1../erted command is a ship, photos usually feature scenes pyramid structure, with the most important of the vessel underway, preferably three-quarter facts at the beginning. This enables newsmen to aerial bow shots. See figure 24-5. decide what factsare more important than At shore installations, photos usually feature others if they are unfamiliar with the Navy. general scenes of points of interest around the Scynepublicaffairsoffices,especiallyin command. aviation commands, also maihcain biographies of 395 399 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

JOURNALIST 3 & 2

3.111 Figure 244.Aircraft photographs for public affairs purposes should be in-flight and easily recognizable. allofficersserving onthe staff or inthe One of the primary uses of the material command. Where thisisrequired,itis not containedinthe commandfileisfor the necessary to have written versions of the biog- preparation of media information kits. raphies on file. A completed copy of the officer biographyform (NAVPERS 979) on each officer is usually sufficient. These forms may be ordered from normal supply channels and filled MEDIA RELATIONS FILE out by the officers when reporting aboard. Maintain photos along with the biographies The media relations file contains a listing when possible.Usually a 4 X 5 head and with addresses and telephone numbersof all shoulders shot will satisfy the needs of most media in the local area, statistics about them, news media. However, you will need 8 X 10 and the names, addresses, and phone numbers of double-weight mattes for the TV people. It is keypersonnel.Italso includes information very important that these photo files are kept regarding deadlines, broadcast times, and special current as far as promotions, transfers and so requirements for copy and photos. Some com- forth are concerned. mands divide their media list into. cases. For 396 C 400 Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE example, List #1 would be local commercial staff. It also contains "canned" presentations on media; List #2, local military media, and so the command andallsorts of background forth.Chapter 3 of this manual contains a material for future speeches. All large commands complete study on media relations. Refer to and staffs maintain a good speech reference file chapter 3 when setting up your media relations which is used quite frequently by officers on the file. staff.

COMMUNITY RELATIONS FILE FUTURE FILE The community relations file is necessary for PAOs planning community relations programs. The future file contains a current listing of all It contains the names, addresses and phone events that have been scheduled or planned for numbers of civic leaders and community groups the future, such as an open house, change of with which the command maintains contacts. command, etc. The future fileis discussed in Also,it should contain a study of the com- more detail in chapter 4. munity, including pertinent facts, and so forth. See appropriate section in chapter 22 of this manual. MATTERS PENDING FILE

PROJECT FILE The matters pending file contains notes and reminders on pending ideas that may be useful A project fileis a file of past, present, and eventuallyfor news releases,feature stories, future projects involving the command. It con- news twists for special events, and other public cerns such special events as open houses, mili- affairs activity. The file also contains reminders taryparades and ceremonies, holiday obser- on matters to bring up at staff meeting, con- vances, dependents' cruises and all other projects ferences,andconsultationswiththecom- listedundertheSpecialEvents portion of manding officer. chapter 22. A separate file for each should be maintained. CORRESPONDENCE AND MEMOS Itis important that files be kept on the paperwork and planning that go into each In many commands, all official correspon- special event. This information can be put to denceisfiledcentrally, in one location. In good use as reference material later when a others, files are decentralized. Each department similar event is scheduled. or office is responsible formaintaining its own FORCES AND SERVICES FILE files on subjects under its cognizance. Regardless of where correspondence dealing The forces and services file contains photo- with public affairs is filed, you should become graphs of, and fact sheets on, the Navy Depart- acquainted with the filing system. You should ment, the district, fleet, force, or type command be able to locate correspondence immediately to which your command is attached, andmili- when it is needed, whether it is located in your taryVIPs.Italsocontainsinformation of office or in the central files. referende value concerning the Army, Air Force, You should keep two copies of all'outgoing Marine Corps, and Coast Guard. This file pro- correspondence originated by your office and vides good background material that can be tied signed by the public affairs officer: one in the in in with stories regarding your command. master outgoing correspondence file, and one the particular related subject or projectfile. If SPEECH FILE the correspondence is originated by your office, butsigned bytheofficerin command or The speech file contains copies of allprepared authenticated by another officer on his staff, speeches and other presentations deliveredby you should maintain one copyin the appro- the officer in command or other officersof the priate file. 397 401 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

QUERY RECORD Date: 23 February 1973 Time: 0815 Callen Miss Edith Francis Organisation: The Norfolk Sentinel Phone:526 1563

IC)uery: How many ships have been named America, and 1 where was the aircraft carrier America built?

Reply: Five ships have been named America: a 1782 [-- gunship scheduled to be skippered by John Paul Jones

but later given to France; the winner of the 1852

America's Cup Race; and two pleasure liners modified

to carry troops during the World Wars.

The aircraft carrier USS America (CV-66) was built

by the Newport News Shipbuilding and Drydock Company

and is the first naval warship named America.

ISource of Information:

Command Historian (LCdr. R. L. Bakett)

Reply Given To:Miss Francis By: J03 F. M. Hudson

Mote: 23 February 1973 Time: 0830

166.185 Figure 24.7.A sample query record sheet.

40;',. 398 Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

A copy of a piece of incoming correspon-and in planning other programs. It often indi- dence should be maintained by the public affairs cates how many releases are being used. office ifit directly affects a current or future Normally, a public affairs office has subscrip- project. If at a!1 possible, get a duplicate made oftions to all local printed media to which material all incoming correspondence concerning public is frequently released. One of your first tasks affairs at your command. The more complete after reporting to the office each morning might your files are, the smoother you can operate. be to screen and clip the daily papers for articles Correspondence routing and control are very about your command, or for that matter, any important. Incoming correspondence and other story concerning the Navy which might be of paperwork first goes to the public affairs officer, value in carrying out your public affairs program. who than routes it to other office staff mem-or be of interest to the CO. bers.If correspondence is routed to you for action, make sure you follow through on it PHOTOGRAPHIC FILE without being told. If it is routed to you merely for information or filing, keep it moving. It All negatives of "Official U.S. Navy Photo- should not gather dust in your incoming basket graphs" arc normally retained by the ship or You might find yourself in a situation where station photo lab for a period of time, then you pick up and prepare incoming official public forwarded by the lab to the Naval Photographic affairs mail for office routing. When incoming Center (NPC), Washington, for permanent filing. mail is received, attach a routing slip and get it Frequently used negatives, such as thoseof into the PAO's or senior JO's incoming basket as the commanding officer, the command, etc., are soon as possible. retained by the local lab. Normally, a public affairs office has no need to maintain its own ALIBI FILE negative files. Filing negatives is the responsibility of the local lab or NPC. The alibi file contains carbon or "alibi" copies Some offices order an extra print for their of all written material released to the news own files every time a photorelease is made. media.Italso contains Query Records (see Although this practiceisnecessary in some figure 24-7) of information released orally. .In instances, in general,itis wasteful and is a addition, this file includes approval and release duplication of the photo lab's files. Instead of slips for controversial material on which security keeping extra prints, captions with the assigned clearance was requited. The approval or release negative number of the photo used should be slips are attached directly to the alibi copy. In maintained. When required, you can order extra other words, this file is a record of what was printsby referringtothe propernegative releasedtogether with the authroity for the number. release. Should a release be questioned later, the Maintaining negative numbers rather than PAO can justifytheaction he took from prints applies only to news release photographs. material in the alibi file. You should always maintain an adequate supply of command photos to assemble several dozen CLIPPINGS FILE media information kits when the need arises. If it is necessary for your office to file extra The clippings file contains clippings and tear- prints of news release photos, they should be sheets of stories that have been released and filed by release numbers rather than by subject. have appeared in print. The clippings should be In cases where extra prints must be filed, for mounted neatly and kept up to date. They are economy's sake, a contact print rather than an frequently routed to the commanding officer, enlargement should be used. It is cheaper to file department heads, or other interested officers, a small print in a negative preserver,with the then returned to the public affairs office for negative number on the outside and a copyof permanent filing. This file is useful in evaluating the caption inside with the print, than to file an the effectiveness of public information program 8 X10 inch photo. 399 403 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 0 Rammer lelno 1.35t No. DATE STORY SLU &LI OE SERV1cEp 11 -73 28 TAO TLA&Si41P \its ITS -Rio I 18-735fEZ,AOMI MCCORD Ozv.) TO COMM 1)AXE II,IC 1a- '73 20 ftB,Gies,S,AMLEs ToWS 145K. V2PUP1,1r,ilr

LEGEND:

(:) This is the release number assigned to the story.How releases are numbered is covered in Chapter 4.

OThis is the date the story is released.

(.0 This is the story's sIt.1.ine. It describes the story's subject in a few words.

(j This column indicates the news media to which the release was distributed.

165.186 Figure 24.8. A sample news release log sheet.

Every office also accumulatesa number of an 8" X 10" ruled ledger which is stocked by miscellaneous pictures during thecourse of most Navy supply rooms. Figure 24-8 shows a business. If these picturescan be used in some sample of a typical log and entries. The columns way in the future, they should be filed. If there are lettered, and the information contained in is no possible use for them, they should be each is described: discarded. When filing miscellaneous pictures, As you can see from studying figure 24-8, the filethemundergeneralsubjectheadings News Release Log isa valuable record.In ("Carrier Operations," "Sea Evolutions," "Men addition to giving you all the pertinent facts at Work," "Recreational Facilities," "Sports," about the releases, it also enables you to keep and so forth). If identifying informationcon- track of releases disseminated. The log is indis- cerning the scene and the people involved is pensable as an aid in compiling reports required available, file it with the picture. of most public affairs activities. The log also facilitates the filing of alibi copy and photos,if your command follows the practice of filing release photos. NEWS RELEASE LOG Alibi copy can be filed in consecutive order according to release number. If you ever have to Although there is no "official" method oflook up an old release, consult the log first for recording news releasedfrom public affairsthe release number, and then look the number offices, each office must employ some method up in your alibi file. This also applies to photo of registering its news releases. The simplest and release files. Pictures can be filed according to most effective means is the News Release Log. release number and the same method may be An ideal news release log can be made by using followed. 4040° Chapter 24THEPUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

All entries in the log, of course, should be The following should be readily available to neat and legible. Pen and ink entries are prefer- the public affairs staff, ideally in the public able to pencil entries. Each JO who prepares a affairs office itself: story or picture for releaseis reponsible for making the entry in the log himself. U.S. Navy Regulations.

Department of the Navy supplement to the Some Filing Tips DOD Information Security Program Regulation (OPNAV Instruction 5510.1 series). The main source of information concerning the Navy filing system is SECNAV Instruction NavalOrientation(NAVTRA16138 5211.3 series. series). Here are a few tips to keep in mind: Standard World Atlas. File drawers should be labeled to describe their contents. Current World Almanac. Each file folder should be neatly labeled. Neither folders nor drawers should be allowed Manual on protocol (if it is expected that to become jam packed. the command will have distinguished visitors, Make sure that, material being filed corre- especially foreigners). sponds with the folder label. File papers facing forward, chronologically To round out a good public affairs reference and with the latest date on top. library,the following books and periodicals Use standard file fasteners rather than staples (including the manual you are now reading) are to bind papers. suggested : File papers so that the edges do not protrude Department of the Navy Correspondence beyond the edge of the folder. Manual.

PA OFFICE REFERENCE LIBRARY Department of the Navy Publications and Printing Regulations. Every public affairs office maintains certain officialpublications such as theU.S. Navy WritingGuide for NavalOfficers Public AffairsRegulations. These references are (NAVTRA 10009 series). an absolute necessity. In addition, eact office receives copies of instructions (mostly in the Dictionary of U.S. Military Terms for Joint 5720 series) which involve public affairs or Usage (Short title: JD), JCS Pub-1, 1 Dec 1964, command evolutions. These publications and available through Navy supply channels. instructions must be kept up to date. As changes, additions, or'deletions arrive, they must Journalist 1 & C,(NAVTRA 10295 series). be entered. You may get the job occasionally. Make sure the entries are made promptly, neatly Manual of Naval Photography. and correctly. If you delay the entries unnecessarily, tlie public affairs officer may find himself Photographer'sMate 3 & 2,(NAVTRA using outmoded or superseded material. This can 10355 series). be very embarrassing. In addition to PA Regs, every PAO office is Photographer'sMate1 & C, (NAVTRA required to have: 10375 series). A standard dictionary.(Preferably, one Illustrator Draftsman 3 & 2,(NAVTRA dictionary for each desk.) 10469 series).

4O 401 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Lithographer 3 & 2, (NAVTRA 10451- history of the countries concerned. series)

Lftltographer1 & C (NAVTRA 10454 OFFICE EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES series) Furniture and suppliesforpublicaffairs An encyclopedia. offices are supplied by the command.

Roget's Thesaurus. EQUIPMENT Familiar Quotations, Bart lefts. In addition to general office furniture and Detailed maps of the command area (in equipment suchastypewriters,desks, and addition to the atlas listed above). chairs, the public affairs office:

Fact Books (in addition to World Almanac Must have access to a copying machine, listed above). mimeograph or other duplicating machine, and a camera and photographic laboratory. Require- American Forces Radio and Television ments or larger public affairs offices may make Broadcast Guide. it necessary that one or all of these be part of their own facilities. Armed Forces News Style Guide. May, depending on the demands made on the office, need one or more of the following: Textbooks and style manuals of grammar, tape recorder, additional cameras, projectors, English usage, journalism, and public relations and screens for motion pictures and slides. techniques. Musthaveadequatecommercialand House Magazine Directory. internal telephones. For shore command public affairs offices, this is a first essential, since many Writer's Market. calls are made and received daily, sometimes on an urgent basis. Public Relations in Action by Allen H. Center, McGraw-Hill. SUPPLIES A chronology of the U.S. Navy by David A well-organized office always has enough M. Cooney, Franklin Watts. supplies on hand to operate efficiently. A good practice is to keep a running inventory of the The Ships and Aircraft of the United States supplies you use. After a while, you will know Fleet, U.S. Naval Institute. the average requirements for paper, stencils, correction fluid, file folders, pencils, notebooks, Periodicals, both Navy and commercially- typewriter ribbons, scotch tape, film, staples, published, on the Navy and current affairs of and the many other necessary office supplies. Navy interest. This includes monthly magazines, Whenever your stock runs low, order more. But and ship or station newspapers from other do not wait until you are all out to place the commands. order. You may run out of something right in the middle of an important job. Then it will be For ships visiting foreign ports and com- too late. Every JO in the office should know mands frequently visited by foreigners, a manual how the local supply system operates. Learn of protocol or etiquette and reference books on how to use supply catalogs and how to make out the culture,customs, and general and naval requisitions and printing requests.

402

. 40G Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE IM

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE USE OF OFFICIAL VEHICLES

Some co nmands will provide you a dr;ver and You often hear the expression "preventive a vehicle when you need transportation. Other maintenance" inthe Navy.It simply means commands will provide only the vehicle. Because taking care of your equipment properly and of the nature of your work as a JO, it is almost a preventing any serious damage before it has a necessity that you get a Navy vehicle operator's chance to occur. The most importantpieceof equipment license. The public affairs office is authorized probably is your typewriter. Make sure you keep use of official vehicles, both on an emergency itin good operating condition. Keep the keys basis (such as the need to get an important spot clean with a daily brushing and a few dabs of news release to a newspaper before its deadline) cleaning fluid. Use an occasional drop of oil to and on a routine basis (for such purposes as keep it running smoothly. Swab the cylinder coveringastoryout of walking distance, with a bit of alcohol from time to time to meeting an official visitor at the airport and prevent dirt streaks on the paper. Change the bringing him to the command, or escorting a typewriter ribbon when necessary. Be sure your media representative around the station). typewriter is properly placed on the desk, or secured to the well type of desk, so that it will SECURITY not fall. In lifting a typewriter, grip it by its case, NEVER by its carriage. Keep the type- The security of the United States in general, writer covered when not in use. A typewriter's and of naval operations in particular, depends worst, enemies are dust and rubber particles left partly upon safeguarding classified information. by erasures. To save trouble with rubber parti- Allhands,therefore, must become security cles, move the typewriter carriage as far to the conscious; security mindedness should become left or right as possible when making erasures. second nature. This way, the particles fall harmlessly on the desk, and not into the delicate mechanism of the typewriter. APPLICATION OF SECURITY Another very important piece of equipment, ifyou're being used primarily as a photo- Not all Navymen are required to have a journalist,is your camera. Preventive mainte- security clearance, but not having one does not nance on the various cameras was covered in relieve you of the requirement to safeguard any chapter 13. classifiedinformation you may possess.All When it comes to office duplicating machines, persons having knowledge, possession, or control the best preventive maintenance measure is to of classified information are fully responsible for learn how to operate them properly. Never its protection at all times. attempt to operate an unfamiliar machine. Read As a Navy JO, your primary concern with the manufacturer's instruction book and always classified material is to guard against security ask someone to check you out. As faras violations through Navy news releases. maintenance and cleaning of office machines are Both public information and securityare concerned, the best rule again is to follow the command responsibilities and often the com- manufacturer's instructions. In most cases, there mandiscon frontedwithcontradictory will be a print shop at your command to do alternativesto keep the public informed and to your duplicating chores. But, in some cases, you keep classified information secure. The accom- will be the "printer" as well as writer, typist, modation of the two competing values requires and so forth. verydelicatehandling.Effective securityis

40'98 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 essential to protect information classified in the fine of up to $10,000, imprisoned for up to 10 interests of national security. Since there is no years, or both. Additionally, offenders are there- censorshipof thepress,each commandis after ineligible to hold any office or position of responsibleforsafeguarding SECURITY AT trust created by the constitution or laws of the THE SOURCE within their jurisdictions. United States. Violations of security regulations can bring heavy penalities under various espionage laws and other Federal statutes. Because of their LANGUAGE OF SECURITY complexity we cannot present in detail all the laws pertaining to security; instead, a summary Classified information is defined in theInfor- is given of the penalties for various offenses. mation Security Program Regulation,DOD Whoeverobtainsnationalsecurityinfor- 5200.1-R, as "official information which has mation, with the knowledge or belief that the been determined to require, in the interest of information will be used to the injury of the national security, protection against unautho- United States or to the advantage of any foreign rized disclosure and which has beeno designation, may befined up to$10,000 and nated." imprisoned up to 10 years, or both. The same CLASSIFIED MATERIAL, is "an.matter, penalty is provided for losing or failing to report document, product, or substance on or in which the loss of classified material. classified information is recorded or embodied." Whoever delivers to a foreign government, or You can see that this latter definition allows for to any persons within a foreign country, any including such things as phonograph records, information or material relating to the national taperecordings,photographs,andother security with the intent or reason to believe that* materials in addition to correspondence, publica- itisto be used to the injury of the United tions, and other written and printed matter. States, shall be punished by death, by imprison- To CLASSIFY information means to deter- ment for any number of years, or for life. mine that it needs special security measures, to In time of war, whoever obtains or attempts place it in the classification category in which it to obtain security information, with the intent will receive protection appropriate to its con- of delivering the information to the enemy, shall tent,to markit accordingly, and to notify be punished by death, by imprisonment for any interestedcommandsoftheclassification number of years, or for life. assigned. Unauthorized photographing or sketching of ACCESS to classified matter is the ability and certain vital defense installations can result in a opportunity to obtain knowledge or possession fine of $1000, one year in prison, or both. of classified information. An individual does not Anyone disclosing to unauthorized persons have access to classified information merely by anyclassified information concerning codes, being in a place where itis kept, provided the cryptographic devices, or communication intel- security measures which are in effect prevent ligence may be fined up to $10,000 and impri- him from gaining knowledge of possession of soned up to 10 years or both. such classified information. Willful violation of Department of Defense A CLEARANCE is an administrative deter- regulationsconcerningthesecurityof any mination by competent authority that an indi- property under the administration of the De- vidual is eligible for access to classified infor- partment of Defense subjects the offender to a mation of a specific classification category. This fine of up to $5,000, one year in prison, or actionis normally taken by the commanding both. officer and is made a matter of record by a It is unlawful for any officer or employee of letter, a copy of which is placed in the person's the United States to communicate to any person service record. The highest level of classified representingaforeign government, or to .a matter to be handled is named, such as "for member of any Communist organization, infor- Confidential" or "through Secret." Eligibility mation classified as affecting the security of the for clears, ce is established by an investigation of United States. Offenders shall be punished by a the person's background, including his actions, 404 408 Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRSOFFICE weleass his family, and his other associates, for anumber SAFEGUARDING CLASSIFIEDMATTER of years (in some cases for his entirelife). or materialclassified Becausethisinvestigationtakes some time, Officialinformation commanding officers frequently giveinterim underthe Information SecurityProgram Regu- clearance, pending receipt of the investigation lationmust be afforded the levelof protection report. Interim clearance is given,of course, against unauthorized disclosure commensurate only when the person is needed at oncefor work with the level of classification assignedunder the with classified matter when it appears likelythat varying conditions which may arise in con- the results of the investigation will befavorable. nection with itsuse, dissemination, storage, movement or transmission, anddestruction. NEED TO KNOW is the necessity for access to knowledge of, or possessionof classified information in order carry out official mili- Policy Responsi- tary or other governmental duties. The compromise of classifiedinformation bility for determining whether aperson's duties security. The classi- presents a threat to the national require that he possess or have access to seriousness of that threat must bedetermined fied information and whether he isauthorized lu possessor of the and appropriate measure taken to negate or receiveitrests upon the minimize the adverse effect of such a compro- classified information and not uponthe prospec- mise. Simultaneously, action mustbe taken to tive recipient. regain custody of the material and toidentify COMPROMISE is the known or suspected and correct the cause of the compromise. exposure of classifiedinformation or material to an unauthorized person. Responsibility of Discoverer To DOWNGRADE is to determine thatclassi- fied information requires, in theinterests of Any person who has knowledgeof the actual national security, a lower degree ofprotection or possible compromiseof classified information against unauthorized disclosure thancurrently must immediately report thecircumstances to a provided. designated responsible official. To UPGRADE is to determinethat certain classified information requires, in theinterests Overall Program Responsibility of national security, a higherdegree of protectionagainstunauthorized disclosure than The head of each Departmentof Defense currently provided. component is responsiblefor the establishment DECLASSIFICATION is the determination and maintenance of anInformation Security and sufficient that cia.qified information nolonger requires, in Program, with adequate funding the intk.,ests of national security, anydegree of experienced staff at all levels, designed to ensure disclosure, effective compliance with theprovisions of the protectionagainstunauthorized throughout his coupled with a removal orcancellation of the InformationSecurity Regulation classification designation. component. The definitions listed above arethose considered most necessary to yourunderstanding of security. Should you encounterother security CATEGORIES OF CLASSIFIED terms which have notbeen explained in this INFORMATION section, refer tothe Information SecurityPro- DOD 5200,1-R or itsDepart- The three categories of classifiedinformation, gram Regulation importance, are: Top ment of the Navysupplement OPNAV Instruc-. in descending order of tion 5510.1 Series. Secret, Secret, and Confidential.

405 409 JOURNALIST 3 &2

TOP SECRET.Top secretreferstothat dentialis whether its unauthorized disclosure national security information or material which could cause DAMAGE to national security. requires the highest degree of protection. The test for assigning Top Secret classification is Restricted Data whether its unauthorized disclosure couldrea- sonablybeexpectedtocause EXCEP- The term RESTRICTED DATA isnot a TIONALLY GRAVE DAMAGE tonational category of classification but is assigned because security, such as: of the general subject of the documents. It applies to all data concerning (1) the design, Armed hostilities against the United States manufacture, or utilization of atomicweapons; or its allies. . (2) the production of special nuclear material;or (3) the use of special nuclear material in the Disruptionofforeignrelationsvitally production of energy unless such dataor affecting national security. Material have been declassified or removed from the category by the Atomic Energy Commission. The compromise of vital national defense Information marked Restricted Data is classified plans or complex crytologic and communica- (Top Secret, Secret, or Confidential), according tions intelligence system. to the protection it should receive. It is declassified when the Atomic Energy Commission Therevelationofsensitiveintelligence decides it may be published without undue risk operations. to the defense and security of the Nation.

The disclosure of scientific or technological FORMERLY RESTRICTED DATA.The developments vital to national security. term Formerly Restricted Data applies to classified information which (a) has been removed fromtheRestricted Data category by the SECRET.Secretreferstothenational Atomic Energy Commission, and (b) cannot be sec y information or material which requires releasedtoforeignnationalsexcept under ubstantial degree of protection. The test for special international agreements. assigningSecrctclassificationis whether its unauthorized disclosure could reasonably be expectedtocause SERIOUS DAMAGE to Official Use Only national security, such as: Certain other official information, which is The disruption of foreign relations signifi- not within the purview of the rules for safe- cantly affecting the national security. guarding information in the interests of national security may also require protection in accor- The significant impairment of a program or dance with 'law or in the public interest. Such policy directly related to the national security. information should be marked "For Official Use Only" as provided for in SECNAV Instruction The revelation of a significantmilitary 5570.2 series. plans or intelligence operations. The most important thing for you to learn about the categories of classified matter at this The coma vise of significant scientific or time is that each category represents a degree of technological developments relating to national damage to the Nation that could be done by security. lettingthismaterial get into the hands of unauthorized persons. The category also deter- CONFIDENTIALConfidential refers to that mines how the material shall be handled and the national security information or material which measures used for its protection, as you will see requires protection. The test for assigning Confi- later in this chapter.

406 r.410 Chapter 24--THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE

CLASSIFICATION MARKING or subject classification. In all cases theinitial of the classification assigned to atitle,subject, Eachclassifieddocument, photograph, or abstract,index,term,orcomponent, other material must be conspicuously marked or STANDING ALONE, is indicated in parentheses stamped with the category of its classification. It immediately following the item, using one of the is important to identify individually items of following notations: (U), (C), (S), (TS). When information which require protection and then appropriate the symbols (RD) or (FRD) are to consider whether compromise of the docu- added for Restricted Data or Former Restricted ment or material as a whole would create a Data. It is not necessary to assign one of these greater degree of damage than compromise of notations to the subject of a letter, endorse- the items individually. The classification of the ment, or memorandum of a transmittal if a document or material must be the classification statement is included indicating that they are that provides protection for the highest classi- unclassified upon removal of enclosures or basic fied item of information or for the document or material. material as a whole, whichever is higher. REFERENCED MATERIALExcept as pre- The purpose of marking required for classified cludedby requirements of communications material serves to record the proper classifi- security, documents which refer to classified cation,to inform recipients of the assigned information need not bear the security markings classification, to indicate the level of protection of the referenced material if reference is made required, to indicate the information that must only by means such asfilenumber, dates, be withheld from unauthorized persons, to date-time group, other identifying symbols, or provide a basis for derivative classification, and subjects (provided the subject, standing alone, is to facilitate downgrading and declassification not classified). actions. See figure 24-9, PARAGRAPHSAllclassifieddocuments, Upon assignment of a classification category including correspondence and electrically trans- to information, it is immediately marked clearly mitted messages, must be paragraph marked. and conspicuously on all documents and other When classifying paragraphs, the appropriate material and parts thereof which contain classi- classification marking is placed in parentheses to fied information. the left of the paragraph immediately following On documents the classification marking of the numerical designation or preceding the first TOP SECRET, SECRET, or CONFIDENTIAL is word if the paragraph is unnumbered. If desired, stamped, printed or written in capital letters the symbols (TS), (S), and (C) may be used. In (not typing alone) that are larger than those in the case of unclassified information the symbols the text of the document. When practicable, the (U) or FOUO), as appropriate may be used, markings are red in color. On other types of When restricted data or formerly restricted data material, the classification marking is stamped. is involved, the symbols (RD) or (FRD) may be printed, written, painted, or affixed by means of added bo the appropriate classification symbol. a tag,sticker,decal, or similar device in a When different items of information in one conspicuous manner. If marking is not physi- paragraph require different classification, but cally possible on the material, written notice of segregation into subparagraphs or separate para- the assigned classification is provided to recipi- graphs would destroy continuity or context, the ents of the material. highest classification required must be applied to that paragraph. DOCUMENTS Whenever paragraph markings are impracticable, a statement must be included on the TITLES AND SUBJECTSRegardless of the document or in its text identifying the parts of overall classification of a classified document the documentthatareclassified and their (except Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) origi- assigned classification, or an appropriate classi- nated documents), the originator assigned a title fication guide must be attached as part of the di BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS SECRET WASHINGTON, D.C. 20350 *114 REPLY REFER TO *5510 Ser. 09B/52378 25 Aug 1971 REGISTERED SECRETDowngraded to Confidential when encl. (2) removed

*From: Chief of Naval Operations Tos Chief of Naval Personnel (Pere 111)

Subs Paragraph markings; security classification of (U)

*Refs (a) SECNAV (C) ltr SOIA0 C1234 of 25 Jul 1971

*Finals (1) OPNAVINST 5510,1C, Department of the Navy Security Manual (2) OPNAVINST 005510.68C, Manual for the Disclosure of Classified Military Information to Foreign Governments (U)

1. (U) Paragraphs of classified lettersare marked to show the degree of classification, by placing the appropriate markings in parentheses to the left of the paragraph, Immediately following the numerical designation, or preceding the first word if the paragraph is unnumbered.

2. (C) The symbols (TS) for Top Se (S) for Secret, (C) for Confidential, (FOLIO) for For Off . % IN'' , and(U) for Unclassified are used as appropriate.Who 4'1 . /1 to or Formerly Restricted Data is involved, the s ,Z\A.r.v.4111D)may be added to the appropriate classificat1

3. (C) When different i s of information in one paragraph require different classification, but segregation into subparagraphs or separate paragraphs would destroy continuity or context, the highest classification required shall be applied to that paragraph.

4. (U) Further guidance may be found in reference (a) and in enclosures (1) and (2).

J. S. K. MANN

Group 4 Downgraded at 3year intervals; declassified after 12 years SECRET FtitiCATEI ITIMI THAT MAT NOT UNWED. SECRET

Figure 249,A sampleclassified naval letter, 98.18 408 r 41 Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE 111.11M111111111k. document. When it is known that the prospec- of a specified level of classification isinvolved. tive recipients of a document are in possession The recording material and containersalso shall of an appropriate classification guide, reference be marked conspicuously. to the guide in the body of the document may be made in lieu of attaching the guide. PREPARATION FOR TRANSMITTAL

Photographs, Films and Recordings, Except for transmission locally within a ship or office, Top Secret,Secret, and Confidential Photographs,films,includingnegatives, matter must be enclosed in opaque,double recordings, and their containers shall be marked sealed containers or envelopes. The inner con- in such a manner as to assure that any recipient tainer must be plainly stamped toshow the or viewer will know that classifiedinformation classification of the material. ind must besealed of a specified level of classification is involved. so that any evidence oftampering can be readily detected. If the material is going to an activity PHOTOGRAPHS Negativesandpositives outside the Department of Defense, the inner shall be marked with the appropriate classifi- container must carry the complete address. The cation markings and kept in containers bearing outer envelope bears only the customaryad- conspicuous classification markings. Roll nega- dresses of the addressee and addressor. It should tives shall be marked at the beginning and end of NOT show a classification marking or any other each strip and single negatives marked with the kind of data or mark which might invitespecial appropriateclassification.Each photographic attention. printshall be marked with the appropriate Classified written matter is folded or packed classification at the top and bottom of the face so that the text will notbe in direct contact side and where practicable the center of the with the inner cover. reverse side. Caution must beexcercised when using self-processing film or paper to photograph or reproduce classified materie,since the nega- TRANSMISSION OF CLASSIFIED MATTER tive of the last exposure may remain in the is camera.Allcomponentpartsof thelast Transmission of TOP SECRET matter exposure shall be removed anddestroyed as limited to the following means only: classified waste or the camera shall be protected as classified material. UnitedStatesMilitarypersonneland TRANSPARENCIES AND SLIDESThe Government civilian employees who havebeen applicable classification markings shall be shown cleared for access to Top Secret information. on each transparency or slide.Other applicable Personnel whose primary duties involve the markings, when practical, shall be shown on the transmitting or escorting of Top Secretmaterial border, holder or frame. shall be specifically designated in writing. MOTION PICTURE FILMSClassified motion picture films shall be marked at the WithinUnitedStatesboundariesonly, beginning and end of each reel by titles bearing Department of Defense contractor employees the appropriateclassification. Such markings Mac havebeenspecificallydesignated and shall be visible when projected on the screen. approved in accordance with the Departmentof Reels shall be kept in containers bearing con- Defense Industrial Security Manual. spicuous classification markings. (ARFCOS). RECORDINGSRecordings, sound or elec- Armed Forces Courier Service tronic, shall contain at the beginning andend a statement of the assignedclassification which will provide adequate assurance that anylistener Accompanied State Department diplomatic or receiver will knowthat classified information pouch.

409 413 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Electrical means when encryptedina Air Force Postal Service facilities provided that crypto-system approved for encryption of Top the material does not at any time pass out of Secret information. United States citizen control and does not pass through a foreign postal system. Electrical means in unencrypted form over Protected Wire line Distribution Systems which have been approved by the Director. Defense Transmission of CONFIDENTIAL material may be effected by: Communications Agency or his designee. Any means approved for the transmission Transmission of SECRET material may be of Secretmaterial.However, United States effected by: Postal Service registered mail shall be used for Confidential only where indicated below. Any of the means approved for the transmission of Top Secret,exceptthat Secret United States Postal Service certified or material other than that containing cryptological first class mail within United States boundaries. informationmaybeintroducedintothe United States Postal Service registered mail shall ARFCOS onlywhenthecontrol of such be used for (1) Confidential material or NATO, material cannot otherwise be maintained in U.S. SEATO and CENTO; (2) FPO or APO ad- custody. dressees; and (3) other addressees when the originatorisuncertainthat their location is Appropriately cleared U.S. military and within the United States boundaries. Use of civilian personnel. return postal receipts on a case-by-case basis is authorized. Appropriatelyclearedcontractorem- ployees for transmission within the 48 con- tinguous States and the District of Columbia and STOWAGE on flights between such areas and Alaska, Hawaii and U.S. Territories, or wholly within Alaska, Classified material is stored only at locations Hawaii and U.S. Territories.In other areas, wherefacilitiesareavailableforits secure contractoremployees maytransmitSecret stowage or protection, by means of which material, within national borders, only when it is unauthorized personnel are prevented from gain- necessary for the contractor employee in the ing access thereto. When such material is not performance of the contract, project or mission under dire,observationof an authorized to remove the classified information from a person,itis guarded or stored in a locked United Stags Government activity. The material container or is given equivalent protection. must remain in the employee's physical possession and custody at all times and not be stored outside of a United States Government DISPOSAL AND DESTRUCTION activity. Classified material shall be destroyed in the United States Postal Service registered mail presence of an appropriate official by burning, within and between the 50 States and United melting, chemical decomposition, pulping, pul- States territories. verizing, shredding, or mutilation sufficient to preclude recognition or reconstruction of the Outside of the area described above, Secret classified information, provided the head of the material may be moved by United States Postal DoD component concerned, or his designee, has Service registered mail through Army, Navy or approved the method of destruction, except

410 414 Chapter 24THE PUBLIC AFFAIRS OFFICE burning, as one which will preclude reconstruc- Classified Waste tion of the material. Records of Destruction Waste material such as handwritten notes, carbonpaper,typewriterribbons,etcetera, Records of destruction are required for Top which contains classified information must be Secret and Secret material and s1iall be dated protected in a manner to prevent unauthorized and signed by two officials witnessing actual disclosure of the information. Classified waste destruction unless the classified material has material shall be destroyed as soon as it has been placed in burn bags for central disposal. In serveditsintended purpose by one of the that case, the destruction record shall be signed methods described above, butarecord of by the witnessingofficialsatthe timethe, destruction and a witnessing official are not material is placed in the burn bags. required.

411 CHAPTER 25

A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775 -1973)

It has been emphasized in this mantel that in several incidents from this recorded history, a order to write about Navy subjects, a Journalist knowledge of which we consider mandatory for must be able to interpret the Navy intelligently. a Navy Journalist. The first part of the chapter, An understanding of how and why the U.S. which takes you through World War II, primarily Navy was formed, a knowledge of some of its concerns famous battles, events, and makers of important battles and victories, and something, naval tradition. The remainder of the chapter about a few of its past outstanding leaders are all discusst: the ways in which our nation has very important in the preparation of informa- successful); employed seapower as a deterrent, tional material, especially feature stories based as an instrument of diplomacy, protector of on research. American interest abroad, and keeper of the But most important of all: YOU MUST BE peace. At no time in history has its decisive FAMILIAR WITH THE BACKGROUND meaning sounded clearer across the seas than BEHIND THE NAVY'S CURRENT, PRIMARY since World War II. Also, our Navy's role in MISSIONTHE ROLE SHE PLAYS IN KEEP- Korea and Vietnam is discussed here. ING THE PEACE. As far in our past as 14 February 1778 we see the value of warships just being on hand, or "showing theflag," to THE AMERICAN REVOLUTION manifest national purpose and preserve the peace. On that date, John Paul Jones, in the Tt Revolutionary War presents the only Continental frigate Ranger, sailed into Quiberon period in our history when we stood in desper- Bay, France, flying the new stars and stripes. ate straits because of lack of imported strategic Ranger's 13-gun salute to a French squadron, materials. However, because of the low state of traditional honors for a major monarchy, was efficiency of the usually invincible Royal Navy answered bya nine-gunreply reserved for and the resourcefulness of the little American sovereign republics. The event meant more than Navy and other Yankee mariners, General Wash- an exchange of normal naval civilities; it sig- ington was able to secure what he needed from nifiedFrance's recognition of American in- beyond the seas. dependence, not yet achieved. Since that day, Congress passedlegislation on 13 October nearly two centuries ago, the U.S. Navy has 1775 which brought the Continental Navy into "shown the flag" in peace and war a countless existence (13 October 1775 is considered the number of times. official birthday of our Navy). "Washington's The Naval History Division, Office of the Fleet" of converted schooners in the fall and Chief of Naval Operations, as well as National winter of 1775-76 captured some 35 ships from Archives in Washington, D.C.,isfilled with theBritish. This cargo went to sustain the volumes of records concerning every aspect of Continental Army. our Navy's history. To present here a compre- Also, in 1778, France, sympathetic from the hensive history of the Navy from its beginning in first with the revolting colonies, openly entered the Revolutionary War to now is neither pos- the war on our side, and she was soon followed sible nor necessary. However, we have selected by Spain and 'Holland. British possessions in.

416 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

10:"kangErq receivo first officio], 366hntw Stan Eal, Stripo,

165.191 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 every quarter of the world were attacked by the whether he had struck his colors. Though barely powerful French forces, and Britain's internal able to keep afloat, Jones thundered back his struggle against her colonies was transformed famous answer, "I have not yet begun to fight." into a world war in which all the great maritime These flighting words inspired his men with his powers were engaged. The chief theater of naval own determined will to win. activity was the West Indies, where British After fighting for nearly 4 hours, the British interests clashed with those of her enemies surrendered. The spirit of the offensive, the will France, Spain, and Holland. to victory, was never better demonstrated than Unlike the Navy of today, the Continental by John Paul Jones. his immortal "I have not Navy that fought America's war for indepen- yet begun to fight" inspires Americans today as dence was small and weak and was further it did more than 190 years ago. handicapped by coming into existence only after fighting had begun. In this makeshift force, two-thirds of the ships were converted merchantmen. The crews were drawn from mer- QUASI WAR WITH FRANCE chant vessels, fishing craft, and even from the Army. In addition, there were State navies, but After the Revolutionary War the fortunes of these vessels were small and were designed for the Navy declined, and by 1785 its last ship had river and harbor defense. Also, there were been sold. Little remained except fighting tradi- swarms of American privateers (privately owned tions. When the new Federal Constitution went craft outfitted for war), which engaged primarily into effect in 1789, the War Department was in the capture of British prizes. But the Amer- charged with both the Army and the Navy, a ican ships were pitifully few compared with the burdenconsistingof onlya few hundred hundreds flying the ensign of the Royal Navy. soldiersand no ships or Marines. John Paul Jones, disheartened by the Nation's Emerging from this war was one of the Navy's disregard for its naval heroes,departed to pursue greatest heroesJohn Paul Jones. There were his career in Europe, where he eventually died. others, among them JohnBarry, Lambert (More than a century later his country belatedly Wickes, and Gustavus Conyngham. But Jones paid him honor by returning his remains to this embodies all the attributes that a nation tradi- country and placing them where they now lie in tionally assigns to a great leader. the crypt of the Naval Academy Chapel at Of his many contributions to the Navy's great Annapolis.) traditions, none stands out more conspicuously The absence of naval strength soon proved than his refusal to acknowledge defeat in the disastrous because Barbary pirates began cap- classic action between Jones' ship, theBon- turing our merchant ships and imprisoning their hommeRichard and the British frigateSerapis. crews. In 1794 Congress authorized the building Bonhomme Richardwas anold,converted of six frigates to protect our interests. This was merchant hull mounting about 40 guns, only six the beginning and keel of the modern U.S. Navy of which were 18-pounders.Seraphmounted 50 under the Constitution. guns and was new and superior toBonhomme President Washington allocated the task of Richardin maneuverability. designing these ships to Joshua Humphreys, a Upon firing the first broadside, two of Jones' Philadelphia Quaker, who thus became our first 18-pounders burst, causing the rest to be aban- naval constructor. A technical genius, Hum- doned. Several broadsides deliveredatclose phreys exerted a tremendous influence upon the range bySerapissoon reducedBonhomme American Navy. Richardto a critical state. Her hold was flooded; Humphreys drew up plans for the six famous her heavy guns were out of commission; half the frigates, theUnited States, Constitution, Con- crew had been killed or wounded; her rudder stellation, President, Chespeake,andCongress. and rigging had been shot away; and fires were Two of these ships, theConstitutionand the fast approaching the magazine. At this point, the Constellation,are still afloat! TheConstitution captain of the Serapis called to Jones, asking instill in commission! 418 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

Enemies other than the Barbary pirates soon This conflict was waged for the most part in harassed the defenseless United States. Both the Caribbean. The cost to France proved so France. and England, then in a death struggle, high that the French were ready to sue for peace began to plunder American merchantmen. While by 1801. TheConstellation,under command of a treaty in 1795 with Great Britain relieved the Thomas Truxtun, led smashing victories over friction with that country,our relations grew French warships in the Western Atlantic and worse with France. Captures continued, and Caribbean during the quasi war that soon made when Frenchprivateer3beganoperatingin these seas again reasonably safe for shipping. American harbors, Congress was aroused and decided to take immediate and vigorous action. The Navy Department was established (1798) WAR WITH TRIPOLI and Benjamin Stoddert was appointed the first Secretary of the Navy. Again,as in the Revolu- Tempted by the lure of unprotected Amer- tionary War, a fleet had to be created withwar ican commerce and dissatisfied with the small already in progress. Our small Navy, therefore, tributes the United States was paying under the was immediately expanded; numerous naval terms of an earlier treaty, the Bashaw of Tripoli officers were appointed for active duty; and in 1801 declared war on the United States. recruiting officers in the principal ports along In answer tothischallenge, Commodore the Atlantic coast put on a drive for seamen. Edward Preble in theConstitutionwas sent to John Adams wrote. a set of "Navy Regs" and the the Mediterranean in command of a squadron. Marine Corps was formally organized. Although During the war withthepiratesinthe no actual declaration of war was made, Congress Mediterranean, a dramatic incident occurred. authorizedthe Navy toretaliate and seize The frigatePhiladelphiahadfallen into the armed French vessels within the jurisdictional hands of Tripolitans and was now an important limits of the United States or on the high seas. addition to their harbor defenses. It was young

.1010 NEI O... .. ww...444.44 moos. 4 awl

I7c 1800:Thouns irtattiiionllgtoatEllattorTh' "derects Fiiith;5M1356anci:

165.193

4419 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

JOURNALIST 3 & 2

onilava &stir ealibrea:PhilaadyliaioTripokicrt-

165.194

Lieutenant Stephen Decatur who went to Com- been burned), nevertheless, early in the war it modoro Preble and volunteered to destroy this fought a series of frigate and sloop-of-war duels captive frigate, built by popular subscription in that resulted in astounding victories and gained a his home ctiy and first commanded by his world reputation for the Navy. The reasons for father. He and 74 comrades stealthily entered these victories are not hard to find. We had the the harbor at night in a small ketch. Within a bestfrigatesin the worldthe tradition of few minutes they had complete possession of Humphreys; we had the best gunnery in the the ship, the foe having been cut down or driven worldthe tradition of Truxtun; our morale was into the sea. Combustibles were passed aboard highthe tradition of Preble; and our Navy had and soon the ship was burning fiercely. Several a great fighting spiritthe tradition of JohnPaul minutes later the boarders, with but one man Jones. wounded, were back in their ketch, and under These brilliant frigate victories went far to fire from shore batteries, they left the illumi- establish American sovereignty in international nated harbor. affairs, and contributed much to the building of This spectacular feat made Decatur the most traditions in our Navy. strikingfigureofthetime and prompted Captain Issac Hull, commanding theCon- Admiral Nelson to call it "the most daring act of stitution,gained first honors when he met the the age." Guerriereunder CaptainDacres. Within 20 minutes theGuerrierehad been reduced to a wrecka feat which astonished both sides of the WAR OF 1812 Atlantic. It was in this battle that our most famous and historic ship, theConstitution,won Although the Navy was outnumbered 40 to 1 her apt sobriquet "Old Ironsides." in the second war with Great Britain, and by Inanother battleof frigates, theUnited 1814 had suffered severe reverses (our coast was States,under Stephen Decatur, defeated the tightly blockaded, our ships were driven from Macedonian,one of the finest ships of her class the high seas, and our capital, Washington, had in the Royal Navy. Knowing that theUnited 4Z0 416 Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

States' guns had greater range, Decatur cleverly exhibition of extraordinary acumen and cour- maneuvered his ships and prevented the enemy age. Following this victory came Perry's famous from closing in. The United States' gunner :'fired dispatch: "We have met the enemy and they are rapidly and accurately and more than a hundred ours." shots penetrated the Macedonian's hull. After The war with Britain was fought not only on two hours of fighting the battle was overa the Great Lakes but also on Lake Champlain on victory for the Americans and a great demon- the New York boundary, where LT. Thomas stration of Decatur's leadership. Macdonough was in command. The first Sar- This was an era when fighting slogans were atoga was built for him from wood cut in the coined. James Lawrence's dying words uttered forests nearby and became his flagship. Mac- in the ill-fated Chesapeake, "Fight her till she donough'sshipswon thebattleof Lake sinks and don't give up the ship!" became the Champlain in 1814 largely because of his strat- battle cry of the Navy. Oliver Hazard Perry egy in placing his ships and by a very ingenious carried them to Lake Erie where he hoisted on installation of springs aboard the Saratoga which his ship (named in honor of Lawrence) a flag enabled him, when her starboard side guns were upon which was stitched the legend, "Don't give weakened, to turn her quickly around and bring up the ship." the portside guns to bear. During the Battle of Lake Erie, Perry, with four-fifths of his crew dead or wounded, and his ship, the Lawrence, crippled, made his °MOUS THE NAVY BETWEEN 1815 AND 1860 passage in an open boat to another ship, the Niagara. thing a surprise maneuver, he sailed the The Navy began the transition from sail to Niagara aggresively through the enerny'c lines steam during the period between the close of the and within 15 minutes the battle was won-an War of 1812 and the beginning of the Civil War.

0= 4.0 0. mi . .11MI Immo dm. 4. :7 8.0 - a oar an. - a 00a _ a a a Ps 1. y .0 IBM .10 Mr Mama= .01. _ IMP -mom....- -dampammo 77' IMMO -:MD Is00 m at

.4 1111.10.1r-L4 V 0, /11. -" =0=,..--

(Y1111:

411.

18!, rr' on t may amours"

165.195

BEST COPYAVAILABLE 421 417 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

It also founded the Navy Academy, progressed need for midshipmen who couldqualify in in trade abroad, and made a big breakthrough in engineering, together with the threat of a war navigational information and naval ordnance. with Mexico, played their part in the founding of the Naval Academy in 1845. The major credit for establishing this institution goes to Secretary FIRST STEAM WARSHIP of the Navy George Bancroft, who had earlier distinguished himself as an educator, diplomat, In the arduous, unsung duty. of routing and and historian. battling the buccaneers in hand-to-hand combat amidst the shallows and mangrove swamps of the Caribbean (shortly after the War of 1812), WORLD TRADE the U.S. Navy was probably the first in the world to use a steam warship in. combat. This Expansion of Yankee commerce after the was the Sea Cull, a converted harbor tug which American Revolution had led to the develop- could get at the pirates regardless of calms. ment of the "China Trade" in the 1780s. But in the Sunda Strait in the East Indies, seagoing traders soon crossed paths with pirates. NAVAL ACADEMY In 1800, Captain Edward Preble, in Essex, had sailed to these distant waters to protect An outstanding weakness of the Service in the American merchantmen. In1819, Congress, early days was lack of adequate training for with Captain J.D. Henley in command, cruised young officers. Although chaplains and schoolin the Sunda area after a voyage around the masters were carried aboard ship, midshipmen Cape of Good Hope, and then served as escort to received only rudimentary and haphazard in- American merchantmen in the area of Canton, struction. The advent of steam warships and the China.

BEST COPY AVAILABLE 165.196

42Z418 Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

However, not all American trade was legiti- paths of storms, quickest routes between great mate in these times. Some U.S. merchant cap- shippingports,and other fundamentals of tains were greedy for slave trade profits. To modern navigation. To this day, Maury's pilot suppress this traffic in human lives, Congress charts, brought up to date, are indispensable in passed stringent laws and ordered the Navy to making ocean travel safe and expeditious. His capture "slavers." Cyane,cruising along the studies of the little-known Gulf Stream, then African coast early in 1820, captured seven slave termed the"riverinthe ocean," provided ships. From then until the Civil War, dozens of sciencewith much valuabledataon that the U.S. Navy's warships patrolled the African phenomenon. This was the beginning of the trade routes and intercepted over a hundred Navy Hydrographic Office which now has its "blackbirders." scope of interest expanded as the Oceanographic Another spectacular success of the American Office. Navy during this period was the opening of Japan in 1854. With a force of seven ships and shrewd display of knowledge, determination, and ceremonial splendor, Commodore Matthew GUNNERY PerryobtainedtreatyrightsforAmerican traders to call at Hakodate and Shimoda. Thus, During this same period and on into the Civil the Navy not only opened new routes for War another naval officer, John A. Dahlgren, American commerce byt also opened isolated, was making great improvements in the Navy's feudal Japan to the outside world. ordnance. Dahlgren, at various times headed the Bureau of Ordnance, instructed in gunnery at Annapolis, and commanded the Washington STRIDES IN NAVIGATION Navy Yard. He established a regular system of ordnanceworkshops,gun-carriageshops,a The 1850s saw the beginning of great im- cannon factory, and an experimental laboratory provements in the quality of navigational in- at the Navy Yard. formation. This was largely the result of the Against strong protest he persisted in de- efforts of Matthew Fontaine Maury, the Super- manding improved weapons. He designed a new, inte.ident of the Depot of Charts and Instru- reinforced gun-breech, advoct.:ed the first real ments for the Navy at the time. Win le there, he sights, and urged therifling of cannon. In- conceived the _idea of collating available data directly,he was partlyresponsiblefor the found in the numberless old log books stored in construction of ironclads. The Dahlgren gun was the Navy Department. These he supplemented the mo,t widely used type in the Union Fleet with observations made several times daily by during the Civil War. This gun was a major ships in our Navy as well as by American and technological contribution to the Union naval foreign merchant ships. victory in the Civil War. An account in a London Soon, more than 1000 shipmasters in every paper of the Kearsarge-Alabama duel said that it ocean were making day and night t.`Aetvation was a "contest for superiority between the according to a uniform plan. The temperature of ordnance of Europe and America" in which the air and water, direction of wind, set of currents, Dahlgren guns of the Kearsarge showed super- and height of barometer were recorded. Navi- iority. gators were instructedtocast overboard at stated periods bottles containing a record of (NOTE: Use of the Washington Navy Yard for ship's latitude, longitude, and date. They were research and development in naval ordnance requested to pick up similar bottles wherever resulted in its designation, during World War II, found, notiaq. the exact position and time, ant. as the Naval Gun Factory. Later, after guided to forward these data to Washington. missiles were developed, the yard was re-named On the basis of this information, Maury drew the Navy Weapons Plant.In the1960s all important conclusions about winds and currents, weapons manufacture was discontinued and it

419 423 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

agairi became the Washington Navy Yard. Dahl- novations, and by war's end the U.S. Navy was gren, Va., the address of the current Naval technically the equal of any on the sea. Weapons Laboratory, commemorates the great The most famous naval battle of the war was researcher significant as a preview of things to come. This was the battle between the USS Monitor and CSS Virginia (ex-USS Merrimac). It has been THE CIVIL WAR said that probably no naval conflict in the history of the world attracted as much attention The naval history of the Civil War vividly as did this one. Fighting the first action of their portrays the employment of sea forces against kind in history, the ironclads conclusively dem- an enemy economically dependent on shipping. onstrated the superiority of metal over wood. The Confederate States were a consolidated land The futility of the long and furious cannonade, power possessing many sea and river ports, contrasted with the outstanding victories of the affording access to world commerce which they Virginiaover unarmored ships such as the vitally needed. But war imports were denied Cumberland and the Congress on the previous them by an effective Union blockade. The day, made the battle a significant step in the spectacular Confederate achievements were ac- development of the warship. complished with shoestring resources which were soon expended. The Union Navy simultaneously assumed OUR FIRST ADMIRAL three huge strategic tasks, largely amphibious in nature.It attempted to blockade the whole The outstanding battle leader of the Civil War southern coast, to force its way into various was ourfirstadmiral,DavidG.Farragut southern ports, and to cooperate with the Army (1801-70). on the Mississippi front. Union naval forces were Like many others in the early days of the also called upon to protect northern shipping Navy, Farragut entered the service as a lad. He from enemy raiders. A graphic illustration of the was a midshipman before he was 10 years old. Navy's ability to adjust itself to new conditions By the time he reached maturity, he was may be found in the way in which, both afloat experienced at ship-handling and leadership. and ashore, it met the complex demands of the Farragut's New Orleans campaign was one of Civil War. To complicate matters, naval warfare the most brilliant of the war. Where logistics was at that time in a transitional period, a were concerned, Farragut displayed an impres- veritable naval revolution. Although steam had sive knowledge of the art of moving men- and been introduced sometime earlier, armor was supplies. He is credited, too, with being the first just coming into use. In the field of ordnance, American naval officer who fully comprehended rifled guns and shell ammunition demanded new the strategic deployment of a fleet and coor- methods of fire control. dinated the operations of his vessels accordingly. This rapid transition produced two of the The incidentfor which Farragutisbest oldest assortments of warships ever assembled. remembered occurred at Mobile Bay in August The Union Fleet contained old wooden frigates 1864. The admiral was on USS Hartford, and Like the Constitution, converted East River ferry- during this critical phase of the battle, mines boats, scores of armed steamers, and experi- (then called torpedoes) were reported ahead. mentalironclads. The South used armored Farragut knew that monitor Tecumseh with vessels,steamcommerceraiders,electrical almost all hands had just gone down in that area. mines, and even primitive submarines. His response would echo through history as a Under the leadership of Secretary of the Navy slogan for driving leadership: "Damn the tor- Gideon Welles, the naval establishment rose pedoes.Full speed ahead." As Farragut sus- magnificently to the occasion. The Nation's pected, most of the enemy's underwater weap- scier+!':ts and inventors contributed many in- ons had deteriorated from long submersion.

4a4 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S.NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973) AIM

..--,J111

Rest bate bevitertiroackcd watsships4,551Notufrcull, Vera:

165197

- .1 4. .1 Am Am 1I . . - -OW 40 maw

11 1 in 11 atm

MO MM. 1 .11 OM . r-. :

tr- - t kft 180:9ttuntoxisilydwood04141 anitironclals runblockadeatabikby.

166.198

421,425421 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Also,heh.. 'taken advanceprecautions to intangiblequalitiesof "theartistin war protect the hulls of his ships with chains and intuition, sagacity, judgment, daring, inspiration cables hung overside and had piled bags of coal which place great captains among creators, and and sand around theboilers. The fleet got war itself among the fine arts." through. In 1890 he published the first of his many great works. Titled "The Influence of Sea Power upon History, 1660-1783," it was based upon FROM 1865 TO 1898 his lectures on naval history and sea power. Mahan's works stress not only the theme that After the Civil War, the Navy went throuL4h a victory for a nation at war ordinarily depends long period of "lean" years, with the number of upon control of the sea but also the broader ships and personnel greatly reduced. It was a premise that sea power is a necessary factor in period, however, which saw the coif pletion of the general progress of a nation. His works were the change from wooden ships to ironclads and immediatelyreceived withgreatenthusiasm to complete reliance on steam propulsion. It was throughout the world and have been considered also a time which saw some innovations in Navy classics ever since. training. Mahan's writings were infhtential itt the build- In 1875, the Navy's apprentice training sys- ing of our battle fleet after 1890. His concepts tem was organized by Captain Stephen B. Luce. contributed greatly to the change in American Its purpose was to train American boys to public opinion whereby the need for an ocean- take their places in the Fleet as seamen and going navy came to be universally accepted, petty officers. Throughout his life, Luce insisted that the Navy should be an educational institution for all handswith all hands working to get SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR ahead and with advancement always open to trained personnel. Today's Naval Education and The Spanish-American War in 1898 resulted Training system stems directly from the efforts from a long series of incidents arising in part of this farsighted officer. from unsettled conditions in Spain's Caribbean Luce took the lead in urging the establish- possessions. The climactic incident that aroused ment of a war college where senior officers the U.S. public to war fervor was the sinking of might study the art of warstrategy and tactics, the USS Maine in Havana Harbor, Cuba, killing Finally, in 1884, he was successful in having the 250 officers and men. (The mainmast of the Naval War College established at Newport, R.I. Maine was erected as a monument in Arlington The primary function of this institution was to Cemetery, where 59 of the crewmen are buried. train senior officers to think in terms of up-to- The foremast is at the Naval Academy.) It was date fleet evolutions; to study and master broad evident from the first that the war would be strategic concepts; and to prepare themselves for primarily naval, and would be decided in favor the handling of modern fleets in battle. It was of the nation able to establish control of the the first institution of its kind in the world. western Atlantic. While the naval strength of the One of the results of the founding of the two countries was about equal on paper, Spain's Naval War College was the development of one shipswere poorlyequipped,her personnel of the outstanding writers on naval strategy, Lacked training, and her officers displayed in- Alfred T. Mahan. credibly incompetent leadership. Mahan had hadaroutine and relatively Theodore Roosevelt, Assistant Secretary of uneventful naval career until 1885 when he was the Navy in 1897, and an enthusiastic disciple of called to duty as a lecturer at the Naval War Mahan, was influential in getting the Navy into College. He enteredhis new work with con- shape for the war. In the overwhelming victory suming zeal. He felt that the War College should won by the United States, theNavy played a train officers to go beyond the mere mechanics noteable part. of their profession; that it should seek through Shortly after the war began, a fleet under historical studies to develop the rarer and more Commodore George Dewey entered Manila Bay 422 F.426 Chapter 25 A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775.1973) in the Philippines and destroyeda Spanish fleet. Tell your Admiral if he wants war Iam ready." It was at the beginning of this battle that Dewey That ended the trouble. gave his famous order, "You may fire when you From the Spanish-American War the United are ready, Gridley." States emerged with some insular possessions: Not long after the American victory at Manila Puerto Rico, Guam, Midway, and Wake. In Bay, another Spanish fleet was bottled up in addition, we had gained control of the Philip- Santiago Bay, Cuba, by an American fleet under pines and assumed a protectorateover Cuba. In the command of Admiral William Sampson. The an unrelated action during the war, Hawaii was Spanish Fleet attempted to escape, and nearly annexed. did, but was destroyed by overwhelming Amer- ican firepower. With this defeat, Spain's fleet was gone and the war soon ended. NAVY ENTERS THE 20th CENTURY But the war with Spain meant more than victories in these widely separated and ancient As the 20th Century got underway, European ports. It advanced the united States' role as a and Japanese imperialistic ambitions clashed in world power, and made her citizens more aware the Far East with the U.S. "open door" policy of their Reed for a strong Navy. .a4stkattti fItttiorn of international trade. An incident occurred soon after Commodore Despite agreements among the international George Dewey's decisive victory in Manila Bay. powers, Japan chose to ignore the "open door" Germany, England, and Japan sent warships policy, and a threat of war developed. there to protect their nationals. The German In a bold stroke of peaceful strategy, Presi- admiral, however, withfiveships under his dent Theodore Roosevelt sent the Fleeton a command, ignored the blockade Dewey had world cruise. In late 1907, 16 battleships, with established and freely communicated with both other ships,popularly known as the "Great Filipinos and Spaniards fighting ashore. Angry at White Fleet,"left Hampton Roads, visiteda this violation, Dewey sent word: "Does Admiral number of South American ports, stopped at von Diedrichs think he commands here or do I? San Francisco, and then set course for Australia

MWrilow av= aa MP 41. am= a dab a. .001 r aim 4= -.Maw 4 aam+opa a410...maa ...40 04alma -pari mom. ILe41

Mr. ___41101:111111111101111111aerAr..--. _a_al- 'aa.=zamaaaa,, e 1895:COIWZLOCIOregenbeVeoldetr5riSh

165,199 BEST COPYAVAILABLE BEST COPYAVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

C "114 A A/W.1e/4Atablig..-va; ..11161e14. ME_

-i9310` oireamPeetwult am-7-ac& urtuumtAnycte5101:e. 165.200 and the Orient, arriving at Yokohama in October subchasers as they tracked down German sub- 1908. marines and pro.:ected convoys. The Navy was given the most cordial rec,p- In May 1911, less than a month after the tion ever recorded a visiting fleet. This dramatic United States had entered the.war, six American expression of U.S. purpose and power impressed destroyersunder CommanderJ.K.Taussig the world. Talk of war disappeared. A powerful steamedinto Queenstown,U.K.,tobegin Navy gave Roosevelt the opportunity of carrying Americanparticipationinthewaragainst out his policy of "speaking softly and carrying a German submarines in European waters.The big stick." British admiral to whom he reported, knowing that the American ships had crossed the Atlantic WORLD WAR I under forced draft, asked Taussig when he could Most of the U.S. Navy's 'talon in World War I be ready to go on patrcl, expecting hewould was performed bycruisers,destroyers, and require some time for refitting. Taussig's reply is

41.

IP&

isnrCar; t topmttelL;Wewill -be may whin. ruslad,sir:' 165,201

424 r 42S Chaps er 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVALHISTORY (1775-1973)

another memorable quote: "We will be ready reappeared; showdown with the United States when fueled, sir." loomed. Serious incidents occurred such as the The chief American contribution to the anti- sinking in 1937 of the gunboat USS Panay. submarine war was the convoy system, insti- Swift Japanese apologies followed the sinking tutedlargelyattheinsistenceof Admiral but Admiral Harry E. Yarnell, Commander of William S.Sims. During the first month the the Asiatic Fleet, braced himself for further Unites States was in the war, Allied shipping clashes. The Japanese Navy tried to frighten him losses to submarines were some 900,000 tons. out of Shanghai. The resolute admiral, though By November 1917, this loss was down to an with only a token force under his command, average of 300,000 tons per month. refusedto move. Histask was to protect American officials and citizens in the Far East, and he intended to carry it out. "The paramount BETWEEN WORLD WARS duty" of his warships, he told the Japanese, was to protect American citizens. They "will go After helping win World War I, the next major wherever it is necessary at any time to carry out operations of the U.S. Navy came in both the that mission and will remain as long as American historic Mediterranean-Middle East and the Far citizens" need them. His determination, fora East. time, checked aggression. He won the grudging In the Mediterranean, the Navy continued its respect even of the Japanese, who learned that it vital mission there of swift and effective support was safer to walk around the implacable admiral. of U.S. diplomacy to limit trouble, aid the distressed, and promote freedom. On the other side of the world, in September NAVAL AVIATION 1923, Japan was convulsed by a shattering earthquake; thousands died, millions were left The most noteworthy technical advances homeless and starving. Widespread fires and a made by the U.S. Navy during the period huge tidal wave added to the misery. Immedi- between 1919 and 1941 was theprogress in ately, Admiral Edwin A. Anderson, commander naval aviation. (A small but significantgroup of of the Navy's Asiatic Fleet, then visiting Port Navy fliers had participated in World War I.) The Arthur, loaded his entire cruiser and destroyer NC-4, a large Navy flying boat, made the first flotillaforce with large quantities of medical transatlantic flight in May 1919, but the aircraft suppliesandsetcourseatfullspeedfor carrier was the principal naval development Nagasaki, 700 miles away, and Yokohama, twice of thisperiod. In1922,thefirstaircraft that distance. The warships not only brought carrier, USS Langley, was commissioned. In the prompt disaster relief to the shattered islands, late 20's the Lexington and the Saratogawere but also succeeded in reopening communications commissioned. These were followed in the 30s with the outsideworld.This humanitarian by the Ranger (the first ship designed from the service prompted the gratitude of the entire keel up as a carrier), the Yorktown, and the nation, from the emperor to the lowliest citizen. Enterprise. Then in 1940.41, the Wasp and the The Navy had conducted many missions of Hornet were added to the Fleet. mercy before, but as the capabilities of the fleet Along with the development of the carrier increased, so did its service to victims of disaster. came newer aircraftfaster, better armed, and with better instrumentsandsome important changes in naval tactics. INCIDENTS WITH JAPAN

Nevertheless, history shows repeatedly that WORLD WAR II dictators can inflame a nation to their purpose. During the1930s, Japanese militarists took In 1939 World War II began in Europe. By that control of the government and stirred the people time, relations between the United States and with renewed imperial ambitions. War talk Japan had become strained. Thatyear Japanese 425 r. 429 AVAILABLE BESTCOPY JOURNALIST 3 & 2

411.111.1. 11. V

We?' 7.777/194

WW1.

An: .1. "'"..- ".% ".-....411.- 19 &girdCarCraft-4urtmetWM15510 yorerannetor 165,2'2

Ambassador Hirosi Saito died in the United captured. Loss of the British battleship Prince of States. Seeking to ease rising tension, President Wales and the battle cruiser Repulse left the Franklin D. Roosevelt sent Saito's ashes home in Allieswithoutasinglecapital ship in the the USS Astoria. The cruiser's mission brought Western Pacific. Singapore fell, and the Japanese expressions of appreciation from the Japanese overranSoutheastAsia and strategic South press and generated genuine good will amongthe Pacific Islands. Australia and New Zealand were Japanese people. threatened. Still the militarists had control in Japan, and Even beforePearlHarbor, United States that nation allied itself with Nazi Germany. On shipping had been under attack from Nazi 7 December 1941 came a treacherous attack on U-boats. Now at war with Germany as well as the U.S. Fleet at Pearl Harbor, the Naval Base, Japan, the U.S. and her allies were fighting two and airfields in the vicinity. United States losses wars at once. The Nation's industrialmight was were heavy; sunk were 6 ships,4 of them rapidly mobilized to provide the ships, planes, battleships; 11 other ships were damaged; dead and weapons to regain the lost territory and were 2004 Navymen, 109 Marines, and228 defeat the enemy on all fronts. Army; wounded, 912 Navy, 75 Marines and 360 Broadly speaking, the Pacific Theatre was the Army. Five of the ships sunk were raised and Navy's war and the European the Army's al- repaired. The Arizona, which was completely though soldiers fought beside the Marines in the wrecked by a magazine explosion, with loss of Pacific Islands and vital naval contributions were 1102 lives, has been enshrined at Pearl Harbor as made in the Mediterranean and the Atlantic. The a memorial to all servicemenwho lost their lives war was of such magnitudeand duration that it on 7 December 1941. is impractical here to describe even its major The Pearl Harbor attack was followed rapidly battles. by attack,. on Guam, Wake, and Manila. Guam There is more recorded U.S. naval history on and Wake were captured, the great naval base at World War IIthan allthe other U.S. wars Cavite was reduced to rubble and subsequently combined. As a JO you will find the reading of

I 430 426 BEST COPYAVAILABLE Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973) 111/

1941.1ark bombs fiat Una naval baseat Earl harbor,ncuma.ii,

165.203 some of these histories valuable background. April of 1942, the first bombing of Tokyowas The number of naval leaders who rose to high carried out by Army planes from the carrier rank and distinguish 'd themselves in command Hornet. In May 1942, in the Battle of the Coral of important fleet units would compare favor- Sea, a Japanese invasion force headed for Port ably with the complete roster of American Moresby, New Guinea, was destroyed. Admiral naval leaders up to that time. Names like those King, in his official report, called that battle the of Earnest J. King, Chester W. Nimitz, William end of the strictly defensive period, although the F. Halsey, Marc Mitscher, F.J. Fletcher, R.A. following month was described by the minor Spruance, D.J. Callaghan, Thomas C. Kincaid, modificationof"defensive-offensive."The W.M. Fechteler, Forrest P. Sherman, Arleigh A. Battle of the Coral Sea is also memorableas the Burke, and many more figure repeatedly in the first battle in naval history to be fought with history of the Pacific campaigns. Several high major surface units out of sight of one another. ranking officerswerekilled. Of those who The real turning of the tidecame in early survived the war, several successively held the June 1942in the Battle ofMidway. Having post of CNO. Acts of individual heroism by broken the Japanese code, a United States naval Navymen and Marines of alllevels were so forceintercepteda Japanese invasionfleet numerous that, as Admiral Nimitz said of the headed for Midway Island and achievedan fight for Iwo Jima, "Uncommon valorwas a overwhelming victory. The Japanesenever re- common virtue." covered the offensive after losing four aircraft For the first five months after Pearl Harbor, carriers and a large percentage of the experi- the Allies were on the defensive in the Pacific. enced pilots remaining after their heavy losses in Until the damaged ships could be repaired and the Coral Sea. new ones readied, submarines carried the brunt Retaking the territory that the Japanese had of such defensive action as was taken and PT overrun so rapidly was a long and arduous task, boats did their frail best to harass the enemy. however, involving many bloody battleson land Toward the end of that period, however, in and sea and in the air. In the Battle off Savo 427 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Island in the Solomons, in August 1942, the One segment of it, the Battle ofSurigao Strait, United States Navy sufferea one of the worst was the last navalbattle in which air power defeats in its history. In the months immediately played no part except in pursuit. This battle was following, constant furious battles were fought also the last engagement of abattle line, the in and around the Solomons, but the final result straight line formation of ships which hadbeen by Sir was that the Marines were firmlyestablished on used in naval warfare since it was invented signifi- Guadalcanal. Walter Raleigh in 1617. Perhaps more A strategy called "leap-frogging" was devel- cant, the Battle for Leyte Gulf sawthe first use oped for retaking the islands, whereby some of kamikaze (suicide) air attacks. Forthe re- islands were by-passed and attacks launched on mainder of the war, the Japanese aviatorsused others strategically more important and nearer this tactic against our Navy. to the Philippines and Japan. Once these more The Japanese signed the surrender terms important islands were taken, they became bases aboard the battleship Missouri in Tokyo Bay,2 forfurtherleaps. Meanwhile, the by-passed September 1945. islands became more difficult for the Japanese to reach with supplies and reinforcementsand Necessity nurtured certain important new lost much of their value as bases. Even by the developments during World . War II. Fromthe leap-frog method., it was October 1944 before first the Germans and the Japaneseused air General MacArthur and his forces were returned warfare with great success, and the successof to the P1 appine Islands. the Allies demanded that they meetand surpass The General was put ashore on Leyte, and the the enemy in the use of this arm.Thus, carriers Japanese promptly launched a massive effort to became the most important capital ships,and prevent the retaking of the Philippines. The strategicallylocated landing fieldsashore a Japanesefleet had recently suffered servere prime requisite. The Navy accomplishedthe dathage in the Battle of the Philippine Sea, and later by organizing and recruiting theSeabees their supplies of fuel were seriously curtailed by (Construction Battalions), experienced construc- Allied submarine destruction of shipping, but tion workers who were put ashore as soon as a theystillmustered a formidable force. The beachhead was secured and whose firstproject battle that developed for possession of Leyte was to build a landingstrip. In mere days a strip Gulf ranks with the greatest naval actions in all would be carved out of thejungle and planes history. The total numbers of ships engaged would be operating to soften up anotherobjec- were: American-216,Australian-2; Japanese- tive and to furnish air cover for the r.extlanding. 64.This did not include amphibious craft, The need to put landing partiesashore to minesweepers, oilers, or other auxiliaries. capture many small islands resultedin the design The plan was for one unit of the Japanese of a whole new family of ships, theLCI, LST, fleet to decoy the 3rd Fleet up north away from LSM, LCT, LCS, and the variousamphibious the area while two other units, in a pincer move, vehicles. Several new types of support craft were trapped our amphibious forces and their sup- designed, built, and put into use; forexample, porting ships of the 7th Fleet in Leyte Gulf. the LSD dock landing ship which looked very They hoped to annihilate the fleet and then strange to old-time Navymen.Marines, Coast capture General MacArthur and hislanding Guardsmen, and Navymen learned new team force. They succeeded in luring the 3rd Fleet skills for amphibious operations andunderwater north, but the two units assigned to execute the demolition. The use of combat ships toprovide pincer movement were intercepted and defeated fire support for shore operations wasanother before they reached Leyte Gulf. The separate new development.All of these were put to use battles raged for several days off the islands of not only in the Pacific but also inthe landings in Samar and Leyte and in the surrounding areas. Italy and later in Normandy. When it was over, the Japanese fleet had ceased Radar, which had saved London fromthe to exist as a true fighting force. Blitz,greatly assisted naval victory and was The Battle for Leyte Gulf is memorable in followed by other valuable electronicequip- naval history for several features besides its size. ments. F.9 32 428 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

To make more men available for duty at sea freedom stands outlike the Pole Star. The and overseas, the Navy, in common with the preceding pages have covered some examples of other services, recruited a large complement of the Navy's need in every decade of our history women, the Women Accepted for Volunteer from the Caribbean to the shores of the Middle Emergency Service (WAVES). In World War I East, the frozen seas, the vast Pacific. Since there had been a small component of women World War II, however, the pace of critical clericalpersonnel,the Yeomen-F (popularly events everywhere calling for seapower has been referred to as Yeomanettes), but before World unique in United States experience. War II there was no large organization of women The Navy's front line post in our new role of in the Navy except the Navy Nurse Corps. After leader of the free world, whose lifelines are the the war the WAVES became a part of the sea, begun to be demonstrated soon after V-J Regular Navy. Day. In an age of swift change, winds of unrest swept around the world. Determined on Com- SEAPOWER ENTERS A NEW ERA munism and world domination, the Soviets fished in troubled waters east and west. In every When the Missouri entered Tokyo Bay to country they found unprincipled men ready to receiveJapan's surrender, the war officially accept their supportand often men of principle came to an end. But the event was more than deluded by emotions, ideals, and false hopes. that; it also marked the end of an age. From For the remainder of this chapter, we're going John Paul Jones in Quiberon Bay to Admiral to forget about famous battles and heroes and Nimitz in Tokyo Bay, theU.S. Navy had summarize how the U.S. has employed seapower influenced events in the interest of peace and in some of the main crises that have followed in securityof thenationitserved. American rapid succession since the end of World War II. citizens abroad had come to rely on its protec- Individually and collectively, these events have tion as foreign nations had come to respect it. fatefully affected world history. They have given Before it lay new challenges: the old order had new dimension and dramatic meaning to the passed and new phrases, like "Iron Curtain," historic mission of "showing the Flag" through "Cold War," "Atomic," and "Space Age" would which the Navy engenders good will and inter- become realities. nationalunderstanding,implementsnational In this fantastic new era, the importatce of policies, and supports national interests, usually mobile power at sea in maintaining our rights, by presence alone, without firing a gun, launch- keeping the peace, and furthering the growth of ing a missile, or dropping a bomb. al00 MI 100 07. li Oa mom

.4. 6a 0 T. /0* 40

94,:Ead. culeraffronikaletln. (hike= by id4Missourria.

429 433 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

CHINA the Navy. With the remaining strength afloat, we acted more firmly in the Eastern Mediterranean- Shortly before V-J Day, the Soviets finally Middle East; hence events of historic import declared war on Japan and drove into Man- there went more favorably. churia. They had a far larger goal than the Early in March 1046, just six months after the valuable territories given in the peace treaty-vast, Japanese surrender, the Soviets, instead of re- troubledChina,potentialTitanof nations. moving their occupation armies from northern There, with captured Japanese munitions, they Iran as agreed, set up a puppet "republic" in the fed unrest and built up internal Communism in occupied area. When Iran sought to drive out the the pattern that continues today in Vietnam. Communist puppets, the Soviets sent reinforce- Eventually Chiang Kai-Shek was forced to with- ments and moved toward Teheran and the draw with a remnant of his forces to the island Turkish border. Iran brought this clear breach of of Taiwan (Formosa). China became a Com- internationalagreementbeforetheUnited munist nation. Nations Security Council, which voted against the Communists. At the same time, the United States took a IRAN AND TURKEY firm stand in this ancient crossroads of destiny and backed up strong words in the United In October 1945, President Harry S. Truman, Nations by visible power. In March, before the speaking at the commissioning of the 45,000-ton Security Council voted, USS Missouri, symbol of aircraftcarrier USS Franklin D.Roosevelt, the Navy's triumph in the Pacific, sailed from observed "that the power of America as ex- the United States to the Mediterranean, and pressed in this mighty mass of steel is a power earlyinApril, steamed through the ancient dedicated to the cause of peace." waters of the Bosporus both bringing U.S. Yet that power withered away as we shrank strength there and indicating purpose in Iran. the Fleet. Therefore the peace was precarious. The Missouri was met by the cruiser Providence Russia increased pressure inIran toward the andthedestroyer Power,both already on Persian Gulf and sought bases on the Bosporus stationinthe Med. Her voyage was made and Dardanelles to share in the defenses of the ostensibly to return to Turkey the body of Turkish Straitswhich would soon mean con- Mehmet Munir Ertegun, Turkish Ambassador to trol. the United States, who had died months before . Meanwhile, in the United States there were in 1945. The gesture of good will brought those who predicted that the atomic bomb's gratitude, but the Turks, as well as others, did dramatic fireball made navies obsoleteechoes not miss the implied purpose of the famous of likeclaims in earlier generations for the warship's visit. On 7 April, the Paris newspaper torpedo,submarine,andairplane.Admiral "Ordre" saidthat the appearance of potent Nimitz, speaking in Philadelphia on 12 February warships of the United States in Turkish waters 1946, berated this"fantastic theory offered "shows that the Star Spangled Banner expected withoutpracticalproof."Similar claims of to find its way clear for it wherever it appears." obsolescence had been made for all weapons of The French paper added realistically that what the past, he added, "from the smoothbore guns Russia wanted in the Straits was more than the tothearmor-piercingshell. ..but whilethe mere freedom of passage, but to dominate the prophets of naval doom are shouting themselves Dardanelles and block the way to others. Both hoarse, the Navy will be at work to make the through Iran and through the Straits she sought changes needed to accommodate American sea- to win the oil-rich Middle East, crossroads of power to the new weapons, a process that has continents and route to the open seas. taken place following the advent of each new A Greek newspaper, aware that Greece also weapon throughout the centuries. The American was seriously threatened by Sovietambitions, genius for the exercise of seapower will not be noted that the meaning of Missouri's visit was allowed to languish." perfectlyclear."Russia,"itsaid, "knocks Nevertheless, the country persisted in slashing threateninglyatthelandgates of Turkey. 434430' Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

America knocks at the sea gates...in a friendly at that moment decided to send a stronger naval way and pays a visit, saying 'Don't be afraid. squadron to the Mediterranean. In so doing, he I'm here.' " realized that if the Soviet Union did not back In late March 1946, the Soviets had reached down, there might be a war. But he pointed out agree,nent with Iran to depart in six weeks "if that it was just as well to find out now, as in five nr unforeseen circumstances occur." With U.S. or ten years, whether the Russians were moving manifest power backing skillful Iranian tactics, toward world conquest. none did. Neither did the Soviets press their Accordingly, our ambassador to Greece made demands on Turkey. diplomatic arrangements for a courtesy visitto Athens' ancient port of Piraeus by the carrier Franklin D. Roosevelt, cruiser Little Rock, and GREECE destroyers Cone, New, and Corry. The visit, to take place between 5 and 9 September, also Shortly after her visit to Istanbul, Missouri provided for a call of destroyers Warrington and anchored off Athens. The Greek election at the Noa to the port of Thessaloniki in northern end of March had been a decisive rejection of Greece, ,Osi 28 August, thenews of the proposed the left, but Missouri's courtesy visit happened visit was released; two days later Soviet Foreign to coincide with a threat of Communist sub- Minister Vyacheslav Molotov charged that the version,followingtheelection.Thevery planned cruise was an attempt by the United presence of seapower can permanently influence States to interfere in the coming Greekre- the course of foreign events. Standing in from ferendum. over the horizon, this battleship bore not only On 1September, the Greek plebiscite was her own formidable power but also the symbol held under the eyes of American and Bristish of U.S. purpose backed by visible strength. The observers; 70 percent voted in favor of the U.S. Charge d'Affaires made clear the large return of George II from his London exile. impact of the U.S. Navy's presence:

"Its special significance for Greece was fully appreciated and enthusiastically wel- FORMATION OF SIXTH FLEET comed bythe Greek Government, the Greek people, and the British in Greece. Four day.:* after the Greek election Roosevelt, Nor was it lost on the Greek Communist along with her cruiser consort and escorting Partyoron the Russian Embassyin destroyers, entered these ancient seas where, at Athens. The visit contributed in substantial Salamis, Greek warships had changed the course measure to calming local apprehension re- of civilization milleniums before. From this garding the security of Greece and, to- nucleus grew the 6th Fleet, today's armada for gether with the recent elections, was an peace in the Mediterranean where U.S. strength importantfactor making forarecent afloat has been needed now for most of two marked improvement in Greek morale." centuries. Aware that both European stability and In August, preparations were being made for a American security depended in large measure referendum vote on the restoration of the Greek upon continued Greek and Turkish indepen- monarchy and the return of exiled King Georgc dence, the United States developed the Truman II. At the same time, the Ukraine charged in the Doctrine, which provided substantial economic U.N. Security Council that Greek policies threat- aid to both countries. The U.S. Fleet in the ened peace. The accusation, forerunner of re- Mediterranean by just being there 'became at newedCommunistpressuretowardthe once the seaborne guarantor of the Truman Miditerranean, came only a few days after the Doctrine and a highly mobile impediment to Soviet Union had revived its demands on Turkey Soviet ambitions. to give the Russians a share in the naval control In early 1948 the Fleet proved its worth again of the Straits. The President of the United States when itstood by to encourage the Italian 431 433 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 government, then battling the threat of a Com- soon also have to haul mountainsof coal. To munist take over. Again the elections sustained augment the lift, the Navy organized "Operation the existing government. Vittles" by ordering its Transport Squadrons Six and Eight from the Pacific. The 24 naval aircraft that joined the air shuttle logged 41,000 flying THE BERLIN AIRLIFT hours, airlifting 119,000 tons of supplies. With this support Berlin held out through the long, At the same time, 700 miles to the north of bitter winter, and on. 12 May of the following Rome, thefree sector of Berlin was a be- year the Soviets lifted the blockade. leaguered city after 22 April when the Russians cut off the last train connection with the West. Already the U.S. Air Force had begun the SPAIN famousBerlinAirlift,shuttlingfood and supplies from the West to the isolated city. All On 3 September 1949, a U.S. Navy cruiser through the summer and into the fall, Air Force and destroyer force made the first visit to a planes flew over the Soviet blockade like an Spanish port since that country's Civil War. airborne !conveyer belt, bringing food and hopeto Admiral RichardConollyconferredwith the encircled West Berliners. The lifeline of this Franco. More friendly visits followed, paving the incredible undertaking lay on the sea, made way for the agreement of 26 September 1953, possible because the allied fleets controlled it. which gavethe United Statestheright to The U.S. Navy assigned a number of its tankers construct and use naval and air bases in Spain. and other auxiliaries to "Operation Sealift." The defense of western Europe and the Medi- These ships, docking at Bremerhaven, delivered terranean was greatly strengthened against agres- 12 million gallons of aviation gasoline for the sion from Moscow. airlift planes and great quantities of food for the people of Berlin. As winter approached in 1948, the task of THE KOREAN CONFLICT keeping the city alive became even grimmer, for the overworked aircraft and weary pilots would At the end of World War II the United States occupied the southern part of Korea and the Russians the Northern part. As the United States reduccd its strength in the Far East the Soviets u, - increased theirs, and China fell into the Red .4to orbit. %iv "Ar "424. stir In June of 1950 the Communists attacked South Korea, and the United Nations authorized '1111r. forces, under U.S. leadership, to repel them. .6.11111 Suddenly those who had been calling the Navy absolete and trying to absorb the Marines into the Army had to come to the Navy and the Marines for help. Again the classic values of seapower were demonstrated. We will mention just a few events: The last minute reinforcement of the toehold of Pusan, where the Army and Marines coming in bysea,and thefleetplanes; Iguns pounding from the sea on the last sh .,.t perim- eter, averted disaster; the giant, sudden surprise strike from the sea spearheaded by the Marines 186,206 in amphibious assault at Inchon that overnight turned war nearly lost into the complete rout of , 432 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 25--A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTCRY (1775-1973)

O',, ":= naa=i M.116,

st=011111111r aly

#0-- 40.1 wo:12,7107atint cupplibious omitat. Inchon turns th&tid.8 hn Roree,.

165.206 the enemy; the successful evacuation at Hung- on board USS Menard (APA-201) on 16 August. nam; the ever-present advantage of the warships' From thenuntil July1955, in one of the planes and guns as the powerful rig:.t arm of the remarkable humanitarian operations of history, land forces; and the unbroken line of supplies U.S. Navy transports, landing craft, and other and reinforceme, ts by the secure sea. ships moved more than 293,000 North Vietnam After Korea, the now strengthened 7th Fleet refugees from Haiphong south. This "Passage to served as a barrier to invasion of Taiwan. Crisis Freedom" by masses of men who had years of followed crisis. The capability of the Fleet to experience with Communism: and who gave up move swiftly, to concentrate superior strength at homes and possessions rather than live under the point of decision and yet to stay with Communist occupation, and the sealift of tons enduring force after arrival, gave the United of equipment out of North Vietnam, strength- States unique advantages the Reds could not enedthe caus,of freedom throughout the match. world.

VIETNAM INVOLVEMENT PERIOD: 1954.1973 FORMOSA In the troubled summer of 1954, when the In August 1054, President Eisenhower, reac- fateful decision was made to divide Vietnam ting to a Peking radio boast that Formosa would (like Korea), another unique advantage of the be "liberated" like North Vietnam, repeated control of the sea strikingly manifested itself the U.S. pledge that the 7th Fleet would block amidst tragedy for a whole nationthe ability to invasion. The fate of the Tachen Islands, some move large numbers of people and mountains of 210 miles north of Formosa and only 15 miles material. offthe China Mainland coast, was another The first weary, starved refugees clambered matter, In February, Chiang Kai-Shek accepted 43 7 433 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 their inevitable loss and asked for help in their of offensive missile sites is now in preparation evacuation. The U.S. 7th Fleet responded. on that imprisoned island," a critical menace to Admiral Lorenzo Sabin, who had come from national and hemispherical security. The Presi- Saigon to direct the operations, said "We are dent firmly insisted that the sites b I dismantled, going in with our muzzle covers on, but we are thatSovietships en route to Cuba bearing prepared to go into action if we are opposed." missiles or components turn back, and that The impressive power of the Fleet discouraged missiles on the island be withdrawn. To ensure Communist resistance to the evacuation, despite that U.S. demands were met, he directed the blustering threats. On 6 February, carriers York- Navy to quarantine the island. As the Norfolk town, Midway, Wasp, Roxer, and Kearsarge were Virginian-Pilot of 30 October commented, "Mr. already on the line, accompanied by cruisers, Kennedy simply seized upon the most effective destroyers,submarines,minesweepers,trans- measure, short of violence, that he judged to be ports, and landing craft. Their presence was available to him." enough. The operation went peacefully, even For some time the Navy had been maintaining though the Communists, dug in on Yikiang surveillance and reconnaissance patrols in view Islandeight miles to the north, could have of the influx into the area of 30 ships per shelled the evacuation. monthSoviet and Soviet chartered. Now the Within a few days the U.S. Navy had trans- Fleet responded at once with a classic exercise porteda whole society,itstroops, andits of seapower. baggage to a safer haven to the south (Formosa) The President spoke on Monday night. Many and had demonstrated again its peacetime de- warships sailed within hours; others already in terrent power. The New York Times called it the the Caribbean stood ready. The quarantine pro- "most forthright United States action against clamation was signed on Tuesday, to go into Communism since the Korean War." It would effect the next day, 24 October. Ships in the not be the last; in the past decade one crisis has area were almost immediately on station. Naval followedanotherwithadreadfulsortof and Marine Reserve forces were activated. More- regularitySuez, Jordan, Lebanon, the Formosa over, the same day that President Kennedy Straits, Panama, Guatamala and Nicaragua, the addressed the Nationand the Worldthe safety Congo, Laosin each the threat of violence or of dependents at Guantanamo Bay was ensured effects to overturn the government has brought by evacuating them. A total of 390 reached a U.S. fleet to reinforce order and the rights of Norfolk by air, some 2800 by sea. free people. In the next grim month when, as Secretary of State Dean Rusk said, the two most powerful nations in the world faced each other "eyeball THE CUBAN MISSILE CRISIS to eyeball," 183 ships manned by more than 83,000 men ringed Cuba, while over 30,000 In 1962 developments in Cuba brought the Marines with them were poised and ready. The

United States and.the Soviet Union into direct eight aircraft carriers that witnessed the with- confrontation. Relations between Cuba and the drawal of the Soviet missiles logged more than United States had been deteriorating since the 10,000 sorties on this mission; 90 ships of the Castro revolution. The diplomatic break, which Atlantic Cruiser-Destroyer Force steamed almost occurred early in1961, was followed by in- 800,000 miles in maintaining the quarantine creased tensions. As Castro moved squarely into along a 2100-mile front; with them werc nearly the Soviet orbit, Cuba was ousted from the as many amphibious and service force ships. Organization of American States early in 1962. It is not likely that such a graphic demon- Russia covertly moved to set up an advanced stration of readiness went unnoticed in the missile base on this Communist enslaved island, Kremlin, As Admiral George Anderson, Chief of Monday, 22October1962,President Naval Operations, said at the time, Kennedy, on nationwide television, announced to the American peoplethat United States "The entire operation has been a magnif- surveillance over Cuba had shown "that a series icent testimonial not only to the senior 434 Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

leaders of our Government, but also to Vietnam. The 7th Fleet likewise continued its those commanders and commanding of- watchful role of keeping the sea lanes open. ficers at lower levels who were so quickly Then came August 1964 and the events in the able to move their troopslarge number of Gulf of Tonkin that changed America toa troops; their shipsmany ships; and their warrior. The destroyersMaddoxandC. Turner aircraft of many types in position to carry Joywere attacked by North Vietnamese PT out lengthy, tedious, and often very sensi- boats, the United States retaliated witha mas- tiveoperations with a high degree of sive air strike against their bases, and President leadership, professional competence, cour- Johnson requested congressional authority "to age, and diplomatic skill." take all necessary measures to repel any armed attack against the forces of the United States and to prevent further aggression." This firm employment of seapower again From 1965 on, the task of the Navy in the provided the elements required for success in Southeast Asia area expanded. More U.S. Marines attaining national objectives. The Soviets, Secre- and other troops were landed. Not only did the tary Rusk remarked, "blinked"and backed Navy have the giant role of maintaining a vast down. flow of "beans, bullets, and black oil" and other On 20 November, after American demands supplies, but its direct support of operations had been substantially met, the quarantinewas against the Viet Cong increased. Employing the lifted. unique advantages of sea-based power, ready amphibious groups have launched scores of OPERATION SEA ORBIT sudden strikes from the sea, overwhelming the Viet Cong in coastal strong points. Naval gunfire "Operation Sea Orbit," a two-month globe support has blasted the Viet Cong day and night, circling cruise which began at the Straits of clearing the way in innumerable instances for Gibraltar on 31 July 1964, marked on epoch in our forces large and small ashore, and greatly naval annals. The voyage, exceeding 300,000 aiding our carrier attack planes by destroying miles, was made by the first all-nuclear powered many batteries and radar stations along the task forcein historythe carrierEnterprise, coast. cruiserLong Beach,and frigateBainbridge.It U.S. Navy Seabees, doctors, and Hospital was accomplishedwithoutrefueling,repro- Corpsmen have played their large roles ashore in visioning, and without supporting ships. De- South Vietnam alongside the Marines. monstrating the unique mobility, practically On 11 March 1965, the Navy began operation limitlesscruising endurance, andabilityto "Market Time," combining many smaller U.S. quickly reinforce U.S. power in allareas of the warships with those of South Vietnam in an world, it created outstanding interest in all ports increasingly tight surveillance net over coastal visited. It has had a subtle and long enduring shipping. In 1966, we built up a similar fleet of impact in pointing up increased capabilities of smaller craftfor anti-infiltration, search and the U.S. Navy as did the Great White Fleet destroy missions (Operation "Game Warden") in cruise long before. the maze of waterways that thread the Mekong Delta and elsewhere in South Vietnam. Not since the Civil War days has the Navy been so GULF OF TONKIN heavily involved in riverine operations. Late in 1966, the 7th Fleet received author- While the Navy successfully pursued peaceful ity to operate north of the neutral zone against goals in the Mediterranean and in many other Communist craft supplying the Viet Cong to the seas, the Communists continued their buildup to south. Swift multipurpose destroyers promptly destroytheremainingcentersof freedom moved in to clear the seas. by the spring of throughoutSoutheastAsia.Withmassive 1967, when enough ships could be assigned to economic and technical support from Red China cover the coast, 'v'iet Cong coastal supply had and the Soviet Union, they concentrated on been virtually eliminated. 40 BEST COPY AVAILABLE JOURNALIST 3 & 2

a. '10116111211 11 imp.= IP IVOID -... 11.- ,NA -V

111. 61M - 1.1 .5-.... Ma,

-4-- 1966:Ivertnewarebegua anclotimeareasof5.Vietnem,

165.207

In the summer of 1968, five attack carriers bat craft, which included swift and river patrol were continuouslydeployed tothe western boats, had been turned over to the Vietnamese. Pacific with three on the lineat YANKEE By February 1970 there were virtually no U.S. Station inthe Tonkin Gulf. The embarked Navy combat craft within Vietnam. From a carrier airwings had destroyed or heavily dam- 1968 high of around 36,000 Navymen in Viet- aged hundreds of militarytargetsin North nam, the Navy personnel figuredropped to less Vietnam and had successfully interdicted land than 8,000 by December 1971: transport as well as waterborne logistic craft on The Agreement on Ending the War and rivers, bays and along the cristal routes. In Restoring Peace in Vietnam was officially signed September 1968 the Tonkin Gt. r task force was in Paris January 27, 1973. The agreement paved joined by the USS NEW JERSEY, the first U.S. the way for the release of all prisoners of war battleship to see action since the Korean Con- and the withdrawal of all U.S. combat personnel flict. from Vietnam. Among the first American prisoners of war to bereturnedwereLieutenant Commander IN-COUNTRY VIETNAM Everett Alvarez, Jr., the longestheld American prisoner in North Vietnam, and Captains James By the end of 1968 plans for Vietnamizing B. Stockdale and Jeremiah A. Denton, Jr., the the war were well in progress. The Vietnam- senior Navymen held captive. ization program accelerated the turnover of U.S. One-hundred and thirty-eight Navymen were equipment in an effort to create a self-sufficient among the 566 returned Americanservicemen. armed force for the Republic of Vietnam. The Nine Navymen were repoved to have died while Navy turned over its first boats and equipment in captivity. Two Navy employees were among in February 1969. Two months later 242 com- the 25 civilians returned to freedom.

436 BEST COPY AVAILABLE

Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

190:Feb.12.eFtrst pOWsarrive, Clark air Bese,phittpplaes.

185127

43 7 441 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PERSONNEL ORIENTED CHANGES SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPYNTS During the latter part of the Vietnam In- volvement Period several significat personnel Despite the almost constant deployment of oriented changes came about. In July1970, the fleets on peace-keeping missionsand some- Admiral Elmo R. Zumwalt, Jr., age 49, became times in support of those missionsthe Navy has the Navy's youngest Chief of Naval Operations made outstanding contributions to the scientific in history. Less than a year later on June 2, and technological developments of our times. 1971, Rear Admiral Samuel L. Gravely became Notable among thosethat have contributed the Navy's first black admiral. The Navy got its directly to the Navy's own combat potential are: first women admiral in July 1972 when Captain nuclear-propelled submarines and surface ships Alene B. Duerk, U.S. Navy Nurse Corps, was and the Polaris and Poseidon missiles. Benefits promoted. By December 1972, two women for both peace and war stem from scientific officers and 60 enlisted women had made studies and development in nutrition and preser- history by becoming a part of the 500-person vation of food for shipboard use and in pack- crewof thehospitalship USS Sanctuary aging and transportation of supplies. The same is (AH-17). true of medical research; for example the special studies of medicine for tropical areas and for the polar regions. OTHER AREAS Explorations in the Antarctic begun by Ad- miral Richard Byrd in the 1930s were resumed The existence of numbered fleets deployed in immediately after the end of World War II and readiness, in addition to the Seventh Fleet off have continued, contributing to many kinds of Vietnam, gives the United States a military scientific knowledge. capability anywhereinthe world. Principal Naval officers have participated in the outer among these are the deployed forces continually sr...ce program as individuals, and Navy ships maintained inthe Mediterranean and in the have played their own rolethe latter of special Caribbean. importance, since all our astronauts returning In the Caribbean, an amphibious ready group from space have been landed in the sea, from with an embarked Marine Corps battalion land- which it is the Navy's task to retrieve both men ing team is un station to contribute by its and capsules. continual presence to maintaining the stability In November 1969, Commanders Charles of that area. A battalion of Marines is also 'Conrad, Jr., and Alan L. Bean, made the second stationed in Guantanamo for the security of the successful moon landing as a part of Apollo 12. Naval Base. Navy Captain Alan B. Shepard and Com- In the Mediterranean, the Sixth Fleet is on mander Edgar D. Mitchell steered their Antares station in an area of increasing and aggressive moonship to the lunar surface and became the Soviet naval activity. In fact, the total operating third U.S. team on the moon, Shepard and days of the Soviet Mediterranean Squadron Mitchellconductedatwo-part 331/2hour during 1967 exceeded the combined total of scientific expedition. Shepard, the first U.S. 1965 and 1966. This marked increase was most spaceman, set a record having spent more time pronounced during the Arab /Israeli War in June on the moon in his two walks than any other 1967 when the strength of the Soviet naval man. His 9 hours, 3 minutes, was one hour and presence increased from a prior high of 23 ships 12 minutes more than Commander Conrad's two to 35.40 snips. It marks the first time in recent walks. years that the Soviets have so deliberately used The Navy has also participated in the develop- their fleet to support their foreign policy. Since ment and use of satellites for communication the Arab/Israeli war, a stepped-up program of purposes. MeV ..ra,ean port visits by Soviet ships seems The science of oceanography is still in its dead: aned at increasing Soviet influence in earlystages. The exploration of the ocean that area. bottom and the study of deep-sea plant and r 44142 BEST COPYAVAILABLE

Chapter 25A SKETCH OF U.S. NAVAL HISTORY (1775-1973)

MINE .0

-4_117

4c 1.,

4114ti ii7_49173 1444211( .174tNitill v-14114;14, rogreSS in warFareFrorn ittie to Irinertc. I 44. 165.209

animal. life has many potential uses, not the least of whichisthepossible exploitation of an enormous source of food. In the summer of1964,four aquanauts, ) inside a tubular structure called Sealab I, were lowered192feet to the ocean floor26miles off the coast of Bermuda, There the men lived and worked, both inside and outside Sealab I, for 11 days. The experiment was repeated on a larger scale in1965off the coast of southern California, primarilyto measure human performance in cold water (46° 52 F °) and low visibility during long-period saturation dives. Sealab 11 employed a three-team relay system,28men in all, living in a 57-foot-long chamber at a depth 1973: att-riay Grew of Sytab 1 retrieved. of205feet for a total of45days. Other phases of the Sealab program are planned. The develop- 165.208 ment of means whereby man can live and work beneath the sea has many exciting implications for the Navy and the world's future.

443 439 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

This chapter has covered only a few highlights help convey the flavor of a period, illustrate of the Navy's history. In the selection of events, personal characteristics, or simply aecause they leaders, and famous ships for mention, an effort might be of special interest or use to you as a has been made to portray the essential charac- Navy JO. If the chapter has stimulated your teristics of each historical period, the qualities of interest in naval history and suggested topics for leadership that have made the Navy what it is further reading, it will have helped you on your today, and something of the part the Navy has way to the broad knowledge so essential to your played in the history of our country. Quotations success as you advance higher in your rating. and small items of interest have been included to

4416 APPENDIX I

GLOSSARY

Compiling a complete, up-to-date glossary of ACROSS MIKEProjection of the voice almost terms used in the broad fields of public affairs, parallel with the face of the microphone.. journalism, printing, photography, and the electronic media is almost impossible. New terms ACTIONPhysical movement within a scene; a and "catch-words" are being introduced and call to begin acting given by the director. applied differently almost daily. Most of the terms that follow have been used ADAbbreviation for advertisement. Usually at various points throughout this manual. On the refers to display advertising. other hand, many terms will be new to you. It is expected, that most of these terms will confront ADDCopy to be added to a story already you sometime during your career as aNavy written; direction to add such matter, as "add 1 Journalist. All of them are used in public affairs fire." regulations, the various service schools available to JOs, and most importantly, in your dealings with the news media. AD LIBAny departure from a prepared script; extemporaneous remarks; to take part in a radio a or television show withoutscript or music. AD SIDESometimes used to refer to mechani- ABSORPTIONA termusedinoptics,es- cal department devoted to advertising composi- pecially in filter work. tion. ACCEPTANCE ANGLEThe angle of the cone ADVANCE NEWS RELEASEReleases issued of light ray which enters through thelight to news media to provide advance information entrance window of an exposuremeter. This concerning an event expected or scheduled to angle controls the distance the meter shouldbe take place. held from thesubjectforproper reading. Ordinarily, a meter should be held a distance no ADVERTISING CUTOFFA special rule used farther away than the shortest dimension of the to separate advertisements from news matter subject. and from each other. See also "cutoff rule." ACETATE BASEA transparent material on AERIAL DEMONSTRATIONSFlight demon- which film emulsions are coated. It is composed strations, jumps, personnel or equipment drops of cellulose acetate. by Navy personnel or aircraft, for public affairs purposes. (See "FlightDemonstrations.") ACOUSTICS(1) The branch of engineering pertaining to sound; (2) the manner in which AFPSAmerican Forces Press Service. Provides walls, floor, and ceiling of a room or studio react military newspapers with a free source of news, to sound. features, and art material. 441 4 4 5 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

AFRTAmerican Forces Radio and Television. ANASTIGMATA lenscorrectedforastig- The overall term for the field. matism; one which brings both vertical and horizontal lines to a focus in the same plane. AFRTSAmerican Forces Radio and Television Service. Provides American Forces Radio and ANGLESlant or special aspect of a story. "The Television stations with broadcasting materials. angle" refers to the aspect emphasized in the story. AFTRAAbbreviation for "American Federa- tion of Television and Radio Artists." ANGLE (if. FIELDThe angleformed by imaginary lines drawn from the center of the AGATEType 5-1/2 points in depth, the small- lens to the d!vonally opposite corners of the est ordinarily used in newspapers. film. It determines the coverage of a lens with a particular film size. AGATE LINEThe common unit of advertising depth (14 to the inch), A.P. -The Associated Pressisa cooperative, nonprofit news sharing wire service owned and AGITATIONThe movement of film, paper, or operated by its members. developer during the developing process to cause even development through continual change of APERTURE; DIAPHRAGM STOP; F/STOP; solution at the face of the sensitized material. It LEN:: OPENING; STOPThe opening of a lens, is controlled, and is done either continuously or as controlled by an iris diaphragm, through intermittently; if done incorrectly, it will cause which the light passes before striking the film. It spots on negatives. controls the brightness of the image, that is, the amount of light entering the camera. AIR BELLSUndeveloped spots on negatives or prints, due to air bubbles, are caused by lack of ARMED FORCES NEWSPAPERNewspapers proper agitation. published by military commands with appropriated or non-appropriated funds. ALIBI COPYDuplicate file copies of all releases, both written and oral, together with the ARTAny illustrative material used in a publica- authority for the releases. tion.

ALIVECopy or type still usable. ARTIFICIAL LIGHT; TUNGSTEN LIGHT ALLEYSection of a print shop devoted to a Any light supplied primarily by a means other particular task. than daylight. Most common in photography is flash and photoflood. ALL IN HANDWhen all copy has been "sent out" itis said to be "all in hand." See also ART TYPETrade name for acetate lettering or "wrap up" and "put to bed." shading sheets.

A.M.A morning paper. ASA RATINGA number given to a film to indicate its relative speed or sensitivity to light AMAmplitude modulation, the standard sys- and used in exposure calculation. ASA stands tem of broadcasttransmission. Long waves for American Standards Association. (Also cal- follow the curvature of the earth, so the area of led "exposure index," and "film speed.") coverage for AM is governed by station strength. ASPECT RATIO The proportional relationship AMPLIFIERA device for increasing the audio of the width of the picture to the height of the power of the signal of a radio transmitter or picture. In motion pictures and television, it is 4 receiver without appreciably altering its quality. wide by 3 high. 446 442 Appendix IGLOSSARY

ASSIGNMENTA reporter'stask,usually BACK .710PThemechanicaldepartment, temporary(comparewithbeat).Seealso especially of a small newspaper. "assignment man." BACK-TO-BACKConsecutive programs origi- ASSIGNMENT BOOK- -The city editor's record nating from the same studio. of assignments given to reporters. BACK-UPPrinted impressions which are run on ASSIGNMENT MANA reporter available for backs of sheets already printed on one side. general work, as distinguished from one with a regular "beat." BAD BREAKTerm used by printers and makeup editors to cover difficulties encountered ATTRIBUTIONA termused by newsmen in "breaking" a story from one column to when referring to the name of a person in a news another or one page to another, as when the story who makes a statement which may be break comes at the end of a paragraph (giving challenged. the reader the impression the story ends there) or when the first line in a column is very short. AUDIOSound transmission over radio or TV, as differentiated from video or sight transmis- BALANCE(1) Placing elements of balance, sion. such as objects, shapes, or tones, in opposing sections of a photographic composition so that AUDITIONA try-out for prospective artists or each section appears to have an equal amount of programs under conditions similar to the actual weight or value. (2) Adjusting the levels of two broadcast. or more sound sources in a program so that each is heard at the proper comparative volume, e.g., AUTHORITYThe source from which quotes voice over music. and information originate in a news story. BANKA part of a headline (also called a "deck"); usually used to designate a secondary b part of a headline. Also a table in the composing room, usually sloped, used to store type temporarily beforeit goes into page form; often BACKGROUND LIGHTA light projected on designated by the section of the paper for which the background behind the subject, generally it is destined, as "news bank," "sports bank," used in portrait photography. "ad bank," etc. BANNERA large headline of one or more lines BACKGROUND(1) Forradio,anylow- extending across a page or almost the full width volume passage of sound,'speech, or music going of a page. Also called a "streamer," "line," on simultaneously with other sounds, such as "banner line," "ribbon." sound effects, speech, or music transmitted at full volume. (2) For TV, any material, set, BARN DOORSAccessory flaps fitted to photo- drape, drop, etc., used behind performers to flood reflectors in a manner of a swinging door. create scenes or atmosphere. They are used to block out or diminish light from lamps on parts of a subject, especially in BACKLIGHT; HAIR LIGHT; EDGE LIGHT; portrait photography. RIM LIGHTAny lightwhich shines from behindthesubject ioNvard the camera.It BASIC EXPOSUREThe amount of light separates the subject from the background and needed by the film for proper exposure. The causes a third dimensional effect because it term is usually used in connection with a chart forms a partial or complete rim of light on the or guide. It implies the combination of f /stop subject. (See also key and fill light.) and shutter speed (for depth of field or action 443 447 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

purposes) which gives an equivalent exposure. or an especially long story or to "tie in" several Example: basic exposure for bright sun, front related stories, lighting, average subject, ASA 100 film is 1/100 second at f/16. This can be changed to 1/200 at BITE OFFTo remove paragraphs at the end of f/11 or 1/50 at f/22 or some other combination a story in making up the page in order to fit the for an equivalent exposure. space. What has been removed is known as the "biteoff." BASTARD TYPEType that does not conform to the standard point system. BLACK"Going to black" or "fade to black" means ringing down the curtain for a scene or BEAMThe angle in which the mike is sensitive. act. The television screen becomes dark for an instant. BEATA rep irter's regular run, as police beat, city hall beat, etc. (Distinguish from "assign- BLANK GROOVEA recorded tract without ment.") modulation. Also called a "dead groove." BEDFlat part of letterpress press against which BLASTINGToo much volume, resulting in the form rests. voice distortion. BEEPERA recorded telephone conversation or BLEEDA cut "bleeds" when it runs to the report. edge of a page, usually a magazine page. (Some- times used loosely in newspaper makeup to BEN DAYA plastic overlay in patterns em- indicate a cut which runs to the edge of an ployed in line drawings so "shading" effects will outside column). fall into the dot structure necessary for engravings. Ben Day is the name of the inventor. BLIND INTERVIEWAn interview story in which the identity of the interviewed person is BENDING THE NEEDLEProjecting an exces- not revealed. He is often called "a well informed sive volume of sound into a microphone causing source," "a highly placed offical," "a source _The needle of the volume indicator to hit the top close to.,. etc:. of its scale.

BETWEEN-THE-LENSUsually used in references to a type of shutter which is set between BLOCKED; BLOCKED-UP; TURNED OUT the elements of a lens as against the focal-plane Refers to extremely dark or "heavy" highlight or back shutter. Sometimes used in connection portions of negatives. It implies that the negative with the iris diaphragm whose blades operate is so dark in those regions that a good print, between lens elements. which should show good detail in the light portions of the subject, cannot be made from it. BGAbbreviation for "background." Caused by overexposure and/or overdevelopment of the film. BILLBOARDThe opening announcement or portion of a radio program which tells the BLOOMA sudden flue on the television screen listener what and whom he may hear during .the caused by reflections from subject matter being broadcast. televised.

BILLINGThe mention of cast names and the BLOTTERSee "police blotter." parts they play. BLOW-UP(1) A photographic enlargement or BINDERA small banner head across an inside projection print. (2) To enlarge any printed or page usually used with the full text of a speech engraved matter, 444 448 Appendix IGLOSSARY

BLUELINEA photographically prepared image box around a story, head, or ad. in blue lines on acetate, metal plates, or paper. Used for paste-up work in photo offset, BOUNCE LIGHTA type of lighting technique, usually used in flash work, in which the light BLURREDIndistinct or not in sharp focus. source is not aimed directly at the subject but is Due to a variety of causes; dirty, wet, moist or directed at the ceiling or wall and bounced back imperfect lens, improper focusing, improper cut to the subject for an indirect type of light with film loading, improper setting of front standard indistinct shadows and is preferred when a more against infinity marks, subject or camera move- natural look is desired in the subject. In comput- ment, or faulty printing techniques. One of the ing exposure, care must be taken to consider principal causes of rejected pictures. distance from camera to ceiling and ceiling to subject and also to compensate for loss of light BOARDThe engineer's control panel. due to absorption. BOARD FADEA means of indicating a lapse BOXAn enclosure of rules or border used of time or change of scene in a radio script. This around a headline or story to give more promi- is accomplished by the mixer(or monitor) who nent display. gradually turns off or fades all microphones in the studio. After a slight pause, he gradually BOX ALLDirection to enclose several units fades into the new scene. (head, story, and picture, for example) in a single box. BODYThe main part of a news story which supports the lead and the bridge (if there is a BOX HEADSee "box." bridge) by telling the full story in detail. BOX STORYSee "box." BODY TYPEThe type in which most of the newspaper is set; usually 7 or 8 point type. The BREAKThe point at which a story turns from term "body matter"issometimes used to one page to another but espeicially from one indicate that which is to be set in body type. column to another. (See also "jump," "bad (Distinguish from "display type.") break," "wrap," "carryover.") Also pertains to the availability of a story, which "breaks" when BOIL-DOWNAn order to reduce a story in it happens or becomes available for use in the length. newspaper. BOILER PLATENewsmaterial,ordinarily BREAKLINESHeadlines in which a set of "time" matter, in stereotype form and used as words with a broken rule to its left and right is "filler" by small newspapers. centered above a main head. BOLDFACEType which is darker or heavier. BREAKING DOWNIn film editing, the act of Sometimes called "fullface." Abbreviated B.F., reducing a reel of film into its component shots. bf, or Bf. BREAK-OVER To carry a story from one page BOOKA quantity of copy. Usually a "take" of to another; also, the portion of a story carried 300 to 400 words. Sometimes refersto a over to an inside page. The page on which handful of copy from various sources about the "break-overs" are concentratedis sometimes same story, called the "break-over page." See also "carryover," "jump." BOOMA mechanical device for suspending a microphone, normally movable. BRIDGE(1) A connecting sentence or paragraph between the lead and the body of a story. BORDERStrips of type metal used to form a (2) Music or sound effects which span two scenes 445 449 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 41111101111 of a dramatic program and may be used to show important news event or new development in a an elapse of time, change of locale, or change of running story. A bulletin ranks below a "flash." mood. BUREAUA subsidiarynewsgatheringforce BRIGHTENERA brief, amusing feature story, operated by newspapers and press associations at or the headline over such a story. Short for important news centers such as Washington. "page brightener." BURN-IN IMAGEAn image which persists in a BRIGHTNESS RANGE -Variationoflight fixed position in the output signal of a camera intensities on the subject from minimum to tube after the camera has been turned to a maximum. A brightness range of16:1, for different scene. instance, means that the brightest highlights of the scene reflect sixteen times as much light as the darkest shadows. Also refers to a method of BUSINESS DEPARTMENTA department in a exposure meter calculation which is based on newspaper concerned with the commercial side this principle. of a newspaper such as advertising, circulation, promotion, and bookkeeping. BROADCASTINGTheactoftransmitting audio and videomaterial from a radio/TV BY-LINEThe writer's name carried in type at station or network. the top of a story.

BROAD LIGHTINGIlltiminating fully the side of the face turned towards the camera. It results in a broad expanse of highlight on the face as C against the narrow amount of highlight which is the consequence of short lighting. C. and l.c. Abbreviation for "caps and lower BROMIDE A trite or hackneyed expression. case."

BUDGETA wire service or other statement of CABLESEThe skeletonize('andtelescoped the day's stories on hand language used in transmitting news by cable to reduce transmission cost. BUGA fancy typographical device inserted in heads and ads to obtain emphasis or break up CAMERA ANGLEThe point of view from areas of white space. See "dingbat." Also a which a subject is photographed usually imply- telegrapher's key. Also refers to the union label ing the angle used, such as high and low. of the International Typographers union. CAMERA AXISAn imaginarylinedrawn BUGSSlang termfor trouble in equipment through the center of the film and lens and which is working imperfectly. outward to the subject. It is considered when planning the placement of lights when photo- BULLDOGThe earliest edition of a paper. In graphing with artificial light and in the posing of the case of Sunday papers, it is often printed the subject in portrait photography. several days ahead of its publication date. CAMERA (RIGHT,LEFT)Indicationsof BULLETINA And lead of important or last direction in a setting as viewed. from the point of minute news. When it pertains to a story already view of the camera as opposed to "stage right" received, it is usually set in boldface type at the or "stage left." head of the previous story. The term is also used by the press associations to designate the first CANNED COPYPublicity material sentto news transmitted pertaining to a new and quite news papers. 446 450 Appendix IGLOSSARY

CAPSCapital letters. (See also "upper case.' ) CHASEA rectangular metal frame into which type, art, etc., are wedged (locked) before it is CAPS AND SMALL CAPSCapital letters and put on the press. (Distinguish from "form.") small capicu now rarely used. Sometimes abbreviate, and s.c. CHECK UPTo verify a story.

CAPTION Strictlyspeaking,theheadline CHEESECAKEArt of the figure, especially the appearing above a piece of art. Loosely includes legs of a pretty girl. cutlines or any type matter associated with art. CHINFOThe Chief of Navy Information. CARETA character used to denote where corrections are to be inserted in copy. CHINFO MERIT AWARDAn award presented quarterly to sea-service publications considered CARRYOVERSame as "break-over." to be outstanding or to have shown improvement in meeting professional standards of jour- CASEThe type case, containing a single "font" nalism. of type. "Learning the case" refers to learning to set type by hand. CIBCommand Information Bureau. A temporary office set up at the scene of special events, CASTThe artistsselectedto performina exercises, operation, and so forth to channel broadcast or telecast, information to news media. CASUAL VISITING A ship or station plays CINCH MARKSLateral scratch marks on the host to individuals or specific groups, as differ- surface of a piece of film made by putting too entiated from the general public. much tension on a tightly wound reel. CASUAL PUBLICATIONSPublications which CIRCUS LAYOUTMethod of making up a are NCT published at regular intervals for the newspaper page in an unorthodox fashion, using same readership. They include booklets, bro- heavydisplaytype,multiple-column heads, chures, pamphlets, printed guides, and similar much art, and sometimes color. Traditional rules literature. of makeup are deliberately broken and a calcu- lated frantic effect is cultivated, CENTERTo set a line of type in such a way as to leave an equal amount of white space on both CITY DESK--The nerve center of the city room, sides. presided over by the city editor.

CENTERFOLDTwo joined pages at the center CITY EDITORThe executive editor in charge of a newspaper, visually used for photo features of the collection and writing (and often the or longer articles. editing) of all local news in a newspaper. C.G.O. Can Go Over material which can be CITY ROOMThe place in which the news held up foruseinthe next day's issueif organization functions. necessary. CIVILIAN ENTERPRISE NEWSPAPERS CHALLENGEWhen a copy editor doubts the Unofficial military newspapers published by a authenticity of a story or part of a story he commercial publisher at no cost to the local challenges it by referring it to the desk chief, command or military complex. These newspapers are normally funded through advertising CHANNELA bank of frequencies in the spec- revenue obtained by the publisher. Most news is trum assigned to a given TV. station or stations. contributed by the local military establishment.

447 451. JOURNALIST 3 & 2

CLAMBAKE--A slang term used for a program COLORTo give a story color is to brighten up which did not live up to expectations. the writing with "human interest" material.

CLEAN COPYCopy requiring few corrections. COLOR TRIANGLE A graphic representation of the relationship of colors to each other. CLEAN PROOFProof requiring few correc- Primaries, (blue, green, red) are placed at the tions. (See "galley proof.") threepoints of the triangle and secondaries (cyan, yellow, magenta) are placed in between. CLEARThe length of time it takes to remove the unexposed and undeveloped silver salts from COLUMN--(1) Vertical sections of printed mat- a negative in the fixing bath. Visually, it refers ter lying side by side on the sine page and tothe time it takes to get rid of the milky separated by a ruled line or white space. (2) A appearance of the film. regular feature article in a newspaper. CLEARANCEPermission to use copyrighted COLUMN INCHThe standard unit of measu- ma mial. ring newspaper space. It is one column wide and one inch deep. CLIP-- Abbreviation for clipping. Any clipping from a newspaper. Also refers to editorials and COLUMN RULEA thin line (usually a I-point other matter reprinted from other publications. or 1/2-point rule) running from top to bottom of the newspaper page, separating it into col- CLIPSHEETA sheet, usually printed, contain- umns. ing feature material or news matter. The Ameri- can Forces Press Service prepares aweekly COMBAT ARTPopularly definedasallart clipsheet. produced which results from combat operations or experimental operations such as Deepfreeze, CLOSE-UP- (CU) A veryclosepicture of a Se Lab, and space probes. person or object. COMPLEMENTARY COLORSColors of pig- CLOSED CIRCUITA kind of "in- horse" trans- ment which when mixed produce a grey; colors mission from point-to-point not intended for the of light which produce white when mixed. general public. Opposite colors on a color triangle, blue and yellow for instance, are complementary to each COATED PAPERAny paper to which surface other. coating (usually slick) has been applied. COMMERCIALThat part of the program in COLAbbreviation for "column." which the advertiser tells the audience about his product. COLD (1) To open a show without preliminary music or sound; (2) to go on the air without COMMERCIAL PROGRAMSponsored by an rehearsal. advertiser. COLD COPYAn announcement read unre- COMPOSING ROOMSection of the mechan- heatscd. ical department devoted to hand and machine composition of type. (Sometimes loosely used COLDTYPE COMPOSITIONAny composition to cover the entire "back shop, ") prepared by methods thatdonotinclude materials produced with letterpress typesetting COMPOSITE PRINTPicture and sound track equipment. For exmaple, typewritten material. combined on a single film strip.

448 452 Appendix I-GLOSSARY

COMPOSITOR-Worker who sets type by hand COPYBOY-The errand boy of the city room. or machine. COPY CUTTER-An employee of the compos- COMMUNITY -The geographical area encom- ing room who controls the flow of copy to the passingthecities,towns, villages, and rural compositors. He puts copy into "takes" of settlements-includingthecivilian population appropriate size depending on the current neces- residing there-in which naval commands are sity for speed in order to maintain a steady work located or naval units are visiting. load on each machine. He supervises distribution of copy to machines and reassembly of type into COMMUNITY RELATIONS-Allcontacts, original story form. whether official or private, between the command, individual members of the command, and COPY DESK -Thedesk,oftenhorseshoe the local community. shaped, at which copy is edited. On smaller newspapers, frequently all copy is edited at a COMMUNITY RELATIONS PROGRAM- single universal desk. On larger papers there are Planned activities initiated by local or visiting usually several separate copy desks such as the commands which are designed to inspire favor- city desk, telegraph desk, and cable desk. (See able relations between the community and the also "rim" and "slot.") Navy. COPY EDITOR-An editor who is in charge of CONDENSED TYPE-Type designed to be nar- the copy desk, where material intended for rower than the standard face; the opposite of publicationisedited,polished, and assigned "extended" type; extremely narrow versions are heads. called "extra-condensed." COPY HOLDER-Theproofreader'sassistant CONTACT PRINTING-A method of producing who holds the copy and reads aloud from it photographs by placing a sheet of photographic while the proofreader is correcting the proof. paper in absolute and uniform contact with the negative. COPYREADER-An employee of the news- room, working under the copy editor, who puts CONTINUOUS TONE-Photographs in which copy into final shape before itis sent to the the tone values of the subject are reproduced by composing room. He corrects language errors, a gradual gradation of grey densities from black checks it for style, consistency, and accuracy, to white. and writes headlines.

CONTRAST-A general term referring to differences between extremes of tone values in nega- COPYREADING SYMBOLS-A special set of tives, prints, and subject or lighting. When the symbols used by a copyreader when making difference is great, the contrast is called high, corrections, additions, or deletions in copy. hard, or contrasty; when the difference is slight, the contrast is soft, flat, or low. Contrast in the COPYRIGHT-The exclusive right of possession final photograph may be the result of many given an individual by law to protect his literary, contributing factors: lighting of the subject, the musical, or artistic work. subject itself, type of film and developing used, and the kind of control exercised in printing. COPY WRITER-Employee of the advertising department of a newspaper or commercial or- CONTROL ROOM-The room housing broad- ganization or especially an advertising agency, cast monitoring equipment. who prepares advertising copy.

COPY-Term applied to all manuscripts. CORES-Centers on which film is wound.

449 453 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

CORRESPONDENTA reporter who submits cerned with something the Navy has done or out-of-town stories to the newspaper..He may be plans to do that we want the public to know a "staff correspondent," in which case he is about. Unlike spot news, created news can be usually a full-time employee, or he may be "on anticipated. string," hence paid on the basis of the quantity of copy accepted by the newspaper. CREDITA mention of the product being advertised or acknowledgment for the use of the CO R RESPONDENTSIndividualrepresenta- material or performers on a program. tives of bona fide media agencies, or reputable self-employedauthors,photographers,and CREDIT LINEA lineacknowledgingthe artists. source of a story or cut. (Example: "U.S. Navy Photograph.") COUNTING INA system by which each letter symbol and space in a headline is considered as CREDITSA listing of people connected with so many units of space and assigned a definite the presentation of a program. numerical count. CROPTo trimor block out parts of the COUNTRY COPYTerm applied to copy sub- photograph, either by cutting the print or in mitted by correspondents, usually "on string," enlarging or contact printing. Aim is to improve who cover suburban or rural areas. composition or remove unwanted portions in theprint.Sometimes itisloosely used to COUNTRY TEAMA term used in international describe the act of moving in closer with the public affairs. As the personal representative of camera when photographing a subject. It is more the President of the United States, the U.S. desirable to compose well in tu: camera than to Ambassador, inthe country to which he is resort to cropping while printing. assigned, is the senior U.S. citizen. He is assisted in the formulation of policy by the "Country Team, " which, with the ambassador as chair- ChOSSLINEA headline variation in which a man, consists of the senior member of each singleline of type runs over a column or official U.S. agency and service represented in columns. It can be centered, flush right or left. the country and the senior U.S. military command. CROSS FADETo blendone soundinto another by reducing the volume of the existing COVERTo get all available news about an sound while increasing the volume of the suc- event. A reporter "covers" a story when he gets ceeding sound. the facts and either writes the story or telephones the facts to a rewrite man. He "covers a CROSS LIGHTEqual illumination in front of beat" by contacting a specific area of news the subject from two directions at substantially sources daily. Coverage in this sense usually equal and opposite angles with the optical axis involves the reporter's presence on the scene of of the camera and a horizontal plane. the event. CROSS TALKAn undesired signal interfering COVERAGEDescribes (1) the extent and thor- with the desired signal. oughness of the newspaper's coverage of its news sources, and (2) the extent and thoroughnessof CRUISE BOOKA carefully prepared publica- its circulation. tion employing informal text and graphic illustrations to cover a cruise or a brief period in the COVER STOCKPaper stock used for brochure, history of a ship or station and its crew. booklet, etc. covers. CRUSADEA campaign by a newspaper to CREATED NEWSNews which is generally con- bring pressure to accomplish a specific reform. 464 Appendix IGLOSSARY

CUBA beginning reporter. DASHA short horizontal line of varying length used to separate parts of a headline, headline CUEA hand signal to a performer; a word from story, or story from other stories. It may signal in a script used to stop or start music, also consist of a row of stars, a curved line, etc. movement, speech, or a sound effect. The length of the dash usually has a specific meaning in makeup. (See also "dinky dash," CUE SHEET (OR CUE CARD)Frequently "jim dash," "short dash," "long dash." Distin- called "idiot cards," these are large cardboard guish from "cutoff rule.") Also a punctuation sheets upon which are printed dialogue, lyrics, mark. or other material which will help a performer. DATELINEThe lead-in line giving the point of CURTAIN APERTUREThe slitin a focal origin (where the non-local story is written, not plane shutter which permits light to reach the necessarily the event) and date of "filing" or film.It changes in size with different shutter transmission. Usually includes the ligature of the speeds. wire service in ththis form: "MADISON Wis., Sept. 24 (AP). Also the folio line at the top of CUTAny photograph, illustration, or diagram. Page One giving date and place newspaper is (See "art.") Also (as a verb) to reduce the length published. of a story. DAY SIDEThe part of the news organization CUTAWAYShots of subjects previously estab- that works days. lished and related to the main action used to direct audience attention in order to cover gaps in action, screen direction changes, and passage DAYLIGHTUsed in photography, the combi- of time. nation of sunlight and skylight; more loosely, and outdoor lighting from natural sources. CUTLINE(S)Explanatorymatterappearing below a cut. The "caption" then becomes the DAYLIGHT LOADINGAny arrangement ona headline over a cut. (Note: This terminology camera, a film magazine or a developing tank sometimes varies.) permitting insertion of film in light without the use of a darkroom or a changing bag. Examples: CUTOFF RULEA rule or line placed horizon- film pack, cassettes, roll film. tally across one or more columns to separate units such as boxes, cuts, multi-column heads, DEADNews matter which has been "killed," etc., from the rest of the page to guide the hence cannot be used in the newspaper. The reader and avoid confusion. (See also "adver- term appliesto bothtype and copy, and tising cutoff.") includes type and copy which has already been run. CUTTINGThe succession of shots as they appear on the screen; the assembling and piecing DEAD BANKA bank in the composing room together of shots according to the story. where "dead" type is assembled.

CYANBlue-green secondary color resembling DEADLINEThe last moment at which copy or the turquoise blue of artists' pigments. art may be acceptedinordertomee.i.a particular edition. d DEAD MIKE -One that is turned off or is not connected. DATA SHEETA direction and information sheet packed with film. DEAD STONESame as "dead bank." 451 453 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

DECKA part of a headline; usually synony- DIAPHRAGMSee aperture. mous with "bank" or subordiante head.Some- times used to refer only to a secondary part of a DINFOSShort title for the Defense Informa- headline. tion School, located at Ft. Benjamin Harrison, Indiana. Provides specialized instruction for all DEFINITIONThe clarity, sharpness, resolution military service personnel in the Public Affairs and brilliancy of an image formed by a lens. Field. DELAY TIMEThe time from releasing the DINGBATGenerally, any typographical orna- shutter to fully open position in between-lens mentation. shutter operation. Also, in flash work, the time it takes a flashbulb to build up to highest or DINKY DASHThe shortest dash, sometimes peak intensity. only one em in length, used to separate subdivisions of a story within sections separated by a DENSEA dark or "heavy" negative, usually "jim" ("short") dash. causedbyoverexposureand/orover- development. Also used to refer to specific dark DIRECT IMAGE PLATESIn offsetlitho- portions of negatives. Opposite to thin. graphy this term refers to plates which may be typed on or drawn on directly. DENSITYThe relative darkness or lightness of a negative or portions of it, according to the DISPLAY TYPEType larger or heavier than amount of silver present. The contrast of a that normally used as body type or in the body negative, for example, is determined by differ- of a news story; headline type. encesofdensitiesbetweenhighlightsand shadows. DISSOLVEAn opticaleffectbetween two superimposed shots on the screen in which the DEPTH OF FIELDWhen a camera is focused second shot gradually begins to appear, while on an object, a certain amount ofdistance in the first shot gradually disappears. front of, and back of, the subject will appear acceptably sharp. This total distance is the depth of field. Knowledge and use of it enables a DISTORTIONAn unnatural rendering of the photographer to control the relative sharpness shape or size of a subject in a photograph. It is and blurriness of different parts of the picture to not necessarily a bad practice to cause distor- achieve desired effects. tion. For dramatization of the subject, in news photography and for special effects, it is very DESK CHIEFExecutive employee supervising effective. On the other hand, in technical or a particular copy desk. legal type of photography it is generally undesirable. DESK EDITORA minor executive supervising a group or reporters and/or copyeditors. DISTRIBUTION The act of putting type back in the case. Also the mechanism on a linotype DETAILThe clarityof the registrationof which automatically returns matrices to their objects in negative or print. Akin to definition. appropriate channel in the magazine. Also the fun.:tion of carriers in distributing the paper to DEVELOPERA chemicalsolutionwhich subscribers. makes the exposed (latent) image visible by changing silver halides to black metallic silver. DISTRICT MANA reporter assigned to a par- There are many developers available according ticular district of a city, usually a "leg man." to use, but they are first classified broadly into Also a man who supervises carriers in a specific two types: film and paper. district.

452 456 Appendix IGLOSSARY

DOCUMENTARYA type of film marked by its minimum of capital lettersis used.Itis the interpretativehandlingofrealisticsubjects. present trend in both civilian and service news- Sometimes the term is applied so widely as to paper include all films which appear more realistic than conventional commercial pictures. Contem- DRESS The final rehearsal before air time in porary usage includes the filming of real people which the program is treated just as if it were in real situations as opposed to the restaging of actually on the air. events. DROP LINEA type of headline in which each DODGING The operation of permitting light line is stepped back to the right. from parts of a negative to fall on the paper for THIS, THEN, IS varying amounts of time when exposing the WHAT WE CALL print so that final results are modified. A "DROP" HEAD DOLLYA rolling platform for camera and DRY RUNA programrehearsalwithout other heavy equipment that must be moved cameramen, engineers, sound effects,techni- around. Also used for moving camera shots. cians, and similar personnel. DOLLY INTo move in from a far shot to a DUBBINGThe process of re-recording or copy- close one by means of a camera mounted on a ing a record or portion thereof. dolly. DUMMYA layout sheetpasted up by an DOLLY OUTTo move from a close shot to a editor from galley proofs to show the printer the far one by means of a camera mounted on a position in which type and art should be placed. dolly. DUPEAn abbreviation for "duplicate." If two DOMINANT NEWS ELEMENTSOne or more stories giving the same facts inadvertently are news elementsina news story which over- printed in the same issue, ona is a dupe. Also shadow other elements in intensity: They are used to designate the carbon copy of a story. combined to form the news peg. DUPETo make a duplicate negative from a DOPEMore or less private advance informa- positive print. tion, often based on gossip and rumor. DYNAMIC CUTTINGA style of film editing DOUBLE -A member of the cast who is playing which, by the juxtaposition of contrasting shots more than one part. or sequences, generates ideas in the mind of the spectator which were not latent in any of the DOUBLE EXPOSURETwo exposures on a elements of the film. (See "Montage") single negative. When done by a professional it is sometimes justifiableclaimedtohave been intended for artistic effect; when done by a e beginner it is always a mistake. DOUBLE TRUCKA two page editorial or EARA little box appearing on either side of a advertising layout made up as one, hence elimi- newspaper "flag," generally carrying suchin- nating the "gutter," the normal margin between, formation as the weather report,the news- pages. paper's slogan, etc.

DOWN IN THE MUDLow in volume or clarity. EASELA device used to keep sensitive paper flat while enlarging. Forms white borders on a DOWN STYLEA newspaper style in which a print. 453 457 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

ECHO(1) Inradio,anartificially induced ELECTRONIC FLASH; STROBE LIGHTA reverberation, accomplished by a special mech- high intensity, short duration flash used as a anical device, or special chamber, intended to source of illumination. Its light is usually softer produce a large hall, sepulchral, ghost, or dis- than flash which necessitates development of tance effect. (2) In TV, a wave which has been film to a higher contrast. reflected at one or more points in the transmission medium with sufficient magnitude and time ELECTRONIC MEDIAThe broadcasting media difference to be perceived in some manner as a (radio and TV). So called because of its method wave distinct from that of the main or primary of transmission. transmission; also called "ghosts." ELECTROTYPEA copper-plated duplicate of ECHO CHAMBERA room or isolated portion type or art, usually mounted on a wooden base. of a studio designed to give a hollow or echo effect to the voice or instrument. ELEMENTS OF NEWSCommon denominators by which news value is determined. EDGE FOGFog on film due to light leakage between the flanges of the spool on which it is EMThe square of any given size of type. (The ----wound. Occurs when loading and unloading letter M in standard type is usually as high as it film. is wide.) The term is most frequently used to indicate a standard measure of width and is EDGE NUMBERSA series of numbers printed short for "pica em," or 12 points. along the edge of film. These numbers print through to the positive print. Used to match EMBOSSINGPressing aninkedor uninked negative to positive film in negative cutting. image in relief onto the paper stock.

EDITING(1) The act of preparing news mate- EMULSIONIn film or paper, a gelatin layer rialfor publication by selection, annotation, containing the silver salts which are sensitive to revision, etc., (2) Organizing, timing, and rear- light. ranging motion picture scenes for continuity, pacing, and story telling value. (See "cutting.") ENHalf an em. EDITING BARRELA container that has pins, ENGRAVINGA process through which art- on which to hang film takes. Used in editing to work for letterpress printing is reproduced. protect and organize film scenes. ENLARGING; PROJECTION PRINTINGThe EDITIONEach separate "run" of a newspaper. making of large prints by means of a projected A newspaper may have several editions, as state image. edition, early mail edition, market final edition, etc. EXCHANGESCopies of newspaper received by a newspaper when it exchanges subscription EDITORIAL DEPARTMENTThe department with other papers. in a newspaper which gathers, writes, edits, and comments on the news. EXCLUSIVEAn exclusive story. A "scoop" or "beat." EDITORIALIZETo express opinion in a newsstory or headline. EXCLUSIVE RELEASESInformationcon- cerning a significant news event which is ob- EDITOR-IN-CHIEFAn editor who supervises tained by only one of several competing corres- and coordinates the work of the editorial depart- pondents desiring the information. Itis the ment and enforces the publisher's policy. Navy's policy not to grant "exclusives" except

454 458 Appendix 1GLOSSARY when a correspondent originates the idea for a tally derived by dividing the focal length of a story. For a complete ruling on exclusives, refer lens by a diameter of the lens diaphragm in to PA Regs. question.

EXHAUSTIONThe aging or depleting of pro- FACEA type "face" refers to its characteristic cessing solutions so that they no longer produce design: Cheltenham, Bodoni, Goudy, etc., are satisfactory results. type faces. Also, the printing surface of a piece of type. EXHIBITA carefully planned arrangement w' objects desinged totella story or convey a FACTOR; MULTIPLYING FACTORAn message. amount of compensation or increase of exposure due to various causes, as in filter factor. EXPOSUREThe length of time that light has been allowed to act on a sensitive emulsion. It is FADE IN(1) In radio, the gradual increase in controlled by a combination of f/stops and volume of sound, voice,ormusic.(2) In shutter speeds. Many factors affect the amount television, to bring up the image electronically of exposure needed in a given situation among so that it appears gradually. which are the kind and amount of illumination used, type of subject, and film speed. FADE OUT(1) In radio, the gradual decrease in volume of sound, voice or music. (2) In TV, EXPOSURE METERA hand operated, photo- to black out the image electronically so that it electriccelled instrument used to measure the disappears gradually. amount of light falling upon or being reflected from a subject with the object of calculating FAKEA falsified story. exposure. There are two types, incident and reflected light. The first measures the strength of FAMILYAll thetype of any one design, the light which shines on the subject, the second including all the styles, widths, and sizes, com- measures light reflected from the subject. pose a family.

EXTRAAn edition run off inaddition to FA M I L YG R A M S Informalnewslettersto regular editions to cover some important news parents and dependents, written by the officer event. Extras are rare today due to radio/TV in command, when a shipis on a lengthy news competition. deploymento.the shore assignment isin a remote area. EYE LIGHTIllumination on a person to produce a specular reflection from the eyes (and FANFAREA short dynamic musical selection teeth) without adding a significant increase in for commanding attention. light to the subject. FAR POINTThe farthestobject from the camera which is still acceptably sharp when the camera is focused for a given distance. Near and f far points are used to describe the extent of depth of field. F/STOPS (AS F/4.5, F /1;, F/32)The number of the opening through which light enters the FASTUsed in photography, a term meaning camera to strike the film, F /numbers are usually generally accelerated or efficient. For instance, a calibrated to change the amount of light enter- fast film is one which is highly sensitive to light, ing by a factor of two times with each succeed- a fast lens transmits relatively more light than a ing numberf/22 allows twice as much light to "slow" one and a fast developer is one which enter as f/32 while f/8 lets in only one-half the acts more quickly on a film causing more rapid light of F/5.6. A given f/number is mathemati- development. "Fast" does not always imply a 455 459 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 gain in exposure as in the above examples; a fast FILLERShort items of "time copy" which can shutter speed is one which is of shorter duration be used to fill out small "holes" in inside pages. and which stops action but which causes less exposure if not compensated for. FILMA thin sheet of plastic coated with an emulsionof gelatincontainingmicroscopic FATAny line, especially a headline, is "fat" grains of light-sensitive silver chemicals which when it contains too many letters to be set in chemically react to light to form an image. the allowed space. FILM ADVANCERA mechanism for advanc- FCCThe Federal Communications Commis- ing the film in a camera. sion. FILM BASEA celluloseacetateor plastic FEATURE(1) To give prominent display to a support for the emulsion layer in film. story or to play up a particular "angle" of a story. (2) A special story written for a publica- FILM CEMENTA solution of cellulose acetate tion which goes beyond the usual news value of or nitrate used to join strips of motion picture the material and delves into its human interest, film. (3) Syndicated matter such as comics, humor panels, columns, etc. FILM PACKA daylight loading unit containing twelve or sixteen sheets of film attached to FEATURE PICTUREOne thatisplanned, paper tabs so that the films can be successively aimed to tell a particular story, antl not depen- exposed in the camera and then withdrawn to dent on timeliness to any great degree. the rear of the pack without withdrawing it from the camera. FEEDTo supply another station or network with a given program. FILM PACK ADAPTERA device that holds the film pack when the pack is to be used in the FEED BACK(1) Audience response to public camera. affairs, media (such as letters to the editor). (2) The squeal or howl which may rosult from FILM SPEEDSee ASA rating. accidentally closing the inbound and outbound ends of an electrical current. FILM STRIP (FILM CLIP)A short piece of motim picture, usually integrated into a live production. FHTNCFleet Home Town News Center. (See Chapter 23.) FILTER (Audio)A mechanical device employed to cut "high" or "low" so that a more FIELDThe area covered by a lens or a view evenly modulated tone will result. A filter is also finder. used to give a voice a weird effect or to differentiatebetween the two partiesin a FILETo transmit a story by telegraph, tele- telephone conversation, in a radio or television type, or cable. Also, all newspapers keep "files" script. of back issues. Also designates one day's output by a press association. FILTER (Photographic)A piece of colored glass or gelatin used to selectively pass (transmit) FILL; FILL-IN- LIGHT Secondary illumination or block (absorb) certain colors of light to alter to lighten the shadows which are caused by a thefilm's usual grey scale rendition of the main or key light in basic lighting. It should be subject.Filters can be used in a variety of weaker than the main source and be placed close situations to meet specific needs; for color to the camera axis to avoid cross shadows. (See coffee -)n, haze penetration and contrast con- key and back light). trol. 456 460 Appendix IGLOSSARY

FILTER FACTORThe number of times the FLIGHT DEMONSTRATIONSAerial perfor- exposure must be increased to compensate for mances by a flight demonstration team, such as the light which is absoibed by the filter. the U.S. Navy "Blue Angels"; rescue demonstrations by helicopters; aerial refueling demonstra- FIRST-DAY STORYA story published for the tions;maximum performancetakeoffsand first time; a story dealing with somahing that landings; or similar flight operations. has just happened (used to distinguish from a follow-up or "second-day" story). FLIP CARDSPieces of cardboard placed in FINE CUTThe version of the workprint of a correct order and used for titles, credits, slogans, filmwhich follows the rough cut stage of ect. editing. At each successive stage the cutting is refined and unnecessary footage eliminated. FLOOD; FLOOD LAMP; PHOTOFLOOD LAMPA high intensity bulb used to light FIVE W'SThe who, what, where, when, and indoor pictures, especially portraits and studio- why that a JO attempts to answer in writing a type photographs. summary lead. (Sometimes "how").

FIXER; FIXING BATH; HYPOA chemical FLOOR MANAGERA production staff mem- solution which dissolves or removes the unex- ber who remains in the studio to relay cues from posed and undeveloped silver halides from the the director to performers and technical staff. developed film or paper. Its purpose is to make the negative or print permanent. FLOPPINGTo flip a negative from its proper printing-sidepriorto exposure and thereby FLAGSA nameplate used to indicate section cause a left to right reversal of all objects in the pages or special pages, such as editorial, sports, final print. This technique is sometimes used to and family pages. make a picturefaceina desired direction. (Caution: Flopping reverses ribbons and medals, FLAREExcess light reaching film and causing the part in a person's hair, keyboards, etc.) fog, resulting from internal reflections within the lens. You can most easily get it when the FLUFFAlso known as a "bloop," "butch," or earned is pointed towards the light source. "boot." These terms are used in referring to errors while reading copy or lines. FLASHThe first brief information of a very important story. The press associations use the term only for news of extreme moment and the FLUSHEven with the column margin on either flash outranks the "bulletin." left or right. Usually designated "flush left" or "flush right." Thus a "flub left head" is one FLASH GUNAn accessory on a camera that is which is set even with the margin on the left. capable of setting off flash bulbs for artificial "Flush left and right" is a term sometimes used illumination. to designate a "full line." "Flush and indent" is a direction to the compositor h make the first FLAT(1) Photographically lacking in contrast, line flush and succeeding lines indented (usually opposite to "contrasty." (2) A sheet of acetate one em). (See also "hanging in..ention.") or paper on which a number of negatives have been stripped up ready for printing the press FLYOVERA specialevent in which Navy plate. aircraft depart their home base, fly over an outdoor public gatheringin formation ata FLAT-BED PRESSAny press that prints from specified time, and return to their home base type held horizontally on a flat surface. without landing at the site of the event.

457 461 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

FMFrequency modulation,ahighfidelity the sidebar is separated from the main story by a systemof broadcasttransmission. High fre- short dash and (usually) carries a small head of quency waves travel in a straight line rather than its own. (Distinguish from "add.") following the earth's curvature. FOLLOW FOCUSA continuous change of lens FOCAL LENGTHThe distancefromthe focus to maintain a sharp image of a moving optical center of the lens to the film plane when subject being filmed. focused on infinity. It determines the image size which can be gotten with a given lens as well as FOLLOW UPA "second day" story. To "fol- controls its f/stop, depth of field, and other lens low up" a story is to get new information on attributes. yesterday's story. FOCAL PLANE SHUTTERA shutter consist- FOLLOW COPYCircled directions to the coming of a curtain with slits of various sizes, positor to set the type exactly as written despite traveling as close to the film as possible. It ceming errors. Also, a proof containing many generally includes higher shutter speeds than errors may be sent from the proof desk to the between-the-lens shutters. A camera having a composing room along with the copy with the focal plane shutter can be used with interchange- designation "follow copy" inorder to save able lenses which do not have shutters of their making many proof marks. own. FOLOAbbreviation for "follow."

FOCAL POINTA point on the focal plane at FONTA complete assortment of type of a which converging rays of light from a lens meet. given design, style, and size. The term is occa- More simply, the photographic image of a point. sionally used to designate the case in which a font of type is stored. FOCUSTo adjust the distance between the lens and the film for greatest image sharpness, most FORCINGOverdevelopment of an exposed commonly by moving the lens assembly for- film or paper, usually to try to compensate for wards or backwards. underexposure.

FOCUS LAYOUTA newspaper layoutin FORESHORTENINGA distortion caused by which elements are arranged to lead the reader's too small camera to subject distance. eye to the lead story in the upper right hand corner. FORMA complete page of type and art within a chase. FOGNon-image density on prints or negatives. This defect can be caused chemically in storage FORMAT(1) The size, shape, and style of a or in outdated film, it can be the result of stray page,section, newspaper or book: (2) The light entering the lens when taking the picture, arrangement of program elements in an estab- or it may be due to a darkroom which is not lished pattern. absolutely light tight. FOTOTYPECardboard alphabets used in line FOLDThe point at which a paper is folded. art, copy, and headline preparation. FOLIOA page number, edition, newspaper's FOUR-COLOR PROCESSA photoengraving name or a combination of these elements, process whereby color is reproduced by a set of plates, one each for yellow, blue, red, and black. FOLLOWA "second-day"or"follow-up" story. The term is also used to designate a FOURTH ESTATETraditional term for "the particular handling of a "sidebar" story where press." 458 46:e Appendix IGLOSSARY

FRAME(I) A single complete pictureon film GALLEY PRESSA proofpress,socalled or television; (2) the act of getting the correct because it is suitable for proofing long galleys of view by the television cameraman. type.

FRAME-LINEThe narrow,unexposedarea GALLEY PROOFA proof of a galley of type. between adjacent frames or pictures. GATEA term applied to the film aperture unit FRAMINGThepracticeofadjustingthe of cameras and projectors. camera to place the image within the picture frame, or borders, as seen in a viewfinderor GENERAL VISITINGA ship or station plays ground glass. host to the general public, such as at an open house. FRONT OFFICEThe business office. Some- times, especially on small newspapers, used to GIMMICKA new approach used ina program distinguish all white-collar departments from all format which is original, unique, or unusual. mechanical departments. GLANCERSlang for an at-a-glance feature, one FRYINGA hissing sound caused by defective which sums up a story or series of related stories equipment, or noise on transmission lines. or the main stories of the day.

FUDGEA detachable.part of a page plate GLOSSYShort for a "glossy print,"a shiny- which may be chiseled or replaced by another to finished photographic print favored by photoen- make possible the printing of last-minutenews. gravers. Oftenusedincarryinglast-minutesports developments. Also called "fudge box." GRAINThe individual particles of image Aver in emulsions. According to their size and/or FULL LINEA line is set "full line" when it is amount of "clumping" together, they give an flush to both right and left. impression either of coarse grain or fine grain. The former condition, also referred toas grainy FUTUREA note about a story that can be or graininess, may be due to improper processing expected to develop later. Such notes are usually technique, type of film used or overexposure kept in a "future book," which may also serve as and/or overdevelopment. On the other hand, the "assignment book." fine grain is usually the result of slower films, proper exposure, and careful processing. FUZZY(1) Photographically out of focus; not sharp: (2) An adjective used to describe vocal or GRAY OUTA page "grays out" in a particular instrumental music that is lacking in both clarity area when that area consists largely or entirely and definition. of body type, producing a gray and uninterest- ing appearance. FYI"For Your information." GREEN PROOFUncorrected proof.

GREY CARDA piece of cardboard o4' neutral color which reflects18 percent of the light which falls upon it. This tone is considered the GAINControl of volume used in transmission. visual "middle grey" of an average subject. The cardis used in determining exposure with a GALLEYA shallow metal tray in which type is meter. placed after being set. Also a rough measurement of length (a galley of type is about 20 GROUND GLASSA sheet of glass with a inches). grained surface, attached to the back of the 459 4'3 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 camera at the focalplane and used to aid in HALIDES; SILVER HALIDES; SILVER focusing and composition. SALTSThe individual particles of light sensitive material which are suspended in thegelatin GUEST CRUISESAn important part of the emulsion. Specifically, they are chemical com- Navy's Community Relations Program which pounds of silver bromides, iodides, orchlorides, takes selected individuals and groups on indoc- the amount and ratio of each depending on trination cruises of short duration. whether paper or film and on the purpose. GUIDELINE -The "slug" placed at the begin- HAMMERHEADA headline twice the size of ning of every piece of copy to identify the story. the main head and set flush left, nowider than half the width of the headline area. GUIDE NUMBERA numerical rating given to a flashlamp to indicate its strength and to aid in HANDHELDFootage shot with the camera off determining exposure. It is not a fixed value and the tripod. may be adjusted to suitspecific conditions of equipment, processing, and the photographer's HANDOUTA news release supplied by apub- exposure preference. licity agent.

GUTTERThe margin between facing pages. HAND-STUCKType set by hand. GYRO HEADA tripod head using a heavy HANGING INDENTIONA headline or partof flywheel driven by gears to ensure smooth a headline set "flush andindent." Its first line is camera movement. a full line and the rest areindented, usually one em. The last line may or maynot be flush to the right. (See also "square indention.") h HARDHaving excess contrast as in a hard print or hard lighting. HAIR LINEA very thin rule or line. HARDENER - -A chemical which makes the gela- HALATIONA fog or halo around light objects tin of the film emulsion physicallytough and in a photograph, due to reflection of light from hard, making it more resistant toscratches and the film base back up through the emulsion. softening due to heat. It is used in the fixing Most modern films contain antihalation dyes bath. which absorb light and prevent halation in all but the most brilliantly lit subjects. HAZE PENETRATIONThe use of filters to discount or diminish the effect of ultra-violet HALFTONEA pattern of dots in an engraving radiation in distant scenes. (See ultra-violet). whose height reproduces the darks, the greys, and thelightsof an illustration.Also the HEADHeadline. resulting cut. HEADLINERA photo-lettering machine.

HALFTONE NEGATIVEPhotographic nega- HEAD RULEThe rule running horizontally tive made by photographing copy through a across the top of the page.It separates the ruled screen. The screen breaks the image into a columns from the page dateline, page number, series of various sizes of small dots which have etc. the appearanCe of continuous tone. HEAD SCHEDULEA keyed record ofall the HALFTONEMiddle grey tones between high- headlines used in a particular newspaper and lights and shadows. usually specifying the unit count for each. 464 460 Appendix IGLOSSARY

HEAD SLUGA slug, usually 6 points thick, hold." Also any vacant space ina page form or a separating the first line of a news column from page dummy. the head rule. HOT MIKEOne that is turnedon and, conse- HEADS-ON SHOTA shot in which the subject quently, sensitive to sound. comes directly toward the camera. HOT SPLICERA splicer witha built-in heating '-',AVYLarge deposits of metallic silveron the unit to speed up the drying of film cement. nv. Ave, hence dark or dense. HOT SPOTA reflectionon glass or highly HELL BOXBox or other receptacle intowhich reflective object causinga dark, blocked-up area discarded type s thrown. on the negative or a central area of thescene having a markedly higher intensity than the HIGH ANGLE- Placement ofcamera above the edges. It should be avoided in artificial lighting action at a downward angle; emphasizespattern by moving lights to another position. This is in the subject. difficult in flash work; one deviceyou can use is to light a match where the flashis to be HIGH KEYA scene, subject,or print in which positioned and watch for reflections from the the majority of tones are lightgreys and white. camera position. Good for women, children, and light,airy effects. (See low kc.y). HOUSE ORGANA publication issuedmore or less regularly by a business organization suited HIGHLIGHTSThe parts ofa picture having the for internal and/or external readership. greatest amount of light; the blackest portions of a negative. Term is used in oppositionto HTKMeans "head to come." It is markedon "shadows". copy to indicatethatthe headline will be --written and sent to the composingroom later. HIGHSTop tones of the voice scale. HUMAN INTEREST STORYA pleasant little HITCHHIKEA commercial announcementat news oddity, usually brief. the end of a program in whicha different productisadvertised from that mentioned HYPERFOCAL DISTANCEThe distance from during the program. the camera to the nearest point of acceptable sharpness when the lens is focused at infinity. HOLDShort for "hold for release."Delay By focusing at the hyperfocal distance fora publicationuntilfurtherorders,The order given f/stop, the photographer gains the total "embargoes" news, which is not goodpractice sharpness possible because the picture is then for Journalists, sharp from half the hyperfocal distanceto infinity. HOLD FILEA hold file isa group of NAVSO 5724/1 Home Town News Release formswhich HYPOSee fixer. has been designated by the submitting command to be held at Flat Home Town News Center,

HOLD THE PAPER (Or, "hold thepress, ") An order to hold up an edition in order toinclude some news of superlative importance. ICONOSCOPEAtelevisioncamerapick-up tube used in the early days of television and not HOLEThe space available forJws after ads very sensitiveto light. Now used mainly in and "musts" are in. Sometimes called,"news projection room equipment.

461 4b":14)"" JOURNALIST 3 & 2

IMAGEThe representation of a subject formed INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTThe act of by optical (as on ground glass) and/or chemical copying, reproducing, translating, or publishing means (as in developing). a copyrighted work without permissionof copyright holder. IMAGE ORTHICONA super sensitivetele- vision camera tube capable of television scenes INITIAL LETTERSLarge, ornate capital let- lit by candles. This is the camera tube used in ters used at the beginning of a paragraph. most modern television equipment. INSERTLater information to be inserted in IMPACTThe eye-stopping ability of a photo- the body of a story already sent to the compos- graph. High impact photos are the result of an ing room. The first is usually marked (at the top imaginativeapproachtophotographyof of the copy) as "Insert A," the second as "Insert dramatic composition, unusual viewpoints or B," etc. angles, and action and emotion in the subject matter. Ability to make photos with impact is a highly creative part of picture taking. INSETSmall,picture inserted into a larger one. INCIDENT LIGHT Any great distance from INTAGLIO PRINTINGPrinting process differ- the camera lens beyond which light rays to the ing from letterpress and offset lithography. It lens are regarded as parallel. With the five inch prints from ink in a depressed surface. Also 4.5 lens my distance beyond 150 feet can be called "gravure." :onsidered at infinity. INTERFERENCEAnything which interferes INDENTTo make an indentation; i.e., to leave with proper reception of a station's signal. For space at either end of a line. Also, anindent example, static from storms, localelectrical (pronounced "INdent) is a term applied to an disturbances (elevators, power lines, household indented story or an indented portion of a story. appliances, signals from other stations). . Thus a "boldface indent"is a story set in boldface type and indented on both sides. The effect becomes that of an unboxed box, which is INTERNAL INFORMATION/RELATIONS a useful makeup device. Programsdirectedatmilitaryandcivilian personnel of the Navy and their dependents. INDEXAn index of the news and/or features to be found on the inside pages, usually placed INTERNATIONAL PUBLIC AFFAIRS Public affairs conducted for and with foreign nationals on the front page. by commands overseas and when ships and INFORMATION KITA packageofinfor- stations in the U.S. entertain foreign visitors. mation containing a history of the ship or station, facts about its mission and population, INTERVIEWA story based on an interview, A biographies of the senior officers, appropriate conversation between two people, one of whom., pictures, and other background information. It seeks information from the other. isused to acquaint news media and other important visitors with the ship or station or a INVERTED PYRAMID(1) A popular headline particularly significant news event. form, especially for secondary decks, The first line is usually set full line and the others are INFRAREDThose electromagnetic rays which centered, each shorter than the one above, (2) lie just beyond the visible light spectrum above The standard straight news story form, arranging 700 rnillimicrons,Although invisible to the the facts in descending order of importance. human eye, they are used in photography with infrared sensitive film for special effects, camou- ISSUEOne day's newspaper. It may consist of flage detection, and in legal work. several "editions," Appendix IGLOSSARY

ITALICSItalic type. The letters and characters light sources. It should be stronger in effecton slant to the right. the subject than the fill light, with which it is used, and should be placed higher than andto the side of the camera. By such placement, it j causes shadows which "key" or set the mood of the picture. (See fill light and back light.)

JIM DASHA short dash, usually about 3ems KEY SHOTThe one picture ina picture story in length, used between decks ofa headline, that can tell the whole story fairly well by itself. between a story and its "follow," etc. Some- times called a "short dash"or a "3-em dash." (Compare with "dinky dash.") KILL(1) To eliminate all or part ofa story or piece of art, whether in copyor type form. A JUMPThe continuation of a story fromone story is killed by being "spiked"; type is killed page to another (but not from one column to by being thrown into the "hell box." (2) To another on the same page). Such a story is called omit or leave out that portion of broadcast, a "jump story." The portion on the first page speech, announcement, music,or scene which ends with a "jump line" (as, Continued on Page the director indicates to "kill." 6" or "See .FIRE, Page 3") and the portion carried inside begins with a "jump head" anda KINESCOPEA cathoderaytube having a "jump line" (as, "Continued from Page 1"). (See fluorescent sc.een at one end and which glowsor also "break-over" and "carryover.") emits light when struck by an electron 1'am. Used to reproduce the video signal inreceivers JUMP CUTIf a section is taken out of the and monitors. A picture or receiving tube. middle of a shot, and the film is resplicedacross the gap, a jump cut results, since there isa jump intheshot's continuity. When the shotis motionless, this is a useful device for eliminating dead footage. Shots however, are seldomper- fectlystatic, andifthereis movement, an unpleasantly visible jump will usuallyoccur. LABEL HEADA dull, lifeless headline, usually JUMP HEADSee "jump." lackingaverb.(Distinguish from "standing head.") JUSTIFY To space out the words ina line of type to appropriate, equal width. A page is then LAP DISSOLVE A superimpositionfading justified to bring all columns to an equal length gradually from one picture to another. in( rder thatthe page may be locked up. "Leads" (leds) are inserted between linesas LATENT 1M AGE The image recorded by light inconspicuouslyaspossible to lengthen the on the sensitive emulsion, remaining invisible column. A line of hand-set type is justified by until developed, adjusting spacing. LATITUDE; EXPOSURE LATITUDEThe JUSTOWRITERColdtype composing machine. amount by which a negative may be overexposed or underexposed without appreciable loss of image quality. k LAYOUTA plan showing the arrangement of pictures, text, and headings on a page ofa KEY LIGHT; MAIN LIGHTThe mainsource publication.Alsoacombination of stories, of illumination when lighting with twoor more pictures, diagrams, etc., about a single subject. 463 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

LAYOUT MANAn artist who prepares special LETTERPRESS PRINTINGPrinting process in arrangments of pictures and type foradvertising,which inkisapplied to paper from a raised and news displays.Also a composing room surface. The original printing process. employee who designates the form and sizes in which advertising type is to be set. LETTER SPACETo insert thin spaces between letters of a word in type. The European method LEAD (Pronounced "leed")The first paragraph of adding emphasis as we would use italic or or paragraphs of a news story.Also, a tip which underline. may lead to a story. LEVELThe amount ofelectrical program LEAD (Pronounced "led")A thinstripof being transmitted. metal of from 1 to 4 points in thickness and varying lengths used to provide additional space LIBELAny defamation by visible communi- between lines of type. For example, a had (leed) cation. will be "leaded (ledded) out" to produce more white space and hence greater contrast. LIBRARYSame as "morgue." LEADERFilm at the beginning of a roll which LIFTTo carry type forward from one edition 1, used to protect the mit atit1 Ihtesding to the next. Also to -steal another -reporter's of a camera, projecter, and processingmachine. story. When used at the end of a reel, called trailer. LIGATUREA group of letters formed as one LEADERS (leeders)A row of dots, often used character. The common ones are ff.fi,ffl and in tabular material, to guide the reade eye. ffi. They are made necessary by the "kerning" or overhang of some ascenderswhich would LEAD-INThe announcer's resume of the pre- touch.Also,thelettersdesignatinga wire ceding episodes of a continued story, or the service, as the AP ligature. preface leading into the drama or other material and to follow. LINESameas"streamer,""banner," "ribbon." LEAD TO COMENotation on copyindicating that the lead (leed) will be sent to the composing room later. This is often done in the caseof LINAGEThe amount of advertising printed in a "running"storyinorder to save many a specific period. For example,linage increased revisions of the lead as the story develops. inacertain month because the newspaper carried more agate lines of advertising than the LEG MANA reporter whu works "thestreet" previous month. gatheringfacts which he telephones to the "rewrite man." LINE CUT Ar' engraving which prints only black and white, made without use of a screen. LENSUsually a single piece of glass with a Also called a "line engraving." (Distinguish from polishedface,or a number ofsuch pieces "half-tone.") mounted together, so that they .qre capableof bending light rays to form a sharp image on the LINE GAGEThe printer's ruler, marked off in film when the shutter is open. picas, nonpareils, and often inches.

LENS TURRET --An arrar -ement on a camera LINE NEGATIVE--A negative made from line which permits several lenses to be mounted at copy containing only solid blacksand whites. one time to facilitate rapidlens rotation. LINOTYPETrade nameforatypesetting LEROYA mechanical lettering set. machine which sets a line of type at a time. Also

.1 464" Appendix IGLOSSARY the general term for all typesetting machinesof LOWER CASESmall letters,so called because that kind. early type cases had small letters inthe lower, nearer section of the case. LIVE (1) Type which is still to be used. (2) The simultaneous performance and transmission ofa LOW KEYApplied toa picture in which the show. majority of tones range from darkgrey to black. Good for moody or dramatic effects. (See high LIVE MIKE An open microphone. key.)

LIVE STUDIOOne that is acousticallyrever- LOWSThe lower tones. Not to be confused berant. with the so-called "scale" which isa frequency range of the sound waves. All voices have a LOBSTER TRICKThe skeleton staff which definite range of "highs" and "lows" regardless takes over after the last edition ofa morning of whether the voice is baseor soprano. paper has gone to press. Also called "lobster shift," "dog watch," "late watch," and "grave- LUDLOWA typesetting machine whichcasts yard shift." slugs from hand-set matricesup to 144 points in size.Usuallyused setting headlines and vtowG slaty . display -advertising.

LOCALIZETo pick ouc a local angle ina general story and "play it up." m- LOCK UPTo put the finishing toucheson a page form before it goes to the pressroom. This MAGAZINEThe part of an automatictype- includes justifying and locking the form. A form setting machine which stores the "mats"or islocked by tighteningthe"quoins." This matrices while not in use. process is called "lockup." MAGAZINES (FILM)Light-tightfilmcon- LOG(1) A record required to be kept by tainers that fled and takeup film from the broadcaststitionsandnetworks,of every camera through slots known as light traps. Used minute of broadcasting including errors. Logs for large loads of film. are furnished to the FCC. (2) Short for "logotype." Also a city editor's assignment book is MAGENTAA secondary color, the result ofa called a "log." combination of blue and red. It resembles the artist's pigment, fuchsia. LOGOTYPEA word or words caston one ;ine of type. Often used co refer to the "nameplate" MAIL EDITIONAn edition, usuallyan early of anewspaper, which isusually cast as a one, distributed principally by mail to out-of- logotype,and tosectionheadings suchas town subscribers. "Capital Times Sports." (Distinguish from "ligature.") MAKEOVERThe process of makinga new stereotype plate for a newspaperpage to add LONG SHOT (LS)A scene filmed ata consid- late stories, bring existing storiesup to date, etc. erable distance from thecamera to establish Page One and often otherpages are made over locale. for each new edition. Also called `replate."

LOW ANGLEWhere the camera is placed low MAKE-READYThe process of preparinga page and the scene is photographed atan upward form or stereotype Otte (dependingon the type angle. of press) fir the pressrun. It consists of making

465 169 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 adjustments tin the height of printed matter to MATTE SURFACEApplied to dullsurfaced surface assurean even printingimpression and the prints to distinguish them from glossy proper placement and registryof the printing on ones. the sheet, MCMaster of ceremonies. MAKEUPThe arranging and placing of type and art cuts for printing. MEDIAAny means of mass communicationby which information concerning theNavy is dis- MAKEUP RULEA flat piece of steel usedby seminated to the public. printers as a tool in making up pages andin between a many other tasks. MEDIUM SHOT (MS)Transition long shot (LS) and close up (CU). MANAGING EDITORThe "work boss" of the editorial department. He sees that allthe day's MIDDLE TONESThe values or tonesin a high- local,nationalandinternationalnewsis photograph, subject, or negative between gathered, written and attractively presented. lights and shadows. MARKETSTerm for the section of the paper MILITARY EDMORAn editor whoevaluates, military news for media devoted to news of securities, grain,livestock, covers, writes, and edits complexes. and other markets. near large military machine MARK UPTo write instructions on copy,art, MIMEOGRAPHA rotaryprinting stencil. layout sheets or dummy. which reproduces by use of a MASKINGProtecting or blocking out partsof MIXTo combine the input of two or more balance. a piece of art or thenegative. microphones to effect a complete MASTER CONTROLThe focal pointjoining MIXERThe technician's panel of'witches and all studios in a station fromwhence programs dialsor controllingand blending sounds. The are relayed fortransmission, technician himself. MASTER COPYPasted-upcopyinfinal MIXINGBlending sound. smooth form for photo offsetreproduction. for Also called the "original" or"repro." MONITORTo listen to or view a program checking purposes. MASTHEADStatement of name of paper,its ownership, place of publication,subscription MONOTYPEA typesettingmachine which rates, etc., usually appearing onthe editorial casts a single letter at atime. (Linotype and typesetting page. It is sometimes(incorrectly) used to refer Intertypetradenamesfor to the nameplate. machines -cast a single line 't a time.) MATAbbreviation for "matrix." MONTAGE (1) A style of film editingusing an idea for continuity rather thanphysical action. MATRIXGenerally, a die or mold from which See DYNAMIC CUTTING; (2) InTV produc- in rapid something iscast,In newspaper production, tion, a brief series of events occurring succession, depicting a central theme,lapse of thereare two types:(1) the papier-mache impression of an entire page (from which stereo- time, or change of scene. type plates are cast) or of a single cut orad, and (2) the little brass mold usedby typesetting machines from which a single letteriscast. MOOD MUSIC - -Music designed to prepare the follow; Plural: "matrices." listener or viewer for content which is to 4TO 466 Appendix IGLOSSARY

background music which helpsto set the mood NEW LEADA lead (leed) paragraph or several for the viewer or listener. paragraphs, usually based on new material, to be substituted for the top of the story already MOREDirection written at the end ofa page received or in type. of copy to indicate that thestory does not end heremore is coming. NEWSInformation that is new or newly disclosed to anybody who is interested. All infor- MORGUEThe nvwspaper's repositoryfor clip- mation is useful and interesting to somebody, pings, cuts, mats, photographs, and all kinds of but news is of general interest to a greatmany reference material. people. The "hottest" news is that which is "newest" 4.1d of compellingconcern to every- MOVIOLAA portable,powerdrivenfilm viewer usedin body. A more pragmatic definition: News is editing. Accommodates both whatever an editor thinks it is. nicture and sound track and is usedto preview edited film and to sync up sound and picture.

MULTILITHA rotary offset printing machine. NEWS CONFERENCEA meetingbetween an official spokesman and cerrrespondentswhich is .MUSTA direction, usually froman executive, conducted primarily to provide thecorrespon- meaning that the copyso designated must run dents with informationnecessary to report that day without fail. accurately a news event, particularlya fleet exercise, a VIP visit (who then is the official spokesman), or a special event. Normally,a news n conference is arranged only when thenews is of such magnitude thatitcan't adequately be disseminated through an official Navynews NAMEPLATEThe newspaper's name in large release. type at the top of the front page. Also see 'flag."

NEAR POINTThe nearest object to thecamera NEWS EDITORAn editor whodetermines the which is still acceptably sharp when thecamera position and page in thenewspaper in which is focused for a given distance, Near and far news, pictures, and other matter willappear. points are used to describe the extent of depth of field. NEWS PEGThe most significantor interesting fact in a story, which isusually featured in the NEGATIVEA photographic image,infilm first paragraph. usually, in which the tones appear reversed. NETWORK (NET)(1) Radio: Multiple radio stations linked by same lines, or othermeans. NEWS RELEASESee "OfficialU.S. Navy (2) Television: Multiple television stations linked News Release" below. by coaxial cables, microwave links,or other means. NEWS RELEASE LOGA recordbook used for keeping track of news releases and photographs NEUTRALWithout color; grey. Chemically,a released to news media. solution which is neither acidor alkaline. NIGHT SIDEThe nignt shift ofeither a morn- NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTERA grey filter ing or afternoon newspaper, used to reduce exposure when a lens cannot be stopped down sufficiently andoverexposure NOVELTY LEADSLeads which a vari- would be the result. ety of novel beginnings, 467 4 71 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

0 ONE-SHOTA single performance on a program series.

OBITShort for "obituary." ONE-TO-ONE-SHOT(1/ I) See same size shot. OBITUARYA biography of a dead person. ON MIKEThe optimum position for normal "Cannedobits"areobituaries preparedin pickup of speech, sound, or music. advance for a prominent person and filed in the "morgue." At the time of death, the "obit" can ON THE BEAMTo be within the effective be updated rapidly and set in type. range of the microphone. OBSERVATIONA method of news gathering ON THE BUTTON -Ending exactly on time; which consists, of actually seeing an event take same as "on the nose." place. OPEN HOUSEA specialevent, thoroughly OFFICIAL HOTOGRAPHSStill or motion planned, designed to acquaint the public with a pictures made by military photographers or ship or shore installation, its equipment, and its Department of Defense civilian photographers as personnel. distinguished from those made by media representatives or correspondents, whose photographs OPEN-END TRANSCRIPTIONA transcribed are private property. program which allows for localcommercial copy to be inserted at the beginning, in themiddle OFFICIAL SPOKESMANAny commissioned (sometimes), and at the close of the transcrip- officer of the Naval Establishment, or autho- tion. rized civilian offical or employee of the Navy, is considered to be an official spokesman for the purpose of Navy information.In certain circumstances (for instance, in recruiting publicity) OPTICAL, EFFECTSArtificiallyinduced enlistedpersonnelmayalsobeofficial changes in the photographic image made in an spokesmen. optical printer such as fades and dissolves. OFFICIAL U.S. NAVY NEWS RELEASEA ORAL COMMUNICitTIONS The act of com- formal document written in news style, concern- municating ideas and information through the ing Navy activities approved forpublic dis- use of the spoken word(speeches, briefings, semination by authorized authority. conferences, Radio /TV). OFF MIKEPhrase refers to sound, speech, or music originated far enough from the micro- ORTHOCHROMATIC FILMA type of film phone to give the effect of distance. which is sensitive to ultra-violet, blue, green, and some yellow light, but not tored. OFFSETT LITHOGRAPHYA printing process wherein inkis applied to paper, not directly OUT IN THE ALLEYOut of microphone from type but, from a rubber roller that has range. taken the impression from the plate. The plate is photographicallyproduced supplyingthe OUTLINE CUTA half-tone in which the back- "photo" part of the nameand "lithography" ground has been cut away. means printing from a flatsurface, originally tone, with the form of the printingdepending OVEREXPOSUREThe resultof too much upon the immiscible propertiesof oily-ink and light being permitted to reach the film during water, Sometimes referred to as just"offset," exposure in the camera.

468 Appendix IGLOSSARY

OVERLAPThe extension and/or reshooting of highest film speed. (See also orthochromatic the action at the beginning and/or end ofa scene film) to give the editor leeway in matching action. PAOShort titlemeaning either the public OVERLAYA sheet of acetatectracing paper affairs officer (the officer who is in charge of,or fastened over the original art orcGpy to indicate administering a public affairs program)or the position and color of various elements. public affairsoffice (the office in whicha particularpublicaffairsprogramisadmin- OVERLINEA line just above and part ofa istered). An officer with duties and responsi- headline, usually underlined and used to identify bilitiesinthe field of public affairs (public the story briefly or' to pointup some interesting information/community relations) is referred to sidelight not used in the headlineproper. Also as a PAO. A PAO may also have additional duty called an "eyebrow" or "teaser." Also refersto a in internal relations and,upon appropriate occa- line of caption running over a piece of art. sions, in international public affairs. OVERSETType which has been set but cannot PARALLAXThe viewing differenceof an be used due to lack of space. Similarly, and of ject as seen through the viewfinder andas edition is "underset" when the quantity ofnews actually photographed by the taking lens. This in type issinsufticient to MI the availablespace. faultwillresult in improper framing (heads chopped off,objects not incenter of the OXIDATIONChemical combination ofoxygen photograph) if not compensated for witha with other substances. In practical terms, the parallax footage adjustment. Parallaxis not loss of strength and activity ofa developer encountered when the scene is viewed bymeans because of itscontact withair and/or its of an image which is formed by the taking lens, continued use. A developer turns brownas it as in ground glass or single lens reflex camera oxidizes. viewing.

PA REGSShop talk for U.S. Navy Public Affairs Regulations.

PAD(1) To make a story or headline longerby PATCHTo tie together pieces of apparatus to using more words than are necessary. (2) To add form a circuit. appropriate material in order to fill out allotted air time. PEAKThe maximum point of the needle swing on the volume indicator. PAGE PROOFThe proof ofan entire page, usually "pulled" to avert sucherrors as trans- PEDESTAL (l) A type of mount fora TV posed stories and heads or cuts and captions, camera. (2) A direction given to raise or lower a and gross headline errors. camera mounted on a pedestal. PANTo swing the camera around horizontally (panning) as when following actionor in movie PERSISTENCE OF VISIONThe phenomenon week. of the eye in which the image is retained fora short time after the object has been removed FiNCHROMATIC (PAN)A black and white from view. c/ iulsion which is sensitive to all visible light. It is the most widely used film emulsion since it PERSPECTIVEThe apparent relation between most nearly approximates the sensitivity of the objects, as to position and distance,as seen from human eye and because it generally has the any given viewpoint.

469 473 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

PHOTOJOURNALISMA means of communi- exposure, sometimes the resultof airbells cation where the main emphasisispredomi- during development. In -both 'cases, they empha- nately achieved through pictures. size the need of cleanliness and control during the photographic process. PHOTOMONTAGEA photojaphic print made from several different negatives on one sheet of PIX; PICSSlang term for pictures. paper. PLANERWooden block used by printers to PHOTOMURALA photograph of a very large level off the type and art in a form while it is size mounted on a wall or panel usuallyfor being locked up. decorative or display purposes. PLATEIn offset work, the grained zinc or aluminum sheet carrying the image. In letter- PHOTO-OFFSETA category of offset lithog- press work, a cut or duplicate in onepiece of raphy. metal of a form or page. PHOTOSENSITIVEMaterial which is chemi- PLATEN PRESSA small job press which works cally or physically changed by the actionof with an open and shut motion, pressing a flat light.Most commonlyin photography silver type form against a platen carrying a sheet of !Hides are exposed to controlled amountsof paper. light to form a latent image of the subject.(See halides and latent image.) PLATTERTerm given to an electrical transcription or broadcast recording. PIDisarranged type, hopelessly jumbled. PLAYThe position and typographical treatm- PICAPrinter's measure. Twelve points or1/6 ent (the emphasis) given a story.A story can be "little" of an inch. (See "point.") given "heavy" or "big" play, "light" or play; it can be "played up" or "playeddown." PICA EMSee "em." PLAYBACKThe playing of a recording for PICA GAGESame as line gage. audition purposes. PICK IT UP A direction to speed up aperfor- PLUGAn announcement inserted into a pro- mance or to increasethe tempo. gram in favor of aparticular item. PICK UPTo. add material already set.Such P.M.An afternoon nevrt,nrer. materialiscalled "pickup." A "pickup line" gives directions as to the point atwhich the old POINTThe unit of measurement in which type material is to be added to the new, sizesaredesignated.Approximatelyone seventy-second of an inch. Twelve points equal PICTURE STORYA planned, organizedseries one pica. of related pictures that tell a story. POLARIZING FILTERSFilterswhiciacut PINHOLE CAMERAA camera having atiny down the glace from surfaces such as glass, water aperture instead of a lens.It has no practical and polished wood. They are useful forshooting significance in picture taking and is usedfor the through glass. most part as a training device or anovelty. POLICE BLOTTERThe record of the day's PINHOLES Tinyclearspotsonnegatives events kept in all par,. stations,usually avail- generally caused by dust on thefilm during able to police reporters.

. 47470 Appendix IGLOSSARY

POLICY STORYA story which reflects the handled by naval communications in accordance newspaper's stand on an issue. with current directives,It can include written copy, photographs, and live or recorded sound PONY SERVICEAn abbreviated wirenews transmissions. service, usually delivered by telephoneor commercial telegraph to smaller newspapersor for PRESSURE PLATEIn a camera, projector,or local use. Also called the "pony wire." optical printer, a plate which presses on the baok of the film in order to keep the emulsion sofface POPSA series of heavy crashes on a line or in the focal plane of the lens. transmitter, caused by any of several outside disturbances, Also, on a transcription,a series of PRIMARY COLORS Blue, green, and red. pits of bubbles formed at time of pressing. PRINT(NOUN)A picture that has been made POSITIVE A photographicreproductionin photographically. which tone values correspond to the original (VERB)To make a- picture froma scene; it is opposite to negative. negative,

PRECEDENew developments on a story from PRtfa=lifitOtreffPit4noetenon which occurs a different point of origin. Also, a bulletin may when a strongly magnetized tape is wound next be handled as a "bulletin precede" by placing it to an unmagnetized portion and some of the ahead of the main body of the story. magnetic effect transfers from one layer to another, PRE-DATEAneditionissuedbeforeits announced date of publication. (See also "bull- PRIVILEGEThis is a highly .complex area of dog.") law, and legal officers should be consulted for precise definition. Certain information is con- PREFERRED POSITION Term used by the sidered "privileged," and individuals have certain advertising department to refer to a special "rights of privilege" which may be involved in arrangement under which, for an established the withholding or releasing of information. See increase inrate,the advertiser is assured the "Right of Privacy" in Chapter 10 of this manual. position in the paper he desires, Otherwise the advertiser must take his chances as to where the PRIVILEGED NEWS MATERIALThe manner ad will run. in which the Navy is administered is considered within the public domain. Information, how- PRE-RECORDEDA methodofrecording ever, which is classified for reasons of military songs.speech and other sounds priorto a security, is privileged and cannot be considered broadcast, especially a teiecast. With the sound to be within the public domain for purposes of pre-recorded, a performer is then free to dance release and publication. or move freely during actual broadcast. PROCESSING--The chemical treatment ofex- PRESRELNaval communications shorttitle posed emulsion to makea permanent visible for a Navy press (news) release which is Trans- image; besides developing and fixing, the term is mitted to the nearest district commandant for used also to refer to such operations as washing appropriate distribution, and drying,

PRESS AGENT (PA)A person hired by an PRODUCTION DEPARTMENTA department institution, business establishment, or individual in a newspaper which is responsible f.n. getting to obtain favorable publicity in the press. news copy, advertising, and art into print,

PRESS TRAFFICMaterial originated by media PROJECT HANDCLASPA Navy international representativesor addressedto them when public affairs program in which Navy personnel 471 4175 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

radio,television,and other media ofmass actingas goodwillambassadors help people overseas to helpthemselves using Project Hand- communication. materials include food, clasp materials. These publicitystoryor other clothing, medical supplies,textbook, building PUFFA personal materials and many otheritems. For more favorable personal mention. details, see PA Regs. PUNCHAnnouncement read withexaggerated PROJECTION PRINTINGAmethod of pro- emphasis. ducing a photographicenlargement by pro- negative onto light PUT TO BEDAnedition has been "put to jecting light through the forms have been locked up sensitive paper. A photographicdevice called an bed" when all page and ready for the press. enlargerisused to projectthelight.See "Enlarging." PROOFAn inked impressionof type ur en- q gravings taken beforeitactually runs ina -.thEcetion to .oroler. to -correct errors. Q AND ACopy inquestion7and-answer form, PROOF PRESSThe pressused to take proofs. such as verbatim testimony. "pulling" a proof. The process is known as QUADA large blank typecharacter. employee PROOFREADERComposing room QUERYA request from a newsmedia repre- who reads proofs fortypographical errors and to sentative for specificinformation. make sure it conforms to copy. metalor print sheet of nega- QUOINSPair ofwedge-shaped PROOF SHEETA contact wooden locks used to hold aform together so tives available on aparticular assignment from carried. Quoins are printing can be made. that it can be lifted and which final selections for tightened in the process of"lockup." PROPERTIESActual objects (furniture,etc.) QUOTE STORYA story dealingwith quoted that are part of a television scene. material taken from speeches,interviews, con- PUBLIC AFFAIRSIn theNavy, this is the versations, and published statements. overall term used to coverthe broad fields of PUBLIC INFORMATION,COMMUNITY RELATIONS, INTERNATIONALRELA- r TIONS, and INTERNALRELATIONS.It includes all contacts on theNavy, evaluation of of it in formu- RAILROADTo rush copy to thecomposing public 'opinion and consideration close editing or proofreading; an lating and administering Navypolicies:, dissemi- room without nation of information to thepublic, and actions emergency measure. and good will taken to promote understanding for public. RANGE FINDERA device on a camera between the Navy and thegeneral object which is to Broadly speaking, as a Journalist, you arein the estimating the distance of an U.S. NAVY PUBLIC AFFAIRSFIELD. be photographed. RATIO Lighting ratioisthe relationship of PUBLIC INFORMATIONThebasic function public affairs that strengths of lights, one toanother, and is within the broad scope of expressed numerically as 2:1,3:1, etc.Itis involves informing the publicabout the Navy. It dissemination of commonly used in portraitureand multiple flash includes the preparation and the degree of information and other material tothe press, work. In copying, it refers to 476 472 Appendix IGLOSSARY

enlargement or reduction ofthe copy with REGISTERCorrect placement of printing respect to the original, such on as 1:1 copy. the sheet. In color printing, registermeans the correct placement of each plateso that the READINGThe process of measuringlight with colors are laid down properly. (See"four-color an exposure meter and calculatingproper ex- process.") posure. RELEASEWhen informationpreviously READOUTA subordinate deckheadline to a limited to. acontrolled number ofpersons is streamer or a multi-columnnews display head made available to the general public, it which serves as is said to a transitional device between the be "released." This can beany material (written, main deck and the lead of the story. printed, oral, or photographic) whichhas been properly cleared and a..:thrnized READYPRINTSome small for dissemi- r-wspapers buy nation to the public by the Navythrough any newsprint withone or more inside pages already media. printed with features and ads.This is known as "readyprint" or "patent." RELEASE DATETimeat which advance copy REAR SCREEN PROJECTORAprojection can be published. device used to throwa picture on a translucent screen in the background. When seen on tele- RELEASE NUMBERAn identifyingnumber vision, it gives the illusion ofan actual set or assigned to an official Navy scene. news release. RECIPROCITY LAWExposure is equalto the RELIEF PRINTINGMethodof printing in which printing surfaces intensity of the light times the timeduring are raised. which it acts, or E=I X T. Ifan exposure like REMOTEA broadcast which originates outside 1/100 at f/16 is recombinedinto 1/50 at f/22, of a station's studios. Sometimes called "nemo." the exposure effecton the film should be exactly the same according to this law.The law REPRINTMaterial which has been carried is only approximately true,however, because from late editions of one day'spaper to the photographic materials react differentlyto light early editions of the next. under different intensity and timeconditions, especially atthe extremes. The resultisa REPRODUCTION PROOFSProofs which "failure of the law of reciprocity" are under which to be copied with the process camera foruse in condition exposure times have to be readjusted. makingplatesorcuts.Sometimescalled "RePros". REDUCERA solution used for decreasingcon- trast or densityin an overexposed orover- developed negative. RE-RECORDINGThe recording ofa sound track or sound record from theoutput of one or REFLECTORA curved bowl used to increase more other sound tracks; sometimes called the efficiency of a lightsource by concentrating dubbing or sound mixing. the light into a directionor beam. Used especially under artificial light conditions suchas RESEARCH A method ofnews gathering by studio floodlighting and flash. Outdoors,flat which informationisferretedout of files, cardboard or tinfoil reflectorsare sometimes reference wants, or from people. used. RESOLUTIONDegree of reproductionc f the REFRACTIONThe bending ofa ray of light in detail of a scene after transmission throughan its passage between optical glasF of different optical rystem, electron system,or complete densities. television system. 473 477 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

RESOLVING POWER; RESOLUTIONThe constantly adjusted for proper transmission. relative ability of a lens or an emulsionto record fine detail, usually expressed as themaximum RIMThe outer edge of the copy desk,around "slot" number of black lines, with equalwhite spaces, which copyreaders sit, as opposed to the which can be distinguishedpermillimeter. or inner edge presided overby the executive in Results for a given lens or emulsionwill vary charge of that desk. withcontrast and with type andtime of development. RIM LIGHTSee back light. RETAKETo re-film a scene because an error RISING FRONTAn adjustment on most press which permits the has been made or to perfect theaction. cameras and all view cameras lens board to be raised higher thannormal. RETICULATIONThe wrinkling or puckering film, due to sudden ROCKET HEADA form of headline inwhich of the emulsion surface of a in display changes of temperature duringprocessing. Even the fait words of a story's lead are set if reticulation does not occur, achange of type, with each line decreasing in typesize. temperathre of more than fivedegrees during backed by any part.vit In is a poor practice since ROLL FILMA strip of sensitive film increased graininess of the negativeresults. (See an attached paperstrip which excludes light while the film is being loaded and removedfrom grain) the camera. RETOUCHINGAlteration of a photographic darker, lighter, image by making portions of it ROLL ITA cue to start a film. or by removing it.Done by pencil, dye, etching chemical means. knife (for removal of silver), or ROMAN TYPEAn upright faceof type, thus REVERSAL FILMA film which after exposure distinguised from italics. is processed to produce a. positiveimage instead press." of a negative. ROP"Run of paper" of Run of REWINDINGTransferring film from onereel ROSTER STORYOne story thatinvolves a 10,000). It to another. number of personnel (from 10 to provides a means of obtaining thewidest possi- REWINDSGeared devices on which reels or ble coverage and is the backboneof the home flanges are mounted and then rotated torewind town news gathering program.It is used in film or to view in a viewing system atvarying conjunction with the HOLD FILEdescribed speeds. above. REWRITETo write a story again toimprove it. ROUGHThe original copy of a storywritten corrections, Also to revise a sto y alreadycarried in another by a JO containing the necessary newspaper. Also to write astory from facts additions, or deletions. given by another reporter, usually a"lep, man." ROUGH CUTThe version ofthe workprint of REWRITE MANThe reporter who writesfrom a film whichfollows next after the assembly in facts provided by a reporter at the scene orwho the film's progress towardcompletion. (See revises stories to make improvements. "fine cut"). RIBBON Another term for a"banner" head- RULEA type-high metal strip thatprints as a line or lines.(See also "advertisingcutoff," line. "colt *mn rule," "cutoff rule,""head rule," RIDE GAINTo keep the programvolume "makeup rule," and "turn rule.") 4Th 474 Appendix IGLOSSAKY _ Y.r--1.11MMLIMUNIM. &cm= INIMMilo. 11u0oieral yriela.

RULED INSIACtr-A"with"storyinserted piece of art that millappear in its exact original between rules within the bodyof a 'story to situ when reproduced. which it is ,closely related. SANS SER11' Team applied all type faces RULETORINSERTSee "turn rule." having no serifs. Also thelia)11C of a particular faCC of type. RUI,E"FOR PICKUPSee "turnrtil;" .SAls,-Soon as possible. In wire servicemessages '\WIMIILE,--Alow frequency vibration, MeCitliili- ithas even taken the form caly ap- transmitted to a recordingor reproducing parently an imperative meaningeven sooner turf able and 'superimposedon the repro. than possible. ductrim. It sounds likea rumble. SATURATION---Vegtee of purity of color'Or RUNAnother term for "beat" in thesense of a freedom from dilution by white, black,or grey. reporter's regular "run." Also refe,..sAoa press mn. An edition., A story is "run" when it is SCALINGA simple plan for proportion retitle- printed. ° tion or enlargement of art .or copy. RUN 1N-.-Directionon copy meaning to iiwor. SCHEDULE.: (SK D)The ,city editor'secord porate two or more paragraphs intoone or to of assignments. ,9 copy editor's record of convert tabular matter into paragraph form. stories handled. (See alsO "head schedule.") RUNNING STMYAnotherterm, for a "sec- SCOOP(1) Au exclusive story. (2) A typ6 of tional story." Alsd used to describe,'a story light used in TV production. which develops over a period ofseveral days or more. 60 SCORETo break or dent printingpaper stock so that it can be folded easily. RUN OPPAPERDesignationfor advertising , . which does not rate "preferred position,"hence SCRATCIIThe groove noiseon a record or may be placeiJ anywhere in the paper that is transcription. convenient. SCREENTwo pieces of optical glass ruledin RUNOVERSame as "carryover." opposite directions. Used in ,halftonereproduction. RUMDirection to expeditea story. SCRIPT(1) A mmuscript containing all audio and video material and directionsto be used on a program. (2) Class of type that resembles handwriting or hand lettering. SACRED COWA subject or personality always receiving' favorable news treatment ina given SEA SERVICES NEWSPAPERSAcollective newspaper. term applied to all ship and stationnewspapers of the Navy, Marine Corps,\andCoast Guard. ADDLE Si 1TCHT6 binda publication along the.center fold. SECONDARY COLORSCyan,yellow,and magenta. SAFETY SHOTAn extra' negative exposed as . insurance against loss of the first .negative. SEMND DAY STORYAstory covering new developMents on one printed Ina previous news ME-SIZE SHOTTerm used to describea cycle. (See also "followup.") 475 47 9 JOURNALISI' 3 & 2 -t- ,..-.A. .1stletle P.7.6 W.,. ..10 IL 1144104.41414441,4 i4 PAGEDesignation for the and sound effects .h astudio; to get ready in a SECOND FRONT technical sense for a show. first page of the secondsection when it carries matter. entirely or largely news SHADOWS--The darker portionsof a picture or subject, or the thinner portionsof a negative. SECTIONAL STORY---A 'storyreceived on the 1t WS wire in severalsegments and/Or sent tothe composing, room ingevernl"takeS," SHANKThe main body or steinof a piece of SEE COPYDirectionfront the copy desk or proof desk to the composing roomto verify part and the copy. SHARPNESSThe senseof distinctness of a story by checking it against precision of detail inthe reproduction of a subjf;et hi a picture. InfOcus; opposite to out of .SEG UV.(SEG-WAY)Transitionfromone musical number to another,without pause or focus or bluniness. announcement. SHOOT; SHOT. -To takenpicture; a picture. background, stuirrivE FOCUSBringing the SHOOTING SCRIPT -A writtenplanfov a or theforeground either into or outof focus liy means of variationsin the depth of field inorder picture story. subject.: to Cmpliasize the main SHOR1' -4 minor, briefstory. SELF-COVERA cover for a brochureprinted SHORT DASII.---A three-cinclash. on the same paperstock as the body orinside, pages of the pamphlet. SE,NS1TIVITYThe degree to which an emul- SHORT LIGHTING;NARROW LIGHTING Illumatating fully the side ofthe face turned sion reacts to light. Afilm with a highsensitivity called narrow with low sensi- away . fromthe camera.Itis needs less exposure titan one lighting bpeausa it resultsin inure shadow area tivity, and vice versa. on the facewhile keeping the ,highlight side SEPARATE COVERA coverfor a brochure more narrowthan in broad lighting. that is distinctly differentfrom the paper stock 9 'S ORT STOP;STOP BATH.!An acid diluted used In the inside Pages. water And used inprocess* between the development of film SERIES -All sizes ofsingle face of type. Also developer and hypO to stop several related stories,usually under a byline, or printing paper. days. run on successive SHOULDER Thee spacebetween the bottom of "shank" on. SERIFSCross strokes at the ends ofletters of a letterand the edge of the slug or which it'is cast. type. device, for opening SET AND HOLDOrder to"set in type and SHUITERA mechanical and closing the apertureof a camera lens to stop hold for release." action and expose film. SET LIGHTSeparateillumination of back.. or'"wit" story. wound or set' otherthan that provided for SIDEBARA "side" story by key, fill, cross, principal subjects or areas SIDEOGIIT STORYA story runin connection back lights, etc. with a major event whichgathers together odds to° it, physical location of per- andends ofitonnationpertaining SET UPThe relative including color ndrsonalities. formers,microphones,cameras,instruments, 480 476 'Appendix I- -GLOSSARY

SIDE STORY- A story connected with another scene or %oll,Itisnormally filmed at the more impoitpit story and usually run beside the beginning or end or each scene or roll. main story or beside its Call yOVCV. Same as a "with" star y. SLIDEA photographie transparency bound for viewing, by projection on a screen. Sa/F, STITCH To Hat stitch along the edge of a btoelnne. SLOT The inner Op 'of the homshoz`-shaped copy 'llesk. (Compare =with "rim.") SIGNATURK--A sheet having a number of pages printed on both sides, usually! in multiples of SLOT MAN- -The head of the .copy desk, so font.. called because he sits in the SILVER ANCHOR AWARDAwards presented SLOWA photographic term opposite of fast in annually by the Armed Forces Writers Untie to reference to light sensitivity. (Sec FAST), the outstanding sea services newspaper of the year, and for outstanding individual articles, SLOW MOTIONMotion pictures taken at high stories, phoAographs, editorials, etc., appearing speed and projected normally, so as to reduce in any ship or station newspaper, civilian enter- the apparent speed of objects in motion. prise newspaper, or other civilian publication edited primarily for a military waders'*. SLUGTo "slug" a' story means to give it an identifying mark, which May either be the SILVER ANVIL AWARDSThe Public Rela- briefest possible statement of the nature of the tions Society of America. conducts annually the story, as "hotel fire," or in some cases the first Silver Anvil competition, open to Navy units line or first few words of the headlines; it and commands. The award recognizesout- usually includes the headline designation; as "#2 standing publicaffairs programs carried out HOTEL IRE."(Alsocalled"slugline," during the previous year. "guide," and "guidelinew") Also a linotyice line, Also a piece of spacing material thicker than a SI LV,ER HALIDES; SILVER SALTS Sec lead, usually ti points used for spacing between halides. lines. (See also "head slug.") SINGLE STORYA home town news vehicle which gives information and news ein one SMALL CAPSSmall capital letters as opposed to full-size capitals. Formerly part of each font, they are now rarely .used. When used, the small SKELETONIZE-11'o reduce copy tq\bare essen- caps are about the height of the lower case tials by eliminating articles, etc., tlir headline letters without ascenders or descenders. purposes to reduce cable tolls. - SMALL FORMAT CAMERASAny camera SKY LINE-- Terin sometimes used for a banner using film size 21/4" X 2.1/4" or smaller. head that rims above the nameplate. SNAP; SNAPPYHaving brilliance or contrast. SLANDERAny defamation by oral communication. SMEAR - -A term used to describe a picture condition in which objects appear' to be ex- SLANTTo emphasize a, certain aspect of a tendedhorizontally,beyondthatnormal story. A slanted storyisone which lacks boundaries, in a blurred, or "smeared" manner. objectivity because pf the way the facts have been manipulated. SNEAK -To bring sound or inu§ic° in or take it out so gradually that its presence or absence is SLATEA marking board used to identify each not immediately noticed. 47 4 81 e e

JC)IJR1'iil.,ISA' *aft.. elt...ba. to, ttt

801"AbblVViati011 for SOUND ON VILM. Any to splice workprint or magneticsonnd'track. tint which contains narration or dialogue,,, SPLIT SCREENOne-half of pictrui.,, (yin one aSOFF-(1) Relatively low contiast in negative or camera and .onc-half of picture 'from another print, or in lighting as in a low ratio. (2) Unsharp camera, projected together on screen. or diffused image caused by accident (oil, water, ior dirt on lens; or imprope focus) or by SPO1 - -(1) Contraction for spotlight, a lamp intention by means of asPeciallens as in which projects a strong, narrow beam of light. portrait photography. (2) To remove ,white spots from plfotographic prints with pencil or brush and water color. MAtIERLines of type not seoarated by leads or space. SPOT ANNOUNCEMENT A short announcement, usually running less than a minute, that SOUND EFFECTS All sound,otherthan either informs or sells, Same as "Plug," synchronized voices mid music, which appears On the soundtrack of a film. SPOT NEWSNews obtained un the scene of the event, hence fresh, live news, Usually used to SOUPDeveloper. trefer to unexpected "vents.

SPACE BAND. 'Thin wedge-shaped device used SPOT NEWS PICTURE -A picture that has ail on line-casting machines in spacing between immediacy in usage, and.that cannot be planned, words. By being pusifed up and lieneb as a rule: tires, catastrophes, eventsof interest these spaCes automatically justify. the line. happening now. SPECIAL EVENTS, Planned events in the field SPOT NEWS RELEASEA release which is ,.of community relations which SHOW the Navy issued immediately upon tike occurrence of any .to the public rather than just TELLING them newsworthy event of immediate public interest. about it. SPECTRUM A colored 'patch of light ranging SPREAD( 1 ) To "spread" a'story means to give from red to violet which is produced when a it prominent display, usually of several related beam of white{ lightAs bent by as prism before it items such as "with" stories- and art. Also any falls on a screen. biglayout,especiallyan elaborate pictorial, layout. (2) To stretch a portion or a program or SPEEDA general term referring to the relative announcement for the purpose of consuming efficiency of 'intilsions, lenses or shatters. The more time, or it may refer to the amount of; expressionisusually, preceded by "slow," time allowed in a program for audience reaction. "medium," or "flat." 4, r Also, on a transcription,the band between 0 individually recorded tracks placed for easy SPIKEA spindle on which discarded copy is cueing. placed. Hence to "spike" a story means to discoid it. SQUARE INDENTION The form taken by a secondary headline deck when all lines are set SPILLStray light from a light source as in flush to an indentation, (Compare with "hanging floodlighting, caused by light rays from the lamp indentioh.") which do not reach the reflector to form the main beam. SQUEEGEE--A strip of flat rubber in a handle used in removing excess moisture from prints or SPLICER -A mechanical device for joiningfilm film by stroking. scenes.Not splicers mainly used in negative dating or splicing workprint; tape splicers used SQUIB- A short item. 478 *

Appendix I, GLOSSARY 11011pfr VOIM/MmwM=I1011M STAFF BOX, ,A boxeA type Noel:, usually on victual staples, while the stitcher is fed fr'om a: the editorial pia,,e, which lists the people and continuous toll or wire. their job on a newspaper staff. Normally allied in the "masthead." STOCK SOLUTION A concentrated solution of a processing chemical, usually a developer, STAIN -Local or general discoloration of neo' which has to be diluted with water for use. lives and prints due to many veiled causes but atesteniming from either unclean ..err uncoil- STONEThe "imposingstone,"asteelor trolled practices in processing. marble topped table on which pages are made STAND. BYSignal front the control rooefor attention and silence in the studio prior to STOP -Aa aperture or f/stop, as used lit ` "What commencing a rehearsal or broadcast. stop are you Using?" Loosely, a reference tow. two times multiple of light,as, in "Give a STANDING -Any shatter which is retained in backlighted subj,Nt two stops inure exposure, type front one edition to the next. say front 1/100 at 1/16 to 1/100 at f /8." STANDING HEADIleads,usuallylabel S'T'OP BATHSee short strip. leads, which are kept standing in type and used again and again, such as "sports news" or "the SWF DOWNTo use a small aperture. hotline. STRAIGHT, (1) Not retouched, used in refer- STATION BREAKA cue given by a station ence to negative or prints; (2) pro'cessing solu ,originating a program to network stations, sig- tions which are not diluted. '&ling that it is time for individual stations to identify thlmselves to local audiences. STRAIGHT NEWSA straightforward recital of 0 news facts without coloring,Ambillishment, or STEREOTYPE.-Th Process of converting the interpretation. flat newspaper page into a senifcylindrical metal plate to fit a 'bellpreis by first making a S'I'REAKS A blemish on a negative caused . . "mat" of the page.`' and then castingt. Also from uneven immersion of the film in the ' .another term for a cliche or "bromide." developer.,_ STICKA metal tray used to hold type while it STREAMERSeine as "banner." is being set by hand; also called a "composing .stick." Also a rough, unit of length; a stick is STRETCH- To slow up for time by leugthening about two column inches of type or about 100 delivery of various segments. 4o 150 words; also called a "stickful." STRINGNewspakr clippings pasted together ST1LL A photographorotherillustrative end-for-end orpast4 into a book. The term is material which May be used in a television used loosely to refer to a single reporter's total broadcast as distinguished from motion pictures. output in a given med., Alsd, a reporter who is "on string" 1r "oh space" is one who is paid by STILLSPhotographsasdistinguishedfrom the inch and known as a "stringer." motion pictures. --STRINGERAn unpaid reporter, not regularly assigned to a newspaper staff, who contributes STING-A sharp musical chord used to heighten . a tense moment. iirtiFles on Sn irregular basis. STITCHINGFastening the pages of. a book STRIP To fit two or more offset negatives to together with wire stitches. Staplers use indi- make one "flat." ' 0 479 483 JOURNALIST 3 2 ITII4.011* IAd..Nwiwo41 MOM. w1M1141.11011W STROBE LIGHT See electrimie SUSTAINING PROGRAMA program broadcast at the expense of the network or .station, STYLI:, Sal:. l'--A compilation of typogrLphical either as pub:ie, service, or to attract sponsors. and Whet vales applying to a particular publi- 0, yation. It Codifies `the nwthod of treating spel- SWISH PAN An extremely rapid horizontal ling,abbieviations,capitalization, and other movement of the eilinCl'a usually, used to get questions of uniformity and good taste. quickly from one subjeet. tea another without wasting the time to stop and ,start the camera. SOB AdirectionNe,substitute a piece of copy Most often, in the editing, the swish pan will he tun another already 'received, as "sub for second deleted and the steady shots it bridges will be ad fire. used. A useful device in covering. uncontrolled action. SUBJECT REFLECTIVITYA photographic subject is callable of reflecting a certain per- SYMMETRICAL LAYOUTA newspaper lay- centageof thelightwhichshinesonit. out in which heads, stories, art, and boxes of the. According to how much it reflects, it is classified same size are placed inmatehirOolumnS to as dark (it reflects approximately 9%of the light create perfect symmetry. which falls on it), average (reflects 18%), light: (reflects 36%) or brilliant (reflects 72%). Sub- SYNCHRONIZATION (SYNC)Thecorrect jects are broadly classified into these types' when relation betweei't picture and sound track. The calculating exilosure from a daylight exposure *kb of matching sound track to film. chart or whimfdetermining flash exposure. SYNCHRONIZERA device which -trips the SUBHEADA short head, usually of one line, otnera shutter simultaneouslywith the tiring of : usually set in about the same typesize as the a flashbulb so that theshutter is fully open at body of the story but usually boldface. It serves the instant that the flash has reached is highest to break up the mohotoriy of .a solid' columnof intensity, small type. It is usually written about the part of the story directly blow it. SYNC MAR,'' -,A starting mark placed, both the picture atui .sound tracks to platethe two in SUMMARY LEAp -A news story lead which SYNC. briefly summarizes the most important facts in the story. (Also known' as the CLIMACTIC, SYMPOSIUM INTERVIEWAn interview story INVERTED PYRAMID, Oi FIVE W lead.) involving more than one interviewee, whether interviewedina group orseparately; on ca SUPER-Short for superimposition. partiettlra. topic. .SUPERIMF'OSITION41te overlapping of an SYNDICATE- Anorganization which buys and' image produced by one television camera with sells feature material of all kinds, It may or may the image from another camera. A blending or not he connected 'with a newspaper, chainof merging of images in any desired amount. tiewpapers, or wire service. (Not a proper term flat wire service.) . SUSPENDED 'INTEREST STORYA story written in the (rum of an -upright pyramid, it SYSTEM CUEThe 'words "This isthe Net 'begins #t the beginning and tells the story in work." This is the word cue for local* station simple, narrative form, builditig up suspense and identification, and, in nearly all cases, completes interest as the facts unfold. The climax of the the 'broadcast. The exceptions are station identi- story is deliberately withheld until the very last fication cues 'On prognims el more than 30 Var4graPh; Minutes in length.

48184 Appendix 1,--GlAKSARY.

duties may be divided among a state. editor, a cable editi-4, and a telewaph editor. on small palms lie edits all wire copy himself. TABL('11)--A newspaper of -small page $1d , usually five coluMns wide and 16 to 18 inches TELEPHOTO-A photograph transmittedby deep. wire. TAG, The announcers closing, either to end the TELtaniurp LENS1 -A lens of long focal length broadcast °IA° invite viewers or listeners to the used to :obtain enlarged, images of distant ob- next segment. jects, TAKE -(1) A sh60 section of copy-not a TELEPROMPTER -A &five mounted on or complete story in itself'. A running or sectional near is camera illicit enables a performer to C story usually goes to the composing room in .follow the script. takes,(2) In filming, the sanae-as a shot. In .

editing, the part of the shot which is being ustid TELETYPE- The automatic printer machine '41 in the film. used t9 receive wire news. TAKE,, A LEVEL -A test taken on microphone TELETYPESETTER-A typesetting, keyboard receptionbefore. a,broakteastto determine attachment which operates the teletYpe machine `balance and proper reception. automatically froth perforated tape.

TAKE-UP-The spool on which the filmis TELOP-Opaque slide projection. woundafter,being run through a camera or projector. TEST STRIP-A piece of contact or mojection paper exposed ih such a way that itcontains TALK BACK-A'microphone placed in the , several -different exposures; from it, the best director's,tootlb and ctinnected to h speaker in printing time is determined.

the studio to afford a means of communication # between director and personnel in the gtudip. O TEXTMain body of a story ot publication. TALLY LIGHT-A red light mounted on the also a class of type such as Old English. front of the IV camera. When the tally light is on, it indicates that the camera is"on the air." THEME: Lthe signature melody, either at the. start or finish 6f a radio or TV broadcast. ' . TANK DEVELOPMENT-A method of developing film utilizing a tank., THIN-A lightor "weak" negative lacking density, usually caused by underexposure and/or TAPE RECORDING- A plastic' tape impreg7 underdevelopment. Also is used to refer to nated on one side with iron oxide for the specific light portions within negatives. Opposite purpose of retaining a variable magnetic e,harge. to "dense." TEAR SHEET-A full ftewipaper page is torn THINK PIECE--A background or opinion arti- from the paper and mailed to the advertiser as cle. partial proest of insertion.

1 THIRTY-The end. The figure-"30"-is often TELEGRAPH EDITOR-Theexecutivein written at the end of a piece of copy but shish charge of handling telegraph or wire, news as marks,,(///) or a cross-hatch (#) are also used. Jr distinguished from localnews. Hemaitralso some onto "30" means only theend of the supervise the Newspaper's own foreign and day's work or the end of a news cycle, and has domestic coffespondents.. Op larger , papers his become a "catch-phrase." . 481, 4S5 S 101,11:N &LIST 3 &2 910~6~191.16~,sew..11161,VON 140.1. 14Molwer O THREE-QUARTER VIEW: Inportraiture,a AiTOURS. 'Planned programs scheduled bty corn- standing for seated, pose which? includes the mantis to ae:praint news media (rr specific groups subject from about the knees up. In general, with the operations of a ship or station.. ,photography, it refers to an angle or view which shows three sides Of a subject, for example: the TRACK-The sound portion of the film-either front, side, and some of the top of a car. optical or magnetic.

THROW IT AWAYWords readwithless TRANSCRIPTION-A recording especially made, emphasis tInfin normal. for broadcast purposes. 4 TICKLER ITILE-A listing of upcoming events TR ANSNOT TO iatOW to pass through as areal (usually on small cards) in vhrimologicar or lightis transmitted through A ;ed filter., If a subject matter order kept as a reminder. color is not transmitted by a filter, theft it is eitAer reflected from it or abso &if by it. TIVBACK-The pa're of a story which connects it with some brevious event. TRANS' 1WNCY -A positiv,color, or black and white picture on a trans!). rent base which is TIV-IN.-.The part of a story which connects it viewed by transmitted light. A 35mm slide is a with some other, perhaps more important, story. transparency: Local angles areoften dug up to tic -in with sOme national news event. TRAY DEVELOPMENTLA thethoe of development utilizing trays containing abou$ a hirlf inch' TIGHT-I, 1 ) GenerallY too full. Applies to lines of solution. of type, pages, sections, entire edition. (2) A program which runs extremely close toits TRIPOD -A three-legged camera support. allocated time. o TRIPOD HEAD-A headline with a single short TILT-A vertical pan moving_ the camera verti- line of larger type is set to the left of twolitfes of smaller type; TRUCK-To move atelevision Camera, base TIME COPY - -Copy which is relatively thneless. included, parallel to plane of set. It may be used any time within a reastnable period; hence time copy is usually backlogged to TUNGSTEN. -Artificial light as contrasted with fill "holes" in a "loose paper." The term applies, daylight. * II whether it is in copyor type form. . TURNA column of a story running to the right TI M E-TEMPElilATURE -Asystemorpro- of its main body, always placed lower than its cedureinphotographic, processing in which head. developing is done in the dark using a pred4er-' mined time based on the temperature of AN TURN COLUMNColumn 8, Page Iis called a developer. , "turn column" on some newspapers. becausb e. story can "turn" from the end of ColuMn 8 to TOMBSTONE-To place twoor moreheads side the WO of Column .1, Page 2 without n4cessity by side. for a jump 'read. TONAL RANC.X.-.-Relative ability of a light TURN RULE -An instruction to thecouipaing sensitive material to reproduce accurately the .room to turn, a ruleor, type-high slug,upside varying,tones between black and white. downinthe galley to indicate that an addition or change must be made atthat gpint before the TOP DECK:---The main dart of a headline, type goes into,the fynns. N . 482° 486 Appendix IGLOSSARY 110....0469.0.~14..ft05~.0blelto *WS Mnr...uillifais 71041.1.80 IIMNIMOOMIN.A.IIIMOLO.*WMINNO~114.4117~~~~asear...... u. 3 TURN STORYSee "tutu colinna," UP STYLE-- A newspaper's style which calls ft* much capitalization. . .

TYPEBlocks of.metal or wood having raised glraracters WIIQII may be inked and reproduced URGENT--Press wire worpre-empting "Oul- by pressing against a sheet of paper. . Min."

, i. TYPE FAMILYGroup of type faces which are shailar though not exiwtly,alike,in design. V TYPE IIIGIIStandad height of all type and letterpress cuts (.9181. VARITYPERA coldtYpe corn using machine which allows proportional spacing for justifying, TYPE SERIES :Different siv.es of the same' type, and a choice of type'size and face. face. VERNIER SCALEA Smallmetal, plate TYPO--Slaxig.for a typographical error, attached to the press cam track that shows the subject-tocamera distance. TYPOGRIAPHY.7e-The arrangement. appearance, style, and characteristics of matter printed from VHF Very Iligh Frequency. type. VIDEOThe picture portion of a television

1 broadcast. U . VIDtO.TAPE A form of magnetic tape for recording pictures and sound which can be UHFUltra High Fregency. played back immediately, without processing. Also called VTR. ULTRA-VIOLETThe invisible region of the 441 electromagnetic spectrum ranging from about ii.111W CAMERA- -A camerawhich controls the 300 to 400 millimicrops. Even if invisible to the Skim, placem9nt and sharpness of an image eye it affects all phdtdgraphic emulsions and through adjustments and realignment; of lens causes additional, unexpected exposure in film: .and film planes. Besides, front and back controls, For instance, 'distant* scenes contain much ultra- -it has a long bellows draw °for close-up work. violet, even though theyappear clear to the eye, Because cif its adjustments it is generally used on and photbs of them appear as if taken in a fog 9r ,,a tripod with ground glass viewing. It is not haze. To correct' this condition, a filter (Usually convenient for news work and is chiefly a stqlo of a red or yellow color type) Which absorbs Or architectural camera. ultra-violet radiation is used.

UNDERLINES-- Sometimes usedsynonymously VIEWER Used in film editing in conjunction with !"outlines." with rewinds to view at any speed, and to mark where the film will'be cut. Enlarges the frame so UNIVERSAL DESKA copy desk at which all that the film can be seen and easily worked

copy,,.:txcept for such speciali0Mepartments as with. . o sports'ports and society, is handled. VIEWF1NDEV4 device mounted on a camera U.P.IUnited Press international is a news wire to indicate the part of a scene that will be agency which sells its services to subscribing recorded. news organizations. VIEWPOINTThe place from whicli`the picture .UPPER CASECaPital letters. is taken or viewed. Often used interchangeably

4133 487 4

JOURNALIST 3 & 2 lit WA* with "angle" although the latter usually*Plies WIC KET-A short two-line headline which runs a higher or lower thannor'inal viewpoint. to the left of a single line of larger headline type. The wicket should be smaller than half, the point VIGNE`rfr.A half-tone of an irregular shape size of the main head. bearing littlerelationto any objectinthe picture. A "soft vignette" gives the effect of WIDE ANGLE LENS-A lens of a shorter focal fading off into white ,space. Diqinguish from length than the standard lens,, used ;s.o getwore' "outline cut." area into the, picture. VIP-Very Important Person. WIDOWPrinter's term for a short word or pat t of a word standing along on the last line of a paragraph of body typo. WILD-A story that is "wild" may go on any inside page. WASII DRAWIN6-A brush -work illustration. Besides black and white it has varying shades of gray: .11alftonts, not line plates, are made from "WILD" RECORDIN-Sound or 'pictures them. taken not in conjunction with_ correspemding . sound or pictures. . WASHE11-011T-Term applied toa print or portions of a print with top much white or light WIRE FRAMEA viewfinder on a press camera details. that consists of a large wife frame- positioned directly above the lens and a smaller frame-type WATER SPOTS- -Defects on a negative `due to -eyepiece mounted on top. Used for action and

drops 'of water being allowed to stand on the sports photography. 1 L negative during drying. They are formed when the gelatin layer dries at a different rate around WIREptioro.A tel photo transmission the drop, and they are impossible to correct system. once they forth. To help prevent them, use i 'wetting solutions before drying and/or squeegee WITH STORY .:-.A "side story," usually giving negatives carefully so as not ;o leave sizeable sidelights on a bigger story, providing 4n "at -a- drops. 4 glance" summary, or telling another closely . . related story. WEAK-Cjglitor thinnegatives or parts of negatives. WORK PRINT-The first positive print mai* WEB PRESS -A large, rotary press that prints from the original camera negative. Used for from a continuous roll of Impel called a web.- preliminary screening and editing. The work print edited; the original negative is then WETTING AGENTA chemical added to water matched to the workprint. to reduce surkce teaSion and make it "welter." It helps reduce the formation of water spots in WORKUP A type of printing error caused when, drying negatives. spacing material and the:blank ends of linotype slugs "work up " to type height and thus print. W1-I1TES-The highlights of a print. WIt'APL-Tocontinue a story' from one columnto ,WHITE SPACES Blank space in ads, heads, etc., the next' (alivays to the right), under its main left,open to obtain better attention value. head or lead. Distingtiish from "turn."

1 458 424 Aptittntlix 1---(11.413SARY 10.1OramisMANtleneh1 Waa..INICFMNI aah(dabWala. ASLIFr1101 4

WRAP IN To fuse details from one story into 4 another, XEROX Trade name for equipment used in WRAP UPAn cditit)n is "wrapped up" when all Xerographic printing. copy has gone frontthe copy desk to the . composing room. A story is wrapped up when all the facts art in. 2 'es.00M'LliNSA variable focal length lens which WRONG FONT Type of one sizeor style optically enables a cameraman to obtain LS, MS, appearing erroneously with type of another size CU and the effect of dollying without changing or style. Abbreviation: W.F. camera position.

ti a 485489485 C

APPENDIX II

BIBLIOGRAPHY

This bibliographyis intended tot assist' stun hensive coverage at' what goOon around a copy dents who wish to °Wain additional journalism editing desk. information, beyond what, is covered in . this manual or taught at the Defense Information School: It represents only a small part of tie EDITORIAL WRITING hundreds of books about newspapers, magazine writing, general newswiiting, and other related Editorial Thinking and Writing,Chilton R. Bush, endeavors. Greenwood,1971; An illustrated 'text with Because of the subjective. :nature of Jour- exercises on editorial writing.' ,nalisin and other related areas, not. all of the books listed here will agree as to the same Style, methods, procedures, or techniques to be used GRAMMAR AND USAGE in writing a story, composing a photograph, laying out a newspaper, or preparing a radio/ The Elements of Style, William Strunk, Jr., and television script. When it appears that infor- E.B. White; Macmillan, New York, 1972: A mation in one text differs-or contradicts that in short 'book that gives principal requiretents for Mother, use your own good judgment and a good writing style brieflyand entertainingly. common sense,to determine which is the most applicable to you and the Navy. Words on Paper: A Manual of Prose Style, Roy Additional books can be found in Annotated H.Copperud; Hawthorn, New York, 1960: The Journalism Bibliography, by Warren C. Price and first section of this book is both lively reading Calder M. Pickett. The bibliography contains and lively writing, showing the good and bad more than 2,000 titles. ways of putting words on paper,and what makes the difference. The second part of the book is dictionary-structured with' hundreds of COPY EDITING brief comments on points of usage and style.

News Editing, Brice Westley; Houghton Mifflin, 'Boston, 1972: Discusses copy desk procedures on bothlargeand small newspapers.Itis LAYOUT AND MAKEUP A particularly strong on copy control. Modern Newspaper Degisn, Edmund C. old;, Creative News Editing, AlfredA. Crowell, Harper & Row, New York, 1969: Covering,body William C. BroWn Co., 1969: An introduction to type, headlines, pictures and othertypographic The techniques of navs editing. materials, the, book 'examines each component of good newspaper makeup, and then explains The Art of Editing., F.K. Baskette and J.Z. how these elements can be combined into Sissors, Macmillan, New York; 1971: A compre- attractive functional page designs.

SO 486 490

t!% Appendix 11-111111,10GIZAPIIY ..6611Wa1i66.4.649Will .04.wrosan wow+ ay. 1.1 ...W...... 1. "*.,.. 0 . 161...... ~E-i* Rdetlkifts.46ermftwoms. . ipt0t4 Parer, Edmund C. Aenold; Harper, New 7he Professional Journalist, Johniloltenberg; York 1963; A good foundation book of the Holt, New York, 1969: A guide. to modern ems graphieits beeense it touches all bases. Exf; .reporting. Iz gives thorough treatment to hp/esti- plains'thelanguage of the graphic arts and gitive and interpretative reporting. describes the mouhanics of setting type, copy fitting, proofreading, an) layout. t PHOTOJOURNALISM Creative News Photography, Rodney Fox and MAGAZINE AltTICI.1!: WRITING Robert Kerns; Iowa, StateUniversityPress, Ames, °Iowa,1961: A book of good news Spare-Tim Aria, Writing for Money, William pictures and how to use them most effectively. Led,.trer; .W.W. Norton, New York, 1954: Intended to help editors and photographers in Discusses the opportunities to break into print, their' efforts to'improve the pictorial contents of Methods Of finding subjects for articles, and their publications techniques of contacting editors. A former Navy public ..nformation officer, Lederer deals specifi- 'Photojournalism, Arthur Rothstein: American cally with thwriting opportunities of military Photographic Book Publishing Co., Inc., New, people. York,'1969: Includes the first full color photograph in tin cc dimensions which originally ran in Writing and Selling Feature Articles, Helen M. Look Magazine.. Over 200 news and feature Patterson: PrenticeHall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., photographs arc included. 1965: Offers complete information on finding ideas, various types of articles,planning an Press Photography, Robert B. Rhode and Floyd article, writing it, researching it, and getting it in H. McCall; Macmillan, New. York, ..1 961: A shape for possible sale. comprehensive , study of photojournalism. An excellenttextbookforthe', photojournalist which. discusses the history, equipMent, and NEWSWRITING techniques of pictorial journalism. Photographic techniques for various types of news stories are interpretative Reporting, Curtis D. MacDougall: suggested and illustrated. Macmillan, New York, 1972:One of the best textbooks on general reporting. Included are TotalPicture; Control,AndrasFeininger; discussions of the nature of newspaper work, Crown, New York, 1970: A very instruCtiOe and principles of newswriting, and handling special easy-to-understandbookonthepersonal, assignments. approach to photography. Analyzes every element of both the mechanical and artisticphases New Survey- of Journalism, George Fox Mott of the subject, and shows how some of the most . and 12 others; Barnes & Noble, Inc, New York, highly regarded professionals use, these controls.% 196; : A handy, complete reference for all facets of joignalism, from history to rewriting and Camera Journalism, A.E. Woolley; Barnes, South copy editing and on to -libel, advertising, and Brunswick, N.J., 1966: Tells how to take pic- circulation. Particularly useful to those wanting tures that report the news, how to sell them,the a guide on a specific area, such as sportswriting people to deal, with, and the publication for and reviewing. which a particular picture is best suited.

91 4°1/478 -4 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 NIMPerrimil4004.11womeaftammmor womomew eattern..eMm. mit rojan wevivommoso PUBLIC AFFAIRS Television and Radio, Chester (rand, Garnet R. awn, and Edgar Willis; Appletoh, New York, Effective Public Relations, Scott M. Cut lip and 1963: An introduction to radio and television Allen H. Center; PrenticeHall, Englewood Cliffs, that covers just about everything. N.J., 1971: A complete look at public relations fundamentals and practice. includes' a chapter on public relations in the Armed Forces.

SPORTSWRITING RADIO AND TELEVISION, modern sportstoi ring,Harry E. Heath, Jr: and Television and Radio News, Bob Siller; Ted Lou Gelfand; Iowa State University Press, Ames White, and Hal Terkel; Macmillan, New York, 'Iowa, 1969: An analysis of fundamentals of 15 196: A basic textbook covering both divisions ;major sports and how they should be covered by of broadcast journalimn. , a reporter. APPENDIX III

NAVY AIRCRAFT AND SHIPABBREVIATIONS

U.S. NAVY AIRCRAFT ABBREVIATIONS When an aircraft is modified from its original mission, a mission modification letter precedes All aircrafthave tri-service designations; a the basic mission symbol. These are as follows: given plane bears the same alpha-numeric identification symbol regardless' of whether the craft is A-- Attack M Missile carrier used by the Navy, Army, or Air Force. Each basic designator consists of a letter and a C,argo/trinsport (,)--Drone number. The letter specifies the basis mission of the aircraft as follows; 1) Director (for R - -,Reconnaisance control of drones)

A-Attack P Patrol Special electronic T Trainer installation Bomber R Reconnaissance B Search and rescue U Utility CCargo/transport S Antisubmarine KTanker V Staff Er-Special electronicT Trainer installation L Cold weather W Weather U Utility FFighter Thus, if the F-4A is modified to be used as a V VTOL or STOL training aircraft, itis identified thereafter as HHelicopter (vertical or short TF-4A. takeoff and land- Other letters that infrequently appearbefoie K--Tanker ing capability) a basic mission,or mission modificationletter are "special use" symbols that indicate the special Observation X Research statusof anaircraft.Currently, special-use 0 symbols are six in number:

The number (which may consist of 1, 2, or 3 digits) indicates the design number of the type GPermanently grounded (for ground training) of aircraft. The designator A-6 shows an aircraft to be the sixth attack design. If aparticular `. Specialtest, temporary (when tests are design is mch. fied, the design number is fol- complete, the craft will be restored toits lowed by another letter (A, B, C, etc.),the original design) alphabetical order of which identifies the number of the <, modification. For example,the N-Special test, permanent second A in A-6A tells us that the original design of this attack plane has been modified one tune. X Experimental stage of development a, 489 493 JOURNALIST 3 & 2 w ammo._ 21,1-1.4.1 "WA.. ..1.1...... ,...M1,...11.101101.41...allamac

Y Prototype (for desitm testing) OBSERVATION

eally stages of planning or development U 1 Bird Dog,

V/STOL CURRENT NAVY AIRCRAF OV-1 0 Bronco AV-8 !larder NITACK

A-3 Skywaror PATROL A-4 Skyhawk

AS Vigilante .P-2 Neptune A6 Intruder P-3 Orion A-7 Corsair II

ANTISUBMARINE CARGO TRANSPORT S-2 Tracker C-1 Trader S-3 Viking '02 Greyhound C-3 (Unnamed) C-4 Gulfstream I C-11 Gulfstream II TRAINERS 4 AIRBORNE EARLY WARNING T-1 Sea Star T-2 Buckeye E-1 Tracer 1-28 Trojan E-2 Hawkeye T-29. (Unnamed) 1-33 Shooting Star T-34 Mentor FIGHTERS 1-39 Sabreliner

F-4 Phantom II F-8 Crusader F-14 Tomcat UTF,ITY

U-I Otter HELICOPTERS U-6 Beaver U-11 Aztec H-1 Iroquois U-16 Albatross 11-2 Seasprite 11-3 Sea King H-34 Seahorse 11-4...... Sea Knight. RESEARCH H-53 Sea Stallion 11-57 Sea Ranger X-22 ..(Unnamed)* ApperuN III, -NAVY AIRCRAFT AND SIM'ABBRINIATIONS sotaKe1611~.11101106044MAIWAINOCO

1J.S. NAVY SHIP ABBki.N1Al IONS SSItN Fleet Ballistic Missile Submarine (nuclear WARS1.1128 propulsion) SSG Guided Missile Submarine Bli Battleship Patrol Ships: Cruisers: PG Patrol 'Gunboat CA Heavy Cruiser " CG Guided Missile Cruiser J (YIN Guided Missile Cruiser AMPHIBIOUS WARFARE SHIPS (nuclear propulsion) CLG Guided Missile Light Cruiser LCC Amphibious.Command Ship CC Command Ship ' LFR Inshore Fire Support Ship LHA Amphibious Assault Ship (general purpose) Aircraft Carriers: LKA Amphibious Cargo Ship LPA Amphibious Transport CV Aircraft Carrier LPD Amphibious Transport Dock CVA Attack Aricraft Carrier LPH Amphibious Assault Ship CVAN Attack Aircraft Carrier LPR Amphibious Transport (small) (nutlear propirlsion) LPSSt Amphibious' Transport CVS Antisubmarine Warfare Submarine Support Aircraft Carrier ISD Dock Landing Ship CVT Training Aircraft Carrier LST Tank Landing Ship

Destroyers: MINE WARFARE SHIPS

DD Destroyer MMC Minelayer, Coastal DDG Guided Missile Destroyer MMD Minelayer, Fast DL Frigate MSC Minesweeper, Coastal DLG Guided Missile Frigate (non-magnetic) DLGN Guided Missile Frigate MSO Minesweeper, Ocean (nuclear propulsion) (nonmagnetic) MSS Minesweeper, Special (deyice),,, Ocean Escorts:

I DE Escort Ship PATROL CRAFT DEG Guided Missile Escort Ship DER Radar Picket Escort Ship PCH Patrol Craft (hydrofoil) PGH Patrol Gunboat (hydrofoil)

PTF Fast Patrole Craft

1 Submarines: LANDING CRAFT

SS Submarine . Landing Craft, Assault SSN Submarine (nuclear LCA propulsion) LCM Landing Crag Mechanized 491 495 JOURNALIST 3 (..% 2 IlAroormk104111,61140.0.0 0186.0111NarimOmmoIr11me

LOT Landing Craft, Personnel, At;S Surveying Ship barge AGSS i Auxiliary Submarine I APR Landing Craft, Personnel; All llospital Ship Ramped AK . Cargo Ship 1.A 1 anding Craft, Utility AK)) Cargo Ship, Duck letiVP Landing Craft, Vehicle, AKR Vehicle Cargo Ship Personnel A() Oiler , LWT Amphibious Warping Tug AO} , Fast Combat Support Ship, AO( Gasoline Tanker AOR Replenishment Oiler ,) MINE, COUNTERMEASURES CRAFT AP...... Transport. APB Self-propelled Barracks Ship

MHA Minehunter, Auxiliary AR , Repair Ship MSA...... Minesweeper, Auxiliary ARB... _ .....Battle Damage Repair Ship MSB Minesweeping Boat ARC Cable Repairing Ship MSE) Minesweeper, Drone ARL Landing Craft Repair Ship MSI Minesweeper, ushore ARS Salvage Ship MSI. Mineiweeping Lunch ARSD .Salvage Lifting Ship MSM Minesweeper, River ARST Salvage Craft Tender (Converted LCM-6) ARVA Aircraft Repair Ship MSR Minesweeper, Iltrol (aircraft) ARVE Aircraft. Repair Ship (engine) ARVH Aircraft Repair Ship RIVERINE WARFARE CRAFT \ (helicopter) AS Submarine Tender ASPB Assault Support Patrol Boat ASR SUbmarine Rescue Ship ATC Armored Troop Carrier ATA... .. Auxiliary Ocean Tug CCB Command and Control Boat ATF 4 Fleet Ocean Tug MON Monitor ATS., . , Salvage Tug PBR River Patrol Boat AVM Guided Missile Ship PCF Patrol Craft, Inshore IX Unclassified Miscellaneous

AUXILIARY SHIPS SERVICE CRAFT AD Destroyer Tender ADG Degaussing Ship AFDB Large Auxiliary Floating Dry AE Ammunition Shipn Dock (non-self-propelled) AF Store Ship AFDL Small Auxiliary Floating Dry AFS Combat Store Ship Dock (non-self-propelled) AG Miscellaneous AFDM Medium Auxiliary Floating -AGDE Escort Research Ship Dry Dock (non-self- AGEH Hydrofoil Research Ship propelled) AGER Environmental Research Ship APL Bart-ricks Craft (non2self- AGF Miscellaneous Command Ship propelled) AGM .. ... Missile Range Instrumentation ARD Auxiliary Repair Dry Dock Ship (non-selkpropelled) AGM Major Communications Relay ARDM Medium Auxiliary Repair Dry Ship Dock (non-self-propelled) AGOR Oceanographic Research Ship NR Submersible Research Vehicle AGP Patrol Craft Tender (nuclea5 propulsion) 492 496 - :7 11 ABBREVIATIONS APPOIldiX 111 -NAVY AIRCRAFT AND SHIT MOW ...Or I ,...04re9 aer.a.roit. Mei.*.011Mvad.....,1... 0..n.~.614 ...A5031...... ,Aom ,

Salvage Lift Craft, NlVdium SST Target -and Training Sub- YNILC marine (self-propelled) (noTself-propelled) rime Craft (non-seitopropelled) X Submersible Craft (self- YNG YO ° Fuel Oil Barge(self-propelled) . propelled) YOG ,Gasoline Barge (self- VAG .. . Miscellaneous Auxiliary (self propelled) propelled) , Ye Open Lighter (noii-self- 'NG Iv Gasoline Barge (non-self- propelled) propelled) YC): Car Float (non-self-propelled). YON Fuel Oil Barge (non-self- propelled) YCV Aircraft Transportation Lighter (non-self-propelled) \'QS Oil Storage Wage (non- q I:loath% Crane (non -self self-propelled) propelled) YP Patrol Craft (self-propelled) 1 Floating Pile Driver (non-. c1 YDT Diving Tender (non-self- YPI) propelled) se:f-propelled) FlOating Workshop (non-' YF Covered Lighter (self- YR propelled) self-propelled) YFB Ferryboat or Launch (self-. YRB Repair and Berthing Barge propelled) ,(non-self-propelled) YFD Yard Floating Dry Dock YRBM . ..Repair, Berthing and Messing (non-self-propelled) Barge (non-self-propelled) YFN Covered Lighter (non-self- YRBM (L) Repair, Berthing and Messing , propelled) Barge (non-self-propelled) YFNB .Large Covered Lighter (non- (large) self-propelled) YRDU Floating Pry Dock Workshop ':4tFND Dry Dock Companion Craft (hull) (non-self-propelled) (non-self-propelled) YRDM Floating Dry Dock Workshop (ilachine) (non-self- YFNX Lighter (special purpose) 4 (non-self-propelled) propelled) Radiological Repair Barge YFP Floating Power Barge (non- YRR self-propelled) (fion-self-propelled) Salvage Craft Tender (non- YFR Refrigerated Covered Lighter YRST (self-propelled) self-propelled) Seaplane Wrecking Derrick YFRN Refrigerated Covered Lighter:. YSD (non - self-propelled) (self-propelled) YSR Sludge Removal Barge (non- YFRT...... Covered Lighter (range-tender) (self-propelled) self-propelled) Large Harbor Tug (self- YFU Harbor Utility Craft (self- YIB propelled) propelled), YG Garbage Lighter (self- YTL Small Harbor Tug (self- Propelled) propelled) aMedium Ilarbor Tug (self- YGN Garbage Lighter (non-self- YTM propelled) propelled) YHLC Salvage Lift Craft, Heavy YW Water Barge (self-propelled) (non-self-propeiied)°' YWN Water Barg (non-self- YM Dredge (self-propelled) propelled)

493497 , APPENDIX IV-

NAVY .RATING INSIGINIA BY GROUPS

All of the ratings in which Navymen work arcMany would be known in civilian lifeas "white described on the following pages. You will noticecollar jobs." You will also notice that the variety that these jobs are not all mechanical or technical.of these jobs is almost 'unlimited.

Gioup I Deck

Boatswain's TheNavy developsmany other tasks. Thesiiaster Seamen are the Mate (BM) master seamenpersons Boatswain's Mates of the Navy. skilled in all phases of In addition to performingvarious deck duties seamanship andin theaboard ship, these "anchormen" ofthe Navy handling of deck forcemaintain rigging, ground tackle, andcanvas personnel. They are thearticles. They supervise the operation andmain- masters of many trades,tenance of the ship's bolts, and the working and able \ to perform almostdamage control parties. They alsoserve as mem- any \task in connectionbers of the gun crew. Crossed anchors, with ' theoperation of An important qualification for Boatswain's small', boats, navigation,Mates is leadership. Boatswain's Matesmust be entering or leaving port,physically strong with good hearing and vision. storing cargo, handling ropes and lines, andThey should be average or above in general

C. 494 ..498 S. WNAVY W1).INC; INSIGNIA BY GROUPS It+011)...

learning ability and 1105SCSS ahigh degreo of Oeovationfi Hadar electronic manual dexterity. Aschool ettilySe, in Maetical Specialist i00) device to determine the arithmetic is doeirable, and opusesin algebra, presence and location of geometry, and phyMcsare° helpful, Previous objectis usedexten? experitmee in Yiaudling small boats lavaluabio. sively in navigation and maneuvering, in recogni- tionandidentification, and in searching for and The safety of shir, 'it Arrow-tiwough following the. movements , Quartermaster an oscillosepe. 'of other ships and air- (QM) sea depends to a groat extent on skillful naviga- craft. The responsibility tion,the vigilance with of Operations. Specialists which lookouts for enemy.,is to operate this equipmentand to interpret the . ships and aircraft, water inforatien received from it. traffic', and natural° ob- Operation's Specialists, operate, maintain, ,and it Stacles 'is maintained, and locate circuit failureS in surveillanceand altitude- determining radars1 identifjoation, friend orfoe Ship's wheel. the proficiency with which equip- signalsare exchanged (I FF) systems; electronic countermeasure ment' and radio telephone andassociated'equip- with other ships and the functions in the shore. The Quartermaster.performs or assists mcnt. They also perform control in the performance of these duties. Combat Information Center. He steers the ship and performsnavigation People in this rating shouldbe average or maintains naviga- above in general learning abilityand should be duties. He corrects charts and practical problems. They tion aids. TheQuartermaster stands watch as able to use numbers in the deck and to the must have good near vision,normal hearing, and assistant to the officer of a clear speakingvoice. Hadar duties require navigator. He also serves aspetty officer in alertness. Physics, charge of yard and district-typecraft. prolonged attention and mental Quartermasters should be Oweaverage in a good P.badkground in mathematics, andshop 'courses radio and electricity arehelpful. their ability to learn and tothink. They need good in radio repairfor, hamradio is vision and hearing, andshould be able to express Experience thetnselves Clearly inwriting and speaking. School valuable.. courses in publicspeaking, grammar, geometry, and physics are helpful. Sonar Technician The Navy =fit be able (ST) todeterminewhatis under the water as well as what is onthe surface Sigrialman (SM) The execution of main order to detectreefs neuvers at seadepends in uncharted waters,and upon rapid andaccurate .to discover the presence communications. The submarines, safety of ships depends to of enemy Earphones pierced surface .ships, or other a greatextent on the submerged objects. The watchfulness of lookouts° to an arrow. operationandcare of for enemy ships and air- sonar equipmentthat de- Crossed semaphore craft, and all types of of objects is the workof the sea craft andobstacles. tects the presence flags. Sonar Technician. These important duties provides underwater by Signal- The Sonar Technician are performed data for operational use,and supervises the use men who send andreceive messages byflashing equipment. He organizes flag hoist, perform asand upkeep of sonar. light, semaphore, and antisubmarine attackteams; evaluatestarget's.- lookout, and repair signalflags, pennants, and oceanographic data; evaluatesthe and interprets analyzes ensigns. Signalmen need good operation of sonarequipment; locates, Like Quartermasters, adjusts or repairsequipment casualties;and vision and hearing, andshould be able to express ship under - 'aligns, maintains,and repairs surface themElelves clearly in writingand speaking. School systems. courses in grammarand electiticity- arehelpful. water fire control 495 RAIHNALIST 3 & 2 tommoweintomirOPMNIMONIM.04014~1.41~01110.14.10.0, MION041111411~S~PWAIMPONSMINIMM1164N+.41140.01WOLIWaiiibmiammempmsfrpft.Imowww8400./alsogiumfwaftaimm,..

Sonar Technicians muSt have normal hearing, 16ectronie Warfare Techiiiciansoperate and near-normal and clear speaking voices. maintain electronie warfare equipment. They also They shculd alxwe overage in general learn- extract, interpret, and apply data from Intel- ing ability and in the ability to we amnia:11s inligenee pubVications, reports, and other docu- pradtical problems. They must also achieve a mentation. In addition they evaluate, interpret, 'satisfactory score on the Sonar Test, which and determine equipment capabilities 'and limi- measures the ability to differentiate between th:,) tations, and evaluate, interpret, 'process, and pitch of similar tones. School courses in alge4ra, apply intercepted signal data. They also inform geometry, physics, electricity, and shopwOrk are responsible officers concerning the nature of desirable. Experience as an amateur radio oper- threatsignalsand recommend appropriate ator is helpful. countermeasures.

Ocean systems Forcenturies the Electronic Warfare Technicians should have Technician (OT) great seas encircling thea background or be interested in electronics. earth guarded the secrets They should possess a. capability fqr detailed of their depths.Today and fine 'mechanical work, be above average in men have begun to ex-their ability to think clearly and rapidly and to plore these depths, usingsolve practical problems in aritlunetic. sensitive instruments. Ocean Systems Techni- A three-pronged clans perform special- Group 117 Ordnance spear (trident) 'izeddutiesconcerned .crossed by Naves. with the geography that deals- with the ocean "and its phenomena, with the charting of water bodies, and with the stufly of Gunner's Mate Navy ships equipped waters. (GM) with various guns have long beenprotectors Personnel selected for Ocean Systems Tech- against enemy aggres-; nicianrequire a special security 'clearance. sore.Navy'sGunner's These technicians conduct studies in oceano- Mates operate, maintain, graphic research and correlate this information and repairall gunnery for dissemination. equipment, as wellas Ocean Systems Technicians should be above handleallammunition averageinlearningability.They should be used on. Navy ships. The suited by temperament to detailed work and able Crossed guns. Gunner's Mateis the ex- to grasp new techniques. A past experience in pert on the Navy's nuclear electronics, physics,_ or electricity is helpful. weaponry. Gunner's Mates- operate, maintain, and re- . we pair ,guided missile launching syStems, rocket Electronic Warfare p The increased use oflaunchers, guns, gunmounts, turrets, projectors, Technician (EW) electronic warfare tech-and associated handling equipment: They make niques has been accom-detailed casualty analyses of, 'and repairs to, panied by a correspond- electrical, electronic, hydraulic, and mechanical ing increase in electronicsystems. They test and inspect ammunition and warfare equipment and anmissiles and their ordnance components, and associated increase in thetrain and supervise personnel in the handling 'n. complexity of this equip-and stowage of ammunition and missiles and ment. The growing reali- assigned ordnance equipment. Helium atom zation thatelectronic slashed by a warfare is the primary "Gunner's Mates should possess a high degree lightning bolt. Means to integrateallof aptitude for mechanical work. School training other weapons systems to inarithmetic, shop mathematics, electricity, counter immediate threats has placed this appli- physics, and shopwork provide a desirableedu- cation of electronicsinto sharp perspective. cational background. a a 496 500

a Appendix IV-NAVY RATING INSIGNIA BY MOM'S r lailaillimme4Wia V1011.01.11NOMENNallidldall11WISMINK 0.01.16611.1.04ANIMI11111101

O Piro Control Complicated elec-drawing, and in practical and shop mathematics Technician (FT) tronic,electrical,lir-7 are desirAle. Work experience in auto repair draulie, and 'mechanicalor .small parts assembly ftir,ilishes a helpful back- equipment in required to ground. compute and resolve the factors which influence theaccuracyof naval guided missiles, gunfire, Rangefinder. ; and underwater Weapons. Mineman (MN) Mine0 arc silent, un- Maintenance and repair seen sentries that main- of the equipment the tain defen6ive elm block- prime responsibility of skilled specialists--th'e ades, which once required Fire Control Technicians. whole fleets of surface In short, Fire Control Technicians maintain ships. Mines and depth and repair fire control systems,including fire charges, constructed and control radars, weapons direction systems, target Floating mine. operatedonthe same designation systems, and electrohydraulic lire principles, are offensive control servomechanisms. They makemechani- weapons of sea warfare. cal, .electrical, and electronic casualtyanalyses. Both kinds .of weapons have complicated firing Fire Control Technicians operate, ,test,lubri- mechanisms. Assembling, testing, repairing, and cate, inspect, align, clean, adjust,and calibrate planting these weapon.) are the Mineman's jobs. fire control components and systems. Fire Control Technicians should be interested Minemen phould possess a high deglee of in electronics, and possessan aptitude for fine, mechanical Aptitude. They should be interested detailed, mechanical work. Theyshould be above in performing jobs requiring carefulattention-to average in theirability to solvepractical problems flee details, and possess the requiredmanual. in arithmetic, and to learn andthink clearly and dexterity. School'courses in electricity, machine rapidly. They must have normal color percep-shop work, welding, mechanicaldrawing, and tion. School courses in radio,electricity, physics, practical and shop mathematics aredesirable, algebra, trigonometry,and shop are helpful.asiswork experience Involving lectricity*, Experience in amateur radlo.or practical experi- machine f6ols'and welding. ence in anymechanical or electrical trade is of value. Missile Technician The giaided missile is (MT) a self-propelled explo- Torpedoman's Torpedoes and depth sive weapon capable of Mate (TM) chargesareintri9ate seeking' a target or of mechanisms ofnaval following a beam to the warfare. 'The. effective- target. This is made pos- ness of these underwater sible by complex guid- weapons dependsupon ance and control systems theirpropermainte- Guided missile. within the missile. The nance, loading, and firing effectiveness of surface- by Torpedoman's Mates. launchedmissilesde- Torpedo. pends upon the skill of MissileTechnicians who mechanisms that A Torpedoman's Mate maintains,tests, re- test, maintain, and :repair the pairs, and overhauls torpedoesand antisubmarine guides and control the missiles. warfare ordnance (other than minesand anti- . . Missile Technicians assemble,test, align, submarine rockets). tune, adjust, replace andrepair internal com- Torpedoman's Mates should possess ahigh ponents and' systems of fleetballistic missiles (excluding the ,repair of themissile's internal degree of mechanical and electricalaptitudes. hydraulic pneu- dexterityand physical guidance package) and external Considerable manual matic systems associatedwith the missile's stamina are also essential.School courses in They operate, test, electricity, machine shop, welding,mechanical internal guidande and control. 497 501 1

JOURNALIST 3 81 2 %WAWA WIFIMIGNIPMbleallONWOOM11111,611 arsimpra

adjust, slip, tine, calibrate, and repair misAle Data Systeinu Naval warfare in this tat equipment. Theyhandle and stew missile Technician (DS) age, at atomic power and componenta, and maitain logs and equipment °ballisticManilasre- histories. quires quick,: fund correct e. onswers to complicated Missile Techniciane must poeueep a fine de- Mathematical problems. gree of mechanical aptitude. Manual dexterity is These answers are ob- ale° an essential requirement. School courses tained by the use of elec- inelectricity,electronics, mathematics, and Helium atom with tronic digital computers phymica are desirable. Experience in anymechan- input/output that accomplish in min- Ica', electrical, or electronics trade provides arrows, utes what 'a man might teheillifUl background. take days to do. The Data SystemtTechnician keeps this vital equipment in operation. Entrance to this rating is restricted to personnel eligible for security clearance, Data Systems Technicians maintainelectronic Croup IllElectronics digital data systems and equipment. They inspect,test,calibrate, and repair computers, video .processors, tape units, buffers, key sets, digital display equipment, data link terminal sets, and related equipment. Electronics All of the electronic Technician (ET) equipments usedinthe The Data Systems Technician should have an Navy to send and receive active interest in electronics, and an aptitude messages, detect enemy for detailed mechanical work, This technician f. planes and ships, and de- will need better than average ability to solve termine the distaece of practical arithmetic problems involving binary targets require coetinu- numbers, and must be capable of grasping the ous checking and repair- principles of digital data system operation.School ing.Electronics Tech- courses in pbyeics and shop training are valuable. niciaus are the personnel Experience in an electrical or electronic trade who take care of this is useful, Normal color perceptionla required, Helium, atom. equipment. and candidate, must be able to qualify for setnirity clearance, This care includes maintaining, repairing, calibrating, tuning, and adjusting all the elee- Ironic material used for communication, detection and tracking, recognition and identification, aids to navigation, and electronic eau/dermas- °Group Precision Equipment urea. The electronic material generally does not inoludd airborneequipment, weapon control equipment, interior communications systems, and Instrumentman (INI) The Navy uses lard teletypewritee machines. numbers of -meters and gauged, watches and Electronics Technicians should be interested clock., typewriters, add' 4n electronics and have as aptitude for fine, . ipeohineil, snd other detailed, mechanical work. They should enjoy 11 typeOf Office machines. solving practical problems in arithmetic. They To / maintain these -Mae must have normal color perception.School ohples In pod ;Vior.ldng courses in radio, electricity, physics, algebra, order requires tie serv- Htrigonometry and shop are lipftnl. Experience _ifielt_of.specialiste.Thess in amateur radio_ or practical experience in ,ipepialists are tthe Na*y any mechanical or electrical trade is ofvalue. Calipers. Instruntentraen, / . 498 502 Appendix IVNAVY HATING INSIGNIA HY GROUPS .161111191411PIRMeb*ill)01101~1d4b4tRi 11610WMANNIMMIIIIMININIMOIMAIN&INIIIMISUOI~OiNI

lnstvuln adjust, repa% and recondi- Briefly,Radiomen transmit, receive, lug, tion mechanical instruminits, offipe machines, route, tile, and maintain the security of mes- gauges, and watches. They -seij:-...wc1S in instru- sages. They advise responsible personnel on the"' ments, watches, and eloe:cs, ;mil they repair the capabilitieLi,limitations, and condition of the. mechanical parts of electrical iiistrtiments. equipment. They operatc typewriters and tele- Instrumentmen should plAsess a high degree typewriter§,andtune radio transmitters and of mchanical aptitude and have sufficientdex- receivers In addition, Radiomen perform oper- terity to do fine, ,detailed work. School coursesational an preventiVe maintenance on communi- in blenprint reading, shopwork, and typing are cation equipinent. helpful,Practical experiencd in watchmaking, Radiomen `should have good hearing, manual repairing typewriters, or other office machines dexterity and the ability to operate a typewriter is also an asset. while receiving messages by ear. The ability to type and experience an an amateur radio operator are helpful,as are school courtier in ., mathematics, physics, and electricity. c, Opticalman (OM) . Modern 'Marine navigation .ancl' aviation owe much of their efficiency to the use of scientifically Commtinications The secrets of a na- accurate optical instru- Technician (CT) tion are only as secure ments such as octants as itscommunication and sextants for naviga- system. Communications. Lenses crossed by gation, rangefinders, ,Techniciansperform lines of sight. gunnery, and binoculars specialized duties in con- and telescopes for magni- nection with communica- fication.Keeping these tions security. They also perform other communi- instruments in good ,working order is thejob of Crossed OM and the Opticalmen, who overhaul, repair,and adjust cation and special oper- spark. e.tionalfunctions. Per- the Navy's optical equipment. sonnel selected for Com- Opticalmen 'must be capable of close, exact, munications Technician must be eligiblefor a and painstaking workmanship, so thatthey may Top Secret clearance. become expert in the use of fine tools andinstru- Communications Technicians should be above ments. Their mechanical aptitude must,by the average in learningability:They must be temper- nature of their work, beibove average.Experi- amentally suited to detailed work, able to grasp manufacturing is help-new techniques, trustworthy,acrd of the highest ence in optical or camera typing,. office , ful,as are school 'courses inphysics, shop moral character. School courses in mathematics,.and machine shop. Machines, English, physics, and eleotrio!ty are. 8 recommended. Past experience as atelegrtpher, radio operator, industrialelectranicarepairmani Or clerk-typist is helpful. Linguisticability is also an asset. Group V Administrutive and Clerical Yeoman (YN) Communicationwith naval activities, govern- All naval actions re- mentagencies, private Radioman (RM) industry, and individuals quire teamwork, some- is necessary to conduct .times involving hundreds of individual units. One naval affairs.Letters, of the major factors in messages, andrecords the -success of an opera- Crossed quills. must be prepared to pro- tion is the accurate and cure and use the person - speedy transmission of nel and materialrequired radio messages. This isto operate the fleets,Navy Yeomen perform these FoUr sparks. the job of the Radioman..office duties. 499

503 S. /131q1A LIST 3 & 2 ismouseemosem mat tYeomen perforin clerical, administrative, and Postal Clerks must have the ability to deal secretarial duties ashore and afloat. They operate successfully with naval personnel of all ranks duplicating and audio-recording equipment, They and rates. They should be above average in :landle administrative duties in connection with patience, courtesy, and perception, They must

officers and their records. be able to' work harnxoniously. with others in Yeomen should be able to ,perform detailed their organization. School courses in English, and repetitive duties and work harmoniously with typewriting, geography, and arithmetic are help- others in an office organization, Clerical experience and courses in English and in business Postal Clerks operate Navy post offices, subjects are helpful. perform postal counter work, process -*mac and maintain directories and postal equipment. They prepare add file correspondence.

.Personnelmis (PN), 0 Personnelmen per- IN form enlisted personnel administrative Data Processing Like any large corn- ( Theycounselenlisted Technician (DP) mercial enterprise,' the personnel on Navy rat- Navy has an extensive ings, training promotion accoupting system. Com- requirements,education- plete records are mains Crossed manual al opportunities, and the tained for every naval and quill. benefits and advallages person, for every ship of a Naty career. They and station, and for every °' also conduct tests and Quill on gear. pieceof equipment the interviews,, maintain publications and directives, Navy owns. To keep rec- regarding enlisted personnel administration, con- ords 'up to date, to en- duct organizational analyses studies, andper-sure their accuracy, and to make the tabulated form clerical duties related to personnel, information immediately available inany form ministration. / which may be desired, the Navy makesuse, of a Personnehnen must have the ability to deal,wide range of data processing equipment. Data successfully with people. They, should be above Processing Technicians are the personnelwho average in their, ability to learn and to think, operate and maintain this equipment. and should possess a high degree of clerical aptitude: Desirable school courses are type- These technicians set up and operate all types writing,public speaking, and office practice.of electrical and electronic dataprocessing Experience in personnelwork, guidance and equipment for accounting and statisticalpurposes; counseling, or teaching is helpful. they record and process incoming data, andmake routine and special reports. Data Processing Technicians shouldpossess a high degree of clerical aptitude and be interested Foetal Clerk (PC) An efficient Navy in mechanical work. School course's in typing; postal service is vital to bbokkeeping, accounting, and operating business the, smooth functiOning of machines are valuable assets. . the national defense forces.Not only must official mail be delivered promptly to thecom- Storekeeper (SK) Navy ships and shore Postal cancellation manding officerscon- stations require a supply mark. cerned, but the personal of clothing, spare: Wee. mailofNavymen and technical items; and other officers the link with essentials. Providing and their loved ones.:- must beequally dependable, accounting for these miss. or morale suffers. The Navypostal organization ' terials are the mairire provides every service thatcivilian post office's sponsibilities . of the provide. Crossed keys. Storekeeper. 500 04 INSIGNIA BY GROUPS Appendix. 1.V- -NAVY RATING ,arNmIllawfMa

Disbursing Clerk The construction, Ti e Storekeeper performsclerical and manual maintenance, and opera in the supplydepartments., both afloat (Die) duties stowage, tion ofocean and air and tiShorb; to the procurement, fleets have put the Navy preservation, packaging, andissuance of supplies aviation equipage, supplies, into business on a scale of all kinds (except .comparable with the and materials). Storekeepers must be able towrite.or print largest civilian industrial numbers neatly and accu-.. enterprises. The Navy's legibly and to record payrollisone of die rattly. l!elpful school coursesare typewriting, Key on check. 'general largest iu the world, and bookkeeping,accounting,arithmetic, the Navy is a proportion- business, and Englieh.A knowledge of office the world'A -goods. machines and experience'in bookkeeping, stockately large consumer. of clerical work arehelpful. Regular servicing of this payroll,financial trans- work, or general actions ('invuivedin procuring materialsand services, selling surplusmaterials, and the related accounting functionsrequire a large staff Legalman tLM) The Navy has always of accountants,bookkeepers, cashiers, and clerks. .. These workers includeNavy Disbursing Clerks. had a need forpeople clerical duties who are trained as court Disbursing Clerks perform reporters- and as spe- relative to militart payrecords, payroll Certifi- cialists in legal admin-cation' sheets, moneylista,public vouchers, and transportation requests, mealtickets, allotments, Mill rind crossed istration, assistance, allowances, saving deposits,and. returns- in the by a quill. investigation. ° 1 disbursing branch of supplydepartments. oz able to write -legal duties by Disbursing Clerks must be The Legalman performs pars legibly and to recordfigures neatly. They should providing ,and administeringlegal services to practical These services includebe able to usenumbers in"solving other Navy personnel". problems. School coursesin typing, bookkeeping, matters concerned withmilitary justice, claims, arithnietic,' and office 'prac- To perform theseservices, accounting, business and admiralty law. proceed- tice are desirable.Ekperience as a bookkeeper, the Legalman`records and transcribes clerk-typist, office machineoperator, or cashier ings of courts-martial,courts of inquiry,investi- gations, and militarycominissiotts. Lye also pre- is helpful. ezeres and P bra!to legal recordsand reports, and provides legal performs legal researcb, Commissaryman z, Navy, :Idtchens share advice and assistance, (CS) . largely fin \the responsi- A Legalman must havethe ability to trans- bility f6r maintainingthe rapidly and accurately. cribe court proceedings I. health an morale ofNavy Re must be fluent in theEnglish language, be a personnel.The galleys careful listener, andhave critical readinghabits. arc operatedbyCoinknis- sarymen responsiblefor menus and thecare of Steward(SD) Those who purchase, food supplies; forbaking, prepare, and servethe Crossed keys with kir quill beneath. broiling, and frying; food for thewardrooms mixing,seasoning, and (officers'messes) are flavoring; and forother Stewards. They are contributing towardwhole- skilled cooks andbakersculinary preparations of the some, satisfyingmeals. and the custodians Commissarymen serve ascooks andbakeis officers' quarters. afloat, and ashore.They Open hook with Stewards should have for the general mess crossed quill and write menus, preparefood, and assistin the wheat spike on top. an interestin food prep- items. Theymaintain cleanli- aration and possesshigh ordering of food and in the food standards of honestyand ness and sanitationin .the galley service and refrigeratedspaces roomsand while School -courses isarith- prepared. They alsokeen cost iserFonal cleanliness.experience in cookingor the food is being metic, and previous accounts: baking are helpful. 501 505

a JOURNALIST 3 & 2 a `010211WOMMINMMIMMPEINE Naturally, Commissarymen should have an subjectsthrough such media as newspapers, interest in food preparation. They must be ableperiodicals, television, and radio. They assist to understand' "and apply instructions relating to information officers and commanding officers in the stowage, issue, and preparation of food, and public relations matters. They sometimesassume havehigh standards of hiinesty and personalfull-time duties as editor and/or staff members cleanliness. Experience or school courses in food of ship and station publications. preparation,. dietetics,and record keeping is Journalists must have the ability to write helpful. articles clearly, accurately, and quickly, and to compose pictures.Fluency with the English languageisimportant,Journalists should be careful observers, attentive listeners, havea Ship's Serviceman Wherever Navy per-wide acquaintance, possess initiative, imagina- (SH) sonnel may be, afloat ortion, and regular, critical reading habits. School ashore, they can obtaincourses in English, journalism, and typing are theservicesand com- advantageous.Previous writing experience is modities available in helpful. , civilian life from hay- ingtheirhaircut,to getting their shoei re- Crossed key and paired, topurchasing Group VIMis'ellaneous quill. soap and razor blades, to buying iceeream and gifts. Those who render these services are the Ship's Servicemen. ' Lithographer (LI) The Navy's presses Ship's Servicemen operate and manage ship's reproduce thousandsof stores, commissary stores, and Navy exchanges. printed items: recruiting They specialize in Such services as barber, Posters and career: coun- cobbler, laundryman, and tailor. selingaids,manuals, Ship's Servicemen should posiess aptitudes training materials, naval appropriate for the specialty selected. Voda- forms, bulletins, maga- tional or high school courses in shoe repairing, Crossed litho zines,and newspapers. barbering, tailoring, merchandising, salesman- crayon holder and The pressing of this ship, accounting, bookkeeping, business arith- scraper. into pritift form is the rnetio, and business English are helpful. previous work of the Lithographer. work experience in any of these, work areas is The Lithographer performs all functions con- of value. cerned with offset lithographic work and letterpress printing. Lithographers:" have an interest in photography and printing, and should be able to Journalist' (JO) The Journalist plays work with machinery and chemicals. They need animportantpartin good near-vision.Experience inlithography, maintaininghighNavy printing, or photography is valuable. morale through the dissemination of news and- by keeping the general public informed about the Illustrator- Accurateandcleat Crossed quill and developments, accom- Draftstiian (DM) mechanical° drawings, scroll. plishments, and policies . blueprints, charts, and il- of the Navy. This is done lustrations are essential through ship and station newspapers, photography, alas in the planning and bulletins, pamphlets; news releases, and tele- completing of construc- vision and radio scripts. tionProjectsand for The Navy's Journalists prepare Material for othernavalpurposes. hometown newspapers. They perform news re- Skilled Illustrator - porting, copy reading, editing, and related func- A compass on a Draftsmen develop and tions for the dissemination of stories on naval triangle. produce these aids. 502. 506 Appendix NNAVY BATING INSIGNIABY GROUPS "?-19110161, Voill Illustrator-Draftsmen dorlign and prepare ii null Maintenance Technicians fabricate, in- . stall, and repair petal structures.They install lustrationsfor presentation andreproduction. charts, graphs, and and maintain shipboard and shorebaseplumbing They produce signs, posters, perform tasks related training aids. Theyreproduce art copy"by the and piping systems, and and reducing draw- to damage control. silkeoreen method, enlarging Hull Maintenance Techniciansshould have an ings. These professionalsalso prepare, correct, electrical, electronic, aptitude for mechanical work and possesssuch edit, und, file mechanical, lay out, and personality traitsas self-reliance, ingenuity, t.tam4/ machine drawings, and cut, and poise, in time of danger.School courses such mount photographs. / Illustrator-Draftsmen should becapable ofas machine sop, carpentry,sheet metal shop, practical and shop mathematics, andchemistry neat, close, andcareful work, and possess an interestin design andconstruction. Previous are desirable., experience as draftsmen,tracers, or as surveyors is valuable. Skill infreehand drawing or lettering Machinist's Mate Continuous operation is helpfUl. -School coursesin art, mechanical (MM) of the many engines, com- drawing, and blueprint,reading are a good back- pressors, and gears; re- frigerating, air-condi- ground. tioning, and gas-operating equipment; and other ofmachinery a- Musician (MU) Music is an important types part of life in theNavy. board modern Navy yes- As membersofNavy Three-bladed sels and at various shore bandsandorchestras, propeller. stations depends upon the Musicians provide enter- skill of specially trained tainment in every cornertechnicians. Machinist'sMates are the techni- of the world. TheU. S. cians responsible for theoperation, maintenance, Navy Band at Washington,and repair of this machinery. aboard carriers, orat In particular,Machinist's Mates operate, steam-propulston Lyre. training stations,,are ex-"maintain, and repair the ship's -amples of Navy musicaland auxiliary equipment,the outside machinery, organizations. and the ship's refrigeratingand air-conditioning become Musicians inequipment. Applicants who wish to aptitude for the Navy must exhibitproficiency on standard band Machinist's Mates should possess instruments. Thisproficiency iswork of a mechanical nature.School courses in or orchestra musical experience.practical or shop mathematics,machine shop, e3termined by the applicant's deeirable. Experi- As a general rule, threeor four yearsof in-electricity, and physics are strumental music in highschool are sufficientence in a garage, powerplant, or machine shop to qualify talentedpersonnel. is valuable. Engineman (EN) The internal-combus- Group VIIEngineering and Hull tion engine, eitherdiesel or gasoline,plays an important role inpowering Hull Maintenance On Navyships and the ships and smallcrag Technician (HT) stations, where somuch of the Navy. Theseen- is constructed ofmetal, gins must beproperly there is a needfor the and repair of ships''hulls, maintainbd, repaired, A gear. operated. The workof the fittings, piping systems, Navy Enginemancenters and machinery.Contin- of thi's around these jobs. ued maintenance Enginemen should have aliking for engines intricate equipment, as A backgroundin shop well as the preservationand things mechanical. mathematics is safety courses and inpractical or shop of a Navy vessel's desirable. Courses inalgebra, geometry,and Crossed fire ax and and survival equipment the job of theHull physics are helpful. Experience in autorepair maul with a car- is is valuable. penters square. Maintenance Technician. 603 507 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Gas Urbino S'ySteins %Orates and performs Boilermakers test, maintain, and repairma- Technician(US) organizational and inter- rine boilers arid heat exchangers, and perform, mediate maintenance on electric arc and oxyacetylene weldinga welding gas turbine, engines; main *blowpipe that uses ox,gen and acetylene. Insignia under propulsion machinery (in- Upon completion of the recruit training period, development. cluding gears,shafting, candidates for Boilermaker must first strike in and controllable pitch pro- the Boiler Technician rating as described above. pellers); assigned auxil- Boilermaker is the only rating in the Navy that iary systems; electrical dues not have pay grade E-4 and E -5. A man and electronic circuitry up to the printed circuit must serve as Boiler Technician Third and Second modules;and alarm and warning circuitry. before he is eligible to become a Boilermaker. Boiler 'Technicians 'who show unusual skill and Machinery The replacement ofaptitude in boiler repair are transferred to the Repairman (MR) pE6ts and the repair of Boilermaker school 'where they develop addi- machinery on shipboard tional- technical skills in the Boilermaker field. and ashore are done lathe Navy'smachine shops. Machinery Repairmen do Electrician's Mate Electricitykeepsa this work and operate the (EM) ship or shore station op- Micrometer and shops, usingprecision erating. Without this .0 gear. power, ships . and 'shore machines and hand tools. stations would be seri- Applicants for Machinery Repairmen should ously hampered. The op- possess a high aptitude for work of a mechanical eration 'and repair of a nature. School courses or experience in practical ship's or station's elec- or shop mathematics, machine shop, electricity,Globe of the world. trical power plant and foundry, mechanical,drawing; and blueprint read-. electrical equipment-are ing are desirable. the responsibility of the Electrician's Mates. In emergency situations, Boiler Technician The propelling agentlarge naval vessels have been the sources of (BT) of our large naval shims .electrical power for several coastal cities. is steam. The efficient Electrician's Mates maintain and repair power operation,maintenance, and lighting circuits, distribution switchboards, andrepairofmarine boilers are essential forgenerators, motors, and other electrical equip- the effective production ment. Hero's, boiler. For those desiring to become Electrielaa's of steam power. Mates, previous electrical experience isin Boiler Technicians operate and repair marine valuable. School coursesinelectrical shop, boilers and fireroom machinery. They also trans- practical or shop mathematics, and physics are fer, test, and take inventory of fuels and water. helpful. Boiler Technicians should be interested in mechanical work. The skillful use of hand...Le:war- driven, and pneumatic tools is required. Training_ Interior . Communications sys- in school shop courses, practical and shop Communications tems throughout a Navy mathematics, and other courses in the physical Electrician (IC) ship maink a vital contri- sciences is desirable. bution to her operating efficiency. The operation Boilermaker (BR) When marine boilers and repair of the elec- and heat exchangers re- ... ironies devices used in quire major repair or the ship's interiorcorn overhaul, it: is the Boiler- inunicatioru3 systeins,. maker who is called on A phone over a public addrees *Weals, to6;3thework.The globe. electronicmegaphones, Boilermaker is a trained andether announcing Hero's boiler repairmanwhomain- equipment are the re-: crossed with a tains the equipment thatsponsibility of the Interior Communications Tech- wrench. keeps the Navy afloat.nician. These technicians maintain ind repair 504

503 Appendix IVNAVY HATINGINSIGNIA BY GROUPS shipboard interiorcommunications and gyro- Group $1111 Construction (Seabees) compass systems. The Navy's construction ratings have an Interior CommunicationsElectricians should for electrical work. Normal unusual history. When WorldWarn began, the possess an aptitude Navy, had no construction ratings, had neverhad color perception is necessary.A valuable back- World War I when a small ground would include coursesin electrical shopany, in fact, since of an electrical nature.construction regiment wasformed only to be and experience in work decommissioned after the war.Since contractors and their civilian employees werenot permitted, under military law, to workin combat zones, construction force Patternmaker (PM) Foundriesatnaval the Navy had to create a shipyards and on repairwithin its own service.Several months after Pearl Harbor the Navy formedthree naval ships produce castings of "Seabees" a specializednature. Theconstruction battalions, and the name Patternmaker is the im-derives from the initials ofthe term "con- portant link between thestruction battalion." From ahandful of men, the Seabees grew into ateam of over a quarter draftsmen who make the skilled construction Wooden jack plane. drawings and the found-of a million trained and rymen whoproduce theworkers who went whereverthe fighting forces castings,The Pattern-went in the Pacific. Herethey established beach- the foundrymen use heads, cut roads,builtairstrips, found and maker makes patterns, which developed water, and builtshelters. Worldwide, to form molds formaking castings. In addition, advance bases.. Their Patternmakers make wooden,plaster, and metalthey built more than 400 Molders in a Navyprimary job was to build,but they could not patterns, which are used by build until they controlledthe building site, For foundry. this reason all Seabees weretrained in defensive and be able to docombat tactics and theirmotto was "We build Patternrnakers should like 'we fight." It was a Seabeeteam member who exacting; precise work.School courses in wood- the Medal of mechanical drawing, andshop was thefirst Navyman to win shop, foundry, in assem- Honor in Vietnam. are useful.Experience in carpentry or In 1946, a year after the war,the Seabees, bling model airplanes isbeneficial. originally establishedonly as an emergency wartime force, weremade a permanent part of the Navy. Today theSeabees are as busy as ever, buildingAntarctic bases, performingthe Molder (ML) upkeep of completedbases, going any place . Many ofthemetal parts used in the repairwhere there is work to bedone. of ships, guns, andother equipment are machined in Navy shops fromrough castings. It is thejob of Builder (BU) Advanced base oper- Crossed bench Molders to make rough ations require the con- rammer and stove castings when they are structionofbuildings, tool. needed. docks,underwaterin- stallations, bridges, Moders operate foundriesaboard ship and trestles, and similar pro - and at shore stations.They make molds, cores, Carpenter's square jects.Builderserect, rig flasks; and theyprepare, heat,and pour maintain, and repairsuch nonferrous, and alloymetals en a plumb bob or castings of ferrous, weight. structures. and plastics, and thenclean the castings: School courses incarpentry and shopmathe- Applicants for the ratingof Molder should for those wishingto become with hand and powertools.matics are desirable /have a desire to work Builders. Experiencewith the hand andpower be physicallystrong. The completion experience in the / and should machine tools used inconstruction and of such school coursesas foundry, building trades areof value. shop, and practicalmathematics isdesirable. 505

509 JOUNALIST 3 2

Engineering Aid "That'swherethe The Steclworkbr plans, supervises, andper- (EA) airstrip will be. The road forms tasks related to the fabrication, erection, will be out through those and dismantling of metal and metal-girded struc- trees. And down there, tures. He cuts, forms, brazes, and welds ferrous near the water we located, and nonferrous metals and sheetmetal, and in- we'llbuildthehead- stalls sheetmetal ducts and reinforcing steel. . quarters." From this beginning, the Navy's Engi- Physical strength, stamina, and the ability Level rod with neering Aids Start their and willingness to work aloft are essential qual- measuring scale work so the engineers itiesforthis occupation. School courses in to front. will have data for de- sheetmetal, machine shop, and foundry are de;- . , v elop i ii gconstruction sirable. Any kind of experience in construction plans. Engineering Aidswork is an asset. perform tasks in surveying, engineering, drawing, planning, estimating, and materials testing. Engineering Aids should be well grounded in mathematics. They should have the ability to C:onetruction Maintaining automo- visualize, and they should like detailed, accurate Mechanic (CM) tive and heavy construc- work. Experience in highway construction is of tion equipment inefficient advantage. School courses in the higher mathe- operating condition re- matics as well as mechanical drawing and drafting .. quires the skillsof are helpful. trained technicians. Con- struction Mechanics per- Equipment form these tasks on diesel Operator (EO) The Navy uses large, Wrench on nut. andgasolineinternal- self-poweredequipment combustion engines. inits construction, repair, salvage, and exca- Construction Mechanics should be average vation work. The bull- or above average in mechanical aptitude. School dozer is an example ofcourses in electrical shop, machine shop, shop this type of equipment. mathematics, and physics are helpful, Previous Equipment Operators, as work as a machinist, millwright, or auto mechanic the name implies, oper- is advantageous. A bulldozer. atenot only bulldozers but all types of Navy con - struction equipment. Equipment Operators should have average or above average physical strength, normal color Otilitiesman (UT) Water,light,heat, perception, and an aptitude for things that are powergenerating,and mechanical. They should enjoy working on large sewage disposal equip-' construction projents. School courses in auto or ment must be provided electrical shop are helpful, as is experience in for at advance bases and construction work and automotive repair. at large continental shore bases established by the Steelworker (SW) The pieces of struc- A valve. Navy. Among the first tural steel that form the arrivals at a new base are frames of naval hangars, the Utilitiesmenwho install, Operate, maintain, radiotowers,stowage and repair thesefacilities. tanks,pontoons,dry- docks, bridges, and other structures must be It is helpful to those applicants who wish to Beam suspended hoisted into place, bolted become Utilitiesmen to have school or apprentice from a hook. together temporarily, trainingin plumbing, mathematics, andother brought totheir exact related technical fields. Experience in stationary angle and adjustment, and then riveted together steam, diesel engineering, watersupply systems, solidly. This is the primary job of the Steelworker. or sanitary engineering isvaluable.

506

r 510 Appendix 1VNAVY RATING INSIGNIA 13?GROUPS VIIMENNIParemilMmqammayalseememalltIoNsiffileplOSIIIallame

Construction Advancebasesre- Aviation Modern Navy aircraft Electrician (CE) quire the construction of Ordnanceman (AO) have increased the range roads,barracks,air- of naval weapons from a fields, hospitals, shops, few miles to hundreds of andwarehouses.Con- miles. They carry guns, struction Electricians bombs, torpedoes, rock- are . responsible for all ets and missiles to attack the electrical work es- the enemy olA sea, SpArk superimposed sential to the establish- Flaming, spherical under the sea, n the air, ment andoperation of shell, winged. and on the l .One spe- on a telephone ible for the pole. these bases. .Thisin- cialist respo cludes electrical gener-perfect working order of armame t on Navy ating and distributing systems; interior, over- planes is the Aviation Ordnancemen. head, and underground wiring systems; andwire Aviation Ordnancemen should posss a high communications systems. aptitude for both mechanical and matmatical work. School courses in algebra, physics, and Naturally, Construction Electricians shouldelectricity are of value, as is experience in have an interest in and aptitude for workof an electrical or mechanicalrepair Work. electrical. nature. 'SchOol courses in electricity, shop mathematics, and physics arehelpful. Ex- perience as electric power or telephonelineman is valuable asis general experience in the Aviation Modern naval aircraft construction trades. Electronics operativefrom carriers, Technician (AT) cruisers-, or land bases depend upon radio, radar, and other electronic devices for rapidcommuni- cations, efficient naviga- Group DCAviation tion,controlled landing approaches, the detection Helium atom, of and guidance to enemy winged:ty or other objectives,and the redaction of the ef- Aviation The AviationMa- fectivenessof enemy equipment and, tactics. ohinist's Mate will most Aviation Electronics Technicians areresponsible Machinist's Mate of this equipment. -(AD) likely be assigned to bil- for the operating 'condition lets concerned with the maintenance of turbojet Applicants must haim normalhearing and aircraft engines and as-color perception. School coursesin algebra, sociated equipment, or totrigonometry, physics,electricity, radio, and . any one ofthe several mechanics are desirable.Expdilence in the elec- types of aircraft main- trical trades is helpful. Two - bladed prop, tenance' activities. This winged. rating maintains, services,adjusts, and re- places aircraft engines andaccessories. They also perform the dutiesof flight' engineers. Aviation Fire The firing of guns on Control Technician Navy combat planes is (AQ) controlledby complex Applicants 'for this rating should possess a equipment. Aviation Fire high aptitude for mechanicalwork. They may Control Technicians keep volunteer for flight duty, and, ifselected, they this equipment in °per.... must pass the physical examinationlorAircrew- algebra, geometry, ma- stingcondition through man. School courses in Rangefinder, systematicmaintenance chirse shop, automobile, oraircraft engines are and repair. valuable. winged. 607

511 JOURNALIST 3 & 2

Personnel selected for this occupation should Aviation . Aviationl Maintenance.. possess superior electronic, electrical, and me-, Maintenance Administrationmen per- ohanloal aptitudes in order to learn and perform Administrationman for m administrative, the intricate operations necessary to maintain (AZ) management, and clerical and 'repair fire control equipment. Training and duties. The vastness of experience in repair, vocational shops or schools, the aviation branch of the and mathematics are desiraj Navy requires such epe- ciali3ts as the AZ to implement and support the Aviation The Navy's antisub- aircraftmaintenance

Antisubmarine marine warfare effort re- Two- bladed prop program. , Warfare Technician lies on naval aviation as on book, winged. (AX) well as ,on surface and Applicants should be submarineforces. The able to perform detailed AviationAntisubmarine and repetitive duties and to work harmoniously Warfare Technician is an with others in an office or organization. important member of this 4111. 41111. team, keeping airborne electronics systems and equipment functioning duringantisubmarine warfare operations. En- Aircrew Survival Parachutesarethe Sparked &ITN/ trance to this rating is Equipmentman (PR) lifesaving equipment of piercing water, restrictedto personnel aircraft- crewmen when winged. eligiblefor a security they have to bail out. In clearance. time of disaster, a para- Applicants for Aviation Antisubmarine War- chute may be the only fare Technician!, should have an aptitude for means of delivering badly electricsi and mechanical work. They must have needed medicines, food, normal color perception and above normal hear- Parachete, winged. and other supplies to iso- ing acuity. School courses in algebra, trigo-. lated victims. The Navy's nometry, physics, electricity, and mechanics are Aircrew Survival 'Equip- desirable. Experience in electrical and electronic nientmen have the job of keeping parachutes and trades is helpful. otheraviation survival equipment in perfect working condition. These men should be able to perform careful Aviation AviationAntisubma- and accurate work. School courses in general Antisubmarine rine Warfare Operatorsshop and sewing are desirable. Experience in Warfare Operator adjust' and operate air- the use and repair of sewing machines is helpful. (AW) craft antisubmarine warfare systems and equipment. They perform as flight crew members to extract, interpret, classify, and apply data ob- Aerographer's Weatherpredictions tained from intisubmi-- Mate (AG) are vital. to the safe and rinewarfaresensors. efficient operation, of the Atom pierced by Entrance to this rating Navy's aircraft, surf** spark, winged. is restricted to person- ships, and land rinatilla- nel eligible for a security done. The weatherman of clearance. the Navy la the Aero- Applicants' for this rating must be physically grapherte, Matean ob- and psychologically adapted forflight.They server, forecaster, and should also have a background in electrical Circle on vertical .dlitributor 'ofaccurate and mechanical work. arrow, winged. weather information. L 512508 Appendix IVNAVY RATING INSIGNIA BY GROUPS alMallaa

° Aerographer's Mates shouldybe above aver- Aviation The maze of electri- age in their ability to use numbers in practicalElectrician's Mate cal mechanisms and con- problems. Sohool courses in algebra, trigonom- (Al:) necting wiring in modern ,etry, physics, physiography, and typewriting are aircraft requires expert helpf61. Training or experience, in meteorology, care. Aviation Electri- astronomy, or the physical sciences is valuable. cian's Metes keep, this equipmentin operating condition. Applicants should en- Globe, winged. joy and have an aptitude for electrical work. School courses in higher Air Controlman The safe, orderly, andmathematics and electrical shop are helpful. (AC) speedy flow of air traffic Experience in aircraft electrical work and auto- is essential for the suc-motive electrical work is valuable. cess of naval air operations.Air Controlmen provideassistanceto naval pilotsinlandingAviation Structural Aircraft wings, fuse- . and taking off. Mechanic (AM) lage,tail, control sur- Microphone, faces, landing gear, and winged. AirControlmen attending mechanisms should possess such require maintenance and traits. as accuracy, pre- repair. Aviation Struc- cision, self-reliance, and tural Mechanics perform stress. Excellent vision and a thisjob,working with- calmness under and well-modulatedvoice are essential.. A school Crossed mauls, metals, alloys, course in publicspeaking or experience in radio winged. plastics. , broadcasting ib ul Desirable school courses forapplicants to* this rating are sbopviork in metal andwood- working, algebra, plane geometry, andphysics. Experience in aircraft manufacturing, automo- work is lc.) bile body work, and general mechanical helpful. L./\ Aviationj Thelargescalede- keeper (AK) velopment of naval aviation brought with it the attendant problem of sup- Aviation Support Aviation Support ply. The various types of Equipment Equipment Technicians naval aircraft, with their Technician (AS) perform'er for m' intermediate levelmaintenance on specialized parts, equip- "yellow" equipment at ment,andsupplies, naval air stations and a- brought about a need for board aircraft carriers. personnel especially They maintain gasoline Crossed keys, trained in this field. The and diesel engines; hy- winged. Aviation Storekeeper has met this need. draulicandpneumatic Crossed maul and systems; liquid,'gaseous spark, winged. oxygen, and nitrogen systems; gas tiirbine com- Aviation Storekeepersshould be able to use pressor units; andeleo- numbers in practical problems.School courses business arithmetic, trios' systems, in bookkeeping, accounting, are desirable. These techniciansshould be &iage or above typewriting and office practice in their ability to use numbers inpractical prob- -Experienoe in typing,office work, or .ware- a in shop work, indpractical housing is valuable.. lems. School course 509 513., JOURNALIST 3 8p.2

and shop mathematics are desirable, as is ex- Photographer's Mates should have normal perience in metalemith work or automotive re- color perception and should be average or above pair. intheir' abilityto use numbers in practical problems. Personnel selected for duty as aerial 4 photographers must meet the physical require- Tradevnum (TD) The training of Navy ments for aviation duty. School courses in physics personnel requires vari-and chemistry are desirable.° Experience in ous types of training aids photography as a hobby or as a jobs is helpful. and trainingdevices (tradev) to' simulate OP actual operating conditions. The success of this phase of the Navy train - Photographic There is a need for Spark passing ing program depends upon Intelligenceman theavailability of pre- through a gear .,..- how well Tradevmen (PT) cise and detailed intel- maintain this equipment ligence information cov- and how well they teach ering all aspects of tar- others to use it. get areas in nations which Tradevmen should be above average in their may become enemieof ability to use numbers in practical problems. the United States, The A clear, well-modulated voice with no speech collection and presents defects or pr ) nounced accent is necessary. School Stereoscopic viewer tion of this information coursesI mathematics, physics, electricity, superimposed on requires the special and shopork are desirable, Experience as anlens pierced by light skills of the Photegraphic lines. instructor, demonstrator, or .motion.picture op- Intelligenoeman./,' erator is valuable. Personnel for this rating should have, normal Aviation Launching naval air-.vision and color perception and should be above Boatswain's Mate craft quickly and safely average in their ability to use numbers in prac- (AB) from ships or land re-tical problems. School courses in mathematics quires deft handling onand mechanical drawing aredesirable. Experi- thepart of the groundence in, photography as a hobby or as a Jobis crew or deck force,Avi- valuable. ation Boatswain's Mates

t. take part in these oper- Crossed anchors, idiom and in the handling winged. of planes prior to take-Group X Medical off and after landing, Aviation Boatswain's Matesmutthave 20/20 vision uncorrected, normal color perception, and good hearing, School courses in shopwork, Hospital Corpsman Much of the credit for physics, and chemistry are desirable.Experi- (NM) the good health of Navy ence in handling small boats, planes,and hoisting "personnel is due to the . equipmentAs valuable. work of HospitalCorps- men, They are the Navy's Photographer's Navalactivitiesin pharmacists, medical Mate (PH) , peace and warare vis- technicians, and first-aid ually recorded by motion Men, pictures and still camera Hospital Corpsmen photographs.. These pic- should possess pleasing torial records of histori- The winged staff of 'dispositions and a desire cal and newsworthy Hermes, the Greek to help those in needof fit vents aboard ship and at mythological god of medical attention. They science. His staff 'ashouldbehigh **hod Lens pierced by shore stations are made S.chool light lines. by Photographer's Mates. called a caduceus. graduates. 510. 514 Appendix IVNAVY RATING INSIGNIA BY GROUPS

courses in hygiene, biology,physiology, chemistry, and public speaking are helpful.Experience in such first-aid groups as theRed Cross or Scouts, work experience in hospitals ordrug store pharmacies, and. school or community experience in leadership are alsohelpful.

Gioup XIDental

Dental Technician Inthe Navy, asin (DT) civilian life, health is an important factor toward p romoting job efficiency. Proper care 'of the teeth is a part of the total health picture. The Dental Technicianassistki the Therletter "D" on DentalOfficer the winged staff of Hermes. Applicantsforthis rating, which is open to women,must have completed two years ofhigh school or the equivalent. School coursesinphysiologyohyglene, and chemistry are helpful.Dental or medical experience is, of course, valuable. 1

511 /INDEX

A Blueprint, 285-292 Border and essential areas, 333 Abbreviations, Navy, 499-493 Broadcasting, 313 ABC's of journalism, 60 AM, 313 accuracy, 60 i FM, 313 attribution, 60 Broadcasting, educational radio and brel;rity, 60 television, 314 clarity, 61 Broadcasting law, 319 coherence, 61 Brochures, 250-252 emphasis, 61 rifle approach, 252 , objectivity, 61 shotgun approach, 250 unity, 61 Abstract, 230 Accident story, 91-96 C Advancement, 6-12 active duty requirements, 6 Camera, 190-209 how to qualify, 6 Calculation for exposure, 169 inactive duty requirements 7 Civil War, 420-422 NAVTRA 10062,10 first admiral, 420 PNA factor, 8 Classes of news ptorieso 56-69 preparing for advancement, 8 feature, 66, 76-84 publications, other, 11 hard news, 66 Quals Manual, 8 society, 59 Record of Practical Factors, 9 sports, 66 training films, 12 Classified matter, 406 Advance stories, 97-99 Clearance and review, 115 Advance Stories, Followups,.and Rewrites, Color photography, 187 . 97-106 Common preparations for AFRT funding, 352 processing, 174-176 AM broadcasting, 313 developing rollfilm, 175-176 American forces radio and television Community relations, 353-366 service, 849-352 Community Relations Program, 353-856 American Revolution, 412-414 compiling an using information, 354 Audio visual production sextrice, 351 influence of morale on, 364 'informing the community, 355 types of, 356 Components for magazine articles, 111-114 Basic Newswriting, 53-75 body, 114 Basic photography, 157-159 conclusion, 114 Basle photojournalism, 210-234 lead, 114

Between World Wars, 425 . title, 111 incidents with Japan, 426 Contact printing, 178-186 Naval aviation, 426 Copy editing, 117-141 Bibliography, 486-488 procedure i for, 117-118 5162 INDEX

Copy editing guidelines, 118-141 Darkroom techniquescontinued abbreviations, 130-132 stop baths, 173 capitalization, 129-130 water wash, 174 contradictions, 123 Defense Information School, 351 . copyediting messaee and teletype Developing rollfilm, 175 -176 news, 136 f -Development of public affairs, 13-22 editorializing, 123 Divisions of Office V. Information, 24-26 errors in sentence structure, 136-141 administrative services, 26 incompleteness, 124 community relations,. 24 names, 125 01 field services, 26 numbers, 126 Naval reserve and training, 24 military terms, 132-134 Navy internal relations activity, 26 punctuation, 127-129 production services, 26 religious terms, 134-136 program coordination and program spelling, 125 planning, 24 style, 123 ,public information, 24 Copy editing procedures, 117-118 preparing rough, 118 E rules, 118 symbols, 118 Editing teletype news, 136 Copyright, 147-149 Editorials, 244L249 fair use, 149 Armed forces newspaper guide, 249 infringement, 148 ',meetingsdeadliffes for, 249. obtaining copyright, 149 soUrces of, 248 published works, 148 types of, 247 unpublished works, 148 Educational broadcasting, radio and use of Government publications, 148 television, 314 Coverage planning, 213-220 Elements of news, 63-66 equipment readiness, 219 conflict, 54 identification, 215 consequence, 54 self-confidence, 219 emotion, 64 shooting script, 215 immediacy, 53 Creating good pictures. 220-229 oddity, 54 action, 229 progress, 05 balance, 227 prominence,_56 compositional lines, 227 proximity, 54 depth, perception, 228 o. sex, 64 point of ,interest, 221 suspense, 55 I simplicity, 221 Equipment, office, 402 Cruise books, 253 Exhibits, 357-360 Cutline preparation, 269-274 setting up, 357 components, 270 types of, 357 datelines; 274 .Exposure calculation, 159 gathering material, 269 controlling light, 161 laying out, 273 determining light intensity, 016,6 typography, 272 determining shutter speed, 165 film speed, 160 photographic filters; 170

Darkroom techniques, 171-172 r clearing bath, 174 developers, 173 Family gramA, 249 fixers, 173 _ Feature photos, 213 miscellaneous chemicals, 174 Feature, speech, sports, and accident photofinishing chemicals, 174 stories, 76-96 processing exposed filni, 173 Feature story, 76-84

613 : 517 JOURNALIST 3 &, 2

Federal Communications Commission , Interviewing techniques continued (FCC), 312 symposium, 49 FHTNC, 367 telephone, 43 Film, 16mm, 943-348 Introduction to Photography, 167-189 editing, 343 splicing, 343 Finding a market, 115 Flag, 903 Journalism ABC's, 60 Fleet home town news center, 367 home town stories, 372 K processing material, 367 roster story, 372 Korean Conflict, 492 unit hold files, 973 FM broadcasting, 313 L Followup stories, 99 Forwarding photos to NPC, 234 Letter of transmittal, 374 Letteipress, 276 Libel, 142-147 0 defenses against, 146 Gathering an disieminating Navy how committed, 143 news, 39-52 kinds of, 144 Glossary, 441-485 libel and the law, 146 Guest cruises, 363 responsibility for, 143 Guidelines for copy editing, 118-141 Libel, Right of Privacy, and Copyright, 142-149 H M Headline preparation, 260-269 fitting, 263 Magazine article components, 111-114 forms, 269 Magazine articles, types of, 108.110 fimetinns, 260 confession, 108 ° nomenclature, 261. featurettes, 110 style, 261 - interview, 109 variants, 263 narrative, 109 writing, 266 personalexperience, 108 History and mission of AFRTS, -849 yersonality sketch, 108 History of military photojournalism, utility, 109 210-212 Magazines, types of, 106-107 enlistedAotojournalism course, 212 Makeup, newspaper design, 292-300 Hometown topics, 375 -377. Masthead, SOS sHome town news, 367-383 Media relations, 36-38 Home town news photos; 377 exclusive stories, 37 submisdion of, 978 information kits, 98 queries from, 36 visits, 37' Media, types of, 30-36 Internal Public Affairs Publications, Messages, 388-393 236-259 format, 392 Interviewer, 929 presrels, 393 Interviewing., 328 Methods for photographic printing, Interviewing techniques, 42-46 176-187 0 casual, 43 Methodsof gathering' news, conference, news, 49 interviews, 42' , news interview, 42 ''observation, 41 personality, 43 research, 42 prepared question, 43 telephone conversations, 41 INDEX od,~0,1**1154,4.1014,11....mlat.0.161140.4.4-atteetaMOISMIWW.04

IN1 nui2ographi printing, 281 News, types of, 56 Mission. and Organization of Navy-Public J created, 66 Affairs, 13-29 t elements,63-55 developmentoil 13-22 spot, 66 information under-intelligence, 20 Newsfilm, 336-340 internal relations, 22 shooting script, 335 international relations, timing, 335 iniFsion nf, Newspaper and wire service operations, Navy news bureau, 20. 150-uve office of information, 23 Newspaper design, 286-301 putdic affairs, 22 blueprint, 285 -292 public affairs in the field, 26 - constants, 307 pablio affairs officer, 22 flag, 303 puniii,° affairs organization, 23-29 headlines, 303 layout, 301 publics- affairs terminolou, 21 . makeug,492-X10 misthead,IV3 N nameplatir,V3 page, personality, 807 pictures, 305 Nameplate, SO:i proofreading, 808 NAVIRA 100526.10 417420 irules and dashes, 306 Navy between 1815 and 1860, k whites" grays, blacks, 305 first steam warship, 418' Newspaper organization, 150-164 gunnery, 419 ,itisiress department, 160-162 Naval aoadethy, 418 , . advertising, 160 strides in navigation, 419 , . bookkeeping, 162 world trade, 418 circulation, 151 Navy aircraft an ship abbreviations, promotion, 161 489-493 editorial department, 162-164 NaVy directives system, 393 cable and telegraph editor, 152 purpose of, 393 city editor, 163 types of, 3E)3 copy editor, 163 Navy policy, 319 editor-in-chief, 162 Navy radio and television outlets,662 494-611 managing editor, 162 Navy rating insignia by groups, morgue, 154 Networks, 316-319 , nt.ws editor, 162 administration, 318 other editors, 164 broadcast station relations, 818 Newspapers, ship and.station 235-249 engineering, 318 news, 318 / 0 programming, 317 _Office equipment and supplies, 402 radio and television station p aventive maintenancefor, 403 organization, 317 use of official vehicles, 403 sales, 318 News, sources of, 39 Offfeeof information, 24 -28 contacts, special, 40 Official correspondence, 386-388 disseminating, 46 business form, 3$8 future file, 40 naval form, 385-388 messagest directives, and official Offset lithography, 278-281 correspondence, 39 direct image, 278 phOto-offset,279-281 News gathering, 41 Organization of AFRTS, 349 News story styles, 64-75 AFRTS Los Angeles, 360 body, 74 AFRTS Washington, 351 idge, 72714 AVPS, 860 inverted pyramid, 64 broadcast industry cooperation, 851 lead, novelty and feature. 66-71 616. 519 Oft

JOURNALIST 3 & 2 IMMININIIMI10 "411MIII*

Organization, publib affairs, 2329 Public affairs, development ofcontinued Outlining magazine articles, 111 terminology, 21 market analySis, 111 World War I plan of development, 111 Public affairs files, 394

possible markets, 111 . -Public affairs files, 394-400 purpose, 111 alibi, 999 sources, 111 clippings, 399, p community relations, 397 correspondence and memos, 297-399 PA office reference library, 401 forCes and services, 397 Personal responsibility for PR, 29 future, 397 . Photographic coverage, 213 matters pending, 397 Photographic printing.tnethods, 176-187 media relations, 396 contact printing, 178 news release lag, 400 print drying, 186 . photographic, 399 printing paper, 177 .project, 397 projection printing, 180 speech, 997 washing prints, 185 public affairs office, 384-411 Photography, basic, 157 -159 Public affairs personnel, 29 . Photography, good pictures, 2207229 Public affairs terminology, 21 basic photography, lb'? -159 Punctuation, 127-1.29 exposure calculations, 159-111 shutter speed determining, 165 Photo journalism history, 210-212 Picture story, 229 Quals Manual, 8 abstract, 230 Quasi War with France, 414 illustrated text, 230 informal portrait, 231 R. picture 'story within text, 230 . picture-text combination, 230 Radio and television programming, 319 pure picture story, 230 Reedrd of practipal-fectors, 9 single picture, 230 Releases, types.of news, 46-62 PNA factor, 8 adverted), 51 Preparation of cutline, 269-274 background briefings, 52 Preparing radio material, 321-332 feature, 61 basic elements of, 321 'interView, 62 beeper phone reports, 324 newsconferences,51 copy format, 322 , personal appearances, 52 news bulletins, 324 Resea.:ching, 110 radio newswriting, 822 Review and clearance,415 techniques, 321 Rewriting, 99-106 Preparing television materiel, 333-948 combining stories, 102 Printing, layout, and makeup, 276-910 " emphasis shifting, 102 -105 Printing methods for photography, 176 -187 improVing copy, 99-102 Processing rollfilm, 174-176 localizing, 102 production department, 154 . transforming reports, 102 Programming, radio and TV, 319\- Right of Privacy, 147 Proofreading, newspaper, 308 Rights and copyrights, 115 Public affairs, development of, 13-22 Civil War, 16 - `: S office of public relations, 21 Scanning essential and border areas, organization, 23-29 333 PAO, 19 Scapower, 429 personnel, 29 Berlin airlift, 432 Spanish-American War, 16 China's, 490 INDEX .11101046M.1111=11MMI

3eapbwer co ktinued Steam warship, 418 Greece'ci, 431 Still photos, 334 Iran and Turkey's, 430 Storage, 331 sixth fleet, 4S: Subject classification system, 394 Spain's, 432 Supplies, office, 402 Sea services reporter; 382 Security, 403-409 application of 403 T categories of classified information, 405 classification marking, 407 disposal and destruction, 410 Tape editing, 330 documents, 407 Tape handling, 331 language of, 404 Tape recorded interviews and greetings, preparation for transmittal, 409 . F'.'8-382 safeguarding classified matter, 405 body of, 380' stowage, 410 equipment for, 379 transmission of classified matter, 40i: preparing for, 380 Security and classification, 234 selecting an interview location, 380 Ship and station newspapers, 235-249 special effects for, 381 choosing name, 240 submitting for, 381 civilian enterprise newspapers, 239 Technical requirements, 233 funds, sources of, 239 Techniques for darkroom, 171-172 news, sources of, 244 Techniques, interviewing, 42-46 organizing staff, 240-242 spot news announcements, 51 paper's mission, 236 Television spot announcements,'339 policy of paper, 237 tr..;tion picture film, 339 size, frequency, and format, 237-239 scripting newsfilm, 337 what to publish, 243 slides 340 Shutter speed determinition, 165 title cares, 339 Sketch of U.S. Naval history (1775-1973), Ter..ninology used in public affairs, 21 412-440 The camera, 190-209 Sound-on-film interviews, 340 basic still cameras, 190 audio, 340 Leica 36MM, 1.92-199 interview techniques, 342 Mamiya CS, 199-206 video, 342 Rolleiflex 2 1/4 twin-lensreflex, Spanish-American War, 422 206-209 Special events, 356-362 The electronic media, 311-320 casual visits and tours, 362 The media, 30-38 open hoUse, 381 The Navy Journalist, 1-12 Policy, $56 advancement, 5-12 ship visits, 362 major responsibilities and function, 1 Special programs, 363 military requirements, 2 Speech story, 84-88. personal traits, 3 Splicing, 330 types. of billets, 4 Sports story, 88-91 Topics for hometowners, 375-377r' advance, 89 Training films, 12 after action report, 89 Transmittal letter, 374 sources for, 90 Tranismittal, preparation for, 409 `writing tips, 89 Twentieth-Century Navy, 423 Spot announcements, 324 Types of magazine articles, 108-110 format and preparation, 327 Types of magazines, 106-107 information spot, 326 association-produced, 107 selling spot, 326 general circulation, 106 spot writing techniques, 324 house organs, 106 timing the spot, 326 service-oriented periodicals, 107 Spot news photos, 213 trade journals, 106

517 521 JOURNALIST 3&2

Types of media, 30 -36 Vietnam involvementperiod continued home town news center, 31i Formosa, 433 internal publications, 33-35 Gulf of Tonkin, 435 magazines, 33 in-country Vietnam, 436 miscellaneous, 35 operation sea orbit, 435 newsfilms, 31 personnel oriented changes, 438 newspapers, 31 scientific and technological. press associations, 32 develTnents, 438 radio, 30 television, 30 Types of news releases, 46-62 Typography, 282-284 ornaments and borders, 284 War of 1812,416 printers' -measurements, 282 War with 'tripoli, 415 type classification, 282 Welcomeiaboard brochures, 252 Wire service operation, 155-156 V local press associations, 156 Wr4frig for magazines, 106-116 Vietnam involvement period: 19541973, Writing headlines and outlines, 260-274 433-440 NV/arid War I, 424 Cuban missile crisis, 434 World War II, 425

518 . 522